BERKiiSY 

U3RARY 

un«  f mm  of 

CMIPOfcNIA 


CLASSICAL    WORKS 


LATIN  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Harness's  Introductory  Latin  Book  intended  as  an  Elementary 
Drill-Book  on  the  Inflections  and  Principles  of  the  Language. 

Latin  Grammar,  for  Schools  and  Colleges.    Revised 

Edition 

Elements  of  Latin  Grammar,  for  Schools. 

Latin  Beader,  with  References,  Suggestions,  Notes, 

and  Vocabulary. 

Practical  Introductian  to  Latin  Composition,  for 

Schools  and  Colleges.  Part  I.  Elementary  Exercises,  intended 
as  a  Companion  to  the  Reader.  Part  II.  Latin  Syntax.  Tart 
III.  Elements  of  Latin  Style,  with  special  Reference  to  Idioins 
and  Synonynics.    (Just  published.) 

' Caesar's  Commentaries  on  tho  Gallic  War,  with 

Notes,  Dictionary,  Life  of  Caesar,  Map  of  Gaul,  Plans  of  Bat- 
tles, etc. 

Cicero's  Ssbst  Orations,  with  Notes,  etc. 


Arnold's  Pint  and  Sec  and  Latin  Bsok  and  Prastical  Gram- 
mar.* Revised  and  corrected.  By  J.  A.  Spenceu,  D.  D.  12mo. 
359  pages. 

Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Pro3e  Composi- 
tion.* Revised  and  corrected.  By  J.  A.  Si>_nceii,  D.  D.  12mo. 
356  pages. 

Cornelius  Nep03,*  with  Questions  and  Answers,  and  an  Imitative 
Exercise  on  each  Chapter.  With  Notes  by  E.  A.  Johnson,  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin  in  University  of  New  York.  New  edition,  en- 
larged, with  a  Lexicon,  Historical  and  Geographical  Index,  etc. 
12nio.    350  pages. 

Beza's  latin  Version  of  the  New  Testament.  l2mo.  291  pages. 

Cscsar's  Commentaries  on  tlie  Gallio  War.  With  English 
Notes,  Critical  and  Explanatory;  a  Lexicon,  Geographical  and 
Historical  Indexes,  and  a  Map  of  Gaul.  By  J.  A.  Spencer,  D.  D. 

12mo.    408  pages. 

Cicero's  Select  Orations.  With  Notes  for  the  use  of  Schools  and 
Colleges.  By  E.  A.  Johnson,  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  Univer- 
sity of  New  York.    12mo.    459  pages. 

Cicero  de  Officiis.  With  English  Notes,  most'y  translated  from 
Zump  and  Bonncll.  By  Thomas  A.  Thachee,  of  Yale  Col.ege. 
12mo.    194  pages. 


STANDARD  CLASSICAL  WOIiKS. 


Horace,  Tho  Works  of.  With  English  Notos,  for  tho  uso  of 
Schools?  and  Colleges.  By  J.  L.  Lincoln,  Professor  of  Latin 
Language  and  Literature  in  Brown  University.  12mo.  575  pages. 

Livy,  Selection*  from  the  first  Ave  books,  together  with  the  twen- 
ty-first and  twenty-second  book*  entire.  With  a  rian  of  Korao, 
and  a  Map  of  the  Passage  oi  Hannibal,  and  English  Notes  f<;r 
the  use  of  Schools.  By  J.  L.  Lincoln,  Prof,  of  the  Latin  Lan- 
guage and  Literature  in  Brown  University.    12mo.    3i."9  pages. 

Quintus  Curtiu.3 :  Life  tad  Exploits  of  Alexander  the  Great. 
Edited  and  illustrated  with  English  Notes,  by  William  QSXSX 
Crosby,    ttmo,    335  pages. 

Sclli3t'j  Jngarthi  and  Catilira.  With  Notes  and  a  Vocabu- 
lary.   By  Butler  and  Stueouo.     12ino.    3!)7  pa 

It  is  believed  tliat  lhi«*  will  be  fonud  superior  to  any  edition 
heretofore  published  In  this  country. 

The  Histories  of  Tacit 'J3.  With  Notes  for  College*.  By  W.  3. 
Tiler,  Professor  of  Latin  and  Greek  in  AnihciBt  College. 
12ino.    453  pa^es. 

Tacitua's  Germania  and  Agricola.  With  Notes  for  Colleges. 
By  W.  S.  TlXKB.     12mo.     Iff)  pages. 

Virgi  '8  JEneid.*    With  Explanatory  Notes.    By  Henry  Frieze, 
Professor  of  Latin  in  the  State  University  of  Michigan.    (Ilc- 
cently  published.)    12mo.    51)8  pages. 
The  type  is  unusinil'y  large  and  di-tinct.    The  work  contains 

eighty-five  t-iiiM-a vine's,  which  delineate  tiie  usages,  customs,  weap- 
ons, arts,  and  nntliolouy  of  the  undents,  with  a  vividness  that  can 

be  attained  only  by  pictoiial  i.lustraticns. 


GREEK  TEXT-BOCKS. 

A  First  Greek  Book*  and  Introductory  Header.  By  A. 
IIai.kness.  Ph.  D.,  author  of  "Arnold's  First  Latin  Book.*' 
"Second  Latin  Book,"  etc.  (Recently  pub'.ishod.)  12mo. 
27Gpa.es. 

Act3  of 'tho  Ap03tle3,  according  to  tho  text  of  Augustus  Haun. 
With  Notes  and  a  Lexicon  by  Joun  J.  Owen,  B.D.,  LL.  D. 
With  Map.     12mo. 

Arnold's  First  Greek  Eook,*  on  tho  Plan  of  tho  First  Latin 
Book.    ltao.    IB?  pages) 

Arnold's  Practical  Introduction  to  Greek  Froso  Composi- 
tion.*   i2mo.    2i>7  pages, 

Cecond  Part  to  tho  above.*    l2mo.    248  pages. 


p9~  SEE  END  OF  THIS  VOLUMB. 


PRACTICAL    INTRODUCTION 


TO 


LATIN  PKOSE  COMPOSITION 

/ 


4> 


MAS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,   M.  A. 

EECTOB   OP   LYNDON, 
/kNU    LATE    FELLOW   OF   TBINITY   COLLEGE,    CAJUBUJDOE. 


CAREFULLY    REVISED    AND    CORRECTED 

BY    REV.   J.    A.    SPENCER,   A.M. 


THIRTIETH    AMERICAN  EDITION 


NEW  YORK: 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY, 

549    &    551    BROADWAY. 

JOHN  sTprcll 

Gvil  &  Mechanical  Engineer. 

SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 


fcD'JCASIQS  himS 

Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  y«af  lr?4«,  by 

D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the   District  Court  of   the  United    States  for  the 

Southern  District  of  New  York. 


I:  dU, 


Add  to  Ltb* 
GIFT 


PA  20*7 

Ak*a 
me 


EXPLANATION  OF  ABBREVIATIONS,  &o, 


I).,  G.,  H.,  K..,  R.,  Z.,  stand  respectively  for  DSdeneui,  Grottftrul,  llabkU. 
KrQgv*   ftamsfiorn,  and  Zumpt. 

N  unierals  above  the  line  refer  to  the  liable  of  Differences ;  if  followed  by  a 
.uive.  to  the  Cautions. 

An  accent  after  a  word,  thus  (parent*)  shows  it  to  be  somewhat  em-photic. 

Words  printed  in  italics  in  the  Exercises  are  meant  to  call  attention  to  some- 
tiling  that  has  been  said  respecting  them,  or  to  some  point  which  should  be 
carefully  attended  to  in  connection  with  them. 

Two  or  more  words  connected  together  by  hyphens  show  that  ihey  arc  to  I* 
translated  into  Latin  by  one  word;  as  "branchcs-of-learuing,"  doetrinan  "uu- 
'.lambly- skilled,"  peritiauiinwt,  &c. 


131 


PRACTICAL    INTRODUCTION 


TO 


LATIN  PKOSE  COMPOSITION 


4* 


AS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,   M.  A. 

BECTOn   OP   LYNDON, 
A^1L>    LATE    FELLOW   OF   TBINITY   COLLEGE,    CAMBBJDOE. 


CAREFULLY    REVISED    AND    CORRECTED 

BY    REV.   J.    A.    SPENCER,   A.M 


THIRTIETH    AMERICAN  EDITION 


NEW  YOEK: 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY, 

549    &    551    BROADWAY. 

JOHN  S.  PRELL 

Civil  &  Mechanical  Engineer. 

SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 


)cd:jca$iqk  himS 

Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  y*arf  l»4ti,  by 

D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of   the  United    States  for  the 

Southern  District  of  New  York. 


IsdLuL 


Add  to  Lit, 
GIFT 


Afc**a 

L 


Jlt^Z^J^ 


KXPLANATION  OF  ABBREVIATIONS,  &e. 


I).,  G.,  H.,  K..,  R.,  Z.,  stand  respectively  for  Dodencin,  Grrotefend,  Ilabicht. 
Kr'jgc*   Ra7ns!wrn)  and  Zumpt. 

Numerals  above  the  line  refer  to  the  Table  of  Differences ;  if  followed  by  a 
Alive,  to  the  Cautions. 

An  accent  after  a  word,  thus  (parent')  shows  it  to  be  somewhat  ewphatic. 

Words  printed  in  italics  in  the  Exercises  are  meant  to  call  attention  to  some- 
thing that  has  been  said  respecting  them,  or  to  some  point  which  should  be 
iiarefully  attended  to  in  connection  with  them. 

Two  or  more  words  connected  together  by  hyphens  show  that  ihey  are  to  be 
intubated  into  Latin  by  one  word;  aa  "branehcb-of-learning,"  doctrinai',  "uu- 
:t,i  nil »ly-  skilled,"  pcritisidmu^  &c. 


131 


PREFACE 


Tue  present  volume  contains  the  First  Part  of  Mr.  Arnold's 
Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Compositicn  ;  the  introduc- 
tory portion  of  the  Second  Part  (as  published  by  the  Author)  on 
the  Order  of  Words  in  Latin ;  and  nearly  all  the  Longer  Latin 
Exercises,  Part  I.,  a  work  which  was  published  separately,  but 
intended  to  follow  immediately  in  order  the  use  of  the  First  Part 
of  the  Prose  Composition. 

This  arrangement  was  adopted  for  the  purpose  of  embracing 
as  much  valuable  matter  as  possible  within  the  compass  of  a  rea- 
sonably sized  volume.  The  First  Part  is  complete  in  itself,  and, 
so  far  as  it  goes,  admirably  fulfils  the  design  of  the  author ;  yet, 
as  the  Exercises  consist  of  single,  short,  and  unconnected  sen- 
tences, it  was  deemed  advisable  to  introduce  other  and  longer  Ex- 
ercises, in  which  the  student  should  be  taught  practically  how  to 
arrange  his  ideas  in  passages  of  considerable  length,  and  in  which 
are  involved  most  of  the  minutiae  and  intricacies  of  the  Latin 
idiom.  For  this  purpose  Part  II.  of  the  present  volume  is  most 
excellently  adapted.  The  work  on  the  Latin  Particles,  which 
was  published  by  the  author  as  the  Second  Part  of  the  Practical 
Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition,  is  a  production  of  much 
value  and  importance,  and  is  devoted  to  a  lengthened  and  full  elu- 
cidation of  the  difficulties  which  stand  in  the  way  of  one  who 
would  become  a  thorough  and  accomplished  Latinist.  It  is  in- 
tended— should  the  classical  public  demand  it — to  issue  this  work 
at  an  early  date. 

The  principal  advantages  which  the  present  volume  offers  ovei 
works  of  a  similar  kind  are  these.  It  contains  a  copious  but  con- 
cise illustration  of  Latin  Synonymes  drawn  mainly  from  the 
standard  treatise  of  Doderlein  on  this  subject;  there  is,  through 


Vill  PREFACE. 

out,  a  careful  and  precise  notation  of  the  Differences  of  Idiom 
between  the  Latin  and  English  languages ;  a  frequent  calling 
the  attention  of  the  student,  by  way  of  Cautions,  to  nice  points 
which  might  otherwise  escape  his  notice  ;  and  a  constant  repeti- 
tion, under  new  forms  and  combined  with  new  matter,  of  what  has 
gone  before — the  iterum  iterumque  of  Virgil — till  both  the  words 
and  expressions,  with  their  peculiarities,  are  fastened  in  the  mem- 
ory.  In  addition  to  this,  the  Exercises  are  wholly  in  English, 
that  is.  the  English  is  given  to  be  turned  into  the  corresponding 
Latin ;  and  full  and  very  carefully  arranged  Vocabularies  pre- 
cede or  accompany  each  Exercise.  This  plan  is  far  superior — 
in  the  Editor's  judgment — to  the  common  mode  of  giving  all  the 
Latin  words  in  the  Latin  order,  simply  requiring  that  the  sentence 
be  made  grammatically  correct  by  the  use  of  the  right  cases, 
moods,  tenses,  &c.  By  such  a  course  the  pupil  is  not  obliged  to 
study  and  exercise  his  powers  of  reflection  and  observation  to  any 
great  extent ;  but  only  to  be  tolerably  well  acquainted  with  gram- 
matical forms  and  usages ;  he  learns  to  expect  the  helps  of  the 
Latin  words;  he  pays  little  regard  to  the  peculiarities  of  the  Latin 
order ;  and  is  very  apt  to  be  sadly  puzzled  when  an  English  sen- 
tence or  passage  is  given  to  him  to  be  turned  into  Latin.  On  the 
contrary,  by  using  Mr.  Arnold's  method  the  student  is  compelled 
to  examine  well  and  constantly  the  mode  which  the  Romans  had 
of  expressing  their  ideas,  and  in  what  respect  it  differs  from  our 
own,  as  well  in  regard  to  the  choice  as  the  collocation  of  words 
and  sentences ;  and  almost  of  necessity  his  memory  has  to  be 
stored  with  a  large  supply  of  words  and  phrases  for  continual 
use. 

Great  care  has  been  bestowed  upon  the  volume,  for  the  purpose 
of  securing  accuracy  and  clearness  of  arrangement ;  and  it  is 
trusted  that  it  will  not  be  found  inferior  to  any  issues  of  tl>e 
American  press. 

J.  A.  S. 

New- York,  March  16**,  1846. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


1- 

11. 

II. 

2. 

3. 

III. 

4. 

IV. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

TART    I. 


PACK 

Introductory  Remarks  on  the  Arrangement  of  Words  in  a 

Latin  Sentence 13 

Nominative  Case  and  Verb 18 

Accusative  with  Infinitive 19 

Accusative  with  Infinitive  continued 21 

Agreement  of  Adjective  with  Substantive 22 

The  Relative 24 

Infinitive  used  substantively 27 

Relative  continued.     (Fundamental  Rule  for  the  employment 

of  subjunctive  tenses.) 29 

8.  Relative  continued 31 

9.  Relative  continued.     Rel.  with  Superlative:  'The  first  who*  ••  32 
V.     10.     Ut  ne,  expressing  a purpose •  •••  31 

1 1.  Ut  expressing  a  consequence.     Quo.     Ne  prohibitive 35 

12.  English  infinitive  translated  by  ut  with  subj.   >  3- 

[  Vocabulary  of  Verbs  followed  by  ut.]  > 

13.  Ut,  &c.  continued.     '77iat  nobody,  &c.  ) 

[Vocab.  of  Phrases  followed  by  ut.]  )  '  * 

14.  Quin  after  negative  sentences..  [Vocab.  of  Verbs,  &c.  followed 

by  quin.] - 41 

15.  Quominus.    [Vocab.  of  Verbs  followed  by  quominus.] 43 

VI.     16.     Interrogative  Sentences • 45 

17.  Interrogative  Words 45 

18.  Dependent  Questions 46 

19.  Double  Questions.    An  in  single  questions 47 

20.  May,  can,  &c.  as  principal  Verbs 49 

V1L    21.    Apposition 52 

22.  Nominative  after  the  Verb.  Attraction  of  tne  Predicate.  [Vocab. 

of  Apposition  Verbs.] 54 

23.  Dative  after  esse 56 


CONTENTS. 

6KCT.  PAGE 

VIII.  24.    TheGenitive 56 

25.  The  Genitive  continued.     Partitives.     Genitivus  QualitatU. 

Opus  est.    Summits  mons,  &c.   (64) 60 

26.  The  Genitive  after  Adjectives 66 

27.  The  Genitive  continued 6S 

28.  The  Genitive  continued 70 

29.  The  Genitive  continued.    Impersonals  with  gen. 74 

IX.  30.    The  Dative.    [Vocab.  of  Adjectives  with  dat.,  &c] 76 

31.  The  Dative  continued.    [Vocab.  of  Verbs  governing  the  dat]    79 

32.  The  Dative  continued.    [Vocab.  of  Compounds  of  esse.  J  •••  )     q^ 

[Vocab.  of  Verbs  that  take  dat.  or  ace.  84.] 5 

33.  The  Dative  continued.    Verbs  with  two  constructions-  • 

[Vocab.  of  Veibs  that  take  dat.  of  person  with  ace.  of 
thing;  or  ace.  of  pers   with  abl.  of  thing. — Vocab.  of  J»    86 
Verbs  with  different  constructions  in  different  mean- 
ings]   

34.  Verbs  that  take  a  second  Dative.    Est  mihi  nomen 89 

[Vocab.  of  Verbs  followed  by  two  Datives.] 89 

X.  35.    The  Accusative.     [Vocab.  of  transitive  Compounds  of  in-  )     qn 

trans.  Verbs.] ) 

The  Accusative  continued 93 

The  Ablative 96 

The  Ablative  continued.  [Vocal*,  of  Verbs  governing  the  abl.]    99 

The  Vocative.    Attraction  of  the  Vocative 102 

The  Passive  Voice 104 

The  Passive  Voice  continued 107 

Time 110 

Place.    Space«  ••,!•  ••  •  •• 115 

Gerunds  and  Partic.  in  dus.    [Epistola  scribenda.] \ 

[Vocab.  of  words  following  the  constr.  of  the  proper  >    117 

names  of  places,  122.] J 

Participles,    Ablative  Absolute • 1 24 

Participles  continued.    Participles  expressing  a  purpose 126 

Participles  continued.    The  Supines 12E* 

Pronouns 131 

Pronouns  continued.     It  hie,  iste,  ille 133 

Pronouns  continued.    On  the  translation  of  any 137 

Pronouns  continued.    On  the  prefixes  and  affixes  of  the  Inter- 

gatives 140 

Comparison 142 

Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses  • 145 

Remarks  on  the  Tenses  continued 149 

Forms  of  Conditional  Propositions  (435) 152 

Conditional  Propositions  continued 156 

Conditional  Propositions  in  dependent  sentences 160 

On  Oblique  Narration 162 

Oblique  Narration  continued.    Mood  in  subordinate  Clauses. 

Dependence  on  an  infinitive    t  165 


36. 

XI. 

37. 

38. 

XII. 

39. 

XIII. 

40. 

41. 

XIV. 

42. 

^xv. 

43. 

XVI. 

44. 

XVII. 

45. 

46. 

47. 

KVIII 

.  48. 

49. 

50. 

51. 

XIX 

52. 

XX. 

53. 

54. 

XXI. 

55. 

56. 

57. 

XXII. 

58. 

CONTENTS. 


XI 


XXI 1 1 


XXIV. 

XXV. 

XXVI. 

XXVII. 

KXVIII. 

XXIX. 

XXX. 


ECT.  PAO». 

.  GO.     Qui  with  Subjunctive.  [Vocab.  of  phrases,  tic,  with  which 

qui  takes  the  subj.] 169 

61.  Qui  with  the  Subjunctive  continued 171 

62.  Quum  with  the  Indicative ^ 

[Vocab.  of  Conjunctions  that  govern  the  subj.  494.]  —  $    174 

,  63.    Antequam  and  Priusquam 179 

,  64.    Dum,  donee,  quoad,  &c.    [Vocab.  of  Adverbs  with  gen.]  —  181 

65.  Quod 18? 

66.  'The  Roman  Calendar 186 

67.  Connection  of  Propositions  by  the  Relative,  &c 189 

68.  On  the  Roman  way  of  reckoning  money 192 

69.  On  the  division  of  the  As,  the  method  of  reckoning/roc/tons, 

interest,  &c 194 

Tables  for  Reference. 

I.  Genders 196 

II.  Formation  of  the  Perfect  and  Supine 197 

Table  of  Differences  of  Idiom,  <fcc 202 

Questions  on  the  Cautions 211 

({.uestions  on  the  Syntax 214 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


tm  the  Arrangement  of  Words  in  a  Latin  Sentence. 

1.  The  general  distinction  between  the  English  and  Latin  oidei 
is  thi3  : 

2.  OCT  In  Latin  the  governed  and  dependent  words  generally 
stand  before  the  words  on  which  they  depend ;  so  that  in  simple 
sentences,  the  verb,  when  not  particularly  emphatic,  stands  at  the 
end  of  the  sentence. 

3.  Thus  in  simple  narrative,  after  the  conjunction  comes  the 
subject  (nom.  case) ;  then  the  governed  cases  with  adverbs  and 
expressions  of  time,  place,  manner,  &c,  and  last  of  all  the  verb. 

4.  But  if  the  verb  is  emphatic,  it  must  be  placed  earlier  in  the 
sentence. — Quod  non  dedit  fortuna,  id  non  eripit.  Mirabile 
videtur,  quod  non  rideat  haruspex,  &c.  Non  intelligunt  homines, 
quam  magnum,  vectigal  sit  parsimonia. 

For  it  must  always  be  remembered  that — 

5.  0^7"  The  degree  of  prominence  and  emphasis  to  be  given  to 
a  word,  is  that  which  mainly  determines  its  position  in  the  sen- 
tence.— And, 

6.  a)  The  too  emphatic  positions  in  a  sentence  are  the  beginning  and  the  end; 
"  by  the  former  our  attention  is  excited,  and  on  the  latter  it  rests."  (Crom- 
bie.) 

b)  Add  to  this,  that  the  more  unusual  a  position  is  for  any  word,  the  more 
emphatic  it  is  for  that  word.  Thus,  "arbores  seret  diligens  agricola, 
quarum  adspiciet  baccam  ipse  nunquam."  (Cic.) 

c)  A  word  that  generally  stands  close  by  another  receives  emphasis  by 
separation  from  it ;  especially  if  it  be  thus  brought  near  the  beginning  or 
end  of  a  sentence.  Voluptatem'  percepi  maximaia*.  Propterea  quod 
aliud  iter  haberent  nullum'.  Mdui  equites  ad  Ctesarcm  omnts'  revcr- 
tuntur. 

d)  Another  principle  affecting  the  position  of  words  is  the  harmonious 
arrangement  of  syllables;  the Jlow  of  the  sentence. 


14  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

7.  Genitive.  The  genitive,  whether  dependent  on  a  sub- 
stantive or  adjective,  stands  first  if  it  be  the  more  emphatic  ;  if 
not,  not.  But  it  is  rendered  more  emphatic  by  separation  j 
see  6,  c). 

a)  It  probably  somewhat  prefers  the  position  before  the  govern 
mg  noun,  when  that  is  not  decidedly  emphatic. 

b)  When  the  governing  substantive  has  an  adjective  with  it, 
the  order  is  generally  adj.,  gen.,  subst.  (Vera  animi  magnitudo.) 

8.  Attributive  and  its  substantive.  Of  these  the  more 
emphatic  stands  first.     But  see  6,  c). 

a.  P±  very  short  precedes  a  longer  word :  hence  the  demon- 
stratives  usually  stand  before  their  nouns,  and  monosyllable  sub- 
stantives before  their  adjectives. 

9.  Apposition.  Here  too  the  more  emphatic  precedes :  but 
generally  the  word  in  apposition  stands  last. 

a.  This  is  particularly  the  case  with  titles,  &c,  in  apposition  tc 
proper  names, 

Q.  Mucius  Augur  ;  Agis  rex  ;  Pythagoras  Philosophus.  But, 
urbs  Roma  ;  though  Cyprus  insula,  Hypanis  Jluvius. 

10.  Words  dependent  on  Adjectives.  Here  too  the  more 
emphatic  precedes,  with  something  of  a  preference  for  placing 
the  dependent  words  first. 

11.  Ablative  absolute.     The  more  emphatic  first. 

12.  Infinitive  dependent  on  Verb.  The  more  emphatic  first ; 
generally  the  infinitive. 

a.  Of  two  infinitives,  the  more  emphatic  first. 

13.  Adverbs.  Generally,  immediately  before  the  words  they 
belong  to.     Quoque  immediately  after  its  word. 

14.  Words  that  modify  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  are  usually 
placed  between  it  and  the  substantive.  (Proelio  magis  ad  cventum 
secundo,  quam,  dec.) 

15.  Opposition  and  contrasted  notions. 

a)  A  repeated  word,  or  a  word  akin  to  a  word  already  used  in 
the  sentence,  is  generally  brought  as  near  to  that  word  as  possible. 
Timor  timorem  pellit.  Nulla  virtus  virtuti  contraria  est.  Virtutuni 
in  alia  alius  vult  excellere.     Aliis  aliunde  est  periculum. 

b)  Of  two  contrasted  clauses  or  groups  of  words,  of  parallel- 
construction,  the  order  of  the  first  is  often  reversed  in  the  second  * 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  lis 

so  that  two  of  the  antithetical  words  are  as  far  apart  as  possible 
Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  movet.  Ratio  nostra  con&en- 
tit  ;  pugnat  oratio.  Quod  me  moveruntj  movissent  eadem  te  pro- 
fecto. 

0^7"  Enim}  vero,  autem,  quoque,  quyiem  (with  of  course  the 
enclitics),  cannot  be  the  first  words  of  a  clause. 


PRACTICAL    INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN  PROSE   COMPOSITION. 


The  common  concords  are  taken  for  granted ;  that — 

(1.)  A  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  case  in  numbci 
and  person. 

(2.)  An  adjective,  pronoun,  or  participle,  agrees  with  its 
substantive  in  gender,  number  and  case. 

(3.)  A  transitive  verb,  whether  active  or  deponent,  takes 
after  it  an  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  acted  upon. 

(4.)  Verbs  of  existence  (such  as  be,  become,  turn  out, 
&c);  passive  verbs  of  being  called,  considered,  chosen, 
&c,  take  a  substantive  or  adjective  after  them  in  the  nomi- 
native case. 

(5.)  The  thing  by  which  stands  in  the  ablative  ;  the 
person  by  whom,  in  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a 
or  ab. 

(6.)  One  substantive  depending  upon  another  is  put  in 
the  genitive  case. 


Obs.  When  a  pronoun  is  the  nominative  case  to  a  verb,  it  is 
aot  expressed  in  Latin  ;  except  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  01 
particular  distinction. 

(a)  In  the  same  way  the  possessive  pronoun  is  seldom  expressed, 
when  there  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  whose  the  thing  is.     See  3  (a). 

(/?)  When  there  is  any  distinction  to  be  expressed,  as,  for  instance-, 
when  /  am  opposed  to  you,*  the  pronouns  must  be  expressed. 


•  The  pron.  is  expressed,  even  when  the  distinction  is  only  between  two  ac 
•iofiu  of  the  same  person.     Ejcci  ego  te  armatis  hominibus,  non  dejeci. 


18  NOMINATIVE    CASE    AND    VERB.  [§1.  2-4 

L 

§  1.     Nominative  Case  and  Verb. 

2.  (a)  When  two  or  more  nominative  cases  singular  come  to- 
gether, they  take  a  plural  verb;*  which  agrees  with  the  nominativf 
ease  of  the  most  worthy*  person. 

(b)  The  verbs  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted. 
3*  (a)  Et  egoc  et  Balbus  sustulimus  manus,  Both  I  and  Balbus 
lifted  up  our  hands, 
(b)  Amici  veterrimi  optimi,  The  oldest  friends  are  the  best. 
4.  Vocabulary  1. 

And,  et ;  que  enclitic,'  atque ;  ac  <i 

If,  si. 

Both — and,  et — et. 

Hand,  mSnus,  us,  f. 

Sister,  sbror,  oris,  /. 

Well,  bSnS. 

Hunger  fames,  is,  /. 

Seasoning, )  ,_ 

~  >  condimentum,  1.  n. 

Army,  exercrtus,  us,  m 


*  The  verb  is  often  however  in  the  singular,  agreeing  with  one  of  the  nomi- 
natives, and  being  understood  with  the  other.  This  is  the  common  construc- 
tion with  et—et;  quum — turn,  &c,  when  both  the  nominatives  are  singular,  and 
of  the  same  person. 

b  The  Jirst  person  is  said  to  be  more  worthy  than  the  second,  the  second  than 
the  third. 

c  For  "  Balbus  and  /,"  the  Romans,  putting  "/"  first,  said  "  Ego  et  Balbus.  * 
When  therefore  Cardinal  Wolsey  said  "  Ego  et  Rex  meus,"  he  was  a  good 
frammarian  but  bad  courtier. 

d  Et  joins  words  each  of  which  is  considered  independently,  and  as  of  equal 
importance :  atque  (  =  adque)  or  ac,  which  is  an  abridged  (and  less  emphatic) 
form  of  the  same  word,  adds  a  notion  thai  is,  if  anything,  of  more  importanct 
than  the  preceding  one  (=  'and  also,'  'and  moreover'):  que  joins  a  word 
closely  to  another,  as  an  appendage  to  it,  as  belonging  to  it,  and  often  as  forming 
one  complex  notion  with  it. 

When  et  connects  principal  clauses,  subordinate  ones  and  single  words  must 
be  connected  by  que,  or  (if  similar  notions)  atque. 

Atque  is  used  before  vowels  or  consonants,  but  especially  before  vowels. 

Ac  is  used  before  consonants  (though  not  very  often  before  the  k  sounds) ;  but 
not  before  vowels  or  h.  Mr.  Allen  shows  that  ac  (though  very  rarely  met  with 
Vtforetf,  q)  is  not  very  uncommon  in  Cicero  before  c.     So  also  Zumpt. 


}  2.  5-9.]  ACCUSATIVE    WITH    INFINITIVE.  ]9 

War,  bellum,  i.  n. 

A  Gaul,  Gallus,  i  to. 

Many,  multi,  ae,  a. 

Very  many,  permulti,*  ae,  a. 

Caesar,  Csesar,  Caesaris,  to. 

To  lift  up,  tollgre,  sustiil,  sublat. 

To  be  in  good  health.  )  .            ,-       ,_ 

To  be  well,  I                    vSlere,  valu,  vahu 

To  wage  (properly  to  carry),  gFrCre,  gess,  gest. 

To  conquer,  vincgre,  vie,  vict. 

Exercise  1. 

5.  If  you  and  the  armyf  are-in-good-health,  it  is  well  (p.  14, 
V6).  Both  you  and  Balbus  lifted  up  (your)  hands.  Both  you 
and  7(1  Obs.  (3)  have  waged  many'  wars.  Both  you  and  Balbus 
have  waged  very-many'  wars.  The  best'  sauce  (is  hunger.) 
The  Gauls  were  conquered  by  Caesar.  Hands  were  lifted  up 
both  by  you  and  by  Balbus.  If  you  and  your  sister  are-in-good- 
health,  it  is  well. 


II. 

§  2.     Accusative  with  Infinitive. 

6.  The  infinitive  takes  before   it  not  the  nominative,   but  the 
iccusative.z 

7.  Many  sentences  that  in  English  are  joined  to  a  verb  by  the  conjunc- 
tion '  that,'  are  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  accusative  and  infinitive. 

8.  In  turning  such  sentences  into  Latin  Hhat'  must  be  omitted;  the 
English  nominative  turned  into  the  accusative;  and  the  English  verh 
into  the  infinitive  mood  of  the  same  tense. 

9.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  follows  verbs  (sentiendi  et  decla- 
randi)  of  feeling,  knowing,  wishing,  hearing,  believing,  thinking,  &a 
and  such  expressions  as,  it  is  certain,  manifest,  true,  &c. 


•  Per  in  composition  with  an  adjective,  adds  to  it  the  meaning  of  '  very.' 

t  Exercitusque.     Que  must  always  be  appended  to  the  latter  of  the  two  words 
connected  by  it. 

*  This  idiom  is  not  uncommon  in  English,  though  far  less  common  tnan  it 
Latin. 

"  I  ordered  Mm  to  be  dismissed  "  (for  '  I  ordered  that  he  should  be  diemissecTy 
"I  saw  him  to  be  a  knave"  (for  '1  saw  thai  he  was  a  knave'). 


0  ACCUSATIVE    WITH    INFINITIVE.  [§  2.   10-13 

10.  (a)  Respondeo,  placere  et  mihi  locum,   I  answer  that  the 

place  pleases  me  too. 

(b)  Respondit,  placere  et  sibi  locum,  He  answered  that  the 

place  pleased  him  too. 

(c)  Sentlmus  calere  ignem,  nivem  esse  albam,  dulce  melt 

We  know-by-our-senses,  that  fire  is  hot ;  that  snow  h 
white,  honey  sweet. 

11.  Vocabulary  2. 

To  answer,  respondere,  respond,  respons. 

To  understand,  intelhggre,  intellex,  intellect. 

To  deny,  negare,  av,  at. 

To  sin,  peccare,  av,  at. 

I  remember,  mgmini,  Imper.  memento ;  pi.  memetitote. 

To  know-by-the-senses,  sentlre,  sens,  sens. 

To  injure,  oflend-against,  violare,  av,  at. 

Law,  lex,  legis,/. 

Cautions. 

12.  [C.  i.]  O^r  Him,  her,  them  (or  he,  she,  they,  whe^i  they  are 

to  be  translated  by  the  accusative)  must  be  trans- 
lated by  the  proper  case  of  sui,  when  tuey  and  the 
nominative  of  the  verb  stand  for  the  same  person. 

Also,  in    the   same  case,    his,  hers,  its,  lheirst 
must  be  translated  by  suus. 
13.                (He  says  that  it  pleases  him. 
(  He  said  that  it  pleased  him. 
In  English  the  dependent  verb  (by  a  kind  of  attraction)  assumes  the 
past  form,  when  the  verb  it  depends  on  is  in  a  past  tense. 
Hence 

0^7"  [C.  ii.]  In  a  sentence  with  '  that '  dependent  on  a  past  tense, 
the  perfect  is  to  be  translated  by  the  present  (and 
imperfect)  infinitive,  whenever  the  notion  expressed 
by  it  is  not  to  be  described  as  over  before  the  time  of 
the  principal  verb  * 

(KT  [C.  in.]  '  Should'  after  <  that'  is  to  be  translated  by  the 
present  infinitive,  when  it  does  not  express  either 
duty  or  a  future  event. 


t  Thus  "  he  mid  that  it  pleased  him"— when  ?  at  the  time  of  his  saying  it  1 
yi£Uif~€)  :  before tht  'hue  of  his  saying  it?  (jilaeuissc). 


$3.   14-17.]  ACCUSATIVE    WITH    INFINITIVE  2] 

Exercise  2. 

14.  He  answered  that  he11*  had  waged  many'  wars.  He 
denies  that  he  has  sinned  (or  :  says  that  he  has  not  sinned). 2f  He 
says  that  he  does  not2  understand.  He  says  that  Caesar  will  not* 
orTend-against  the  laws.  Remember  that  hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 
He  answered  that  he  understood.21  He  answered,  that  both  you 
and  Balbus  were-in-good-health.  Both  you  and  Balbus  have 
finned. 


§  3.     Accusative  with  Infinitive  continued. 

15.  (a)  After  hope,  promise,  undertake,  &c,  the  future  infinitive* 
is  used  with  the  accusative  of  the  pronoun  ;  and  (b)  after  pretend, 
the  ace.  of  the  pronoun. 

16.  (a)  Sperat  plerumque  adolescens  diu  se  victurum  (esse),* 

A  young  man  generally  expects  to  live  a  long  time, 
(h)  Simulat  se  furere,  He  pretends  to  be  mad. 
0^7"  [C.  iv.]  *  Would/  '  should,'  after  a  past  tense  are  future 
forms  : 

He  says  that  he  will  come. 
He  said  that  he  would  come. 

17.  Vocabulary  3. 
A  business,  negotium,  i,  n. 
A  journey,                                   Iter,  TtinPris,  n. 
To  hope,  eperare,  av,  at. 
To  come,  venire,  ven,  vent. 
To  promise,  polliceri,     pollicitus ;    prornittPre,    oronua 

prorniss.i 
To  undertake,  enga^,  recipCre,  io,  recep,  recept. 


•  These  Numerals,  followed  by  a  curve,  refer  to  the  Caulums. 
t  These  Numerals  refer  to  the  Table  of  Differences  of  Idiom. 
1  For  '  he  promises  to  come'  —  he  promises  tliat  he  will  come. 
He  hoDes  to  lire  =  he  hopes  that  he  shall  live. 
He  pretends  to  be  mad  =  he  pretends  that  he  is  mad. 
«  With  the  compound  infinitives  esse  is  often  omitted. 

1  Premittere  (to  give  it  forth)  is  the  general  word  for  promising,  whether  good 
)r  evil.  Polliceri  is  to  offer  from  one's  own  free-will  and  inclinations,  used  only 
of  premising  good.     Potlu-cor  being   used  for  free  and  gracious   promises 


22  AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVE  WITH  SUIiSTANTI  VE.  [§  4.  19-21 

To  finish,  accomplish,  conf  KcSre,  io,  confec,  confect. 

To  pretend,  simulare,™  av,  at 

To  be  mad,  furgre,  (neut. :  no  perf.  or  supine.) 
To  (my,  your,  &c.)  sati3-  } 

faction,    satisfactorily,  >  ex  sententia11 

successfully,  ) 

To  have  a  prosperous  voyage,  ex  sententia  navigare. 

Exercise  3. 

18.  Solon  pretended  to  be  mad.  I  will  pretend  to  bemad,  lit 
promised  to  come.  I  engage  to  finish  the  business  to  your  satisfac- 
tion. I  hope  that  you  will  have  a  prosperous  voyage.  The  business 
has  been  finished  by  Balbus.  I  hope  to  finish  the  business.  He 
was  pretending  to  be  mad.  I  promised  to  finish  the  business. 
He  answered,  that  Caius  had  had  a  prosperous  voyage.  He 
answered  that  he  would**  finish  the  business.  He  says  that  he 
will  no?  come.     He  has  accomplished  his  journey  satisfactorily. 


III. 

§  4.     Agreement  of  Adjective  with  Substantive. 

10.  (a)  When  an  adjective  agrees  with  several  singular  nouns, 
it  will  be  in  the  plural  number,  and  agree  with  the  most  worthy. 

20.  (b)  If  the  substantives  are  things  that  have  not  life,  the 
adjective  is  usually  in  the  neuter  gender. 

21.  (c)  When  the  noun  is  '  man,'  '  woman/  '  thing ,'  it  is  seldom 
repressed  in  Latin. 

[C.  v.]  '  Thing*  should  be  expressed  by  '  res1  (fern.)  when  the 
adjective  alone  would  leave  it  doubtful  whether  men 
or  things  were  meant. 
Thus  '  of  many  things'  not  multorum,  but  muUarum  rerum 


vromitlo  would  naturally  be  often  used  of  promising  what  has  been  requested. 

Hence 

Ultro  polliceor ;  promitto  (saepe)  rogatus : 
Necmala  polliceor,  mala  sed  promittere  possum. 
m  Quae  non  sunt  simulo ;  quan  sunt  ea  dissimulantur. 

n  The  pronoun  should  be  expressed  (ex  mea  sententia\  <fcc.)  whenever  to  ieav« 
it  out  would  cause  an  ambiguity. 


$  4.  22-25.]  AGREEMENT  OF  ADJECTIVE  WITH  SUBSTANTIVE.  23 

22.  (a)  Castor  et  Pollux  ex  equispugnare  wsisunt,  Castor  and 

Pollux  were  seen  to  fight  on  horseback. 

(b)  Inter  se  contraria  sunt  beneficium  et  injuria,  A  benefit 

and  an  injury  are  contrary  to  each  other. 

(c)  Boni  sapientesque  ex  civitate  pelluntur,  The  good  and 

wise  are  banished  (literally,  driven  from  the  state). 

(d)  Praiterita  rnutare  non  possumus,   We  cannot   change 

the  past. 

(e)  Omnia  mea  mecum  porto,  I  am  carrying  all  my  property 

with  me. 

23.  Oba.  1.  The  neuter  plural  without  a  substantive  is  generally  used 
:n  Latin,  where  we  use  the  singular.    Thus 

muck,  very  much,  everything,  the  fast, 

multa,  permulta,  omnia,  praeterlta, 

little  (few  things),  very  little, 

pauca,  perpauca. 

24.  Oba.  2.  The  neuter  adj.  is  used  in  Latin  without  a  substantive. 
where  we  might  substitute  lthings,y  but  really  use  some  more  appro- 
priate noun,  as  "property,  objects,  possessions,  performances,  &c. 

[C.  vi.]  Obs.     Cum  is  written  after,  and  as  one  word  with,  the 
ablatives  me,  te,  &c.  :    mecum,  tecum,  secum,  no. 
biscum,  vobiscum. 
2o.  Vocabulary  4. 
Contrary,  contrarius,  a,  um. 

(to  each  otHer,  after  contrary)  inter  se  {between  themselves). 
Good,  better,  best,  bonus,  melior,  optimus. 

Wise,  sapiens,  tis. 

Deaf,  surdus,  a,  um, 

Parent,  parens,  tis,  com.  gcnd. 

Virtue,  virtus,  utis,  /. 

Vice,  vitium,  i.  n. 

Blind,  csdcus,  a,  um. 

All  my  property,  omnia  mea0. 

To  owe,  •  debere,  debu,  debtt. 

To  banish,  pelle're  ex  civitate  (pelle're,  pPpiil,  puis,  tu 

drive). 
To  be  ignorant-o/"  ignorare,  av,  at.  (ace.) 

To  see,  cernSre,  crev,   cret  (properly  to   separate  i 

hence,  to  distinguish  ;  to  see  clearly ;  th« 
proper  word  to  express  the  possession  of 
distinct  vision). 


"  Thy  other  possesbives,  tuua,  suus,  noder,  &c,  must  be  used  for  thy,  hia,  our 
vVC,  property. 


24  THE    RELATIVE.  \§  5.   20-80 

To  carry,  portare,  av.  at. 

To  hear,  audlre,  Iv.  it. 

To  speak,  ibqui,  locutus,  or  loquutus. 

To  fight  on  horseback,  ex  equo,  or  ex  equisP  pugnare. 

Exercise  4. 

26.  They  are  banishing  the  good  and  wise.  We  are  ail 
ignorant-of  many  tilings.  Virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each 
other.  A  blind  man  does  not  see.  The  good  and  icise  have  been 
banished.  A  deaf  man  does  not  hear.  Hear  much  (23) ;  speak 
little  (p.  14.  15,  b.)  We  shall  carry  all  our  property  with  us. 
He  spoke  very  little.  Both  you  and  Balbus  are  ignorant  of  many 
things.  He  says  that  he  is  not"2  well.  They  will  hear  little' : 
they  will  speak  much  (p.  14,  15,  b).  We  owe  very  much  to  our 
parents.  Remember  that  you  owe  very  much'  to  your  parents. 
He  says  that  he  will  not2  fight  on  horseback. 


IV. 

*-*  §  5.     The  Relative. 

27.  The  relative  pronouns 

qui,  quails,  quantus,  <px>tu 

answer  respectively  to 

is,  talis,  tantus,  tot. 

28.  In  a  relative  sentence^ 

§3r  Each  clause  has  its   own  verb,  and  its  own   independent 

construction. 
29.  A  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  some  case  of  a  substantive  which  is 

expressed  in  the  preceding  sentence.    The  substantive  to  which  it 
thus  refers  is  called  its  antecedent  (or fore-going  substantive). 

The  antecedent,  in  a  sentence  fully  expressed,  would  be  expressed 

twice ;  and  it  sometimes  is  expressed  twice  in  Latin :  this,  however, 

is  but  seldom  the  case,  and  the  antecedent  is  generally  omitted  in  th« 

relative  clause. 

30.  (c)  Sometimes  however  the  antecedent  is  expressed  in  the 


P  Ex  equo,  if  we  are  speaking  of  one  person ;  ex  equis,  if  of  more. 
*  The  clause  in  which  the  relative  stands  is  called  the  relatixecUusei  thr 
other,  the  principal,  or  antecedent  clause. 


*  6.  3l-3tf.]  THE    RELATIVE.  25 

relative,  and  omitted  in  the  principal  clause  ;  and  (d)  when  this  is 
the  case,  the  relative  clause  is  often  placed  first ;  the  antecedent 
king  expressed   in  it,  and    represented  in  the  principal  clause 
'though  r.ot  always)  by  the  proper  case  of  '  is*  or  '  hie.' 
Hi .  The  '  is,'  however,  is  often  omitted,  especially  when  ( man'  or  '  thing1 

la  meant,  or,  when  the  verbs  govern  the  same  case. 

If  the  antecedent  would  be  in  different  case*  in  the  two  clauses, 
•iy  or  lhici  is  but  seldom  omitted.' 

3'i.   (j)  Nullum  animal,  quod  sanguinem  habet,  sine  corde  esse 
potest,  No  animal  that  has  blood,  €an  be  without  a  heart. 

(b)  Arbdres    seret    diligens    agricola,  quarum    adspicict 

baccam*  ipse  nunquam,  The  industrious  husbandman 
will  plant  treest  a  berry  of  which  he  will  himself 
never  behold.  * 

(c)  Accepi  quas  literas  ad  me  dedisti,  J  have  received  the 

letters  which  you  sent  me. 
(-')  Dcstice  in  quo  loco  nata3  sunt,  ex  eo  se  non  commovent, 
Animals  do  not  move  themselves  from  the  neighbour- 
hood  (place)  in  which  they  were  born. 
C  vi!.]  Many  English  verbs  become  transitive  by  the  addition 
of  a  preposition  ;  for  instance,  to  smile  at,  &c. 

It  often  happens  that  the  corresponding  Latin  verb  is  already  tran- 
sitive, so  that  the  preposition  is  not  to  be  expressed.  To  determine 
whether  the  preposition  belongs  (as  it  were)  to  the  verb,  turn  the  sen- 
tence into  the  passive  :  when,  if  the  preposition  still  clings  to  the  verb* 
(adverbially),  it  is  generally  not  to  be  expressed  in  Latin. 

Of  course  a  verb,  compound  or  single,  must  be  sought  for,  that  if 
equivalent  to  the  verb  and  preposition  together;  as  to  deride  —  U. 
laugh  at. 

33.  Vocabulary  5. 

Obs.  Substantives  in  us  from  the  root  of  the  supine  (which  end  there- 
fore in  ius  or  8us)  are  of  the  fourth  declension ;  except,of  course,  those 
ttiai,  like  legatus,  denote  persons. 


1  Tt  is,  however,  sometimes : 

Quos  cum  Matio  pueros  miseram,  epistolam  mihi  attulerunt.     (Cic.) 

Quaj  prime  i.Tnocentis  mihi  defensio  est  oblata,  suspepi. 

4  birry ;  any  little  round  fruit,  not  a  nut ;  e.g.  of  the  olive,  cedar,  juniper,  Ac 

Yh.is  : 

1  He  laughs  at  Cassius.' 

'  v  -is^iut  ia  laughed  at!    Therefore  to  laugh-at  is  virtually  one  verb 


26  THS    RELATIVE.  [§  ft.    34 

No,  nullus,  a,  um.     Gen.  nulHua. 

Animal,  animal,  alis,  n. 

Blood,  sanguis,  mis,  m. 

Without,  sine  (governs  ablat.). 

Heart,  cor,  cordis,  n. 

Tree,  arbor,  oris,/. 

Fruits  (of  the  earth,  a  crop),  fruges,  G.  frugum,  /. 

(of  trees,)  fructus,  us,u  m. 

Field,  ager,  agri,  m. 

In  vain,  nequidquam,  frustra.* , 

Harvest,  messis,  is,  f. 

Praise,  .  laus,  laudis,    /, 

Easily,  facile. 

Not  yet,  nondum. 

Right,  rectus,  a,  um. 

To  till,  cultivate,  colgre,  colu,  cult. 

To  bear,  produce,  f  Sro,  tuli,  latum. 

To  deserve,  mergri,  merltus. 

To  deserve  well,  &c,  of,  de  (with  ahlat.). 

To  praise,  laudare,  av,  at. 

To  believe,  credere,  credld,  credit  (dat.). 

To  deceive,  dectpere,  io,  decep,  decept. 

To  behold,  adspicSre,  io,  adspex,  adspeci. 

Self,  myself,  himself,  &c,  in  nom.,  ipse  (which  stands  for  all  these,  th&  }io 

nouns  ego,  tu,  &c,  not  bein&  ex- 
pressed.) 

OCT"  '  What '  as  a  relative  =  that  which  ;  those  (things)  which. 

Exercise  5. 

34.  No  animals,  which  have  blood,  can  be  without  a  heart, 
Not  every  field  which  is  sown,  bears  a  crop.  (He)  who  easily 
believes  is  easily  deceived.  What  is  right',  is  praised.  (Those 
things)  which  are  right'  are  praised.  Both  you  and  I1  have  been 
deceived.  Praise  what  deserves  praise.  (He)  who  does  not  till 
his  field,  in  vain  hopes  for™  a  harvest.  He  says  that  he  has  not* 
been  deceived.     I  shall  not  easily  believe  Balbus7.     Balbus  has 


a  Fructus  arboribus,  fruges  nascuntnr  in  agris.  But  this  is  only  true  of 
fruges;  and  of  fructus,  as  opposed  to  fruges.  Fructus  is  the  general  name  for 
produce,  and  may  be  spoken  of  land  as  well  as  of  trees  ;  and  in  poetry  we  find 
frugibus  (Columella's  poem  on  Gardening),  and  fruge  (Hor.)  of  the  fruit  of 
trees. 

T  Nequidquam  (to  no  purpose,  in  vain),  so  far  as  nothing  has  resulted  from  ? 
ttwwf  done  ifrustra  (in  vain),  of  a  person  who  has  not  attained  his  purpose    .0 


fc6.   35-38.]  INFINITIVE    USED    SUBSTANTIVELY.  21 

deserved  well  of  me.  The  business  which  you  promised  U\ 
finish,*  has  not  yet  been  finished. w  I  have  planted  a  tree,  the 
fruit  of  which  I  shall  myself  never7  behold.  He  is  pretending  to 
have  flushed3  the  bisiness  to  his  satisfaction.* 


§  6.     Infinitive  used  substantively. 

35.  (a)  Sometimes  an  infinitive  mood,  or  a  sentence,  is  the  nomU 
native  case  to  a  verb  ;  and  sometimes  it  is  used  as  the  substantive 
to  an  adjective  ;  and  sometimes  as  the  antecedent  to  a  relative  :  and 
in  this  case  the  adjective  and  the  relative  must  be  in   the  neuter 

gender. 

When  an  infinitive  or  sentence  is  the  nominative  to  a  verb,  it  gen 
erally  follows  it  in  English,  and  the  pronoun  '  it '  stands  as  its  repre 
sentative  before  the  verb ; — as,  "  it  is  sweet  to  hear." 

Of  course  this  '#'  is  not  to  be  translated  into  Latin. 

36.  (b)  When  the  relative  has  a  sentence  for  its  antecedent,  wo 
often  find  id*  quod  or  qua  res.  (Here  id  and  res  are  in  apposi- 
tion to  the  former  sentence.) 

37.  (a)  Turpe  est  mentiri,  It  is  disgraceful  to  lie. 

(b)  Multse  civitates,  a  Cyro  defecerunt ;  qua  res  multo- 

rum  bellorum  causa  fuit,  Many  states  revolted  from 
Cyrus,  a  circumstance  which  was  tlie  cause  of  many 
wars. 

(c)  Timoleon,  id*  quod  difficilius  putatur,  sapientius   tulii 

secundam  quam  adversam  fortunam,  Timoleon,  which 
is  thought  more  difficult,  bore  a  prosperous  more  wisely 
than  an  adverse  fortune. 

88.    VOCABUIARY  b*. 

Pleasant,  jucundus,  a,  urn. 

Duty,  officium,  i,  n. 

Vgainst,  contra,  (gov.  accus.) 

Promise,  promissum,  i,  n. 

Disgraceful,  turpis,  is,  e. 

Easy  facilis,  is,  e. 


■  Invert  these  clauses :  that  is,  put  the  relative  clause  first. 
»  The  use  of  id  quod  for  quod  only,  adds  emphasis  to  tne  relat  clause ?  which 
Itcj.  generally  precedes  the  principal  clause,  or  is  inserted  in  it 


28  INFINITIVE    USED    SUBSTANTIVELY  [§6.   39 

One  thing— another,  aliud— aliud. 

Man,  hbmo,  hommis ;  vir,  viri.* 

To  keep,  servare,  av,  at. 

Revile,  maledlcere,  dix,  diet  (dat.). 

To  accuse,  accusare,  av,  at. 

To  break  one's  word,  fidem    failure;  failure,  felelli,?  falsuni 

deceive,  beguile. 
To  keep  one's  word,  fidem    praestare;    praestare,    praestiti1 

praestitum,  et  praestatum. 
To  lie,  mentlri,  mentltus. 

To  utter  many  falsehoods,  multa  mentlri. 

It  is  a  breach  of  duty,  contra  officium,  (it  is  against  duty.; 

[C.  viii.]  '  For'  before  a  substantive  or  pronoun  followed  by 

the  infin.,  is  not  to  be  translated.    The  construction 

is  the  ace.  with  infin. % 

rt  •         •    \for  a  boy  not  to  obey  his  parents. 

c  that  a  boy  should  not  obey  his  parents. 

Exercise  6. 

89.  It  is  pleasant  to  be  praised.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  not  tc 
keep  promises.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  to  praise  what  (plur.)  is 
disgraceful.  I  hear  that  you  keep  your  promises,  a  thing  which 
(37,  c)  all'  good  men  do.  I  hear  that  vou  are  going  to  keep  your 
word.  It  is  disgraceful  to  break  one's  word.  It  is  one  thing  to 
revile,  another  to  accuse.  It  is  certain  that  Balbus  has  deserved 
well  of  me.  .  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  to  lie.  Both  you  and  Balbus 
have  uttered  many  falsehoods.  It  is  disgraceful  to  banish  the 
good  and  wise.  It  is  easy  (for  me)  to  carry  all  my  property  with 
me.'3'  It  is  a  breach  of  duty  for  a  man  to  revile  men.  I  have 
praised,  not  blamed  you  (note*,  p.  17). 


*  Homo  is  the  general  term  for  man,  i  e.  for  a  human  being,  distinguisheJ 
from  other  living  creatures.  Vir  is  man.  as  distinguished  from  woman.  Homo 
is  often  used  contemptuously:  vir,  respccijully ;  a  man  with  a  manly  character. 

y  Distinction  between  fallo  and  decipio : 

Nulla  fallentis  culpa  ssepissime fallor ; 

At  quum  decipiar,  culpam  acceptor  habebit. 
«  Cic.  has  prcestaturus. 

*  But  we  shall  see  below  that  if  './or'  follows  immediately  after  '  it  w,'  it  must 
be  translated  by  the  genitive.  '  It  ie  far  a  rich  man  to  do  so  and  so:'  aivitis 
e-n.  &c 


)  7.  40-44.]  THE    RELATIVE.  20 

§  7.  Relative  continued.     (Fundamental  Rule  for  the  employ, 
ment  of  subjunctive  tenses.) 

Wherever  dependent  verbs  are  used  in  the  subjunctive,  the  following 
is  the  fundamental  rule  for  the  use  of  the  tenses. 

40.  OCT  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  subjunctive  are 
ihe  regular  attendants  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative. 

But — the  perfect  definite*  (or  perfect  with  ■  have')  \s  con- 
sidered a  present  tense. 

Hence  the  present,  future,  and  perfect  with  'have?  are  followed  by  the 
present,  or  (for  a  completed  action)  the  perfect  of  the  subjunctive.6 

03"  The  future  perfect  is  not  a  subjunctive  tense. 

41.  The  only  future  subjunctive  is  the  part,  in  rus  with  sim,  essem,  &c 

But  where  we  use  a.  future  in  a  dependent  sentence,  the  Romans  often 
used  tho  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive. 

(On  some  English  Relative  forms.) 

42.  '  That'  is  often  a  relative  pronoun. 

(Especially  after  superlatives;  the  interrogative  ulw;  the  same;  and 
when  both  persons  and  things  are  meant.) 

43.  (a)  i  As'  is  often,  in  effect,  a  relative  pronoun. 

The  relative  ias>  must  be  translated  by  qui  after  idem;  by  qualist 
quantus,  quot,  after  talis,  tantus,  tot,  respectively. 

44.  (1)  l  But'  is  often,  in  effect,  a  relative  pronoun,  when  h 
follows  universal  negatives,  as  nemo,  nullus,  nihil. 

(2)  The  relative  '  but'  is  to  be  translated  by  quin  with  tho 
subjunctive,  (c) 

(3)  When  l but'  might  be  substituted  for  a  relative  with 
not,  the  relative  and  not  may  be  translated  by  quin  ;4 
if  the  relative  is  in  the  nom.  (or  even  ace.)  case. 


*>  The  perfect  definite  is  used  of  actions  done  in  some  space  of  time,  a  part  of 

*h'eh  is  still  present. 

c  Thus  then  the 

Present  j                                     r  Present  subj. 

Future  (   are  followed  by  the  <  Perfect  subj.  (for  a 

Perfect  with  '  have'  J                                      (  completed  action) 

.  r  Imperfect  subj. 

d"1^.*  ?         r  ii        j  v.      i        J  Pluperfect  subj.  (for  an 

Perfect  C  are  followed  by  the    ^    action  ^^^  ^^ 

Plu*,erfect  >  (    the  time  spoken  of ). 

a  With  other  cases  than  the  nominative  and  accusative,  the  use  of  the  relative 


80  XELATIVE    CONTINUED.  [§  7.  45,  4b 

[C  ex.]  0»  'As?  and  { but '  are  often  (in  effect)  relatives. 

[C.  x.]  fjr  {  Smc/i'  in  English  is  often  used  where  size  is  meant  ratnui 
than  quality.  '  Such— as1  should  then  be  translated  into  Latin  by  tantui 
— quantus;  not  talis — qualis. 

45.  (a)  Talis  est,  qualis  semper  fuit,  He  is  such  as  fo  hat 

ever  been. 

(b)  Idem  est  qui  semper  fuit,  He  is  the  same  that  (or  as) 

he  has  ever  been. 

(c)  Nemo  est,  ^wm0  te  dementem  putet,  There  is  no  one 

but  thinks  you  mad  (or,  who  does  not  27im&  you 
mad). 

46.  Vocabulary  7. 

The  same,  idem,  eSdem,  idem ;  gen.  ejusdem,  <fce 

Rule,  .  regula,  &e,f. 

Expediency,  utilitas,  ads,/. 

Expedient,  utilis,  is,  e. 

Honor,  the  honorable,    )  i      „♦-♦•„    * 

'      ,  ,        '    >  honestas,  atis ,  /. 

honorable  conduf  t,     ) 

Nobody,  no  one,  nemo,  inis  ;  nemo  =  ne  homo. 

To  think,  deem,  putare,  av,  at. 

Phis,  hie,  haec,  hoc :  g.  hujus,  &c.  , 

That,  ille,  ilia,  illud  ;  g.  illlus,  &c. 

Nearly,  fCre, 

Another,  alius,  a,  ud ;  g.  alius,  D.  alii,  &c. 

Never,  nunquam, 

Before,  an  tea, 

To  be  able,  can,  posse,  pbtui.f 

Wave,  fluctus,  us,  m.  (See.  33.) 

(a)  Sunt  qui  putent  (Obs.  subj.  after  '  sunt  qui'  )  there  are  some  who  think 

Exercise  7. 

[C.  xi.]  ^jt  c  That,  when  it  stands  for  a  substantive  which  has  been 
expressed  in  the  preceding  clause,  is  not  to  be  translated. 

f~&  The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  of  the  Subjunct.  are  the  regular  at- 
tendants of  the  past  tenses  of  the  Indicative. 


wiih  mm  ia  commonly  preferred.  Z  When  qui  non  must  be  used  will  be  ex 
p^iaed  telow. 

\  Quin  is  qui  ne  ( =  ut  non).  Tie  demonstr.  pronoun  (which  is  the  real 
tiom.)  is  sometimes  expressed  :  as  in  88,  (a). 

*  This  verb  is  compounded  of  an  old  adj.  potis,  neut.  pote,  with  sum.  '  Pot 
\s  p'refixed  to  the  tensus  of  sum,  ts  being  changed  into  ss,  and  pot-esse,  pot- 
3ssem  shortened  into  posse,  possem  (posses,  &c).  The  perfect  tenses  regular 
from  volui  ( —  potis fui).    No  impcrat. :  the  part,  potens  is  used  as  an  adjective 


$8.47-51.]  RELATIVE    CONTINUED.  M 

47.  This  is  the  same  as  that.  -  The  rule  of  expediency  is  the 
■ame  as  that11'  of  honour.  This  is  nearly  the  same  as  another 
ihing.  .  You  are  such  as  I  have  always  thought  you.  The: 
nobody  but  knows,  that  the  Gauls  were  conquered  by  Cttaar. 
There  is  no  onp  'who  a]oes  not  (45,  c)  understand,  that  you  are 
'•r,  tending.  There  is  no  one  but  knows  that  the  past  (23,  Obs.  1,) 
..innot  be  changed.  There  is  no  one  but  knows,  that  these  things 
ire  contrary  to  each  other.  Both  you  and  I  are  such  as  we  have 
ever  been.     The  waves  were  suchl0]as  I  had  never  seen  before. 

There  are  some  who  think  you  mad  (46,  a).     There  were 

some  who  blamed  me. 


§  8.     Relative  continued. 

I,  b)  When  the  relative  connects  (by  means  of  to  be  or  a 
rb  of  naming,  &c.)  two  substantives  of  different  genders,  &c. 
generally  agrees  with  the  latter,  rather  than  with  its  ante- 
i  lent. 

(This  is  the  rule;  agreement  with  the  antecedent  the  exception. 
Z.  K.,  &c.) 

49.  But  when  the  second  substantive  is  a  foreign  word,  the 
lative  generally  agrees  with  its  antecedent.  (Z.)s 

(Jovis  Stella,  qua  yai&wv  dicitur.) 

50.  (a)  Domi cilia  conjuncta,  quas  urbes  dicimus,   Contiguous 

dwellings,  which  we  call  cities, 
(b)     Thebai,  quod   Bceotioe  caput  est,   Thebes,  which  is  the 
capiAal  of  Bceotia, 

51.  Vocabulary  8, 

Glory,  gloria,  ae,/. 

Honorable,  h&nestus,  a,  um. 

Star  Stella,  ae ;  astrum,  i,  whicn  is  properly 

a  Greek  word ;   and  sldus,  Cris,  n,  a 


4  Kriiger  approves  of  ZurrvpVs  rule ;  but  thinks  that  we  cannot  go  beyond 
t\is  in  dcierniining  when  agreement  with  the  antecedent  should  be  preferred. 

Bremi  says:  "videntur  id  (pronomen)  ad  antecedens  substantivum  reterre 
si  ad  rocabulum  respiciunt;  sin  vero  ad  rem,  ad  consequens."  But  Kriiger 
•jhows  that  even  if  thi?  should  explain  Cicero's  practice,  it  is  obviously  a« 
;arian,e  with  that  of  other  writers. 


m 


RELATIVE    CONTINUED. 


[§  9.  52,  5b 


Perpetual,  iaating, 

Fire, 

Island, 

Sea. 

Ocean, 

As  it  were. 

The  world; 

Head,  capital  city, 

To  reject. 

To  admire,  wonder  at, 

To  be  washed. 


To  inhabit, 

To  call  (in  sense  of  naming), 


constellation,  and  also,one  of  the  grea 
heavenly  luminaries,  e.  g.  the  a  tin 
the  moon,  Sirius,  &c. 

sempiternus,  a,  um. 

ignis,  is,  m. 

insula,  ae,y. 

m5re,  is,  n. 

ceeanus,  i,  m. 

quasi. 

orbis  terrse,  or  terraruri  ;  orbis,  is,  m. 

caput,  itis,  n. 

repudiare,  av,  at. 

admirari,  admiratus. 

circumfundi,  circumfusus  (literally,  to 
be  poured  around  ;  and  either  the 
island  or  sea  is  said  circumfundi). 

incolere,  incolu,  incult. 

vocare,h  appellare,  nommare,  av,  at. 


Exercise  8. 

52.  He  rejects  glory,  which  is  the  most  honorable  fruit'  ol 
true'  virtue  (Gen.  hehrefructus).  He  is  admiring  those  perpetual 
fires,  which  we  call  stars.  The  island  is  washed  by  the  sea, 
which  you  (pi-)  call  ocean.  We  inhabit  a  great  island,  as  it 
were,*  which  we  call  the  world.  There  is  nobody  luf>  thinks 
Rome  the  capital'  of  the  world. k     There  is   no  one  but  thinks 

that  Balbus  has  deserved  well  of  us. There  are  some  who 

laugh.     There  are  some  who  laughed  (46,  a). 


§  9.  Relative  continued. — Relative  with  superlative 
first  who — " 


"The 


53.  (a)  When  the  antecedent  has  a  superlative*  with  it,  the 
adjective  is  generally  put  in  the  relative  clause. 


h  Voca.ro.,  appellare,  nominare  are  all  to  call;  but  vocare  has,  beside  this,  tho 
meaning  of  to  call  =  summon. ;  appellare,  that  of  appealing  to,  of  calling  to  foi 
aid  ;  nom.'mare,  that  of  naming,  in  the  sense  of  appointing  or  electing. 

i  Quasi  should  stand  between  great  and  island. 

k  Orbis  terrarum,  rather  than  terra;,  when  there  is  a  decided  reference  to 
other  lands. 

*  The  same  rule  holds  gooa  of  other  adjectives  and  of  appositions 


b  9.  54-57.]  RELATIVE    CONTINUED.  33 

54.  (b)  To  express  "  the  first  person  who  did  a  thing"  the 
Homans  did  not  use  a  relative  sentence,  but  made  primus  agree 
ivith  the  nominative  of  the  principal  verb. 

55.  (a)  Volsci  civitatem,  quam  habebant  optimam,  perdiderunt, 

TheVolsci  lost  the  best  city  they  had. 
(J)  Primus  mala  nostra  sensit,  He  was  the  first  person  who 
perceived  our  evils. 
Eng.  He  was  the  first  who  did  this :  (or,)  He  was  the  Jirst  to 

do  this. 
Lot.  He  the  Jirst  did  this. 

56.  Vocabulary  9. 

Faithful,  fidelis,  is,  e. 

"  Slave,  servus,  i,  m. 

God,  Deus,i  i,  m,  et,/. 

Fire  ^  =  conflagration),  incendium,  i,  n. 

To  help,  a  person  in  perplexity,  Ac.,  subvenlre,  ven,  ventm  (dat.  of  person). 
To  lose,  amittere,    amis,  amiss;  perdere,"  pe; 

did,  perdit. 
An  opportunity,  occasio,  onis,/. 

To  lose  an  opportunity,  occasionem  amitte're. 

Now  ==  already,  jam. 

Such  is  your  temperance  r  quae  tua  est  temperantia, 
With  your  usual   tern-  )  qua  es  temperantia,0 
perance  (  pro  tua  temperantia. 

Asfzr  as  I  know,  quod  sciam. 

Exercise  9. 

57.  He  was  the  first  w'..  promised  to  help3  me.  They  will 
lose  the  best  thing  they  hav.  .  I  will  send  the  most  faithful  slave 
I  have.  He  was  the  first  tclio  denied  that  there  are'  gods.  The 
-fire  is  such 10)  as  1  have  never  seen  before.  The  constellations 
are  the  same,  that  they  have  ever  been.  He  was  the  first  who 
undertook  to  finish3  the  business.  I  hope  that  you,  such  is  your 
temperance,  are  already  well.     No  one,  as  far  as  I  know,  has 


i  Deus,  V.  Dais,  Plur.  (Dei),  Dii,  Dl.     Dat.  {Deis),  Diis}  Dts. 

M  That  is,  to  come  under  a  thing;  i.  e.  to  support  it. 

a  Amittere  is  simply  to  lose.  Perdere  is  to  lose  actively ;  t.  e.  by  some  exer- 
tion of  one's  own  will,  &c.  Hence  perdere  is  often  to  destroy.  Activl  pcrd<\ 
wissire'  amittere  possum. 

0  Or,  cujus  es  temperantUB. 


34  tJT,  ne.  [§10.  53~<)0 

said   this.     Sestius  was  not  corner  as  far  as  1  know.     I  have 

lost  no  opportunity,  as  far  as  I  know. There  are  some  whn 

have  lost  the  opportunity  (46,  a). 


J  10.     Ut,  Ne  expressing  a  purpose. 

bti.  (a)  *  That'  followed  by  may  or  might  expresses  a  purpose 
and  must  be  translated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 
(b)  •  That'  followed  by  ? not,'  or  any  negative  word  (the 
verb  having  may  or  might  for  its  auxiliary),  must  be 
translated  by  ne  with  the  subjunctive. 

59.   Vocabulary  10. 

It  is  all  over  with,  actum  est  de  (with  the  ablat.). 

News  of  the  town,  res  urbanae. 

To  send  or  write  news,  perscribere,  scrips,  script,  =  to  write 

fully. 

Courtesy,  humanitas,  atis,  f. 

Courageously,  farther. 

Virtuously,  honorably,  honeste. 

To  cry  out,  clamare,  av,  at. 

To  live,  vlvgre,  vix,  vict. 

To  die,  mori,  ior,  mortuus. 

To  obey,  parere,  paru,  parlt  (dat.). 

To  make  the  same  promise,  idem  polliceri. 

00.  (a)  Multi  alios  laudant,  ut  ab  illis  laudentur,  Many  men 

praise  others,  that  they  may  be  praised  by  them. 

(b)  Galllnse    avesque    reliquae    pennis    fovent   pullos   ne 

frigore  Icedantur,  Hens  and  other  birds  cherish  their 

young  with  their  feathers,  that  they  may  not  be  hurt 

by  the  cold. 

[C.  xiii.]  (£r  •  To'  is  omitted  after  many  verbs,  which  thus 

seem*  to  govern  two  accusatives. 


;C    xii.]  %jT  Intransitive  verbs  of  motion  often  form  their  perfect  activ* 
with  '  ant,'  not  '  have?    Thus,  am  come,  was  come,  are  the  perfect  and  pluper- 
fect active  (respectively). 
*»  Such  v«rbs  are :  give,  vouchsafe,  assign,  grant,  send. 


fcll.   61-G6.]  UT.    QUO.    NE.  85 

When  a  verb  seems  to  govern  two  accusatives,  try  whether  you  cai>- 
not  put  in  toT  before  one  of  them. 

Exercise  10. 

61.  That  you  may  be  able  to  die  courageously,  obey'  the  laws 
A  virtue.  He  was  pretending  to  be  mad,3  that  he  might  not  bo 
banished.  He  cries  out,  that  it  is  all  over  with  the  army.  You 
{ romised  that  you  would  send  me  all  the  news  of  the  town.  That 
you  may  die  courageously',  live  virtuously  [p.  14,  15,  (J)].  He 
praises'  Caius,  that  he  may  himself  be  praised  by  Caius.  He  will 
praise'  Caius,  that  he  may  be  praised  by  Caius.  No  one,  as  fat 
as  I  know,10  had  praised7  Balbus,  that  he  might  himself  be  praised 
by  Balbus.  You,  such  is  your  courtesy,*  promised  to  finish3  the 
business.  You,  with  your  usual  courtesy,9  made  me  the  same  pro- 
mise1* as  before. There  were  some  who  laughed. 


^  10.  Ut  expressing  a  consequence.     Quo.     Ne  prohibitive. 

62.  (a)  l  That  *  after  such,  so,  &c.  must  be  translated  by  *  ut  * 
with  the  subjunctive. 

After  these  words,  HliaV  does  not  express  a  purpose,  but  a  conse- 
quence; and  the  English  verb  will  not  have  'may'  or  '  might'  with  it. 

63.  (b)  '  TJiat,'  when  the  sentence  has  a  comparative  in  it,  is 
translated  by  quo  ;  which  is  equivalent  to  ut  eo  ('  that  by  this  '). 

64.  '  Not '  in  prohibitions  is  ne. 

65.  (c)  '  Not '  therefore  with  the  imperative,  or  subjunctive  used 

imperatively,  must  be  translated  by  we. 

Obs.  "%jT  The  subjunctive  present  is  more  commonly  used  (Ivan  thi 
imperative. 

66.  (d)  *  As '  before  the   infin.,  and   after  so,  such,  must  be 
translated  by  ut.* 

Except  in  this  idiom  (where  ( as '  expresses  a  consequence  conceived 
as  resulting  on  a  particular  supposition),  ut,  las,y  goes  with  the 
Indicative. 


r  "  He  gave  him  a  penny."     What  did  he  give  1  to  whom? 
1  It  will  be  seen  afterwards,  that  qui  ( =  ut  is)  is  generally  used  in  sentence! 
<  ('this  kind ;  also  that  '  as  not  to  .  .  .  <&c.'  after  a  negative  sentence  is  quin.  85 


SO  UT.    QUO.    NE.  [§11.07-70 

67.  OCf"  No  ut  or  ne  goes  with  the  infinitive. 

08.  (a)   Tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  ut  earn  vel  in  lioste  diligamus. 

The  power  of  integrity  is  so  great,  that  we  love  i\ 

even  in  an  enemy. 

(b)  Medico  puto  aliquid  dandum  esse,  quo  sit  studiosior,   I 

think  that  some  thing  should  be  given  to  the  physician, 
that  he  may  be  the  more  attentive. 

(c)  Ne   multa   discas,    sed   multum,  Do  not  learn  matin 

things,  but  much. 

(d)  Nemo  tarn  potens  est,  ut  omnia  quae  velit  efficere  possit, 

Nobody  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  able  to  perform  all  hi 

wishes. 
69.  Vocabulary  11. 

Daily,  quotldie,  indies,  or  in  dies.t 

Even  mind,  resignation,  sequus  animus. 

Voung,  jiivenis,  junior  =juvenior. 

Age,  time  of  life,  setas,  atis,/. 

About,  de  (governs  ablat). 
Agricultural  operations  or  affairs,   res  rusticae. 

Of  such  a  kind,  ejusmbdi. 

Wind,  ventus,  i.  m. 

Season,  tempestas,  atis,/. 

Multitude,  multitudo,  inis,/. 

To  meditate,  meditation,  meditari,  meditatus. 

To  leave,  relinquere,  rellqu,  relict. 

To  learn,  discgre,  didic. 

To  appear,  seem,  videri,  vlsus. 

To  govern  =  moderate,  limit,  moderari,  atus  (aceua.). 

To  number,  numerare,  av,  at. 

Exercise  11. 

0.  Meditate  upon7)  this  daily,  that  you  may  leave  life  with 
en  even  mind.  He  iolci  many  falsehoods*2  about  his  age,  that  he 
might  appear  younger  (than  he  is).     Do  not  learn  many  things, 


*  From  quot  dies  {as  many  days  as  there  are) ;  compare  the  Greek  hariiiepai.  In 
dies  (daily)  —  day  after  day,  day  by  day ;  when,  that  is,  we  speak  of  a  thing 
increasing  or  diminishing  daily.  In  'indies,'  therefore,  or  tn  dies  singulos? 
each  day  is  considered  as  a  term  of  a  progressive  series.  Quotidie  is  '  ererj 
dcy,  daily,'  in  both  senses ;  either,  that  is,  when  the  simple  repetition  of  an 
action  is  to  be  expressed,  or  its  repetition  combined  with  progressive  increast 
ir  decrease. 


$12.71-77.]  UT    WITH    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  3"i 

but  useful  things.  He  spoke  much  (23,  1,)  that  he  might  be 
ihought  wise.  Agricultural  affairs  are  of  such  a  kind  that  the 
winds  and  seasons  govern  them."  I  know  that  my  father  does  not 
learn  many  things,  but  much.  I  will  live  virtuously,  that  I  may 
die  the  more  courageously. *  He  lived  virtuously,  that  he  might 
leave  life  with  the  greater  resignation.     The  multitude  of  stars  h 

euchl0)  that  they  cannot  be  numbered. There  are  some  who 

nromise  to  help  me. 


§  12.   English  Infinitive  translated  by  '  ut '  with  the  subjunctive. 

71.  OCT  The  Infin.  never   expresses  a  purpose  in  prose  Latin. 

72.  (a)  The  English  Infinitive  expressing  a  purpose  may  he 
'Tunslated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

73.  Whenever  the  English  infinitive  may  be  turned  into  in  order  that,  oi 
that,  with  may  or  might,  it  is  to  be>  translated  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive. 

74  Thus,  "  /  am  come  to  see  you"  =  "lam  come  in  order  that  I  may 

see  you."     Here  my  seeing  you  is  obviously  the  purpose  of  my  coming. 
But  in  many  verb3  this  relation  of  the  purpose  is  more  obscure. 

For  instance 

I  advise    ,,)       yoa  to  do  it  =z         \  I  advise  or  exhort  you,  in  order 
1  exhort      )  (      that  you  may  do  it. 

1  ask  ]      you  to  do  it  =         \ I  °**»  or  be°  you'  in  order  that  ynu 

I  beg,  &c.  )  (     may  do  it. 

I  command  you  to  do  it  =  \  l  command  you,  in  order  thai  yoo 

(      may  do  it. 
\  strive  to  do  it  =  I  strive  in  order  that  I  may  do  it. 
75.         By  (u£'  transh'3  infinitive 

With  ask,  command,  advise,  and  strive. 

But  never  be  this  rule  forgot, 

Put  'ne'  for  'w/'  when  there's  a'not.' 

76    But  of  verbs  signifying  'to  command?  jubeo  takes  ace.  and 

infin. — [See  however  noteh  219.] 
77.   (a)  Romulus,  ut  civium  numerum  augeret,  asylum  pate- 

fecit,  Romulus,  to  increase  the  number  of  his  citizens, 

opened  an  asylum. 

;ls'  is  ;he  proper  pronoun   for  the  third  person,  when  there  is  no 
iiitinction  to  be  expressed  between  a  nearer  and  remoter  object,  and  no  refer 
jiice  to  be  strongly  marked. 
*  The  neuter  of  the  comparative  adjective  is  used  for  the  comparative  ad  veil 


S8  UT    WITH    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE.  [§  12.   7b 

(b)  Militibus  imperavit,  ut  clypeos  h astis  percuterent,  lit 

commanded  the  soldiers  to  strike  their  shields  with 
their  spears. 

(c)  Enitar,  ut  vincam,  I  will  strive  to  conquer. 

(d)  Magno  opere   te  hortor,  ut  hos  de  philoscphia  libros 

studiose  legas,  I  earnestly  advise  you  to  read  atten- 
tively these  books  about  philosophy. 

(e)  Capram  monet,  ut  in  pratum  descendatt  He  advises  the 

she-goat  to  come  down  into  the  meadow. 

(f)  Hoc  te  rogo,  ne*  demittas  animum,  I  beg  of  you  nol 

to   be  disheartened.     (Literally,  not  to  depress  your 
mind.) 
fC.  xiv.]  When  'that'  introduces  a  consequence,  'that  not'  u 
ut  non,  not  ne. 

That-***         \hTa  purpose ne- 

( consequence.  .  .ut  non. 

78.  Vocabulary  12.     (Verbs  followed  by  ut.) 

To  ask,  rbgare,  av,  at. 

To  strive,  nlti,  more  commonly  enlti,   nisus,    a/ad 

nixus. 

To  advise,  suadere,  suas,  suas  (dat.  of  person). 

To  warn,  monere,  monu,  monit  {ace.  of  person). 

To  exhort,  hortari,  adhortari,  tatus. 

To  command,  imperare,w  av,  at  (dat.). 

To  charge  or  commission,  mandare,  av,  at  (dot.). 

To  direct,  tell,  when  spoken  of)          -          .       - 

an  instructor.  5  pra^cipcre,  10,  cep,  cept. 


+  For  ne,  ut  ne  is  found  with  no  perceptible  difference  of  meaning.  Z.  Groto- 
fend  thinks  that  Cirero  uses  ut  ne  in  the  following  cases :  (1)  when  the  negative 
does  not  so  much  belong  to  the  whole  clause,  as  to  a  particular  part  of  it,  e,  g. 
the  verb,  or  quis,  quid ;  (2)  when  a  demonstrative  pron.  or  pronominal  adverb  is 
expressed  or  implied  in  the  preceding  clause ;  (3)  when  without  u{,  ne  would 
Btand  by  a  word  to  which  ne  is  often  appended,  as  non,  an.  He  says  that  ut  ne 
la  found,  though  less  commonly  than  in  Cicero,  in  Plautus,  Terence,  Ovid,  &c.  ; 
out  four  times  (and  that  in  doubtful  passages)  in  Livy,  and  not  at  all  in  Caesar 
and  Tacitus. 

w  Jubere,  to  order,  bid  (with  the  notion  of  the  thing  being  right,  or  of  tho 
person  having  a  right  to  order)  ;  imverare,  to  command  with  power ;  prceeipere, 
to  direct,  from  being  qualified  to  do  so  by  superior  knowledge  ;  mandare,  to  give 
a  charge  ^r  commission  to  a  person  ;  edicere,  to  declare  officially  as  a  magistrate 
'©  publish  a  proclamation. 


)  13.  79,  80.]  UT    WITII    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

To  order,  by  a  proclamation,  or  )  ed  edix>  ^ct 

edict,  to  publish  an  edict,  ) 
To  decree,  decern?re,  crcv,  cr£t. 

Perseverance,  perseverantia,  Be,  J. 

Fury,  furor,  oris,  m. 

Senate,  senatus,  (is,  m. 

Dress,  vestltus,  us,  m. 

To  return,  redlre*  (re  and  eo). 

To  hold  a  levy  of  troops,  to  levy  )  de]ectum  hfLbgre> 

troops,  ) 
Consul,  consul,  consiilis,  m. 

To  assist,  juvare,  juvi,  jutum. 

To  suffer,  pati,  ior,  passus. 

rro  take  by  storm,  per  vim  expugnare. 

By  letter,  per  llteras. 

Exercise  12. 

79.  I  ask  you  to  do  this.  I  asked  you  to  do  this.  Strive  U 
assist  me.  He  is  striving  to  govern  the  winds  and  seasons.  He 
warned  Csesar  not  to  believe  the  Gauls.  Do  not  believe  the  Gauls. 
Do  not  lie.  Religion  warns  men  not  to  He.  It  is  certain,  that 
the  boy  is  striving  to  learn.  I  will  exhort  the  boy  to  learn.  We 
know  that  virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other.  He  pub- 
lished-an-edict,  that  the  Senate  should  return  to  its  (usual)  dress. 
He  had  charged  Trebonius  by  letter  not  to  suffer  Marseilles*  to 
be  taken  by  storm.  His  perseverance  is  as  great  as9)  his  fury. 
The  Senate  decrees,  that  the  Consuls  should  levy  troops. — There 
are  some  who  lie. 


§  13.  Ut,  &c.  continued. 

80.  {a)  In  sentences  where  '  ut '  should  be  used  (to  express  a 
pur-pose),  if  a  negative  follows,  ne  takes  its  place,  and  the  affirma 
live  pronoun  or  adverb  is  used.     Thus — 


*  o,  ivi  (it  generally  in  the  compounds),  Itum.  Pres.,  to,  is,  it ;  imtu,  His 
una.  Imp.  ibam.  Fut.  ibo.  Imperat.  i.  Subj.  pres.  earn.  Imp.  irem.  Part 
ien»,  euntis.     Gel    eundi,  &c. 

v  Maseilia. 


10 


VT 

[§13.  81-3» 

not, 

DUt, 

that  nobody, 

ut  nemo, 

ne  quis, 

that  nothing, 

ut  nihil. 

ne  quid, 

that  no, 

ut  null  us, 

ne  ullus, 

that  never, 

ut  nunquam, 

ne  unquam. 

81.  (b)  But  if  the  sentence  is  a  consequence,  then  ut  nemo,  &c.  should  be  used 

82.  (a)  Alexander  edixit,  ne  quis  ipsum  alius,  quam  Apelles, 

pingeret,  Alexander  published  an  edict,  that  no  other 
person  than  Apelles  should  paint  him  {Purpose), 
(b)  Cimon  fuit  tantd  liberalitate,  ut  nunquam  hortis  suis 
custodem  imposuerit,*  Cimon  was  (a  person)  of  such 
liberality,  that  he  never  appointed  a  keeper  for  his 
gardens  (Consequence). 

83.  Vocabulary  13. 

It  remains,  rellquum  est,  restat. 

It  follows ;  the  next  thing  is,  sequitur.t 

That  (offer  reliquum  est,  restat,  >  m  ^  mhjunctiveY 

and  sequitur,)  ) 

To  desert, 

To  make  this  request  of  you, 
To  leave  =  go  out  of, 
City, 
Town, 
First, 
At  first. 

For  the  sake  of, 
For  my  sake, 
Fear, 

Unwilling, 
Glad,  joyful, 


desSrere,  seru,  sert. 

illud  te  rogare. 

excedSre,  cess,  cess  (ablat  )• 

urbs,  urbis,  f. 

oppidum,1  ij  n. 

primum. 

primo.a 

causa. 

mea  causa. 

timor,  oris,  m. 

invltus.  a,  um. 

laetus,  a,  um. 


(Lat.)     He  did  it  unwilling  ;  glad;  joyful. 
(Eng.)  He  did  it  unwillingly ;  gladly;  joyfully. 


*  The  use  of  the  perfect  subj.  in  this  example  instead  of  the  vrnpsrf.  will  be 
jxplained  in  another  place  [418.  (a)].  It  is  not  to  be  imitated  in  doing  the 
gsercises. 

t  Absil  ut,  l  be  it  far  from  me'  (as  given  in  the  earMer  editions),  belongs  to  tho 
later  poets  and  Appuleius.  Instead  of  it  we  should  use  velim  hoc  absit;  or  quod 
procul  absit,  inserted  parenthetically. 

1  "  Oppidum  proprie  infra  urbem  est ;"  but  all  cities  and  towns  came  to  be 
frequently)  denominated  oppida  except  Home.    (Valla,  quoted  by  Crombie.) 

*  Frimo  is  sometimes  used  for  l first'  but  not  primum  for  lat  first*    C. 


$ 14.  34-88.]  quin.  41 

Exercise  13. 

84.  Religion  warns  (us)  never  to  break  our  word.  The  boy 
strives  to  learn  nothing.  I  first  make  this  request  of  you,  to  do 
nothing  against  your  will  for  my  sake.  The  Consuls  publish-a- 
proclamation,  that  no  one  should  leave  the  city.  So  great  was 
the  fear  of  all  men,  that14'  no  one  left  the  city.  The  Senate 
decreed  that  the  Consuls  should  hold  a  levy.  It  remains  that  1 
should  assist  Balbus.  There  was  no  one  but  exclaimed,  that  it 
mas  all  over  with  the  army.     They  had  joyfully  helped   Balbus. 

There  were  some  who  assisted  Balbus.     There  were  some 

who  denied  that  virtue  and  vice  were  contrary  to  each  other.     It 
follows  that  you  deny  virtue  and  vice  to  be  contrary  to  each  other. 


§  14.     Quin  after  verbs  of  doubting,  &c. 

85.  (a)  When  '  as  not '    with  the  infinitive  follows    c  so  '    or 

1  such '  in  a  negative  sentence,  it  is  to  be  translated  by  *  quin '  with 

the  subjunctive. 

fjT  The  sentence  before  quin  is  always  negative.     (An  interrogative 
sentence  that  expects  the  answer  '  no,'  is  in  effect  a  negative  sentence.) 

86.  (b)  *  But,'  '  but  that,9  or  <  that,1  after  verbs  of  doubting, 
denying,  restraining,  &c,  in  negative  sentences,  must  be  trans- 
ited by  quin. 

87.  (c)  Afte:  negative  sentences  the  participial  substantive  governed  by  a  pre- 

position (especially  after  the  verbs  mentioned  in  86)  should  be  trans- 
lated by  quin,  with  subj. 

Si,  (a)  Cleanthes  ncgat  ullum  esse  cibum  tarn  gravem,  quin  is 

die  et  nocte  concoquatur,  Cleanthes  says  that  no  food 

is  so  heavy,  as  not  to  be  digested  in  a  day  and  a 

night. 

(b)  Negari  non  potest,  quin  turpius  sit  fallere  quam  falli, 

It  cannot  be  denied,  that  it  is  more  disgraceful  to 
deceive  than  to  be  deceived. 

(c)  Nunquam  adspexit,  quin  fratricldam  compellaret,  She 

never  saw  him  without  calling  him  fratricide. 
Vix    inhiberi   potuit,    quin   saxa    jaceret,    He   could 
scarcely  be  prevented  from  throwing  stones. 


i'J  quin.  [$14.  89-9'i 

89.  Vocabulary  14.  [Of  words,  &c,  followed  by  quin.'\ 
Not  to  doubt,  non  dubitare. 

There  in  no  douM,  non  est  dubium  (it  is  not  doubtful) 

It  cannot  be  but  that,  fieri  non  potest  quin. 

I  cannot  refrain  from,  temperare  mihi  non  possum. 

It  cannot  be  denied,  negari  non  potest. 

To  leave  nothing  undone  to,  <&c.      nihil  prsetermittere  quin. 

I  am  not  ignorant,  non  ignoro. 

World,  mundus,  i,  ra. 

Design,  consilium,  i,  n. 

Sometimes,  interdum. 

Exercise  14. 

90.  Who  doubts  that  virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other  1 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  it  is  disgraceful  to  lie.  Who  doubts  that 
the  world  was  made  by  design  ?  I  don't  doubt  that  both  you  and 
Balbus  lifted  up  your  hands.  He  never  sees  Caesar  without  crying 
out  that  it  is  all  over  with  the  army.  I  left  nothing  undone  to 
fin?  :h  the  business.  /  cannot  but  help  Balbus.  It  cannot  be 
denied  that  Caius  has  had  a  prosperous  voyage.  I  cannot  refrain 
from  leaving  the  city.     No  one  is  so  good  as  not  sometimes  to  sin. 

There  were  some  who  left  the  city.     I  am  not  ignorant,  thai 

Caius  has  lost  the  opportunity, 


91.  Non  possumus,  quin  alii  a  nobis  dissentiant,  recusare,  We 

cannot  object  to  others  dissentingyrom  us. 
Minimum   abfuit  (impers.)  Octavianus  quin  periret,  Oc- 
taviamus  was  very  near  perishing.     (Or,  But  a  little 
more,  and  Octavianus  would  have  perished.) 

92.  Vocabulary  15.  (Words  and  phrases  followed  by  quin.) 

Not  to  object,  non  recusare.b 

To  be  very  near,  to  be  within  a  ?  minimum  abesse  (to  be  used  impe» 

very  little,  )  sonally). 

Not  to  be  far  from,  haud  multum  aoesse,  or  haud  procui 

abesse  (impersonally). 

To  kill,  interficgre,  io,  fee,  feet. 

Of  iron,  iron-hearted,  ferreus,  a,  um. 

Children,  libgri  (plur.). 


b  From  re  and  causa. 


$  15.  93-97.] 

QUOMINUS. 

To  love, 

amare,  av,  at. 

A  letter, 

literee  (plur.). 

Truly, 

vere. 

The  soul, 

animus,  i,  m. 

The  mind, 

mens,  mentis,"5^ 

Immortal, 

immortalis,  is,  e. 

. 

Exercise  15. 

4S 


93.  He  was  within  a  little  of  Icing  killed.  *  It  cannot  be  denied 
lhat  it  is  disgraceful  to  break  one's  word.  It  cannot  be  denied 
that  duty  commands  us  to  keep  (75)  our  promises.  I  am  within  a 
oery  little  of  being  most  miserable.  No  one  is  so  iron-hearted  as 
not  to  love  his  own  children.  J  cannot  hut18  send  you  a  letter 
laily.  That  you  may  be  able  to  learn  much,  do  not  learn  many 
things.  The  truly  wise  man  will  never  doubt  that  the  soul  is 
immortal.  I  will  not  object  to  your  banishing  me.  I  will  not 
object  to  your  all  leaving  the  city.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the 
rational-faculty  should  (debeo)  command  the  heart.  It  cannot  be 
that  the  mind  is  not  immortal.20 


§  15.     Quominus. 

94.  V erbs  of  hindering  are  generally  followed  by  quominus. 
This  quo  minus  (by  which  the  less)  z=.jd  to  minus  (that  the  leas  by  it). 

95.  With  verbs  of  fearing,  '  that '  must  be  translated  by,  '  we  ;' 
that  not '  by  <  ut.7 

a)  '  That  not   may  also  be  translated  by  '  nt  non,'  which  is  stronger 
than  'ut, 
95.         [C.  xv.]    After  verbs  of  fearing,  the  Eng.  future  and  the  participial 
substantive  are  translated  by  the  present  or  imperfect  subjunctive  with 
ut  or  ne. 
97.  (a)  Quid  obstat  quominus  Caius  sit  beatus  ?   What  pre* 
vents  Caius  from  being  happy  ? 
(Or,  quid  obstat  Caiod  quominus  sit  beatus  ?) 


c  Anrma,  the  breath  of  life,  the  vital  principle  (common  to  all  living  things). 
inimzis,  'the  soul,'  the  mind  with  its  passions,  emotions,  appetites,  Ac,  'the 
\eart.}  Mens,  the  intellectual  faculty ;  the  rational  faculty.  Hence  animus  should 
tw  us«d  for  mind,  when  it  moans  disposition,  sjnrit,  &c. 

J  Wi  h  quid  obstat  (especially  when  theperson  is  represented  by  a  pi  on.  of  the 
fir-it  or  second  person),  the  dot.  is  generally  omitted.    Umess  it  be  a  pron..  it 


11  quoMiNUS.  JJ 15.  98-100 

(b)  J  Vereor  ne  veniat,  I  fear  that  he  will  come. 
(  Vereor  ut  veniat,  I  fear  that  he  will  not  come. 
98.  (Eng.)  What  prevents  Cains  from,  being  happy1?    - 

(Lot.)  What  prevents,  by  which  Caius  should  be  the  less  happy? 

99    Vocabulary  16. 

(Verbs  that  may  be  followed  oy  quominus.) 
To  prevent,  obstare,  obstlt,  obstlt  {dat). 

To  deter,  deterrere,  de<terru,  deterrit. 

To  hinder,  impedlre,  Ivi,  Itum. 

It  is  owing  to  Caius  that,  per  Caium  stat  quominus,  <fcc. 

To  endure,  sustinere,  tinu,  tent. 

To  fear.  vereri,  veritus  ;  timere ;  metuSre,  mo 

tui.e 
Nothing,  nihil  {indeclinable). 

To  obey,  parere,  ui   lfum  (dat.). 

To  increase,  augere,  aux,  auct,  trans. ;  crescPre  crev, 

cret,  (intrans.). 
Bv  sea  and  land,  terra  marique. 

Exercise  16. 

[Is  quotidie  or  indies  used  of  daily  increase  or  decrease  ?J 
100.  What  prevents  us  from  doing  this  1  Nothing  prevents 
you  from  doing  this.  Nothing  deters  a  wise  man  from  obeying 
the  laws  of  virtue7.  Nothing  deterred  Caius  from  obeying  the 
laws.  I  fear  that  I  shall  not  endure  such10)  labours.  I  fear  that 
he  will  not  be  able  to  endure  such  labours.  I  fear  that  I  shall 
increase  your  labours.  What  prevents  us  from  waging  war  by 
sea  and  land  ?  What  prevents  you  from  carrying  all  your  pro- 
perty with  you  ?  Do  not  pretend  to  be  mad.3  It  cannot  be  de- 
nied that  vice  increases  daily.  It  was  owing  to  Caius  that  we  did 
not  wage  war  by  sea  and  land. 


will  then  stand  as  nom.  to  the  next  verb.    After  deter,  &c.,  the  ace.  should  be 
expressed,  unless  it  be  a  pronoun  of  the  first  or  second  person. 

e  Timere,  metuere,  vereri,  are  all  used  for  fear;  but  (1)  if  a  reverential  or 
humble  fear  is  to  be  expressed,  vereor  should  be  used ;  (2)  if  an  anxious  fear  of 
a  threatening  evil,  metuere.  Mttus  is  the  fear  of  the  mind  arising  from  a  con- 
sideration of  circumstances  and  appearances :  timor,  the  fear  that  arises  from 
the  body ;  from  timidity.  (See  D.  vereri.)  Vereor,  which  expresses  the  least 
degree  of  actual  fear,  should  be  used  to  express  doubt  or  fear  about  the  happen- 
ing of  such  an  event,  or  the  truth  of  such  an  opinion.  Formidare,  l  to  dread,' 
of  green  and  lasting  fear 


&  16,  17.   101-  106. j    INTERROGATIVE    WORDS.  46 

VI. 

§  16.     Interrogative  Sentences. 

101.  Questions  (when  interrogative  pronouns  or  adverb*  arj  not  .ised)  are 
generally  asked  in  Latin  by  interrogative  particles. 

102.  (a)  Ne  asks  simply  for  information,     (o)  Num  expects 
fc  answer  'no  :'  (c)  nonne,  the  answer  'yes.1 

103.  NS  is  enclitic;  that  is,  always  appended  to  a  word,  and  written  as  its 
list  syllable. 

104.  (a)  Scribitne  Caius  ?     Is  Caius  writing  ? 

(b)  Num  putas  .  .  .  ?     Do   you   think  ?  (  =   you   don'l 

think,  do  yow  ?) 

(c)  Nonne  putas  .  .  ?     Don't   you   think  ?    (  =  you  do 

think,  don't  you  ?) 
Quid  ?  nonne  canis  similis  est  lupo  ?     WAa*  ?  is  nol 
a  dog  like  a  wolf  ? 


§  17.     Interrogative  Words. 

105.    Who  ?    (quis.)     How  ?   (qut,    abl. :   with   an   adjective. 
quam.)     How  docs.it  happen  that  ?  (qui  fit  ut  .  .  ?  with  sub).) 

nrt.    9   S  cur  (  =  cui  rci)* 
Why  •    \  quare'  (  =  qua  re). 

When?  (quando?)     (Quum  is  never  interrogative.) 


Where, 

Whence, 

Whither, 


ubi,  )  C  ibi, 

unde,        >  relatives  to  <  inde,  hinc. 

quo,         )  ( eo  (hue,  illuc). 

Exercise  17. 


106.  Have  not  the  good  and  wise  been  banished?     Are  not 
\i'1ue  and  vice  contrary  to  each  other?     Do  men  govern  the 


t  Quare  {wherefore)  is  only  used  when  the  cause  is  decidedly  asked  :  when, 
that  is.  an  answer  is  required.  Cur  is  used  whether  an  answer  is  required  or 
%ot :  hence  it  is  the  proper  word  in  expostulatory  and  objurgutory  sentence* 


46  DEPENDENT    QUESTIONS.  [§18.  107-1 15 

winds  ana  seasons  ?  [No.]  Shall  we  not  all  die  ?  Was  not  the 
world  made  by  design  ?  Bo  we  not  owe  very  much  to  our  parents  ? 
Was  it  not  owing  to  you  that  we  did  not  leave  the  city  ?  Was 
not  Caius  within  a  very  little  of  being  killed  ?24  Were  not  the 
waves  such101  as  you  had  never  seen  before  ?  Whence  do  you 
come  1  (or,  Where  do  you  come  from  ?)  Did  all  promise  to  help8 
you  ?  [No.]  Did  he  not  promise  unwillingly  to  finish  the  busi- 
ness ?  Do  we  not  all  hope  to  live8  a  long  while  ?  Has  he  not 
finished  the  business  satisfactorily  P  There  are  some  who109 
deny  that  Caius  has  finished  the  business.  There  were  some 
who  reviled  me. 


§  18.     Dependent  Questions. 

1 07.        A  dependent  question  is  one  that  is  connected  with  a  preceding  word 

or  sentence. 
103.        Dependent  questions  follow  and  depend  on  such  words  as  to  ask. 

doubt,  know,  or  not  know,  examine,  try,  &c. 

109.  (a)  (b)  (c)  The  verb  in  a  dependent  question  must  be  in 
the  subjunctive  mood. 

110.  In  English,  dependent  questions  are  asked  by  whether ;  or  by  inter- 
rogative pronouns  and  adverbs. 

111.  Since  what  and  who  are  also  relatives,  but  the  relative  is  in  Latin  a 
different  pronoun,  care  must  be  taken  to  use  quis,  quid,  (not  qui,  quod) 
in  dependent  questions. 

112.  [C.  xvi.]  0^7"  Who,  tohat,   which,  are   often   dependent 

interrogates,  especially  after  verbs    of    asking, 
knowing,  doubting,  &c. 

113.  After  most  of  these  verbs  the  dependent  sentence  stands  as  the 
accusative  to  the  transitive  verb. 

114.  The  verb  in  an  accusative  sentence  must  be  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood. 

115.  (a)  Dubito,  numz  id  tibi  suadere  debeam,  I dcubt  whether 

I  ought  to  give  you  that  advice. 


8  Obs.  In  a  dependent'  sentence,  num  is  '  whether,'  and  does  not  necessarily 
imply  that  vhe  answer  ino>  is  expec  ted.  If,  however,  the  answer  ina>  is  ex- 
pected, num  should  be  used,  not  r,e. 


&  19.   116-119.]  DOUBLE    QUESTI0N3.  47 

(b)  Quaesieras  ex  me,  ncnnc  putarem,  &c,  You  had  itu 

quired  of  me  whether  I  did  not  think,  &c. 

(c)  Quis  es  ? — Nescio,  quis  sis. 

116.  Vocabulary  17. 

To  inquire,  quaerffre,  quaeslv,  quaeslt. 

Of  (after  inquire),  ex  (with  ablat.). 

To  say,  dlcCre,  dix,  diet. 

Well  =:  rightly,  recte. 

Dog,  canisi,  is,  com.  gend. 

Like,  slmilis,  is,  e  (dot.). 

Wolf,  lupus,  i,  m. 

To  be  better,  i.  e  a  thing  to  be  )  satiug  esge< 
preferred,  ) 

1  don't  know  whether,  I  almost )  haud   scio  an,  or  nescio  an  (vilh    sub- 
think,  I  am  not  sure  that— not,  )     junct.). 

Dishonourably.  turpiter. 

Exercise  18. 

117.  Where  do  you  come  from?  I  will  ask  him  where  he 
uumes  from.  Ought  I  to  do  this  ?  I  doubt  whether  I  ought  to  dc 
this.  He  asked  whether  a  dog  was  not  very  like  a  wolf.  1 
don't  know  whether  he  has  not  said  well.  He  said  that  he  did 
not2  know.2)  Balbus  has  not  come,  as  far  as  I  know.10  Is  it  not 
better  to  die  than  to  live  dishonourably  1  I  will  leave  nothing  un. 
done  to  finish18  the  business  to  your  satisfaction.5  I  will  ask  (him) 
how  great  the  waves  ware.  Who  does  not  know  how  delightful 
it  is  to  be  praised  by  the  good  ?  I  will  inquire  of  Balbus  how 
many  there  were.  There  are  some  who109  have  inouircd  oi 
Balbus. 


§  19.  Double  Questions.      Use  of  *  an '  in  single  questums, 

118.  (a)  (b)  In  double  questions  'whether'  is  to  be  translated 

uy  utrum,  num,  or  the  appended  ne;  'or'  by  an. 

Num.  in  direct  questions  is  only  to  be  used  when  the  answer  'no'  is 
expected. 

119.  (c)  (d)  (e)  But  in  dependent  questions  'whether1  is 
often  untranslated,  and  '  or 9  translated  by  an,  anne,  or  the  ap- 
pended ne. 


43  DOUBLE    QUESTIONS.  [§  19.  120-122 

1 20.  (/)  An  is  often  found  before  single  questions,  but  this  was  at  leas' 
not  a  common  practice  with  Cicero,  &c.  When  an  is  so  used,  there  is. 
always  an  ellipse  of  the  other  possibility,  which  may  generally  be  sup- 
plied without  difficulty. 

(a)  The  supposition  involved  in  the  question  is  often  obviously  absurd; 
so  that  assent  is  really  demanded  to  the  suppressed  alternative.  The 
force  of  such  a  question  may  often  be  given  in  English  by  '  then* 

(/?)  This  use  of  'an'  is  often  found  in  replies;  between  which  and  the 
preceding  statement  an  expression  of  assent  or  dissent  must  be  supplied. 

(y)  There  is  the  same  suppression  of  the  first  supposition,  in  hand  scio, 
or  nescio  an;  dubito  an;  incertum  est  an;  quazro  an;  consulo  an;forsi- 
tan  (fors  sit  an),  &c.    (Hartung,  Partikellehre,  ii.  190.) 

jjpT  '  Or '  in  questions  is  to  be  translated  by  an  or  ne ;  never  by  aut  in  a 
proper  double  question ;  when,  that  is,  one  question  is  to  be  answered  in 
the  affirmative,  the  other  in  the  negative. 

121.  (a)   Utrum  ea  vestra  an  nostra  culpa  est  1     Is  that  your 

fault  or  ours  ? 

(b)  Permultum  interest,  utrum  perturbatione  aliqua  animi 

an  consulto  et  cogitato  fiat  injuria,  It  makes  a  very 
great  difference  whether  an  injury  is  done  from 
some  perturbation  of  mind,  or  deliberately  and  pur- 
posely. 

(c)  Stellarum    numerus    par   an   impar   sit,    incertum, 

Whether  the  number  of  the  stars  is  even  or  odd,  is 
uncertain. 

(d)  Quoeritur  unusne  eit  mundus  an  plures,  It  is  a  ques- 

tion whether  there  is  one  world  or  more. 

(e)  Servi  liberine  sint  quid  refert  ?    What  does  it  signify 

whether  they  are  slaves  or  free  ? 
(f.)  An*  turn  quoque  est  utilis  (iracundia)  1  Is  (passion- 
ateness)  useful  even  then  ?     [Is  it  not  then  preju- 
dicial ?] 

122.  Vocabulary  18. 

It  makes  a  very  great  difference,     permultum  interest. 
What  difference  is  there  ?  what  )        . ,  . 
difference  does  it  make?  quid  interest? 


*  In  the  following  passage  tue  suppressed  alternative  is  so  obvious,  that  we 
night  introduce  the  question  by  lor:  Cur  misereare  potius  quam  feras  opem. 
Ii  id  facere  possis  ?  an  sine  misericordia  liberales  esse  ncn  possumus  ?  \Miy 
fioidd  you  pity,  rather  than  assist  them  if  you  can?  Or,  is  it  impossible  for  us  te 
&  liberal  without  pitying  ? 


§20.123,124.]       may,  might;  can,  could.  49 

There  is  no  difference,  nihil  interest. 

Beasts  (in  their  wild  state),  fPrse. 

To  drink,  blbSre,  bib,  bibit. 

Wine,  vlnum,  i,  n. 

Water,  aqua,  se,  f. 

Death,  mors,  mortis,/. 

Sleep,  somnus,  i,  m. 

Beginning,  initium,  i,  n. 

Another  z=  a  second,  one  more,  alter,  altera,  alterum,  Gen.  alterius,  Ac 

Or -not  (often  without  a  verb,  as  J  an  non>  w  ^Q^   U8Ual,y  {n  ^^ 

necneb  in  indirect  questions. 


the  second  member  of  a  dou- 
ble question), 


Exercise  19. 

123.  What  difference  does  it  make  whether  you  drink  wine  or 
water  ?  Whether  the  Romans  have  conquered  or  are  conquered, 
is  uncertain.  Was  the  world  made  for  the  sake  of  men  or 
beasts  ?  Is  death  an  eternal'  sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another 
life  ?  It  makes  a  great  difference,  whether  death  be  a  perpetual 
sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another  life.  Whether  the  Romans 
have  conquered  or  not,  is  uncertain. 


§  20.  How  to  translate  may,  might ;  can,  could,  &c,  when  they 
are  principal  verbs. 

124.  May;  perf.  Might  (permission).     Licet,d  it  is  permitted. 


b  By  necne  the  questions  are  joined  copulatively,  by  an  non  adversatively.  In 
necne  therefore  the  question  is  made,  as  it  were,  one;  and  no  opinion  of  the 
speaker's  is  implied  as  to  the  thing's  being  so  or  not.  In  an  non  the  notions 
are  opposed  to  each  other,  either  simply,  or  so  that  it  is  implied  that  the  one  is 
more  probable  than  the  other  {Hand).— The  verb  is  more  frequently  repeated 
with  necne  than  with  annon:  the  only  instance  of  necne  in  a  direct  question  is 
Cic.  Tusc.  3, 18.  Sunt  hax  tua  verba,  necne?  (K.)  Necne  generally  occurs  in 
itpendent  questions. 

e  jEtemus,  without  beginning  or  end,  'eternal.'  SempUernus  is  'ever- 
'anting,'  'perpetual;'  'eternal'  in  a  looser  sense,  without  reference  to  an 
eternity  without  either  beginning  or  end.  SempUernus  is  therefore  the  right 
word  here. 

d  Licet,  it  is  permitted,  or  lawful,  by  human  law  (positive,  customary,  oi 
additional) :   fas  est,   it  is  permitted  by  divine  law   (including   the  law  of 

3 


50  MAY;  MIGHT  J    CAN,  COULD.  [§  20.  125,  126 

Pres.  (mihi)  ire  licet,  I  may  go. 

(tibi)  ire  licet,  thou  mayest  go, 
&c. 
Perf.  (mihi)  ire  licuit,  I  might  have  gone. 

(tibi)  ire  licuit,  thou  mightest  have  gone, 
&c. 

125.  Can  ;  perf.  Could  (power,  possibility).     Possum,*    can 
w,\  able. 

Pres.  (ego)  facere  possum,  I  can  do  it. 

(tu)    facere  potes,  thou  canst  do  it. 
&c. 
Perf.  (ego)  facere  potui,  J  could  have  done  it, 

(tu)    facere  potuisti,  thou  couldst  have  done  it. 
&c. 

*nQ    r\  r  t  4  ■  ±  \    S  oportet,  it  behooves 

126.  Ought  ;  should  (duty,  propriety).  <  /,       ' 

v      9tr  r      n)    ^debe0j  J  0Ughtu 

Pres.  (me)  facere  oportef  <        &  >  (ego)  facere  debeo. 

C      (it)  ) 

(te)  facere  oportet     <  to  >  (tu)  facere  debes. 

V    ;  *  I      to  do  (it)      )  K    } 


conscience) :  concessum  est,  it  is  permitted,  comprehends  both  as  a  general 
expression. 

e  Or,  queo  :  cannot,  nequeo  (Inf.  quire,  nequire,  like  eo).  Pcssum  relates  to 
the  ability  of  the  doer ;  queo  to  the  feasibility  (to  him)  of  the  thing  to  be  done. 
Possum,  I  can  do  it,  if  no  external  hinderances  occur :  queo ,  I  can  do  it,  because 
there  are  no  external  hinderances,  sufficient  to  prevent  me;  I  am  in  a  condition 
to  do  it.  This  is  expressed  by  saying  that  possum  denotes  subjective,  queo  objec- 
tive possibility  :  or  (in  Dbderleirts  words)  possum  quantitative,  queo  qualitative 
possibility.  Doderlein  observes :  "The  best  prose  writers,  as  Cicero  and  Sal- 
lust,  and  even  Pliny  and  other  later  authors,  frequently  use  queo,  but  (like  quis- 
qaam  and  ullus)  only  in  negative  propositions :  that  is,  only  in  such  as  actually 
contain  a  negation,  or  at  least  are  of  a  negative  character." 

t  Necesse  est,  expresses  necessity ;  oportet,  duty  or  propriety ;  opus  est,  advisa* 
gleness.  Debeo  is  the  corresponding  personal  form  to  oportet,  as  indigeo  to  opus 
rst.  Oportet  expresses  the  moral  claim;  debeo,  the  moral  obligation  of  a  pir- 
\icviar  person  to  satisfy  that  claim.  Debire  is  generally  supposed  to  be  de-habere, 
'to  have/rom'  a  person,  and  therefore  to  owe  it  to  him.  Doderlein  is  inclined 
to  refer  it  with  debilis,  to  tew,  Sevu,  to  want. 

8  Or,  I  should  do  (it)  ) 

Thau  should**  lo  (it).    1&C- 


$20.  127-132.]        may,  might;  can, could.  61 

127.  Perf.  (me)  facere  C I  ought  to  have   )  (      ,  f  , .    . 

oportuit  I       done  (it)       \  Vg0>  laccre  Jebu1' 

(te)  facere  oportuit  j  J^Zte(it)  \  W  facere  debuistK 
(a)  Or,  with  the  subjunctive  governed  by  '  ut'  omitted  ; 

(ego)  faciam  oportet,h  /  ought  to  do  (it). 

(tu)     facias  oportet,  thou  oughtest  to  do  (it). 

128.  03"  Mi ay,  might;  can,  could;  should,  &c,  when  they 
stand  in  principal  clauses,  are  not  auxiliary  but  principal  verbs ; 
and  must  be  translated  by  the  proper  tenses  of  licet,  possum, 
oportet,  or  debeo,  &c. 

129.  May,  might,  are  often  used  of  events  the  possibility  of 
which  is  granted  by  the  speaker.  May  or  might  is  then  equivalent 
to  may  (or  might)  possibly  ;  may  for  any  thing  I  know. 

C  may  happen,  }  it  is  to  be  trans- 

(a)  When  *  may '  =  <  may  possibly,  >    lated  by  fieri 

(  may  for  anything  I know,  )    potest  ut 

(Fieri  potest  ut  fallar,  J  may  be  deceived.) 

130.  The  perf.  infin.  after  a  past  tense  of  a  verb  expressing 
duty,  possibility,  permission,  &c,  is  generally  to  be  translated  by 
the  pres.  infinitive. 

That  is,  the  time  is  marked  by  the  tense  of  the  verb  expressing  duty, 
&c,  and  the  pres.  infin.  marks  the  time  relatively  to  that  verb.  If  it  is 
meant,  that  the  action  should  have  been  completed  before  the  time  spoken 
of,  the  perf.  infin.  must  be  used. 

131.  [C.  xvii.]   O^T  *  May,9  'might,'  sometimes  mean  <  can,' 

*  could,'  and  must  be  translated  by  possum. 
[C.  xvin.]  O^r  The  perf.  infin.   must    be  translated  by  the 

present  infin.  after  might,  could,  ought,  unless  the 

action  is  to  be  represented  as  over  before  the  time 

to  which  might,  could,  &c,  refer. 
When  the  infin.  perfect  follows  ■  ought,'  '  ought '  is  the  perfect. 

132.  Vocabulary  19. 

To  be  the  slave  of,  servlre,  servlvi,  servltum  (dot.). 

To-spend,  or  lead,  a  life,  agSre,  eg,  act. 


t>  Legem  brevem  esse  oportet,  A  law  ought  to  be  short. 

Me  ipsum  ames  oportet,  non  mea,  You  ouglit  to  lore  me,  not  merely  tiling* 
fcUmging  to  me. 


52  apposition.  [§21.  l°3-13ft 

Virtuous,  honorable,  honestus,  a,  ura. 

Chaste,  castus,  a,  ura. 

Moral,  sanctus,  a,  um. 

To  shed  one's  blood,  profundgre,  fud,  fiis. 

For  as  in  behalf  of,  pro  (governs  ablat.). 
Country  =  country  of  one's  birth,  )  Datrja    ae    f 

or  citizenship,  ) 

To  snatch  away,  take  away,  eripSre,  ertpu,  erept 

To  take  away  a  man's  life,  vitam  alicui  i  errpgre 

Exercise  20 

[N.  B.  A  parenthetical  'then*  in  an  interrogative  sentence  is  used  to 
indicate  that  lan'  is  to  be  used.] 

133.  May  a  man  be-the-slave-of  glory  ?  [No.]  Ought  we 
not  to  have  obeyed  the  laws  of  our  country  ?  What  ought  I  to 
have  done  ?  I  asked  what  I  oughtk  to  have  done  ?  No  man 
may  take  away  another's  life.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  he  has 
led  a  very  moral'  life.  Ought  he  not  to  have  shed  his  blood  for 
his  country  ?  There  is  no  doubt,  that  he  lived  a  very  disgrace- 
ful' life.  Oughr'  we  (then)  to  be  the  slaves  of  glory  ?  Ought7 
he  not  to  have  obeyed  the  laws  of  virtue  ?  It  was  owing  to  you 
that88  my  life  was  not  taken  away  by  Caius. 


VII. 
§  21.     Apposition. 

134.  When  to  a  substantive  or  personal  pronoun  there  is  added  a  sub- 
stantive  (without  a  preposition)  explaining  or  describing  it,  the  latter  is 
said  to  be  placed  in  apposition  to  the  former.  •  Alexander  the  conqueror 
of  Persia.' 

135.  A  noun  in  apposition  may  be  turned  into  the  predicate  (nom.  after  the 
verb)  of  a  relative  sentence. 

136.  (a)  A  substantive  in  apposition  must  agree  in  case  with 
th©  substantive  of  which  it  is  spoken. 


i  Obs.  The  person  from  whom  is  put  in  the  dot.  This  dat.  may  be  explained 
thus :  it  is  the  person  towards  or  against  whom  the  action  of  snatching  away 
life  is  directed. 

k  The  pluperf.  must  here  be  used,  for  the  imperfect  would  fix  the  duty  to  ihe 
lt>ne  of  asking. 


$21,137-142.]  apposition.  53 

137.  (b)  If  the  substantive  of  which  it  is  spoken  be  feminine,  the  fern, 
form  should  be  chosen  for  the  substantive  in  apposition,  whenever 

there  is  one. 

138.  (c)  If  the  principal  word  be  the  name  of  a  town,*  with 
urbs  or  oppidum  in  apposition  to  it,  the  verb  or  participle  gene- 
rally agrees  with  the  apposition  instead  of  the  principal  noun. 

(With  this  exception,  agreement  with  the  principal  noun  is  the  rule, 
though  a  rule  that  is  not  always  observed.) 

139.  (d)  The  English  'as,'  '  uhen*  'for,'  standiflg  with  a  noun,  are  often 
omitted,  and  the  Latin  substantive  placed  in  apposition. 

140.  {Eng.)  The  city  of  Rome.    The  island  o/Cyprus. 
(Lot.)  The  city  Rome.  The  island  Cyprus. 

141.  (a)  Alexander  victor  tot  regum  atque  populorum,  Alex- 

ander the  conqueror  of  so  many  kings  and  nations. 
(Usus  magister  egregius,  Experience  an  admirable 
teacher. 
Philosophia  magistra  morum,  Philosophy  the  teacher 
of  morals. 

(c)  Volsinii,  oppidum  Tuscorum  opulentissimum,   totum 

concrematum  est  fulmine,  Volsinii,  (lie  most  wealthy 
town  of  the  Tuscans,  was  entirely  destroyed  (burnt) 
by  lightning. 

(d)  iEdem  Salutis,  quam  consul  voverat,  dictator  dedi- 

cavit,  He  dedicated  as  dictator  the  temple  of  Salu» 
which  he  had  vowed  when  consul. 

142.  Vocabulary  20. 

To  take,  cSpSre,  io,  cep,  capt. 

King,  rex,  regis,  m. 

Philosophy,  philosophia,  ae,  /. 

Inventor,  inventor,  oris ;  inventrix,  Icis. 

Teacher,  magister,  tri ;  magistra,  ae. 

Manners,  morals,  character,  mores,  um,  m. 

Discipline,  discipllna,  88,  /. 

Frugality,  frugalitas,  atis,  /. 

Parent,  genitor,  Oris;  genitrix  Icis. 

Athens,  Athenae,  arum,  /. 

Branch-of-learning,  doctrina,  ae,  /. 

Maker,  causer,  effector,  5ris ;  effectrix,  Icis. 


l  The  name  of  a  people  often  stands  with  the  substantive  civitas,  in  apposi 
tlon  to  it  in  the  singular;  'Carmonenses,  qua  est  longe  firmissima  totius  pro- 
vinche  cizitas.'    Caes.  Bell.  Civ.  ii.  19. 


54  NOMINATIVE    AFTER    THE    VERB.    [§22.   143-1 4tt 

Wisdom,  sapientia,  ae,/. 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  urn. 

An  old  man,  s?nex,  senis,  G.  plur.  senum 

To  wish,  desire,  be  willing,  velle,  vblu, 

To  blot  out,  efface,  destroy  utterly,  delere,  aelev,  delet. 

Treaty,  foedus,  5ris,  n. 

To  renew,  rgnovare,  av,  at. 

Exercise  21. 

143.  Apiolae,  a  town  of  the  Latins  (Lalmi),  was  taken  by  king 
Tarquinius.  Philosophy  was  the  inventor'  of  laws,  the  teacher7 
of  morals  and  discipline.  Frugality  is  the  parent7  of  virtues.  It 
eannot  be  denied,  that  philosophy  was  the  inventor'  of  laws. 
Caius  used  to  callm  Athens  the  inventor11  of  all  branches-of- 
learning.  It  cannot  be"  denied,  that  wisdom  is  rightly  called  the 
maker  of  a  happy  life.  I  do  not  desire  the  same  things  as  an  old 
man,  that  I  desired  when  a  boy  (p.  14. 15,  b).  I  have  left  nothing 
undone  to  finish18  the  business  to  your  satisfaction.  It  was 
owing  to  you88  that  the  city  of  Rome  was  not  destroyed  by  fire. 
The  treaty  between  the  cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium0  has  been 
renewed.  Has  not  the  treaty  been  renewed  between  the  cities 
of  Rome  and  Lavinium  ?  Ought  not  the  treaty  between  the 
cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium  to  have  been  renewed  ? 


§  22.     Nominative  after  the  vert. — Attraction  of  the  predicate. 

144.  (a)  If  the  verb  esse,  &c.  standing  after  a  verb  that  u 
immediately  followed  by  the  infinitive,  has  a  participle  or  adjec- 
tive with  it,  it  will  stand  in  the  nominative  case. 

145.  (b)  After  a  verb  of  wishing,  &c.p  the  accusative  of  the 
pronoun  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted,  if  it  meana 
the  same  person  as  the  nom.  of  the  principal  verb. 

146.  (b)  If  the  ace.  is  omitted  before  the  infin.,  the  noun  or  parti. 
ciple  with  the  infinitive  is  attracted  into  the  nom.  case. 


m  Idr  '  Would '  or  ( used  to '  may  be  considered  as  signs  of  the  Impcrfcci 
(Dicebat,  would  say ;  used  to  say.)  n  Plural. 

0  Inter  Romam  Lavini  jmque  urbes. 
P  Studii  et  desiderii. 


J  2*2.   147-150.]    NOMINATIVE    AFTER    THE    VERB.  5ft 

147.  {c)  After  verbs  of  declaring,  &c.«>  the  accusative  under 
the  same  circumstances,  is  sometimes,  but  less  commonly  omitted. 

148.  (c)  When  the  ace.  pronoun  is  omitted  before  the  infin. 
after  a  verb  of  declaring,  &c,  the  adjective  or  participle  is  gene- 
rally attracted  into  the  nominative  ;  but  sometimes  not,  especially 
when  it  is  the  part,  of  the  fut.  in  rus,  esse  being  omitted. 

J  49.  (a)  Soleo  (possum)  esse  otiosus,  I  am  accustomed  to  he  (I 
can  be)  at  leisure. 

(b)  Vult   \  se'  ^Principem,  >  Jh  wUUs  (0  u  lU  >J(> 

(  esse  princeps,  ) 

(c)  Ait        "  ess°P0ratum>  I  He  says  that  he  is  ready. 

(  esse§  paratus,*-     ) 

Facturos"  pollicentur,  They  promise  to  do  it, 
150.  Vocabulary  21.     (Of  Apposition-Verbs.") 

To  become,  to  be  made,  fieri,  factus. 

To  turn  out,  evadgre,  evas,  evas. 

To  be  named  =  appointed,  nominari,  nominatus. 

Tc  be  elected  or  chosen,  ellgi,  electus. 

7o  be  made  (of  an  appointment )  CTe-.   CTeatus, 

to  an  office),  > 
To  be  born,  nasci,  natus. 

To  be  considered,  or  held,  habgri,  habitus. 

To  seem,  appear,  videri,  visus.w 

To  be  rendered,  reddi,  reddltus. 

An  orator,  orator,  oris,  m. 


1  Sentiendi  et  drclarandi. 

r  Cicero  is  fond  of  inserting  se  after  vellt. 

•  In  Cicero  the  pronoun  is  seldom  omitted  except  after  Jateri,  dicere,  ojnnari, 
and  similar  verbs,     (Ochsner.) 

i  Bentley  says :  c  ait  esse  paratum  •  "  ne  Latinum  quidem  est ;"  which,  how- 
ever, Kriiger  thinks  is  too  much  to  say. 

u  But  the  participle  of  the  fut.  ace.  standing  (with  the  omission  of  esse)  for  the 
flit,  infin.  is  sometimes  attracted,  especially  in  poetry.  '  Visura  et  quamvis 
tiunquam  speraret  Ulixen.'  Propert.  ii.  7. 45.  '  Venturaque  rauco  |  Ore  mina- 
tur  hiems.  Stat.  Theb.  i.  347.  So  with  other  predicates.  '  Retulit  Ajax  |  Esse 
Jovis  pronepos.'  •  Acceptum  refero  versibus,  esse  nocens.'  '  Sensit  medios  de- 
apavjs  in  hostes,'  &c.    (K.) 

*  By  apposition-verbs  are  meant  the  verbs  that  make  no  complete  predicate; 
Dut  require  a  noun  after  them,  which  is  rather  in  apposition  to  the  subject  (tht 
turm.  to  verb)  than  governed  by  the  verb. 

w  To  appear  must  be  translated  by  videri,  whei  it  means  to  sum ;  by  apvar 
tre,  when  it  means  to  come  into  sight ;  to  be  seen ;  to  be  tvident. 


56  DATIVE    AFTER    ESSE.  [J  23.    151,   152 

A  poet,  poeta,  ae,  ra. 

To  be  wont,  or  accustomed,  sblere,  solitus  sum. 

To  desire.  cupSre,  cupiv,  cuplt. 

To  have  rather,  malle,  malu, 

Rich,  dives,  dlvltis. 

To  begin,  coepisse ;  incipSre,  cep,  cept/ 

Troublesome,  molestus,  a,  um  (with  dot). 

To  cease,  leave  oftj  desinere,  desii,  desit. 

Timid,  timid  us,  a,  um. 

To  go  on,  continue,  perge"res  perrex,  perrect. 

By  accident,  casu. 

Exercise  22. 

151 ,  I  had  rather  be-in-good-health'  than  be  rich.  I  begin  to 
be  troublesome  to  you.  Cease  to  be  timid.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  the  boy  will  turn  out  an  orator.  Do  not  continue  to  be 
troublesome  to  Caius.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  Balbus  seems 
wise  to  many  persons.  No  one  is  born  rich.  No  one  becomes 
good  by  accident7.  Numa  Pompilius  was  made  king.  It  was 
owing  to  you  that22 1  was  not  made  king.  He  promises  to  perform3 
the  business  {omit  esse).  No  one  can  be  happy  without  virtue. 
There  is  no  doubt,  that  no  man  can  be  happy  without  virtue.  I 
had  rather  be  a  good  man,  than  seem  (one).  Many  persons  can- 
not turn  out  orators.  A  poet  is  born,  not  made.  Was  the  world 
made  by  accident  or  by  design  ? 


§  23,     Dative  after  esse. 

152.  (a.  h.  c.  d.)  When  esse,  &c,  having  the  same  subject  as 
the  principal  verb,  follows  a  verb  that  governs  the  dative,  if  the 


*  Carpi  has  only  the  tenses  derived  from  the  per/.  Cceptus  est  is  used  for 
Its  perf.  before  pass,  infinitives.  So  desitus  est  (ceased),  *hough  more  rarely. 
{Zwnpt.)  When  he  adds  that  the  per/.,  pluperf.,  and  Jut.  perf.  have  respectively 
the  meanings  of  the  pres.,  imperf,  and  simple  future,  I  believe  him  to  be  mis- 
taten,  for:  (1)  In  many  passages  cospi  has  certainly  the  meaning  of  the  perf. 
(2)  In  many  more,  I  think  in  all,  the  Latin  idiom  requires  one  of  the  perfect, 
where  we  should  use  one  of  the  imperfect  tenses.  Cospi  is  regularly  joined  only 
vith  the  infin. :  incipio  with  (in/in.  or)  a  noun  (as  its  subject  or  object) :  and 
xtpi  dwells  more  on  the  action  begun ;  incepi  gives  more  prominence  to  the 
beginning  that  is  made,  and  is  altogether  more  emphatic.    (D.) 


§23.   153-155.]  DATIVE    AFTER    ESSE.  57 

accus.  pron.  is  omitted,  the  noun  after  esse  either  remains  in  the 
bccus.  or  is  (more  commonly)  attracted  into  the  dative.' 

153.  (a)  Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  It  is  expedient  for  you  to  be 

good  women. 

(b)  Licet  esse  beatis,  They  may  be  happy  (if  they  please). 

(c)  Medios  esse  non  licet,  We  may  not  be  neutral. 

(d)  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licet,8 1  may  not  be  negligent. 

154.  Vocabulary  22. 

(Verbs  in  the  third  person  governing  the  dat.,  and  often  used  *r*«h  a 
sentence  as  their  subject.) 

It  is  permitted,  licet. 

I  have  leisure,  vacat  mihi  (but  dat.  of  pronoun  gener- 

ally omitted  when  the  person  in 
known). 

It  is  given,  jatur,  datum  est. 

It  is  expedient,  expedit. 

It  is  profitable,  prodest,  profuit,  &c. 

It  is  injurious,  hurtful,  nbcet. 

Negligent,  negligens,  tis. 

Neutral,  medius,  a,  um. 

Luxurious,  luxuriosus,a  a,  um. 

Exercise  23. 

155.  Let  us  be  permittedb  to  be  miserable.  Let  us  be  per- 
mitted to  be  neutral.  There  is  no  doubt  that  no  man  may  be  neu- 
tral. It  is  injurious  to  be  negligent.  There  is  no  doubt  that  it 
is  expedient  for  all  to  be  good.  Many  persons  doubt  what  is  ex- 
pedient for  them.  It  is  not  given  to  all  to  be  wise.  It  is  expe- 
dient for  no  man  to  be  luxurious.  I  have  no  leisure  to  be  luxu- 
rious. It  cannot  be  denied  that  few  have  leisure  to  be  luxurious. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  it  is  profitable  to  all  to  spend  a  virtuous7 
life.  There  is  no  doubt  that  a  wise  man  would  rather  be-in-good- 
health7  than  be  rich.  There  is  no  doubt  that  no  one  becomes 
good  by  chance.     Had  you  rather  be  rich,  or  be-in-good-hcalth  ? 


y  The  gen.  and  ablat.  are  never  attracted  in  this  way.     We  may  not  say  j 
Interest  Ciceronis  esse  eloquentis:'  ( damnor  a  nolente  esse  bono.'     (K.) 
a  'Per  quam  non  licet  esse  ntgligentem'  (sc.  mihi).     (Catull.) 
*  Adjectives  in  osus,  (u)lentus,  idus,  denote  being  full  of  what  the  root  ex- 
cesses, 
o  Let-it-be-permitted  to  ub. 

3* 


58  THE    GENITIVE.  [§  24.  156-101 

I  asked  him  whether  he  had  rather  be-in-good-health  or  be  wise 
You  ought  not  to  have  beenl8)  neutral. 


VIII. 
§  24.     The  Genitive. 


156.  (a)  The  Romans  often  used  a  dependent  genitive  where 
we  use  prepositions  ;  in,  for,  with,  &c. 

157.  Almost  every  substantive  that  depends  so  closely  on  another  as  to 
form  almost  one  notion  with  it,  may  in  Latin  be  expressed  by  the  geni- 
tive,  no  matter  what  preposition  we  should  use  in  English. 

158.  The  genitive  is  joined  attributively  to  its  substantive,  and  as  no  two 
languages  exactly  agree,  it  often  happens  that  what  one  language  ex- 
presses by  an  adjective,  another  for  want  of  an  adjective  would  express 
by  the  genitive  case.     Hence — 

159.  (6)  Where  we  use  the  genitive  or  the  preposition  'o/'  with  a  substantive, 
an  adjective  may  often  be  used  in  Latin. 

160.  (c)  Where  we  use  a  substantive  with  an  adjective  agree- 
ing with  it,  an  adjective  in  the  neuter  is  often  used  in  Latin,  with 
a  genitive  governed  by  it. 

(a)  These  adjectives  are  indefinite  numerals  and  demonstrative  pronouns. 

They  are  only  used  as  quasi-substantives  (governing  the  gen.)  in  the 

nom.  and  ace.  singular. 
{0)  The  following  are  peculiar  phrases :   id  temporis,  at  that  time :  id 

aetatis,  of  that  age :  quid  setatis  1  of  what  age  ? 

161.  (a)  Gratia   benejicii,c    Gratitude  *for   a   kindness.     Mu- 

lierum  Sabinarum  injuriae,  The  wrongs  done  to 
the  Sabine  women.  Luctus  Jilii,  Grief  for  his 
son.  Suarum  rerum  fiducia,  Confidence  in  his 
own  affairs.  Pyrrhi  regis  bellum,  The  war  with 
king  Pyrrhus. 
(b)  Res  alienee,  The  affairs  of  others  (or,  Other  people's 
affairs).     Causa  regia,   The  royal  cause ;  or,  The 


e  ( Th6  genitive  is  subjective,  when  it  denotes  that  which  does  something 
or  to  which  something  belongs :  it  is  objective,  when  it  denotes  that  which  is 
the  object  of  the  feeding  or  action  spoken  of.  The  objective  genitive  usually  fol- 
ows  the  noun  on  which  it  depends.'    (Z.) 


5  24    102.] 


THE    GENITIVE. 


5G 


king's  cause.     Timor  externus,  Fear  from  without ; 
fear  of  foreign  enemies, 
(c)  Quantum  voluptatis,    How  much  pleasure.     Aliquid 
temporis,    Some    time.     Nimium    temporis,    Too 
much  time.     Multum  boni,  Much  good.     Plus  boni, 
More    good.     Quid   novi  1    (what   of  new  ?    ==) 
What  new  thing  ?  what  news  ? 
(Obs.  Boni,  mail,  novi,  falsi,  are   used   as   substantives   aftei 
these  neuters.) 


162.  Vocabulary  23. 
Gratitude, 
Benefit,  favour, 
Weight,  burden, " 
Heavy, 
Light, 

Flight,  escape  from, 
Labour, 
Remedy, 
Anger, 


gratia,  re,/, 
beneficium,  i,  n. 
bnus,  eris,  n. 
gravis,  is,  e. 
lSvis,  is,  e. 
fuga,  re,/, 
labor,  oris,  m. 
remedium,  i,  n. 
ira,  re,  /. 
To  overpower,  (by  a  violent  emo-  j  ^^  frgft  fract  (1Uera„y  ^  ^^ 

Care,  cura,  re,/. 

alienus,  a,  um. 
res,  rei,/. 
difficilis,  is,  e. 
argentum,  i,  n. 
aurum,  i,  n. 


Not  one's  own;  of  others, 

Affair, 

Difficult, 

Silver, 

Gold, 

Nature, 

Of  Abdera, 

Advantage  =  profit,  gain, 

To  receive  or  gain  advantage, 

Replies;  says  he, 

Compassion,  pity, 

Poor, 

What, 

Too  much, 

More, 


rerum  natura. 

Abderltes.6 

emolumentum,  i,  n. 

emolumentum  capPre;  cep,  capt 
(  inquit  (always  following  a  word  or  two 
I     of  the  reply). 

misericordia,  re,/. 

pauper,  pauperis. 

quid. 

nimium. 

plus.f 


•  Names  from  one's  native  town  end  in  Ensis  ;  Anus  (from  towns  in  a,  <c); 
Ihcs  with  I  (from  towns  in  ia,  turn);  as,  G.  atis  (from  towns  in  um).  From 
Greek  nouns  the  adjectives  generally  end  in  ius  (often  with  some  change  of 
root) ;  also  in  Ites,  etea,  idtea ;  and  in  cent  from  a.  Those  from  towns  of  Greek 
yrigin,  but  not  in  Greece,  usually  end  in  inus.     (Z.) 

f  Plus,  pluria%  only  in  the  jing.    Plur.  plures,  plura,  G.  plurium,  Aa. 


HO  THE    GENITIVE.  [§25.  163-1^ 

How  much,  quantum. 

Much,  multum. 

Nothing,  nihil  (indecl.  neut  subst). 

No  time,  nihil  tempbris. 

Exercise  24. 

163.  Is  gratitude  for  a  benefit  a  heavy  weight  ?  [No.]  Is  nol 
death  an  escape  from  labours  ?  There  is  no  escape  from  death. 
A  re  there  not  many  remedies  against  anger  ?  Good  men  are 
often  overpowered  by  compassion  for  the  poor.  The  care  ol 
other  people's  affairs  is  difficult7.  We  all  lose  too  much  time. 
Is  there  more  silver  or  gold  in  nature  ?  It  was  owing  to  you28 
that  I  did  not  keep  my  promises.  We  are  now  of  such  an  age, 
that  we  ought  to  bear  all  things7  courageously.  It  cannot  be  de- 
nied that  Pythagoras  of  Abdera  was  a  very  great  philosopher. 
Antisthenes  was  asked  what  advantage  he  had  received  from  (ex) 
philosophy.  Antisthenes,  being  asked  what  advantage  he  haa 
received  from  philosophy,  *  To  be  able,'s  says  he,  '  to  converse 
with  myself. '6)  How  much  time  do  we  all  lose  !  It  cannot  be 
denied  that  we  all  Ipse  much  time.  There  were  some109  who 
lost  much  time. 


J25.   The  Genitive  continued.    (Partitives.    Genitivus  Qualitatis. 

164.  A  partitive  adjective  is  one  that  expresses  some  individuals  consid- 
ered as  parts  of  a  larger  number  or  body. 

Partitive  adjectives  are,  therefore,  such  as  which,  tte-y,  each,  both, 
some,  &c.,  with  ordinal  numerals,  comparatives,  and  sruperlatires. 

165.  (a)  A  partitive  adjective  governs  a  noun  in  the  genitive.* 

166.  The  gender  of  the  partitive  adjective  is  generally  the  gender  of  the 
governed  genitive,  because  that  expresses  the  thing  meant. 

167.  (6)  But  sometimes  the  genitive  is  the  name  of  a  country  of  which  the 
person  is  one  inhabitant :  of  course  then  the  adjective  agrees  with  man 
understood. 

163.  (c)  Also  when  a  superlative,  or  solus,  &c,  governs  a  gen., 


«  Ut  possim. 

»>  Partitives  are  often  followed  by  the  prepositions  meaning  from,  out  of, 
imt/ngat  (e,  inter,  de),  instead  vi  by  the  genitive. 


}25.   169-175.]  THE    GENITIVE.  61 

and  is  also  (with  the  gen.)  spoken  of  another  substantive,  the 
partitive  agrees  in  gender,  not  with  the  gen.,  but  with  the  other 
tubsiantive. 

169.  (d)  A  substantive  having  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  and 

df.tcribing  a  former  substantive,  stands  in  the  genitive  or  ablative*. 

(It  maybe  used  attributively  or predicatively ;  as  an  adjective,  that  fg, 
to  the  substantive,  or  after  the  verb  to  be.) 
If  the  description  be  merely  numerical,  the  genitive  only  can  be  used. 

170.  (e)  Opus  est'  {there  is  need)  is  followed  by  an  ablative  of 
what  is  needed.     The  person  who  needs  must  be  put  in  the  dative. 

171.  (f)  After  opus  est,  an  English  substantive  is  often  translated  by  a  pas 
sive  participle. 

172.  (g)  But  the  thing  needed  is  often  the  ncm.  to  the  verb  sum  , 
or  the  ace.  before  esse. 

f^*  In  this  construction  the  verb  sum  will  agree,  of  course,  with 
its  nom. 

In  the  former,  it  is  always  in  the  third  person  sing. ;  opus  being  its 
real  nam. 

173.  (Eng.)    f  I  have  need  of  food. 

{Lai.)    J  (1)  There  is  a  business  to  me  with  food  (abl.  without  prep.) 
I  or  (2)    \  Food  is  a  business  to  me. 

(  These  things  are  a  business  to  me. 
The  second  construction  is  preferred  with  neuter  pronouns  and  ad 
jectives.     (Z.) 

174.  How  many  are  there  of  you  ?  =  how  many  are  you  1 
There  are  very  many  of  you,  =  you  are  very  many. 
Few  of  whom  there  are,         as  who  are  few. 

When  tqfi  with  a  demonstrative  or  relative  pronoun  follows  a  plu- 
ral numera*  or  superlative,  the  numeral  often  expresses  all  who  are 
meant  by  the  pronoun ;  and  then  the  pronoun  and  the  numeral  must 
be  in  the  same  case  in  spiteof  'o/'.k 

175.  [C.  xix.]  O* '  Of  you,'  'of  us,'  are  not  to  be  translated  after  how  many, 
or  other  numerals,  when  the  whole  party  are  spoken  of. 


i  Opus  est  (it  is  a  task  or  business).  Grotefend,  comparing  the  Greek  lpyu» 
tori  nvoi,  thinks  that  the  ablative  originally  expressed  the  means  by  which  tho 
1  usiness  is  to  be  accomplished.  Probably  opus  esse  had,  in  various  construc- 
tions, come  to  have  nearly  the  meaning  of  to  be  necessary  or  required:  and  then 
other  constructions  were  commonly,  or  occasionally,  used  before  the  ablativ* 
prevailed.  Plautus  uses  even  the  accusative,  a3  if  it  were  the  object  required  i 
the  gen.  is  still  sometimes  found  :  probably  the  preference  was  at  last  given  to 
the  abl.,  from  that  being  the  usual  case  after  verbs  of  needing,  or  requiring. 

k  Consider,  therefore,  after  such  woro^s,  whether  the  pronoun  expresses  more, 
or  no  more,  than  the  numeral. 


68  THE  GENITIVE.  [§25.176,177 

When  of  tie,  of  you,  are  omitted,  the  verb  will  be  of  the  frst  and  sec 
end  pers.  respectively. 

176.  (a)  Uter  vestrum  1       Which  of  you  ?     Alter  consilium, 

One  of  the  consuls.     Grsecorum  oratorum  prastan 
tissimus,  The  best  of  the  Grecian  orators. 

(b)  Plato  totlus  Grcecia  doctissimus,  Plato  the  most  learned 

man  of  all  Greece. 

(c)  Hordeum  est  frugum  mollissimum,  Barley  is  the  softest 

species  of  corn. 
,  ,v  (  Vir  summo  ingenio,'-  A  man  of  the  greatest  ability. 
(  Vir  excellentis  ingenii,  A  man  of  distinguished  ability. 
Ingentis  magnitudinis  serpens,  A  serpent  of  immense 

size. 
Classis  septuaginta  navium,  A  fleet  of  seventy  ships. 

(e)  Acuto  homine  nobis  opus  est,  We  have  need  of  an  acute 

man.     Quid  opus  est  verbis  ?     What  need  is  there 
of  words  1 

(f)  Properat'j™  opus  est,  It  is  necessary  to  make  haste. 

(g)  Quarundam  rerum  nobis  exempla  permulta  opus  sunt, 

Of  some  things  we   have   need   of  a  great  many 
examples. 

177.  Vocabulary  24. 

Which  (of  two)  uter,  utra,  utrum ;  g.  utrlus 

Each      (do.),  uterque  ;  g.  utrlusque. 

Anotner;  one  (of  two  things),  a  >  ^       ^         alterum;       a]terius 
second :  one  more,  ) 


1  According  to  the  German  grammarians,  the  gen.  denotes  a  permanent,  the 
sbl.  a  temporary  state.  Grotefend  says,  the  gen.  is  used  of  a  thoroughly  inhe- 
rent and  permanent  quality,  penetrating  the  whole  being,  and  making  the  thing 
what  it  is :  whereas  the  abl.  is  used  of  any  part  or  appendage  of  the  thing  spo- 
ken of,  and  only  so  far  as  it  manifests  itself;  which  part  or  appendage,  more- 
over, may  be  accidental  and  temporary.  To  establish  this  he  quotes :  "  Murena 
mediocri  ingenio,  sed  magno  studio  rerum  veterum,  multa  industrice  et  ma-gni 
laboris  fuit."  'Murena  showed  but  moderate  talents,  though  a  great  zeal  foi 
antiquarian  pursuits ;  industry  and  laborious  perseverance  constituted  his  char- 
aster.'  Why  not  as  well  or  better,  '  He  showed  great  industry  and  persever- 
ance; but  his  mind  was  (essentially,  and,  permanently)  one  of  little  power, 
though  with  a  great  fondness  for  antiquity?'  Was  his  ingenium  (the  in-horn 
power  of  his  mind)  a  less  permanent  quality  than  his  indmtria?  Zumpt  says  ■ 
With  ftsje,  Cicero  seems  to  prefer  the  abl.' 

m  Prvpcrarc  is  used  of  a  praiseworthy  haste  for  the  attainment  of  a  purpose  > 


J  25.   178.]  THE    GENITIVE.  6H 

Of  Miletus,  Milesius  (162,  e). 

Greek,  Graecus,  i,  m. 

Roman,  Romanus,  i,  to. 

To  predict,  foreiell,  prsedlce're,  dix,  diet. 

Eolipse,  defectio,  onis,/. 

Sun,  sol,  solis,  m. 

Body,  corpus,  corporis,  n. 

Food,  meat,  elbus,  i,  m. 

Drinking,  drink.  potio,  onis,  /. 

Serpent,  serpens,  entis,  com.gend. 

Immense,  ingens,  ingentis. 

Size,  magnitudo,  inis,/. 

Lemnos,  Lemnos,0  i,/. 

To  find,  discover,  invenire,    ven,   vent;    reperire.    re^r 

repert.o 
Custom,  consuetudo,  inis,/. 

Nature  (i.  e.  a  man's  nature),  natura,  se,/. 

Money,  (often  argentum,  i,  n.  silver). 

To  draw  away,  avtfcare,  av,  at. 

Connection,  conjunctio,  onis,/". 

Honour  (i.e.  probity,  trustworthi- J^j^g  e-    * 
ness),  )  ' 

C  making  haste,         }  properato. 
There  is  need  of}  deliberation,  >  consulto. 

(  prompt  execution,  )  mature  facto. 

Exercise  25. 

178.  One  of  them  was  a  Greek,  the  other  a  Roman.  Thales** 
of  Miletus  was  the  first  of  the  Greeks  who8  predicted  an  eclipse 
of  the  sun.     I  did  the  same  when  (139)  consul.     He  says  (ait*) 


festinare  ==  to  be  in  a  hurry.  An  adj.  properus  was  formed  from  pro  forth 
forwards),  as  inferus,  exterus,  from  their  prepositions.    (D.) 

n  Greek  nouns  in  os  of  the  second  decl.  are  declined  like  Latin  nouns  of  the 
2d,  but  have  ace.  on  or  um. 

°  '  lnvenio,  properly  to  come  upon  any  thing,  expresses  the  general  notion  ol 
to  find:  reperio,  like  to  find  out  and  to  discover,  implies  that  the  thing  found  was 
before  hid,  and  was  sought  for  with  pains.'  (D.).  Crombie  observes  that  inve- 
nire is  the  proper  word  for  the  faculty  itself;  when  we  talk,  that  is,  of  the  power 
of  discovering  generally,  without  adding  uhat ;  i.  e.  without  an  accusative  after 
It.  He  quotes  from  Cicero,  *  vigere,  sapere,  invenire,  meminisse,'  a  passage 
Hhioh  plainly  proves  that  invenire  does  not  exclude  the  notion  of  searchingt 
though  it  does  not  (like  reperire)  necessarily  imply  it. 

p  Thales,  etis. 

i  Fari  is  to  talk  t  use  articulate  speech :  loqui,  to  speak  or  talk  (opposed  to 
uj.cSrc,  to  be  silent) ;  dicere  is  to  say,  the  transitive  form  of  loqui.    As  dlstin- 


64 


THE    GENITIVE. 


[§  25.  17b 


that  there  is  no  occasion  for  making-haste.  The  body  has  neec 
of  much  food.  Are  not  serpents  of  immense  size  found  in  the 
island  of27  Len«ios  ?  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  he  is  a  man  ol 
no  honour.  What  need  have  we  of  your  authority  ?  It  cannot 
be  denied  that  the  body  has  need  of  meat  and  drink.  (We; 
have  need  of  deliberation.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  we  hava 
need  of  deliberation.  Is  not  custom  a  second  nature?*  Verree 
used  to  say52  that  he  had  need  of  many  things.  How  much  money 
have  you  need  of?  I  left  nothing  undone  to18  draw-away  Pom- 
pey  from  his  connection  with  Caesar  (156).  How  many  are  there 
of  you  ?l     I  will  ask  how  many  there  sue  of  them. 


179.   The  top.  of  the 

mountain. 
N.  summus  mons, 
G.  summi  montis, 
&c. 


The  middle  of  the         The  rest  of  the 

way.  work. 

media  via,  reliquum  opus, 

mediae  viae,  reliqui  operis, 

&c.  &c. 

So,  ima  quercus,  the  bottom  (or  foot)  of  the  oak ;  uni versa 
Grcecia,  the  whole  of  Greece  :  sapientia*  prima,  the  beginning  of 
wisdom  :  extremus  liber,r  the  end  of  the  book,  &c. 

Some  English  substantives  relative  to  position,  are  often  translated 
into  Latin,  by  adjectives  agreeing  with  their  substantives.  Such  are, 
end,  middle,  whole,  top,  &c. 

These  adjectives  generally  stand  before  their  substantives.8 


guished  from  loqui,  dicere  expresses  a  more  artificial  or  studied  speech,  loqui 
being  to  speak  in  the  style  of  ordinary  conversation.  As  distinguished  from 
070,  dicere  is  to  speak  for  the  information  of  the  hearers,  ajo  expressing  the  as 
eeriion  of  the  speaker,  as  the  opposite  of  nego.  Hence  ajo  is  I  say  =  I  assert, 
vffirm,  maintain  (but  somewhat  weaker  than  these  words).  Inquit  (which  Do- 
Jerlcin  derives  from  injJcit,  throws-in)  is  used  to  introduce  the  words  of  an 
other,  and  also  the  objections  which  we  suppose  another  to  make.  (Bentley  )  I( 
is  also  used  in  a  vehement  re-assertion  ('one,  one  I say'). 

1  The  adjectice  so  used  does  not  distinguish  its  substantive  from  other  things 
of  the  same  kind,  but  a  part  of  itself  from  another  part.  Thus  summit*  mons 
is  the  mountain  where  it  is  highest :  not,  the  highest  of  a  number  of  mountains. 

•Not  however,  always,  e.  g.  'sapientia  primal  {Hor.\  and,  'In  hac  insula 
zxtremd  est  fons  aquse  dulcis,'  &c  (Cic.  Verr.  4.  118.) 


55.  180,  181.] 

THE   G 

ENITIVE.                                                       05 

180.  Vocabulary  25. 

The  Alps, 

Alpes,  ium,  /. 

Cold, 

frigtis,  tiris,  n. 

Snow, 

nix,  nivis,  /. 

To  melt, 

liquescFre,  lieu, 

To  count,  reckon, 

numerare,  5v,  at. 

Out  of, 

ex  (ablat.). 

A  thousand, 

mille  Winded,  in  sing.  In  plur.  ulliU 
ium,  ious,t  Ac.) 

To  survive, 

superesse,  superfui  {dot.). 

Three  hundred, 

trCcenti,  ae,  a. 

To  swear, 

jurare,  av,  at. 

Moon, 

luna,  ae,  /. 

Lowest, 

inf  imus,  a,  um. 

Planet, 

planeta,  or  es,  a?,  m. 

Muster  =  'master  of  a 

house,' 

•\  dominus,  i,  m. ;  herns,  t,  m.  is  a  mattvr 

1  owner  of  any  property 

,'  slavos 

>     only  in  relation  to  his  servant*  oi 

as  well  as  any  other. 

;     slaves.  "^ 

Wool, 

lana,  ae,  f. 

Black, 

niger,  gra,  grum. 

White, 

alb  us,  a,  um. 

Some — others, 

alii — alii. 

Only, 

solus,  a,  um,  G.  sollus. 

Chameleon, 

chameleon,  ontis,  or  onis,  m. 

To  nourish,  support, 

Sl5re,  alu,  alit  or  alt. 

River, 

flumen,  Inis,  n. 

Neither— nor, 

nee  or  neque,  followed  by  iiec  or 
neque.u 

Exercise  26. 

181.  On  the  top  of  the  Alps  the  cold  is  so  great,  that  the  snow 
never  melts  there.  Count  how  many  there  are  of  you.31  Out 
of  (ear)  so  many  thousands  of  Greeks  (but)  few  of  us  survive. 
Three  hundred  of  us  have  sworn.  The  top  of  the  mountain  was 
held  by  T.  (Titus)  Labienus.  The  moon  was  considered  the 
lowest  of  the  planets.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  custom  is  a 
second  nature.     Slaves  are  of  the  same  morals  as9)  their  master. 


*  MilU  the  adj.  is  indeclinable. 

°  '  Nee  and  neque  stand  before  either  vowels  or  consonants.'  (Z.)  Mr.  R3<1- 
ale  says:  'in  good  writers  nee  is  found  usually  only  before  consonant*;  ncftu 
oefore  vowels.'  But  merely  taking  the  sxamples  as  they  are  given  in  Brcder1* 
Grammar,  we  have  from  Cicero,  lnec  sibi  ncc  alteri;'  '  neque  naufragio  neque 
Incendio ;'  '  ncc  hominum ;'  '  •neque  perfringi.' 


06  THE    GENITIVE.  [§20.   162-184. 

Who  is  there  but9)  understands  that  custom  is  a  second  nature  ! 
Caius  promises  that  he  will  finish  the  rest  of  the  work.  Three 
hundred  of  us  have  finished  the  rest  of  the  journey.  Of  wools 
some  are  black,  others  white.  The  chameleon  is  the  only  animal 
that8  is  nourished  neither  by  meat  nor  drink. T  The  Indus  is  th? 
largest  of  all  rivers. 


§  26.  The  Genitive  continued.     (Gen.  after  adjectives.) 

182.  Adjectives  which  signify  desire,  knowledge,  recollection, 
fear,  participation,  and  their  opposites  ;  together  with  verbals  in 
ax,  and  many  of  those  that  express  fulness  or  emptiness,  govern 
the  genitive. 

(a)  These  adjectives  have  an  incomplete  meaning,  and  maybe  compared 
with  transitive  verbs.  The  governed  substantive  expresses  generally 
the  object  of  some  feeling  of  the  mind. 

183.  (b)  To  this  class  belong  many  participles  used  adjec- 
U'vely. 

(c)  In  Poetry1'  the  gen.  may  almost  always  stand  after  an  adjective, 
where  its  relation  to  the  adjective  might  be  expressed  by  { with 
respect  to.' 

184.  (a)  Avidus   novitatis,    Greedy  of  novelty.      Insidiarum 

plenus,  Full  of  plots.  Beneficii  immemor,  Apt-to- 
forget  a  favour.  Rei  maritimse  peritissimi,  Very 
skilful  in  naval  affairs.  Magnee  urbis  capax,  Able 
to  contain  a  large  city. 

(b)  Veritatis  amans,  Attached  to  truth  ;  a  lover  of  truth. 

Amans  patriae,  A  lover  of  his  country.  Officii 
negligens,  Negligent  of  duty. 

(c)  Audax  ingenii,  Bold  of  temper ;  of  a  bold  temper. 

Insolitus  servitii,  Unaccustomed  to  slavery.  Insue- 
tus  laboris  (Cats.).  Fidissima  tui  (Virg.).  Seri 
studiorum  (Hor.).     Utilis  medendi  (Ov.). 


*  Potus,  us.  "  Potio  is  the  act  of  drinking,  and  that  on  which  this  action  is 
porformed ;  a  draught ;  a  liquid  swallowed :  potus  is  drinking,  and  drink  in  itself 
without  reference  to  the  action."     (R.) 

*  And  in  TacUue,  who  has :  vetus  regnandi,  summus  severitatis,  &c. 


I  2G.  185.] 


THE    GENITIVE. 


m 


195.  Vocabulary  26 
To  hate, 


Odisse*  (with  tenses  ienveu  cioin  :h. 
perfect). 

virtue,  utis,  f. 

contentio,  onis,  f. 

Veritas,  atis,  /. 

philosophus,  i,  m. 

gloriosus,  a,  um. 

jttcus,  i,  m. 

dubitare,y  av,  at. 

suscipcre,  cep,  cept. 

Ita. 
r  ne — quidem,  (with  the  word  the  even  be* 
<     longs  to  between  them ;  ne  jOco  qui- 
t      dem,  not  even  in  jest.) 
r  nihil  aliud  nisi ,  (the  following  adj.  is 
}     not  to  agree  with  nihil  but  with  the 
C      substantive  after  nisi.) 
To  take  in  good  part,  to  receive  )  boni  consQlCre,*  sulu,  suit;  in  bonam 
favourably.  >     partem  accipere. 

(Adjectives  governing  the  Genitive.) 

Mindful,  memor,  Bris. 

immemor,  ttris. 


Courage, 

Contention, 

Truth, 

Philosopher, 

Glorious, 

Jest, 

To  hesitate, 

To  undertaRe, 

In-such-a-manncr, 

Not  even, 


Nothing  but, 


Unmindful,  apt-to-forget, 
Negligent,   careless  of,   inatten 

tive  to, 
Greedy, 

Eagerly-desirous, 
Fond,  desirous, 
Skilled  in, 
Unacquainted  with,  ignorant  of, 


;  negligens,  tis. 

avidus,  a,  um. 
studiosus,  a,  um. 
cupidus,  a,  um. 
perltus,  a,  um. 
rudis,  is,  e. 


*  Of  this  verb  the  per/.,  pluperf.,  andfut.  perf.  are  respectively  used  for  (that 
s  where  we  should  use)  the  pres.f  imperf.,  and  simple  Jut.  This  is  the  case 
vith  most  verbs  that  express  simple  emotions  and  operations  of  the  mind,  which 
ire  completed  the  moment  they  exist.  The  moment  I  do  hate,  I  hav$  hated ;  the 
noment  I  do  know,  I  have  known. 

y  Dubitare,  to  hesitate,  Is  generally  followed  by  inf. 

*  So,  sequi  boni  (or  sequi  bonique)  facere,  to  take  in  good  part,  to  be  satisfied. 
Lucri  facere,  to  turn  to  account;  to  get  the  credit  of.  In  boni  consulere,  boni  in 
probably  a  gen.  of  the  price  or  value,  consulere  being  used  in  its  first  sense 
[according  to  Riddle)  of '  to  think  upon,  whether  by  oneself,  or  with  others.'  He 
lerives  it  from  an  obsolete  conso,  from  which  censeo  is  derived.  DoderUin 
thinks  con-sulcre  meant  originally  4  to  sit  down*  (from  the  same  root  as  «oMum, 
FeZ-la,  and  perhaps  so/-um),  and  that  boni  is  an  old  adv.  (of  the  same  form  as 
\tri) ;  so  that  boni  consulas  =  bene  considas  or  acquiescas.  It  occurs  In  Quint., 
Sen.,  Ac.    not,  1  believe,  in  Cicero. 


68  HIE    GENITIVE.  [§26.  1«6 

A  partner  \  consors,1  tis  (properly  adj.,  one  who  ha? 

I      the  same  lot). 
A  lover  of,  attached  to,  amans,  tis ;  diligens,*  tis. 

Productive  of,  efficiens,  tis. 

Such  a  lover  of,  adeo  amans,  or  diligens. 

Exercise  27. 

186.  All  men  hate  (him  who  is)  apt-to- forget  a  kindness 
Courage  is  greedy7  of  danger.  Many  are  fonder  of  contention 
than  of  truth.  Pythagoras  calls  (those  who  are)  eagerly-desirous 
of  wisdom  philosophers.  All  men  ought  to  be  mindful  of  benefita 
(received).  Cicero  has  lost  Hortensius,  the  partnerb  of  his  glori- 
ous labour.  That  (Iste)  basest  of  all  men  is  the  same  that  he 
always  was.  Epaminondas  was  such  a  lover6  of  truth  that  he 
did  not  utter-a-falsehood  evend  in  jest.  We  ought  all  to  be  such 
lovers  of  our  country  as  not  toe  hesitate  to  shed  our  blood  for  it. 
I  will  warn  the  boy  not  to  become  inattentive  to  duty.  He  said 
that  he  was  not8  negligent  of  duty.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  we 
ought  all  to  be  lovers  of  our  country.  He  begs  me  to  take  these 
things  in  good  part.  They  say  that  virtue  is  not  productive  of 
pleasure.  Let  war  be  undertaken  in-such-a-manner  that  nothing 
but  peace  may  seem  (to  be)  sought  for. 


*  Socius,  '  a  companion ;'  '  associate ;'  '  member  of  the  same  society  ;'  '  sharei 
of  the  same  fortune ;'  in  which  last  meaning  it  is  synonymous  with  consora. 
Comes,  'companion,'  'fellow-traveller.'  Sodolis,  '  companion  in  amusement  or 
pleasure.'     (C.) 

Consorte8  fortuna  eadem,  socios  labor  idem ; 
Sed  caros  faciunt  schola,  ludus,  mensa  sodaUs 
Vir  comis  multos  comites  sibi  jungit  eundo. 
Com-it-es,  con  and  'if,'  as  in  supine  of  eo. 

a  Amare  expresses  the  affection  of  love;  diligere  (properly,  to  choose  apart)  the 
preference  of  one  object  to  another.  If  therefore  any  thing  of  deliberate  ckoUx 
or  preference  is  to  be  expressed,  diligere  should  be  used. 

b  Consors.  Socius  would  imply  that  they  shared  the  same  toil,  not  that 
Hortensius  had  a  separate  share  of  the  same  occupation. 

«  Diligens  with  gen.,  his  attachment  to  truth  being  a  principle  with  him. 
In  the  next  sentence,  amans,  because,  though  patriotism  should  be  a  principle 
affection  for  one's  country  is  the  thing  required. 
d  Say :  '  that  he  uttered  a  falsehood  not  even  in  jest.' 

•  A  consequence ;  not  a  purpose. 


&27.  187,188.] 


THE    GENITIVE. 


69 


§  27.   The  Genitive  continued. 

187.  (a)  (Eng.)  To  prefer  a  capital  charge  against  a  man. 

(To  make  a  man  an  accused-person  of  a  capi- 
tal matter. 
Aliquem  rei  capitalis  reum  facere. 

(b)  (Eng.)  To  bring  an  action  against  a  man  for  bribery. 
(Lat.)    Aliquem  de  ambitu  reum  facere. 

(c)  (Eng.)   To  prefer  a  charge  of  immorality  against  a 


(Lat.)    Aliquem  de  moribus  reum  facere. 
(d)  (Eng.)   He  has  informed  me  of  his  plan. 
(Lat.)    Certiorem  me  sui  consilii  fecit.* 
188.  Vocabulary  27. 

(Adjectives  governing  the  gen.) 

Tenacious, 

Capable  of  containing, 

Without, 

Accused  of, 

In  his  absence, 


Briber) 


Extortion, 

Assault, 
Impiety, 


tenax,  acis. 

capax,  acis. 

expers,  tis  (ex,  pars). 

reus  f  (from  res). 

absens,  tis  (adj.  agreeing  with  the  subs.). 
'  ambitus,  us,  m.  from  amblre,  to  go 
round,  to  canvass.  Properly,  there- 
fore, to  accuse  a  man  de  ambitu  is, 
'  to  bring  an  accusation  about  hi*  can- 
vassing :'  and  then,  as  '  reum  facere 
de  moribus '  is  '  to  accuse  of  immoral- 
ity^ so  to  accuse  him  de  ambitu  is  '  to 
accuse  him  of  improper,  illegal  can- 
vassing,' i.  e.,  of  bribery. 

roe  or  pecuniae  repetundae ;  or  repetun- 
dae alone ;  properly  things  or  moneys 
to  be  claimed  back. 

vis  s  (violence). 

impietas,  atis.  f. 


*  Certiorem  facere  may  also  be  followed  by  abl.  with  de: 

•  Eum  de  rebus  gestis  certiorem  faciunt.' 
'  "  Reos  appello  non  eos  modo  qui  arguuntur,  sed  omnes  quorum  de  re  dis- 
ceptatur;  sic  enim  olim  loquebantur."     (Cic.  De  Orat.  2,  43.)    From  ttoe  olim 
it  is  plain  that  reus  had  come  to  be  used  of  the  defendant  almost  exclusively. 

*  Vis,   vis,  — ,  vim,  vi  I  vires,  virium,   &c.     Gen.   vis  in   Tac.t   but    very 
rare. 


70  THE    GENITIVE.  [§28.   189,  1M 

Tc  prefer  a  charge  against,  reum  facere. 

To  inform,  certiorem  facSre ;  fee,  fact. 

To  learn,  discere,  didic, 

Design,  plan,  consilium,  i,  n. 

Full,  plenus,  a,  um. 

Danger,  periculum,  i,  n. 

Exercise  28. 

189.  We  are  very  tenacious  of  those  things  which  we  learned 
asa2)  boys.  The  island  of  Pharos  is  noth  capable-of-containing  a 
great  city.  They  are  going  to  prefer  a  charge  of  immorality 
against  Caius.  They  have  brought  an  action  against  Caius  for 
an  assault.  They  have  preferred  a  charge  of  impiety  against 
Caius  in  his  absence.  I  left  nothing  undone  to18  inform  Caesar  oi 
my  design.  I  fear  that  he  will  not53  inform  me  of  his  design.  It 
is  disgraceful  to  be  without  any  learning.  I  fear  that  he  will 
not  keep  his  word.  He  promised  that  he  would4)  leave  nothing 
undone  to  draw  away  Pompey  from  his  connection  with64 
Caesar.  There  is  no  one  but9)  believes  that  you  will  be  without 
any*  dangers.  He  warns*  us  that  all  things  are  full  of  danger. 
There  are  some  who109  deny  that  virtue  is  productive  ot 
pleasure. 


§  28.   The  Genitive  continued. 

190.  (a)  Such  a  substantive  as  property,  duty,  part,  mark,  <3z;c., 
is  often  omitted  in  Latin  after  ' to  M  ;'  so  that  to  be  is  followed  by 
a  genitive  governed  by  this  substantive,  or  an  adjective  in  the 
neuter  gender  agreeing  with  it. 

(Such  a  noun  as  qfficium,  munus,  indicium,  &c,  must  be  under- 
stood. 

This  genitive  is  construed  in  various  ways  in  English :  and  therefore 


»»  Non  is  lnot:'  haud  is  'certainly  not?  ' surely  not?  used  especially  with 
adjectives,  adverbs,  and  impersonal  verbs. 

i  '  Any?  after  expert,  must  be  translated  by  omnis,  '  all.' 

k  When  moneo  does  not  mean  to  warn  or  advise  us  to  do  (or  not  to  do)  some- 
thing, it  takes  ace.  with  infin.  (not  ut  ne). 


528.191-200.]  THE    GENITIVE.  71 

there  are  various  English  phrases  that  may  be  reduced  to  this  con 
struction. 

191.  (a)  Such  phrases  are ;  it  is  characteristic  of;  it  is  incumbent  on ;  it  is  for 
(the  rich,  &c.,) ;  it  is  not  every  one  who ;  any  man  may ;  it  demands  or 
requires;  it  betrays,  shows,  &c. ;  it  belongs  to. 

When  the  adjective  is  of  one  termination  (and  therefore  would  leave 
it  doubtful  whether  man  or  thing  is  meant),  it  is  better  to  use  this  con- 
struction. 

('It  is  wise;'  not  'sapiens  est,'  but  lsaptentis  est.') 

192.  So  when  the  predicate  is  an  abstract  noun  in  the  nom.,  it  is  more 
commonly  in  the  gen.  in  Lat. — 'It  is  madness,'  'dementice  est.' 

193.  (b)  These  genitives  are  used  in  the  same  way  v/ithfacere,  fieri,  haberi, 
duct. 

194.  (c)  Verbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  acquitting,  &c,  take  a 
genitive  of  the  charge. 

195.  (./")  But  if  the  charge  be  expressed  by  a  neuter  pronoun,  it  stands  in  the 
accusative. 

196.  This  construction  may  be  explained  by  the  omission  of  crimiru,  or 
nomine,  which  are  sometimes  expressed. 

197.  (c)  Instead  of  the  gen,,  the  ablat.  with  de  is  very  common. 

198.  (d)  The  punishment  to  which  a  person  is  condemned,  stands  generally 
in  the  ablat. ;  sometimes  in  the  gen.,  and  often  in  the  ace.  with  ad. 

199.  (e)  Satago*  misereor,  and  miseresco,  govern  the  gen.  . 
verbs  of  reminding,  remembering,1  and  forgetting,  the  gen.  or 
accusative. 

But  verbs  of  reminding  rarely  take  an  accus.  unless  it  be  a  neut 
pronoun.  Sallust  has  the  three  forms :  admonere  aliqucm,  rei ;  de  re 
and  rem 

200.  (a)  Imbecilli    animi   est   superstitio,    Superstition   is   o 

mark  of  (or  betrays)  a  weak  mind.  Judicis  est 
It  is  the  part  (or  duty)  of  a  judge.  Est  boni 
oratoris,  It  is  the  business  of  a  good  orator.  In- 
genii  magni  est,  It  requires  great  abilities.  Cujus- 
vis  hominis  est  errare,  Any  man  may  err.  Meum 
est,  It  is  my  business.  Extremse  est  dementia),  It 
is  the  height  of  madness.  Suae  ditionis  facere, 
To  reduce  to  subjection  ;  to  bring  under  his  domin- 
ion. 


k  Satagere  (to  be  doing  enough) :  '  tf  have  one's  hands  full.' 
J  When  memini  and  recorder  signify  (to  make  mention  of,'  memini  takes 
the  gtn.,  or  ablat.  with  de;  rccordor,  the  ace. — Memini  seldom  takes  the  ace 
of  a  person,  except  in  the  sense  of  remembering  him  as  a  contemporary.     (Z.) 


%%  THE    GENITIVE.  [§  28.  201. 

(b)  Tempon  cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum,  It  has 

always  been  held  a  wise  thing  to  yield  to  the  times 

(c)  Proditionis  accusare,   To  accuse  of  treachery.     De 

pecuniis  repetundis  damnari,  To  be  condemned  for 
extortion. 

(d)  Capitis  (or  capite)  damnari,  To  be  capitally  condemned, 

(or,  condemned  to  death).     Ad  bestias  condemnare, 
To  condemn  to  the  wild  beasts. 
(«)  Misereri  omnium,  To  pity  all.     Meminisse  praterito- 
rum,  To  remember  past  events  :  meminisse  benejlcia, 
To  remember  kindnesses.     Officii  sui  commonere, 
To  remind  a  man  of  his  duty.     Dissenszonum  obli- 
visci,  To  forget  disagreements. 
(f )  Si  id  me  accusas,  If  you  accuse  me  of  that.     (So,  ia 
me  admonuit.) 
201.  Vocabulary  28. 

To  Accuse,  accusare,™  av,  at. 

To  charge  falsely,   .o    get  up  a  )  insimu]-  ^ 

charge  against,  )  * 

To  prosecute,    .  postulare,0  av,  at. 

To  acquit,  absolvere,  solv,  solut. 

To  remember  \  meminisse,P  recordari^  also    to  male 

I      mention  of. 
To  forget,  oblivisci,  oblltus. 

To  remind,  put  in  mind  of,  adm&nere,  commonere,  ui,  Itum. 

Tonitv  $  misereri,1  miseritus,  misertus;  miseres 

P   7'  (      c5re. 

To  condemn,  damnare,8  condemnare,  av,  at. 


"*  Incusare  is  ( to  accuse,'  but  not  in  a  court  of  justice. 

n  Properly,  '  to  pretend  a  thing  against  a  man.' 

°  Literally,  ' to  demand'  i.  e.  for  punishment. 

p  With  tenses  derived  from  the  perf.  (See  odi,  185,  x.)  Imperat.  memento; 
p/.  mementote). 

i  Meminisse  is,  '  to  retain  in  my  recollection,'  '  to  remember : '  reminisci  is,  '  to 
recall  a  thing  to  mind,'  •  to  recollect : '  recordari  is,  '  to  recall  a  thing  to  mind, 
and  dwell  upon  the  recollection  of  it.'     (D.) 

r  Miserari  governs  the  ace.  Miserari  is  '  to  show  compassion,'  misereri,  ( to 
feel  compassion,'  as  an  act  of  free  will,  implying  a  generous  mind,  and  thereby 
distinguished  from  miseret  me  tui  (I  am  miserable  on  your  account),  which  car- 
ries with  it  the  portion  of  an  irresistible  feeling.    (D.)  ^ 

•  Damnare  aliquem  voti  (or  votorum),  is,  to  condemn  a  man  to  pay  his  row  (cr 
tows)  by  granting  his  prayers.    Also,  damnare  votis. 


fc  38.   202.]  THE    GENITIVE.  73 

An  Athenian,  Atheniensis  (162,  c). 

Socrates,  Socrates,  is,  to. 

Barbarian,  barbarus,  i,  m. 
To  live  for  the  day,  forgetful,  that  >  [n  diem  v-vEre 

is,  of  the  morrow,  ) 
[t  is  agreed  upon,  it  is  an  allowed  >  constat  t 

fact,  5 

Superstition,  superstitio,  onis,/ 

Feeble,  imbecillus,  a,  urn, 

To  disturb,  agitate,  perturbare,  av,  at. 

Constancy,  iirnmess  of  rnind,  constantia,  ae,  /. 

To  persist,  perseverare,  av,  at. 

Error,  error,  oris,  m. 

Treachery,  proditio,  onis,/. 

Sedition,  seditio,  onis,/. 

A  Christian,  christianus,  i,  m. 

Injury,  injuria,  se, /. 

Adversity,  resadversse. 

To  condemn  to  death,  capitis  damnare. 

To  acquit  of  a  capital  charge,          capitis  absolvCre. 

Religion,  religio,  onis,  /. 

Exercise  29. 

202.  The  Athenians  (falsely)  charged  Socrates  with  impiety, 
and  condemned  him  to  death.  It  is  for  barbarians  to  live  for  the 
day  (only).  It  is  an  allowed  fact,  that  superstition  is  the  mark  of 
a  feeble  mind.  It  requires  great  constancy  not  to  be  disturbed 
in  adversity.  It  U  characteristic  of  a  fool  to  persist  in  error. 
It  is  your  business  to  obey  the  laws  of  your  country.  It  is  not 
every  man  who  can  leave  life  with  an  even  mind.  It  was  owing  to 
you  that  he  did  not  accuse  Balbus  of  treachery.  He  promises'' 
to  prosecute  Dolabella  for  extortion.  He  was  condemned  to  death 
by  Augustus.  Caius  was  acquitted  of  sedition  by  Augustus. 
Do  not  forget  benefits.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  pity  the 
poor.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  (36)  it  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian 
to  pity  the  poor.  I  fear  that  he  will  not53  easily  forget  the  inju- 
ry. I  fear  that  he  will  remember  the  injury.  Did  you  not 
admonish  me  of  that  (200,/)  ?  Adversity  puts  us  in  mind  of  reli- 
gion. It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  has  been  acquitted  of  the  capital 
charge. 


«  Literally,  it  stands  together  as  a  consistent  truth. 
4 


74  THE    GENITIVE.  [§  29.  203-206 

§  29.   The  Genitive  continued.     {Impersonal  verbs.) 

203.  (a.)  With  interest  and  refert  (it  concerns  or  is  important) ; 

1)  Ths  thing  that  is  of  importance  may  be  either  (a)  an  infin- 
itive {with  or  without  ace.)  or  (/J)  a  neuter  pronoun  [hoc,  id,  illud* 
quod :  so  that  they  are  not  quite  impersonal),  or  a  clause  intro 
chiced  either  (/)  by  an  interrogative ,  or  (d)  by  ut  or  we. 

2)  The  person  to  whom  it  is  of  importance  is  put  in  the  gen. 
with  interest  or  refert;  but,  instead  of  the  personal  pronouns,  a 
possessive  pronoun  is  used  in  the  ablative  feminine  :  med,  tud,  sua, 
nostra,  vestrd  :  so  cwja  sometimes  for  cujus.a 

3)  The  degree  of  importance  is  expressed  either  by  the  gen. 
(magni,  parvi,  quanti,  &c.)  ;  or  by  an  adverb  (multum,  plurimum, 
magnopere,  nihil,  &c). 

4)  The  thing  with  reference  to  which  it  is  of  importance  is 
governed  by  ad ;  as  magni  interest  ad  laudem  civitatis,  it  is  of 
great  importance  to  the  credit  of  the  state. 

204.  (b)  These  impersonals,  pudet,  piget,  poznitet,  tadel,  miseret, 
take  an  accusative  of  the  person  feeling,  a  genitive  of  what  causes 
the  feeling. 

205.  V/hat  caii3c3  the  feeling  may  also  be  a  verb  (in  the  infinitive,  or  in  an 
indicative  clause  with  quod,  or  a  subjunctive  one  with  an  interrogative 
word). 

206.  (a)  Intelligo  quanti  reipublicce  inter  sit  omnes  copias  con- 

venire,  1  am  aware  of  what  importance  it  is  to  the 
republic,  that  all  our  forces  should  assemble. 

Interest  omnium  recte  facere,  It  is  the  interest  of  all 
to  do  right. 

Quid  nostra  refert  1  Of  what  importance  is  it  to  us  ? 
(or,  What  does  it  signify  to  us  ?) 

Magni  interest  ad  laudem  civitatis,  It  is  of  great  im- 
portance to  the  credit  of  the  state. 

Magni  interest,  quos  quisque  audiat  quotidie,  It  is  oj 
great  consequence  whom  a  man  hears  every  day. 


»  To  be  explained  perhaps  by  reference  to  causa,  gratia.  It  seems  to  be 
vruved  that  these  are  (as  Priscian  teaches)  ablatives,  since  the  a  is  long :  e.  g. 
Tcr.  Phorm.  iv.  55  11 : — Datum  esse  dotis.  De.  Quid  tua,  malum!  id  refert'i 
C7t.  Magni,  Demipho.     Refert  =  rei  fert,  for  '  ad  rem  fert '  or  confert. 


&29   207,208.] 


THE    GENITIVE. 


75 


Mud  mea  magni  interest,  teut  videam,  his  of  great 
consequence  to  me  that  I  should  see  you. 

Vestrd  interest,  commililones,  ne  imperatorem,  pes. 
simi  faciant,  It  is  of  importance  to  you,  my  com- 
rades, that  the  worst  sort  should  not  elect  an  em- 
peror, 
(b)  Ignavum  pcenitebit  aliquando  ignavia,  The  slothful 
man  will  one  day  repent  of  his  sloth. 

Me  non  solum  piget  stultitice  meae,  sed  etiam  pudet. 

lam  not  only  sorry  for  my  folly,  hut  also  ashamed  of 

it.     Taedet  me  vitse,  lam  weary  of  my  life.     Tsedet 

eadem  audire  milites,    The  soldiers  are  tired  of 

hearing  the  same  thing.     Tui  me  miseret,  mei  piget, 

I  pity  you  ;  I  am  vexed  at  myself. 

207.  Vocabulary  28.* 

interest,  rifert;  the  latter  very  rarely 
when  a  person  is  expressed,  unless  by 


It  concerns,  it  is  of  importance  or 
consequence,  it  is  the  interest  of/ 


1  am  sorry  for,  vexed  at, 

1  repent,  am  discontented  or  dis- 
satisfied with, 

I  am  ashamed  of, 

I  pity, 

I  am  disgusted  at ;  am  weary  or 
tired  of, 


Like ;  equal  to ;  as  good  as, 


On  account  of, 

To  present, 
Crown, 

Golden, 


i 


a  pronoun ;  principally  in  quid  rifert  7 
what  does  it  signify  1  what  difference 
does  it  make?  and  nihil  refert,  h  is 
of  no  consequence,  or  makes  no  de- 
ference. 

pYget  me. 

poenitet  me. 

pudet  me. 

miseret  me  (see  201 r). 

taedet  me ;  for  per/,  pertsesum  est. 

r  instar ;  an  old  subst.  signifying  a  mod'l 
or  image:  and  as  such  followed  by 
the  genitive.  It  should  only  be  used 
of  equality  in  magnitude,  real  or  figu- 
rative. 

ergo,  governing  and  following  the#e?r\ 
tive.    It  is  the  Greek  Zpyu. 

donare,  av,  at. 

corona,  te,f. 

aureus,  a,  um. 


Exercise  30. 


208 


1  What  are  the  various  ways  of  translating  whether — or  ?] 

What  difference  does  it   make  to  Caius,   whether  he 


76  THE    DATIVE.  [§  30.  209-212 

drinks  wine  or  water  ?  It  makes  a  great  difference  to  me  why  he 
did  this.  It  makes  a  great  difference  to  us,  whether  death  is  a 
perpetual  sleep  or  the  beginning  of  another  life.  I  will  strive 
that  no  one14  may  be  dissatisfied  with  the  peace.  It  is  of  greal 
importance  to  me,  that  Caius  should3)  be  informed  of  my  design. 
I  will  strive  that  it  may  be  your  interest  to  finish  the  business. 
It  is  your  business  to  strive  that  no  one  may  be  dissatisfied  with 
the  peace.  We  pity  those  men  who  have  been  accused  of  treason 
in  their  absence.  I  will  strive  that  no  one  may  recollect  my 
error.  I  am  ashamed  of,  and  vexed  at  my  levity7  (p.  14.  15,  a). 
I  will  strive  that  no  one  may  be  ashamed  of  me.  It  is  your 
interest  that  they  should  not  condemn  me  to  death.  It  is  the 
interest  of  all,  that  the  good  and  wise  should  not  be  banished. 
Plato  is  to  me  equal  to  {them)  all.  That  (tile)  one'  day  was  tc 
Cicero  equal  to  an  immortality.  He  was  presented  (perf.)  with 
a  golden  crown  on  account  of  his  virtue7. 

(For  the  Genitive  of  price  see  under  the  Ablative.) 


IX. 

$  30.     The  Dative.     (Dative  with  Adjectives.) 

209.  Adjectives  which  signify  advantage,  likeness,  agreeable, 
ness,  usefulness,  fitness,  facility,  &c.  (with  their  opposites),  govern 
the  dative. 

210.  But  of  such  adjectives,  several  talo  a  genitive  without  any  essentia, 
difference  of  meaning. 

211.  Natus,  commodus,  incommodus,  utilis,  inutilis,  vehemens, 
aptus,  accommodatus,  idoneus,  may  also  be  followed  by  ad  with  the 
ace,  of  the  object,  or  purpose,  for  which. 

Propior  (nearer),  proximus  (nearest),  take  dot.,  but  sometimes  the  aecu* 

212.  Vocabulary  29.     (Adjectives  governing  the  dative.) 

Grateful  (both  actively  and  pas- >       ^   T 
sively) acceptable;  agreeable,      ) 


'  Suavia  ard  didci*  are  ^rvsttt:^  the  former  especially  sweet  to  me  sense  oi 
midline,  the  latter  to  that  of  taste ;  both  being  used  generally  and  figuratively 


)  HO.  212-1  THE    DATIVE.  71 

Liable,  subject,  exposed  to,  obnoxius,  a,  um. 

Common,  communis,  is,  e. 

(Adjectives  that  take  Gen.  or  Dat.). 
Like,  similis, w  is,  e;  auperl.  siinillirr.ua. 

Unlike,  dissimilis,  is,  e. 

Equal,  par,*  pdris. 

p.  ruliar  to,  proprius,  a,  um. 

[gn  to ;  averse  to  ;  inconsis-  >  alienugy  ^  um> 
tent  with,  ) 

Friendly,  a  friend,  amicus,  a,  um  ;  amicus,  i,  m. 

Unfriendly,  an  enemy,  inimicus.* 

Allied  to  (of  a  fault),  chargeable  )  amnis/  1b>  e> 

with,  > 

Sur  ivinf  \  3nDerstcs>b  itia  »  used  substantively,  c 

oi  (   ■  survivor. 

(The  following  are  often  followed  by  '  ad  '  to  express  apurpose  or 
object,  fur  which,  &c.) 
Born,  natus,  parlic.  of  nascor. 

Convenient ;  of  character,  obliging,  commodus,c  a,  um. 


like  our  'sweet.'    Jucundus,  that  which  directly  causes  joy  and  delight.     6rm/ti*, 
th;it  which  la  grateful  or  acceptable  from  any  cause.    Amamus,  agreeable  or  de- 
lightful to  the  sight,  though  extended  to  othej  things  by  later  writers. 
Dulcia  delectant  gustantem ;  suavia  odore  ; 
Jucunda  exhilarant  animum,  sed  grata  probantur 
A  gratis :  quae  visa  placent  loca,  amaena  vocamus. 
Dbderlein  thinks  that  amaenum  is  not  '  quod  amorem  prasstat,'  but  is  a  syncope 
for  animamum,  as  Camcsncc  for  Canimaencs,  and  is  equivalent  to  '  animo  laxando 
idoneus.' 

w  Similis  takes  gen.  of  internal,  dat.  of  external  resemblance.  This  docs  not 
hold  without  exception;  but  to  express,  like  me,  him,  &c.  (i.  e.  equal  to),  the  gen. 
nhould  be  used : 

.  Ille  tui  similis,  mores  qui  servat  eosdem ; 
Ille  tibi  similis,  faciem  qui  servat  eandem. 

*  Similis  expresses  mere  resemblance :  eequalis  denotes  mutual  and  absolute 
equality ;  par,  mutual  congruity,  proportionate  equality.     (C.) 

y  Alienus  also  governs  the  abl.,  and  especially  with  ab.  'In  the  sense  of  di*- 
intdined,  Iwstile,  the  prep,  is  rarely  wanting.'    (Z.) 

*  Jlostis,  properly  a  stranger;  hence  a  public  enemy  (an  enemy  to  my  country, 
not  necessarily  to  me  personally).  Jnimicus,  one  who  is  an  enemy  to  me  per- 
sonally. Amicus,  inimicus,  as  adjectives,  may  be  compared ;  and  as  such  generally 
take  the  dat. 

»  Also  to  be  implicated  cr  concerned  in  (a  conspiracy,  &c.) ;  an  object  (oi  hus- 
Mcion). 

b  jEqualis  and  supersles  have  usually  a  dat. ;  but  the  former  more  commonly 
%gen.,  when  it  signifies  a  'contemporary?     (Z.) 

o  Commodus  (from  con,  modus),  commensurate  with. 


78  THE    DATIVE.  [§30.212 

Inconvenient,  unsuitable,  incommodus,  a,  um. 

Fit,  aptus,  a,  um. 

Suitable,  serviceable,  idoneus,*  a,  um. 

Fitted,  adapted,  accommodatus,  a,  um. 

Useful,  expedient,  good,  utilis,  is,  e. 

Useless, ,  inutilis,  is,  e. 

Prone,  proclivis,  is,  e. 

Innocent,  innocens,  tis 

Word,  verbum,  i,  n. 

Fault,  culpa,  ae,/. 

Lust,  .ibldo,  Inis,/. 

.Age  =  time  of  life,  Betas,  tatis,/. 

(Eng.)  Common  to  kings  and  peasants  (or,  to  kings  with  peasants* 

(Lat.)    Common  to  kings  with  peasants 

Exercise  31. 

^Should  invenire  or  reperire  be  used  for  finding  what  has  been  sought  1    (177,  o.) 

213.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  (we)  men  are  born  for  virtue. 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  it  is  very  inconsistent  with  your  charac- 
ter to  lie.  It  is  easy  to  an  innocent  man  to  find  words.  I  fear 
that  you  will  not  find  words.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  death  is 
common  to  every  age.  His  father  warned  him  not  to  think  him- 
self born  for  glory.  I  fear  that  these  things  are  not53  useful  for 
that  purpose  {res).  Don't  you  understand  to  how  many  dangers 
we  are  exposed  ?  I  fear  that  these  things  will  not  be  agreeable 
to  the  rich.  We  all  love  (those  who  are)  like  ourselves. d  Our 
own  dangers  are  nearer  to  us  (p.  14.  15,  a)  than  those1 1)  of- 
others.  He  says  that  he  is  not2  chargeable  with  this  fault.  It 
cannot  be  denied  that  he  was  of  a  character  very  averse  from 


*  Idoneus  expresses  a  natural  fitness  actually  existing,  but  that  requires  to  be 
observed,  made  available,  or  (if  spoken  of  a  person)  called  forth.  Aptus  (  s=  con- 
venienter  junctus)  expresses  actual  fitness,  now  existing.  In  use,  the  two  words 
may  be  thus  distinguished : 

I. )  Idoneus  necessarily  requires  a  purpose  to  be  mentioned  or  implied.  Aptut 
does  not  necessarily  require  the  mention  of  a  purpose,  but  may  express  what  isfil 
generally.  (2)  Idoneus  may  express  a  person's  fitness  to  suffer,  to  be  acted  upon. 
Aptus  expresses  a  fitness  or  readiness  to  act.  (3)  Idoneus,  spoken  of  a  person 
describes  a  fitness  that  may  never  be  observed  or  called  forth:  aptus,  a  fitnesa 
actually  existing ;  that  has  been  called  forth,  and  is  ready  to  act.  [Idonezs  from 
'4co,  as  ultroneus  from  vitro.     (D.)j 

*  Nostri,  gen.  pL 


§  31.  214,  215.]  THE    DATIVE.  79 

impiety  (p.  14.  14).  There  is  no  one  but9)  thinks  it  inconsistent 
with  your  character  to  keep  your  word.  I  wished  to  be  liko 
Balbus  (149,  b).  You,  such  is  your  temperance,'  are  the  enemy 
of  (all)  lusts/  (gen.).  I  will  strive  to  discover  what  is161  expe- 
dient for  the  whole  of  Greece.  I  fear  that  these  arguments  are 
not  fit  for   the  times.     Are  you   exposed    to  these   or  greater 


dangers  ? 


Exercise  32. 


[What  is  the  Lat.  for  deliglUful  to  the  eyes.] 
214.  Are  not  your  own  dangers  nearer  to  you  than  those  ol 
others  ?  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  is  (a  person)  of  a  very  oblig- 
ing character.  Many  persons  say  that  their  own  dangers  arc 
nearer  to  them  than  those ll)  of-others.  They  say  that  they  are 
not  prone  to  superstition.  Might  hel7)  not  have  spent18 '  a  more 
honourable  life  ?  It  was  owing  to  you  that  our  life  was  not  taken 
away.  Is  philosophy'  the  best  teacher  of  morals  and  discipline  ? 
[No.]  He  used  to  say  that  Athens  was  the  inventor  of  all 
branches-of-learning.  It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not  turn  out 
an  orator.  I  had  rather  be  like  Cato0  than  Pompey.  Even  Bal- 
bus is  notf  averse  to  ambition.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  (we) 
have  need  of  a  mind  averse  from  superstition.  Have  we  done 
more  good  or  evil  ?  This  is  common  to  me  and  you.  There  is  no 
one  but  understands  that  these  things  are  common  to  the  rich  man 
and  the  poor  man.  I  cannot  butlS  take  these  things  in  good  part.3* 
I  will  strive  that  nobody14  may  pity  me.e  Is  wisdom  peculiar7  to 
you  ?  [No.]  I  fear  the  boy  will  not  be  the  survivor  of  his 
father.  There  is  no  doubt  that  we  are  come18)  into  a  very  de- 
lightful place. 


§  31.     The  Dative  continued. 

215.  All  verbs  may  be  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  thing  oi 
person  to,  for,  or  against  which  any  thing  is  done.     Hence — 


•  Begin  with  '  Catonif  and  go  on  with  'than  Pompey.' 

I  «No'  even  Balbus  is.'  *  Miserct,  notmisereH.    See  201,  r. 


80  THE    DATIVE .  [§31.210-222 

216.  The  dative  follows  verbs  that  signify  advantage  or  dis- 
advantage ;  verbs  of  comparing  ;  of  giving  and  restoring ;  oi 
promising  and  paying  ;  of  commanding  and  telling  ;  of  trusting 
and  entrusting ;  of  complying  with  and  opposing  ;  of  threatening 
and  fomg  angry,  &c. 

217.  00s*  Of  these  verbs  many  are  transitive,  and  govern 
the  ace. 

(a)  With  these  verbs  the  ace,  expresses  the  immediate,  the 
dat.  the  remoter  object  of  the  verb. 

218.  (a)  Verbs  of  comparing  are  also  followed  by  the  prepos  it  ions,  cum,  inter, 
and  sometimes  ad. 

(b)  Of  verbs  that  signify  advantage  and  disadvantage,  juvo,  lado,  deledo, 
and  qfendo  govern  the  ace. 

219.  (c)  Of  verbs  that  signify  command^  rego   and  guberm  govern  the  ace, 
tempero  and  moderor  the  ace.  or  da£. 

220.  Tempero  and  moderor  with  the  <2aZ.  are  'to  moderate,'  '  re- 
strain within  proper  limits:'  in  the  ace.  'to  direct'  or  'govern.' 
Temperare  ab  aliqua  re  =  '  to  abstain  from.' 

221.  (a)  Confer  nostram  longissimam  cetatem  cum  seternitate, 

Compare  our  longest  life  with  eternity. 
Hominem  cum  homine  comparat,  He  compares  man 

with  man. 
Vitam  utriusque  inter  se  conferte,  Compare  the  lives 

of  both  of  them  together. 

(b)  Libris  me  delecto,  I  amuse  myself  with  books.  OfFendit 

neminem,  He  offends  nobody.  Hcec  lsedunt  oculum, 
These  things  hurt  the  eye.  Fortuna  fortes  ad-juvat, 
Fortune  helps  the  bold. 

(c)  Moderari  animo,  To  restrain  your  feeling.     Tempe. 

rare  sibi,  To  restrain  oneself.  Temperare  ah 
injuria,  To  abstain  from  (committing)  injury. 

222.  Vocabulary  30. 

(Verbs  governing  the  dat.  but  fcllowed  by  no  preposition  in  English.) 
Advise,  suadere.i  suas,  suas. 


fc  Jubeo  takes  ace.  with  infin.    It  may  be  followed  by    ut '  with  subj.  if  used 
absolutely,  without  the  mention  of  a  person.    (Z.) 
»  Monere  (properly,  to  make  a  man  think  of  something.    D.)  calls  his  attention 


?ra.  2*22.] 


THE    DATIVE. 


81 


i  credCre,  credid,  credit;  (also  to cniiunl. 
(      with  accus.  of  what  is  entrusted). 

Believe, 

Command, 

imp?rare,  av,  at. 

Please, 

placere,  placu,  placit. 

Displease, 

displicere. 

5  invidere,  vld,  vis  (it  may  also  have  accu* 
(      of  the  thing  grudged). 

Envy,  grudge, 

C  auxiliari ;  subvPnlre,  ven,  vent ;  succur* 

Help,  aid,  assist, 

\     rere,  curr,  curs;  opitulari,  tmblgvare 

'      and  juvare  take  the  accuse 

Heal,  cure, 

mederi.i 

Hurt, 

nBcere,  nocu,  noclt. 

Indulge, 

indulgere,  induls,  indult. 

Favour, 

five  re,  fav,  faut. 

Marry  (of  a  female), 

nube"re,ra  nups,  nupt  (properly  to  vel!). 

Obey, 

«  parere  (of  the  habit)  obedire  (ui  particu 
I      lar  acts). 

Oppose, 

rcpugnare,  av,  at. 

Pardon, 

ignoscgre,  ignov,  ignot. 

Persuade, 

persuadere,  suas,  suas. 

Resist, 

resistere,  restlt,  restit. 

Spare, 

parcere,  pPperc  et  pars,  pars  et  pare  it. 

Threaten, 

(  minari  (with  accus.  of  the  thmg  threat' 
I      ened). 

To  compare, 

comparare ;  conferre,11  till,  collat. 

to  something  from  which  he  is  to  draw  an  inference  for  himself  by  his  own 
reason  and  good  sense.  Hortari  appeals  to  his  will;  suadere,  to  his  understate 
ing.  Suadere  is  to  aitempt  to  persuade ;  persuadere  is  to  advise  effectually;  tc 
persuade. 

k  Auxiliari  (to  make  oneself  a  man's  auxilium),  to  increase  a  person's  strength ; 
to  help.  Juvare  (allied  to  juvenis ;  properly  to  make  youthful,  powerful,  aciivt  ; 
hence)  to  help  (one  who  is  striving.  D.) ;  to  facilitate  the  accomplishment  of  a 
purpose ;  support.  Opitulari  (from  opes),  to  aid  with  one's  means,  credit,  re- 
sources, a  person  who  is  in  great  need  or  peril,  from  which  he  has  no  power  to 
deliver  himself.  Subvenire  (to  come-under,  i.  e.,  to  support) ;  to  come  to  the  as- 
sistance of  a  person  in  difficulty  or  danger.  Succurrere,  to  run  to  the  assist- 
ance of;  which  implies  a  more  pressing  danger;  to  succour.  Sublevare,  to 
raise  a  man  up ;  to  hold  him  up ;  to  support :— figuratively,  to  alleviate,  mitigate, 
lighten.  (It.)  AdjUvo  and  auxilior  do  not  necessarily  imply,  that  the  person  as- 
sisted needed  assistance ;  the  other  verbs  do.  Adjuvare  (to  help  forward)  often 
means  to  increase;  enhance.     (C.) 

l  Mederi  (to  administer  a  remedy  with  good  effect)  relates  rather  to  the  sick 
pcrton,  or  to  the  operation  of  the  physician ;  sanare,  to  the  disease,  or  to  the 
operation  of  the  medicine.     (D.) 

m  To  be  married  is  nuptam  esse,  and  we  find,  nuptam  esse  cum  aliquo. 

»  Conferre  (to  bring  together),  contendere  (to  stretch  together),  componere  (to 

4* 


S2  THE   DATIVE.  [§  32.  223,  224 

cp  ««*».»  S  irasci,  iratus ;  succensere  (of  deep  last 

To  oe  angr>  with,  <      .     '  '  _  * . 

C     tng'  resentment),  both  govern  dative. 

To  injure,  hurt,  laedgre,  lass,  laes  (acaw.). 

To  delight,  amuse,  delectare,  av,  at  (accus.). 

To  oiiend,  offend5re,  fend,  fens  (accus.). 

1  He  threatens  me  with  death '  should  be 

In  Latin,  '  threatens  death  to  me.' 

Exercise  33. 
[Which  interrog.  particle  is  to  be  used  when  the  answer  would  be  '  no '  ?] 
223.  Do  not  hurt  another.  It  is  not  every  man  who  can39  com 
mand  his  mind.  Is  it  easy  to  restrain  (one's)  mind  ?  It  is 
the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  leave  nothing  undone,  that18  he  may 
learn  to  govern  his  mind'.  Ought  (you)  not  to  obey  the  laws  1 
We  ought  to  be  angry0  with  vices',  not  with  men.  "  He  promised 
to  abstain  from3  injury.  Venus  married  Vulcan  (Vulcanus). 
It  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  succour  the  miserable.  They 
promised  to  abstain  from  (committing  any)  injury.  I  will  ask 
him  whether  he  can  cure  my  head.  I  have  left  nothing  undone18 
that  I  might  cure  my  head.  It  is  strange  that  you  should  favour 
me.  Do  you  envy  (pi.)  me  or  Balbus?  I  almost  think25  that  I 
have  opposed  nature  in  vain.  It  shows*9  a  great  mind  to  spare 
the  conquered.  I  warned  my  son  to  envy  nobody.14  Compare 
this  peace  with  that  war.  I  have  unwillingly  offended  Caius. 
He  threatens  me  with  death  every  day.  Do  not  grudge  me  my 
glory.     There  are  some  who109  grudge  me  my  glory. 


§  32.     The  Dative  continued. 

224.   Sum  with  its  compounds,   except  possum,  governs   the. 
dative. 


place  together),  all  express  the  bringing  of  things  into  juxtaposition  for  the  sake 
of  instituting  a  comparison  between  them.  From  their  meaning,  one  should 
say  that  conferre  is  to  compare  things,  the  difference  of  which  will  be  obvious, 
ts  soon  as  they  are  brought  together :  contendere,  to  institute  a  close  comparison. 
Ramshorn  says,  comparare  is  to  compare  things  that  are  exactly  similar,  and 
form,  as  it  were,  a  pair  (par).  But  Cicero  has :  '  conferre  pugnantia,  comparare 
wntrariaJ 
0  Succensere,  because  the  anger  is  lasting. 


§  32.  225-227.]  the  dative.  83 

225.  Verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  or  with  the  adverbs 
bei^e,  satis,  male,  generally  govern  the  dative,  but  with  many  ex- 
ceptiDns. 

(a)  Most  of  the  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  in,  inter,  ob, 
pr(B,  sub,  con,  govern  the  dat. 

(/5)  Many  of  those  compounded  with  ab,  ante,  de,  e,  post,  pro, 
re,  super,  govern  the  dat. 

226.  Some  are  transitive,  and  govern  the  accusative  only ; 
some  govern  the  dative  or  the  accusative  with  no  difference  of 
meaning  ;  and  very  many  of  them  may  be  followed  by  the  pre- 
positions?  they  are  compounded  with. 

227.  Vocabulary  31. 

To  be  absent,  abesse,  abfui. 

To  be  present,  adesse,**  adfui  (hence,  to  stand  by). 

To  be  engaged  in,  interesse. 

To  be  in  the  way,  to  be  prejudi-  >  obesgc 

cial  to,  ) 

To  be  wanting,  fail,  deesse.r 

To  be  before,  or  at  the  head  of,  to  )  praeesse#. 

command,  ) 

To  profit,  to  do  good  to,  to  be  ad-  >  prodesge<f 

vantageous  to,  > 

To  survive,  superesse. 

To  oppose,  obstare,  stit,  stit. 

To  satisfy,  satisfacPre,  fee,  fact. 

To  confer  benefits  on,  beneface're,  fee,  fact. 

To  prefer,  antepon5re,  pbsu,  posit. 

To  reckon  one  thing  after,  i.  e.,  )  poslh5b6re>  habUj  habit> 

as  inferior  to  another,  ) 


p  This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  object  is  no  personal  circumstance,  or 
cannot  well  be  conceived  as  such,  for  then  the  preposition  merely  expresses  a 
local  relation.    (G.) 

i  Prccsens  is  used  as  the  participle  of  adesse.  Prccsentem  esse  expresses  an 
immediate  audible  or  visible  presence;  adesse,  presence  generally,  within  some 
sphere  belonging  to  us.  An  expected  guest  adest,  when  he  is  within  our  walls  ; 
but  to  be  praxens,  he  must  be  in  the  same  room  with  ourselves.  Adesse  relates 
<o  a  person  or  thing  to  which  one  is  near ;  interesse,  to  an  action  that  one  is  as- 
sisting at.     (D.) 

■  Abesse  is  simply  to  be  absent  or  away;  not  to  be  there.  Deesse  Is  spoken  of  a 
thing  that  is  wanting,  ihepresence  of  it  missed,  because  necessary  to  the  compUte- 
ness  of  a  thing.  Deficere  is  the  inchoative  of  deesse,  as prqficere  to  prodessee.  (D.) 

•  Prodesse  drops  the  d  before  those  parts  of  sum  that  begin  with  a  consonant. 


34  the  jjativl.  [§32.  228,229 

Eng.  To  prefer  death  to  slavery. 

Lot    \  r^°  rec^on  slaveiT  after  death  (posthabere  servitutem  morti). 
C  (Or,  as  the  English.) 

Exercise  34. 

|Obs.     '  Better'  when  it  means  preferable,''  'more  satisfactory'  should  be 
translated  by  satius.] 

228.  It  is  wise39  to  prefer  virtue  to  all  things  (transl.  both 
ways).  He  says  that  he  has  done  good  to  very  many'.  He 
says  that  he  was  not  engaged  in  the  battle.  Tt  is  your  business 
to  stand  by  your  friends.  Tt  is  not  every  one  who  can  satisfy  the 
wise.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  judge  to  assist  (subvenio)  an  innocent 
man.  He  says  that  he  will  not*  be  wanting  to  his  friends. 
Who  commands  the  army  ?  I  will  ask  who  commands  the  army. 
I  warned  the  boy  to  prefer  nothing14  to  honourable  conduct. 
How  does  it  happen  that  all  of  you19)  prefer  death  to  slavery  1 
It  is  better  to  do  good  even  to  the  bad,  than  to  be  wanting  to  the 
good.  All  of  us19)  have  been  engaged  in  many'  battles.  To 
some  courage  is  wanting,  to  others  opportunity."  He  promised 
that  he  would  not  be  wanting  eitherT  to  the  time  or  to  the  oppor- 
tunity. Sometimes  (402)  fortune  opposes  our  designs.  There 
were  some  who109  preferred  death  to  slavery. 


.229.  Vocabulary  32. 

(Verbs  that  take  the  dot.  or  ace.  without  difference  of  meaning.) 
To  fiatter,  fawn  upon,'  adulari,  adulatus. 

Lie  near,  border  on,  adjacere,  jacu,  jaclt. 

Attend  to,  consider,  \  ^txadT^  ^  **"*'  *  ^^  °" 

c  antecellSre,  cell u  (very  rare) ;  praestare," 

Excel,  surpass,  am  superior  to,  •?  praestit,  praestit  (dat.  best  with  ante- 
t      cellere). 

pa-j  (  def  ic2re,x  fee,  feet  (to    revolt  from,  a, 

I     ab ;  to,  ad.  Also  with  accus.to  desert). 


t  Sen  note  on  the  second  of  the  Differences  of  Idiom. 
u  Let  the  verb  be  the  last  word  in  the  sentence. 

r  Translate  as  if  it  were,  'would  be  wanting  neither  to  the  time  nor'  &c. 
w  So  also  the  other  verbs  of  going  before,  or  surpassing :  ante-  or  pros-  ceders 
eurrere,  -venire,    vertere,  &c.  (prcecedere  has  only  the  ace.  in  prose.     Z.) 
t  See  227,  r. 


}3fc.    230.]  THE    DATIVE  bt 

t  desperare  (also  with  de  which  govern* 
To  despair  of,  1      the  ablat.,  hence   desperatuc,    given 

'      over). 
To  make  sport  of,  make  merry  <  illudere,   lus,  lus  (also  followed    by  in 

with,  mock,  C     with  accus.  or  ablat). 

Fall  upon,  seize  upon  (of  cares,  >  incessCre)7  cessIV)  et  ce88j  ce8gIt< 

&c,  assailing  the  mind),  > 

Wait  for,  pracstuiari,  atus." 

Rival,  emulate,  aemulari,  atus.a 

Accompany,  comitari,  atus. 

f  praebere  or  prsestare  se  fcrtem  (the  lattet 

To  show  oneself  brave,  Ac  J      implying  adUm ;  the  former  not  nw^ 

sarily  so  ;    praebere  se,  to  show  one 

[     self;  praestare  se,  to  prove  oneself). 

Grief,  dolor,  oris,  m. 

Tuscan,  Tuscus,  a,  um. 

Territory,  ager,  agri,  m. 

Exercise  35. 

•230.  I  will  advise  the  boy  to  emulate  the  virtues  of  his  father 
Attend  to  whatb  (pi.)  will  be  said.  Let  us  not  flatter  the  power 
ful.  The  Tuscan  territory  borders  on  the  Roman  (territory) 
Did  not  words  fail  you  ?  Are  the  Veientes  going  to  revolt  from 
the  Romans  ?  [No.]  I  almost  think  that  the  Lydians  (Lydii) 
are  going  to  revolt  from  king  Cyrus.  Does  it  show89  a  brave  mind 
to  despair  of  one's  (suus)  fortunes  ?  Grief  seized  upon  the  whole 
(omnis)  army.  It  was  owing  to  you2*  that  the  treaty  between  the 
cities  of  Rome  and  Lavinium  was  not  renewed.  I  cannot  but18 
mock  you.  She  never  beheld  Caius  without16  making  merry 
with  his  folly.  I  will  ask  Balbus  whom  he  is  waiting  for.  There 
were  some  who  mocked  the  boy. 


'  So  also  invader e. 

»  Expectare  expresses  merely  a  looking  for  the  future  in  general ;  oppertrt,  to 
x  keeping  oneself  in  readiness  for  an  occurrence;  prcestolari,  to  be  in  readiness 
n  pzrfurm  a  service.     (Rid.  after  Doderlein.) 

*  ^Emulor  is  sometimes  said  to  govern  the  dot.  in  the  sense  of  to  ency ;  it  does 
aot  however  express  simple  envy,  but  the  endeavour  to  equal  or  surpass  a  person, 
which  may,  or  may  not,  he  caused  by  envy. 

»»  '  What '  is  here  rel.  (=  those  things,  which). 


86  THE  DATIVE.  [§33.   231-2ay 

§33.   The  Dative  continued.     (Verbs  with  two  constructions.) 

231.  (a)  Dono,'  circumdo,  and  several  other  verbs,  take  eithei 
a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative  of  the  thing;  or  an  accu 
sative  of  the  person  and  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 

Verbs  of  fearing  take  a  dat.  of  the  person  ybr  whom  one  feara 

232.  (a)  Cirdumdat  urbem  muro  ;  or,  circumdat  murum  urbi, 

He  surrounds  the  city  with  a  wall. 
Ciceroni  immortalitdtem  donavit ;  or,   Ciceronem  im- 
mortalitate  donavit,  (The  Roman  people)  conferred 
immortality  on  Cicero. 

233    Vocabulary  33. 

(Verbs  that  take  dat.  of  person  with  ace.  of  thing;  or.  cxc.  of  person 
with  abl.  of  thing.) 
Besprinkle,  bespatter,  adspergere,d  spers,  spera. 

Surround,  circumdare,  ded,  dat. 

Clothe  oneself  with,  put  on,  indugre,  indu,  iridiit. 

C  exuere,  exu,  exut  (accus.  of  person,  ab- 
Strip  off,  <      lat.  of  thing.    With   accus.  only  '  to 

(      throw  off,' '  put  off,' '  divest  oneself  of/ 
To  cut  off,  prevent,  obstruct,  intercludere,  interclus,  interclus. 

(Verbs  with  a  different  construction  in  different  meanings.) 

'  cavere,  cav,   caut  (cavere  aliquem  ;*  to 

guard  against ;    be  on  one's  guard 

To  beware,  <,      against ;    cavere    alicui,   to  guard ; 

I      watch  over;  cavere  or  sibi  cavere,  to 
I     be  on  one's  guard). 
f  consulere,  sulu,  suit  (consulSre  aliquemi 
j      to  consult ;  consulere  alicui,  to  consult 
To  consult,  s     for  a  person  ;  to  consult  his  interest : 

consulere  in  aliquem,  to  proceed  or 
[     take  measures  against  a  man). 
To  wish  well  to,  cupgree  alicui ;  cupere,  cuplv,  cuplt. 

To  provide  for  the  interests  of  (  prospicSre  patrice. 
one's  country,  <  providere  patriae. 

C  impone're  (aliquid  alicui) ;  with  dat.  only 
To  lay  upon,  \      'to  impose  upon.' 

r  incumbere  rei ;  incumbere  in  rem,  toap- 
To  lean  upon,  <      ply  oneself  vigorously ;  to  devote  one* 

(      self  to. 


t  So,  impertire  vr  impertlri.  «*  So,  insperggre. 

*  Alao  cavere  ab  aliquo,  or  ab  aiHqua  re.        e  So,  bene,  male,  &c.  velle  atfeui 


5  38.  234, 285.]                   THB  dative.                                        97 

Cruelly, 

crudeliter. 

Almost,  nearly, 

prope ;  pene  or  prene. 

Altar, 

ara,  ae,/. 

Baggage, 

impedimenta  (;>/ur.)proptrly  himn  utu«» 

A  camp, 

castra  (piur.). 

A  mound, 

agger,  e*ris,  m. 

A  ditch, 

fossa,  &,f. 

To  prepare, 

parare,  av,  at. 

The  state, 

respublica,  reipublicae,  reipublicae,  rem- 
publicam,  Ac 

To  take  a  camp,  &c. 

exuCre ;  i.  e.  '  to  strip  the  enemy  (ace.) 
of  their  camp  '  (ablal.). 

Humanity,  human  feeling 

humanitas,  atis,/. 

Flight, 

fuga,  a?,/. 

'  mums,  i,  m.  (the  general  term ;  mosnia. 

from  munlre,  is  the  wall  of  a  city  for 

protection  against  enemies ;  paries, 

A  wall,                                            4 

Stis,  the  wall  of  a  building,  allied  to 

pars,  portio,  &c.  ;  maceria,  allied  to 

margo,  the  wall  of  an  enclosure,  e.  g. 

of  a  garden  or  vineyard.    D.) 

A  atone  wall, 

murus  lapideus. 

234.  [C.  xx.]  fjf  In  English,  substantives  standing  before  and  spoken  of 

other  substantives,  are  used  adjectivehj,  and  must  be  translated  into 

Latin  by  adjectives. 


Exercise  36. 


235.  I  warned  Caius  whom  to  guard  (suhj.)  against.  Tar- 
quinius  Priscus  was  preparing  to  surround  the  city  with  a  stone 
wall.  There  is  no  one  who  is  not  aware  that  Cicero  is  watching 
over  the  state.  He  promised  to  consult3  my  interests.  He  im- 
posed on  his  own  (men)  that65  he  might  the  more  easily  impose 
on  the  Gauls.  They  have  proceeded  cruelly  against  Caius.  h 
remains  that  (id)  we  should  consult  our  own  interests.  That 
basest  (person)  has  bespattered  me  with  his  praises.  I  have  per- 
suaded Caius  to  devote  himself  to  the  state.  The  Romans  have 
taken  the  camp  of  the  Gauls.  He  hopes  to  take  the  baggage  of 
the  Gauls.  Do  not  divest  yourself  of  your  human-feeling7. 
Coesar  surrounded  his  camp  with  a  mound  and  ditch.  I  pity  the 
old  man  (who  is)  now  almost  given-over.  I  will  warn  Balbus  not 
lo  throw  off  his  human-feeling.  Consult  for  yourselves  :  provide 
for  the  interests  of  your  country. 


8B  the  dative.  ]_§  34.  236-243 

§  34.   Verbs  that  take  a  second  Dative. 

236.  Sum,  with  several  other  verbs,  may  govern  two  datives. 
(a.  6.)  The  second  dative  expresses  the  purpose  or  some  similar  notion 
It  is  the  common  construction  to  express  the  purpose  for  which  a  mau 
comes,  or  sends  another. 

237.  (c)  A  second  dative  often  stands  after  sum,  where  we 
should  use  the  nominative.     Such  verbs  as  proves,  serves,  &c. 
may  often  be  translated  by  sum  with  the  dative  ;  and  an  adjective 
after  'to  be'  may  often  be  translated  into  Latin  by  the  dat.  of 
substantive. 

238.  (d)  The  English  verb  '  have  '  may  often  be  translated  by 
?um  with  a  dative. f 

(Eng.)  I  hate  a  hat.  I  have  two  hats. 

(Lat.)   There  is  a  hat  to  me.  There  are  two  hats  to  me. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  ace.  after '  have '  will  be  the  nom.  before  '  to  be  f 
the  nom.  before  'have,'  the  dat.  after  'to  be? 

239.  (e)  In  '  est  mihi  nomen,'  the  name  is  either  in  the  nom.,  the  dat.,  or 
(less  commonly)  the  gen. 

The  construction  with  the  dat.  is  even  more  common  (in  the  case  of 
Roman  names)  than  the  regular  construction  with  the  nom.  It  is  an 
instance  of  attraction,  the  name  being  attracted  into  the  case  oi 
mihi.     (K.) 

240.  (/)  The  dative  of  a  personal  pronoun  is  often  used  to  point  out,  in  an 
animated  way,  the  interest  of  the  speaker,  or  the  person  addressed,  in 
what  is  said. 

241.  (a)  Pausanias,  rex  Lacedsemoniorum,  venit  Atlicis  aux- 

ilio,  Pausanias,  king  of  the  Lacedamonians,  came 

to  the  assistance  of  the  Athenians. 

(b)  Pericles  agros  suos  dono,  reipublicas  dedit,  Pericle? 

gave  his  estates  as  a  present  to  the  state. 

(c)  Magno  mdlo  est  hominibus  avaritia,  Avarice  is  a  great 

evil  (or,  very  hurtful)  to  men. 
Ipse  sibi  odio  erit,  He  will  be  odious  (or,  an  object  of 

dislike)  to  himself. 
(rf)  Fuere  Lydiis  multi  ante  Crcesum  reges,  The  Lydiant 

had  many  kings  before  Cr&sus. 
(e)  C.  Marcius,  cui  cognomen  postea  Coriolano  fuit,  Caius 

i  So  'can  have*  may  be  translated  by  'potest  esae.' 


1 84.  242.]  THE    LATIVE.  *  99 

Marcius,  whose  surname  was  afterwards  Coriola- 
nus. — Fonti  nomen  Arethusa  est,  The  name  of  the 
fountain  is  Arethusa.  (Nomen  Mercurii  est  milii, 
My  name  is  Mercury.) 
(f)  At  tibi  repente  paucis  post  diebus  venit  ad  me 
Caninius,  But,  behold,  a  few  days  afterward* 
Caninius  comes  to  me. 
242.  Vocabulary  34. 

(Verbs  that  are  often  followed  by  two  datives.) 
^1)  With  auxilio  (assistance). 
Come,  venire,  ven,  vent. 

Send,  mittere,  mis,  miss. 

Set  out,  proficisci,  profectus. 

(2)  With  culpa,  vilio,  crimini. 

To  impute  as  a  fault,  culpae  dare,  de"d,  dat  (with  ace.  of  thing). 

To  reckon  as  a  fault,  turn  into  a  )  vitio  s  vertCre,  vert,  vers  (with  ace.  of 

fault,  )     thing). 

3)  To  give  as  a  present,  dono  or  muneri,'»  dare  (with  ace.  of  thing) 

To  be  a  hindrance,  impedlmento  esse. 

To  be  a  reproach,  to  be  disgraceful,  opprobrio  i  esse. 

To  be  hateful,  odio  esse. 

To  be  detrimental,  detrimento  esse. 

To  be  an  honour,  to  be  honourable,  honori  esse. 

To  be  very  advantageous,  magnae  utilitati  esse. 

-,  .  {  sibi  velle ;  mihi  tibi,  &c,  to  be  used  ac- 

To  mean,*  <  ... 

I      cording  to  the  person  meant. 

To  throw  himself  at  any  body's  (  se  i  ad  alicujus  pedes,  or  alicui  ad  pedes 

feet,  c      projlcCre,  jec,  ject. 


*  VUium  is  nnyjlaw,  blemish,  or  fault ;  whatever  makes  a  thing  imperfect. 
It  may  therefore  be  found  in  things  as  well  as  in  actions  and  persons.  Culpa 
fa  fault;  whatever  is  blamable;  hence  vitium  may  be  used  for  culpa,  but  culpa 
not  always  for  vitium.  Scclus  always  implies  a  wicked  intention;  culpa  not  al- 
ways, but  often  only  a  want  of  prudence,  caution,  &c. 

J>  A  prarmium  is  given  to  reicard,  with  reference  to  the  merit  of  the  receiver : 
A  donum,  to  produce  joy,  with  reference  to  the  gratuitousness  of  the  gift:  a 
munus,  to  express  affection  or  favour,  with  reference  to  the  sentiment  of  th<» 
giver.     (D.) 

i  PrObrum  is  ( what  a  person  may  be  reproached  with :'  opprobrium  is  '  what 
He  is  (or  has  been)  reproached  with;'  '  a  reproach1  actually  made.     (D.; 

k  That  is,  not  what  one's  meaning  is,  but  what  one  means  by  such  conduct. 

i  Projicere  se  alicui  ad  pedes,  which  Krebs  formerly  objected  to,  ia  qulta 
correct:  (See  Cic.  Sest.  11 ;  Caes.  B.  G.  1,  31.) 


90  the  accusative.  [§  35. 243~24b 

,C.  xxi.]  Jjr"  W/iat   is  sometimes  used  for'Aou?'  (quam):  sometimes  fo1 
iho\c great'  (quantus). 

Exercise  37. 

243.  He  promises  to  come3  to  the  assistance  of  the  Helvetii. 
Timotheus  set  out  to  the  assistance  of  Ariobarzanes.m  It  was 
owing  to  you,  that  I  did  not  throw  myself  at  Caesar's  feet.  It  is 
the  part  of  a  wise  man  always  to  fear  for  himself.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  (86)  he  is  going  to  consult  the  interests'1  of  Caius.  I 
fear  that  these  things  will  not53  prove  an  honour  to  you.  I  don't 
understand  what  he  means  (by  it).  It  is  very  honourable0  to 
you,  to  have  been  engaged  in  such10)  a  battle.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  superstition  ought  to  be  a  reproach  to  a  man.  They  turn  my 
greatest  (see  Index  I)  praise  into  a  fault.  I  hope  that  men  will 
understand  how?  odious  cruelty  is  to  all  men.  I  will  warn  Caius 
howP  advantageous  it  is  to  keep  one's  word.  He  says  that  he  has 
not  many  slaves.  I  will  ask  them  what  they  mean.  I  will  not 
object  (87.  91.)  to  their  imputing  this  to  me  as  a  fault.  He  pro- 
mised3  to  give  them  the  island  of  Lemnos  as  a  present.  Might 
you  not  have  broughtl8)  a  charge  of  immorality  against  Caius  ?37 


X. 

§  35.     The  Accusative. 

244.  (a)  Many  intransitive  verbs  become  transitive  when  com 
pounded  with  a  preposition  that  governs  the  accusative  ;  and  a 
few  when  compounded  with  a  preposition  that  governs  the  abla- 
tive. 

Of  these,  those  that  are  not  deponent  have  generally  a  passive  voice. 

245.  (b)  Neuter  verbs  may  take  a  substantive  of  kindred 
meaning  or  origin  in  the  accusative  ;  and  verbs  of  tasting  or 
smelling  of  take  the  thing  in  the  accusative. 


m  G.  is. 

n  Part,  in  rus  with  the  proper  tense  of  sum. 

0  Say :  '  It  is  for  a  great  honour. 

p  •  How '  must  be  translated  by  quantus. 

"»  With  many  of  them  the  preposition  is  often  repeated ;  and  with  others  the 


5  35.  246-249.]  the  accusative-  91 

246.  (c)  Other  neuters  are  used  transitively  to  express  a  tran- 
sitive notion  combined  with  their  own  proper  notion. 

Thus,  sitire  (to  thirst)  ss  '  to  desire  as  a  thirsty  man  desires ;'  horrcrt 
=  '  to  fear,  and  express  my  fear  by  shuddering ;'  properare  mortem, 
'to  cause  death,  and  to  cause  it  in  Iiaste.' — This  figurative  use  of  neuter 
verbs  is  common  to  all  languages. 

247.  It  has  been  already  mentioned  that  the  accusative  of  neuter  pro- 
nouns is  found  with  verbs,  with  which  the  accusative  of  a  substantive 
would  be  wholly  inadmissible. 

248.  (a)  Pythagdras  Persarum  Magos  adiit,  Pythagoras  vis. 

tied  the  Persian  magi. 
Pythagoras    multas    regiones   barbarorum    pedibus 

obiit,r  Pythagoras  travelled  over  many  countries  oj 

the  barbarians  on  foot. 
Postumia  tua  me  convenit,  Your  Postumia  has  been 

with  me. 

(b)  Somniare  somnium,    To   dream  a  dream.     Scrvire 

servitutem,   To  suffer  a  slavery ;  to  be  a   slave. 
Ceram  olere,  To  smell  of  wax. 

(c)  Sitire  honores,  To  thirst  for  honours. 

Idem  gloriatur,  He  makes  the  same  boast.  Idem  pec 
cat,  He  commits  the  same  sin.  Multa  peccat,  He 
commits  many  sins. 

2*0.  Vocabulary  35. 

(Transitive  compounds  of  Intransitive  Verbs.) 

Attack,  aggrgdi,  ior,  aggressus. 

Visit,  adlre,»  adii,  adttum. 

To  enter  into  a  partnership,  colre  societatem;  coeo.i 

_  ,    e  lU     .„  {  urbem  (but  better)  urbe  excedeVe,  cess. 

To  stir  out  of  the  city  I 

I       C063. 


<iH  is  more  common  than  the  ace. ;  excedere  and  egredi,  in  their  proper  mean- 
ing of  going  out,  should  be  followed  by  t  or  the  abl.    But  Livy  has  urlem 
txcedere. 
r  Ob  in  oticr^o.  Ac,  seems  to  De  an  abbreviation  of  amb,  d^l.    (D.) 
•  Visere  is,  to  pay  a  visit  as  a  friend  or  companion ;  adire,  to  visit  on  busi- 
ness, or  in  consequence  of  some  want;  convenire,  to  visit,  on  business  or  noti 
salutare,  to  pay  a  complimentary  visit.     (D.) 
»  The  compounds  of  to  have  generally  perf.  iit  not  ivi. 


92 


THE    ACCUSATIVE. 


t$  35.  250 


To  exceed  the  bounds  of  mode- 
ration, 

To  die, 

To  call  upon ;  have  an  interview 
with ;  hence,  to  speak  to, 

To  come  to  a  determination ;  to 
adopt  a  resolution, 

To  encounter  death, 

To  smell  of, 

To  have  a  strong  smell  of;  to 
smack  of, 

To  taste  of  (i.  e.  have  taste  or 
flavor  of),  i 

To  thirst  for, 

To  boast  of, 

To  grieve  for, 

To  sail  past  or  along, 

Hardly  any  body, 

Coast, 

Speech, 

Antiquity, 

Citizens, 

Wonderful, 

To  dream, 

Herb, 

Honey, 


modum  excede"re. 

mortem  oblre,  obii,  obi  turn}  obeo. 

convenlre,  ven,  vent. 

consilium  inire. 

mortem  oppetere,  petivi,  petii,  petlt.u 
dlere,  olu  et  olev,  olit  et  olet. 

!  redolere.T 

sapSre,  io   (per/,   rare,   saplv  et  sapu 

saplt). 
si  tire,  Iv,  It. 
gloriari,  atus. 
dblere,  dolu,  dolit. 
praetervehi,  vectus. 
nemo  fere  ('almost  nobody'), 
ora,  ae,/. 
oratio,  onis,./*. 
antiquitas,  atis,/. 
clvis,  m.  etf. 
mlrus,  a,  um. 

somniare,  av,  at ;  somnium,  '  dream, 
herba,  83,/. 
mel,  mellis,  n. 


Exercise  38. 

[How  must  the  infin.  be  translated  after  to  persuade  ?] 
250.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  you  have  dreamt  a  wonderful 
dream.  He  publiehed-a-proclamation  that  nobody14  should  stil 
from  the  city.  I  won't  object  to  your  entering  into  a  partner- 
ship (87.  91)  with  me.6)  Have  you  entered  into  a  partnership 
with  Balbus  or  with  Caius  ?  He  has  commissioned  me  to  have 
an  interview  with  Caesar.  The  honey  (pi.)  smells  of  that  herb. 
His  whole  speech  smacks  of  antiquity.    Does  not  Caius's  speech 


«»  Obire  mortem,  or  diem  supremum  (for  which  obire  is  used  with  the  ace 
omitted),  is  only  spoken  of  a  natural  death,  which  the  mortem  obiens  simply 
suffers  ;  oppetere  mortem  is,  if  not  to  seek  it,  yet  at  least  to  meet  it  tcith  firmness 
and  a  disregard  of  life.     (D.) 

v  Re  has  in  many  compounds  the  meaning  of  forth ;  thus  redolere.  '  t« 
smell  forth ;'  'to  emit  a  smell.'  It  thus  becomes  a  strengthening  prefix :  Dbder* 
>ein  thinko  that,  as  such,  it  is  possibly  the  Greek  tpt. 


J  36.  251-254.]  the  accusative.  93 

smack  of  Athens  ?  It  is  the  duty  of  a  good  citizen  to  encounter 
death  itself  for  the  state.  Ought  he  not  to  nave  encountered18' 
death  for  the  state  ?  Marcellus  sailed  past  the  coast  of  Sicily 
(Sicilia).  Three  hundred  of  us'9)  have  come  to  this  determi- 
nation. There  is  hardly  any  body  who  has  not  (44,  (3)  )  come 
to  this  determination.  I  fear  he  will  not53  choose  to  enter  into 
a  partnership  with  me'.  I  fear  he  will  enter  into  a  partnership 
with  Caius.  May  a  Christian  thirst'  for  honours  ?  He  makes 
the  same  boast  as9)  Cicero.  I  cannot  but18  grieve  for  the  death 
of  Hortensius.  It  is  a  difficult  (matter)  to  put  ofF  all  (one's) 
human-feeling'.  Both  you  and  Balbus  have  exceeded  the  bounds 
of  moderation.  There  are  some  who  exceed  the  bounds  of 
moderation. 


§  36.     The  Accusative  continued. 

251.  (a)  Verbs  of  asking,  teaching,  and  concealing,  may  have 
two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person  and  another  of  the  thing. 

252.  But  very  frequently  (and  with  some  verbs  always)  either 
the  person  or  the  thing  is  governed  by  a  preposition. 

Obs.  Thus  doceo,  to  give  information,  prefers  the  ablative  with  de. 
After  peto,  and  sometimes  after  the  other  verbs  of  begging,  the  person 
is  put  in  the  abl.  with  a:  and  after  rogo,  interrdgo,  &c,  the  thing  often 
stands  in  the  abl.  with  de. 

253.  (c)  Transitive  verbs  that  take  two  nominatives  in  the  pas- 
sive, take  two  accusatives  in  the  active,  one  being  in  a  sort  of 
apposition  to  the  other. 

The  apposition  accusative  completes  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  which 
cannot  form  a  complete  predicate  by  itself. 

Such  verbs  are  verbs  of  calling,  appointing  to  an  office,  considering, 
&c,  together  with/aeto,  efficio,  reddo,  &c. 

The  second  accusative  is  often  an  adjective. 

25 4.  (d)  With  f ado  and  efficio  a  sentence  with  ut  is  often  found 

instead  of  the  second  accusative  ;  and  when  the  accusative  of  the 

first  verb  represents  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  nom.  of  the 

tecond,  it  is  generally  omitted. 

(Eng.)  The  sun  makes  all  things  {to)  flourish 
(Lot.)    The  sun  makes  that  all  things  should  flourish 


94  the  accusative.  [§  36.  255-257 

(Eng.)  He  had  Lysis  for  (or,  as)  his  master. 

(Lat.)   He  had  Lysis  his  master  (  =  as  his  master). 

255.  [C.  xxii.]  (&r'For'  and  'as'  are  to  be.  untranslated 
when  the  noun  that  follows  can  be  placed  in  apposition  to  anothei 
noun  in  the  sentence. 

256.  (a)  Racilius  me  primum  sententiam  rogavit,  Racilius  asked 

me  my  opinion  first. 
(Verres)  parentes  pretium  pro  sepultura  llberum  pos- 

cebat,  Verres  used  to  demand  of  parents  a  payment 

for  the  burial  of  their  children. 
Quis  musicam  docuit  Epaminondam?     Who  taught 

Epaminondas  music  ? 
Nihil  nos  celat,  He  conceals  nothing  from  us. 

(b)  Socrates  totlus  mundi  se  incolam  et  civem  arbitrabatur, 

Socrates  used  to  consider  himself  an  inhabitant  and 
citizen  of  the  whole  world. 

(c)  Mesopotamiam  fertilem  efficit  Euphrates,    The  Eu- 

phrates makes  Mesopotamia  fertile. 
Homines  ccbcos  reddit  cupiditas  et  avaritia,  Desire  and 
avarice  render  men  blind. 

(d)  Fac  ut  sciam,w  or  (with  ut  omitted)  fac  sciam,  Let  me 

know. 
Temperantia  sedat  appetitiones,  et  ejjicit,  ut  hce  rectse 
rationi  pareant,  Temperance  quiets  the  appetites,  and 
causes  them  to  obey  right  reason. 

257.  Vocabulary  36 

Ask,  rbgare,*  av,  at. 

j,  i  petSre,  petlv,  petii,  petit  ( person  to  be 

I     governed  by  ab.). 


w  In  comic  writers  the  ace.  is  often  expressed :  '  Eum  ita  faciemus,  ut  quod 
viderit,  non  viderit.'  •  Ego  tefaciam,  ut  miser  sis.'  j  Neque  potui  Venc-em 
faccre,  ut  propitia  esset  mihi.' 

*  Petgre  and  rogare  are  the  most  general  expressions  of  a  wish  to  obtain, 
whether  in  the  way  of  a  request  or  a  demand ;  thus  standing  between  poscere  and 
irare,  but  somewhat  nearer  to  orare.  Of  the  two,  rogare  relates  immediately 
to  the  person  applied  to,  petere  to  the  favour  asked.  Postulare  and  exlgSre 
denote  a  simple  demand  (without  any  accessory  notion  to  strengthen  it)  as  a 
quiet  declaration  of  the  will :  but  in  postulare  the  stress  lies  on  the  wish  and  wili 
of  the  person  making  the  demand ;  in  exigere  on  the  legal  obligation  of  the  per- 


$  36.  258.]  THE    ACCUSATIVE.  35 

Claim,  require,  demand,  j  P09tulf '  *!'  5tj  P°°C?rC'  >Op0S3'  ^ 

'     ^       '  '  (      cit;  flagitare,  av,  at. 

Beseech,  obsecrare,  av,  at. 

pray>  orare,  av,  at. 

Adjure,  obtestari,  tatus. 

Teach,  dbcere,  docu,  doct. 

Unteach,  dedocere. 

Conceal,  celare,  av,  at. 

To  teach  Socrates  to  play  on  the  \  Socratem   fidibus    doccre    (i.  e.   'to 

lyrej  C     teach  him  with  the  strings'). 

To  think  =  to  imagine,  putare,  av,  at. 

To  think,  or  to  be  of  opinion  =  (  censere*  (the  word  for   delivering    an 

to  deliver  it  as  my  opinion,       (      opinion  in  the  senate-Iwuse). 

existimare  =  exaestimare/to  pronounce 


To  think  =  to  reckon,  judge,con- 


judgment  after  a  valuation;'  arbitrari, 


sider.  )     '.77ZIZ  ItTZT"'  ' 

(      '  to  decide  as  an  arbiter. 

To  think,  as  opposed  to  know,         oplnari,  atus. 

_ T  .      ,     ,    ,    ,  (  non  solum — sed  etiam  ;  or  non    solum 

Not  only,  but  also,  X  .  ' 

(     — verum  etiam. 

To  give  much  information  about,    multa  docere  de  (the  person  in  accus.). 

Again  and  again  =  most  earnestly,  etiam  atque  etiam. 

Experience,  usus,  us,  to. 

Just  :=  fair,  right,  equitable,  aequus,  a,  um. 

Discourse,  sermo,  onis,  to. 

Exercise  39. 

258.  Experience,  the  best  master,  has  taught  me  many/  things. 
Who  taught  you  to  play  upon  the  lyre  ?  I  ask  you'  {thee)  again 
and  again  not  to  desert  me.  I  will  not  conceal  from  you  the  dis- 
course of  Titus  Ampius.  I  fear  that  he  is  preparing53  to  conceal 
those  things  from  his  parents.  He  had  warned  Caius  not  to  con- 
ceal any  thing1*  from  his  parents'.  These  things  I  not  only  ask 
of  you,  but  also  demand.  Who  taught  you  those*  (bad)  manners 
(of  yours)  ?  I  will  unteach  you  those  manners  (of  yours).  The 
Gauls  have  given  me  much  information  about  their  own  affairs. 


son  against  whom  it  is  made.  Poscire  and  flagitare  denote  an  emphatic  de- 
mand :  but  the  poscens  only  demands  in  a  decided  manner,  from  a  feeling  of 
right  or  power,  the  flagitans  with  passion  and  impetuosity  under  the  influence 
of  a  vehement  desire.  (D.)  Hence  flagitare  may  be  '  to  demand  importunately  ,•* 
to  importune.' 
*  Censcrc  is  followed  by  the  ace.  with  infin. ;  or,  if  the  opinion  is  given  to  bo 
foUowea,  by  ut  with  the  subj. ;  but  the  ut  is  often  omitted. 

1  Iste  is  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  '  that  of  yours.' 


»6  THE    ABLATIVE.  [§  37.  259-261. 

I  fear  that  you  will  not  consider  yourselves  citizens  of  the  wholt- 
world.  Religion  will  make  us  obey  the  laws  of  virtue.  He 
thought*  it  just,  that  citizens  (ace.)  should3'  spare  citizens  (p.  14, 
15,  a).  There  is  hardly  any  body  but  thinks  it  iust  that  you 
should  spare  me. 

259.  Vocabulary  37. 

(Impersonate  with  ace.) 
It  escapes  me,  me  fugit,  fallit ;  praeterit.a 

Unless  I  am  mistaken,  nisi  me  fallit. 

It  is  becoming,  decet. 

It  is  unbecoming,  dedecet. 

(Eng.)  It  is  becoming  (or  unbecoming)  to  (or  in)  an  orator  to  be  angry. 

(Lat.)   It  becomes  (or  misbeseems)  an  orator  to  be  angry. 

Exercise  40. 

[Of  sanare  and  mederi,  which  relates  principally  to  the  skill  of  the 
physician?    (222,1.)] 

260.  Three  hundred  of  us,31  unless  I  am  mistaken,  survive. 
I  do  not  forget  (it  does  not  escape  me)  to  how  many  dangers  we 
are  exposed.  You,  such  is  your  temperance,*  have  learned  to  rule 
your  mind.  It  is  not  every  one  who  can3*  cure  the  mind.  I  will 
ask  Caius,  whether  he  can  cure  the  mind.  All  of  us  not  only 
ask  you  for  peace',  but  even  demand  it  (of  you).  It  is  your  duty 
to  succour  the  citizens  now  almost  despaired  of.  It  becomes  a 
wise  man  not  to  be  disturbed  in  adversity.  It  is  becoming  to  a 
boy  to  hear  much,  to  speak  little.  It  is  not  unbecoming  in  an 
orator  to  pretend7  to  be  angry.3  It  does  not  escape  me,  how  odi- 
ous50 impiety  is  to  the  good. 


XI. 

§  37.     The  Ablative. 


261.  (a)  The  ablative  expresses  the  means  or  instrument,  and 
often  the  cause  or  manner. 


*  Censebat.     Censers  should  be  used  when  the  opinion  is  the  expression  of  a 
settled  conviction. 

*  L&tet  me  and  IMet  mihi,  though  they  occur  in  Justin,  Pliny,  &c,  should  bt 
tvoided.    <C.) 


£  h7.  202-266. J  the  ablative.  97 

262.  (b)  The  price  for  which  a  thing  is  bought,  sold,  valued,  or 
jton£,  is  put  in  the  ablative. 

263.  (c)  The  adjectives  magno,  parvo,  &c,  are  generally  put 
by  themselves,  the  substantive  pretio  being  understood. 

264.  But  some  of  these  adjectives  often  stand  alone  in  the  genu 
uve,  especially  after  verbs  of  valuing  at  such  a  price,  with  which 
this  is  the  regular  construction. 

(d)  Tanti  and  quanti  (with  their  compounds),  pluria,  minority  always  stand 
in  the  genitive.  With  verbs  of  valuing,  magni,  parvi,  maximi,  minimi, 
plurimi,  also  stand  in  the  gen. ;  but  magno,  permagno,  and  parvo,  are 
found  in  the  abl.  also  with  astimare.  With  verbs  of  price,  magno,  per- 
magno,  parvo,  minimo,  plurimo,  nimio,  vili,  stand  in  the  ablative. 

(e)  The  substantives(>/Zocci,  nauci,  ni/iili,  pili,  &c,  also  stand  in  the  gen. 
after  verbs  of  valuing. 

&  Multi         I  are  not  used,  but  \  ma^li> 
Majorisb    )  C  pluria. 

265.  (a)  Terra  vestlta  est  Jloribus,  herbis,  arboribus,  frugibus, 

The  earth  is  clothed  with   flowers,  herbs,  trees, 
fruits. 
Cornibus  tauri  se  tutantur,  Bulls  defend  themselves 
with  their  horns. 

(b)  Viginti  talentis  unara  orationem  Isocrates  vendidit, 

Isocrates  sold  one  oration  for  twenty  talents. 

(c)  VenditOri  expedit  rem  venire  quam  plurimo,  It  is  for 

the  interest  of  the  seller  that  the  thing  should  be  sold 
for  as  high  a  price  as  possible. 

(d)  Te  quotidie  pluris  facto,  I  value  you  more  every  day. 

(e)  T5tam  rempublicam  Jlocci  non  facere,  Not  to  care  a 

lock  of  w»ol  (or,  as  we  should  say,  a  straw,  or 
rush)  for  the  whole  state. 

206.  Vocabulary  38. 
To  value,  sesttmare,  av,  at. 

To  hold  cheap,  parvi  pendSre ;  p?pend,  pens. 

_  (  stare,  stCt :  or  constare    (with  dot.  of 

ToCOSt>  \     per.cn). 
To  sell  (intrans.) ;  to  be  sold,  venire,6  eo,  venlv,  and  venu, 


b  The  passage  in  Phaedrus,  '  Multo  majoris  alape  mecum  veneunt,'  to  per 
i  ups  the  only  instance.    (B.) 

:  \  enire  =  venum  ire,  to  go  to  sale,  from  an  old  substantive  venus.    So-,   re- 
ft 


98  THE    ABLATIVE.  [§  3?.  2f>7 

To  sell,  vendSre,  vendid,  vendlt. 

To  buy,  emCre,  era,  empt. 

More  highly,  for  more,  dearer,  pluris. 

For  less,  minoris. 

For  as  much — as,  tanti— quanti. 

For  just  as  much  as ;  for  no  more  >  tantldem-quanti 

than,  ) 

For  how  much,  quanti  ? 

Too  dear,  nimio. 

To  reckon  or  think  nothing  of,  nihili  facSre. 

Not  to  care  a  straw  for,  J  flocci7  fa(!erf  ^ra^i  t0  *?*  »'  e" 

c      reckon  it  '  at  a  lock  of  wool.) 

Not  to  care  that  for  it,        .  non  hujus  faccre. 

Peck,  mbdius,  i,  m. 

Wheat,  tritlcum,  i,  n. 

Sesterce,*  sestertius,  i,  m. 

Merchant,  mercator,  oris,  ra. 

(Eng.)  To  cost  a  person  much  (or  dear). 

(Lot.)    To  stand  to  a  person  at  much. 

1'C.  xxiii.]  f^f  When  one,  two,  &c,  mean  one,  two,  &c,  apiece  or  for  each,  ihcy 

must  be  translated  by  the  distributive  numerals,  sing«di,  bini,  &c. 

Exercise  41. 

267.  That  victory  cost  the  Carthaginians  (Pani)  much  b!ood. 
It'cannot  be  denied  that  that  victory  cost  us  much  blood.  Mer- 
chants do  not  sell  for  no  more  than  they  bought  (at).  He  says 
that  he  does  not  care  a  straw  for  my  glory.  I  will  ask  him  for 
how  much  he  bought  these  things.  I  sell  my  (goods)  for  as  much 
as  Caius.  The  peck  of  wheat  was  at  two  sesterces.  For  how 
much  does  wheat  sell  ?  Epicurus  thinks  nothing  of  pain.  There 
is  hardly  any  body69  who  does  not  (44,  (3) )  hold  his  own  things 
cheap.  I  do  not  care  (hat  for  you.  My  life  is  valued  at  ten' 
asses  a  day.e  It  is  foolish  to  hold  one's  own  (blessings)  cheap. 
He  says  that  I  have  bought  these  things  too  dear.  Merchants 
never  sell  for  less  than  they  bought  (at).  I  will  ask  what21)  corn 
is  selling  for. 


nun-dffre,  ven-dPre  =r  venum  dare.  Tacitus  has  posita  vino,  exposed  for  *a!e 
Veneo  is  conjugated  like  eo,  having  venii  rather  than  venivi  for  perf.,  and  imperf. 
veniebam  as  well  as  venibam.    No  imperat. ;  no  supines,  gerunds  or  participles 

<*  A  Roman  coin,  worth  about  three  and  a  half  cents  Federal  money  A  I'hou. 
Hand  sestertii  made  one  sestertium,  which  was  a  sum,  not  a  coin* 

9  Denis  In  diem  assibus. 


$38.  268-273.]  the  ablative.  99 

$  38.   The  Ablative  continued. 

268.  (a)  Verbs  of  abounding,  filling,  loading,  &c,  and  their 
opposites,  such  as  verbs  of  wanting,  depriving  of,  emptying  of, 
govern  the  ablative. 

269.  (b)  But  of  these  ggeu  and  indXgeo  (especially  the  latter)  govern  the  genir 
tite  also. 

270.  (c)  Some  verbs  of  freeing  from,  removing  from,  differing 
from,  being  at  a  distance  from,  &c,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the 
ablative,  but  generally  (in  prose)  by  ^preposition. f 

271.  (d)  Fungor,  fruor,  utor  (with  their  compounds),  'potior, 
cescor,  dignor,  glorior,  take  the  ablative  :  as  does  also  supersedeo. 

But  potior  takes  the  genitive,  when  it  means  (to  obtain  sovereign 
power  over  J 

9,12.  (a)  Pericles  Jlorebat  omni  genere  virtutis,  Pericles  was 
eminent  in  every  kind  of  virtue  (i.  e.  admirable 
quality). 

(b)  Res  maxime  necessarian  non  tarn  artis  indigent,  quam 

laboris,  The  most  necessary  things  do  not  require 
skill  so  much  as  labour. 

(c)  Athenienses  bello  liber antur,  The  Athenians  were  res- 

cued from  the  (threatened)  war. 
Leva  me  hoc  onere,  Relieve  me  from  this  burden. 

(d)  DivitiiSj  nobilitate,  viribus,  multi  male  utuntur,  Many 

men  make  a  bad  use  of  riches,  noble  birth,  (and) 
strength. 
Augustus  Alexandria  brcvi potlius  est,  Augustus  soon 
gained  possession  of  Alexandria. 

273.  Vocabulary  39. 

(Verbs  governing  the  ablative.) 
To  deprive  of,  privare,  av,  at. 

To  bereave  of,  deprive  of,  ■  orbare,  av,  at. 

To  rob  of  (by  open  violence  as  an  )       u-r  ^ 

enemy),  ) 

To  be  without,  jcarere,h  carui  d  cassus  sum,  carlt  tl 


i  "With  defenderc,  exsolvSre,  exonerare,  levSre,  the  ablative  alone  is  to  be  pro- 
'erred.     (Z.) 
*  Expilare,  compU&re  are  •  to  plunder, '  as  robbers. 
*»  Carere  is  simply  '  to  be  without :'  eglre  is  '  to  need,  to  vani :'  indigirt  is  '  to 


100 


THE    ABLATIVE. 


[§39.   273 


To  stand  In  need  of,  need, 

re-  {  egere  (ablat.  or  gen.)  or  indigere  {which 
(      is  stronger)  egere,  egui, . 

quire, 

To  free  from,  set  free  from, 

re-  ),.,     .     .  _     _„ 

lieve  from, 

>  liberare,i  av,  at. 

To  use, 

uti,  usus. 

To  discharge,  perform, 

fungi,  functus ;  perfungi  (stronger). 

To  enjoy, 

frui,  fruitus,  and  fructus. 

To  feed  on,  live  on,  eat, 

vescik  (no  pcrf). 

To  boast  of, 

(  gloriari ;  also  followed  by    de '  and  by 
\      'in'  when  it  signifies  '  to  glory  in.' 

To  make  the  same  boast, 

idem  gloriari. 

{  niti,  nlsus  and  nixus ;  in  aliquo  nlti,  is 

To  rest  or  lean  upon, 

\      'to  lean  on  a  person  for    support, 
that  is,  ( to  rest  with'  in  the  sense  of 

(_     depending  upon  his  exertions,  &c 

To  rejoice, 

gaudere,  gavlsus. 

Medicine, 

medicina,i  ae,  f. 

Milk, 

lac,  lactis,  n. 

Flesh, 

ca.ro,  carnis,/. 

Cheese, 

caseus,  i,  m. 

Fever, 

febris,  is,/,  (abl.  i.). 

Quite, 

plane. 

Debt, 

(  aes  alienum,   another   man's    money  ; 
I     aes  aeris,  n.  copper. 

A  heavy  debt, 

magnum  aes  alienum. 

Severity  (of  a  disease), 

gravitas,  at  is,,/". 

Disease, 

morbus,  i,  m. 

Perversely, 

perverse. 

(Eng.)  Make  a  bad  (perverse,  &z.)  use  of  it. 
(Lai )    Use  ill  (perversely,  &c.) 


feel  that  I  want ;'  the  in  expressing  intra  animum.  With  reference  to  an  advan- 
tage desired,  carere  is  simply,  •  to  be  without  a  desirable  good,'  egere,  '  to  be 
without  an  indispensable  good.'  (D.)  This  seems  to  be  the  proper  limitation  oi 
Cicero's  definition ;  that  carere  is  '  egere  eo  quod  habere  velis.' 

i  Also  with  a,  ab. 

k  Veaci  is  the  most  general  expression  for  supporting  life  by  food,  including 
tdere  and  bibere  as  the  actions  of  men,  pasci  and  potare  as  the  actions  of  beasts. 
When  vesci  relates,  as  it  generally  does,  to  eating,  it  denotes  any  manner  of  eat- 
ing, che&ing,  swallowing,  &c. :  whereas  edlre,  comedSre  supposes  the  manner  in 
which  a  man  eats,  by  biting  and  chewing.  In  vesci  the  principal  notion  is  the 
purpoie  of  eating,  the  support  of  life ;  in  edlre,  the  means  by  which  life  is  sup- 
ported, the  action  of  eating.     (D.) 

i  Medicamentum  or  medicamen  is  a  medicine  with  reference  to  its  material 
substance,  a3  it  is  prepared  by  an  apothecary :  medicina,  with  reference  to  its  heal- 
ing power,  as  it  is  prescribed  by  a  physician;  remedium  is  a  preventive,  a  remedy 
igainst  an  intending  evil.     (D.I 


$38.  274-276.]  the  ablative.  10) 

Exercise.  42. 

[Should  'every  day'  be  translated  by  indies,  or  by  quotidie,  when  there 
is  no  progressive  increase  from  one  day  to  another  1]     * 

274.  Do  not  deprive  another  of  his  praise7.  I  rejoice  that 
you  are  quite  without  fever.  The  body,  to  be  (ut)  in  good  health, 
requires  many  things. 5)  Nature  herself  admonishes  us  every 
day  how  few  things  we  require.  He  promised  to  set  me  free  from 
my  debt.  Have  I  not  set  you  free  from  a  heavy  debt  ?  Many 
nun  make  a  perverse  use  of  reason.  They  live  on  milk,  cheese, 
flesh.  It  was  owing  to  you92  that  I  was  not  bereaved  of  my 
children.  But  a  little  more2*  and  Caius  would  have  been  bereaved 
of  his  children,  It  is  not  every  man  zoho  can  think  nothing  oi 
p;iin.  It  is  a  disgraceful  thing  (for  a  man)  to  boast  of  his  vices. 
May  I  not  make  the  same  boast  as  Cyrus  ?  I  will  exhort  Caius 
to  discharge  (75)  all  the  duties  of  life.  The  safety  of  the  state 
depends  upon  you  alone  (in  te  unci).  Do  men  alone  feed  on  flesh  ? 
[No.]  The  severity  of  disease  makes  us  require"  medicine 
(gen.). 


275.  The  manner  or  cause,  and  any  word  that  restricts  the 
meaning  of  another  to  a  particular  part  of  a  thing  spoken  of,  is 
put  in  the  ablative. 

276.  Vocabulary  40. 

Lame  of  one  foot,  claudus  altPro  pPde. 

(Adjectives*  followed  by  the  abl.) 

Worthy,  deserving  of,  dignus,  a,  um. 

Unworthy,  indignus,™  a,  um. 

Banished,  extorris,  is,  com.  gend.  (from  ex  terrS)  ■ 

Relying  on,  fretus,  a,  um. 

Contented,  .  contentus,  a,  um. 

Endued  with,  praeditus,  a,  um. 

To  deserve,  dignus,  um,  &c,  esse. 

Censure,  reprehensio,  onis,/. 


*  Adjectives  signifying  want  ox  freedom  from  (vacuus,  liber,  <fcc),  take  the  abl. 
wr  the  abl.  with  a,  ab. 

m  Dignus  andindignus  are  (less  commonly)  followed  by  the  genitive. 

B  ProfUgus  is  one  who  has  fled  from  his  country ;  exsvl  and  extorris  imply 
♦hat  the  person  is  under  sentence  of  banishment.  Extorris  relates  rather  to  trw 
*nise~y  of  the  exile;  exsul,  to  his  punishment  and  disgrace.     (D.) 


102  THfi  vocative.  [§  39.  277,  27H 

Punishment,  poena,  te,f. 

Severe  (of  punishment,  &c),  gravis,  is,  e. 

Motion,  motus,  us,  to.  (what  declens.  ?  why  ?) 

Reality,  res,  rei,  /. 

Name,  nomen,  mis,  n. 

(Eng.)  He  deserves  to  be  loved.0 

(Lat.)    He  is  a  deserving  (person)  who  slwuld  be  loved  (dignus  est 
qui  ametur). 

(Eng.)  To  inflict  punishment  on  a  person. 

(Lat.)    To  affect  ( =  visit)    a  man   with  punishment    (aliquern 
poena  arBcSre). 

Exercise  43. 

27/.  Are  they  deserving  of  praise',  who  have  done  these 
things  ?  [No.]  I  think  this  man  deserving  not  of  censure  only, 
but  also  of  punishment.  These  things  are  unworthy  of  us.  1 
cannot  but  think1*  these  things  unworthy  of  us.  He  has  threat- 
ened me  with*4  severe  punishment.  I  have  said  this  (pi.),  relying  on 
your  compassion.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  will  inflict  a  severe 
punishment  upon  you.  Nature  is  contented  with  a  little.  Age- 
silaus  was  lame  of  one  foot.  Had  you  rather  be  blind,  or  lame 
of  one  foot  ?  The  mind  is  endued  with  perpetual  motion,  ft 
cannot  be  doubted  that  the  mind  is  endued  with  perpetual  motion. 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  sold  his  country  for  gold.  He  is  an 
orator  not  in  reality  but  in  name.  He  is  a  boy  in  age.  He 
deserves  to  be  praised  by  all.  It  is  not  every  one  who  can  heal 
the  diseases  of  the  mind.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  is  banished 
from  his  country.  There  are  some  who109  deny  that  these  things 
are  unworthy  of  us. 


XII. 

§  39.     The  Vocative.     (Attraction  of  the  Vocative.) 

278.  Sometimes,  in  poetry,  a  vocative  is  used  instead  of  a  nomi- 
native after  the  verb.p 

•  So,  he  does  not  deserve  to  be,  &c, '  indignus  est,  qui,'  &c. 

p  Examples  in  poetry  are  Matutine  pater,  seu  Jane  libentius  audis.  (Hor.> 
Tune  Ule  (tdrysuB  Phineus  rex  inclytus  orce  ?  Tu  Phoebi  comes,  et  noetro  dilecte 
parentis    (Val.  Flac*    So  in  Greek  SX0ls  kuw  yivoio !    (Theocr.)    (K.) 


§  39.  270-281. J  the  vocative.  103 

Another  vocative  has  generally  preceded,  and  this  second  vocative  is 
atti acted  into  agreement  with  it;  but  sometimes  it  merely  refers  to  a 
nominative  of  the  second  person. 

(a)  The  phrase  'made  virtute  esto  !'  (a  blessing  on  your  valour !  or, 
good  luck  to  your  valour!)  is  probably  an  example  of  this  construction, 
made  being  the  vocative  of  mactus  from  mag-ere*  (to  increase,  enrich, 
&c).  The  only  objection  to  this  explanation  is  Livy's  adverbial  use 
of  made  with  the  infinitive.  (See  example:  juberem  made  virtute 
esse.)    (K.) 

279.  (b)  On  the  other  hand,  a  nominative  sometimes  stands  in 
apposition  to  a  vocative,  or  where  a  vocative  would  be  the  regular 
construction. 

This  is  especially  the  case  with  solus,  units,  primus. 

280.  (a)  Made  virtute  esto  !     A  blessing  on  your  valour  !  or, 

•  Go  on  in  your  valour  V 

Macti  virtute,  milites  Romani,  este !  Good  luck,  O 
Roman  soldiers,  to  your  valour  / 

Juberem  made  virtute  esse,  &c.    1  would  say,  a  bless- 
ing on  your  valour  !  &c. 
[b)  Audi  tu,  populus   Albanus  !     Listen,  ye  people  of 
Alba  ! 

Salve  primus  omnium  parens  patriae  appellate  !  Hail 
thou,  the  very  first  who  was  ever  called  the  father 
of  his  country  ! 

281.  Vocabulary  41. 

Dutiful  affection,  piety  »  pietas,  atis,  /. 

Towards,  in  (with  accus.). 

r  ave,  salve8  (imperatives  of  the  2d  conju- 
Hail,  farewell !  1     gation— vale,    valeto    is    only    fare- 

(     well !). 

The  toga,t  \  toga>   ac'  f*   (as  °PP08ed  t0  the  mUi' 

C      tary  cloak,  it  means  the  civil  gown). 

i  The  root  mag  (the  Greek  ftey)  of  this  obsolete  verb  is  still  found  in  magnus 
and  mcrtdre  (to  present  with ;  to  honour).     (D.) 

r  Pietas  is  dutiful  affection  (towards  the  gods,  one's  parents,  relations,  country, 
and  even  bendadors),  arising  from  a  natural  feding:  caritas  (properly  their  dear- 
ness  to  us)  is  founded  on  reason  and  a.  just  appreciation  of  their  value. 

■  That  ave  was  a  morning,  salve  an  evening  salutation,  does  not  appear  to  be 
eatablisned.  Suetonius  makes  salve  the  morning,  and  vale  the  evening  saluta- 
tion.    (See  Habicht.) 

1  A  woollen  upper  garment,  covering  the  whole  body,  and  forming  the  ordi- 
nary dress  of  a  Roman  citizen.  It  was  a  flowing  robe,  covering  the  left  arm, 
•ut  leaving  the  right  at  fiber ty. 


104  THE    PASSIVE.  [§  40    282-2W&. 

r  Triumphus,  i,  m.  (a  public  procesaiot 
A  triumph,  <     granted  by  a  decree  of  the  senate  to  a 

'     victorious  general). 
To  gain  a  triumph  for  a  victory  >  de  Qr  ex  Gallis  triumph5re. 

over  the  Gaul  3,  ) 

To  lead  the  captives  in  triumph,     captivos  per  triumphum  ducSre. 
"People,"  pbpulus,  i,  ra.  (the  vocat.  not  in  use). 

Exercise  44. 

282.  A  blessing  on  thy  valour,  Titus  Manlius,  andv  on  thy 
piety  towards  thy  father  and  thy  country  !  Hail  thou,  the  first 
who  has  deserved  a  triumph  in  a  civil  gown  !  Hear,  O  people 
of  Rome !  A  blessing,  O  citizens,  on  your  dutiful-affection 
towards  your  country  !  A  blessing,  O  boy,  on  your  diligence  ! 
You,  such  is  your  diligence, 9)  will  soon  finish  the  business.  His 
diligence  is  as  great as9)  his  abilities.  It  cannot  be  denied-  that 
(86)  his  diligence  is  as  great  as  his  ability.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  he  told  many  falsehoods  about  his  age,  that  (63)  he  might 
appear  younger  (than  he  is).  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  told 
many  falsehoods,  that  he  might  not  be  banished.  I  ask  you  again 
and  again  to  succour  (75)  me.  There  were  some  who109  denied 
that  I  had  deserved  a  triumph. 


XIII. 
§  40.     The  Passive  Voice. 

283.  (a)  The  agent  after  a  passive  verb  (which  is  regularly  under  the  gov- 
ernment of  a  or  ab)  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative,  especially  in  poetry, 
and  after  the  participle  in  dus. 

284.  The  accusative  after  the  active  verb  (the  object)  becomes  the  nomi* 
native  before  the  passive  verb. 

285.  (b)  But  verbs  that  govern  the  dative  in  the  active  are 
used  impersonally  in  the  passive  ;  so  that  the  nominative  before  the 
English  verb  becomes  the  dative  after  the  Latin  verb. 

286.  (c)  VapUlo,  veneo,  Jio,  having  a  passive  meaning,  have  also  a  paastvt 
construction. 


■  Not  in  the  sense  of  folk  or  folks,  as  in  English,  but  of  a  people. 
v  Ac.    (See  4,  d.) 


$  40.  287-290.]  the  passive.  105 

287.  [C.  xxiv.]  OCT  (d)  To  express  the  future  subjunctive 
passive  we  must  not  use  the  participle  in  dus  with  sim,  essem,  &c, 
but  futurum  sit,  esset,  &c,  followed  by  ut. 

288.  (s)  The  future  infinitive  passive  is  made  up  of  the  supine 
>n  urn  with  iri ;  but  when  verbs  have  no  supine,  we  must  use 
fore  or  futurum  esse,  &c. 

This  substitute  for  a  future  infinitive  passive  must  be  used  even 
when  the  verb  has  a  supine,  unless  the  event  is  to  be  described  as  being 
about  to  happen. 

In  other  words  the  supine  with  iri  is  a  paulo-post  futurum. 

289.  (/)  So  also  fore  ut  with  the  subjunctive  should  be  used 
for  the  future  infinitive  active,  when  the  event  is  not  to  be  described 
as  being  now  about  to  happen. 

290.  (a)  Mihi  consilium   captum  jam  diu  est,  My  resolution 

has  long  been  taken. 
(I)  Gloria  tuce,  invidetur,  Your  glory  is  envied. 

Philosophise  vituperatoribus  satis  responsum  est,  The 
revilers  of  philosophy  have  been  sufficiently  answered, 

(c)  Rogatus  est,  an  ab  reo  vapulasset,   He  was  asked 

whether  he  had  been  beaten  by  the  prisoner.  Ah 
hoste  venire,  To  be  sold  by  an  enemy.  A  me  fieri, 
To  be  doing  by  me. 

(d)  Nescio,  quando  futurum  sit,  ut  epistola  scribatur,w  / 

don't  know  when  the  letter  will  be  written. 

(e)  Dixitybre  ut  oppidum  expugnaretur,*  He  said  that  the 

town  would  be  taken. 
Dixit  oppidum  expugnatum  iri,  He  said  that  the  city 
was  about  to  be  taken.     (G.) 

(f)  Nunquam  putavi  fore  ut  supplex  ad  te  venirem,  I 

never  thought  that  I  should  come  to  you  as  a  sup- 
pliant. 

{Eng.)  You  are  envied,  favoured,  spared,  answered,  <fcc. 
(Lot.)    11  is  envied  (favoured,  spared,  answered,  &c.)  to  you. 
(Eng.)  I  don't  know  when  it  will  be  written. 
(Lot.)    1  don't  know  when  it  will  be  (subj.)  that  it  be  written. 


*  Of  course  esset  and  scriberetur  after  a  past  tense. 

■  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  verb  depends  not  on  fore,  but  on  the  preced 
ng  verb.     Spero  fore  ut  convaleicat :  sperabam  fore  ut  convalesceret. 


106  the  passive.  [^  40.  291,292 

291.  Vocabulary  42. 

To  be  beaten,  vaptilare,  av,  at. 

5  convalesc»»re,y  valu  (see  Tables  for  Ro- 
To  recover  (from  a  sickness),         $     ferenC6)  IL  ^ 

To  heal,  to  be  healed  of  a  wound,    consanescgre,  sanu. 

5  recrudescSre,   crudu  (properly  to  gro* 
To  burst  out,  or  bleed  afresh,        \     raw  againj# 

Wound,  vulntis,  gris,  n. 

Priest,  priestess,  sacerdos,  dotis,  m.  etf. 

A  husband,  vir,  viri,  m.  (a  man). 

S  persuasum  est  mihi,  or  persuasum  ha- 
I  am  persuaded,  i      .       , 

A  liar,  mendax,  acis  (prop,  an  adject.). 

Faith,  fidelity,  fides,  ei,/. 

<  plerique  (pleri  declined  and  que  append- 
Most  men>  i     ed ;  but  not  found  in  the  genit.). 

'  facCre  (with  ablat. ;  abl.  with  de  ;  or  with 

dat.    De  should  be  expressed  before 

To  do  any  thing  with  a  person,     ^      the  personal  pronouns,  the  ablatives 

of  which  are  of  the  same  form  as  the 
[     accusatives). 

Exercise  45. 

292.  I  will  ask  whether  he  has  been  beaten  by  his  slave. 
What  will  become  of  my  Tulliola/  ?  I  hope  he  will  recover.  I 
hoped  he  would  recover.  I  doubt  not  but  that  (86)  you  will  be 
praised  by  all.  The  wounds,  which  had  been  healed,  bleed 
afresh.  I  fear  his  wounds  will53  bleed  afresh.  These  priest- 
esses of  Vesta  are  not  permitted  to  marry  a  husband.  Your  virtue 
is  envied.  Liars  are  not  believed.  The  unwilling  are  not  easily 
persuaded  of  any  thing.*  There  is  no  doubt  that  your  glory  will 
be  envied.  All  my  property  has  been  sold  by  an  enemy.  I  will 
ask  whichb  of  them  is  favoured  by  Csesar.  That  (ille)  age  is 
not  only  not  envied,  but  even  favoured.  I  fear  that  these  wounds 
will  not od  heal.     What  will  become  of  me  ?     There  are  some 


y  The  disease  from  which  a  person  recovers,  must  be  governed  by  ex  with 
tha  abl. 

1  Per8uasissimum  \abeo  should  never  be  used ;  persuasissimum  est  mihi  does 
not  occur  in  Cicero,  but  in  a  letter  of  Brutus' s  to  Cicero.  (Klotz.)  I  am  per* 
waded  of  (persuasum  est  niihi  de,  &c.  with  abl.). 

*  Say :  *  to  the  unwilling  nothing  is  es  «ily  persuaded.'  b  Of  two  persona 


*  41.  293-297.]  the  passive.  101 

who'09  believe  that  he  has  been  beaten  by  his  slave.     There  are 
some  who  envy  your  glory. 


§  41.     The  Passive  continued. 

293.  (a)  The  verbs  that  govern  two  accusatives  in  the  active, 

sometimes  govern  one  accusative  (that  of  the  object)  in  the  passive. 

Since  even  in  the  active  it  is  only  some  verbs  of  asldng,  &c.  that  gov- 
ern the  two  accusatives,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  extend  the  rule  just 
given  beyond  the  actual  practice  of  good  writers. — Rogari  may  take 
this  ace.  It  is  found  with  indutus  and  edoctus;  with  doctus  or  dedoctus 
it  is  not  common  in  prose :  with  celuri  and  moniri  very  rare,  except 
with  the  neuter  of  pronouns,  or  such  adjectives  as  multa,  ptuca.    (Z.) 

294.  (b)  Passive  verbs  and  participles  are  sometimes  followod 

by  an  accusative  of  thenar/  particular!]/  referred  to  (accusativus 

partis  aiTcctas). 

Thus  we  may  say,  not  only  caputferltur  alicui,  or  caput  alicujusfe- 
rttur,  but  also  aliquis  ferltur  caput. 
(c)    In  some  particular  constructions  the  part  referred  to  is  put  in  the  gen, 
or  ablative. 

295.  An  accusative  also  follows  many  other  passive  participles,  especially 
in  the  poets. 

The  peculiarity  is  this :  the  dative  of  the  act.  is  allowed  to  stand  as 
the  nominative  (subject)  before  the  passive,  or,  which  comes  to  the  same 
thing,  with  a  passive  participle  in  agreement  with  it ;  and  then  the  ac- 
cusative of  the  object  is  allowed  to  remain.  This  construction  (which 
is  called  the  Greek  accusative),  and  that  in  294,  must  not  be  imitated 
by  those  who  wish  to  write  in  Cicero's  style.    (G.) 

29G.  In  many  general  expressions  the  passive  voice  is  used 
impersonally  where  the  active  might  be  used  in  Latin,  and  is  used 
in  English. 

(Thus  ambulatum  est,  It  has  been  walked  (by  us)  =  we  have 
walked). 

297.  (d)  With  verbs  of  seeming,  and  passive  verbs  of  declaring, 
thinking,  &c,  the  personal  construction  is  far  more  common  than 
the  impersonal. c 


•  In  the  past  tenses,  traditum  est,  proditum  est  are  very  commonly  used.  The 
passives  of  audirt  and  nuntiare  are  frequently,  though  not  so  exclusively,  used 
personally.    (Z.) 


103  THE   PASSIVE.  [§41.21)8,299 

(Eng.)  It  seems,  is  said,  &c,  that  Caius  has  retired  (or,  as  Lat.). 
(Lat.)    Caius  seems,  is  said,  &c,  to  have  retired. 

238,  (a)  Rogatus  sententiam,  Being  asked  his  opinion.  Longam 

indutus  vestem,  Clothed  in  a  long  garment. 

(b)  Oblitusd  faciem  (smeared  as  to  his  face  ==),  having 

his  face  smeared  or  covered.  Incensus  animurn 
(kindled  as  to  his  mind  =),  Having  his  mind  agi- 
tated. Adversum  femur  ictus  (struck  as  to  his 
opposite  thigh  =),  Wounded  in  the  front  part  of 
his  thigh. 

(c)  Pendere  animi  or  animo,e  To  he  in  anxious  suspense. 

Discrucior  animi,  My  mind  is  on  the  rack  ;  I  am 
tortured  in  mind. 

(d)  Lycurgi  temporibus  Homerus  fuisse  dicitur,  Homer 

is  said  to  have  lived  (or,  it  is  said  that  Homer  lived) 
in  the  time  of  Lycurgus. 
Miltiades  videbatur  non  posse  esse  privatus,  it  seemed 
that  Miltiades  could  not  he  a  private  man. 

299.  Vocabulary  43. 
Blood  f  (when  shed),  cruor,  oris,  m. 

«..  <  tacitus,  a,  um  (if  actual,  taciturnus,  a 

(      um  if  habitual  silence  is  meant.) 

To  be  silent,  hold  one's  tongue,        silere,  silu,  

To  be  silent,  hold  one's  tongue, 

cease  speaking, 
Silence,  silentium,  i,  n. 

Habit  of  silence,  taciturnitas,  atis,  /. 

About  (aflsr  to  be  silent),  \  de  <with   Mai'    Bul  neuter  Prommn 

(      may  stand  in  accus.  without  prepos.^ 

To  set  on  fire,  incendere,  cend,  cens. 

To  light,  kindle,  accendere,  succendere,  cend,  cens.h 


d  From  ohtinlre. 

e  Often  animis,  if  more  than  one  person  is  spoken  of.  Cicero  uses  •pendirt 
mimi  and  pendere  animis :  not,  1  believe,  pendere  animo. 

t  Sa7]giiis  inest  venis,  cruor  est  de  corpore  fusus.  At  the  moment  of  shedding 
sanguis  should  be  used. 

K  Silere  is,  to  emit  no  sound,  to  make  no  noise,  to  be  still ; — tacere  is,  to  utter 
no  word,  to  be  silent ;  especially,  to  pass  over  in  silence.  The  opposites  o( 
filers  lire  strepZre,fremgre;  of  tacere,  dicere  and  Wqui.     (D.) 

h  Incendere  is  to  set  the  whole  of  a  thing  on  fire ;  accendere  and  succendere,  to 
Bet  a  pari  of  it  on  fire,  that  it  may  be  consumed  gradually.    Accendere  is  tc 


tacere,?  tacu,  tacit. 


)*4.  300.]  THE   PASSIVE. 

Torch,  taeda,  ae,  /. 

Lamp,  lucerna,  ae,  /. 

Funeral  pile,  pyre,  rbgus,  i,  m. 

To  strike,  hit,  wound,  ferire;  icCre,i  ic,  let ;  cacd^re,  cPcid,  cspb 

Rod,  .  virga,  ae,  /. 

Spear,  hasta,  ac,  /. 

Arrow,  sagitta,  ae,  f. 

Lightning,  fulmen,  inis,  n. 

To  be  flogged,  whipped  with  rods,  virgis  caedi. 

Thigh,  femur,  bris,  n. 

To  walk,  ambulare,  av,  at. 

Right  (opposite  otlefl),  dexter,  tra,  trum. 

Exercise  46. 

300.  Cato  was  first  asked  his  opinion.  You  with  your  usual 
habit  of  silence*  said  nothing.  Marcus,  having  his  face  covered 
w  ith  his  own  blood,  left  the  city.  The  laws  ought  not  to  be  silent. 
I  am  afraid  that53  the  laws  are  silent  about  these  matters.  Han- 
nibal, having  his  mind  agitated  by  silent  care,  was  silent.  1 
warned  the  boy  not  to  light  the  torch.  By  whom  has  the  funeral 
pile  been  lighted  ?  I  will  inquire  by  whom  the  funeral  pile  was 
lighted.  Caius,  being  struck  by  lightning,  died.k  I  foretell  that 
you  will  be  flogged  (288).  Caius  was  wounded  by  an  arrow'  on 
his  right  thigh.  A  league  was  made  between  the  cities  of27 
Rome  and  Lavinium.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  lamp  was 
lighted  by  the  boy.  We  have  walked  (pass.)  enough.  We  have 
corne  (pass.)  to  (ad)  the  town.  It  cannot  be  that20  he  is  not  tor- 
tured in  mind.  It  is  said  that  Caius  has  been  struck  by  a  stone. 
Was  the  funeral  pilo  lighted  by  you  or  by  Balbus  ? 


light  it  from  above,  succendere  from  below.  Hence  a  torch,  lamp,  &c,  accenditnr . 
a  funeral  pile  succenditur.  (D.)  Animus  accensus  is  merely  an  excited  mind, 
xnimus  incensus  an  agitated  mind.     (D.) 

i  Ferire,  to  strike  generally ;  cccdere  is  to  strike  with  what  cuts  (including 
rods,  &c.) :  iclre,  to  strike  with  what  pierces  (including  lightning,  stones,  &c). 
Ferhi  and  icire  supply  each  other's  deficiencies:  thus  ferire  is  used  for  pres., 
iviperf.,  fut.,  which  icere  wants ;  and  icere  supplies  ferire  with  a  perf.  and  past 
participle  for  ferii,feritus,  which  are  not  in  use.  (D.)  Icere  faedus  is  to  ratify 
i>r  make  a  treaty,  league,  &c. 

k  Dccesd.. 


tlO  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME.  [§42.301-307, 

XIV. 
§  42.    Expressions  of  Time. 

301.  (a)  In  answer  to  the  question  when  ?  the  noun  which 
expresses  time  is  put  in  the  ablative  :  in  answer  to  the  question 
how  long  ?  in  the  accusative. 

302.  (b)  In  answer  to  the  question  in  what  time  ?  within  what 

time  ?  either  a  preposition  (inter,*  intra)  is  used  :  or  the  noun  is 

put  in  the  ablative  with  a  cardinal  or  ordinal  numeral. 

If  a  cardinal  number  is  used,  the  noun  will  be  in  the  plural ;  if  an 
ordinal,  in  the  singular. 

(In  ten  years :  in  the  tenth  year.) 

303.  (c)  In  answer  to  the  questions  how  long  before  ?  hoio 
long  after  ?  the  noun  that  expresses  time  is  put  in  the  ablative. — 
Ante  and  post  are  here  used  as  adverbs,  unless  there  be  another 
noun  or  pronoun  to  be  governed  by  them. 

304.  (d)  A  point  or  space  of  future  time  for  which  any 
arrangement  or  provision  is  now  made,  is  put  in  the  accusative 
with  in  :  the  exact  time  at  which  a  thing  is  to  be  done,  in  the  ace. 
with  ad. 

305.  (e)  Abhinc  (ago)  of  past  time  is  joined  to  the  accusative 
or  the  ablative  :m  it  must  precede  the  numeral  and  its  substantive, 
one  of  which  must  be  the  next  word  to  it. 

306.  (/)  Natus  (born)  with  the  accusative  of  time  =  at  such 

an  age  ;  so  many  years  old.     Major  and  minor  with  the  genitive 

or  ablative  of  time  =  (respectively)  above  or  under  such  an  age. 

At  such  an  ag:  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  genitive  only  (without 
natus). 

307.  (a)  Vere,   In   the   spring.     Auctumno,   In   the  autumn. 

Hibernis  mensibus,  In  the  winter  months.     Solis 
occasu  (at  the  setting  of  the  sun  =),  At  sunset. 

l  Inter,  if  the  whole  duration  is  spoken  of:  intra,  if  some  point  within  that 
Stpace. 

m  Zumpt  says  the  accusative  for  duration,  the  ablative  for  a  point  of  time. 
Thi3  seems  to  be  incorrect;  thus  in  'litem  decidit  abhinc  annos  tpvatuor'  duration 
is  not  meant.  The  ablative  is  more  definite  than  the  accusative,  and  should  (I 
think)  be  used  when  a  definite  point  of  past  time  is  to  be  expressed  ;  the  accw 
eative  when  exact  accuracy  is  not  intended.  Hence  the  accusative  is  the  more 
common. 


f  42.  307.]  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME.  Ill 

Inediam  biduum  aut  triduum  ferre  (to  endure  absti 
nence  from  food  =),  To  go  without  food  for  two, 
or  even  three  days. 

Ager  multos  annos  quievit,  The  field  has  lain  fallow 
for  many  years. 

(b)  Germani  inter  annos  quatuordecim  tectum  non  subie 

rant,   The  Germans  had  not  entered  a  house  for 

fourteen  years  together. 
Multi  intra  vicesimum  diem  dictatura  se  abdicaverunt, 

Many  persons   have  laid  down  their  dictatorship 

within  twenty  days. 
Agamemnon  cum  universa  Grcecia  vix  decern  annis 

unam  cepit  urbem,  Agamemnon  with  the  whole  of 

Greece  had  great  difficulty  in  taking  a  single  city  in 

ten  years. 
Pompejus  undequinquagesimo  die  ad  imperium  populi 

Romani  Ciliciam  adjunxit,  Pompeius  in  forty-nine 

days  added  Cilicia  to  the  empire  of  the  Roman 

people. 

(c)  Paucis  post   mensibus,    A  few   months   afterwards, 

Paucis  ante  diebus,  A  few  days  before. 
Homerus  annis  multis  fuit  ante  Romulum,  Homer  lived 
many  years  before  Romulus. 

(d)  Ad  ccsnam  Canium  invitavit  in  posterum  diem,  He 

invited  Canius  to  supper  for  the  next  day. 
Solvere  ad  Gracas  Kalendas,m  To  pay  on  the  Greek 
Kalends. 

(e)  Abhinc  annos  (or  annis)  quatuor,  Four  years  ago. 

(f)  Cato  annos  quinque  et  octoginta  natus  excessit  e  vita, 

Cato  departed  this  life  when  he  was  eighty-five  years 
old  (or,  at  the  age  of  eighty-five). 
'  Minores  annis  triginta  (Persons)  under  thirty  years 
old  (or,  of  age). 
Minores  duorum  et  viginti  annorum,  TJndei  the  aga 
of  two-and-twenty. 


11  That  is,  never ;  there  being  no  Kalends  in  the  Greek  Calendar. 


112 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME. 


[5  42.   30* 


Civ  is  major  annis  viginti,  A  citizen  above  twenty 
years  old. 

Cato  primum  stipendium  meruit  annorum  decern  sep- 
temque,  Cato  served  Ms  first  campaign  at  the  age 
of  seventeen  (or,  when  he  was  seventeen  years  old) 


308.  Vocabulary  44. 

To  receive, 

To  succeed  to  =  follow, 

Swallow, 

Winter  (as  adj.), 

Month, 

Go  away, 

To  kill, 

To  kill  (as  a  violent,  unjust,  cruel 
act;  by  poison,  starvation,stran- 
gling,  &c.), 

To  kill,  slay  (especially  in  hon- 
ourable, open  fight), 

To  slaughter,  butcher, 

To  reign  (neut.), 

To  lay  down  a  magistracyj 

Exactly  (of  a  number), 

Ephesian, 

Temple, 

To  be  burnt, 

To  serve  a  campaign, 

To  hold  a  magistracy, 


accipere,  reclpgre,  excipe"re,n  cep,  cept, 

excIpCre,  cep,  cept  (accus.). 

hirundo,  Inis,./. 

hibernus,  a,  um. 

mensis,  is,  m. 

abire,  abeo,  iv,  it  (78,  x.). 

interf  ic6re,  fee,  feet  (the  most  general 
term  for  killing,  whether  by  starva- 
tion, poison,  hanging,  or  the  sword). 

1  necare ;  or  enecare  (if  by  a  process  that 
]     takes  up  some  time). 

occldere,  eld,  els  (it  is  used  however  of 

all  kinds  of  killing). 
trucldare  (according   to    Doderlein  = 

taurkldo,  I  cut  down  an  ox). 
regnare,  av,  at. 
abdlcare  magistratum,  or  abdlcare  se 

magistratu. 
ipse  (in  agreement  with  the  noun). 
Ephesius,  i,  m. 
templum,  i,  n. 
deflagrare,  av,  at  (intrans.). 
stipendium  merere  or  mereri  (i.  e.   10 

earn  pay), 
magistratum  gerPre,  gess,  gest. 


n  Accipimus  oblata ;  excipimus  vagantia ;  recipimus  fugientia.  (D.)  To  receive 
is  accipere,  when  the  thing  is  offered  or  given :  to  receive  a  person  flying  or  wan- 
dering is  excipere  or  recipere ;  excipere  being  the  act  of  a  servicable  friend,  an 
equal ;  recipere  that  of  a  benefactor,  a  superior.  Excipere  is  to  stop  a  living 
being  in  motion,  and  either  receive  him  in  a  friendly,  or  intercept  him  in  a  hostile 
manner.  (D.)  Accipere  vulnera  is  to  receive  wounds  intended  for  me;  excipere 
xmlnera  is  to  expose  myself  to  wounds  '  that  may  every  moment  come  in  my 
way.'  (Hill.)  Recipere  is  also  distinguished  from  accipere  by  denoting  to  receiva 
not  merely  for  detention,  but  for  actual  possession.  Accepta  pecunia  may  be  a 
nitre  deposit:  recepta  pecunia  is  a  formal  taking  into  possession.  (D.) 


$  42.  309,  310.]  expressions  of  time.  119 

[C.  xxv.]  3^*  After  an  expression  of  time,  '  ifiat*  is  often  used  for  on  which 
(Eng.)  To  have  reigned  more  than  (or  above)  two  years. 
(Lot.)   To  be  reigning  his  third  year. 
(Eng.)  Before  the  consulship,  censorship,  &c,  of  Caius. 
(Lai.)   Before  Caius  (being  consul,  censor,  &c.  (ante  Caium  consulem> 

Exercise  47. 

309.  I  come  to  your  epistles,  six  hundred  of  which31 1  received 
at  one  time.  The  swallows  go  away  in  the  winter  months.  Do 
not  the  swallows  go  away  in  the  winter  months  1  Mithridates 
slaughtered  many  Roman7  citizens  in  one'  day.  Mitliridates,  who 
in  one  day  butchered  so  many  Roman  citizens,  has  already  reigned 
above  two-and-twenty  years  from  that  (ab  illo)  time.  We  dream 
whole  nights.  Caius  laid  down  his  dictatorship  within  ten  days. 
Scipio0  died  a  year7  before  my  consulship.  Cato  died  exactly 
eighty p-three  years  before  the  consulship  of  Cicero.  The 
eclipses  of  the  sun  are  foretold  for  many  years.  He  published 
an  edict,  that  no  one14  under  (306,  /)  nine-and-twenty  years  old 
should  command  an  army.  On  the  same  night  that  *  Alexander 
was  born,  the  temple  of  the  Ephesian  Diana  was  burnt-down.  It 
is  certain  that  Caius  served  his  first  campaign  at  the  age  of 
eighteen.  He  died  at  the  age  of  thirty-three.  King  Archelaus 
had  been  in  possession  of  Cappadocia  for  about  forty-nine  years. 
At  the  age  of  thirty  he  had  already  waged  many  wars.  May 
(then)  a  man  under  twenty-two  years  old  hold  a  magistracy  ? 
He  died  three  years  ago.  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  citizen  to 
receive  wounds  for  his  country. 


310.  (a)  (He  did  it)  three  years  after  he  (had)  returned. 

(1)  post  tres  annos  (or  tertium  annum)  )  quam  redie- 

(2)  tertio  annor )      rat. 


«  Scipio  the  last  word.  p  Annis  octoginta  et  tribus  ipsis. 

*  Begin  with  the  relative  clause.    30  (c).  32  (d). 

T I   inigh'  be  supposed  that  'tertio  anno  quam  (or  quo)  redierat,'  would  mean 


Ill  i  xhii::.mon::  hi'  -iiimk.  [J  42.    311 

(:t)    ImI.ii  .  .mm      (../•   f-   Ml-  mill..)  I'n.lh/inuil    I-  rlii  rut. 

(  I )  i.  i •ii.i  mini,  ifuo  i'imIi'i  nil  * 

(A)     I'l/il/c  i/iiiiin   rxre      il    <     \  ilft,    'ilu    da,/  before  lit'  thrd . 

I'oslrhlie.    i/iiiini    u    voIh'.-i    <Ii  ■<•■   ■  i,    The.    tiny  tij'lvr    I 

left   ijoii. 
IV.'.t.r.i  mux)  1 1 1 1 .* i 1 1 ■ .  Ac,   77/r  i/Kir  d/lrr,  >K  .-. 
Priori  mum  i|iimn,  (Vc,  The  i/fv/r  frr/hrr,  cVe.      (/.) 

r.ll.     VoCAIUII.AfiV     l.'i. 

I'v  .i.v,  Inti  rdtUi  or  dfo. 

|ty   iu-l>l,  ii>"  In,  ill    ii'"  I' 

S  din   lie    nun.   ,    ili<-    i....l..,pie  ;   ,„„■(«,   r:l 

I  b- "'/■.»»•.  {     Interdiu. 

Ill    (hr  ev.'liiti",  \.      |"   I  l,   ,<i     f|      |..   i.     ' 

in  |ood  |iin''.  In  ttmpbre,  w  b  mpttn  on/y. 

A  I    III.-   lime  "I    llir   |. ..(in    |  ,iii.      ,  !.,,l.   |    I. .,l,in 

S  I"  II",  tin  irrll.it  ii  iii  l.<  Il.i  (.M|..<i..Ily  i!  join 
,,,VV"'                                                         (       e.l  wilh  .•,„,„/,..,   ■.,„,/). 

In  thfl  btttll  Of  I '  urn  i\  *  pii'ii  |  (  'm,ii'  i,  i  (oi  with  In). 

\  i.  u  .i  n  p  hi.  r.  in:;  dltbuit 

'  i"""  "»""  {piuoti  iiiis.ii.ibm. 

upoketi  ..I  ),  > 

To  (bund,  condPre,  did,  dlt. 

To  invest,    lil.i, -1  ..I,    i, In,-,  »fld,  0O8f. 

To  UMttlt,   sloim,  ()|.|MI!'ll:.l' 

Spain,  in .'.p:nii:i,  m,/. 

Supp. t  (or  rather,  dim  coenn,*  m,  f. 

Pol  v.  M.num,  1,  n. 

Siaivali.m,  lain.-.,  is,  /! 

II  Ml'MIl".  (/  111.'  lope'),  SUH|i.n.liiiiii,   i,  n. 


'after  tiro  tempi  (ton  bli  return,  and  before  the  completion  of  thfl 

third :'  this  however  noes  not  npponr  to  bo  so.  '  Octavo  mense,  quam  efloptOffl 
i»ppii".n:ui,e:ipiuui  SiuruntuntydkO,  (Lb.)  h  6  k  to)  p*rl  (Pofyb.)l  'Tyrus  scptimo 
mouse  enpta  est'  (Curt.):  iruhopKdv  inrb  /iffya;  (/'/;//.)  'niter  a  siege  of  seven 
months'  {Clinton). 

•  Nearly  flO  with  ante:  Ante  trirnnium  quam  Carthago  <l<l<retur,  M.  Cnto 
mortem  obiit.1  The  use  of  the  subjunctive  here  will  be  spoken  of  below.  Obs. 
In  Mi* construction  post  quam  is  oftenor  followed  by  the  ptutpirftet  than  by  the 
pflrfbflt  (See  514.)  The  following  is  .'»"  example  Of  the  perfect:  'Nero  natus 
vst  post  novcm  menses  quam  Tiberius  exectsit.'     (Suet.) 

i  From  vetpcr,  tenjteria. 

♦  From  Kou6i.  common  :  the  principal  meal  of  the  day. 


&  MMMJ 


m 


Uti  PLACE.       SPA^E.  1^43.  317-319 

erned  by  the  preceding  rules,  and  the  other  nauns  governed  by  a  pro 
position.     (C.) 

(Eng.)  Running  to  his  mother  at  Naples. 

(Lot.)    \  Running  to  Naples  to  (prep.)  his  mother. 
I  Currens  ad  matrem  Neapdlim.     (C.) 

317.  (c)  Local  space  is  expressed  by  the  accusative  :  sometimev 
by  the  ablative. 

With  distare,  exstare,  eminere,  ace.  or  abl.  is  used  (but  not  quite  in- 
differently) :  with  abesse,  ex-  dis-  cedgre,  ace.  should  be  used ;  with  con 
sidgre,  castrafacBre,  the  ace.  or  abl.  ;*  sometimes  with  prep,  a,  ab. 

318.  (a)  Vixi  Roma,  Tarenti,  Alhenis,  Gabiis,  Tibure,  I  have 

lived  at  Rome,  Tarentum,  Athens,  Gabii,  Tibur. 

(b)  Legati  Athenas  missi  sunt :  Ambassadors  were  sent  to 

Athens. 
Fugit  Tarquinios  Corintho,  He  fed  to  Tarquinii  from 
Corinth. 

(c)  Tridui   viam   processit,    He  advanced  a  three  days* 

inarch. 
Campus  Marathon  abest  ab  oppido  Atheniensium  eir- 

citer  millia  passuum  decern,  The  field  of  Marathon 

is  about  ten  thousand  paces  from  the  city  of  Athens. 
Bidui  abest,  It  is  a  two  days'  journey  from  us  (iter 

understood). 
Milites  aggerem  latum  pedes  trecentos  exstruxerunt, 

The  soldiers  threw  up  a  mound  three  hundred  feet 

broad  (or,  in  breadth). 

319.  Vocabulary  46. 

A  pace,  passus,  us  =r  4  Eng.  feet,  10.02  inches 
A  Roman  mile  of  a  thousand  paces,  mille  passus. 

Miles,  millia  passuum  (thousands  of  paces). 

-Two  days,  biduum,  i>  n. 

Three  days,  triduum,  i,  n. 

To  be  distant  from;  to  be  at  a  )    b          dist5     y  distit 

distance  of,  ) 

To  be  nearer ;  not  so  far  off,  propius  abesse. 

To  post  himself;  encamp,  considSre,  sed,  sess. 


*  Zumpt  says,  '  If  not  the  distance  is  to  be  expressed,  but  only  a  place  to  be 
designated  by  the  circumstance  of  its  distance,  the  abl.  is  used  :'  in  the  eighth 
edit,  of  the  original,  he  says,  'in  tne  occ.,«but  the  abl.  is  also  correct.'  (Cses 
I.  48.) 

y  Distare  generally  takes  a. 


)  44-   320-322.]    gerunds  and  the  participle  in  dus.  117 

To  depart  a  finger's  breadth,  transversum  digitum  discedCre. 

As  they  say,  as  the  saying  is,  ut  aiunt. 

Carthage,  Carthago,  Inis,/. 

Thebes,  Thebae,  arum. 

Exercise  49. 

(How  must  'lam  answered'  be  translated?  285.) 
320.  lie  lived  many  years  at  Veii.  The  boy  died  at  Carthage. 
My  father  and  mother  died  at  Thebes.  Why  did  he  set  out  for 
Rome  in  the  evening  ?  I  have  lived  several  years  at  Carthage. 
Might  he  not  have  lived  at  Rome  ?  I  almost  think  it  would  have 
been  letter  for  (dat.)  the  Roman  people  to  have  been  contented 
with  Sicily  and  Africa.  They  are  building  a  wall  two  hundred 
feet  high.  The  town  is  five  (Roman)  miles  from  Carthage.  He 
has  posted  himself  (at  a  distance  of)  four  miles  from  Caesar. 
Caius  is  nearer  to  Caesar  than  Labienus.  Are  (then)  you  nearer 
to  me  than  Labienus  (is)  ?  I  have  been  informed  that  Ca3sar  is  at 
a  distance  of  two  days'  march  from  us.  There  is  no  doubt  that 
the  revilers  of  philosophy  have  been  sufficiently  answered.  Does 
he  not  deserve* l  to  be  relieved  from  his  debt  ?  From  this  rule  I 
may  not  depart  a  finger's  breadth,  as  the  saying  is.« 


XVI. 
§  44      On  the  Gerunds  and  the  Participle  in  dus  (Gerundive). 

321.  The  Gerund  is  a  verbal  substantive,  but  with  the  power  of  governing 
what  beiongs  to  the  other  parts  of  the  verb.  Another  peculiarity  is, 
that  it  cannot  take  an  adjective  in  agreement  with  it. 

The  Gerund  corresponds,  as  far  as  it  goes,  with  the  English  'verbal 
substantive,'  or  'participial  substantive  in  ing,'  but  its  use  is  far  less 
extensive.* 

322.  The  Gerundive  or  participle  in  dus  is  nearly  allied  to  the  Gerund  t 


»  Transversum,  ut  ajunt,  digitum. 

•  The  pupil  cannot  be  taught  too  early  or  too  carefully  to  distinguish  the 
participial  substantive'  from  a  participle.  It  may  be  compound  as  well  as  siw 
pie :  every  participle,  except  the  simple  past  participle,  having  a  substantive 
ose.  '  An  affectation  of  being  distinguished  :'  '  the  pretext  of  their  having  seized 
Mine  traders  :'  'after  his  having  been  tumbling  about  in  his  mind  one  poor  sen- 
tence :'  *  an  atonement  for  his  having  been  betrayed  into,'  Ac. 


118  QERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  VVS,         [$  44.  323-327 

its  meaning  is  passive  denoting  necessity  ^fitness,  or  something  intended 
what  must,  should,  or  is  to  be  done. 

323.  (a)  When  the  participle  in  dus  is  m  the  neuter  gender  with  the  third  per 
son  sing,  of  esse,  a  whole  conjugation  may  be  iormed  to  express  what 
one  must,  or  should  do.    The  person  is  put  in  the  dative. 

324.  DO"  In  the  oblique  cases  the  part,  in  dus  in  agreement 
with  a  substantive,  is  nearly  equivalent  to  a  gerund  governing 
that  substantive  in  the  case  of  its  verb. 

Of  writing  a  letter,  \  scribendi  epistolam. 
C  senbendae  epistolae. 

325.  A  whole  conjugation  may  be  formed  with  the  part,  in  dus 

and  sum. 

p  .    (  Amandus  sum,  lam  to  be  loved. 

I  Amandus  es,  thou  art  to  be  loved,  &c. 


Im      f    $  Amandus  eram,  I  was  to  be  loved. 

.  '    (  Amandus  eras,  thou  wast  to  be  loved,  &c. 


Obs.  Amandus  eram  oxfui  is  generally  to  be  rendered  sJiould  (or,  ought 
to)  have  been  loved.  The  reason  is  this :  a  thing  which  was  (then)  a 
thing  to  be  loved,  is  (now)  a  thing  which  ought  to  have  been  loved. 

326.  (a)  Pres.  Scribendum  est,  \  one  ™*»*  write. 

C  i,  you,  we,  &c,  must  write. 
Sting,  mihi  scribendum  est,a  I  must  write. 

tibi  scribendum  est,  thou  must  write 

illi  scribendum  est,  he  must  write. 
Plur.  nobis  scribendum  est,  we  must  write. 

vobis  scribendum  est,  you  must  write. 

illis  scribendum  est,  they  must  write. 

imperf.  Scribendum  erat  \  one  should  have  written. 

t  1,  thou,  we  should  have  written. 
mihi  scribendum  erat,  /  ought  to  have  written. 
tibi  scribendum  erat,  thou  oughtest  to  have  written,  &c.. 
And  so  on  for  the  other  tenses. 

327.  (Part,  in  dus  in  agreement  with  a  substantive.) 

N.  Epistola  scribenda,  a  letter  to  be  written. 

G.  epistolae  scribendae,  of  writing  a  letter, 

D.  epistolae  scribendae,  to  or  for  writing  a  letter. 

Ace.  (ad)  epistolam  scribendam,  to  write  a  letter  (or,  to  or  for 

writing  a  letter). 
Abl.  epistola  scribenda, t  by  writing  a  letter. 


a  That  is,  lU  is  to  be  written  by  me,''  according  to  the  idiom  by  which  the  pas 
slve  used  impersonally  is  equivalent  to  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  active. 

b  It  is  not  always  that  the  gerund  governing  a  case  can  be  turned  into  the 
gerundive  (partic.  in  dus) ;  but  only  when  the  substantive  in  the  case  corres- 
ponding to  the  gerund  would  itself  give  a  correct  thouffb  imperfect,  meaning 


H4.  328-331.]       GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS.  119 

N.  Auctores  legendi,  authors  to  be  read. 
G.  auctorum  legendorum,  of  reading  authors. 
D.  auctoribus  legendis,  to  ox  for  reading  authors. 
Ace.  (ad)  auctores  legendos,  to  read  authors  (or,  to  or  for  read- 
ing authors). 
Abl.  auctoribus  legendis,  by  reading  authors. 

328.  The  part,  in  dus  often  appears  to  change  its  meaning,  but  it  only 
appears  to  do  so. 

Scribendum  est  mihi  (it  is  to-be-written  by  me  =  )  1  must  write. 
Consilium  scribendae  epistolae  (an  intention  with  respect  to  a  letter  to- 
be-written  —  )  an  intention  of  writing  a  letter. 

329.  (Eng.)  We  should  all  praise  virtue. 
(Lot.)    Virtue  is  to-be-praised  by  all  (dat.). 
(Eng.)  A  time  to  play.     Fit  to  carry  burdens. 

(Lot.)    A  time  of  playing.     Fit  for  (dat.)  burdens  to-be-carried. 

(Eng.)  He  is  born  or  inclined  to  act. 

(Lot.)    He  is  born  or  inclined  for  (ad)  acting. 
S30.  [C.  xxvi.]  ICjT  What  is  inform  the  present  participle  active  is  often  '  tfu. 
participial  substantive1  or  gerund.     It  is  always  sO,  when  it  governs  oi 
is  governed,  instead  of  merely  agreeing. 

IjT  What  is  in  form  the  infin.  pass,  is  often  used  as  the  partic.  oi 
the  fut.  pass,  implying  possibility,  duty,  or  necessity . 

Exercise  50. 

331.  Man  is  born  to  understand  and  act.  Caius  is  skilled  in 
waging  war.  We  learn  by  teaching.  We  should  praise  virtue 
even  in  an  enemy.  He  has  snatched  away  from  me  the  hope  of 
finishing  the  business.  We  are  all  of  us  desirous  of  seeing  and 
hearing  many  things.  Water  is  good6  for  drinking.  Demos- 
thenes was  eagerly-desirous  of  hearing  Plato.  Pericles  was 
admirably-skilled  (peritissi?nus)  in  ruling  the  state.  They  adopt 
the  resolution  of  setting  the  town  on  fire.     Ough*  not  glory  to  be 


Thus  in,  '  J  bring  tlie  dead  to  my  recollection  by  reading  the  tombstones,'  here  1 
may  use  ( sepulcris  legendis,'  because  I  bring  them  to  my  recollection  by  meant 
qf  the  tombstones,  though  reading  is  the  particular  way  by  which  I  effect  this 
But  in,  '  Themistocles  rendered  the  sea  safe  by  chasing  the  pirates,'  I  must  say. 
:  pra^dones  consectando,'  not  'pr&donibus  consectandip^ J)ecause  he  did  not  make 
It  safe  by  means  of  the  pirates,  but  only  by  chasing  them  away.  (G.)  In  the 
construction  with  the  gemnd,  the  gerund  is  more  emphatic  than  the  gerundive 
in  the  other  construction.  Whenever  therefore  the  participial  substantive  in 
ing  is  emphatic,  the  gerund  should  be  used. 

«  Utilis.     Utilis,  inutilis,  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the  gerund,  or  by  the 
arc,  with  ad.    Cicero  generally  uses  ad. 


120  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS.         [§  44.    332-335 

preferred  to  riches  ?  We  must  do  this.  Those  persons  are  not 
to  be  heard,  who  teach  (prcecipiunt)  that  we  should  be  angry  with 
our  enemies.  We  must  all  die.  An  orator  must  see  what  is  be- 
coming. We  must  take  care  to  hurt  (subj.)  nobody.14  We  must 
not  take  cruel  measures  even  against  Caius.d 


332.  If  a  verb  does  not  govern  the  ace,  the  pari,  in  dus  cannot 

be  used  in  agreement  with  its  substantive. 

In  other  words,  such  verbs  have  only  an  impersonal  construction  in 
the  passive :  as  we  must  say,  •  mendaci  non  creditor,'  so  we  must  say, 
1  mendaci  non  credendum  est.' 

(a)  Hence  to  express  'we  must'  do,  &c,  with  a  verb  that  governs 
the  dat.  we  must  use  the  part,  in  dus  in  the  neuter  gender,  retaining 
the  object  in  the  dative. 

333.  (b)  Butfruendus,fungendus,  potiundus,  utenduse  are  sometimes  found 
in  agreement  with  their  substantives,  because  these  words  formerly 
governed  the  ace.  When  so  used,  they  are  generally  in  immediate 
agreement  with  their  substantives. 

As,  re3  fruenda;  ad  qfficium  fungendum,  &c.,  but  also  'fruenda 
etiam  sapientia  est.' 

334.  The  gen.  sing,  masculine  of  the  partic.  in  dus  is  used  with  sui}t  even 
when  it  is  plural  ox  feminine  singular : 

(  purgandi  sui  causa, . for  the  sake  of  clearing  themselves.  ) 
I  placandi  tui,  of  appeasing  you  (of  a  woman).  > 

335.  (a)  Parcendums  est  inimicis,  We  must  spare  our  enemies 

(our  enemies  are  to  be  spared). 

(b)  ,Ea  quae  utenda  accepisti,   Those  things  which  you  re- 

ceived to  be  used. 
Utendum  est  cuique  suo  judicio  (abl.),  Every  man 

must  use  his  own  judgment. 
(c)  (Peculiar  constructions.) 

Inter  bibendum,    Whilst  they  are  drinking.     Solven- 

do  esse  (par,  equal  to,  understood),   To  be  able  to 


d  Ne  in  Uaium  quidem,  &c. 

*  So  also  vescendus,  gloriandus,  medendus,  poenitendus,  pudendus. 

(  Other  genitives  plur.  are  found  in  the  same  way,  'diripieudi  pomorum,'  &c, 
In  some  other  instances  the  gerund  in  di  appears  to  have  a  passive  meaning ; 
'spes  Ttstituendi^  the  hope  of  being  restored.     (Z.) 

«  In  a  few  passages  the  ace.  of  the  object  stands  after  this  impersonal  con- 
struction :  '  Canes  potius  paucos  et  acres  habendum,  quam  multos.'     (Varr.) 


)  44.  336-338.]     gerunds  and  the  participle  in  dus.  121 

pay.  Oneri  fercndoh  esse,  To  be  equal  to  bearing 
the  burden.  Conservandae  libertatis  esse,  To  tend 
to  the  preservation  of  liberty. 

336.  [C.  xxvn.]  13* 1 1  have  to  do  it'  must  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus. 

(Eng.)  With  whom  we  have  to  live. 

(Lot.)    With  whom  it  is  to-be-lived  (quibuscum  vivendum  est). 

[C.  xxNrm.]  13* '  It  is,'  followed  by  the  infin.pass.,  generally  expresses 
necessity,  fitness,  or  something  intended;  but  sometimes  mere  possibility, 
to  be  translated  by  possum. 

[ '  The  passage  is  to  be  found  in  the  fifth  book '  r=  the  passage  may 
or  can  be  found  in  the  fifth  book.] 

337.  Vocabulary  47. 

To  overthrow,  evertCre,  vert,  vers. 

To  occupy  myself  in  ;  to  be  en-  )  operam  dare  . 

gaged  in,  3 

To  preserve,  conservare,  av,  at. 

To  study,  devote  oneself  to,  sttidere,  studu, (dat.). 

Literature,      •  literae  (pi. ;  also,  a  letter  =  an  epistle). 

To  spend  his  time  in,  tempus  impendgre,  pend,  pens  (dat.). 

To  make  it  my  first  object  or  >  id  agere  ('to  be  doing  that'  and  nothing 

business,  )     else  ;k  agcre,  eg,  act). 

To  plead  a  cause,  age* re  causam. 

To  feel  thankful ;  to  retain  a  grate-  )        iam  m        iaa  hab-re# 

ful  sense,  ) 

To  thank,  return  thanks,  gratias  agCre. 

To  repay  a  kindness,  to  prove  )  gratiam  referre :  f^ro,  tiil,  lat  (the  per- 

one's  gratitude,  J     son  te  whom  must  be  in  the  dot.). 

To  clear  =  excuse,  purgare,  av,  at 

Obs.  '  Should,'  which  the  pupil  has  been  taught  to  translate  by  debeo  or  oportt^ 
must  now  be  translated  by  the  part,  indus,  whenever  it  is  not  emphatic;  when- 
ever it  might  be  turned  into  'it  is  to  &«,'  &c. 

Exercise  51. 

338.  He  is  of  opinion  that  these  things  tend  (c)  to  the  over- 


h  The  dat.  of  the  purpose  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  the  ace.  with  ad  i  dis- 
trahendo  hosti,  or  ad  distrahendum  hostem.  When  the  verb  governs  an  object 
la  the  dat.,  the  agent  is  sometimes  expressed  with  ab,  to  avoid  ambiguity  :— 
Ci  /es  l  quibus  a  vobia  consulendum  est.' — 

Obs.  Caius  consulendus  est  (must  be  consulted) :  Caio  consulendum  est  (tfu 
htferesta  of  Caius  must  be  consulted). 

i  Vacare  (to  have  leisure  for)  is  never  used  in  this  sense  by  the  best  v*  (iters 
Hotting.  Cic.  Div.  i.  6.) 

k  Followed  by  ui  with  subj. 

6 


122  GERUNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLES  IN  DUS.        [§  44.  339 

throw  of  the  state.  Do  these  things  tend  to  the  preservation  01 
the  overthrow  of  the  state  ?  There  is  no  doubt  that  (86)  the 
state  is  not  able  to  pay  (c).  It  is  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  spend 
his  time  in  assisting!  the  wretched.  Let  us  consult  the  interests 
of  those  with  whom  we  have  to  live.  I  will  inquire  of  Caius 
whether  Balbus  should  be  consulted.  We  must  consult  the  inte- 
rests of  Balbus.  It  was  owing  to  you28  that  the  interests  of  Caius 
were  not  consulted.  I  made  it  my  first  object  to  (ut)  preserve  the 
Roman  territory.  I  cannot  repay  your  kindness.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  he  is  going  to  thank  you.  I  will  inquire  of  Caius 
whose  cause  he  is  going  to  plead.  Every  animal  makes  it  its  first 
object  to  preserve  itself.  We  must  strive  to  conquer.  Must  we 
not  repay  the  kindness  of  those  from  (prep,  a)  whom  we  have 
received  benefits  ?  I  persuaded  Caius  to  devote  himself  to  litera- 
ture. They  had  come  into  the  camp  for  the  purpose  of  clearing 
themselves  (334).  They  had  called  upon  Caius  for  the  purpose 
of  clearing  themselves.  There  were  some  who  consulted  Ik* 
interests  of  Caius. 

339.  Vocabulary  48. 

(Words  following  the  construction  of  proper  names  of  places.) 
At  home,  dbmi.™ 

From  home,  dbmo. 

Home,  dbmum.n 

At  my,  your,  another  man's  &c.  >  domi  meffij  ^      &c> 

house,  3 

On  the  ground  \  humi  (which  may  follow  a  verb  of  eitheI 

(      rest  or  motion). 
In  the  field,  militiae.0 

Out  of  doors ;  out,  l  fbras  (after  a  verb  of  motUm)  foris  ^tel 

i     other  verbs). 

To  dine  out,  foris  coenare. 


l  Sublevandis :  as  subvenlre,  auccurrere  govern  a  dot.,  they  cannot  be  put  in 
agreement  with  their  object. 

m  Domus  is  partly  of  the  second,  partly  of  the  fourth,  and  has  both  forms  in 
pome  cases.    The  following  line  gives  the  forms  not  in  use  : 
Tolle  me,  mu,  mi,  mis,  si  declinare  domus  vis : 
but  It  has  domi  for  at  home,  &c. ;  though  not  for  '  of  the  housed 

■  Also  Ho  Pomponius's  house?  Pomponii  domum,  without  a  preposition:  (tc 
my  house,'  doirum  meam. 

0  Belli  and  mHitiae  are  used  only  in  connection  with  dbmi :  bub  however  is 
used  for  in  tear.    (Z.) 


J  44.    340.]       GERLNDS  AND  THE  PARTICIPLE  IN  DUS.  123 

Into  the  country,  ros. 

From  the  country,  rure. 

In  the  country,  ruri  (less  commonly,  rure). 

To  return,  redire,  eo,  Iv,  it. 

To  return,  turn  back,  revertere.vert,  vers ;  or  reverti.P 

To  be  reconciled  to,  in  gratiam  redire  cum  aliquo. 

To  confer  an  obligation  on  (i.  e.  )  gratiam  inire  ab  aliquo  (Cic.),  apud  uli 

on  a  superior),  j     quern  (Ldv.)  ineo. 

you(n  <  juventus  utis,  /. ;  juventa,  «,  /.    Juven- 

(      tus,  also  '  the  youth.'* 

To  cast  forth,  projic5re,  jec,  ject. 

To  resolve,  constitute,  stitu,  stitut. 

Approved  (of  valor),  tried,  spectatus  (lit.  seen). 

Exercise  52. 

340.  Titus  Manlius  spent  his  youth  in  the  country.  When 
Tullius  returns  (shall  have  returned)  from  the  country,  I  will 
send  him  to  you.  Quintus  resolved  to  spend  his  life  in  the 
country.  On  the  day  after  he  returned  from  the  country,  he  was 
accused  of  treason.  He  is  the  same  in  the  field  that  (45  (b)  )  he 
has  always  been  at  home.  He  answered  that  Pomponia  was  sup- 
ping out.  Might  he  not  nave  spent  his  life  in  the  country  ? 
They  (Hit)  kept  their  word  both  at  home  and  in  the  field.  He 
set  out  into  the  country.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  set  out  for 
the  country  in  the  evening.  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  will  cast 
these  things  out  of  doors.  DiodOrus  lived  many'  years  at  my 
house.  Balbus  came  to  my  house.  Had  you  not  rather  be  in 
your  own  house  without7  danger',  than  in  another-man's  with' 
danger7  ?  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  was  a  person  of  most-ap- 
proved7 merit  (virtus)  both  at  home  and  in  the  field  (p.  14,  14). 
It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  has  resolved  to  turn  back  home.  There 
Is  no  doubt  that  you  will  confer  an  obligation  upon  Caesar.     Bal- 


P  Redire  properly  expresses  the  continued  action  which  intervenes  between  the 
momentaneous  actions  of  the  turning  back  (reverti),  and  the  return  or  arrival 
hmre  (revenlre).  (D.)  Redire  is  said  of  one  who  returns  after  having  arrived 
at  his  journey's  end  and  finished  his  business ;  reverti  of  one  who  turns  back 
Oefore  he  has  completed  his  journey  or  business.     (Ernesti.) 

i  Juventa,  youth  =  the  time  of  youth;  juventus  (utis),  youth  =  the  time  of 
youth ;  or,  •  the  youth '  =  the  young  men :  Juventas,  the  goddess  of  youth. 
Cicero  does  not  use  juventa;  but  Livy  and  later  writers  use  juventa  for  the  timi 
}£  youth,  juventus  for  the  youth.    (D.) 


124  THE  CONSTLUcriON  OF  PARTICIPLES.       [§  45.    341-345 

bus  is  already  reconciled  to  Caius  (per/.).  We  must  succoul 
the  miserable.  There  is  no  doubt  that  a  Christian  should  succour 
the  miserable.*  There  is  no  doubt  that  he  threw  these  things 
(forth)  on  the  ground  against  his  will.-  The  Roman  youth  were 
of  approved  valour  in  war 


XVII. 

§  45.     On  the  construction  of  Participles.     (Ablative  absolute.) 

341.  Every  attributive  word  involves  an  assertion. 

Thus  '  a  fine  house'  =  a  house  which  is  a  fine  one.     '  Charles's  hat 
~  the  hat  which  belongs  to  Charles,  &c. 

342.  Thus  then  every  participle  makes  an  assertion  in  an  indirect  man- 
ner j  it  assumes  it  attributively,  instead  of  stating  it  predicatively ;  tha 
is,  as  a  formal  proposition. 

343.  Whenever  therefore  it  is  convenient  to  express  by  a  complete  sentence 
the  assertion  assumed  by  a  participle,  we  may  do  so,  connecting  it  with 
the  principal  sentence  by  a  relative  pronoun,  or  a  conjunction  (or  con- 
junctional adverb)  of  time,  cause,  limitation,  &c. 

344.  On  the  other  hand,  subordinate  sentences  connected  with  a  principal 
one  by  relative  pronouns  or  conjunctions  (such  as  when,  after,  if,  since, 
because,  although,  &c)>  may  often  be  expressed  by  participles. 

345.  Since  the  use  of  the  participle  is  far  more  extensive  in  Latin  than  in 
English,  such  sentences  must  very  frequently  be  translated  into  Latin 
by  participles.  By  this  construction  the  Latin  gains  more  compact- 
ness and  power  of  compression  than  the  English  possesses,  but  with 
an  occasional  vagueness  from  which  our  language  is  free.r 


*  See  page  121,  note  h. 

r  Since  in  the  attributive  combination  no  particle  of  connection  is  expressed, 
Its  relation  to  the  principal  parts  of  the  sentence  must  be  gathered  from  the 
general  meaning  of  the  author.  An  instructive  example  of  the  possibility  of 
misconnecting  occurs  in  a  late  review  of  Tate's  Horace  (Quart.  Rev.  No.  cxxiv.) 
Speaking  of  the  passage, 

Causa  fuit  pater  his,  qui  macro  pauper  agello 
Noluit  in  Plavi  ludum  me  mittere,  &c.  (Sat.  I.  6,  71.) 
the  reviewer,  understanding  the  meaning  to  be,  because  the  father's  means  were 
slender,  he  would  not  send  his  son  to  a  provincial  school,  but  carried  him  to  Borne-' 
proceeds  to  consider,  how  education  could  be  cheaper  in  the  capital  than  in  the 
country.  If  the  critic  had  but  construed  the  passage  correctly,  he  would  havr 
found  no  grounds  in  it  for  speculating  about  foundation  schools,  Ac.  at  Rome, 
but  have  remained  satisfied  with  the  obvious  meaning,  that,  •  though  thefather* 


}  45.  34G-34S.]      the  coNsraucTiON  of  participles.  125 

340.  When  a  participle  does  not  refer  to  a  noun  or  pronoun 
already  governed  or  governing  in  the  sentence,  it  is  put  in  the 
ablative  in  agreement  with  its  own  noun. 

(a)  An  ablative  thus  unconnected  with  the  general  structure  of  the 
clause  in  which  it  stands,  is  called  an  ablative  absolute. 

(/?)  In  turning  a  subordinate  sentence  into   the  participial  construe* 
tion,  if  the  nominative  of  the  subordinate  sentence  be  not  a  noun  occur- 
ring in  the  ■principal  sentence,  or  a  pronoun  representing  such  a  noun. 
the  construction  must  be  the  ablative  absolute. 
347.  Examples. 


.,  v         {  Nobody  who  considers  this,  will  hesitate. 


I. 


Nobody  considering  this,  will  hesitate. 
(2)         (  Nobody,  if  Cains  considers  tnis,  will  escape. 
(oM.  abs.)    I  Nobody,  Caius  considering  this,  will  escape.  J 

,js         (  Alexander,  after  he  had  taken  Tyre,  marched  on,  &c.  *} 

(  Alexander,  liaving  taken  Tyre,  marched  on,  &c.  / 

(2)         {  The  King,  when  Alexander  had  taken  Tyre,  retired,  &c.  {  II# 
(abl.  abs.)   I  The  King,  Tyre  being  taken  by  Alexander,  retired,  &c.      J 
/jv         (I  desire  joys  which  will  last  for  ever.  ~\ 

( I  desire  joys  about-to-last  for  ever.  ^ 

(2)         (  I  desire  heaven,  because  its  joys  will  last  for  ever.  I 

(ohl.  abs.)    I  I  desire  heaven,  its  joys  being  about-to-last  for  ever.         J 
(jv         <  We  miss  many  things,  though  they  stare  us  in  the  face.         } 

C  We  miss  many  things  staring  us  in  the  face.  f    , 

(2)         (  We  miss  many  things,  though  some  truths  stare  us  in  the  face.  \ 
(aW.  abs.)  (  we  miss  many  things,  some  truths  staring  us  in  the  face.      J 

348.  Vocabulary  49.     (Preposition  a,  ab,  abs.) 

A  before  consonants:  ab  before  vowels  and  sometimes  before  the 
consonants  in  hihirls  and  j ;  abs  is  much  less  commonly  used,  except 
before  te,*  and  never  except  before  t  and  qu. 

The  meanings  of  a  are  (1)  from;  (2)  by,  governing  the  agent  after 
pass,  verbs;  (3)  after;  (4)  on  or  at,  of  relative  position  ;  (5)  on  the  side 
or  part  of;  (6)  in  point  of;  (7)  the  office  held. 
From  a  boy,  a  puero. 

Immediately  after  the  battle,  confestim  a  proelio.t 

In  front,  afronte(frons,  tis,/.  et  m.  'forehead'). 


means  were  slender*  he  neverthdess  would  not  send  his  son  to  a  school  that  toot 
thought  good  enough  for  the  children  of  great  centurions,  cf*c,  but  resolved  to  give 
Mm  the  best  education  the  capital  could  afford. 

•  Butler  says  that  it  is  found  before  all  the  consonants  except  b. 

»  Pugna  is  any  battle,  from  a  single  combat  to  the  general  engagement  of  large 
armies :  prcelium  is  an  engagement  of  troops.  Doderlein  seems  to  confine  the 
meaning  of  prcelium  too  much,  when  he  makes  it  only  the  'occasional  engage- 
ment of  particular  divisions  of  an  army  :'  for  Nepos  says,  '  illustrissimum  est 
vrcelium  apud  Platseas.'     Acies  when  used  of  a  battle  is  ^.general  engagement. 


126  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES.       [§  46.    349,  350 

In  flank,  a  latere u  (latus,  Sris,  n.  '  side*). 

In  the  rear,  a  tergo. 

At  two  miles  distance ;  two  miles  >  fl  mfllibu8  um  duobua 

off,  > 

So  near  home,  tarn  prope  a  dtfmo. 

To  make  for  us,  a  nobis  fac5re. 

To  be  on  our  side;  to  stand  on  )     nobig  fitare> 

our  side,  J 

To  be  of  a  man's  party,  ab  aliquo  sentire ;  sens,  sens. 

An  amanuensis,  a  mSnu  servus.T 

Again  from   the  beginning ;    all  >  ab  integro  (integer,  gra,  grum,  wAsle). 

over  again,  5 

Exercise  53. 
[Obs.  A  (p)  prefixed  to  a  clause,  indicates  that  it  is  to  be  translated 
participially.] 

349.  Let  us  oppose  the  evils  Pthat  are  coming'.  Must  we 
spare  even  p  those  who  resist  (us)  ?  [No.]  We  must  spare  them 
even  p  though  they  should  resist  (us).  I  must  not  despair  p  if 
(but  a)  few7  stand  on  my  side.  Timotheus  increased  by  (his) 
many  virtues  the  glory  p  which  he  had  received  from  his  father'. 
Caius,  p  after  he  was  banished,  lived  many  years  at  Athens.  The 
father,  p  after  his  son  was  banished,  lived  many  years  at  Carthage. 
We  do  not  believe*  a  liar,  even  p  when  he  speaks  the  truth.  The 
father  turned  back,  p  because  he  fearedybr  his  son  (231).  Caius, 
p  who  was  accused  of  treason,  has  been  acquitted  of  the  capital 
charge.41  Why  did  you  turn  back  so  near  home  ?  The  Gauls 
attack  the  Romans  in  the  rear.  Ariovistus  posted  himself  at 
about  two  miles  off.  He  took  Massilia  p  after  it  had  been  block- 
aded two  years.  A  treaty  was  ratified  p  after  the  city  had  been 
besieged  for  two  years.  Do  not  these  (arguments)  make  for  us  ? 
Scipio  immediately  after  the  battle  returned  to  the  sea.  Almost 
from  a  boy  he  has  devoted  himself  to  literature. 


§  46.     The  Participle  continued. 
350.  (a)  The  participle  of  the  future  in  rus  often  expresses 
lhe  purpose  with  which  a  person  acts. 

■  On  the  flanks  (a  lateribus). 

*  So,  ab  epiatolia,  a  secretary :  a  rationibus,  a  steward  or  accountant. 

*  We  believe  a  liar,  not  event  &c.  (ne  —  quidem). 


§46.351-356.]     the  construction  of  participles.  127 

351.  (b)  The  participle  in  dus  often  expresses  the  end  or  pur- 
pose for  which  a  thing  is  done. 

(a)  This  is  especially  the  case  after  curare  (to  cause  a  thing  to  oe 
done)  and  verbs  of  giving,  receiving,  sending,  undertaking.     In  English 
the  in/in.  active  is  often  used  where  the  in/in.  passive  would  be  allowable, 
Dut  less  common. 
(0)    He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in. 
(Or)  He  gave  them  the  country  to  be  dwelt  in  (by  them). 

852.  Of  two  connected  sentences,  one  may  often  be  got  rid  cf 
by  turning  its  verb  into  a  participle. 

Of  course  the  more  emphatic  should  be  retained :  for  instance  that 
which  is  the  effect  rather  than  that  which  is  the  cause;  that  which  is 
the  consequence  rather  than  that  which  is  the  condition ;  that  which  is 
posterior  in  point  of  timer  oXhex  than  that  which  precedes  it. 

353.  It  is  a  peculiarity  of  the  English  language,  that  we  use  a  present  par- 
ticiple when,  though  two  events  are  closely  connected,  yet  that  repre- 
sented by  the  participle  must  be  over  before  the  other  begins. 

[C.  xxx.]  OCT  A  present  participle  must  be  translated  by  a 
perfect  participle  (or  its  substitute,  quum  with  perf.  or  pluperf. 
tubj.)  when  the  action  expressed  by  it  must  be  over,  before  that 
expressed  by  the  verb  begins. 

Examples. 

354.  (a)  I  write  to  aid  the  student.  >  j 
(part.)  I  write  going-to-aid  the  student  (adjuturus).  J 

(b)  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in.  )  >* 

(part.)  He  gave  them  the  country  to-be-dwelt-in  (habitandum).  ) 

355.  He  apprehended  them  and  took  them  to  Rome.  ) » ,  r 
(jjart.)  He  took  them  apprehended  to  Rome.  > 

He  took  up  the  bundle  and  ran  ofF.         >  jy 
(abl.  abs.)  The  bundle  being  taken  up,  he  ran  off*.  ) 
(Eng.)  Leaping  from  his  horse,  he  embraced  him. 
(Lot.)    Having  leapt  from  his  horse,  he  embraced  him. 

356.  Vocabulary  50. 

To  cause  to  be  done;  to  hive  a  )    ,.     ../•    .      . 

*«  uiuw  c,       i.jYc  u  (ahquid  faciendum  curaie. 

thing  done,  > 

To  contract  to  build,  aliquid  faciendum  conJucfte 
To  let  a  thing  out  to  be  built  by  )  ^     u  facicndum  ,oc5re> 

contract,  ) 

A  sentence,  sententia,  ae,  f. 

To  corrupt,  corrumpCre,  rup,  rupt. 

To  learn  by  heart,  ediscCre,  edidici  (no  xup.)> 

To  repair,  ref  icPre,  io,  fee,  feet. 

To  pull  down,  diruPre,  ru,  nit. 
Bridge,  pons,  pontls,  m. 


128  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PARTICIPLES.       [§47.357-360 

Exercise  54. 

357.  Conon  causes  the  walls  p  which  had  been  pulled  down  b^ 
Lysander,x  p  to  be  repaired.  He  undertook  p  to  corrupt  Epami. 
nondas  with  money.  For  how  much  will  you  undertake  p  to  cor< 
rupt  Balbus  ?  He  had  contracted  p  to  build  a  bridge.  He  gave 
Cyrus  to  Harpagus  p  to  be  killed.  Carvilius,  when27  consul,  had 
let  out  the  temple  (cedes?)  of  Fortune  (Fortuna)  p  to  be  built  bg 
contract.  We  give  boys  sentences  p  to  learn  by  heart  (354,  b). 
He  has  set  out  for  Rome  p  to  free  his  son  from  debt.  I  cannot  but 
think18  you  corrupted  by  gold.  Forgetting311  the  benefits  which 
he  received  from  Caius,  he  took  cruel  measures  against  him.  (Be- 
gin with  relat.  clause  ;  30,  31.)  He  says  that  it  is  not2  necessary 
to  make  haste.     There  are  some  who109  have  turned-back  home. 


§  47.     The  Participle  continued.     The  Supines. 

358.  (a)  No  Latin  verb  (except  the  deponents  and  neuter- 
passives)  has  a  participle  of  the  perfect  active.  Hence  this 
participle  must  be  translated  by  the  (passive)  past  participle 
put  absolutely,  or  by  quum  with  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive. 

359.  (b)  An  English  substantive  may  often  be  translated  by  a 
participle. 

It  is  very  frequently  necessary  to  translate  abstract  nouns  expressing 
a  mode  of  action  in  this  way ;  as  such  nouns  are  comparatively  seldom 
used  in  Latin. 

360.  (c)  So  also  the  'participial  substantive1  may  often  be  translated  not  only 


*  G.    Lysandri. 

y  Mdes  and  templum  are  both  a  temple :  but  in  the  former  it  is  considered  as 
the  one  principal  building  which  is  the  dwelling-place  of  the  God ;  in  the  latter 
as  the  whole  temple,  with  all  its  buildings,  courts,  &c.  JEdes  in  the  sing,  has 
generally  the  adj.  sacra  with  it,  or  the  name  of  the  Deity:  Jovis,  Minervce,  &c. 
Fanum  is  a  spot  consecrated  for  the  erection  of  a  temple  by  the  augurs ;  and 
hence  the  temple  itself,  considered  as  a  consecrated  place,  '  a  sanctuary.'  Delw 
brum  was  either  the  temple  itself,  as  a  place  of  expiation  and  purification ;  or, 
according  to  others,  the  part  of  the  temple  where  the  image  of  the  Deity  stood  j 
the  shrine.  Templum  is  from  rlpo,  «//iro>  (cut),  a  portion  'cut  off'  by  the 
augurs ;  delubrum  probably  from  de-luo,  to  wash  away :  Dbderlein  thinks  thai 
fanum  is  the  German  Banny  Engl.  ban. 


(Lot.)  \ 


t§  47.  361-364.  the  p^btjciple.  120 

by  the  participle  in  dus,  but  by  other  participles.     This  is  a  conunor 
way  of  translating  it  when  it  is  under  the  government  of  'without.1 
261.       After  '  to  hear '  and  '  to  see '  the  present  infin.  active  must  be  translated 
into  Latin  by  the  present  participle  active. 

302.  When  the  participle  of  an  abl.  absol.  is  '  being,'  it   is 

Knitted  in  Latin,  and  two  substantives,  or  a  substantive  and  ad 

irctirr,  are  put  together  in  the  ablative. 

362  *     The  supine  in  um  (act.)  follows  verbs  of  motion :  the  supine  in  u  (vir- 
tually, though  not  really  pass.)  follows  a  few  adjectives  (such  as  belt, 
difficult,  &c),  and  the  substantives/as,  nefas,  &c. 
a)  The  supine  in  um  with  ire  means  '  to  go  about  to,'  &c,  implying  effort 
and  exertion. 

363.  (a)  (Eng.)  Caesar,  having  crossed  the  Rubicon,  marched  to  Rome. 
Caesar,  Vie  Rubicon  being  crossed,  marched  to  Rome. 
or,  Caesar,  when  he  had  crossed  the  Rubicon,  marched  to  Rome 

(6)  1.  Tarquinius,  after  his  banishment  from  Rome,  &c. 
Tarquinius,  being  banished  from  Rome. 
2.  After  the  banishment  of  Tarquinius,  consuls  were  elected. 
OM.  abs.)  Tarquinius  being  banished,  >  consulg  w£re  elected 
(or)  After  I  arquimus  banished,  ) 
(Tarquinio  expulso ;  or,  post  Tarquiniuin  expulsum.) 
(Eng)  From  the  foundation  of  Rome,  )  a  Roma  CQndita  >  u 

(Lat. )   From  Rome  founded,  )  5 

(So,  ante  Romam  conditam,  &c.) 
(Eng.)  By  the  practice  of  virtue,  ?  yirtute  ^ 
(Lat.)    By  virtue  practised,  ) 

(Virtute  colenda,  by  practising  virtue.) 
(Eng.)  A  reward  for  having  despised  the  deity ;  or,  for  contempt  of  tho 

deity 
(Lat.    A  reward  of  (  =s  for)  the  deify  despised  (spreti  numinis  merces). 
v*)  (Eng.)  He  assists  others  without  robbing  himself. 

(Lat.)    He  assists  others,  not  robbing  himself  (se  ipsum  non  spolians). 

(Eng.)  He  goes  away  without  your  perceiving  it. 

(Lat.)    He  goes  away,  younot  perceiving  it  {te  nonsentiente). 

(Eng.)  He  goes  away  without  scouting  anybody. 

(Lat.)    He  goes  away,  nobody  being  saluted  (ncminei  salutato). 

(Eng.)  He  condemns  him  without  hearing  him. 

(Lat.)    He  condemns  him  unheard  (inauditum). 

364.  Vocabulary  51. 

At  the  suggestion  of  the  Magi,        Magis  auctoribus  (auctor;  an  adviser) 

Under  your  guidance,  \  te  duce  <*<>*  beinS  our  leader :  dux'  du 

C      cis,  m.  etf.) 

In  the  reign  of  Herod,  Herode  rege.* 

i  On  ncminis,  nemine,  see  the  index  under  '  Nobody.' 
«  Or,  Herode  regnante.    If  the  reign  were  that  of  a  Roman  Emperor, 
xntt  must  be  used, 

6* 


130  THE   PARTICIPLE.  [§47.    305,360 

Against  the  will  of  Caius,  Caio  invito. 

In  the  life-time  of  Augustus,  Augusto  vivo. 

I  have  completed  the  work,  opus  absolutum  habeo.* 

I  plainly  see  through  his  design,  consilium  ejus  perspectum  habeo. 

It  cannot  be  said  without  impiety,  nSfas  est  dictu. 

It  may  be  said  without  impiety,  fas  est  dictu. 

Hard  to  find,  difncilis  inventu. 

365.  [C.  xxxi.]  0^7"  The  English  present  part.  act.  is  gene 
rally  translated  by  the  Latin  past  partic.  when  the  verb  b 
deponent. 

This  arises  from  the  principle  given  in  353,  and  from  this :  that  th>» 
Romans  spoke  of  a  feeling  as  over,  the  moment  it  had  been  Jell ;  and  oi 
a  mental  operation  as  over,  the  moment  it  was  performed ;  whereas  w 
should  describe  both  as  present ;  as  now  going  on. 

Exercise  55. 

[Which  word  for  to  light  should  be  used  of  a  funeral  pile  ?  299,  h.] 

366.  p  If  nature  opposes,  you  will  strive  to  no  purpose.  P\tha 
goras  came  into  Italy  p  in  the  reign  of  Tarquinius  Superbus. 
p  After  Dion  (G.  Dionis)  was  killed  at  Syracuse,  Dionysius 
gained  possession  of  the  city.  ^Eneas,  p  after  the  taking  of  Troy 
oy  the  Greeks,  came  into  Italy.  The  slave,  having  lighted  the 
funeral  pile,  cast  himself  at  his  master's  feet.5 1  They  returned 
to  Veii  p  without  waiting  for  the  army  of  the  Romans.  They 
could  scarcely  be  restrained  from17  condemning  you  to  death 
without  hearing  you.  At  the  suggestion  of  Caius,  Balbus  pre- 
tended to  be  mad.3  I  am  afraid  that  1  do  not53  see  through  Balbus's 
design.  The  son  died  p  after  the  banishment  of  his  father.  He 
pretends  that  he  has  finished  the  work.  I  have  now  finished  the 
work  which  I  promised  to  perform3  (Invert),  p  After  the  taking 
of  Massilia  by  storm,  a  league  was  made  (Express  post).  Was 
(then)  man  born  p  to  drink  wine  ?  You  have  recovered  from  a 
severe  disease  p  by  drinking  water.  I  heard  Caius  cry  out,  that  it 
was  all  over  with  the  army.  Is  virtue  hard  to  find  ?  [No.]  You 
ivill  do  what  shall  seem  best  to  be  done.  Why  do  you  go  about  to 
destroy  yourself?  They  sent  to  Delphi,  to  consult  (sup.)  what 
should  be  done. 


*  Prow  this  idiom,  which  dwells  more  on  the  possession  of  the  completed  ac- 
tion than  on  its  mere  completion,  arose  the  perfect  with  liave  in  our  own  and  othef 
modem  languages. 


}  48.  367-373.]  pronouns.  131 

XVIII. 

§48.     Pronouns. 

307.  (a)  *  Own?  when  it  is  to  be  more  strongly  expressed  than 
by  meus,  tuus,  suus,  &c,  must  be  translated  by  ipsius  or  ipsorum 
(as  one  or  more  are  meant)  after  those  pronouns. 

368.  (b)  Self,  — selves,  &c,  in  an  oblique  case  are  often  trans 
lated  by  ipse  and  a  personal  pronoun  together ;  the  ipse  being  in 
the  nom.  if  the  meaning  is  that  that  agent  did  it ;,  in  the  case  ot 
the  personal  pronoun,  if  his  doing  it  to  himself  is  the  stronger 
notion. 

369.  Properly  sui  relates  to  the  nominative  case  of  its  own  verb;  but  it 
may  be  used,  in  a  dependent  clause,  for  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
verb,  when  either  the  grammar  or  the  sense  would  prevent  its  being  re- 
ferred to  the  verb  of  its  own  clause. 

370.  (c)  Hence  in  a  dependent  sentence,  that  expresses  some 
thought  or  purpose  of  the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence — 

His,  him,  her,  their,  denoting  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
sentence,  should  be  translated  by  sui  or  suus,  whenever  (from  the 
grammar  or  the  obvious  sense)  there  would  be  no  danger  of  under- 
standing it  to  mean  the  nominative  of  its  own  verb. 

His,  him,  her,  their,  denoting  the  nominative  of  the  principal 
sentence,  must  be  translated  by  ipse,  when  there  would  be  danger 
of  understanding  sui  or  suus  to  mean  the  nominative  of  its  own 
verb. 

371.  (c7)  Suus  often  refers  to  an  oblique  case,  especially  when 
quisque  or  unusquisque  is  used. 

372.  Ob8.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  to  be  used  (not  nostri,  vestri)  when 
1  of  us,'  '  of  you '  =  '  out  of  us,'  ( out  of  you ;'  that  is  to  say,  after  pai  ti- 
tives  (including  numerals,  comparatives,  and  superlatives).* 

373.  (a)  Mea  ipsius  culpa,  My  own  fault. 

Nostra  ipsorum  culpa,  Our  own  fault, 
(b)  Mee  ipse  consolor,  /  console  myself. 

Se  ipsos   omnes  natura  diligunt,  All  men  naturally 
love  themselves. 

b  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  also  used  when  they  have  omnium  in  agreement, 
jmnium  nostrum,  <&c. 
c  The  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns  (except  tu  and  the  genitives  plural)  art 


132  pronouns.  [§48.  374 

(c)  Cicero  effecerat,  ut  Q.  Curius  consilia  Catilinse  sibi 

proderet,  Cicero  had  induced  Q.  Curius  to  betray 
to  nim  (Cicero)  the  designs  of  Catiline. 

(It  being  obviously  absurd  to  suppose  that  Curius  was  to  betray  them 
to  Curius.) 

PerssB,  mortuo  Alexandra,  non  alium,  qui  imperaret 

ipsis,  digniorem  fuisse  confitebantur,  The  Persians, 

after  the  death  of  Alexander,  confessed  that  nobody 

had  ever  better  deserved  to  rule  over  them. 

{Qui  imperaret  sibi,  might  have  meant  '  a  Jitter  person  to  govern  himself.') 

(d)  Hannibalem  sui   cives  e  civitate  ejecerunt,  HannibaJ 

was  banished  by  his  fellow -citizens. 

374.  Vocabulary  52. 

To  befall,  happen,  accidere,d  cid,  (dat). 

To  happen,  turn  out,  evenlre,  ven,  vent. 

To  happen  (of  fortunate  events),      continggre,  tig,  tact,  {dot.). 

It  was  this  man's  good  fortune,       huic  contigit  ut,  &c. 

To  restore  liberty  to  his  country,     patriam  in  libertatem  vindicare. 

To  defend  (a  thing  or  person  if?  defend6      fend  w 

actually  attacked),  5 

To  defend  (a  thing  or  person,  if } 

and  whenever  it  is  attacked  ;)  >  tueri,e  tuitus  et  tutus. 

to  take  under  one's  protection,  j 
His  own  friends,  or  adherents,         sui  (plur.). 
For  its  own  sake,  propter  sese. 


sometimes  strengthened  by  •  met '  to  signify  self  with  or  without  ipse :  mihimel 
ipsi,  sibimet  ipsis,  nobismet  ipsis,  de  memet  ipso,  &c.  Se  is  also  doubled  into  sese : 
for  tumet,  tute  is  said.  Matthias  says,  that  Cic.  never  puts  ipse  in  the  nom.  aftei 
this  appended  met. 

d  Accldere  and  cvenire  are  said  of  any  occurrences  whatever ;  contingere,  ob- 
ventre,  and  obtingere,  only  of  fortunate  ones.  But  accidentia  are  occurrences 
that  take  us  by  surprise ;  evenientia  those  that  are  expected.  Accidentia  are  repre- 
sented as  the  effects  of  chance ;  evenientia  as  the  results  of  preceding  actions  or 
events ;  contingentia  as  favours  conferred  upon  us  by  good  fortune ;  obtingenlia 
and  obvenientia  as  advantages^/a/Zin^  to  our  lot.  (D.)  From  the  use  of  contingem 
to  describe  the  happening  of  fortunate  occurrences,  accidere  would  come  to  bo 
generally  used  of  unfortunate  ones. 

•  Neither  is  in  itself  stronger  than  the  other ;  for  as  the  defendens  show? 
more  spirit  and  strength  in  resisting  an  actual  danger,  so  the  tuens  shows  moi 
eare  and  affection  in  endeavouring  to  prevent  an  anticipated  one.  (D.) 


)  49.  375-377.]  pronouns.  133 

Exercise  56. 

[How  is  through  to  be  translated,  when  it  expresses  the  cause  ?  (261  )1 
375.  The  mind  is  a  part  of  me.  The  better  part  of  you  is 
immortal.  Let  none  of  us  doubt  that  it  is  expedient  to  obey  the 
laws  of  virtue.  Which  of  you  is  believed  1  Many  evils  have 
befallen  me  through  (abl.)  my  own  fault.  Do  not  many  evils 
happen  to  us  by  our  own  fault  ?  All  men  favour  themselves. 
These  evils  may  have  happened  to  us  (129  (a)  )  through  our  own 
fault.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  mind  is  a  part  of  ourselves 
(of  us).  I  will  pray  Cuius  to  take  my  cause  under  Ids  protection. 
Ought  he  not  to  have  commanded  himself  ?  It  is  not  every  man  who 
can  command  himself.  He  is  an  enemy  to  himself.  We  should 
practise  justice  for  its  own  sake.  They  prayed  Artabazus  to  take 
theirf  cause  under  his  protection.  He  was  called  king  by  his 
own  adherents.  It  was  this  man's  good  fortune  to  restore  libeitv 
to  his  country.  I  fear  that  he  will  not  be  able  to  restore  liberty 
to  his  country.  They  ask  to  be  allowed  to  take  all  their  property 
with  them.     There  are  some109  who  favour  themselves. 


§  49.     Pronouns  continued.     (Is,  hie,  iste,  ille.) 

376.  (a)  He,  she,  it;  they,  are  translated  by  if,  ea,  id,  when 
ihey  merely  stand  for  a  person  or  thing  either  before  mentioned  or 
about  to  be  described  by  a  relative  clause. 

1  Is,*  is  wholly  without  emphasis,  or  the  power  of  distinguishing  one 
object  from  another.  One  of  its  main  duties  is  to  act  as  a  mere  ante- 
cedent to  the  relatives 

377.  When  used  to  distinguish  objects,  hie  denotes  the  nearest, 
ille  the  most  remote,  iste  that  which  is  the  nearest  to  the  party 
addressed. 

c)  Iste  may  be  considered  as  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  = 
1  that  of  yours,'  '  that  which  is  known  to  (or  concerns)  you.' 


(  Ipsorum:  for  suam  might  mean,  they  prayed  him  to  support  his  men 
pose. 

*  '  Is  qui  pugnat  '  means  '  the  combatant *  or  '  a  combatant *  (accordingly  ai 
he  has  been  mentioned,  or  not  mentioned  before) :  while  '  hie  qui  pugnat, 
ill*  qui  pugnat,'  signify  respectively  lthis  combatant,'  '  yonder  combatant.' 


134  pronouns.  [§  49.  378-384. 

373.  From  this  power  of  denoting  comparative  nearness  and  remotenes$ 
(whether  in  space  or  time),  hie  and  tile  are  used  to  discriminate 
between  the  different  words  that  form  the  subject  of  discourse.  Thus 
then, 

Of  two  things  already  mentioned,  hie  relates  to  the  nearer,  the 

latter  ;  ille  to  the  more  remote,  the  former. h 

Hie,  referring  to  what  immediately  precedes,  must  occupy  a  very 
early,  if  not  the  first  place  in  its  sentence. 

379.  While  hie  refers  to  what  has  just  come  from  the  pen  (or  mouth), 
ille  may  be  opposed  to  it  in  another  direction,  and  introduce  some  new 
matter. 

380.  So  also  hie  may  refer  to  what  follows,  but  it  must  then  descend  from 
its  prominent  place  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  to  occupy  one 
equally  emphatic  either  at,  or  very  near,  the  end. 

381.  '  Ille,'  from  relating  to  the  past,  may  denote  that  which  has  long  been 
kronen,  whether  favourably  or  unfavourably. 

(6)  Here  ille  i  r=  the  well  known;  the  famous. 

382.  In  letters,  iste  relates  to  the  place  where  the  person  addressed  is 
residing,  and  to  the  things  that  concern  him :  in  trials,  iste  denotes  the 
opposite  party,  as  long  as  he  is  directly  addressed;  but  when  the 
speaker  turns  to  the  judges,  he  may  use  hie  to  denote  the  opposite 
party.     (G.) 

As  ille  may  mean  (whom  all  know,'  so  iste  may  mean  'whom  you 
know,'  whether  for  good  or  not.k  So  also  hie  may  mean  '  whom  you  of 
/  see  before  us.' 

383.  (d)  'Ille'  is  used  before  '  quidem,'  where  we  use  lit  is 
true,'  *  indeed,9  to  make  some  partial  concession,  to  be  followed  by 
a  *  but.3 

384.  (a)  Dionysius  servus  meus  aufugit :  is  est  in  provincia 

tua,  Dionysius,  a  slave  of  mine.,  has  run  away  :  he 
is  in  your  province, 
(h)  Medea  ilia,  The  famous  Medea.     Magnus  ille  Alex- 
ander, The  celebrated  Alexander  the  Great. 


h  Of  the  passages  where  hie  relates  to  the  more  remote  word  of  a  sentence,  all 
probably  may  be  explained  by  one  or  other  of  these  considerations: — (1)  The 
well-known  order  of  the  actual  occurrence  or  existence  of  the  things  may  be  re- 
versed in  the  sentence.  (G.)  (2)  Hie  may  denote  what  is  before  our  eyes.  (3) 
Or  hie  may  denote  '  id  de  quo  pctissimum  agimus.'     (Raschig  ad  Liv.  xxiv.  29.) 

i  Hie  can  never  perform  the  part  of  &  mere  antecedent  to  the  relative  (  =  is) ; 
and  the  employment  of  hie  for  this  purpose  must  be  confined  to  those  cases 
where  the  relative  oause  precedes  (see  30,  (c) ),  so  that  here  too  it  euppoi  ts  its 
ardinary  character  of  referring  to  what  has  just  been  mentioned. 

tin  this  way  iste  is  often  used  to  express  contempt,  but  by  no  means  always 


}19.  385,  386.]  pronouns.  135 

(c)  Ista,  civitas,  That  state  of  yours. 

(d)  Non  sine  ratione  ille  quidem,  sed  tamen,  &c,  N(* 

without  reason  it  is  true,  but  yet,  &c. 
385.  Vocabulary  53. 
And  that  too,  et  is  ;i  isque  ;  et  idem,  idemque. 

Nor  that ;  and  that  too  not,  nee  is. 

r  ism  demum  (that  at  length,  as  if  the  oth- 
That  only,  1     ers  had  been  travelled  Uirough  before 

f     this  was  arrived  at). 
To  know,  scire,0  sclv,  scit. 

To   know  =  to    be    acquainted  <  novisse,  nosse  (per/,  of  noscPre,  to  learn 
with,  C      to  know,  to  make  acquaintance  with). 

To    know  thoroughly  by  expe- )callCre>  ui    (Pr0PerIy>  to  *«  W>  "  3 
rience;  to  be  conversant  with,    [     hand  becomes  by  much  manual  la- 

j     bour;  ace.). 

r  adimere0  (of  good  things)  exlme're  (of 
To  take  away,  bad  things)  em,  empt.     They  govern 

C      the  dat.  of  that/ram  which. 
To  make  a  beginning  with,  facPre  initium  a. 

Of  a  common  kind,  vulgaris,  is,  e. 

Exercise  57. 

38G.  He  has  killed  both  his  father  and  his  mother  ;  the  former 
by  poison,  the  latter  by  starvation.  What  prevents  him  from 
making  a  beginning  with  himself?  This™  only  is  true  wisdom, 
to  command  oneself.  What™  true  wisdom  is,  the  wise  only  know. 
Do  you  know  Caius  ?  I  will  ask  what  true  wisdom  is.  At  how 
much  is  that  state  of  yours  to  be  valued,  from  which  the  good  and 
wise  have  been  banished  ?  I  doubt  whether  this  is  true  happiness 
or  not.     I  have  had  an  interview  with  Caius  :  he  says  that  he  has 


1  Some  scholars  doubt  the  existence  of  the  forms  ii  and  ii*.  Grotefend  gives 
dat.  eis  (also  iis) :  Zumpt  (in  his  eighth  edit.)  ii  (ei),  iis  (eis) ;  adding  that  the 
foniu  rare  the  more  common,  and  generally  written  in  MSS.  with  a  single  i. 

m  When  is,  hie,  or  qui,  Ac.  stands  as  the  subject  of  an  ajrposition-verb  (150),  it 
generally  agrees  with  the  following  noun,  where  we  might  suppose  it  to  agree 
with  '  thing.'     ["  Ea  demum  est  vera./*e/ici7as."] 

n  IScire  relates  to  a  proposition ;  if  followed  by  an  accusative  only,  it  is  a  ncut. 
pronoun,  or  nihil.  It  expresses  actually  acquired  knoicledge.  Nosse  is  to  have 
become  acquainted  with  the  signs  and  marks  by  which  a  thing  may  be  known  i 
t 4  describes  therefore  knowledge  as  the  result  of  external  or  internal  perception. 
K.)     Hence  nosse  is  often  followed  by  the  accusative  of  a  noun. 

•  Demitur  quidlibet ;  adimuntur  bona ;  eximuniur  mala.     (D.) 


186  pronouns.  $  49.  387, 388 

not  seen  the  man.  Do  not  take  away  from  me  my  liberty.  Tha4 
(famous)  Plato  has  taken  away  from  me  all  fear  of  death.  Apollc 
admonishes  us  to  become  acquainted  with  ourselves.  It  is  not 
every  one  who  can39  know  himself.  Those  good  things  which 
can  be  taken  away,  are  not  really  good  things. p  Having  set  my 
son7  at  liberty,  he  has  taken  away  all  myi  care.  I  have  been 
praised  by  a  good  man  it  is  true  (d),  but  (one  who  is)  unskilled 
in  these  matters.  Christians  after  death  will  enjoy  a  happy  life, 
and  that  too  an  eternal  one.  He  has  always  devoted  himself  to 
literature,  and  that  too  of  no82  common  kind. 

387.  Vocabulary  54.  » 

Also,  (may  often  be  translated  by)  idem.' 

This  or  that,  as  well  as  some  other,  et  ipse. 

Where  you  are  ;  in  your  neigh- ) .    . 

bourhood,  ) 

Even  or  very  {vnlh  that),  ipse ;  illud  ipsum8  ('  even  that '). 

To  join  battle  with,  to  give  bat-  >        ,,  .„„ 

t  premium  committere  cum. 
tie  to,  ) 


>  isto,  or  istuc.i 


1  o  your  neighbourhood ;  to  where  } 

you  are, 
From  your  neighbourhood ;  from 

where  you  are, 
Proud,  superbus,  a,  um. 

Exercise  58. 

[How  must  lI ambelwced^  be  translated?  285. J 
368.  Those  whom  we  love,  we  also  wish  to  be  happy.  Let 
him  who  commands  others,  learn  also  to  command  himself.  Are 
(then)  liars  believed  in  your  neighbourhood  ?  Those  who  come 
from  your  neighbourhood,  say  that  you  are  proud.  It  is  not 
becoming  for57  a  Christian  to  be  proud.     I  had  already  set  out  to 


v  Say  :  { are  not  true  good  (things).' 

i  Say :  'all  care  from  me.' 

T  Nihil  est  liberale,  quod  non  idem  justum  (which  is  not  also  just). 

s  To  justify  the  use  of  Me  (to  denote  any  thing,  provided  it  did  n^t  immediately 
precede)  there  must  always  be  an  intermediate  object  to  which  hie  is  applicable : 
yet,  not  if  the  remote  event  be  one  of  general  notoriety.  "  &uid  T.  Albutius! 
aonne  sequissimo  animo  Athenis  exsul  philosophabatur  7  cui  tamen  illud  ipsv** 
numquam  accidisset  si,  &c."     (De  Fin.  v.  108.) 

t  Adverbs  of  motion  to  a  islace  end  in  o  or  uc ;  of  motion/rom,  iu  iric,  nde. 


$50.  389-391.]  pronouns.  137 

your  neighbourhood.  Even  that  would  never  have  befallen  m(\ 
in  your  lifetime.  A  Christian  may  not  be  proud.  Do  not  join 
battle.  I  fear  the  Romans  will  not  be  willing  to  join  battle  with 
the  Gauls,  It  cannot  be  denied  that  justice  should  be  practised 
for  its  own  sake.  It  remains,  that  I  should  give  battle  to  the 
Gauls.  It  follows,  that  it  is  a  difficult  thing  to  know  oneself.  I 
know  that  in  your  neighbourhood  you  both  are  wise  and  seem 
(so.)  Suchl0)  a  war  was  undertaken,  as  Rome  had  never  before 
seen. 


§50.     Pronouns  continued.     (On  the  translation  of  '  any .') 
889.  '  Any  '  when  all  are  excluded  is  quisquam  or  ullus. 

390.  '  Any  '  when  all  are  included  is  quivis*  or  quilibet. 

(a)  All  are  excluded  in  sentences  that  are  really  or  virtually'  negative  j 

and  after  vix  (scarcely),  sine  (without). 
(/?)  All  are  included  when  '  any '  means  '  any  you  please,'  '  every.1 
(y)  '  Quisquam '  is  used  witlwut,  '  ullus '  generally  with  a  substantive. 
Quisquam  may  however  be  used  with  designations    of  men  (lwmot 

ciris),  &c. 

391.  (b)  '  Any*  after  si,  nisi,  num,  ne,  quo,  quanto,  is  the  in- 
definite quis  ;w  of  which  the  feminine  singular  and  neut.  plur.  are 
qua  or  qua,  after  si,  num,  ne  (and  ec).* 

u  In  quivis  (and  utervis)  a  deliberate  and  thoughtful  choice  is  supposed,  in  qui' 
libet  (and  uterlibet)  a  blind  and  inconsiderate  one. — Quilibet  generally  carries 
with  it  some  expression  of  contempt.    (D.  after  Lachmann.) 

r  Sentences  that,  are  virtually  negative  (that  is,  as  good  as  negative)  are  (1) 
such  questions  as  expect  the  answer  'no,'  and  are  asked  not  for  information  but 
assent;  thus,  'can  any  man  believe  this  V  =  lno  man  surely  can  believe  this ;' 
(2)  comparative  sentences;  'he  was  taller  than  any  of  his  friends'  ^  inone  of  his 
friends  was  so  tall  as  he.' — With  respect  to  sine,  aliquis  should  follow  it  in  a 
negative  sentence  (in  which  it  is  to  be  considered  positive),  and  ullus  in  a  positive 
sentence  (in  which  it  is  to  be  considered  negative).  (G.) 

w  Quisquam  sometimes  follows  si,  but  it  then  generally  implies  that  the  exist- 
ence of  the  exception  is  very  doubtful.  And  even  without  si  it  is  used  to  ex- 
oress  any  single  person  or  thing.  "  Quamdiu  quisquam  erit,  qui  te  audeaf 
Oefendere,  vives."  Such  expressions  as  '  sine  omni  cura '  for  '  sine  ulla  cura" 
are  only  found  in  Plautus  and  Terence.  In  Cicero  'sine  omni  cura'  wouW 
bean  '  without  all  (imaginable)  care.' 

*  Whether  quae  or  qua  should  be  preferred,  is  a  disputed  point.  The  poeta 
Bse  qua  with  few  exceptions.  (Z.)  The  form  qui  is  also  used  in  the  sing.  nom. 
masc. :  si  qui,  ecqui.  Even  aliqui  ( =  aliquis)  is  found  in  a  few  passages  oj 
Cicero. 


138  pronouns.  [§  50.  392-398 

(But  aliquis  follows  these  particles  when  the  any  or  some  Ib  emphatic.) 

392.  '  Any '  is  translated  by  aliquis*  or  quispiam,  when  it  meana 
ysome  one  or  other,'  'some.' 

393.  (d)  The  indefinite  article  '  a  '  may  sometimes  -be  trans* 
lated  by  quidam,  aliquis,  or  quispiam,?  when  '  a  certain  '  or  *  some ' 
might  be  substituted  for  '  a.7 

391.  (e)  Nescio  quis  (the  ^uis  agreeing  with  the  subst.)  is  sometimes  used  foi 
quidam,  but  it  generally  carries  with  it  some  notion  of  contempt  or  oj 
indifference  at  least. 
(Eng.)  Henry,  Charles  and  John. 
(Lot.)  Henry,  Charles,  John.     Or,  Henry  and  Charles  and  John. 

895.  (a)  Solis   candor   illustrior  est  quam  ullius  •  ignis,   The 

brightness  of  the  sun  is  more  intense  than  that  of  any 

Jin. 

An  quisquam  potest  sine  perturbatione  mentis  irasci  \ 

Can  (then)  any  man  be  angry  without  some  mental 

agitation  ? 

(b)  Num  quis  irascitur  infantibus  ?     Is  any  body  angry 

with  infants  ? 

(c)  Quodlibet  pro  patria,  parentibus,  amicis,  adlre  peri. 

culum  ....  oportet,   We  ought  to  encounter  any 
danger  for    our   country,    our   parents,  and   our 
friends. 
Mihi  quidvis  sat  est,  Any  thing  is  enough  for  me. 

(d)  Agricola  quispiam,  Some  husbandman  (any,  or  a,  hus- 

bandman).    Pictor  aliquis,  Any,  or  a,  painter, 
(e)  Prope   me  hie  nescio  quis  loquitur,  Some  body  or 
other  is  talking  here  near  me. 

396.  Vocabulary  55. 
Everybody  I  quisque,«    quaeque,   quodque  ;    G.  cu- 

'  $     jusque. 


*  If '  some '  is  emphatic  =  some  at  least,  though  but  little,  or  of  a  bad  quality, 
oliquis  should  be  used. 

7  When  quidam  expresses  c  a '  it  implies  '  a  certain '  one,  though  it  is  unne- 
cessary, perhaps  impossible,  to  name  it :  quispiam  and  aliquis  do  not  imply  an 
allusion  to  a  particular  individual. 

*  Quisque  is  a  sort  of  enclitic,  and  therefore  never  stands  at  the  beginning  oi 
d  sentence  in  prose,  and  seldom  even  in  poetry.  The  corresponding  emphatk 
iorm  is  '  unusquisque,'  •  each  particular  one.' 


$  50.  397.]  pronouns.  139 

Etery  body  who  ;  whoever, 


quisquis, quidquid  (quidquid, 

every  thing  that ;  whatever). 


Whatever j  every-that  }  quicunque,*  quaecunque,  quodcunque  - 

C      G.  cujuscunque,  &e 
Why  1  quid? 

How  1  qui  1 

Somebody  =r  a  person  of  conse-  >  aU     isjj  aliquaf  ^^  .  G<  ^^^ 

quence,  ) 

At  once— and,  idem— idem. b 

Any  one  man,  quivis  unus. 

Take  care  ;  see  that,  vide  ne. 

Rashly;  inconsiderate" y ; without )  temgre 

sufficient  reason,  > 

What  7    *  quid? 

Some  how  or  other,  nescio  quombdo. 

Exercise  59. 
397.  Can  (then)6  any  man  govern  the  seasons  ?  Take  care 
not  to  be  angry  with  any  body  without  sufficient  reason.  Take 
care  to  do  nothing  inconsiderately.  Can  (then)  any  of  you  govern 
the  seasons  ?  Hardly  any  one  can  govern  himself!  Everyman 
ought  to  defend  his  own'  friends. d  Will  any  man  hesitate  to  shed 
his  blood  for  his  country  1  This  might  have  happened  to  any 
body.  Shall  (then)  any  thing  deter  me  from  encountering*1  any 
danger  (whatever)  for  my  country'  and  my  parents'  ?  Is  not  any 
thing  enough  for  Balbus  ?  He  is  braver  than  any  (390,  v)  of  the 
Gauls.  If  anyone  breaks  his  word  for  the  sake  of  his  friend,  he 
sins'.  Do  you  (then)  believe  that  any  Roman  (you  please)  is 
payer  than  any  Greek  ?  You  may  say  any  thing  (you  please) 
here.  Whatever  things  are  in  the  whole  (omnis)  world,  belong 
to  men.  Some  are  the  slaves  of  glory,  others  of  money.  How 
does  it  happen  that  you  (pi.)  do  not  know  this  1  What  !  do  not 
a!l  understand  this  ?     There  are  some  who  believe  any  body. 


*  Quicunqveia  the  adjective  form  of  quisquis. 

»>  Fuere  quidam  qui  iidem  ornate,  iidem  versute  dicerent.     (Z.) 

e  Though  num  expects  the  answer  no,  it  does  not  imply  that  the  answer  c  yes ' 
cannot  possibly  be  given,  as  'an'  does.  '  An  quisquam  '  is  therefore  more  com- 
mon than  'num.  quisquam,'  and  stronger  than  'num.  qui*.' 

d  Quisque  should  immediately  follow  cases  of  sui  or  suus,  and  numeral* 
decimua  quisquel  every  tenth  man). 


140  pronouns.  [§  51.  S98-405A. 

§  51.     Pronouns  continued.     (On  the  prefixes  and  affixes  of 
the  interrogatives . ) 

398.  (a)  The  syllable  ec  often  appears  as  a  prefix,  and  the  syl 
lable  nam  as  an  affix,  to  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs. 

The  '  ec '  is  from  en .'  cm  /  hem !  a  particle  calling  for  attention  tc 
what  is  going  to  be  said.  '  Nam '  is  properly  namely,  by  name ;  so  tlmt 
quisnam  is,  wlw  by  name;  name  or  tell  me,  who.     (Hartung.) 

The  en  stands  alone  in,  fEn  unquam  cuiquam  contumeliosius  audistis 
factam  injuriam,  &c.1 '  ( Ter.  Phorm.  ii.  3.)  Nam  is  appended  to  quite, 
quid,  ubiy  num,  &c. 

599.  (b)  '  Always  *  after  one  superlative  and   before  another, 

may  be  translated  by  quisque,  agreeing  with  the  same  substantive 

that  the  superlatives  agree  with. 

The  singular  is  generally  to  be  used,  when  a  substantive  is  not  to  be 
expressed  in  Latin. 

400.  (a)  Ecquid6  sentitis  in  quanto  contemtu  vivatis  ?'    Do  you 

perceive  at  all  (or,  perchance)  in  what  contempt  you 
are  living  ? 
Num  quidnam  novi  accidit  ?     Has   any  thing  fresh 
occurred  ? 

(b)  Optimum  quidque  rarissimum  est,   The  best  things  are 

always  the  rarest. 
Altissima  qucBque  flumina  minimo  sono  labuntur,   The 
deepest  rivers  always  flow  with  the  least  sound. 

(c)  Doctissimus  quisque,  All  the  most  learned  men. 

(d)  Aliud  alii  natura  iter  ostendit,  Nature  points  out  one 

path  to  one  man,  another  to  another, 
Aliud  alio  fertur,  One  thing  is  borne  in  one  direction, 
another  in  another. 

401.  (Eng.)  One  Balbus.     {Lot.)  A  certain  Balbus,    (Quidam.) 
(Eng.)  One  does  one  thing,  another  another. f 

{Lot.)     Another  does  another  thing. 

402.  Vocaeulary  56. 

Little  =  but  or  too  little,  parum  (with  genit.). 


0  Ec  ( =  en)  prefixed  to  quis,  quid,  quando,  &c,  puts  a  question  doubtingly, 
but  intimates  that  the  answer  'no'  is  rather  expected.  It  often  gives  a  tone  of 
Impatience  to  the  inquiry. 

t  In  a  sentence  of  this  kind,     one— me  must  be  translated  by  alius— alius 
<mU  another — another  be  untranslated. 


{Til.  402.]  PRONOUNS.  141 

A  little  =  some,  but  not  much,        paulum,  or  paulBlum. 

A  considerable    quantity;    some)..  ^  ,    ...  ... 

H  J  '  >  aliquantum  (with  genit). 

considerable.  )  v         °        ' 

In  the  mean  time,  interim. 

Meanwhile;  all  that  time,  interea.* 

Sometimes  =  now  and  then  (ap-  ] 
proacfdng,   as  compared  with  I 
rumnunquam,  to  the  notion  of  ( interJum- 
but  seldom).  J 

Sometimes  (approaching  to  the  $  n^unquam ;  aliquandoh  (the  last  be 
notion  of  pretty  often).  )     lnS  Pr0Perly  aom&  tim*  or  other,  and 

*      often  therefore  equivalent  to  at  last).\ 
funquam    (with   negatives);    aliquando 
I      (when  it  means,  at  some  one  time,  be 
Ever,  •      it  when  it  may) ;  quando  (after  siy  nisi, 

ne,  &c,  when  the  ever  is  not  em- 
I     phatic).k 
In  a  different  direction ;  to  some  ?    ,.    ^q-j  t\ 
other  place,  )  ,     ' 

From  a  different  direction,  aliunde. 

c  usquam,i  aliquo,  quo  (to  be  used  accord- 
Any  where  =  any  whither,  <      ing  to  the  Rules  for  '  any .'     See  Any, 

(      Index  I). 
Nowhere  or  whither,  nusquam. 

Strength,  (vires,   virium,   &c.   (in  sing,   'force', 

C      'violence';  vis,  vim,  vi). 
fjj*  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonnunquam  esse  memento. 


*  Interea  refers  to  an  event  continuing  during  the  whole  interval:  interim  to 
Dne  that  occurs  at  some  time  or  times  within  that  interval.  Hence,  as  Doderlein 
observes,  in  negative  sentences  interea  is  the  regular  word,  as  the  possibility 
and  expectation  of  a  thing's  happening  is  always  of  some  duration. 

k  The  syllable  ali,  whether  as  prefix  6r  termination,  always  denotes  quality. 
Thus  '  si  aliquis  adest,'  is,  c  if  there  be  any  one  present,  be  he  who  or  what  he  may  ? 
whereas  '  si  quisquam  adest '  would  mean  '  if  there  be  but  one  present,  no  matter 
whether  more  or  not.'  (G.)  Aliquando  is  properly  '  at  one  time,  whether  near 
or  far  of,'  but  as  a  thing's  once  happening  may  prove  the  possibility  of  its  often 
happening,  aliquando  is  often  equivalent  to  aliquotics.  But  in  the  golden  age  it 
is  used  by  preference  of  things  that  had  better  happen  never.     (D  ) 

'  It  gets  this  meaning  from  its  being  implied  by  the  nature  of  the  sentence 
hat  no  early  time  remains.  In  this  meaning  it  is  often  joined  with  tandem 
=  tarn  demum.     D.). 

k  Hence  'ever'  =  at  any  time,  is  translated  by  unquam,  aliquando,  or 
fuando,  according  as  '  any '  would  be  translated  under  the  same  circumstances, 
by  ullus,  aliquis,  or  quis.  Si  quis,  si  quando  are  nearly  equivalent  to  whoever^ 
whenever. 

»  Utxjwm  is  more  regularly  the  '  any  where '  of  rest ;  but  is  used  after  verb* 
:;jn,  as  we  use  where. 


142      .  comparisons.  §  52.  403,  404. 

Exercise  60. 

['Ever '  after  whether,  when  marked  as  emphatic,  is  to  be  translated 
by  ecquando. 

1  Perchance?  after  whether,  is  to  be  translated  by  the  addition  of  quid 
to  en  or  num. :  ecquid,  numquid. 

When  •  ever '  and  '  any  '  are  marked  as  emphatic  (in  other  cases)  they 
are  not  to  be  translated  by  quando,  quis. 

1 A '  emphatic  is  to  be  translated  by  a  pronoun.] 

403.  What  prevents  us  from  banishing  every  tenth  man  ?  We 
have  lost  some  considerable  time  by  playing.  They  say  that  they 
shall  never2  die.  We  shall  all  die  some  time  or  other.  The  best 
men  always  (&)  die  with  the  most  resignation.  In  the  mean  time 
one  Octavius  called  upon  me  at.  my  own  house.  None  of  you 
called  upon  me  all  that  time'.  There  is  no  one  but  (44,  (2)  )  is 
sometimes  mistaken.  Most'  of  us  are  pretty  often,  all  of  us  are 
sometimes  deceived  (p.  14,  15,  b).  Which  is  the  wiser,  Caius  or 
Balbus  1  Does  any  man  believe  liars  ?  In  the  mean  time  a' 
(393)  greater  fear  seized  upon  the  soldiers.  I  hear  that  there  is 
a'  greater  fear  in  the  city.  If  you  ever  return  (shall  have 
returned)  home,  you  will  understand  these  things.  Have  you 
ever'  heard  this  from  any  body  ?  [No.]  If  you  are  setting  out 
any  where,  return  in  the  evening.  Are  you  going  to  set  out  to 
some  other  place-?  Nowhere.  Some  considerable  time  has  been 
lost  (in)  asking  my  friends.  Some  persons  devote  themselves  to 
one  thing,  others  to  another.  Virtue  is  not  of  such1 0)  strength  as 
to  defend  herself.15  Have  you  perchance  two  countries  ?  Let 
me  know  whether  I  shall  ever7  see  you.  There  were  some  who 
had  two  countries. 


XIX 

§  52.     Comparison. 

404.  (a)  The  regular  particle  of  comparison  is  quam  (than).    The  things  com- 
pared  will  of  course  be  in  the  same  case. 

(a)  When  the  same  noun  belongs  to  each  member  of  the  comparison,  il 
is  omitted  in  one.  In  English  we  express  it  in  theirs*  clause,  and  us< 
the  pronoun  HhaV  for  it  in  the  second.  This  'that'  is  not  to  be  trans 
lated  into  Latin. 


$  V2.  405-409.]  comparisons.  143 

405.  (b)  Sometimes  quam  is  omitted,  and  the  following  noun 
put  in  the  ablative. m 

(a)  As  a  rule,  the  ablative  should  not  be  used  in  this  way,  except  where 
the  same  noun  would  follow  quam  in  the  nominative.  Sometimes  how- 
ever the  ablative,  especially  of  pronouns,  is  used  for  the  accusative  after 
quam.    In  the  construction  of  the  ace.  with  infin.  this  would  be  regular. 

(0)  Moreover,  the  construction  with  the  ablative  should  not  be  used,  un- 
less the  object  with  which  another  is  compared,  actually  possesses  th* 
property™  in  question. 

406.  (c)  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  often  accompanied 
by  ablatives,  expressing  by  how  much  one  thing  exceeds  or  falls 
short  of  another. 

407.  (d)  The  English  the— the  (  =  by  how  much— by  so  much)  are  expressed  Ln 

Latin  by  quanto—tanto ;  quo — co  or  hoc. 

A  sentence  of  this  kind  may  also  be  expresoed  by  ut  quisque  with  a 
superlative,  followed  by  ita  with  another. 

408.  '  Somewhat*  and  'too'  with  the  positive  are  expressed  by  the  compa- 
rative, when  those  adverbs  are  not  emphatic.  And  sometimes  an  em- 
phatic positive  is  expressed  by  the  comparative. 

409.  (a)  Europa  minor  est,  quam  Asia,   Europe  is  less  than 

Asia. 

(b)  Non  ego  hac  node  longiorem  vidi,  I  have  not  seen  a 

longer  night  than  this. 

(c)  Multo  diffieilius,  Much  more  difficult. 

(d)  Eo  minor  est  arcus,  quo  altior  est  sol,  The  higher  the 

sun  is,  the  less  is  the  arc. 
Tanto  brevius  omne  tempus,  quanto  felicius  est,  The 
•  happier  any  time  is,  the  shorter  it  is  (i.  e.  appears) 
Ut  quisque  est  vir  optimus,  ita  difficillime  esse  alios 

imprdbos  suspicatur,  The  better  a  man  is,  the  more 

difficulty   he   has    in   suspecting   that   others   are 

wicked. 

(e)  Romani  bella  qusedam  fortius  quam  felicius  gesse- 

runt,   The  Romans  carried  on  some  wars  with  more 
courage  than  success. 
Pestilentia  minacior  quam  perniciosior,  A  pestilenco 


«  If  I  say  a  person  Is  l  sapientior  Caio,1  I  ascribe  wisdom  to  Caius,  though 
»fcss  of  it  than  to  any  other  person.  If  I  say  he  is  '  sapientior  quam  Caiue?  1 
do  not  necessarily  ascribe  to  Caius  any  wisdom  at  all. 


Ui  COMPARISONS.  [552.    410. 

more  alarming  than  (really)  fatal  (or,   alarming 
rather  than  destructive). 

(/)  Prcelium  majus  quam  pro  numero  hostium  editur,  A 
severer  battle  is  fought  than  could  have  been  ex- 
pected  from  the  (small)  number  of  the  enemy.  (Or, 
a  battle  unusually  severe  for  the  number  of  the 
enemy.) 
Alexander  consedit  regia,  sella  multo  excelsiore  quam 
pro  habitu  corporis,  Alexander  sat  down  on  the 
royal  chair,  which  was  far  too  high  for  his  stature. 

(g)  Res  graviores     (important).     Morbi   graviores  (se- 
vere). 

110.  Vocabulary  57. 

Passionate,  iracundus,  a,  um. 

Angry,  iratus,  a,  um. 

Considerably  more,  aliquanto  plus  (see  402). 

Many  times  as  great,  multis  partibus  major. 

Are  hard  to  be  avoided,  or  dim-  )  diffidle  vitantur< 

cult  to  avoid,  ) 

Hidden,  occultus,  a,  um  (partic.  of  occttlgre). 

Snares,  insidias,  arum,/. 

Frequent,  creber,  bra,  brum  ;  frSquens,11  tis. 

Loquacious,  loquax,  acis. 

Old  age,  senectus,  iitis,  f. 

Difference,  distantia,  a?,  /. 

Worse,  pejor,  or,  us  {less  good  than,  deterior). 

(Words  by  which  superlatives  are  strengthened). 
As  shortly  as  possible,  quam0  brevissime. 

Extremely    flourishing    (in    re-  >  longe  opulentissimus. 

sources),  ) 

Far ;  by  far,  multo. 

The  very  least,  vel  minimus. 

The  most  unjust  possible,  or  in  >  yd  iniquissimus< 

the  world,  ) 

(Eng.)  He  is  too  proud  to  be  a  slave. 
(Lat.)    He  is  -prouder  than  that  he  should  be  a  slave. 


n  Creber  denotes  close  and  crowded  succession,  and  often  imclies  censure :  fre- 
quens  denotes  a  plentiful  supply,  and  rather  as  an  epithet  of  praise.  Frequena 
is  also  used  of  a  place  '  much  resorted  to,'  and  a  lfidl '  senate-house :  in  which 
sense  creber  is  not  used,  but  celeber,  which  is  related  to  it  as  kuXvtttu  to  Kpvnroi. 
CD.) 

0  Potest,  possunt,  &c,  may  be  inserted  after  quam.  l  Aves  nidos  quam  poo- 
xutit  mollissime  substernunt    =  iam  molliter,  quam  possunt  mollissime.     (0J.) 


J  68.    411,  412.]       REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.  14& 

(Quam  ut  mancipium  sit,  or  possit  esse.) 
(Eng.)  I  took  the  greatest  pains  /  could. 

(Lot.)    I  to^k  pains  (as  great)  asP  the  greatest  I  could  (quam). 
( Eng.)  As  great  a  difference  as  there  can  possibly  be. 
(Lat.)    A  difference  as  gr eat-as  the  greatest  can  be. 

(Quanta  maxima  potest  esse  distantia.) 

Exercise  61. 

411.  That  report  was  frequent  rather  than  certain  (e).  The 
better  a  man  is,  with  the  more  resignation  will  he  die.  The 
most  hidden  dangers  are  always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid.  The 
more  hidden  a  danger  is,  the  more  difficulty  is  there  in  avoiding 
it.9S  The  more  passionate  a  man  is,  the  more  difficulty  has  he9S 
in  commanding  himself.  He  is  too  angry  to  be  able  to  command 
himself.  I  prefer  the  most  unjust  peace  in  the  world  to  the  justest 
war.  Saguntum  was  an  extremely  flourishing  state.  I  will  say 
as  shortly  as  possible,  what  it  seems  to  me  should  be  done.*7  They 
perceive  the  very  least  things.  They  worship  Libera,  whom  they 
also86  call  Proserpina.  I  have  accomplished  the  longest  journey 
1  possibly  could.  I  have  finished  the  business  with  the  greatest 
care  I  possibly  could.  In  important  matters,  there  is  need  of  delib- 
eration.30 Old  age  is  by  nature  somewhat  (408)  loquacious.  We 
have  lost  considerably  more  gold  than  you.  It  is  an  allowed  fact, 
that  the  sun  is  many  times  as  great  as  the  earth.  There  is  the 
greatest  possible  difference  of  character  between  them. 


XX. 

§  53.    Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses. 

412.  The  perfect  definite  (perf.  with  have)  is  virtually  a  present  tense,  being 
used  of  an  action  begun  at  some  past  time,  and  carried  on  up  to,  or 
nearly  up  to  the  present  moment.  Hence,  as  we  have  seen  (40,  d),  it 
may  be  followed  by  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive.^ 

r  Quam  maximas  potui  copias  =  tantas,  quam  maximas.  (G.) 
*  Nevertheless  the  Roman  ear  was  so  accustomed  to  the  imperf  subj.  after 
the  perf,  that  they  used  it  (even  where  the  perf  is  plainly  equivalent  to  our 
perfect  with  'have'),  provided  'the action  could  be  conceived  as  one  advancing 
Kradually  to  its  completion.'  (Z.)  '  Diu  dubitavi  (have  long  doubted)  num  meliui 
n*,'  &c,  would  sound  strange  to  Roman  ears:  they  preferred  'num  melius  esset, 
wen  when  they  did  not  narrate,  but  were  on>  staling  the  result.     (K.) 

7 


146  REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.       [§  53.  413-416 

413.  (a)  To  express,  '  1 have  been  doing  a  thing  for  a  long  time,'  the  Roman* 
said  •  I  am  doing  it  for  a  long  time  already.' 

(Jam  pridem  cupio,  I  have  long  been  desiring.) 

414.  In  animated  narrative,  the  past  is  eften  described  by  the 
present. 

(6)  The  present  when  thus  used  (pr&sens  historicum)  may  be  followed 
either  by  the  present  subj.  (according  to  the  general  rule  for  the  sequence 
of  tenses;,  or  by  the  imperfect  subj.  (as  being  itself  virtually  a  past 
tense).    The  imperfect  is,  on  the  whole,  the  more  common.  (Z.) 

415.  (c)  A  present  tense  after  relatives,  or,  lwhen?  iif,'  *  as 
long  as,'  '  lefore?  &c,  is  generally  to  be  translated  by  a  future, 
when  the  action  expressed  by  it  is  still  future. 

The  action  is  generally  still  future,  when  the  verb  in  the  prin- 
cipal clause  is  in  &  future  tense  or  the  imperative  mood.r 

If  one  action  must  be  completed  before  the  other  begins,  the 
future  perfect  should  be  used.  In  this  case  the  perfect  definite  is 
sometimes  (by  no  means  always)  used  in  English.* 

416.  (1)  (Eng.)  Whensoever  I  take*  my  journey  into  Spain  I  will  come  to  you. 

(Lai.)  Whensoever  I  shall  take  my  journey,  &c. 

(2)  (Eng.)  When  I  have  performed  this,  I  will  come,  &c.  (Rom.  xv.  28  ) 
(Lot.)   When  I  shall  have  performed  this,  I  will  come,  &c. 

(3)  (Eng.)  When  he  is  come  (perf.  def.),  he  will  tell  us,  &c.  (John  iv.  5.> 
(Lot.)  When  he  shall  have  co?ne,  he  will  tell  us,  &c. 

l4l  (Eng.)  (Saying)  they  would  neither  eat  nor  drink,  till  they  had  killed 
Paul  (Acts  xxiii.  12). 
(Lot.)  (Saying)  they  would  neither  eat  nor  drink,  till  they  should 
have  killed  Paul. 


*  The  subjunctive  present  used  imperatively,  is  virtually  an  imperative. 

•  The  Roman,  viewing  the  future  action  or  event  from  his  present,  marked  ite 
futurity,  and,  if  necessary,  its  completion  :  the  Englishman  removes  himself  to 
the  '  when '  spoken  of,  and  contemplates  it  as  a  state  then  existing.  The  Roman 
considered  it  relatively :  the  Englishman  considers  it  absolutely.  There  arc 
some  constructions,  in  which  the  completion  of  the  action  is  not  marked,  even 
in  Latin ;  for  instance,  in  the  use  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  in  marking  the 
relative  time  of  a  wish,  request,  or  question :  e.  g.  '  He  answered  when  he  was 
asked  f  '  quum  interrogaretur,'  not  interrogatus  esset,  though  the  question  must 
be  completed  before  the  answer  is- given. 

t  Even  in  Latin,  the  present  (after  si)  is  sometimes  used,  as  in  English,  in 
connection  with  a  future;  but  only  when  it  is  to  intimate  that  the  future  event 
depends  upon  some  present  circumstance  or  resolution.  Examples  are :  '  Per- 
pcictur  bellum,  si  non  urgemus  obsessos,'  &c.  Liv.  v.  4.  '  Si  vincimus,  omnia 
nobis  tuta,  &c.  .  .  .  patebunt.'  Sail.  58,  9.  (G.)  (On  the  sul>j.  prts.  after  si 
nee  435  (b) ). 


J  53.  417-419.]  XEMARKS  ON  some  of  the  tenses.       141 


(5)  (Eng.)  As  soon  as  they  hear  of  me,  they  shall  obey  me  (2 
xxii.  45). 
(Lat.)   As  soon  as  they  shall  hear  of  me,  they  shall  obey  me  : 
(or)  As  soon  as  they  shall  fuxve  heardy  &c 

417.  (d)  '  Should,'  l would'  ' could,'  &c,  when  used  to  softer 
an  assertion  by  throwing  into  it  an  expression  of  doubtfulness,  are 
generally  to  be  translated  by  putting  the  verb  in  the  present  of 
per/,  of  the  subjunctive. 

a.  In  this  idiom  the  perfect  does  not  appear  to  bear  any  reference  to  the 
completion  of  the  action.     (See  428,  note  *.) 

b.  (e)  Vglim,  nolim,  malim,  are  often  used  in  this  manner,  and  often  in 
connection  with  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  governed  by  (ut'  omitted. 

418.  (/)  After  ut  a  consequence  (but  not  a  purpose)  is  often 
put  in  the  per/,  subj.,  instead  of  the  imperf.,  after  a  past  tense. 

a.  This  occurs  very  frequently  in  Cornelius  Nepos.  The  use  of  the 
perf.  gives  more  prominence  and  independence  to  the  consequence.     (K.) 

b.  The  imp.  subj.  marks  (1)  something  past,  (2)  something  contem- 
porary with  another  in  past  time,  (3)  something  contemporary  and 
continuing. 

c.  The  perf.  subj.  is  either  the  subj.  of  the  aorist  ('wrote')  or  of  the 
praeteriium  in  pr&senti  (or  perf.  definite,  '  have  written ').     (K.) 

419.  (a)  Jam  pridem  cupio,  7  have  long  desired. 

Vocat  me  alio  jam  dudum  tacita  vestra  exspectatio, 

Your  silent  expectation  has  for  some  time  been 

calling  me  to  another  point. 
Copise,  quas  diu  comparabant,  Forces  which  they  had 

long  been  collecting. 
(b)  Subito  edicunt  Consules,  ut  ad  suum  vestitum  Sena- 

tores  redirent,  The  Consuls  suddenly  published  an 

edict,  that  the  Senators  should  return  to  their  usual 

dress. 
(o)  Quum  Tullius  rure  redierit,  mittam  eum  ad  te,  When 

Tullius  returns  from  the  country,  I  will  send  him 

to  you.     Facito  hoc  ubi  voles,  Bo  this  when  you 

please. 
Si  te  rogavero  aliquid,  nonne  respondebis  ?     If  I  put 

any  question  to  you,  will  you  not  answer  ? 
{d)  Hoc  sine   ulla  dubitatione,  confirmaverim,*  I  would 

assert  this  without  any  hesitation. 

*  The  perf.  subjunctive  used  in  this  manner  to  withhold  a  positive  assertion, 
i:c»irs  in  negative  sentences  oftener  than  in  positive  ones.    (G.) 


1  4ft  REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.  §  53.    420. 

(e)  De  me  sic  velim  judices,  I  would  wish  you  to  judge 

thus  of  me. 
Nolim  factum,  I  could  wish  it  not  to  be  done.     (Not- 
lemv  factum,  I  could  wish  it  had  not  been  done.) 

(f)  Quo  factum  est,  ut  plus,  quam  collegae,  Miltiades 

valuerit,  The  consequence  of  which  was,  that  Mil 
Hades  had  more  influence  than  his  colleagues. 

420.  Vocabulary  58. 

r  dudum,  or  jamdudum  (applied  to  short 
For  some  time,  <      preceding  periods ;  an  hour   or  few 

(     hours ;  less,  generally,  than  a  day). 

r  diu,  or  jamdiuw  (of  an  action  continued 
Long ;  for  a  long  time,  5     suspended,  or  not  occurring,  through 

C     the  whole  period). 

r  pridem  or  jampridem  (referring  to  a  past 
liOng  ago  <     point  of  time;  not,  like  diu,  to  a  past 

(     period  of  time). 

r  cupe"re,x  io  (150),  Iv,  It  (this  is  of  the  tn- 
To  desire,  <      ward  feeling :  optare  is  to  desire  =  to 

(      express  a  wish  for). 

r  avere  (defect,  verb)  this  denotes  a  rest' 
To  long,  <      less  impatient  longing ;  gestire,  a  dc- 

(.      lighted,  joyous  longing. 
Not  above  two  or  three  times,  bis  terve. 

Two  or  three  times ;  several  times,  bis  terque. 
(The  Preposition  Ad.) 
(1)   To,  (2)  at;  (3)  up  to,  until;  to  the  amount  of;  (4)  for,  Ac. 
To  a  man,  ad  unum. 

*  When  a  conceived  case  is  to  be  expressed  with  the  intimation  that  the  fad 
corresponds  to  it,  or  -may  so  correspond,  the  pres.  an  J  perf  of  the  subj.  are  used : 
but  when  it  is  to  be  intimated  that  the  fact  does  net,  or  cannot  correspond  to  it, 
the  imperf.  or  pluperf.  subj.  must  be  used.    (Z.) 

w  But  pridem  and  diu  are  often  interchanged,  though  only  in  constructions 
where  the  notions  of  duratum  or  of  a  distant  point  of  beginning  (respectively) 
may  easily  be  implied,  though  the  exact  word  would  require  duration  rather 
than  a  point,  or  a  point  rather  than  duration.  In  'jampridem  cupio,'  &c,  the 
notion  of  continuance  is  plainly  implied :  in  the  corresponding  English  construc- 
tion we  have  it  expressed.  Dudum  =  diu-dum  (where  dum  restricts  the  mean 
ing  as  in  vixe?um,  nondum)  :  pridem  =  vplv  6n  (Hartung)  or  vplv  cfjv.     (D.) 

*  Velle,  cupere,  denote  the  imcard  feeling;  optare,  expetere,  expression  o\ 
that  feeling.  Velle  and  optare  denote,  respectively,  the  calm  feeling  and  itfl 
expression ,  cupere  and  expetere  the  eager,  excited  feeling  and  its  expression. 
Avere  expresses  a  restless,  impatient  longing;  gestire  a  delighted  an/icipn 
tion.    CD.) 


f  54.  421,  422.]     remarks  on  some  of  the  tenses.  149 

To  extreme  old  age,  ad  summam  senectutem. 

He  is  nothing  to,  =  compared  to,  )  ftd  eum  ^  ^ 

him,  ) 

For  a  time,  ad  terapus  (also,  'at  the  proper  i.uc'\ 

As  many  as  two  hundred,  ad  ducentos. 

Word  for  word,  ad  verbum. 

At  most,  ad  summum,  or  summiim  only. 

At  least,  ad  minimum ;  minimum. 

At  last,  ad  extremum. 

(a)   (Eng.)  They  do  nothing  but  laugh. 

(Lai.)    They  nothing  else  than  laugh   (nihil  aliud  911am    identi 
faciunt  omitted). 

Exercise  62. 

[By  what  verb  should  to  takt  away  a  bad  thing  be  translated  7] 
421.  I  have  for  some  time  been  desiring  to  take  away  from  yon 
that  care  of  yours.  I  have  long  desired  to  call  upon  Caius. 
p  After  his  soldiers  had  been  slain  to  a  man,  he  himself  returned 
to  Rome,  p  Having  taken  Marseilles  by  storm,77  he  returned 
home.  I  am  longing  p  to  take  Marseilles,  and  obtain  a  triumph 
for  a  victory  over  the  Gau7s.  He  was  whipped  with  rods  several 
times.  He  was  whipped  with  rods  two'  or  three'  times'  at  most. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  Caius  is  nothing  (compared)  to  Balbus. 
Time  is  wanting  p  for  finishing  that  business  (of  yours).  I  would 
wish  you  to  pardon  me.  Caius  to  extreme  old  age  learned  some- 
thing additional  *  every  day.  At  last  all  held  their  tongues.  I 
am  longing  to  return  thanks  to  Caius.  It  cannot  be  denied  that 
death  is  a  rest  from  labours.54  Do  we  not  give  boys  sentences  to 
learn  by  heart  ?7*  He  gives  boys  the  longest  sentences  he  can93 
to  be  learned  by  heart,  word  for  word.  They  do  nothing  but  cry 
out,  that  it  is  all  over  with  Caesar's  army.  His  industry  was 
such,*0*  that  (418)  he  learned  something  additional  every  day. 


§  54.     Remarks  on  some  of  the  Tenses  continued. 

422.  (a)  The  perfect  subjunctive  (as  well  as  the  present)  is 
used  as  an  imperative. 


y  Addiscebat  allquid. 


150  REMARKS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES.       [§  54.    423-49". 

423.  (b)  The  future  is  sometimes  used,  as  in  English,  for  the 
imperative  ;  in  other  words,  we  sometimes  express  a  wish  that  a 
person  should  act  in  a  particular  way,  in  the  form  of  an  assertion 
that  he  will  so  act. 

424.  (c)  Questions  that  do  not  ask  for  information,  but  for 
assent,  are  to  be  translated  into  Latin  by  the  present  or  imperfect 
Df  the  subjunctive,  according  as  a  present  or  past  time  is  refer- 
red to. 

The  object  of  such  questions  is,  to  exd te  the  same  emotion  or  produce 
the  same  conviction  in  the  minds  of  the  persons  addressed,  that  the 
speaker  himself  feels  or  pretends  to  feel.  If  they  are  negative  in  form, 
the  answer  or  expression  of  assent  will  be  affirmative ;  and  conversely 
if  not. 

425.  These  'questions  of  appeal '  (which  usually  express  perplexity  oi 
some  emotion)  may  be  asked  by  auxiliary  verbs  in  English  in  various 
ways :  the  thing  to  be  considered  is,  '  does  the  question  require  an  an- 
swer for  information,  or  mere  assent  (or  sympathy)  V 

a  [Forms  of  'questions  of  appeal'  in  English.]  (1)  With  Phes.  Subj. 
What  shall  I  do?  (when  asked  in  perplexity,  implying  that  nothing 
satisfactory  can  well  be  done.)  What  am  I  to  do?  What  can  I  do? 
Why  should  I  relate  this?  (Ans.  You  need  not.)  (2)  With  Imperp. 
Subj.  What  was  I  to  do?  What  should  I  have  done  ?  What  ought  1 
to  have  done  ? 

426.  (1)  (Eng.)  He  taught  the  children  of  the  principal  men. 

(Lat.)  Principum  liberos  erudiebat.    (Imperf.  expresses  a  state  con- 
tinued or  an  action  often  repeated  in  a  past  space  of  time.) 

(2)  (Eng.)  You  would  have  thought.    You  would  have  believed. 
(Lat.)    Putares.  Crederes. 

(3)  (Eng.)  I  remember  reading  that  (or,  to  have  read  that). 
(Lat.)  I  remember  to  read  that  (legere1  memini). 

(4)  (Eng.)  It  would  be  tedious,  endless,  &c. 

(Lat.)  It  is  tedious,  endless,  &c.  (longum,  infinitum  esf). 

(5)  (Eng.)  It  would  have  been  betier. 

(Lat.)  It  was  better  (utilius/u#a).    So  satius,  par,  idoneum,  &c.Jutt. 

427.  (a)  Quod  dubitas,  ne  feceris,    What   you  have   doubti 

about,  don't  do. 
(&)   Si  quid  accident  novi,  fades  ut  sciam,  If  any  thing 
nexo  happens,  you  will  let  me  know  (=  let  mc 
know). 


»  But  the  inf.  perf.  follows  memini,  &c,  when  the  speaker  does  not  carry  him- 
«blf  back,  as  it  were,  having  himself  seen,  heard,  &c  what  he  describes. 

*  Erat  or  fuerat  must  be  used,  if  the  time  requires  those  tenses  :  and  the  infin 
pnn.  follows  these  expressions.  (See  130.) 


§  54.  428,  429.]     remarks  on  some  of  the  tenses.  151 

(c)  Quid  faciam  ?      What  am  I  to  do  ?     What  can  I  (or 

sliall  I)  do? 
Quis  neget,  &c.  ?     Who  can  deny  .  .  .? 
Quid  facerem  1      What  was  I  to  do  ?     What  ought  1 

to  have  done  ?     What  should  I  have  done  ? 

428.  Vocabulary  59. 

A  banquet;  an  entertainment,  convIvium,b  i,  n. 

If  I  may  say  so  without  offence,  pace  tua  dixerim. 

Under  favour,  bona  taa  venia. 

A  favour ;  pardon,  venia,  ffi,  /. 

t,         ,       .      fc        *  .x    {  veniam  d5rec  (also  'to  grant  a  permb- 

To  pardon  (spoken  of  a  superior),  {        .      *  v  b  r 

C      sion'). 

To  ask  pardon  for  a  fault,  delicti*  veniam  pftfre ;  petlv,  petit. 

Look  to  that  yourself,  id  ipse  vidFris ;  or  tu  videris. 

Let  Fortune  look  to,  or  see  to,  it,    fortuna  viderit. 

I  can  scarcely  believe,  vix  crediderim.* 

(The  Preposition  Advehsum  or  Adversus.) 

Adversus,  or  adversum,  corresponds  almost  exactly  with  our  against 

in  all  its  uses;  but  has  besides  the  meanings  over-agalnst  (  =  opposite) 

and  towards. 

Exercise  63. 
[Translate,  '7  am  ■pardoned.^ 

429.  Who  can  deny  that  a  banquet  is  preparing  ?e  There  ia 
no  one  but  wishes  that  a  banquet  should8)  be  prepared.  You 
would  liave  thought  that  a  banquet  was  prepared.     What  was  I 


b  Epukc,  arum  is  the  most  general  notion,  a  meal,  whether  frugal  or  sump- 
tuous, with  only  the  members  of  the  family  or  with  guests,  public  or  private  ; 
amrivium  is  a  meal  with  guests,  a  dinner-parcy :  dlipes  a  religious  banquet,  a 
banquet  after  a  sacrifice ;  epulUm  a  banquet  in  honour  of  some  person,  or  on 
uome  festive  occasion ;  comissatio  a  riotous  party,  a  drinking  bout.     (D.) 

c  The  ignoscens  pardons  from  his  heart,  forgives  and  forgets ;  the  veniam  dans 
passes  over  as  a  favour  what  he  might  justly  resent  or  punish.  The  friend  or 
equal  ignoscit;  the  superior  or  more  powerful  person  veniam  dat.    (D.) 

d  Dbderlein  thinks  that  delictum  is  not  a  sin  of  omission  as  is  generally  thought, 
but  that  it  has  the  same  extent  of  meaning  as  peccatum :  both  expressing  sins 
against  prudence  as  well  as  those  against  morality;  errors  as  well  as  sins. 

*  Vix  crediderim  =  vix  credam  ss  vix  credo.  But  this  perf.  subj.  does  not 
always  stand  for  the  present  indie,  but  sometimes  for  the  perf.  '  Turn  vero  ego 
necquidquam  Capitolium  servaverim'  ^zservavi.     (K.) 

•  In  English  we  have  no  present  or  imperf.  passive,  except  in  a  few  verbs  that 
form  these  tenses  with  what  is  inform  the  present  participle  of  the  active  voice, 
Vat  is  probably  the  participial  substantive,  which  used  to  be  governed  by  th« 


152  CONLxHONAL    PROPOSITIONS.       [§  55.  430,  43l 

to  do  ? — the  banquet  had  been  long  preparing.  The  latter  says 
that  a  banquet  is  preparing  :  the  former  denies  (it).  He  taught  the 
boys  to  play  on  the  lyre.  Do  not  prepare  a  banquet.  It  would  be  tedi- 
ous (426)  to  relate  all  the  evils  that  have  happened  to  us  by  our 
own  fault.  Under  favour  I  would  say,  my  brother,  that  opinion 
of  yours  isf  very  often'  (p.  13,  6.)  prejudicial.  Are  they  too  to 
be  pardoned  ?  It  cannot  be  denied  that  they  have  several  times 
asked  pardon  for  their  fault.  Let  fortune  see  to  this,  since  we 
may  not  use  reason  and  counsel.  I  remember  their  charging 
Caius  with  immorality.  They  published  an  edict  that  no  oneu 
should  be  capitally  condemned  without  being  heard.  Justice  is 
piety  towards  the  gods.  Would  it  not  have  been  better,  not  to 
have  concealed  those  things  from  your  father  ?  They  do  nothing 
but  mock  the  poor  (420,  a).  There  are  some  who  perceive  the 
very  least  things. 


XXI. 

§  55.     On  the  principal  kinds  of  Conditional  Propositions. 

430.  In  conditional  (or  hypothetical)  propositions,  the  clause  with  '  if  is  the 
condition  or  conditioned  clause:  ihe  other,  the  consequence  or  consequent 
clause. 

431.  Sometimes  the  consequence  is  expressed  in  the  indicative  mood,  no 
doubt  being  intimated  as  to  the  existence  or  non-existence  of  the  condi- 
tion. 

(If  this  is  A,  that  is  B.) 
Here  we  have  '  possibility,  or  simple  supposition,  without  any  expres- 
sion of  uncertainty.* 


preposition  '  on '  or  '  an '  shortened  into  '  a.'    Thus  '  the  ark  was  a  preparing 
{i  Pet.  iii.  20).     '  Forty  and  six  years  was  this  temple  in  building '  (John  ii.  20). 

There  is  no  trusting  the  mere  look  of  a  form,  as  the  following  table  will  show  :— 

(1)  He    .    .    .  is  coming    .    .    .    (pres  act.) 

(2)  The  house  .  is  building  .    .    .    (pres,  pass.) 

(3)  This  .    .    .  is  asking  (too  much)  ('is,'  with  the  participial  substantive.  ] 

(1)  He    .         .is come    ....     ;perf.  act.) 

(2)  The  house  .  is  built    ....    (perf.  pass ) 

(3)  He    .    .    .  is  loved  (by  all)     .     (pres.  pass.) 

f  Indie. :  pace  tua  dixerim,  &c,  being  only  parenthetical  insertions. 


b  55.  432-435. J      conditional  propositions.  153 

432.  Sometimes,  however,  though  the  consequence  is  expressed  in  the  in- 
dicative, uncertainty  is  expressed  as  to  the  existence  or  not  of  the 
condition :  it  being  implied  however  that  this  uncertainty  will  probably 
be  removed. 

('If  I  have  any  thing,  /  will  give  it  you ;'  and  I  will  see  whether  1 
have  or  not.) 
Here  we  have  uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision. 

433.  Sometimes  the  consequence  is  itself  expressed  in  a  conditional  form : 
and  then  the  condition  is  merely  contemplated  as  a  conceivable  case,  bvt 
no  hint  is  given  as  to  its  being  likely  actually  to  occur  or  not. 

(If  you  were  to  do  this,  you  would  greatly  oblige  me.) 
Here  we  have  (according  to  Hermann  and  Bullmari)  '  uncertainty 
without  any  such  accessary  notion  as  the  prospect  of  decision.' 

434.  Lastly,  the  consequence  may  express  what  wouldbe  doing,  or  would 
have  been  done,  if  a  condition  that  is  actually  unrealized,  had  been  rea'- 
ized  just  now,  or  at  some  past  time. 

If  I  had  it,  I  would  now  give  it  to  you  (but  I  have  not) 
IS  I  had  had  it,  I  would  have  given  it  you. 


(Forms  of  Conditional  Propositions.) 

155.  (a)  Si  quid  habet,  dat,z  If  he  has  any  thing,  he  gives  it. 

(b)  Si  quid  habeam,  dabo,  If  I  have  any  thing,  I  will 

give  it. 

(c)  Si  quid  haberet,  daret,h  If  he  should  have  any  thing, 

he  would  give  it. 

,  .    _.       ....  -  T  (Ifhe  had  any  thing, 

(1)  Si  quid  haberet,  daret,        I      ,  , ,    . 
v  '        n                               '        {      he  would  give  it. 

f  If  he  had  had  any 

(2)  Si  quid  habuisset,  dedisset,  J      thing,    he    would 


w 


have  given  it. 


8  The  consequence  may  also  be  in  the  imperative  or  in  the  future.  (Seo 
437,  i.) 

h  On  this,  see  445.  It  is,  to  say  the  least,  very  uncommon  to  find  a  proposi- 
tion of  this  form,  from  which  the  notion  of  the  possible  realization  of  the  con- 
iitian  is  not  excluded.  (See  ZumpVs  opinion,  419,  v.)  Kiihner  says,  'si  hoc 
Ocas'1  ZZ  cap  rovro  \iyrn  and  d  rovro  Xiyots  :  sometimes,  however,  the  last  rela- 
tion is  expressed  as  in  Greek,  'si  hoc  diceretur,  vere  diceretur.1  (Vol.  ii.  p.  546.) 
The  same  form  of  proposition  is  used  in  a  different  way,  when  the  imp.  subj. 
(  =  the  Greek  opiat.)  is  used  to  express  something  frequently  occurring  in  past 
time. 

'  Ca;sar— Si  peteret  per  amicitiam  patris  atque  suam,  non 

Q,uidquam  prqficeret.'—Uor.  Sat.  i.  3.  4.     (See  Hcindorfvi  loc.) 


7* 


If>4  CONDITIONAL    PROPOSITIONS.       [§55.430-441, 

436.  Here  we  see  that  the  forms  (c)  and  (d)  (1)  coincide.  The  form  (c) 
means,  '  if  at  any  time  he  were  to  have  any  thing,  he  would  give  it :' 
but  such  a  sentence,  though  not  necessarily  intimating  the  impossibility 
of  this  case  occurring,  of  course,  does  imply  that  it  has  not  occurred. 
It  thus  runs  very  near  to  the  meaning  of  (d)  (1),  wnich,  besides  imply- 
ing that  it  has  not,  implies  that  it  will  not  occur. 

These  two  cases  are  not  distinguished  in  Latin :  the  context,  or  our 
previous  knowledge,  must  determine  whether  the  case  is  contemplate* 
&s  possible,  or  not. 

437.  (a)  Possibility,  or  simple  supposition,  without  any  expres- 

sion of  uncertainty  :  the  indicative  in  both  clauses. 

(b)  Uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision  :  (  si'  with 

the  subjunctive  present  (or  perfect)  ;  the  indicative, 
commonly  the  future,'  in  the  consequence. 

(c)  Uncertainty  without  any  such  accessary  notion  as  the 

prospect  of  decision :  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
clauses. 

(d)  Impossibility,  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so  :  the 

subjunctive  in  both  clauses,  the  imperfect  for  present 
time,  and  a  continuing  consequence  ;  the  pluperfect 
for  past  time. 

438.  But  the  consequence  may  refer  to  present,  the  condition  to 
\>ast  time  ;  or  vice  versa. 

1  If  I  had  received  a  letter  (accepissem),  I  would  now  read  it  (recitarem). 
'If  I  at  this  time  wanted  any  thing  (opus  csset),  I  would  fiave  come 
(venissem)  myself.' 

439.  Since,  '  /  would  give  it  you  (now),  if  I  had  it  (now)'  comes  to  the 
same  thing  as  '  I  would  have  given  it  to  you,  if  I  had  had  any,'  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  in  Latin  may  often  be  translated  by  the  forms  '  would 
have '  {could  or  should  Iiave),  when  it  is  implied  that  the  condition  will 
not  be  realized. 

440.  (d)  When  the  form  *  would  have '  is  in  the  consequence, 
the  pluperfect  in  the  condition  must  be  in  the  subjunctive  in 
Latin. 

441.  With  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect,  'si'  always  governs 
the  subjunctive. 


i  The  imperative  may  stand  in  the  consequence.  Of  course  the  perf.  or  fu- 
ture, both  the  simple  and  the  periphrastic  future,  may  stand  in  either  clause,  oi 
both :  si  illud  mihi  beneficium  tribuetur  (or  tributum  erit  or fuerit),  magnopere 
yaudebo.    In  the  second  class,  tributum  sit,  or  fuerit,  iromfuerim. 


$  fi5.  442-444.]      conditional  propositions.  155 

442.  fj*  Since  we  use  the  indicative  conditionally,  care  must  be  taken  to 

translate  this  by  the  subjunctive  (435,  6.)  when  'should*  might  be  U6edj 
when,  that  is,  there  is  '  uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision.1 

443.  Vocabulary  60. 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  ura.k 

Much  less,  $  nedumi  (generally  after  a  negative;  if  a 

C      verb  follows  it  must  be  in  the  subjunc). 

Not  to  say  \  ne  dIcam  (of  wnat  might  probably  6c 

(     said  with  truth). 
I  do  not  say,  non  dlco. 

1  will  not  say,  non  dlcafn. 

All,  omnes  {all  together,  cuncti,  universi)." 

Cautious,  cautus,  a,  um. 

All  taken  one  by  one;  each  of  J8,  ■     ,- 

them  singly,  ) 

For  instance,  verbi  causa. 

To  rise,  orior,  oriri,  ortus. 

The  Dog-star,  Canlcula,  ae,  /. 

(Eng.)  No  painter.  (Lat.)  Nemo  pictor. 

(Eng.)  This  does  not  at  all  terrify  me.  (Lat.)  This  terrifies  me  nothing. 

Exercise  64. 
[Obs.  '  If  he  were  to '  &c.  as  ( if  he  should '  &c.J 

444.  If  a  happy  life  can  be  lost',  it  cannot  be  happy'.  He  who 
does  not  defend  a  friend,  if  he  can,  sins7.  If  all  things  are  brought 
about"  by  fate,  nothing  can  admonish  us  to  he  more  cautious. 
Peleus,   if  he  were  to   hear   it,  would  lift  up  his  hands.     Pe- 


k  Faustus  and  prosper  are  said  of  things  only,  not  of  persons.  '  That  which 
is  prosjicrum  merely  satisfies  the  hopes  and  wishes  of  men,  like  'wished  for,' 
•  desired  :'  the  faustum  refers  more  to  the  graciousness  of  the  gods :  the  fortuna- 
tus  is  a  lucky  person :  the  beatus  feels  himself  happy  (as  he  is)  and  is  contented.' 
(D.)  Felix  expresses  both  that  which  is,  and  that  which  makes  happy  {beatus, 
only  what  is  'happy') :  and  relates  principally  'to  the  obtaining,  possessing,  or 
enjoying  external  goods,  and  supposes  a  man's  own  co-operation.'  Th.'s  latter 
circumstance  distinguishes  it  from  fortunatus,  which  also  relates  more  to  par- 
ticular events. 

i  Nedum  is  sometimes  followed  by  ut:  'nedum  ut  ulla  vis  fieret.* 
(Liv.  iii.  14.) 

m  Cuncti  (opposed  to  dispersi)  'all  actually  united;'  universi  (opposed  to  sin- 
guli  or  unusquisque)  'all  taken  together.'  As  meaning  'all,'  '  the  whole,'  in  the 
sing.,  totus  represents  the  thing  as  originally  '  a  whole :'  omnis,  cunctus,  uni- 
versus,  all  represent  it  as  originally  made  up  of  certain  parts,  of  which  theag£rt> 
gate  is  taken.     (D.) 

»  Fiunt- 


156  CONDITIONAL    PROPOSITIONS.  ^§56.    445 

leus,  if  he  heard  it  {but  he  has  not),  would  lift  up  his  hands. 
If  any  one  were  to  do  this  he  would  lay  the  king  under  a  grea\ 
obligation.  Even  Caesar  could  not  have  done  this ;  much  less 
can  you  (443,  note  1).  The  boy  should  be  admonished,  that  he 
may  show  himself  the  more  cautious  (63,  b).  All  the  wisest 
men*2  are  aware  that  the  interest  of  each  and  of  all  is  the  same'. 
I  can  scarcely  think  him  equal  to  alt,  of  them  taken  one  by  one, 
much  less  to  all  of  them  together.  If  you  are  equal  to  them  all. 
together,  you  will  easily  conquer  them  all-taken -one-by-one.  II 
Fabius,  for  instance,  was  born  p  at  the  rising  of  the  dog-star,  he 
will  not  die  in  the  sea.  He  is  not  equal0  to  them  all  taken  one  by 
one,  not  to  say  to  them  all  together.  He  is  equal  to  them  all 
taken  one  by  one,  I  do  not  say  to  them  all  together.  No  painter 
would  say  this  {perf.  subj.).  Know  that  I  do  not  fear  these 
things  at  all.  There  were  some109  who  did  not  fear  these  things 
at  all. 


§  56.     Conditional  Propositions  continued. 

445.  (a)  Such  conditional  sentences  as  would  in  English  have 
were  to — ,  should,  or  would,  in  both  clauses,  often  take  the  verbs 
of  loth  clauses  in  the  subjunctive  present. 

a.  The  conditional  clause  is  here  a  contemplated  possibility  (resem- 
bling, in  this,  the  third  class ;  si  Jiaberet,  daret) ;  but  the  thing  contem- 
plated is  contemplated  as  occurring  now,  and  therefore  often  agrees 
with  the  second  class  (si  habeam  dabo),  in  implying  a  prospect  of 
decision. 

Hence  if  a  contemplated  case  is  contemplated  as  occurring  now,  the 
present  subjunctive  should  be  preferred  to  the  imperfect:  and  when  the 
possibility  of  its  occurring  now  is  to  be  strongly  intimated,  the  presenl 
is  the  only  proper  form. 

(1)  Tu  si  hie  sis,  aliter  sentias. 

If  you  were  here,  you  would  think  differently. 

(2)  Tu  si  hie  esses,  aliter  sentires. 

If  you  were  here  (which  you  neither  are  nor  will  be),  you  would  think 

differently: 

(or)  If  you  had  been  here,  you  would  have  thought  differently. 

/?.  From  the  ambiguity  of  the  form  'si  quid  haberet,  daret,'  the  subj. 

pres.  should  probably  be  preferred,  when  it  is  not  intended  to  intimate 

that  the  condition  is  improbable  or  impossible.    The  pres.  subj.  may  be 

0  Impar  est. 


S  5G.  44G-450.1      conditional  propositions.  157 

used  of  suppositions  really  impossible,  if  it  is  not  the  speaker's  object 
to  intimate  this :  '  Si  exsistat  hodie  ab  inferis  Lycurgus  gaudeat,'  &c. 
(Liv.  39,  37.) 

446.  The  three  conditional  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  are  sen- 
herein,  scripsissem,  and  scripturus  essem. 

447.  '  Scripsissem  \  and  l  scripturus  essem  ■  are  both  used  to 
express  our  *  would  have  written.'  But  *  scripsissem '  intimates 
tliat  the  thing  would  certainly  have  happened  :  scripturus  essem, 
that  it  would  probably  have  happened,  because  it  was  so  intended 
or  arranged 

(b)  Thus,  *  he  would  have  slept  (  =  he  intended  10  have  slept, 
and  therefore  we  may  suppose  would  have  slept)  there,  if  he  had 
gone  on,'  should  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  rus  with  csset.v 

But  the  indicative  (erat,  fuit)  is  more  common,  when  the  inten- 
tion is  to  be  positively  expressed. 

448.  (c)  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  indicative  are  often 
used  instead  of  the  same  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  in  the  conse- 
quent clause.  (It  is  then  better  to  let  the  consequent  precede  the 
conditional  clause.) 

449.  (d)  The  particle  si  is  occasionally  omitted  ;  the  verb  of  the  conditional 

clause  should  then  begin  the  sentence. 

450    (a)  In  quo  si  tantum  eum  prudentem  dicam,  minus  quam 

debeam  pradlcem,  In  which  if  I  were  only  to  call 

him  prudent,  I  should  commend  him  less  highly  than 

I  ought, 
(u)  Conclave,  ubi  erat  mansurus,  si  ire  perrexissct,   The 

chamber  in  which  he  would  have  lodged,  if  he  had 

continued  his  journey. 
(c)  Perieram,  nisi  tu  accurrisses,*  I  had  perished  (  = 

should  have   perished)  if  you  had  not  run  to  my 

assistance. 
{d)  Dedisses  huic  animo  par  corpus,  fecisset  quod  opta- 

— 

»  Sd  also  in  the  third  class  '  si  quid  haberet  daturas  esset'  is  correct,  whert 
daturas  esset  =  'he  would  be  prepared  to  give?  (Kriiger:  who  quotes  Tac.  H. 
il.  77,  'cujus  filium  adoptaturus  essem,  si  ipse  imperareTn?} 

«  A  conditional  clause  often  refers  to  a  consequence  implied :  'Pons  Subliciue 
iter  pant  hostibus  dedit,  ni  unus  vir fuissct'  =  (et  dediaoet)  ni  unue  vii  fuioseL 


158 


CONDITIONAL    PROPOSITIONS. 


[§50.  45l. 


bat;  Had  you  given  this  mind  a  lody  like  itself,  he 
would  have  done  what  he  desired. 
451.  Vocabulary  61. 

sin,  sin  autem. 
sin  minus.r 
nisi.8 

'  etsi :  etiamsit— followed  &y  tamen,  yet, 
(sometimes  tamen  precedes  etsi,  when 
the  unexpected  nature  of  the  event  to 
be  described  is  to  be  made  more  prom- 
inent ;  for  tamen  etsi,  tametsi  is  found, 
and  the  tamen  is  sometimes  repeated 
in    the  nrincipal  clause. — Although 
may  also  be  translated  by  quamquam* 
1 1     quamvis  and  licet.) 
r  quamquam    (suggested    by  a    former 
<      statement :  it  Has  no  influence  on  the 
(■      mood), 
nisi  forte ;  nisi  vero. 
C  potestas,  atis,  f.  (of  might  with  right, 
J      and  therefore  the  proper  word    for 
;      conceded  power) ;  potentia,   tc,f.  (of 
[     actual  inherent  power), 
res  ita  se  habet. 
potestatem  sui  facSre. 
in  nostra  esse  potestate. 


But  if;  if  however, 
But  if  not, 
Unless ;  if  not, 


Although;  though 


Although  indeed, 
Unless  indeed, 

Power, 

The  thing  is  so, 

To  put  himself  in  their  power, 

To  be  in  our  own  power, 


*  Or,  sin  secus,  sin  aliter. 

8 '  Your  memory  will  be  weakened  nisi  earn  exerceas '  implies  that  if  you  ex- 
vcise  it,  it  will  not  be  lessened.  But  from  si  non  you  might  not  infer  this,  but 
-»nly  draw  the  strict  conclusion  that  if  you  do  not  exercise  it,  it  will  be  lessened. 
The  si,  in  si  non,  is  the  conj  unction,  ths  non  belongs  to  the  verb  or  other  word 
in  the  proposition. 

t  The  compounds  of  'si'  follow  the  same  rule  as  si:  With  the  pres.,  per/.,  and 
jut.  they  take  the  indicative  unless  the  thing  is  to  be  asserted  contingently  and 
doubtfully ;  with  the  imperf.  and  pluperf.  they  generally  take  the  subj. ,  though 
here  too  the  indicative  comes  in,  when  they  introduce,  not  a  supposition,  but  a 
fact.  'Tametsi  a  duce  deserebantur,'  (Caes.)  '&£,' like  our  '  iff  is  sometimes 
used  for  'whether;'  'Tentata  res  est,  si  primo  impetu  capi  Ardea  posset.' 

*  Quamquam  (quam  'how'  strengthened  by  doubling)  is  '  however  much,'  but 
expresses  '  however  much  a  thing  really  exists,'  or  can,  or  must  exist.  It  there- 
fore takes  the  indie,  when  the  thing  is  not  to  be  represented  as  doubtful.  Quam- 
vis (or  quantumvis)  is  'however  much  a  thing  maybe  conceived  possible,  and 
therefore  takes  the  subj.  Licet  is  no  particle,  but  an  impersonal  verb,  and  may 
occur  in  any  tense.  '  Licet  recte  agas,  tamen,  &c.'  'Act  as  rigid  as  you  please^ 
yet,  <fcc.'  '  Detrahat ....  fortuna  licebit.' — Quamvis  =r '  although  •  (as  in  Nep, 
Ljuamvis  aarebat  nomine ;  with  indie.)  belongs,  generally  speaking,  to  a  later 
age. 


$  56.  452. J  CONDITIONAL    PROPOSITIONS.  151) 

(Eng.)  Even  this  is  not  just  unless  it  is  voluntary. 
(Lat.)    Even  this  is  so  (only)  just,  if  it  is  voluntary. 

(Ita  justum  est  ....  si  est  voluntarium  :v  ita  tart  =:  on 
that  condition  or  supposition.) 
[C.  xxxii.] ''But1  (  =z  except,  unless)  after  a  negative  is  nisi,  or  (if  it  stand* 
before  a  substantive)  the  prepos.  prater. 

Exercise  65. 
[How  is  'that'  translated  after  '  it  follows'!  (83)] 
452.  If  you  were  to  ask  me  what  is  the  nature  of  the  gods,  I 
should  perhaps  answer  nothing  (445).  If  the  thing  were  so,  I 
bhould  rejoice  (445).  If  there  be  nothing  in  our  own  power,  let 
us  go  away.  If  they  had  remained,  he  would  have  put  himself 
in  their  power.  We  must  cultivate  eloquence,  though  some  make 
a  perverse  use  of  it.  Nothing  would  be  in  our  own  power,  if  the 
thing  were  so.  The  Stoics  say  that  no  man  is  divine,  but  the  wise 
man.  Who  can  deny  (424)  that  the  most  hidden  snares  are 
always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid  ?  I  love  my  enemy,  more  than 
you  envy  your  friend.  Caius  is  more  brave  than  prudent.w  I 
don't  know  whether23  any  thing  better  than  friendship'  has  been 
given  to  man  by  the  immortal  gods.  Though  these  things  are 
contrary  to  each  other,  we  must  nevertheless  use  them.  Who 
will  deny  (424)  that  these  things  are  of  importance  to  us  ?  Though 
the  thing  were  so,  yet  this  could  not  be  said  without  impiety.  1 
almost  think  that  these  things  are  not  in  our  own  power.  If  this 
dc  true,  I  shall  rejoice  :  but  if  not,  I  must  bear  it  with  resignation. 
This  itself  is  not  just  unless  it  is  voluntary. 


T  So,  « Patres  decreverunt  ut,  quum  populusregem  jussisset,  id  sic  ratum  easel 
m  Patres  auctores  fierent.    (Lav.  i.  17.) 

*Grotefend  distinguishes  between  three  forms  of  comparison,  thus:— 
Caius  fortior  est,  quam  prudentior  =  Caius  is,  indeed,  both  brave  and  pru- 
dent ;  but  yet  more  brave  than  -prudent. 
Caius  magis  fortis  est,  quam  prudens  =  Caius  is  just  as  brave,  as  he  u  not 
prudent. 

»  Caius  fortis  est,  quam  prudens  ■=  Caius  is  brave,  but  not  at  all  prudent  (where 
potiua  may  oe  supplied).  The  last  twe  forms  belong  to  late  wriu>ru 
especially  Tacit  as. 


100  CONDITIONAL    PROPOSITIONS.  [§  57.   4M 

§  57.     Conditional  Propositions  in  dependent  sentences. 

453.  (a)  Possibility  without,  any  expression  of  uncertainty. 
(Caius,  si  quid  habet,  dat.) 

Dicebant  Caium,  si  quid  liaberet  (or,  si  quid  habeat) 
dare. 

(b)  Uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision. 
(Si  quid  habeam,  dabo.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  habeat  (or  haberet),  se  daturum.* 

(c)  Uncertainty  without  any  such  accessary  notion. 
(Si  quid  haberet,  daret.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  haberet,  se  daturum  esse. 

(Or  daturum  fore,  if  the  independent  proposition  would  be  daturus 
esaem.    See  447.) 

(d)  Impossibility,  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so 

(1)  (Si  quid  haberet,  daret.) 

This  form  in  a  dependent  sentence  coincides  with  form  (c). 

(2)  (Si  quid  habuisset,  dedisset.) 

Dicebat,  si  quid  habuisset,  se  daturum  fuisse. 

(3)  When  the  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  is  in  the 

pluperf.,  that  of  the  consequent  clause  is  in  the  im 

perfect. 
(Si  quid  accepisset,  daret.) 
Dicebat,  si  quid  accepisset,  se  daturum  esse.* 

(4)  The  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  in  the  imperf,  that 

of  the  consequent  clause  in  the  pluperfect. 
(Si  quid  opus  esset,  venisset.) 
Dicebat  se,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum  fuisse. 
Dicebat  so,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum. 
(of)  Dicebat  se,  si  quid  habeat,  daturum. 

*Obs.  The  conditional  forms  of  the  infinitive  are  scripturum  esse  (prcs.)% 
scripturum  fuisse  (perf) ;  scripturum  fore  (fut.).  Of  these  scripturum  esse  is 
ftlso  a  mere  future  infinitive ;  the  two  others  are  only  conditional  forms. 

y  Obs.  The  form  daturum  esse  cannot  be  used  to  express  'impossibility  or 
belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so,'  unless  the  verb  of  the  conditional  clause  is  of  the 
pluperf.  subj.  '  Dicebat  si  patris  literas  accepisset,  se  eas  cum  fratre  communi- 
caturum  esse.'  The  form  '  si  literas  acciperct  se  communicaturum  esse,'  would 
aot  imply  this,  but  only  express  the  receiving  of  a  letter  as  a  contemplated  case 
'belonging  to  class  (c) ). 


§  57.  454-457.]      conditional  propositions.  101 

454.  Hence,  when  we  have  to  make  these  sentences  dependent, 
wo  must  put 

for  d at,       dabit,  daret,  dedisset: 

dare,     daturum  esse,     daturum  esse,     daturum  fuisse : 
*br  daturus  esset, 
daturum  fore. 

455.  We  also  see  that  the  first  two  classes  (when  the  verb  is 

is  the  future)  are  no  longer  distinguished. 

Si  quid  habet,  dabit.    ) 
Si  quid  habeat,  dabit.  S 

*  Dicebat  se,  si  quid  haberet,  daturum  ;'  or,  *  si  quid 
habeat  :'*  for  where  the  perfect  subjunctive  would  regu- 
larly be  expected  after  a  jmst  tense  like  dicebat,  the 

present  is  often  found  with  apparently  no  difference 
of  meaning  ;  but  not  the  imperfect  for  the  present 
Kruger.) 

456.  Vocabulary  62. 

To  remain,  remancre,  mans,  mans. 

To  confer  benefits  upon,  conferre,  contttl,  collat  (in,  with  ace.) 

To  be  intimate  with,  familiariter  uti ;  usus. 

To  draw  up  an  army,  instruCre  aciem ;  instrux,  instruct 

To  draw  up  his  army  in  three  lines,  tripllcem  aciem  instrugre. 

To  engage,  confilgCre,  fiix,  fiict. 

Either — or,  auta — aut ;  vel — vel ;  eive — sive. 

Or,  aut ;  vel ;  or  Vie  enclitic  ve. 

457.  £jf  ( At,*  when  the  thing  was  done  not  in  but  near,  should  be  translated 
by  apud,  or  ad  with  ace. 

(The  battle  apud  Salamina.     ■  Apud'  is  found  in  later  writers  even  for  Hn.') 


•  Grotefend  observes,  that  Ccesar  generally  retains  the  subj.  prcs.  or  perf. 
(after  a  past  tense)  when  those  tenses  would  stand  in  direct  narration :  but  that 
Cic.  and  Liv.  generally  turn  them  into  the  imperf.  or  pluperf.    (See  418.) 

a  '  Aut '  expresses  a  difference  in  the  things  /  '  vel '  a  difference  in  the  expreo- 
vion.  (Z.)  Vol  is  the  imperative  from  telle,  as  fer  from  ferre:  its  proper 
meaning  therefore  is,  Hf  you  please:1  so  that  'A  vel  B'  was  originally  'A  »r, 
'f you  like,  B ;'  that  is,  'A  or  B:  one  or  the  other,  no  matter  which.'  Hence, 
its  meaning  'eren:'  vel  maximus,  '  the  very  greatest,  if  you  please.'  lAut'  ia 
used  in  the  case  of  opposite  notions,  when  if  one  is,  the  other  is  not.  '  Vel'' 
should  be  used  when  the  notions  are  not  opposite  in  themselves ;  especially  when 
only  some  of  the  possible  suppositions  are  mentioned.  It  very  often  evidently 
retains  its  original  meaning,  of  expressing  indifference  as  to  which  notion  is 
taken ;  and  should  always  be  used  when  such  indifference  is  to  be  expressed. 
Thus  •  The  nobles  can  either  corrupt  or  correct  the  morals  of  a  state,'  vel  cor 


1«2  ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION.  [§  58.  458v  45U 

Exercise  66. 

[How  is  can  deny  to  be  translated  in  a  question  of  appeal?  (425.)  ] 
458.  He  said,  that  if  a  happy  life  could  be  lost,  it  could  not  be 
happy.  He  has  long  appeared  to  me  somewhat  disturbed.87 
Who  can  deny,  that  some  are  borne  one  way,  some  another  ?  He 
answered  that  Peleus,  if  he  had  heard  it,  would  have  lifted  up  his 
hands.  He  answered  that  he  could  have47  no  friendship  with 
these,  if  they  remained  in  Gaul.  It  is  certain,  that  if  any  one 
had  done  this,  he  would  have  laid  the  king  under  a  great  obligation. 
It  is  certain  that,  if  any  one  does  this,  he  will  lay  the  king  under 
a  great  obligation.  If  any  one  does  this,98  he  will  have  deserved 
well  of  the  state.  I  fear  that  nobody  will  be  permitted  to  be  neu- 
tral. I  fear  that  he  has  not  concealed  from  you  the  discourse  of 
T.  Ampius.  (As  to)  what  is  best  to  be  done  (sup.)  do  you7  see 
to  that  (428).  I  will  strive  to  prove  myself  grateful  (memor)  for 
the  benefits,  of  which  you  have  conferred  very  many31  upon  me. 
They  say,  that  the  rule  of  expediency  is  not  the  same  as  that  of 
honour. ll)  Having  drawn  up  his  army  in  three  lines,  he  engaged 
with  Mardonius.  p  He  drew  up  his  army,  and  engaged  with  the 
Gauls  at  Geneva.     There  were  some100  who  lifted  up  their  hands, 


XXII. 

§  58.     On  oblique  narration. 

459.  When  one  person  has  to  report  the  speech  of  another,  he  may  do  this 
in  two  ways.  He  may  either  introduce  him  as  speaking,  and  put  m 
his  mouth  the  exact  words  used ;  or  he  may  only  state  the  substance  of 
what  he  said  under  a  change  of  form. 
(a)  In  the'firsi  way  of  narrating,  the  speaker  uses  the  Jirst person.  "  Cae- 
sar said :  '  /  am  of  opinion    " — and  so  on. 


rompere,  vel  corrigere,  ior  they  can  do  which  they  please.  It  sometimes  =  both 
~-and.  '  He  was  his  equal,  vel  moribus  vel  fortuna.'  Ve  (abridged  from  vel) 
aommonly  unites  single  words,  not  propositions :  it  is  often  appended  to  si,  ne 
(sive  —  seu:  neve  =^neu).  Sive — sive;  seu — seu  =  'either — or,'  'whether — or,' 
When  it  is  to  be  left  doubtful  which  of  two  statements  is  correct,  or  which  oi 
two  terms  is  applicable  (the  second  being  an  alias  of  the  first).  Crombie 
observes  that  sive— sive  should  generally  be  used  when  '  either  (or  whether) — or' 
may  De  turned  into  •'  be  it — or  be  it.' 


)  58.  480-462  on  oblique  narration.  163 

(6)  In  the  second  way,  the  substance  of  what  he  said  is  given  in  tho 
Vdrd  person.  "  Caesar  said,  that  he  was  of  opinion," — and  so  on.  This 
second  way,  in  which  the  speech  of  another  is  reported  in  the  tiiird  per- 
son, is  called  oblique  or  indirect  narration. 

460.  (a)  In  oblique  narration,  the  principal  verb  or  verbs  will 

be  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

(b)  All  the  subordinate  clauses  that  express  the  original 

speaker's  words  or  opinions  will  have  their  verbs  in 
the  subjunctive  mood. 
J3r  Hence  conjunctions  and  adverbs  that  go  with  the  indicative  in  direct 
narration,  go  with  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  or  oblique  narration.^ 

(Thus  in  the  example  (453,  a),  '  Si  quid  habet  dot?  becomes,  when  re- 
ported, '  Dicebant  Caium,  si  quid  haberet,  dare.') 

(c)  When  a  speech  is  reported  in  oblique  narration,  (1)  the 

verb  or  participle  on  which  the  infinitive  depends 
is  often  omitted  :  (2)  questions  for  an  answer  are 
asked  in  the  subjunctive  :  questions  of  appeal  gene- 
rally* in  the  infinitive  (with  interrogative  pronouns 
and  adverbs)  :  (3)  the  imperative  in  direct  becomes 
the  subjunctive  in  indirect  narration. 

461.  (d)  The  subjunctive  being  thus  employed  to  express  the  speech  or  sen- 
timent, not  of  the  speaker  or  writer,  but  of  the  person  about  whom  he  is 
speaking  or  writing,  naturally  came  to  be  used  in  constructions  where 
the  sentiments  of  another  were  less  formally  reported.  Thus  in  the 
fable :  '  The  vulture  invited  the  little  birds  to  a  party,'  '  quod  illis  datw 
rus  erat '  would  mean  that  he  really  icas  going  to  give  them  the  party ; 
but  'quod  iilis  daturus  esset '  would  only  mean  that  he  said  he  was 
going  to  give  them  a  party.  So  with  the  verbs  of  accusing,  the  charge 
stands  with  quod  in  the  subjunctive,  because,  the  accusers  asserted  that 
the  crime  had  been  committed :  the  indicative  would  make  the  histo- 
rian or  speaker  assert  the  truth  of  the  charge. 

462.  [Direct.] 

(a)  (b)  Quantum  possum,  te  ac  tua  vestigia  sequar,  As 
far  as  I  can,  I  will  follow  you  and  your  footsteps. 


b  Obs.  fjf  As  the  subjunctive  has  no  future,  the  future  and  future  perfect  be- 
come the  pres.  and  perfect  of  the  subjunct.  respectively.  Senties — quum  ages; 
•ensurum  esse,  quum  agas. — Faciemus,  quum  imperaveris :  facturos  esse,  qua 
bnperaverit  (from  impcravgrlm).  If  the  speech  is  narrated  in  past  time  (is  intro- 
duced, that  is,  by  a  past  tense)  the  fut.  and  fut.  perf.  will  become  the  impe-f. 
and  pluperf  in  the  oblique  narration. 

*  Not  quite  always :  thus  Cses.  B.  O.  5  29.  jxxtremo  quit  hoc  sUn  per  sua- 
ieret?&c. 


KM  ON  (BLIOJJE  NARRATION.  [§58.  463,  464 

[Oblique. ] 

Clamavit  se,  quantum  posset,  eum  atque  ejus  vestigia 
secuturum,  He  cried  out  that  he,  as  far  as  he  could, 
would  follow  him  and  his  footsteps. 

(c)  (1)  Legatos  ad  Ceesarem  mittunt :  "  sese  paratos  esst 

portas  aperire,  &c."  They  send  ambassador* 
to  Ccesar  :  (saying)  that  they  are  ready  to  open 
the  gates,  &c. 

(2;  Interrogabat :  *  cur  paucis  centurionibus  pau- 
cioribus  tribunis  .  .  .  obedirent?0  Quandc 
ausuros  (esse)  exposcere  remedia,  nisi,  &c.  ? ' 
He  asked,  *  why  they  obeyed  a  few  centuriwas 
and  still  fewer  tribunes  ?  When  (said  hi) 
will  you  dare  to  demand  redress,  if,  &c.  ? ' 

(3)  (flirri  necessarii  fidem  Pompeii  implorarunt :) 
prcestaret  quod  proficiscenti  recepisset,  Make 
good  (said  they)  what  you  promised  him  whtn 
he  was  setting  out. 

(d)  Socrates  accusatus  est,  quod  corrumperet  juventutem, 

Socrates  was  accused  of  corrupting  the  young  men. 

463.  Vocabulary  63. 

(The  Preposition  Apud  governing  ace.) 

(1)  With  =  in  the  house  of,  in  the  mind  or  estimation  of;  amongst ; 

(2)  In  the  presence  of :  (3)  In  =  in  an  author's  writings :  (4)  At,  of 
place  (see  457). 

He  was  with  me,  apud  me. 

To  have  great  influence  with,  multum  valere  apud. 

Cyrus  in  Xenophon,  apud  Xenophontem. 

To  speak  in  the  presence  of  the  >  ,       .         .  p0  ^^ 

people,  > 
Yesterday,  heri. 

To-morrow,  eras.  x 

Exercise  67 

464.  Must  we  not  all  die  1  He  cried  out,  '  that  he  was  ready 
to  shed  his  blood   for  his  country;  must  we*  not  all   die  (he 

«  As  '  questions  for  answer  may  be  of  a  very  objurgatory  character,  it  is  often 
indifferent  whether  the  question  be  put  in  the  infin.  or  the  svbjunct.  Thus  in 
Liv.  vii.  15  •  Ubi  illi  clamores  sint  arma  poscentiuml  Ac.'  lubi  illoe  clamorea 
esse  .  .  .  .'  might  have  stood  equally  well. 

*  '  Wc,'  'you,'  must  be  turned  into  Hhey.1 


§  59.  465-467.]         on  oblique  narration.  105 

asked)  ?  should  not  an  honourable  death  be  preferred  to  a  dis- 
graceful life  1 ' — Almost  all  (of  them)  visited  Balbus  ;  *  Keep  (said 
they)  your  word  :d  finish  the  business  which  you  undertook  to 
finish.' — '  What  is  this,'*  said  he,  '  O  Tribunes  ?  are  you  going 
to  overthrow  the  state  under  the  guidance  of  Appius/  Herdo- 
nius7  ? ' — P.  Valerius  came  to  the  Tribunes,  crying  out,  '  What 
is  this  ?  Are  you  going  to  overthrow  the  state  under  the  guidance 
of  A  pp.  Herdonius'  ? ' — He  cried  out,  '  that  he  called  the  Quirites 
to  arms  :  that  he  would  dare  against  the  tribunes  what  the  founder 
of  his  family  had  dared  against  the  kings.' — What  was  I  to  do  ? 
all  were  crying  out,  that  it  was  all  over  with  the  army. ,  The 
Roman  people  had  not47  the  same  fortune  at  home  that  (they  had) 
in  the  field.  My  (friend)  Balbus  has  more  influence  with  me 
than  any  other  person.  Socrates  in  Plato  says  that  the  soul  is 
not  mortal. 


§  59.    Oblique  narration  continued.    (Mood  in  subordinate  clauses. 
Dependence  on  an  infinitive.) 

465.  (a,  In  the  oratio  obliqua,  even  when  dependent  on  a  past 
tnse,  the  present  (and  perfect)  subj.  are  used  when  the  clause 
rx  presses  a  general  truth,  independent  of  the  judgment  of  the 
Bpeaker,  and  when  the  reporter  of  the  speech  wishes  to  make  the 
sentiment  his  own.* 

466.  (b)  Remarks  that  are  really  the  reporter's  (i.  e.  were  not 
made  by  the  speake'r)  are,  of  course,  in  the  indicative.  The 
Indicative  is  also  used  by  the  Historians,  when  the  writer  wishes 
to  intimate  that  what  is  said  is  really  so,  and  not  merely  so  stated 
by  the  speaker. 

467.  (c)  The  subordinate  clauses  inserted  in  propositions  whose 
verbs  are  in  the  infin.  or  subjunctive,  must  have  their  verbs  in  the 


4  Compare  [462,  c,  (3)] 

•  Q.uid  hoc  rei  est  ? — This  sentence  is  to  be  in  direct  narration. 

r  "  Potest  quis  aliorum  scntentiam  vel  ita  referre,  ut  tota  ex  eorum  etiamnum 
pendcat  mente,  vel  etiam  tanquam  tritam  proponere  atque  usu  confirmatam^ 
quamque  ipse  jam  fecerit  suam.  Prior  si  locum  habet  ratio,  imperfectum.  con- 
iunctivi  Doni  solet:  si  posterior,  rprcc8ens."  (Wagner,  ap.  Kriiger.)    . 


166  ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION.  [§  59.  468,  469 

subjunctive,  when  they  form  a  part  of  the  whole  meaning  of  the 
proposition.  * 

If  such  a  clause  only  limits  or  describes  a  particular  term  of  tho 
proposition,  without  fairly  making  apart  of  it,  the  verb  will  be  in  tho 
indicative. 

468.  (d)  In  sentences  dependent  on  an  infinitive,  the  pres.  or 
f.  suhj.  are  found,  where  the  general  rule  requires  the  imperf, 
pluperf ;  but  not  vice  versa. 

In  other  words,  the  pres.  and  per/,  subj.  may  stand  (instead  of  th« 
imperf.  or  pluperf.)  after  the  perf.  infinitive  ;  and  also  after  the  pres.  or 
fut.  infinitive  when  they  depend  on  a  past  tense. 

409.  (a)  Cicero  dicebat :  tria  esse  omnino  genera  quae  in  dis- 
eeptationem  cadere  possint :  quid  fiat,  factum, 
futurumve  sit,  Cicero  used  to  say  that  there  were 
only  three  kinds  of  questions  that  could  fall  into 
controversy  :  what  was  doing,  what  had  teen  donef 
and  what  would  happen. 

(I)  Themistocles  certiorem  eum  fecit,  id  agi  ut  pons, 
quern  ille  in  Hellesponto  fecerat,  dissolveretur, 
Themistocles  sent  him  word,  that  it  was  intended  to 
break  down  the  bridge  which  he  had  made  over  the 
Hellespont. 

(c)  Indignum  videbatur  populum  Romanum  ab  iisdem 
Etruscis  obsideri,  quorum  saepe  exercitus  fuderit, 
It  seemed  an  indignity  that  the  Roman  people  should 
be  besieged  by  those  very  Etruscans,  whose  armies 
they  haa  often  routed. 
Certum  est  hominum  causa  factum  esse  mundum  quae- 
que  in  eo  sint h  omnia,  It  is  certain,  that  the  world 
and  every  thing  in  it  was  made  for  man. 

(d)  With  infin.  pres.  or fut. 

(1)  Dixit  (he  said);  dicebat;  dixerat;  dicturus  erat, 


fe*  If,  that  is,  they  form  an  essential  part  of  the  leading  proposition,  being 
included  in  the  object,  the  purpose,  or  the  circumstance  supposed.  (Z.) 

h  '  Tantam  rerum  ubertatem  natura  largita  est,  ut  ea,  quce  gignuntur,  donata 
coneulto  nobis  videantur.'  Here  ea  quce  gignuntur  are  the  actual  productions  o 
nature,    (Z.) 


{59.470-472.]         on  oblique  narration.  167 

„  5  intelligere  (  ^  "*?*  {"  a«at)^'1 

86  *  intellecturum  esse  ]  *md  <&"*  <or  «""»<>  host,s-     fc 

(  quid  acturus  esset  (or  actum*  sit)  lostia. 

(2)  And  (after  any  tense  of  dico,  &c.) 

f  quid  ageret  (or  agal)  hostis. 
se  iniellexisse  <  quid  egisset  (or  egerit)  hostis. 

{_  quid  acturus  esset  (or  acturus  sit)  hostis. 

170.  Vocabulary  64. 

(Prepositions  Erga,  Inteh,  Oe,  Per.) 
Ehga,  ace. :  Towards  {pi  favorable  dispositions).* 
Ixter,i  ace. :  Between  ;  among;  in  the  midst  of,  during. 
On  the  journey,  inter  viam. 

They  love  me  and  each  other,  ct  nos  et  inter  se  amant. 

Ob,  accus. ;  on  account  of. 
Before  my  eyes,  ob  oculos. 

Per,  ace.  Through  (of  place,  time,  and  means).  By  (of  the  sec- 
ondary agent™  by  whom  we  do  any  thing ;  and  in  adjurations,  in  wnicn 
it  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  pronouns — 'per  ego  te,'  &c).  ity  tha 
leave  q/"(dicladienturper  me  licet:  for  any  thing  I  care). 

Per  se  =  by  him,  &c,  alone  (ipse  per  se),for  its  own  sake  ;  naturally; 

of  itself,  &c. 
Per  in  permagnus,  pergratus,  &c,  is  often  separated  from  the  adjec- 
tive ;  '  per  mihi  ....  gratum  feccris.' 

471.  (a)  {Eng.)  To  make  a  bridge  over  a  river  (See  Ex.  469  (b) ). 

(Lot.)  To  make  a  bridge  in  a  river. 
(6)  {Eng.)  The  town  in  question. 
(Lat.)   The  town  de  quo  agilur. 

Exercise  68. 

^Translate  the  clauses  marked  thus  (t)  both  as  the  speakers,  and  as  the 
narrator's.] 

472.  Catilina  informs  (them)  that  he  had  sent  forward  Man. 
lius  to  the  great  body  of  men"  f  whom  he  had  prepared  to  take 
arms.72     They  warn  them  to  depart  from  all  the  islands*)-  which 


i  Kruger :  who  observes,  that  the  use  of  the  present,  &c.  may  often  be  explained 
by  the  purpose  of  the  writer,  to  intimate  that  what  is  said,  still  and  generally 
holds  good:  and  that  sometimes  there  may  be  what  Hermann  calls  a  'mutati* 
tncertarum  sententiarum  in  certas ;'  but  that  in  many  other  passages  no  reason 
can  be  discovered  for  the  employment  of  the  pre*,  and  perf.  rather  than  the  tm- 
perf  and  pluperf 

k  Rarely  of  hostile  dispositions.     (Z.) 

i  Inter  sometimes  stands  between  two  substantives :  '  Faesulas  inter  Arte 
tiumque.' 

m  For  instance,  to  send  a  letter  '  by  a  elave '  {per  servum). 

»  Ad  earn  rnultitudinem. 


108  ON  OBLIQUE  NARRATION.  [§  59.  473,  474. 

are  between  Italy  [Italia)  and  Africa.  He  had  contracted  to 
nuild75  a  bridge  over  the  river0  Danube  (Ister,  tri,  p.  14,  9,  a). 
He  answered,  that  custom,  f  which  is  a  second  nature,  was  on 
our  side.  Let  them  go  away  for  any  thing  I  care.  He  answered 
that  he  feared  the  waves,  j*  which  were  such  as  he  had  never  seen 
before.  He  answered  that  you,  f  such  is  your  temperance, p  were 
already  well.  He  said  that  he  was  the  first  who8  accomplished 
that  journey.  They  cry  out,  '  Why  are  these  (questions)  asked  ? 
(400,  c.)  who  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  able  to  perform  all  he 
wishes?'  (68,  d.) 


473.  (a)  The  ace.  and  infin.  with  ne  in  the  oblique  narration 

resembles,  but  must  be  distinguished  from,  its  use 
to  express  emotion  in  direct  narration. °- 
(a)  Adeowe  hominem  infelicem  esse  quemquam,  ut  ego 
sum  !     That  any  man  living  should  be  so  unfortu- 
nate as  I  am! 

Exercise  69. 

[In  what  mood  are  questions  qf  appeal  asked, in  oblique  narration?    460,  c.J 

474.  That  you  should  be  able  (inf.  pres.)  to  bear  this  !  That 
you  should  say  this !  He  said  that  we  ought  not  to  learn  many 
things,  but  much.  They  cried  out,  '  Could  any  man  bear  this  ? 
Would  she  never  see  them  without  calling  them  betrayers  of 
their  country  (88,  c)  1  Let  her  learn  (they  said)  to  govern  her 
tongue.' — I  fear  that  nobody  will  prefer  a  capital  charge  against 
him.  They  say  that  Caius  has  been  accused  of  bribery  ;  which 
{36,  b)  I  shall  not  easily  be  induced  to  believe. r     He  says  that 


°  'Rivus'  brook;  'fluvius'  river;  '  arums'  a  broad,  deep  river.  '  Flumen' 
(properly  the  'stream,'  flu-imen)  is  also  used  as  a  general  term  for  'river'  (being 
used  here  of  the  Danube) ;  especially  when  there  is  reference  to  its  stream. 

p  In  a  sentence  of  this  kind,  consider  whether  the  reporter  of  the  answer 
should  be  represented  as  making  it  his  own ;  if  so,  the  subj.  present  should  be 
used  by  465  (a). 

i  For  which  ut  with  the  subj.  is  also  found  :  Tene  ut  ulla  res  frangat?— 
Tibi  ego  ut  adverser  ? 

*  Ous.  Credo,  which  takes  a  dat.  of  the  person  believed,  takes  an  ace.  of  the 


}  00.  475— 477.]  qui  with  subjunctive.  10U 

ic  has  not  received  the  letters  whieh  I  sent  him  (32,  c).  Who 
vill  deny  that  it  is  the  duty  of  a  Christian  to  keep  his  word  1 
Who  will  deny  that  it  is  wise39  to  have  death  always  before  one's* 
jyes  ?  They  replied,  that  they  sent  the  letter  by  a  slave.  They 
inswor,  that  the  town  in  question  is  two  hundred  (Roman)  miles 
Vom  Rome.     I  had  perished,  if  you  had  not  succoured  me. 


XXIII. 

§  00.     '  Qui '  with  Subjunctive. 

-i75.  ■  Qui  takes  the  indicative,  only  when  it  refers  to  a  particular  object  in 
the  most  clear  and  direct  way ;  when  there  is  no  vagueness  or  indefinite- 
ness  whatever  in  the  reference. 

But  when  its  reference  is  at  all  vague  or  indefinite,  it  governs  the 
subjunctive. 

476.  Qui  therefore  governs  the  subjunctive  whenever  the  object  described 
by  the  relative  could  not,  as  it  were,  be  seen  and  touched.  Whenever  it 
does  not  describe  an  individual  object,  but  only  refers  it  (or  them)  to  a 
particular  class  by  a  mark  common  to  all  the  class,  it  governs  the  subjunc- 
tive. When  therefore  for  'who,'  'which,'  we  might  substitute  'of  such 
a  kind  as  to,'  'such  tliat,'  &c,  qui  governs  the  subjunctive. 

(a)  Qui  with  the  indicative  may  refer  an  object  to  a  class,  but 
t  then  describes  it  (or  them)  in  the  most  definite  way.  ■  Qui  non 
iefendit  amicum,  quum  potest.'  <  A  man  who  actually  does  not 
[efend  his  friend  when  he  can.' 

477.  Vocabulary  65. 

(Phrases  after  which  qui  ia  generally  indefinite,  and  therefore  takoe 
the  subjunctive.) 
Some  men ;  or  there  are  some  who,  sunt  qui. 
There  are  not  wanting  men  who,    non  desunt  qui. 

(Negatives  and  virtually  negatives.) 
Who  is  there  1  quis  est  1 

How  few  there  are  ?  quotusquisque  est  1 

Quotusquisque  est  is  used  interrogatively  and  in  Vie  singular;  i.  e., 
how  many  does  each  man  who  belongs  to  the  class  make  1  Quotus 
est!  being  'how  many  does  he  make?'  So,  too,  nemo;  nihil  est;  an 
ullus,  &c. 


Jung  believed:  and  though  '  I  am  believed'  is  'mihi  credUur,'  it  must  be  'ejjo 
rredor '  (tu  crederis,  &c.)  when  an  infin.  immediately  follows  (/  am  believed  to 
xavc  done  this).. 

8 


#Ve  have  reason  to  rejoice, 


170  qui  with  subjunctive.         [§  60.  478,  47 D 

(Reperio,  invenio,  habeo.) 
There  are  found  persons  who,         reperiuntur,  inveniuntur,  qui.* 
You  may  find,  reperias,  invenias  qui,  &c. 

(Nihil  est  quod,  &c.    Nihil  habeo  quod,  &c.) 

est  quod  gaudeamus  =  '  there  is  some- 
thing of  such  a  kind  that  we  should 
rejoice  on  account  of  it.'  '  Quod '  as 
an  ace.  neut.  pron.  (195,  f.)  going 
with  gaudeo. 

What  is  there  that  you  can  com-  )      . .      .         ,      ^  . '    ..  0 

J  >  quid  est  quod  queri  possis  7 

We  have  no  reason  to  desire,  non  est  quod  desideremus. 

You  have  no  reason  to  hurry,  nihil  est  quod  festines. 

478.  (a)  (Eng.)  I  have  nothing  to  accuse  old  age  of 

(Lat.)    I  have  nothing  which  I  may  accuse  old  age  (quod  incusern 
senectutem). 
(6)  (Eng.)  A  pen  to  write  with. 

(Lat.)    A  pen  with  which  one  may  write. 

(c)  (Eng.)  Men  who  abound  in  silver,  in  gold  (and),  in  estates. 
(Lat.)    Men  who  abound  in  silver,  who  in  gold,  who  in  estates. 

(d)  (Eng.)  Men  who  abound  neither  in  silver,  nor  gold,  nor  estates. 
(Lat.)   Men  who  do  not  abound  in  silver,  not  in  gold,  not  in  estates. 

479.  Vocabulary  66. 

To  drive  away,  ablgere,  eg,  act. 

Stick,  bacillum,t  i}  n. 

Bird,  avis,u  is,  /. 

Put ;  lay  down,  or  aside,  ponere,v  ptfsu,  pbslt. 

To  cross  over,  trajicCre,  jec,  ject. 

To  allow  it  to  happen,  committSre  (ut,  with  subj.). 


•  Obs.  With  sum,  reperio,  habeo,  &c,  qui  with  the  indicative  is  found,  when 
It  expresses  particular  objects  in  the  most  definite  way.  This  is  naturally 
oftener  the  case  when  qui  relates  to  the  subject,  which  is  mostly  a  particular 
object  (or  objects),  than  when  it  relates  to  the  predicate,  which  is  generally  somt 
does  in  which  the  subject  is  contained.  Turn  primum  reperta  sunt,  qua  per 
tot  annos  rempublicam  exedere :  not  '  there  were  found  evils  which  preyed  on, 
&c.'  but  '  the  evils  which  have  actually  preyed  on  the  state  for  so  many  years. 
were  then  found  for  the  first  time.' 

t  A  diminutive  of  baculum. 

a  Volucrts  are  all  '  winged  creatures?  insects  included.  Avis  is  the  general 
Dame  for  '  bird :'  '  ales '  is  the  word  in  poetry  and  the  language  of  the  augurs  foi 
:he  larger  birds,  especially  the  eagle.  In  augury,  alites  were  the  birds  whoso 
flight,  osclnes  the  birds  whose  song  or  cry',  was  prophetic.     (D.) 

'  Ponere  aliquid,  '  to  lay  down '  a  thing ;  '  to  get  it  out  of  our  hand* ;'  '  to  get 
rid  of  it.'  Locare  and  collocare  are  '  to  put  a  thing  in  its  right  place :'  '  to  place* 
advisedly  for  some  purpose. 


1 01.  480,  481.]  QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE.  171 

To  be  on  the  point  of,  ineo  esse  (ut,  with  aubj.). 

Jewel,  gemma,  ae,  /. 

Unburied,  inhumatus,  a,  urn. 

Exercise  70. 

480.  Diogenes  ordered  himself  to  be  cast  forth  unburied. 
Then*  his  friend  said .  '  To  the  birds  and  beasts  V  *  By  no 
means,'  said  he,  '  but  put*  a  stick  by  me,  to  drive  them  away 
with  (478).' — There  are  some  who  think  that  Caius  is  pretending. 
There  were  some  who  thought  that  Caius  was  pretending.  There 
are  not  wanting  persons,  who  deny  that  the  rule  of  expediency  is 
the  same  as  that  of  honour.  There  are  found  some,  who  say 
that  we  should  not  cultivate  virtue.  It  is  incredible  bow  weary 
I  am  of  life.  We  must  cross  over  that  sea  which  (48)  you  call 
ocean.  There  are  some  who  think,  that  the  best  thing  we  have 
(53)  will  be  lost.  They  cry  out,  that  we  shall  lose  the  best  thing 
we  have.  We  have  no  reason  to  hurry.  I  have  nothing  to 
accuse  you  of  (478).  You  have  reason  to  rejoice,  that  you  have 
concealed  these  things  from  your  father.  You  will  scarcely  find 
any  one  to  believe  this.  •  He  was  on  the  point  of  being  killed, 
Had  you  rather  be  like  one?  (212,  x)  of  these  persons  who  abound 
in  gold,  in  silver,  in  jewels,  or  (like)  C.  Fabricius,  who  had  none 
(nihil)  of  those  things  ?  How  few  there  are,  who  have  death 
always  before  their  eyes  ! 


§  CI.     'Qui'  with  the  subjunctive  continued. 

481.   Qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  when  it  introduces  the  ground 
of  the  assertion  in  the  antecedent  clause. 

(a)  Here  there  is  some  difficulty  in  determining  whether  qui  is  used 


c    =  at  that  time,  turn. 
Then  <   =  after  that,    inde,  deinde. 
(   ^.therefore,      igitur,  itaque. 
■  Ponitote.    The  rorms  of  the  imperative  in  to,  tote,  nto,  are  used  in  solemn 
commands  and  prohibitions,  such  as  laics,  wills,  &c. 

f  [C.  xxxiv.]  fjT  '  One'  often  means  'some  one'  (aliquis),  or  'acerttiin  one 
quldam). 


175?  ^ui  with  subjunctive.         [§  61.  482-485. 

definitely  or  not.     'He  was  laughed  at  by  all  the  rest,  who  did  not  ac- 
knowledge these  faults  to  belong  to  Socrates;'    this  seems  definite 
enough,  but  it  is  in  tne  Latin,  '  qui  non  agnoscerent.' 
(#)  When  therefore  for  'who'  may  be  substituted  'for  he  (she,  itt  &cl) 
the  verb  should  be  the  subjunctive. 

•482.  For  qui  alone,  utpote  qui,  quippe  qui,"  ui  qui  are  also  used 
generally  with  the  subjunctive. 

483.  Qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  when  it  has  the  force  of  ut  wiii 
a  personal  or  possessive  pronoun. b 

It  has  this  force  after  (1)  dignus,  indignus,  sdoneiis,  &c. 

(2)  tarn,  talis,  ejusmodi,  is  (such),  &c. 

(3)  comparatives  with  quam. 

(4)  is  sum*  ( =  talis  sum),  /  am  a  man  too.'1 

(5)  quis  sum  ? 

(6)  when  it  expresses  a  purpose. 

(a)  When  qui  —  ut  is,  and  introduces  a  consequence,  the  per/,  subj.  may 
be  used  for  the  imperfect  by  418.  Zeno  nullo  modo  is  erat,  qui,  ut 
Theophrastus,  nervos  virtutis  inciderit.  Cic.  Acad.  i.  10,  35.  [al. 
incideret.] 

484.  Qui  governs  the  subjunctive,  when  we  may  substitute  for 
it,  \  although,'  '  since,'  '  because,' '  seeing  that,'  &c.  with  a  personal 
pronoun. 

(a)  Qui  takes  the  subjunctive  after  unus  and  solus,  signifying 
1  alone,'  'only.' 

485.  Qui,  in  narrative,  is  followed  by  the  subj.  of  the  imperfect 
and  pluperfect,  to  express  a  repeated  action  taking  place  in  past 
timf,.6 

The  relative  adverbs  (ubi,  qua,  &c.)  govern  the  subjunctive  of  these 
tenses  in  the  same  way ;  and  as  far  as  they  can  be  substituted  for  th« 
relative,  they  follow  the  rules  above  given. 


*  This  of  course  will  not  apply  to  the  use  of  qui  to  introduce  a  new  sentence 
where  we  use  'for  he,'  &c. 

a  Utpote  qui,  quippe  qui  =  ' inasmuch  as  they;'  'for  they.'  Grotefend  re 
marks  that  utpote,  quippe  may  generally  be  translated  by  'namely,'  'that  is.' 
Our  'as  being'  will  often  give  the  force  of  them  still  better:  they  often  stand 
before  attributives  only.     '  (Democrito)  quippe  homini  erudito,  &c.' 

b  Thus  qui=  ut  ego,  ut  tu,  ut  Me;  ut  nos,  ut  vos,  ut  illi;  through  all  theii 
cases.     So,  cujus  =  ut  meus,  tuus,  &c.  :  quorum  =z  ut  noster,  vester,  &c. 

e  But  'ut'  is  sometimes  used  after  ' is  es,'  &c.  ' Neque  enim  is  es,  Catilina 
\ti  te  . .  .  .  ratio  a  furore  revocarit.'     (Cic.  Cat.  i.  9.  22.)     Te  is  here  emphatic. 

d  Examples  of  qui  and  relative  adverbs  used  of  repeated  actions  are:  'Ner 
quiaquam  Pyrrhum,  qua  tulisset  impetum,  sustinere  valuit.'  '  Semper  habit 
aunt  fortissirm.  qui  summam  imperii  potirentur.*     (Z.) 


§61.  486.]  QUI  WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE.  173 

486.  The  kind  of  sentences  in  which  the  relative  may  be  thua 
introduced  in  Latin,  will  be  best  learned  by  examples. 

(a)  (Eng.)  He  was  despised  by  them, /or  they  saw  through  him. 

r  He  was  despised  by  them,  who  saw  through  him  (subj.). 
(Lot.)    <  He  was  despised  by  them,  as-being  who  saw  through  hlir 

(o)  (Eng.)  He  deserves  (or,  does  not  deserve)  to  be  loved. 

{Lai.)  He  is  worthy,  (or,  unworthy)  j  wh°  should  b<  ^f 
'  (  whom  you  should  love. 

(c)  (Eng.)  He  is  not  a  proper  person  to  be  received. 

.  w  +  v   tt    .  \  who  should  be  received. 

(Lat.)  He  is  not  a  proper  person  \     ,    «'""*tl*  "c  '«*«€/«*. 
C  whom  you  should  receive. 

(d)  (Eng.)  None  are  so  good  as  never  to  sin. 
(Lat.)  None  are  so  good,  who  never  sin  (subj.). 

(e)  (Eng.)  None  are  so  great,  as  to  be  independent. 
(Lai.)  None  are  so  great,  who  are  independent  (subj.). 

(J)  (Eng.)  Of  such  a  kind  (or,  such)  that  we  can  neglect  duties  for  their 
sake. 

(Lat.)  Of  such  a  kind,  for  the  sake  of  which  we  can  neglect  duties. 
(g)  (Eng.)  Too  short  to  be  the  whole  life  of  man. 

(Lat.)  Shorter  than  which  can  be  f  the  whole  life  of  man. 


(h)  (Ens  )  \  Benefits  greater  than  I  can  requite. 


= 


Benefits  too  great  to  be  requited. 
(Lat.)  Benefits  greater  than  whichs  I  can  requite. 
r  I  am  not  a  man  to  believe  this. 
(f)  (Eng.)  <  I  am  not  bo  foolish,  simple,  &c,  as  to  believe  this. 
(  I  am  not  one  who  believe  h  this. 
(Lat.)  I  am  not  he  (is)  who  would  believe  (qui  putcm). 
(j)  (Eng.)  Who  am  I,  that  my  writings  should  be  honoured  thus  ? 

(LaL)  Who  am  I,  whose  writings  should  be  honoured  thus! 
(k)  (Eng.)  They  sent  ambassadors,  to  sue  for  peace. 

(Lai.)  They  sent  ambassadors,  wlw  should  sue  for  peace. 
(I)  (Eng.)  He  deserves  praise  (or  blame)  for  having  done  this. 
(Ijat.)  He  deserves  praise  (or  blame)  who  did  this  (subj.). 
(m)  (Eng.)  Wretched  man  that  I  *  am,  who  thought,  <6c. 

(Lat.)  O  me  miserable,  who  thought,  &c.  (qui  with  subj.). 


ignus  (or  indignus)  qui  ametur. 
4  Quam  quae  sit,  or  possit  esse.    (See  Difference  of  Idiom  94.) 

*  Quam  quibus  gratiam  referre  possim. 

*  Ob8.  The  verb  after  qui  takes  the  person  of  ego,  tu,  &c,  not  of  lis'  or  mar^ 
■ 

'  I  am  not  one  who  much  or  oft  delight 

To  season  my  fireside  with  personal  talk,'  &c. 

(  Wordsworth.) 
I'Ome  miserum !'  or  ' me  miserum !'    The  interjections  O,  fuu,  proh.  take 
tne  ace.;  hit  and  va  the  dative;  en  and  ecce  the  nam.  or  the  <ioc.  (the  luttei 


174  QUIJM  WITH  INDICATIVE.  [§  62.  487, 488 

Exercise  71. 

[Translate  '  I  am  not  one  who  think.'  486.  t.] 
487.  We  must  take  care  to  use  such  (is)  a  liberality  as  (qui) 
may  be  of  service  to  our  friends,  (and)  hurt  nobody.  There  is 
no  doubt,  that  the  Gauls  are  too  brave  to  be  conquered  (486,  g) 
in  one  battle.  Those  eternal  fires,  which  (48)  we  call  stars,  are 
too  many  to  be  numbered.  He  is  a  proper  person  to  be  received 
(486,  c)  into  your  friendship.  Nothing  is  so  valuable,k  that  we 
should  barter  for  it  our  faith  and  our  liberty.  No  one  can  be 
so  great,  as  (483,  (2)  )  never  to  require  the  services  of  his  friends. 
The  benefits,  of  which31  you  have  conferred  upon  me  very  many 
are  greater  than  I  can  repay  (486,  h).  I  am  not  one  who  think 
that  this  world  and  every  thing  that  is  in  it,  Vvas  made  by  chance. 
There  are  some  who  believe,  that  this  most  beautiful  world  and 
all  that  is  in  it,  was  made  by  some  chance  or  other.  Who  am  I, 
that  all  men  should  consult  my  interest  (486,  j)  ?  Who  will  deny, 
that  this  life  is  too  short  to  be  the  whole  life  of  man  1  You  are 
the  only  person  (484,  a)  on  whom  the  safety  of  the  state  depends. 
p  If  Cato  had  died,  Cicero  would  have  been  the  only  person  on 
whom  the  safety  of  the  state  depended.  I  am  not  so  simple  (486,  i) 
as  to  deny  this. 


XXIV. 

§  62.     Quum  with  the  Indicative. 

488.  Since  quum  with  the  indicative*  is  far  less  common  than 
with  the  subjunctive,  it  is  important  to  get  a  clear  notion  when  it 
should  take  the  indicative. 


chiefly  in  Comedy.  Z.)  The  ace.  of  personal  pronouns  may  stand  in  the  ace. 
without  the  interjection,  and  even  other  words  are  so  used. 

k  Tanti,  .  .  .  quo  vendamus  =  ut  eo  vendamus. 

l  When  quum,  antequam,  priusquam,  &c.,  take  the  indicative,  either  (I)  the  oc- 
currence is  connected  with  a  state  that  presents  itself  vividly  to  the  speaker'* 
recollection,  or  with  a  fixed  and  definitely  marked  point  of  time:  or  (2)  it  falls 
without  preparation  or  notice  into  the  middle  of  another  action  (which  is  sus- 
pended or  broken  off"  by  it),  and  thus  is  naturally  described  in  an  unconnected 
and  abrupt  manner.    {Hartung  Partikellehre,  ii.  335.) 


$62.  4S9,  490.]         quum  with  indicative.  175 

(a)  Quum  takes  the  indicative  when  it  simply  marks  the  time, 
without  carrying  with  it  any  notion  of  a  cause  or  occasion. 

1  When'  marks  the  time  in  this  definite  way,  and  is  to  be  translated 
by  quum  with  the  indicative,  when  '  then '  might  be  substituted  for  it. 

'  It  was  night  when  he  left  the  room,'  =s  '  it  was  night :  tlien  he  left 
the  room. 

(b)  Quum  takes  the  indicative  when,  though  it  does  introduce  a 
cause  or  occasion  of  what  is  stated  in  the  principal  sentence,  it 
nevertheless  describes  the  time  in  a  very  marked  manner,  refer- 
ring to  turn,  nunc,  &c,  or  some  noun  of  time  expressed  or  under- 
stood in  the  principal  clause. 

(c)  Quum  takes  the  indicative,  when  what  is  said  in  the  prin- 
cipal clause  is  not  only  contemporaneous  with  the  action  expressed 
in  the  quum  clause,  but  is  actually  included  in  it. 

When  a  '  when '  clause  stands  in  this  kind  of  close  relation  to  its 
principal  clause,  the  participial  substantive  under  the  government  of '  in.' 
may  generally  be  substituted  for  it. 

1  Wlicn  you  censure  them,  you  censure  me.' 

'  In  censuring  them,  you  censure  me.' 

(d)  There  are  two  less  common  meanings  in  which  quum  goes 
with  the  indicative : 

(1)  When  it  means  '  since  '  of  time. m 

(2)  When  it  is  equivalent  to  quod,  after  gaudeo,  gratulor,  &c. 

489.  The  meanings  in  which  '  quum '  always  takes  the  subjunctive,  are 
since,  inasmuch,  as,  although,  whereas.  In  the  sense  of  '  when'  it  takes 
the  subjunctive,  when  the  statement  introduced  by  iwlieni  is  also  the 
cause  or  occasion  of  what  is  asserted  in  the  principal  clause. 

With  the  imperf.  and  pluperf.  quum  generally  takes  the  subjunctive, 
though  the  notion  of  a  cause,  or  even  of  an  occasion,  is  hardly,  if  at  all, 
perceptible.  'Quum  Agesilaus  reverteretur  .  . .  decessit.'*  {Corn. 
Nep.  I.  8,  6.) 

490.  (a)  Jam  ver  appetebat,  quum  Hannibal  ex  hibernis  movit, 
The  spring  was  already  drawing  on  when  Hannibal 

moved  from  his  winter  quarters. 

»{b)  Ager  quum  multos  annos  quievit,  uberiores  efFerre 
fructus  solet,  Afield,  when  it  has  lain  fallow  many 
years,  generally  produces  more  abundant  crops. 


»  Ex  ec  tempore  quo.    Obs.  That  the  pres.  is  used.     (See  490:  d.) 
•  Or  quum  with  the  indie,  of  imperf.  and  pluperf. 


I7tf  QUUM  WITH  INDICATIVE.  [§  62.  491,  49*4 

(c)  Quum  in  portum  dico,  in  urhem  dico,  When  1  saj 

into  the  port,  I  say  into  the  city.     (In  saying  into 
the  port,  I  say,  &c.) 

(d)  Nondum  centum  et  decern  anni  sunt,  quum  de  pecu- 

niis  repetundis  a  L.  Pisone  lata  lex  est,  It  is  noi 
yet  a  hundred  and  ten  years  since  the  Jaw  about  ex- 
tortion was  carried  by  L.  Piso. 
Gratulor,  quum  tantum  vales  apud  Dolabellum,  I  con- 
gratulate you  on  your  influence  with  Dolabella. 
191  (a)  (Eng.)  In  attacking  one,  you  attack  all. 

(Lot.)     When  you  attack  one,  you  attack  all  (quum  with  indie.). 

(b)  (Eng.)  It  is  many  years  since  he  was  first  in  my  debt.n 
(Lat.)    There  are  many  years,  when  he  is  in  my  debt. 

(c)  (Eng.)  I  congratulate  you  on  your  influence  with  Caius. 

(Lat.)     I  congratulate  you,  when  you  avail  so  much  with  (apud)  Caius 

(d)  (Eng.)  I  do  not  like  to  be  abused. 

(Lat.)    I  am  not  abused  willingly  (libenter). 

492.  Vocabulary  67. 
This  being  so ;  this  being  the  case,  quae  quum  ita  sint. 

f  quum  (to  denote  the  ground  on  which  a 
Q.  judgment   is  formed);    quoniam  = 

'  »      quum,  jam  (used  when  the  ground  is 

i      an  acknowledged  fact0). 

Not  that— but  \  Non  Quod— sed :  non  <luod  p  (witn  «*** 

(     junct.). 

To  be  spoken  ill  of,  male  audlre  ('  to  hear  ill '). 

{"quia;  quod  (with  indie,  except  where 

the  subjunc.  is  required  for  some  other 

Because,  -<      reason. — Quia  introduces  a  strict  caust 


I 


of  the  effect :  quod  the  conceived  cause 
or  ground  of  an  action). 

I  don't  at  all  doubt,  nullus  dubito.i 

How  insignificant,  quam  nullus. 

To  congratulate,  gratulari,  gratulatus. 

n  Multi  eunt  anni  quum  ille  in  sere  meo  est. 

°  Quando  is  sometimes  used  in  this  sense ;  and  also  quum.  ( Itaque,  quancU 
^estrac  cautiones  infirmse  sunt  Grseculam  tibi  misi  cautionem.'  (C.  Fam.  vii. 
IB)  'Tu  quum  instituisti,  ....  scribe  ad  me.'  (C.  Fam.  Tii.  32.}—  lit  has 
bometimes  the  meaning  of  though:  iut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda 
voluntas.' 

p  For  non  quod,  we  often  find  non  eo  or  idto  quod:  but  also  non  quo :  all  with 
inibj.     '  Not  as  if  not '  is  '  non  quin? 

*»  This  expression  belongs  to  the  language  of  common  convcrsatiaru  not  tc 
bwkfl. 


§<»2.   493,  49-1.]  QUUM  WITH  INDICATIVE.  J77 

To  take,  \  sam?rc>  sumps,  sunipt.;  cJpPre,  io  »  cep 

(      capt. 
To  take  hold  of,  prehendPre,  prehend,  prehcns. 

To  do  well,  praeclare  facere. 

f£j^  The  subject  of  congratulation  stands  in  the  ace.  or  in  the  all.  witt 
de  or  in ;  or  in  the  indie,  with  quod,  for  which  ^wum  is  sometimes  used 
(See  491,  c.) 

Exercise  72. 

[With  what  mood  may  interrogatircs  be  used  in  oblique  appeals  ?  (460,  c)] 
493.  This  being  the  case,  I  am  unwilling  to  leave  the  city. 
Caesar,  when  he  had  conquered  the  Gauls  (=  having  conquered 
the  Gauls),  returned  to  Rome.  We  know  how  insignificant  the 
strength  of  men  is.  Who,  when  he  sees  this  (=  seeing,  or  on 
seeing  this),  would  not  make  merry  (per/,  sulj.)  with  you  ? 
Phocion  was  constantly  poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very 
rich.  Is  it  not  several  years  since  Caius  was  (first)  in  your  debt  ? 
Is  there  any  man  who  can  be  compared  with  Balbus  ?  You  do 
well  in  loving  the  boy  (491,  a).  When  I  assert  the  one,  I  deny 
the  other.  He  says  that,  if  I  had  conquered  the  Gauls,  he  should 
have  congratulated  me  on  my  victory.  I  congratulate  you  on 
your  having  recovered  (that  you  have  recovered).  Does  any  man 
like  to  be  ill  spoken  of  ?  I  will  hold  my  tongue,  not  that  I  believe 
the  man,  but  because  it  makes  no  difference  to  me.  They  cried 
out,  '  Why  did  he  advise  this  ?  might  they  depart  a  finger's 
breadth  from  the  rule  of  honour  ? '  They  asked,  '  Was  not  Caius 
nearer  Rome  than  Labienus  ? '  (question  for  information).  They 
answer  that  we  ought  to  consult  the  interests  of  those  with  whom 
we  have  to  Uve.z7) 


494.  Vocabulary  68. 

(Conjunctions  that  go  with  subjunct.  only.) 

C  quasi  =r  quam  si  (relating  to  manner\ 
As  if,  \     tanquam*  =  tam  quam  (relating  to  dc 

'     grte  ;  '  just  as  if '). 

r  Sumimus  quo  utamur :  capimus  quod  habeamus ;  prehendimus  quod  tenea 
mus.  (D.)  Sumere  {to  take  of  my  own  free  will  and  choice)  is  genernuy  spoken 
if  something  that  we  may  appropriate :  capere  {seize  upon)  often  denotes  the 
taking  what  does  not  belong  to  us.     (H.) 

•  Also  velut  si,  velut,  ac  si  {and  sometimes  sicut ;  poetically  ceu).  After  tan- 
mam,  si  is  often  expressed,  and  may  always  be  understood. 

8* 


178  QTJTJM  WITH  INDICATIVE.  [§  62.  495-497 

Would  that  utinam. 

O  that !  O  si ! 

r  dummbdo  (for  which  dum,  modo  are 
Provided  only,  <      used    separately — '  not,'    after    these 

t     words  is  '  ne  ). 
It  is  nearly  the  same  thing  as  if,     perinde  fere  est  ac  si. 
As  if  forsooth,  quasi  vero. 

Perhaps,  forsitan  (often  with  per/,  subj.). 

495.  ftCr  With  these  words  the  general  rule  for  the  sequence 
of  tenses  (40)  is  to  be  observed.     The  English  would  mislead  us. 

Pugnat,  quasi  contendat,  He  fights  as  if  he  contended, 

or  were  contending,  &c. 
Pugnavit,  quasi  contender 'et,  He  fought  as  if  he  had 

been  contending,  &c. 

496.  With  utinam  the  pres.  and  perf.  are  used,  if  the  thing 
wished  is  not  to  be  represented  (whatever  it  may  be)  as  impossible 
to  be  realized.  The  imperf.  and  pluperf.  express  wishes  that  are 
(in  the  speaker's  opinion)  impossible,  or  unlikely,  to  be  realized. 
'Not'  after  utinam  is  regularly  ne,  but  very  often  non. 

Exercise  73. 
(Obs.  In  the  principal  clause  the  ita  or  sic,*-  to  which  quasi  or  tan* 
quam  refers,  is  often  expressed.) 

497.  They  saluted  Caius/  (just)  as  if  he  had  been  consul'. 
Many,  not  to  say  all,  saluted  Caius,  as  if  he  had  been  consul. 
Would  that  you  were  consul !  Would  that  I  had  been  engaged 
in  that  battle  !  Would  that  I  had  been  able  to  avoid  suspicion  ' 
Provided  your  word  be  kept,  i"  donrt  care  a  straw  for  all  the  rest. 
Provided  you  do  not  break  your  word,  I  don't  care  this  for  all  the 
rest.  Would  that  the  letter  had  not  been  written !  Live  with 
men  as  if  the  immortal  gods  saw  you.  (Insert  '  sic '  in  the  princ. 
clause.)  Speak  with  your  friends,  as  if  all  men  heard  you.  All 
men  are  calling  upon  me,  as  if  forsooth  it  were  my  business  to 
assist  all  men.  Would  that  Varro  himself  would  apply  vigorously 
to  my  cause  !  Perhaps  some  one  may  say,  that  these  things  are 
too  small  to  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye  (pi.).  How  few  are 
there,  who  apply-vigorously  to  another  man's  cause ! 


t  Sic  relates  more  to  something  preceding  and  actually  given :  ita  to  something 
following  and  supposed.    (R.  and  H.) 


$  03.  498-503.]       antequam  and  friusquam.  179 


XXV. 

§  63.     Antequam  and  Priusquam. 

498.  (a)  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  present  lense,  the 
rerb  in  the  clause  with  antequam  or  'priusquam  may  be  in  the 
pres.  indicative  or  subjunctive. 

499.  (b)  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  future,  the  de- 
pendent verb  may  be  in  the  future  perfect,  or  the  present  sub- 
junctive ;  sometimes  also  it  is  found  in  the  present  indicative. 

500.  (c)  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense,  the  de- 
pendent verb  is  either  in  the  perfect  indicative  or  in  the  imperfect 
subjunctive  : — in  the  perfect  indicative,  if  there  is  no  closer  con- 
nection between  the  two  occurrences  than  precedence  in  point  of 
time,  what  is  stated  in  the  subordinate  clause  being  stated  as  an 
actual  occurrence  : — in  the  imperfect  (or,  if  necessary,  the  pluper- 
fect) subjunctive,  when  there  is  a  closer  connection  between  the 
two  occurrences  than  that  of  mere  precedence  in  point  of  lime. 

501.  And,  generally,  whenever  there  is  a  closer  connection  be- 
tween the  two  clauses  than  that  of  mere  priority  (whenever,  for 
instance,  it  is  stated  or  implied  to  be  necessary,  proper,  or  designed 
with  a  view  to  some  purpose,*-  that  the  one  action  or  event  should 
precede  the  other) ;  and  whenever  the  two  are  contemplated  as 
forming  a  connected  sequence,  the  subjunctive  should  be  used. 

502.  Obs.  When  the  stress  is  on  the  before,  ante  or  prius  stands  in  the  prin- 
cipal clause ;  either  early  in  it  (which  is  their  most  emphatic  position), 
or  just  before  trie  quam,  but  not  forming  one  word  with  it.  When  they 
are  thus  emphatic,  the  verb  being  |n  past  time,  the  per/,  indicative  is 
commonly  used  (rather  than  the  imp.  subj.) :  especially  when  a  nega- 
tive accompanies  them :  non  ante,  nee  ante,  non  prius. 

503.  (a)  Ante  rorat  quam  pluit,  It  drops  before  it  rains. 


In  the  following  passage  Livy  uses  the  pres.  where  we  should  rather  havo 
expected  the  subj.  '  Sed  ante  quam  opprimit  lux  majoraque  hostium  agmina 
hint  iter  .  .  .  erumpamus'  (xxii.  50).  So  too  in  Virgil:  'Sed  mihi  vol 
tellus,  optem,  prius  ima  dehiscat,  |  Ante,  pudor,  quam  te  viol«,'  &c  (JEn.  iv. 
25.)  In  Nep.  iii.  2,  the  imp.  subj.  is  used  where  there  seems  to  be  only  the 
simple  relation  cf  precedence  in  point  of  time.  '  Aristides  interfuit  pugnoe  navcJJ 
apud  Salamina,  qua;  facta  est  prias  quam  ille  poena  (exsilii)  liberaretur.' 


180  ANTEQUAM  AND  PRIUSQUAM.        [§  63.  504~50b, 

Tempcstas   minatur    antequam   surgat,   A   tempest 
threatens  hefore  it  gets  up. 

(b)  Antequam  aliquo  loco  consedero,  longas  a  me  literas 

non  exspectabis,  Till  /  settle  somewhere,  you  will 

not  expect  long  letters  from  me. 
'Antequam  de  republic^  dicam,  exponam  vobis  bre- 

viter.  &c. 
Priusquam  respondeo  .  .  .  dicam,  &c,  (Phil.  ii.  3.) 
Priusquam   conor proponam,    &c,   (iii.  de 

Orat.  25.) 

(c)  Hsec   omnia  ante  facta  sunt,  quam  Verres   Italiam 

attigit,  All  these  things  were  done  hefore   Verres 
reached  Italy. 
Ducentis  annis  ante  quam  Romam  caper ent,  in  Italiam 
Galli  transcenderunt,  The  Gauls  crossed  over  into 
Italy  two  hundred  years  hefore  they  took  Rome. 
501.  (1)  (Eng.)  A  mortal  body  must  necessarily  die. 

(Lat.)     It  is  necessary,  that  a  mortal  body  should  die  (Corpus  mor- 
tale  interire  necesse  est ;  or  intereat  necesse  est ;  the  sub) 
being  governed  by  ut  omitted). 
(2)  (Eng.)  There  is  no  living  pleasantly. 

(Lat.)    It  cannot  be  lived  pleasantly  ( jucunde  vivi  non  potest). 

505.  Vocabulary  69. 

(The  Prepositions  Pr-eter,  Secundum  ) 
Prjeter,  beside;  beyond,  above  (of  degree);  contrary  to;  besides;  U> 
say  nothing  of,  except,  but. 
Contrary  to  expectation,  praeter  expectationem. 

Contrary  to  your  custom,  praeter  consuetudinem  tuam. 

Secundum    (from    sequi),    'following.'     Along;    after    (of   time)/ 
after,  next  to ;  according  to ;  in  favour  of  (with  verbs  of  judging,  &c). 
He  made  a  decree  in  your  favour,    secundum  te  decrevit. 

Exercise  74. 
[How  are  questions  of  appeal  to  be  translated  in  oblique  narration  7] 
fi06.  I  will  not  leave  the  city  before  I  have  had  an  interview 
with  Caius  (b).  Before  I  set  out,  I  had  an  interview  with  Balbus 
(c).  He  answered  that,  before  he  set  out,  he  had  an  interview 
with  Caesar.  There  is  no  living  pleasantly,  unless  you  live 
[impers.  pass.)  according  to  nature.  Under  the  guidance  of  na- 
ture there   is  no  going  wrong.      Contrary  to   expectation,  the 


J  64.  507-511.]  DUM,   DONEC,  QUOAD,  &C.  1  SI 

Praetor  has  made  a  decrei  in  favour  of  Caius.  They  exclaim, 
Are  not  hidden  dangers  always  the  most  difficult  to  avoid  ?' 
Who  can  deny,  that  the  Praetor  has  made  a  decree  in  your  favour? 
This  being  the  case,  I  have  no  doubt  that  the  Praetor  will  make  a 
decree  in  your  favour.  This  being  the  case,  the  world  must 
necessarily  be  governed  by  some  wise  mind.  Virtue  must  neces- 
sarily' hate  vice.  J  am  not  so  foolish  as  to  deny  (486,  i)  tnat 
virtue  and  vice  are  contrary  to  each  other.  If  I  had  not  believed 
Caius,  I  should  never  have  put  myself  in  their  power.  Who  if 
there  who  denies  this  ? 


XXVI. 

§  64.     Dum,  Donee,  Quoad,  &c. 

507.  (a)  Dum,  donee,  quoad  (=  until,  till)  take  the  indicative^ 
when  they  merely  mark  the  time  up  to  which  the  action  or  state 
is  to  be  continued. 

508.  (b)  Dum,  donee,  quoad  (=  until,  till)  take  the  subjunctive^ 
when  that  up  to  which  the  action  or  state  is  to  be  continued,  is  to 
be  represented,  not  as  a  fact,  but  only  as  what  may  possibly  occur  ; 
especially  when  it  is  itself  the  object  pursued. 

509.  (c)  Dum,  whilst,  takes  a  present  indicative  even  when  the 

principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense. 

This  arose  from  an  endeavour  to  represent  duration  in  a  vivid  man- 
ner. A  past  tense  is  occasionally  found,  e.  g.  '  qui  dum  veritus  est,  non 
vidit.'  (Cic.  ad.  Att.  i.  16.)  'Quae  divina  res  dum  conjiciebatur,  qua> 
sivit,'  &c.    (Nep.  Hann.  ii.) 

510.  Dum,  donee,  quamdiu,  quoad u  (=  as  long  as)  take  the  indi- 
cative. 

511.  (a)  Epaminondas  ferrum  in  corpore  retinuit,  quoad  renun- 

tiatum  est  vicisse  Boeotios,  Epaminondas  retained 


■  In  the  sense  of  'whilst,'  'as  long  as,'  donee  always  denotes  a  spate  of  time 
carried  on  to  such  a  termination:  dum  denotes  this,  but  more  with  reference  to 
the  space  itself,  than  to  its  termination.  Quoad  marks  the  continuance  of  tho 
lime  quite  up  to  the  point  mentioned  :  it  relate*  to  a  demonstrative  expressed  or 
understood  in  the  principal  clause.  When  the  statement  introd .  ced  by  whiltd 
is  the  cause  or  occasion  of  what  follows,  dum  should  be  used. 


182 


DTJM,  DONEC,  QUOAD,  dec.  [§  64.  512-514 


the  spear  in  his  body,  till  it  was  reported  to  him  that 
the  BcBotians  had  conquered. 

(b)  Differant,  d<mec  defervescat  ira,  Let  them  put  off  (the 

purpose  of  taking  revenge)  till  their  anger  cools. 

(c)  Dum  Romani  ea  parant  .  .  .  jam  Saguntum  oppugna- 

batur,  Whilst  the  Romans  were  making  these  prepa. 
rations,  Saguntum  was  already  besieged. 

512.    FOCABULARY  70. 


After, 
Before, 

As  soon  as, 


When  =  as  soon  as, 

(Adverbs  of  place  with  genit.) 
Where  in  the  world  are  you  ?  ubi  terrarum  es  1 

Where  in  the  world  are  we  ? 
To  such  a  height  of  insolence, 
To  what  a  degree  of  madness, 


postquam ;  sometimes  posteaquam. 

antequam 

ut  primum ;  quum  primum  ;  fclmul  aq, 

or  atque :  (with  indie.) 
ubi  i  ut ;  (with  indie.) 


As  far  as  I  can, 


As  far  as  can  be  done ;  as  far  as 
possible. 

To  meet. 


ubi  gentium  sumus  1 

eo  insolentiae. 

quo  amentias. 

quoad  ejus  facere  possum  (where  tho 

genii.  '  ejus '  relates  to  tne  preceding 

proposition). 

quoad  ejus  fieri  potest. 


To  march  against  the  enemy, 
Nearer, 


Enough, 


obviam  (with  the  dat :  obviam,  from  ob, 

via), 
obviam  ire  hostibus. 
(  prbpius  (with  dat.  or  ace.  (see  211)  So 
C      proxime). 
(Adverbs  of  quantity  with  genit.) 

'  sat,  or  satis,T  of  what  is  really  enough  ■ 
afFatim  of  what  a  given  person  thinks 
or  feels  enough.  Affatim  =  ad  fatim, 
'  to  satiety ;'  fatis  an  old  substantive 
from  the  same  root  as  fatisco,  fatigo. 
I  and  fastidium.  (D.) 
Abundantly,  abunde. 

Abundance  of  timber,  abunde  materiae. 

513.  (Eng.)  It.  addition  to  this,  he  was  blind. 

(Lat.)     There  was  added  to  this,  that  he  was  blind  (Hue  accedtbat,  iu 
caecus  esaet.    With  a  pres.  tense,  accedit). 

514.  ICj*  With  the  adverbs  meaning  '  as  soon  as,'  the  English  pluperfect  should 

be  translated  by  the  perfect.     In  this  sense,  postquam  '  after '  is  usually 


w  Sat  before  polysyllables,  aatu  Defore  dissyllables.     (Baumgarlen    Ci'udus  ad 
Sue  ton.) 


|05.515,516.]  quod.  133 

followed  by  the  perfect  indicative.  (See  note*,  page  114.;  When  the 
pluperf.  is  used,  the  succeeding  action  is  generally  not  represented  ua 
following  the  other  immediately :  e.  g.  P.  Africaiius,  post  caquambis 
consul  et  censor  fu  erat,  L.  Cottam  in  judicium  vocatit  (Cic.  Div.  in 
Caec.  21) :  this  however  is  not  always  the  case :  e.  g.  Ncp.  Lysand.  4 
(end) :  postquamde  suis  rebus — d  ixera  t, — librum—tradidit.  W  hen 
continued  states  or  repeated  actions  are  described,  the  principal  verb 
being  in  the  imperfect,  the  imp.  or  pluperf.  is  used.  '  Simulac  se  re- 
miserat ....  repcriebatur.'     (Nep.  Alcib.  1.)     (Z.) 

Exercise  75. 
[How  are  questions  of  appeal  to  be  translated  in  direct  narration  7  427,  c] 
515.  As  long  as  he  was  in  the  city,  I  opposed  his  designs. 
Men,  whilst  they  teach,  learn.  Who  can  deny  that  men  learn 
whilst  they  teach  ?  As  soon  as  the  business  is  finished,98  I  shall 
wait  upon  Caius.  As  soon  as  the  business  was  finished  satisfac 
torily,  he  waited  upon  Caius.  Wait  till  Caius  returns.98  Let  me 
know  where  in  the  world  you  are.  Men  have  now  arrived 
(impers.  pass.)  at  such  a  height  of  madness,  that  p  whilst  all  men 
consult  their  own  interests,  no  man  provides  for  the  interests  of  his 
country.  It  is  the  part  of  a  wise  man,  as  long  as  he  lives,  to 
prefer  virtue  to  all  things.  In  addition  to  this,  he  was  lame  of  one 
leg.  How  few  are  there  who  provide-for-the-interests  of  their 
country !  He  persuaded  the  Athenians  to  march  against  the 
enemy.  Wait  at  Rome  till  you  recover.  The  business  is  too 
difficult  to  be  finished  by  anyw  body.  It  is  not  every  body  who  can 
finish  such,0)  a  business  in  a  few  days.  We  learn  many  things 
whilst  we  are  playing.  Have  we  (then)  need  of  some  Greek  master 
io  teach  us109  to  play  upon  the  lyre  ?  Let  us  neither  ask  what  is 
disgraceful  nor  do  it  p  when  we  are  asked. 


XXVII. 


§  G5.     Quod. 
516.  'That'  is  expressed  by  *  quod,'  when  it  introduces  the 
ground  of  a  former  statement,  or  the  explanation  of  a  term  in  a 
former  proposition  ;  especially  when  it  refers  to  a  demonstrative 
pronoun  or  adverb  expressed  or  implied. 

•  Show  the  ambiguity  of  this  sentence  by  translating  it  in  two  ways. 


184  quod.  1$  65.  517-521 

Such  pronouns  and  adverbs  are  id,  hoc,  illud:  to,  ideo,  idcirco,  prop 
Urea,  interea,  ita,  tarn,  sic,  fyc. 

517.  Verbs  of  the  affections  {rejoice,  grieve,  wonder,  &c.,)  are 
followed  by  quod,  or  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive.* 

518.  Quod  takes  the  indicative,  except  when  it  introduces  tho 

ground  of  another  person's  judgment  or  conduct ;  when  it  takes 

the  subjunctive  (by  461). 

Of  course  it  must  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  in  oblique  narration  i 
and  it  must  be  remembered  that  when  an  ace.  with  infin.  follows  a  verb 
of  saying,  &c,  the  narration  is  oblique. 

519.  The  ground  of  an  accusation  is,  of  course,  in  the  sub. 
junctive  (by  461);  so  also  the.  reason  for  which  another  person 
praises  or  blames  any  body. 

520.  '  Quod '  with  a  verb  is  often  the  proper  way  of  translating  ihe  parti' 
cipial  substantive  under  the  government  of  a  preposition. 

(1)  (Eng.)  He  accused  him  of  having  betrayed  the  king. 

( Lot. )  He  accused  him,  that  he  had  betrayed  the  king  (quod  with 
subj). 

(2)  (Eng.)  His  having  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great  thing. 
( hat. )    That  he  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great  thing. 

(or)  That  (or,  this)  that  he  spared  the  conquered,  is  a  great 
thing,  y 

(3)  (Eng.)  He  praised  (or  blamed)  him,  for  having  done  this. 

( Lat. )   He  praised  (or  blamed)  him,  that  he  had  done  this. 
(Quod  with  subj.:  the  indicative  would  intimate  that  the  narrator 
believed  him  to  have  actually  done  it.) 

(4)  (Eng.)  Many  persons  admire  poems  witlwut  understanding  them. 
(  Lat. )  Many  persons  admire  poems,  nor  understand  them. 

(neque  intelligunt.) 

(5)  (Eng.)  You  cannot  be  ruined  without  ruining  others. 
( Lat. )  You  cannot  be  ruined  so  as  not  to  ruin  others. 

(ut  non l  with  subj.) 

521.  Vocabulary  71. 

To  be  praised;  grieve  for,  j  dm^  *°ta.  dolit'   <with  «*   0r  «* 

C     with  de). 


*  Quod,  introducing  the  statement  as  a  fact,  is  naturally  better  suited  to  the 
past  than  to  the  present.  (  Gaudeo  quod  scripsisti '  is  better  than  '  te  scripsisse.' 
(Z.)  With  verbs  that  express  an  emotion  or feeling  (gaudeo,  doleo,  miror),  th« 
ace.  with  inf.  is  the  more  common :  with  those  that  express  the  manifestation 
of  an  emotion  or  feeling  (laudo,  reprehendo,  accuso,  misereor,  gratias  ago,  grat- 
ulor,  consolor),  quod  is  prefe  rsd.     (Z.,  8th  ed.) 

1  Magnum  est  hoc,  quod  victor  victis  pepercit. 

*  Or  '  quin '  if  the  sentence  is  of  a  negative  character. 

*  Dolerc  is  to feel  pain  or  sorrow;  mesrere  is  to  sfww  it  by  outward  signs  that 


0  65.522.]  quod.  1»8 

Grieve;  grieve  for,  mcerere,  moestus  (with  ace.  or  abl.\. 

To  mourn  ;  bewail,  lugere,  lax,  luct. 

To  be  glad,  laetari,  laetatus. 

To  rejoice,  gaudere,  *>  eavlsus  sum. 

Exceedingly,  vehementer. 

To  recruit  oneself,  se  ref  icere. 

(The  Preposition  db.) 
De,  concerning^  about ;  down  from ;  from  (Cicero  has,  audiro  de  all 
quo :  so  Pmere,  conducere  de  aliquo) :  of  with  partitives :  by  or  accord- 
ing to,  of  advice  (de  consilio  meo) ;  with  words  of  time  ;  &c. 

In  die  middle  of  the  night,  media  de  nocte. 

By  night,  de  nocte. 

Late  at  night,  multa  de  nocte. 

On  purpose,  de  industria. 

To  know  a  man  by  face,  de  facie  nosse. 

Unexpectedly,  de  improvlso. 

Exercise  76. 

fin  sentences  dependent  on  an  infin.,  what  tenses  are  sometimes  found  instead 
of  the  imp  erf.  and  pluperf.  subj.?    469,  d.] 

522.  Know  that  I  do  not  know  the  man  even  by  face.     I  am 

exceedingly  glad  that  you  have  finished  the  business   to  your 

satisfaction.     I  rejoice  that  you  have  obtained  a  triumph  for  a 

victory  over  the  Gauls.     1  shall  wait  at  Rome  till  I  recruit  myself. 

He  answered  that  he  was  going  to  remain  at  Rome  till  he  had 

recruited  himself.     I  will  not  leave  Rome  before  I  have  iccruitOvl 

myself.     Caius  praises  the  greatest  poets  without  understanding 

them.     I  had  rather  be  a  good  man  without  seeming  (one),  than. 

seem  one  without  being  (so)  [Translate  with  ui\.     Would  you 

prefer  being  wise  without  seeming  (so),  or  seeming  wise  without 

being  so  ?     I  did  not  fear  that  any  one  would  grieve  for  the  death 

of  abandoned  citizens.     No  one  ever  grieved  more  for  the  death 


are  involuntary,  arising  from  an  irresistible  feeling  (and  thus  mcerere  and 
riccror  rise  above  dolere  and  dolor) ;  lugere  is  to  sfuno  it  by  conventional  slgae ; 
fo  mourn.     (D.) 

b  Gaudere  is  to  feel  joy  ;  laetari  is  to  show  it  by  joyful  looks,  &c.  (D.)  Doder- 
lein  thinks  Cicero  mistaken  when  he  makes  la:tari  express  an  exulting,  triumph- 
mt  joy,  gaudere  a  more  temperate  delight.  But  could  Cicero  be  mistaken  ou 
suck  a  point,  involving  no  principle  of  etymology,  but  only  a  correct  perception  o( 
the  relative  force  of  two  words  in  common  use?  At  all  events,  according  to 
OoderlehCs  own  explanation,  laetari,  expressing  the  manifestation  of  joy  in  cou- 
Kqnence  of  an  irrcsiotMe feeling,  might  be  expected  to  rise  above  gaudere,  juot 
as  mcerere  above  dolor*. 


186  THE  ROMAN  CALENDAR.  [§66.523-528.. 

of  his  only  son,  than  he  grieved  for  that  of  his  father.  Why 
should  V  ncrw  bewail  the  life  of  men  ?  This  being  the  case,  what 
reason  have  welM  for  bewailing  the  death  of  abandoned  citizens? 
How  few  are  there,  who  would  bewail  the  death  of  Caius  * 
They  p  set  upon  the  enemy  unexpectedly,  and  put  them  to  flight. 
He  did  it  in  such  a  manner  (ita)  that  it  seemed  to  be  done  or 
purpose. 


XXVIII. 

§  66.     The  Roman  Calendar. 

523.  The  Roman  months  were  of  the  same  number  of  days  as 
the  English  months,  but  were  differently  divided. 

524.  The  first  day  of  the  month  was  called  the  Kalends  (Ka- 
lendse) :  the  Nones  (Nonce)  fell  on  the  fifth  or  seventh  :  the  Ides 
(Idus  uum,  f.)  were  always  eight  days  after  the  Nones,  that  is, 
on  the  thirteenth  or  fifteenth. 

525.  In  March,  July,  October,  May, 
The  Nones  were  on  the  seventh  day. 

(And  therefore  the  Ides  on  the  fifteenth.) 

526.  Days  between  the  Kalends  and  the  Nones  were  reckoned 

by  their  distance   from  the  Nones :    those*  between  the  Nones 

and  the   Ides  by  their  distance   from  the  Ides :  those  after  the 

Ides  by  their  distance  from  the  Kalends  of  the  following  month. 

Hence  a  day  after  the  fifteenth  of  May,  would  Jbe  such  a  day  before 
the  Kalends  of  June. 

527.  Suppose  we  take  the  third  of  March ;  this  is  a  day  before  the  Nones  oi 
March,  which  happens  On  the  seventh.  Now  7 — 3  =  4 :  but  the  Ro 
mans  reckoned  both  days  in,  so  that  they  would  call  the  third  of  March 
not  the  fourth,  but  the  ffth  day  before  the  Nones. 

528.  To  suit  this  Roman  way  of  reckoning,  we  must  subtract 
the  given  day  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which  the  Nones  or 
Ides  fall  increased  by  one.  If  the  day  be  one  before  the  Kalends, 
we  must  subtract  from  the  last  day  of  the  month  increased  by  two 
If  the  remainder  be  two,  the  day  will  be  pridie  ;  because  the  day 
the  Romans  would  call  the  second  day  before,  was  '  the  day  be- 
fore,'  as  we  speak. 


$GG.  529-531.]  the  roman  calendar.  181 

529.      Thus  take  the  3rd,  9th,  23rd  of  June  : 

(1)  In  June  the  Nones  are  on  the  fifth :  there  "ore  three  must  be  sub- 
tracted from  (5  f-  1  =• )  six ;  and  the  remainder  being  3,  the  day  is 
'  the  third  day  before  the  Nones  of  June.' 

(2)  In  June  the  Nones  being  on  the  fifth,  the  Ides  are  on  the  thirteenth, 
and  the  subtraction  must  be  from  fourteen.  Hence  subtract  9  from 
14 :  the  remainder  being  5,  the  day  is  the  fifth  day  before  the  Ides  of 
June. 

(3)  Since  June  has  thirty  days,  we  must  subtract  from  thirty-two." 
Hence  substract  23  from  32 ;  the  remainder  being  9,  the  day  is  the 

ninth  day  before  tlu  Kalends  of  July. 

(£T  (The  adjective  forms  are  used  with  the  months,0  and  Idus 
is  fern.) 

530.  To  express  when  ? 

'On  the  third  before  the  Kalends  of  March'  is  by  rule  'die  tertio  ante 
Kalendas  Martias,'  which  was  shortened  by  the  omission  of  die  and 
ante  into  'tertio  Kalendas  Martias'  or  * iii.  Kal.  Mart.' 

But  another  form  is  used  (almost  exclusively)  by  Cicero  and 
Livy ;  this  form  is  'ante-diem  tertium  Kalendas  Martias'  shortened 
into  '  a.  d.  iii.  Kal.  Mart.,'  a  form  which  cannot  be  explained  gram' 
matically. 

This  ante-diem  came  to  be  treated  as  an  indeclinable  substantive,  and 
the  prepositions  ad,  in,  ex,  were  prefixed  to  it,  as  to  other  substantives 
of  time. 

531.  [Whenl   on  what  day?] 

Natus  est  Augustus  ix.  Kalendas  Octobres,  Augustus 
was  born  on  the  twenty -third  of  September  (32 — 
9=23.) 

Claudijs  natus  est  Kalendis  Augustis,  Claudius  was 
born  on  the  first  of  August. 

Claudius  obiit  (or  excessit)  iii.  Idus  Octobres,  Claudius 
died  on  the  thirteenth  of  October  (16 — 3=13.) 

Meministine  me  ante  diem  (a.  d.)  xii.  Kalendas  Novem- 
bres  dicere  in  Senatu  ?  Do  you  remember  that  I  spoke 
in  the  Senate  onthe2lstof  October  ?  (33 — 12=21.) 
[Against  or  by  such  a  day  :  for  such  a  day.] 

Consul    comitia   in  ante  diem  tertium    Nonas    Sextiles 


0  These  forms  are,  Januarius,  Februarius,  Martius,  Apriis,  Maius,  Junius, 
tAuintlli*  (or  Julius),  Seitilis  {or  Augustus),  Septem-,  Octo-,  Novem-,  Decern 

brl3. 


188  THE  ROMAN  CALENDAR.  [§66.532-535. 

(  =  Augustus*1)  edixit,   The  Consul  fixed  the  elections 

by  an  edict  for  the  third  of  August  (6 — 3=3.) 
In  ante  dies   octavum  et  septimum  Kalendas  Octobres 

comitiis  aicta  dies,   The  lime  of  the  elections  is  fixed 

for  the  twenty  fourth   and  twenty-fifth  of  September 

(32—8=24). 
Capuam   venire  jussi    sumus  ad    Nonas    Februarias^ 

We  are  ordered  to  come  to  Capua  by  the  fifth  oi 

February. 

532.  Vocabulary  72. 

r  comitia,  drum  (properly,'  the  assembling 
Elections,  }     of  the  people '  for  the  purpose  of  elect' 

(     ing  the  consuls,  &c.  &c). 

To  my  election,  \  ad  mea  comitia  (*•  e-  t0  the  meeting  at 

(     which  I  am  to  be  elected  or  rejected). 
To  suffer,  singre,*  siv,  sit;  pSti,  ior,  passus. 

To  lose  flesh,  corpus  amittgre. 

To  stay  (in  a  place),  commorari. 

To  compel,  cogere,  coeg,  coact. 

The  day  before  the  Ides,  prldie  Idus :  or  pridie  Iduum. 

To  fix  by  edict,  edlcere  (with  ace). 

It  is  worth  while,  operse  pretium  est. 

533.  (a)  (Eng.)  Instead  of  reading,  he  is  at  play. 

(Lat.)    He  is  at  play,  whereas  he  ought  to  read  (quum  debeat). 
(b)  {Eng.)  Instead  of  growing  rich,  he  is  growing  poor. 

(Lat.)    He  is  growing  poor,  whereas  he  might  grow  rich  (quum  pos3et). 

534.  (c)  (Eng.)  Far  from  thinking  this,  I  hold,  &c. 

(Lat.)    It  is  so  far  off  that  I  should  think  this,  that  I  hold,  &c.  (tan- 
tum  abest  ut— ut,e  &c.) 

Exercise  77. 

535.  Tiberius  died  on  the  sixteenth  of  March.     Nero  was  born 


«i  The  months  of  Juiy  and  August  were  called  Quintilis,  Sextilis  respectively, 
( =  the  fifth  and  sixth  month,  reckoning  from  March,  the  old  beginning  of  the 
year,)  till  those  names  were  exchanged  for  Julius  and  Augustus  in  honour  of  the 
first  two  Caesars. 

*  Sinere  is  properly  '  to  let  go?  '  not  to  stop?  pati  is,  '  not  to  prohibit :'  sinere  has 
for  its  immediate  object  the  person  acting,  pati  the  action  itself:  sinere  is  ami' 
monly,  though  not  exclusively,  followed  by  ut  with  the  subj. :  pati  by  the  ace. 
with  infin.     (D.) 

•  Tantum  abest  ut  nostra  miremur,  ut .  .  .  .  nobis  ipse  non  satisfaciat  Demoo* 
thenes.  Sometimes  the  second  ut  is  omitted,  the  clause  having  vix  or  etiam : 
'tantum  abfuit  ut  inilammarea  nostros  animos  :  somnum  vix  tenebamua.' 
<Cic.  Brut.  80.) 


$  G7.  530-539.]     connection  of  propositions,  &c.  189 

on  the  fifteenth  of  December.  Caius  was  born  on  the  fifteenth 
of  October.  Balbus  died  on  the  twelfth  of  August.  Vitellius 
was  born  on  the  24th  of  September ;  or,  as  some  (say),  on  the 
seventh  of  September.  The  Consul  has  fixed  (by  edict)  the  elec- 
tions for  the  21st  of  July.  I  believe  that  the  elections  will  be 
fixed  for  the  ninth  of  April.  Say  that  I  shall  not  be  angry  with 
him,  if  he  does  not  come*8  to  my  election.  I  am  compelled  to 
stay  here  till  I  recruit  myself:  for  I  have  lost  both  flesh  and 
strength.  There  are  some  who  think  that  the  elections  will  be 
fixed  for  the  ninth  and  tenth  of  July.  Instead  of  being  with  me, 
he  is  at  his  own  house.  Instead  of  being  very  rich  (as  he  might 
have  been),  he  is  very  poor.  Instead  of  applying  vigorously  to 
the  affair,  he  is  gone  into  the  country.  I  am  so  far  from  praising, 
that  I  can  scarcely  restrain  myself  from  calling  you  a  betrayer 
of  your  country.  I  am  so  far  from  believing  any  body  (no  mat- 
ter who  he  may  be),  that  I  scarcely  believe  you.  I  was  so  far 
from  being  ill  spoken  of,  that  all  men  praised  me.  There  were 
some  who  laughed. 


XXIX. 

§  67.     Connection  of  Propositions  by  the  Relative. 
Imperative  forms. 

536.  Any  relative  pronoun  or  adverb  may  be  used  for  the  cor- 
responding  demonstrative  with  the  conjunction  and  (and  some- 
times,  but,  for,  therefore,  &c.) 

537.  When  in  English  such  a  clause  as  '  they  say,' '  as — says,' 
&c,  is  inserted  parenthetically  in  a  relative  sentence,  the  verb  of 
this  clause  should  generally  be  made  the  principal  veHb  of  the 
relative  clause  in  Latin,  the  other  verb  being  put  in  the  infini- 
tive. 

538.  When  in  English  the  relative  pronoun  is  separated  from 
its  verb  by  another  clause,  which  contains  a  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, the  relative  should  be  expressed  in  that  clause  in  Latin,  and 
the  demonstrative  be  expressed  or  understood  in  the  other. 

539.  The  imperative  may  be  expressed  by  several  circumlo- 
cutions : 


190  CONNECTION  OF  PROPOSITIONS      [§67.540-542 

(1)  The  imperat.  of  command  by  cura  ut  (take  care  to), 
fac  ut  (or  fac  only)  with  subj. 

(2)  The    imperat.    of  prohibition   by  cave   with   subj 
(governed  by  ut  omitted),  or  noli  with  infinJ 

540.  (a)  (Eng.)  Two  and  two  make  four  :  and  if  this  is  granted,  &c. 
(Lot.)    Two  and  two  make  four :  if  which  is  granted,  &c. 
(6)  (Eng.)   Caius,  who,  they  say,  was  killed  at  Lugdunum. 
(Lai.)    Caius,  whom  they  report  to  have  been  killed,  &c. 

(c)  (Eng.)   Crassus,  who,  as  Lucilius  tells  us,  never  laughed  but  once. 
(Lat.)    Crassus,  whom  Lucilius  reports  to  have  never  laughed  but 

once. 

(d)  (Eng.)  Narratives,  by  which,  when  we  read  them,  we  are  affected. 
(Lat )    Narratives,  which  when  we  read,  we  are  affected. 

(e)  (Eng.)  Success  with  which,  if  it  should  fall  to  our  lot,  we  should  bfe 

dissatisfied. 
(Lai.)    Success,  if  which s  should  fall  to  our  lot,  we  should  be  dis 


(f)  (Eng.)  I  did  this ;  and  if  you  had  not  thwarted  me,  &c. 
(Lat.)    I  did  this ;  whom  if  you  had  not  thwarted,  &c. 

541.  [C.  xxxv.]  fjf {  Will '  and  '  would?  '  will  not '  and  { would  not '  are  often 
principal  verbs,  to  be  translated  by  vclle  and  nolle  respectively. 

They  are  to  be  translated  when  for 

will,  would,  we  may  substitute 

is  (are,  &c.)  willing,       was  (were,  &c.)  willing. 

542.  Vocabulary  73. 

(Phrases  with  e,  ex  ;  prje,  pro,  in.) 

To  have  a  pain  in  my  feet,  ex  pedibus  laborare,  or  dolere. 

To  cook  with  water,  ex  aqua  cbquCre ;  cox,  coct. 

From  a  wall,  ex  muro. 

Opposite,  over-against,  e,  not  ex,  regione.* 

To  be  tired  with  a  journey,  e  via  languere. 

To  live  according  to  nature,  e  natura  vlvgre. 

From  the  heart,  ex  animo  (in  sincerity). 

It  is  for  my  interest,  e  re  mea  est.h 

(To  place)  on  a  table,  in  mensa. 
For  =  owing  to,  especially  of  ob-  )  pr{Je  (wUh  aU)^ 

stacles,  ) 

In  comparison  with  him,  prae  illo. 

Safe,  salvus,  a,  urn ;  incolumls,  is.  eJ 


•  Cura  ut  quam  primum  venias.    Fac  animo  forti,  magnoqtie  8X9.     Cave 
putes,  or  noli  putare.— Such  forms  in  English  are,  itake  care  to,'  *6e  sure  you* 

mind  you?  Ac. 
8  In  Latin,  the  relative  must  stand  before  si. 

*  Another  noun  will,  of  course,  follow  regione  in  the  gat. 
t  So,  e  republica  est. 

'  A  person  is  tutus  when  he  is  in  safety ;  securus  when  he  believes  himself  to 


§  *J7.  543.  BY  THE  RELATIVE.  191 

Pro  virili  parte,  according  to  one's  duty  or  power  as  an  individual  (not 
'with  all  one's  might ')    as  far  as  an  individual  can. 

Pro  re  nata  (according  to  the  thing  that  has  arisen)  sb  according  to 
circumstances. 

Pro  eo  ac  mereor,  according  to  my  deserts. 

Exercise  78. 

543.  I  for  my  part  wished  this:  and  if  Pompejus  had  not 
envied  me,  the  republic  would  now  be  safe.  Philosophy  teaches 
that  the  world  moves  ;  and  if  this  be  true,  we  also  must  neces- 
sarily move.  Who  can  deny  that  this  is  for  my  interest  1  The 
gods  will  requite  me  according  to  my  deserts.  Is  it  not  certain, 
that  the  gods  will  requite  you  according  to  your  deserts  ?  I  am 
sorry  that  you  have  a  pain  in  your  head.  If  you  had  done  this, 
I  should  have  praised  you  from  my  heart.  You  will  not  be  able 
to  see  the  sun  for  the  multitude  of  our  javelins.  Caius,  being 
tired  of  his  journey,  was  killed  by  his  slave.  They  answered 
that  they  would  receive  us.  Did  he  not  answer  that  he  would 
not  receive  us?  Bo  not  think  that  the  soul  is  mortal.  Take  care 
to  finish  the  business  to  my  satisfaction.  Do  not  think  that  every 
man  can  command  himself.  Be  sure  to  come  to  my  assistance 
as  soon  as  possible.  Who  will  deny  that  these  things  are  for  the 
interests  of  the  republic  ?  I  cannot  speak  for  sorrow.  Be  sure 
not  to  impute  this  to  me  as  a  fault.  Be  sure  not  to  hurry.  Be 
sure  not  to  believe  that  it  is  necessary  to  make  haste  ;  for,  if  you 
believe  this,  it  is  all  over  with  us.  The  moon  is  eclipsed,  when 
it  is  opposite  to  the  sun.  May  I  not  determine  what  should  be 
done  according  to  circumstances  ?  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  citizen 
to  defend  the  republic  as  far  as  an  individual  can.  Benefits,  for 
which,  if  you  confer  them  upon  me,  I  will  prove  myself  grateful 
(memor).  You  may  eat  the  food  p  which  is  placed  on  the  table. 
He  says  that  he  will  not  eat  the  cheese  p  which  is  placed  on  the 


I 


oe  so,  and  is  without  care  (se-curus)  or  anxiety  on  the  subject.  Hence  'Ne  si: 
aecurua,  qui  non  est  tutus  ab  hoste.'  Of  salvus,  sospes,  incolumis,—salvus  says 
the  least  (as  it  properly  relates  only  to  (existence) ;  sospes  more,  as  it  points  to 
the  protection  of  a  higher  power;  incolumis  the  most  of  all,  as  it  excludes  not 
only  annihilation,  but  even  the  supposition  of  any  injury  or  attack. 


li)2  ROMAN  WAY  OF  RECKONING  MONEY.       [§  G8.  544-547 

table.  I  shall  do  what  appears98  best  to  be  done  according  to 
circumstances.  There  were  some  who  could  not  speak  for 
sorrow. 


XXX. 

§  68.     On  the  Roman  way  of  reckoning  money. 

544.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  money  by  sesterces  :  and  by 
nwnmus,  when  it  means  a  coin,  sestertius  is  always  meant. 

d.q. 

545.  A  sestertius  (  =  1  3|  or  3J  cents)  was  not  quite  equal  to  twopence 
English  money. 

A  sestertium  =  a  thousand  sestertii :  it  was  the  name  of  a  sum,  not 
of  a  coin. 

546.  Sestertii  and  sestertia  are  used  quite  regularly  with  nu- 
meral  adjectives  :  but  sestertium  in  the  singular  is  used  in  a  very 
peculiar  way  with  numeral  adverbs. 

547.  Q^T  With  numeral  adverbs  sestertium  means   so  many 

c  hundred  thousand  sesterces. i 

Hence  Sestertium  semel  *  =  '  a  hundred  thousand  sesterces.' 

Sestertium  decieszz.  ten  'hundred  thousand  sesterces'  =  a 

million  sesterces. 
Sestertium  vicies  =  20  '  hundred  thousand  sesterces '  =  two 
million  sesterces.  &c.    &c. 

Obs.  With  numeral  adverbs  below  (ten  tim.es,1  so  many  hundred  thou- 
sand sesterces  are  meant. 

With  numeral  adverbs  above  and  multiples  of '  ten  times,'  throw  away 
the  cipher  from  the  units'  place,  and  you  have  the  number  of '  millions 
of  sesterces.1 

Thus,  if 'sestertium  sexcenties1  were  the  sum;  throwing  away  0 
from  the  units'  place  of  600,  we  have  '  60  millions  of  sesterces1  for  th*> 
sum. 


£.     s.     d. 
*  A  sestertium  =        8      1      5£  =  $38  68. 

Sestertium  semel  =  607  5  10  =  $3873  60. 
Sestertium  decies,  centies,  millies,  &c.  (that  is,  the  multiples  of  semel  by  1C)  are 
got  approximately  by  this  rule : — For  every  cipher  in  the  proposed  multiple  add 
to  the  right  hand  of  807  one  figure  taken  (successively)  from  the  left  hand  of  the 
series  291666  continued  ad  infinitum.  Thus  to  get  sestertium  millies,  since  1000 
has  3  ciphers,  I  must  add  3  figures  (291)  taken  from  the  left  hand  of  the  given 
aeries  to  the  right  hand  of  807.  Hence  millies  sestertium  =  807291  =  nearly 
64  000,000  in  whole  numbers. 


$fi8    548-552.]     roman  way  of  reckoning  money.  193 

With  intermediate  numerals,  the  sum  is  easily  obtained  by  these 
rules:  Sestertium  ter  vieies  =  '2  million,  3  hundred  thousand  sea- 
icrcee.' 

548.  In  this  construction  sestertium  is  declined  : 
Sestertium  vicics,  two  million  sesterces. 
Sestertii  vieies,  of  two  million  sesterces,  &c. 

W9.  In  turning  the  number  of  sesterces  into  Latin,  remember  that  to  the 
numeral  before  '  millions '  I  must  add  a  cipher  in  the  units1  place  (in 
other  words,  multiply  it  by  10)  to  get  the  numeral  adverb,  that  is  to  go 
with  sestertium.  Thus  in  '  2  million  sesterces,'  by  adding  a  cipher  in 
the  units'  place  to  2,  I  get  20,  and  vieies  is  the  adverb  required. 

550.  (a)  Sex  millibus  aides  conduxit,  He  hired  a  house  for  six 

thousand  (sesterces). 

(b)  Sex  sestertia  persolvit,  He  paid  six  thousand  sesterces. 

(c)  In  sestertio  vieies  (splendide  se  gerens),  On  a  fortune 

of  two  million  sesterces. 

551.  Vocabulary  74. 

Inheritance,  haereditas,  atis,  /. 

To  keep  up  a  certain  state,  splendide  se  gergre ;  gess,  gest. 

f  llbertinus,  i,  m.  (but  if  spoken  in  refer- 
ence to   his    master,   libertus.     Thus 

A  freedman,  <      Brutus's  libertus  is  one  of  the  class 

libertini). 
foriundus: — lnati  Carthaglne,   sed  ori. 
undi  ab  Syracusis ;  •  born  at  Carthage, 

Descended  from,  <^      but  of  Syracusan  extraction ;'  or  '  de- 

scended from  a  family  that  had  for- 
merly lived  at  Syracuse.' 

Meanly  sordide. 

Exercise  79. 

552.  lie  kept  up  a  certain  state  with  a  fortune  of  three  million 
sesterces.  With  a  fortune  of  two  millions  of  sesterces  he  kept 
up  more  state  than  Caius,  who  had  received  10  millions  from  his 
father.  Caius,  the  freedman  of  Brutus,  left  more  thank  15  thou- 
sand sesterces.  That  you,  with  a  fortune  of  10  millions,  should 
live  so  meanly  !  Caius,  who  was  of  Syracusan  extraction,  sent 
Brutus  two  hundred  thousand  sesterces  as  a  present.     On  the 


k  With  awplius  plus,  minus,  &c.  quam  is  often  omitted;  the  noun  standing 
in  the  case  it  would  have  stood  in,  if  quam  had  been  expressed.  Sometime* 
however  the  ablat.  follows  these  adverbs. 


194 


ROMAN  WAY  OF  RECKONING  MONEY.       [§  69.  553-555 


23rd  of  November,  Balbus  sent  me  as  a  present  twenty  thousand 
sesterces.  He  gave  them  three  thousand  sesterces  a-piece.  From 
this  inheritance  Atticus  received  about  ten  million  sesterces. 


§  69.     On  the  division  of  the  As  :  the  method  of  reckoning  frac- 
tions, interest,  &c. 
553.  As 


Deunx 
Dextans 
Dodrans  l 
Bes  (bessis) 
Septunx 


<H=>  i 

<A=>  f 
h 


Semis  (semissis)  (-.6-  = ) 


Quincunx 

Triens 

Quadrans 

Sextans 

Uncia 


(h=)  i 
<fY=)  i 
(A~)  i 


>  of  an  As. 


554.  These  words  were  used  to  express  the  fractions  set  down 
opposite  to  their  names. 

555.  The  same  division  was  used  in  reckoning  the  interest  of 
money,  which  was  due  monthly.  Asses  usura  =  one  As  per 
month  for  the  use  of  a  hundred.  This  was  also  called  centesima. 
usurae,  because  in  100  months  a  sum  equal  to  the  whole  principal 
would  have  been  paid. 

Asses  or  centesimae  usurae  =  12  per  cent. 


Deunces 

11 

Dextantes 

10 

Dodrantes 

9 

Besses 

8 

Septunces 

7 

Semisses 

►    usurae    < 

6 

Q,uincunces 

5 

Trientes 

4 

Ctuadrantes 

3 

Sextantes 

2 

Unciae            j 

1 

BincB  centesimae  =  24  per  cent,  and  so  on. 


i  Dodrans  =  de-quadrant). 


J  09.  550,  557.]     roman  way  of  reckoning  money.  195 

55G.  (a)  Statura  ejus  quinque  pedum  et  dodrantis  fuit,  His 
height  was  Jive  feet  and  three-fourths  (Jive  feet 
nine). 
(Eum)  haeredem  fecit  ex  dodrante,  He  left  him  heir 
to  three-fourths  of  his  estate. 
(3)  Assibus  usuris  grandem  pecuniam  collocavit,  He 
invested  a  large  sum  of  money  at  12  per  cent. 

Exercise  80. 

557.  Cams,  the  freedman  of  Balbus,  has  been  made  heir  to 
one  half  of  his  estate.  He  has  left  one  Caius,  of  Carthaginian 
extraction,  the  heir  to  seven-twelfths  of  his  estate  ;  from  which 
inheritance  he  will  receive,  I  think,  about  six  hundred  thousand 
sesterces.  The  freedman  of  Brutus,  who  died  at  Rome  on  the 
third  of  August,  has  left  nearly  fifteen  million  sesterces ;  and  it 
is  thought  that  Caius  has  been  left  heir  to  half  his  estate.  He 
is  said  to  have  lodged  a  large  sum  of  money  in  the  hands  of1 
Bulbus  at  9  per  cent. 

a  A  pud  aliqucm  collocare. 


TABLES  FOR   REFERENCE 


TABLE  I.— GENDERS. 

Obs — Maa.  exceptions  are  in  capitals  ;fem.  in  the  common  type ;  neui.  In  iiulu* 

(Third   Declension.) 


Mas.  terminations. 

KB,  OR,  OS, 

es  increasing^ 

o,  when  not  do,  go,  io. 


Principal  Exceptions. 
cr)  cadaver        uber 

iter 

papaver 

tuoer 
or)  arbor 

cequor 

marmor 

cor 
es)  compes 

merces 

merges 

quies 
oe)co3 

dos 

os  Rossis) 

os  (oris) 

ichaos 

iepos 

imelos 
o) caro 

techo 


ver 
verber 


requies 


teges 


First  Decl.  Fern. 
except  names  of  men. 


Sec.  Decl.  (us,  er)  § 
Mas. — except 
alvus 
domus 
humus 
vannus 
pelagus 
virus 
tulgus  (also  m.) 


Fern,  terminations. 

do,  go,  io,* 

as,  is,  aus, 

x, 

es  not  increasing 

s  impure 

us  in  hypermon. 

Principal  Exceptions. 

<ZofOEDO 
J  cardo 

b.    ~)  LIGO 
W  I  MARGO  (f )  X 
is)  AMNI8  LAPIS 

ANGUIs(f  )  MENSIS 
AXIS  ORBIS 

CASSIs(is)  PANIS 


C0LLI3 

CINIS 

CRINIS 

ENSIS 

FASCIS 


PISCIS 

POSTIS 

PULVIS 

SANGUIS 

TORRIS 


FINIS  (f )    UNGUIS 
FOLLIS  VECTI8 

FUNIS  VERMIS 

IGNIS 
X)  CAIIX 
CODEX 
CORTEX 
GREX 
POLLEX 
SILEX  (f ) 
tTHORAX 
VERTEX 

es.  pari-  ) 
syll.  \ 
bidens  (hoe). 

s  im-  (  mons 

pure (  pons 

FONS 

DENS  RUDENS 

tHYDROPS 
OS)  AS  ELEPHAS 

vas  (vasis) 
fas 
nefas 


AClNACES. 


Neut.  terminations. 

c,  a,  t,  e,  I,  n, 
ar,  ur,  Us. 
us  monoejll. 


Principal  Exceptions 
[)  SAL 
SOL 
n)  LIEN 
REN 
SPLEN 
PECTEN 
ur)  FUR 

FURFUR 
TURTUH. 
VULTUR 

Zs)  pecus  (udis) 

LEPUS 


Fourth  Decl.  (us) 
Mas.  except 
aeus 

idus  (pi.) 
manus 
porticus 
tribus 


Fifth  Decl. 
Fern,  except 
dies  (also  Fern. 
in  sing.) 

MERIDIE8. 


*  Words  in  io  that  are  not  abstract  nouns  are  mas.  e.  g.  papilio,  pugic^ 
bcipio,  septentrio,  stellio,  unio  (pearl),  with  the  numeral  nouns  terni<\ 
auATERNio,  &c  t  Properly  Greek  words. 

J  Those  with  (f),  (m),  are  sometimes  fem.  and  mas.  respectively. 

9  Greek  nouns  in  6dus  (exodus,  methodus,  <frc.)  with  dialectus,  dipthonpus 
frr.  arc  tern. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  I  ERFECT  AND  SUPINE.  197 

These  rules  depend  on  tne  terminations;  but  some  words  have  ti 
particular  gender  from  their  meaning. 

A.  The  names  of  male  persons  and  winds,  are  masculine. 

B.  The  names  of  female  persons,  countries,  islands,  towns,  plants,  and 

trees,  are  fern. 
(a)  But  of  towns,  these  are  mas. 

(1)  Some  in  o  (croto,  hippo,  narbo,  sclmo,  prusIno)  :  and 

(2)  All  plurals  in  i;  veii,  delphi. 
These  are  neuter  : 

(1)  All  in  um,  or  plur.  a ;  (2)  Those  in  t  or  w  of  the  third ;  Pra>- 
neste,  Tibur. 
(';)  Of  trees  and  plants; 

(1)  Those  in  er  (and  many  in  us)  of  the  second  are  mas. : 

(2)  Those  in  er,  ur  of  the  third  are  neut. :  acer,  siler,  robur,  dfa. 

C.  Several  are  common :  comes,  conjux,  custos,  dux,  hospes,juvcnis,  parens 

princeps,  sacerdos,  <$-c. 


TABLE  II.— Formation  of  the  Perfect  and  Supine. 

I.  J^rThe  first  syllable  of  dissyllable  perfects  and  supines  is  long,  if  the  nexl 
ivllable  begins  with  a  consonant. 

(a)  But  seven  perfects  have  short  penult :  bibi,  dPdi,  fldi,  scldi,  steti,  stiti,  tttli. 

(6)  Nine  dissyllable  supines  have  slwrt  penult:  datum,  citum,*  itum,  litum, 
quitum,  ratum,  rOtum,  satum,  situm. 

(c)  Statum  from  sto  is  long,  but  from  sisto  short ;  and  the  compounds  of  sio 
that  make  stitum  have  i :  as  prxstltum,  from  prastare.   Though  nosco  has  notum, 
'is  compounds  that  have  itum  have  I  (cognosco,  cognltum). 
N.  B.  Verbs  in  italics  have  no  supine. 

II.  First  Conjugation  [properly  a  contracted  conjugation;  ama-o,  amo}. 

(1)  Most  verbs  of  this  conjugation  form  roots  of  perfect  and  supine,  by 
adding  v,  t,  respectively  to  the  proper  root. 

[amo  (ama-o) ;  ainat-i ;  amaJ-um.] 

(2)  Others  change  a  into  u;  and  form  the  sup.  in  Itum,  after  rejecting  a. 
CrPpo,  crepui,   crPpitum.     So  ciibo,   dbmo,  frico  (also  fricatum),  mlco, 

sono,  tono,  vCto,  sCco  (sectum)— juvo,  juvi,  jutum  1  jfivatum? 

(3)  Others  form  perf.  in  both  of  these  ways. 

DiscrPpo,  discrepavi  and  discrepui,  discrepatum  (?).   So  incre'po  (ui,  itum 
preferred) ;  the  compounds  of  neco,  and  the  obsolete  plico  (fold). 

(But  supplico,  duplico,  multiplico,  only  avi,  atum :  explico,  explain* 
reg. ;  unfold,  ui,  itum.) 
\4)  Irregular  (with  reduplication). 
Do,  dfdi,  datum  (with  a  in  dare,  dabo,  dabam,  Ac.) ;  sto,  stfti,  statum  :  but 
stare,  &c. 


•  Fromci«>,  to  excite.    Of  the  compounds  several  have  clre,  cltum,  from  tin 
eoaul.  do. 


198  FORMATION    OF    THE 

ill.  Second  Conjugation. 

Properly  a  contracted  conjugation,  but  with  the  vowels  open  in  the  first 
pers.  singular  of  the  present  tense.    (Mone-o ;  mone-is  =  moncs,  die.* 

(1)  Most  reject  e}  and  form  perfect  and  supine  in  ui,  Hum. 

(Mon-eo,  mon-ui,  mon-ltum.) 

(2)  But  some  retain  e,  and  add  v,  in  the  perf.— eo,  evi,  etum. 

Deleo,  delevi,  deletum.    Fleo,  neo,  and  verba  formed  from  oleoa  (mcJct 
to  grow),  pleo  (Jill),  and  sueo  (con  accustomed). 

(3)  Others  form  perf.  from  root  of  present,  lengthening  the  vowel  (if 
short),  w'nen  pres.  ends  in  a  single  consonant. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum :  faveo. 

Foveo,  fovi,  fotum :  mdveo,  voveo  :  p&veo,  ferveo  (andfeibui) ;  Con- 

niveo,  nivi  and  nixi. 
Prandeo  (pransum),  video  (visum),  sedeo  (sessum)>  ttrideo.* 

(4)  Others  form  perf.  in  si. 

{£)    p  sounds.     (Anyp*  sound  with  sz=ps;  but  bs  sometimes  =  m.) 

Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum ;  sorbeo,  sorpsi,  sorptum. 
(/?)  k  sounds.    (The  k  sound,  if  impure,  is  thrown  away  before  8.  Any 
k  sound  with  s=.x:  quia  to  be  treated  as  a  &  sound.) 
Mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum.  Algeo,  indulgeo  (indultum),  fulgeo,  mulgeo, 

tergeo,  turgeo,  urgeo,  torqueo  (tortum). 

Augeo,  auxi,  auctum  :  luceo,frigeo,  lugeo. 

(y)  t  sounds,    (t  sound  thrown  away  before  s.) 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum ;  rideo,  suadeo. 
(6)  Liquid  verbs,     (r  thrown  away  before  s.) 
Maneo,  mansi,  mansum :  hsereo. 

(e)   With  reduplication,    (t  sound  thrown  away  before  s.) 
Mordeo,  mbmordi,  morsum :  .pendeo,  spondeo,  tondeo. 
(£)  Neuter  passives :  audeo,  ausus  sum ;  gaudeo,  gavlsus  sum ;  soleo> 

solitus  sum. 
(»j)  The  following  have  perf.  in  ui,  but  do  not  form  their  supines  in  Hum. 
Doceo,  doctum ;  teneo,  tentum ;  misceo,  mixtum  and  mistum ;  torieo. 
tostum ;  censeo,  censum ;  recenseo,  recensum  and  recensltum. 
lVr.  Thibd  Conjugation. 

(1)  Perfect  in  i,  added  to  root  of  present. 
(a)  Acuo,  acui,  acutum :  arguo,  congruo,  imbuo,  induo,  luo  (luiturus), 
metuo,  minuo,  pluo,  ruo  (rutum,  ruitum),  spuo,  statuo,  sternuo,  suo. 
tribuo.    Volvo,  volvi,  volutum.    So  solvo. 
(/?)  t  sound  thrown  away  before  *  in  sup. 
Mando,  mandi,  mansum;  pando  (passum,  pansum  rare),  prehendo 

»  Some  of  which  have  olesco  in  pres.  Aboleo,  sup.  abolUum :  adofe«x> 
ufuMum. 
*  langueo,  langui ;  liqueo,  liqui  and  licui 

smooth,    mid.        asp. 

o  Mutes  with  a  p  sound,        p             b  (ph). 

k   c            g  (ch). 

t    t             d  (th). 


PERFECT    AND    SUPINE.  1SHI 

ecando ;  and  compounds  of  cando  (kindle),  fundo  (Lkrust),  in  cenda, 
fendo. 
(y)  Bibo  (bibi,  bibitum) ;  cudo  (cusum),  dlgo,  lambo,psallo,9cSbo(scabi)l 
sido,  vello  (vulsum :  also  vulsi),  verro  (versumd),  verto  (versum),  vlso 
(visum). 
(<*)  (Short  vowel  of  root  lengthened — a  changed  into  c  in  per/.) 
Cap-io,  cepi,  captum  :  fucio,  jicio,  ago,  Cdo  (esum),  gmo  (emptum),  le*go 
(lectum),  fodio  (fossum),  fugio  (fugitum). 
(«)  (n  or  m,  by  which  the  present  has  been  lengthened  from  a  simpler 
root,  rejected.) 
(retaining  short  vowel)  findo  (fid),  ftdi,  fissum:  scindo  (sciJ). 
(lengthening  the  vowel :  a  changed  into  c.) 
Frango,  frag,   fregi  (fractuni) ;  fundo,  fud  (f  usum) ;  linquo,  liqu,  lie 

(liqui,  lictum) ;  rumpo,  rup  (ruptum) ;  vinco,  vie  (victual). 
Percello,  perctili,  perculsum  ;  sisto,  stiti,  stltura. 
'£)  With  reduplication. 
Cado,  cCcidi,  casum ;  caedo,  cCcIdi,  caesum  ;  cano,  cPcini,  cantum ;  credo, 
credidi,  creditum ;  pango  (pag),  p?pfgi,  pactum :  parco,  pSperci,  par- 
citum  or  parsum ;  pario,  pifperi,  partum ;  pello,  pSpuli,  pulsum ;  pendo 
pependi,  pensum ;  pungo,  pupugi,  punctum ;  posco,  pbposci ;  tango 
(tag),   tCtigi,   tactum ;  tendo,   tCtendi,  tensum  and  tentum ;    tundo 
tutudi,  tusum.     So  the  compounds  of  do ;  condo,  abdo,  reddo,  &c. 
condldi,  condltum,  &c. 

(2)  Perfect  in  si. 
(n)  p  sounds.     (fjT  Any  p  sound  with  *  is  ps ;  with  t,  pt.) 

Qlubo,  glupsi,  gluptum :  nubo,  scribo,  carpo,  rPpo,  scalpo,  sculpo. 
(0)  k  sounds,  including  those  in  h}  qu,  and  ct.    (Any  k  sound  with  sisx ; 
with  t,  ct.) 
Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum  ;  sugo,  te*gp,  fingo  (fictum),  tingo,  ungo :  ango 
figo  (fixum),  jungo,   lingo,   mingo,  mungo,  ningo,  pingo  (pictum), 
plango,  stringo  (strictum),  r?go,  dlco,  duco,  coquo,  tr2ho,e  vClio.  Add 
compounds  of  stinguo  ;  exstinguo,  restinguo. 
Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  nexo  (also  nexui),  pecto. 
(i)  Liquid  Verbs  (assuming  a  p  before  s) 

Como,  compsi,  comptum  ;  demo,  promo,  sumo,  contemno. 
(«)  t  sounds,  (t  sound  thrown  away  before  * :  vowel,  if  short,  lengthened.) 
Claudo,  clausi,  clausum ;  divido,  diVIsi,  divlsum :  laedo,  ludo,  plaudo, 
rado,  rodo,  trudo :  mitto  (mlsi,  missum). — Compounds  of  vado 
(>)  k  sounds,     (the  k  sound  thrown  away.) 

Spargo,  sparsi,  sparsum ;  mcrgo,  tergo. 
(ft)  t  sounds,     (ds  changed  into  ss ;)  cedo,  cessi,  cessum. 
(»)  Liquid  verbs,     (r,  m  changed  into  *  before  «.) 

Grro,  gessi,  gestum  :  uro,  prgmo  (pressum) 
(0  Compounds  of  specio  (behoid)  ending  in  spicio  make  spexi,  spectura. 


i  cem^versum  poetical.     Z. 

•  h  seems  to  have  had  originally  a  luird  sound.    Thus  hicma  for  xtlf^  and 
fa  —x  (veh-si  =s  vexi). 


200  FORMATION    OF    THE 

Those  in  licio from  lacio  {entice)  except  elicio,  make  lexi,  tectum. 

Diligo,  dilexi,  dilectum :  intelligo,  neghgo. 

Col-,  e-,  di-,  se-,  ligo,  with  perl  ego,  praelego,  have  perf.  legi. 
(3)  Verbs  with  perf.  in  ui. 
(c)  Without  change  of  root. 

alo,  alui,  alitum  (and  altum) :  colo  (cultum),  consulo  (consultum) 
molo;  occulo  (occultum),  v8loynulo,  malo;  compounds  of  cello  (rush; 
shoot  forth) ;  fremo,  gemo,  tremo,  vomo,  gigno,  (gen,  gCnui,  geni- 
turn) ;  rapio,  rapui,  raptum ;  s&pio,  elicio,  compesco,  dispesco,  depso 
(also  depstum),  pinso  (also  pinsi,  pistum) ;  sterto  (also  sterti). — Com- 
pounds of  sero  (to  connect),  serui,  sertum. 
fv)  With  change  of  root. 

Me"to,  messui,  messum ;  pono,  pbsui,  pbsttum ;  ccrno,f  crevi,  cre- 
tum ;  lino,  levi  (livi  rare),  htum ;  sino,  sivi,  situm ;  sperno,  sprevi. 
spretum ;  sterno,  stravi,  stratum ;  sero,  sevi,  sStum ;  tero,  trivi 
trlturn. 

Cresco  (ere),  crevi,  cretum;  nosco. 

Pasco  (pastum) ;  quiesco,  suesco. 
jp)  Verbs  forming  perf.  in  xi,  as  if  they  had  roots  ending  in  k  sound  or  h. 

Fluo,  fluxi,  fiuxum ;  struo,  structum ;  vivo  (victum). 

(4)  Perfect  in  ivi. 

(a)  PSto,  petlvi,  petitum  r  cfipio,  arcesso,  capesso,  lacesso,  incesso 

(5)  Neuter  Verb. 
r)  Fido,  f  Isus  sum  (confido,  diffido). 


Fero,  tiili,  latum. 
Tollo,  sustuli,  sublatum. 

V.  Fourth  Conjugation. 

(1)  Perfect  in  i. 

(a)  Venio,  veni,  ventum ;  compgrio,  compSri,  compertum.     So  reperio 

(2)  Perfect  in  ui. 

(/?)  Salio,  salui,  saltum ;  aperio,  bperio,  amicio  (amicui  ?). 

(3)  Perfect  in  si. 

Farcio,  farsi,  fartum ;  fulcio,  haurio  (hausi,  haustum),  raucio  (rausum)  \ 
sarcio,  sepio ;  sancio,  sanxi,  sanctum ;  vincio ;  sentio,  sensi,  sensum. 

VI.  Deponents. 

Second  Conjugation.  Fateor,  fassus ;  liceor,  licitus ;  mCreor,  me- 
ritus:  misereor,  miserltus,  misertus;  reor,  rgtus;  tueor,  tuitusj 
vSreor,  veritus. 

Third  Conjugation.  Adipiscor,  adeptus :  amplector,  amplexus ;  com- 
plector,  complexus;  dlvertor,  diversus;  (so  praevertor,  reverter ;) 
expergiscor,  experrectus;  fruor,  fruitus and  fructus ;  fungor,  functus; 
grSdior,  gressus:  invehor,  invectus;  iraseor,  iratus;  labor,  lapsus  i 
Ittquor,  lbcutus ;  mbrior,  mortuus;  nanciscor,  nactus;  nascor,  natus; 


Properly,  to  seyarate.     In  the  sense  of  to  tee.  it  has  neither  perf.  nor  mxp. 


PERFECT    AND    SUPINE.  201 

nltor,  nlsus,  nixus ;  obliviscor,  oblltus ;  paciscor,  pactus ;   pascot 
pastus;    patior,   passus;  prbficiscor,  profectus;    quCror,    questus 
sPquor,  secutus:  ulciscor,  ultus;  utor,  usus. 
Fourth    Conjugation.    Adsentior,    adsensus:    experior,    expertus, 
nietior,  mensus;  opperior,  oppertus;  ordior,  orsus;  brior,  onus.* 

VII    (3jT  *c  m  verbs  denotes  the  beginning  of  an  action  or  state.) 

Inchoatives  in  sco  have  no  perfect,  but  that  (in  ui)  of  the  rcot.  This 
would  hardly  be  considered  their  perfect,  did  not  some  of  those  formed 
from  nouns  take  a  perfect  in  ui,  though  no  verb  in  eo  occurs. 

VIII.  In  compound  verbs  (1)  a,  ec,  of  the  root  often  become  i,  sometimes 
t :  (2)  e  of  the  root  often  becomes  i :  (3)  the  reduplication  of  the  root  is 
dropt,  except  in  praecurro  and  the  compounds  of  po9co  afid  disco. 


«  TUe  present  follows  the  third;  but  2  sing,  oririo  or  ortris. 

9* 


TABLE 

OP 

Dlt'l'EKENCES    OF    IDIOM 


English. 

1 .  You  and  I,         ) 
Balbus  and  I.     £ 

2.  Says  that  he  has  not*  sinned. 
tSays  that  he  has  never,  <fcc. 

3.  tie  promises  to  come. 

He  hopes  to  live. 

He  undertakes  to  do  it. 

He  pretends  to  be  mad  (16). 

4.  To  have  a  prosperous  voyage. 


5.  To  my,  his,  &c.  satisfaction :  satis- 
factorily ;  successfully. 
C.  To  fight  on  horseback. 
6*.  It  is  a  breach  of  duty. 

7.  He  sends  the  most  faithful  slave  he 

has. 

8.  He  was  the  first  to  do  this,  ) 
( Or)  He  was  the  first  who  did  this.  \ 
So,  He  was  the  only  one  wlw  did  it. 

9.  Such  is  your  temperance, 

Or,   With  your  usual  temperance. 


Latin. 

{  I  and  you, 
(  I  and  Balbus. 

Denies  (negat)  that  he  has  sinned. 
Denies  that  he  has  ever,  &c. 
He  promises  that  he  will  come  (ace.  wlifc 

inf.) 
He  hopes  that  he  shall  live  (ace.  with 

inf.) 
He  undertakes  that  he  will  do  it  (ace. 

with  inf.) 
He  pretends  that  he  is  mad  (ace.  with 

inf.:  pron.  expressed). 
To  sail  from  (  —  according  to)  one's 

thought  or  intention   (ex  sententid 

navigare.) 
Ex  sententid. 

To  fight  from  (ex)  a  horse. b 
It  is  against  (contra)  duty. 
He  sends  the  slave,  whom  he  has  the 
most  faithful. 

He  the  first  (person)  did  this  (55). 

He  alone  did  it  (solus  fecit). 

f  Wliich  is  your  temperance. 
J  Of  which  temperance  you  are. 

\  For  (  =  in  proportion  to)  your  teni 

I     perance  (56). 


a  Obs.  Says  not  should  not  be  translated  by  nego  unless  it  is  in  answer  to  an 
actual  or  virtual  question.  When  the  not  is  closely  connected  with  the  folio wixm 
verb,  it  should  be  translated  by  non. 

i»  Ex  equis,  if  more  persons  than  one  are  spoken  of. 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


203 


English. 
As  far  as  I  know. 
It's  all  over  with  .  .  . 

f  To  make  the  same  boast. 

1  To  make  the  same  promise. 

j  To  make  many  promises. 

[  To  utter  many  falsehoods. 
To  take  by  storm. 


14.  That  nothing  . . . 
That  nobody  .  .  . 
That  never  .  .  . 

[This  is  only  when  i  that '  intro- 
duces a  purjwse.] 

15.  No  food  is  so  heavy  as  not  to  be  di- 

gested, &c. 
He  is  so  foolish  as  to  think,  Ac. 

16.  She  never  saw  him  without  calling 

him,  &c. 

17.  He  could   scarcely  be  restrained 

from  throwing,  &c. 

18.  I  left  nothing  undone  to  appease 

him. 
I  cannot  but,  &c. 

19.  I  will  not  object  to  your  doing  it. 

20.  It  cannot  be  that  the  soul  is  not 

immortal  (89). 

Nothing  prevents  him  from  do- 
ing it. 

So,  nothing  deters  him  from  do- 
ing it. 

22.  It  was  owing  to  you  that  I  did  not 

succeed. 

23.  By  sea  and  land. 

nj      5  T°  De  within  a  very  little  of .  .  . 
•    I  Or,  But  a  little  more  and  .  .  . 
Not  to  be  far  from. 

25.  I  almost  think,6  )  . 

I  don't  know  whether,     $ 

26.  To  take  away  any  one's  life. 

27.  The  city  of  Rome,  the  island  of 

Cyprus. 
He  did  this  a*  (or  when)  Consul. 
ya     $  I  may  go. 

)  I  am  permitted  to  go. 
I  ought  to  do  it. 
I  oueht  to  have  done  it. 


21 


Latiw. 

Which  I  may  know  (quod  secum). 
It  is  done  concerning  (actum  est  de). . 
To  boast  the  same  thing  (59). 
To  promise  the  same  thing  (59). 
To  promise     j  many  thing3. 

To  fight  a  place  out  by  force  (per  vim 

expugnare). 
Lest  any  thing  (ne  quid). 
Lest  any  body  (ne  quis). 
Lest  ever  (ne  unquam). 


No  food  is  so  heavy  but  (quin)  it  may 
be  digested,  &c. 

So  foolish  that  he  thinks  (ut),  66,  d. 

She  never  saw  him,  but  (quin)  she 
called  him,  &c. 

He  could  scarcely  be  restrained  but  that 
(quin)  he  should  throw  (88). 

I  left  undone  (prattermisi)  nothing 
tfiat  I  should  not  (quin)  appease  him. 

I  cannot  do  (any  thing)  but  that  (fa- 
cere  non  possum  quin),  &c. 

I  will  not  object  but  that  (recusabo 
quin)  you  should  do  it. 

It  cannot  be  (feri)  but  that  (quin)  the 
soul  is  immortal. 

Nothing  prevents  (obstat)  by  which  he 
should  the  lessdo  it  (quominus facia t). 

Nothing  deters  him  by  which  he  should 
the  less  do  it  (99). 

It  stood  through  you  by  which  I  should 
the  less  succeed  (j)er  te  stetit  quomi- 
nus, &c,  99). 

By  land  and  sea. 

To  be  a  very  little  distant  but  that .  . 
[minimum  abesse  (impers.)  quin.  I 

Haudmultum     >    b 

Haud  procul        $ 

Haud  scio  an ;  nescio  an,  &c. 

To  snatch  away  life  to  (  =  from)  any 

one  (vitam  alicui  eripere.     132). 
The  city  Rome ;  the  island  Cyprus. 

He  Consul  ( =  being  Consul)  did  this. 
To  me  it-is-permitted  (licet)  to  go 


)      (124). 
It  bene 


loveth  me  (oportet  me)  to  do  it. 
It  behoveth  me  (oportuit)  to  do  it  (126). 


«  Haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  dubito  an  may  be  followed  by  the  negatives,  nemu, 
nihil,  nullus,  nunquam,  or  by  the  for  >is  that  follow  negatives,  quisquam,  quic- 
quam,  ullus,  unquam.  Haud  scio  an  temo  approaches  nearer  to  a  denial  than 
haud  scio  an  quisquam.  (G.) — Hut  Cicero  and  his  contemporaries  never  omit 
the  negative.    (Matthiii,  Hand,  &c.) 


UH 


TABLE    OF 


English. 
Id.  I  am  at  leisure  to  read. 


30    I  have  need  of  food. 


There  is  need  of 


("  making-haste. 
I  deliberation. 
]  prompt    execu- 
[     tion. 


31.  How  many  are  there  of  yon? 
How  many  are  there  of  us? 
Three  hundred  of  us  are  come. 


Of  whom  there  are 


few. 


very  nvany. 
Very  many  of  which  .  .  . 

32.  Some  mock,  'others  approve. 

33.  One  was  a  Greek ;  the  other  a  Ro- 

man. 

34.  Such  a  lover  of  truth. 

35.  To  take  in  good  part. 

36.  He  was    condemned  in   his   ab- 

sence. 

i7.  To  prefer  a  capital  charge  against ) 

Caius.  ) 

To  bring  an  action  against  a  ) 

man  for  bribery.  \ 

To  prefer  a  charge  of  immorali- 
ty against  Caius. 

To  inform  a  man  of  a  plan. 

38.  Without  any  danger  .  .  . 

39.  It  is  characteristic  of .  .  . 
It  is  incumbent  on  .  .  . 
It  is  for  .  .  . 

It  demands,  or  requires,  firmness. 
It  shows,  or  betrays,  weakness. 
Any  man  may  do  it. 
It  is  not  every  man  who  can   Sc. 

It  is  wise. 

40.  To  reduce  to  subjection.  ) 
To  bring  under  his  dominion.      ) 

41.  To  be  capitally  condemned. 

To  be  acquitted  of  a  capital  charge. 

42.  Common  to  me  and  you. 

43.  To  compare  things  together. 

44.  To  threaten  a  man  with  death. 

45.  To  prefer  death  to  slavery. 


Latin. 

There-is-leisure  (vacat)  to  me  to  roar- 

(154). 
C  (1)  There  is  to  me  a  business  vmb 
<      food  {prep,  omitted). 
f  (2)  Food  is  a  business  to  me. 

'  (the  matter)  being  hasten 

There  is 
need  of     < 
(Opus  est) 


promptly 


(the    matter)    being  con- 
sulted. 
(the     matter) 
I     done  (177). 
How  many  are  ye  1  (quot  estis  ?) 
How  many  are  we?  (quot  sumus?) 
We  (being)  three  hundred  are  come. 
(Trecenti  venimus.) 

WIware\{ew- 

£  very  many. 

Which  very  many  (quae  plurima)    . . 

Others  mock;  others  approve  (alii — 

alii). 
The  other  was   a  Greek ;  the  other  a 

Roman  (alter— alter). 
So  (adeo)  loving  of,  &c. 
Boni  consulere.t     (See  185.*) 
He  being  absent  was  condemned. 

To  make   Caius    an    accused -person 

(reus)  of  a  capital  matter  (187). 
To  make  a  man  an  accused-person  ol 

bribery  (gen.) ;  or,  about  bribery  (de). 
To   make  Caius    an    accused-person 

(reus)   about  morals  (de    moribus. 

187). 
To  make  a  man  surer  of  a  plan  (certio- 

rem  facere). 
Without  (expers,  adj.)  all  danger  . 
It  is  (a  mark)  of  .  .  . 
It  is  (the  duty)  of .  .  . 
It  is  (the  character,  privilege,  &c.)  of.  . 
It  is  fa  thing)  of  (  =  for)  firmness. 
It  is  (a  mark)  of  weakness. 
It  is  any  man's  (task)  to  do  it. 
It  is  not  every  man's  (task)  to  do  it 

(non  cujusvis  est),  &c. 
It  is  (the  conduct)  of  a  wise  man. 

fjT  Words  in  brackets  to  be  omitted 
To  make  of  his  own  dominion  (sua 

ditionis  facere). 
To  be  condemned  of  the  head. 
To  be  acquitted  of  the  head. 
Common  to  me  with  you. 
To  compare  things  amongst  (or  6«* 

tween)  themselves  (inter  se)  221  (c). 
To  threaten  death  to  a  man  (222). 
To  reckon  slavery  after  death  (servitu- 

tern  morti  posthabere,  227). 

(or,  as  in  Eng.,  with  anteponere). 


i  AJqui  boni  facere :  in  bonam  partem  acclpere. 


DIFFERENCES    OF    IDIOM. 


2U5 


English. 

46.  To  surround  the  city  with  a  wall. 

To  besprinkle  a  man  with  praises. 
To  put  on  a  garment. 


To  take  the  enemy's  camp,  bag- 
gage, &c. 

To  obstruct  (or  cut  off)  the  ene- 
my's flight. 

To  cut  oil*  the  supplies  of  the 
Gauls. 


47 


I  have  a  book. 
I  have  two  books. 
48.  To  come 
To  send 
To  set  out 


to  the   assistance  of 
Caesar. 


19.  To  give  as  a  present. 
To  impute  as  a  fault. 


60.  To  be  a  reproach,  or  disgraceful. 
To  be  very  advantageous. 

To  be  odious  ;  hateful. 

Obs.  lHow'  before  the  adj.  must 
be  '  quarUus '  in  agreement  with 
subst. 
151.  To  throw  himself  at  Caesar's  feet.] 

62.  Caius  would  say  .  . . 

Caius  used  to  say  .  .  . 
53.  I  fear  that  he  will  come. 

I  fear  that  he  w ill  not  come. 
64.  The  war  aga'vzst  Pyrrhus. 

Connection  with  Pompey. 

Rest  from  labours. 

Wrongs  done  to  Caius. 
f5.  He  did  it  that  hi  might  the  more 
easily  escape. 

56.  To  make  Caesar  retire. 

57.  It  is  becoming  to  (or  in)  an  orator 

to  be  angry,  &c. 
So,  it  is  unbecoming  to  (or  in)  an 
orator  .  .  . 
;>8.  This    victory    cost    them    many 
wounds. 


>y.  Hardly  any  body. 


Latin. 

To  give-round  (circuindSre)  a  wall  to 

the  city  for  as  in  Eng.]. 
To  besprinkle    (aspergere)  praises  to 

man  lor  as  in  Eng.]. 
To  clothe  (induere)  myself  with  a  gar« 

ment ;  or  to  put-on  (induere)  a  gar- 
ment to  myself. 
To  strip  (exuere)  the  enemy  of  theii 

camp,  baggage,  &c.  (abl.)  233. 
To  shut-up  (intercludere)  flight  to  tho 

enemy  (233). 
To   shut-up  (intercludere)   the   Gauls 

from  their  supplies  (abl.  commeatu). 

233. 
There  ?s  a  book  to  me. 
There  are  two  books  to  me  (236). 

To  scout.    $     »nee  («(«<•). 

(Auxilio  venire,  mittere,  proficisci.) 
To  give  for  a  present  (dono  dare). 

R  628  $*"**(*«* 

(Culpae,  or  vitio  dare,  or  vertere.) 
To  be  for  a  reproach  (opprobrio  es»e) 
To  be  for  a  great  advantage  (magna* 

utilitati  esse). 
To  be  for  a  hatred  (odioesse). 

(So  impedimento,  honori,  &c,  esse.) 
Quanto  odio  est !  (how  odious  it  is !) 


[Se  Caesari  ad  pedes  projicere;  or  lite- 
rally.]   See  p.  89,  note  1. 
Diccbat. 

I  fear  test  he  come  (ne  veniat). 

I  fear  that  he  come  (ut  veniat*). 

The  war  of  Pyrrhus       "j 

Connection  of  Pompey  [GmUiv^ 

Rest  of  labours  (  ",-"""/c- 

Wrongs  of  Caius  J 

He  did  this,  by  ichich  (quo)  he  migtit 
more  easily  escape. 

To  make  that  Caesar  should  retire  (fa- 
cere,  or  efficere  ut,  &c). 

It  becomes  an  orator  to  be  angry,  &c. 
(orator em  decet). 

(Oratorem  dedecet .  .  .)  259. 

This  victory  stood  d  to  them  at  many 

wounds  (abl.).  266. 

[Compare  the  Eng.  ■  this  stood  me  in 
a  large  sum.'] 
Almost  nobody  (nemo  fere)  249. 


*  Or,  ne  non  veniat. 

<*  This  notion  is  probably  that  of  a  debt  standing  against  x  man  in  his  oredi 

m-'s  books. 


300 


TABLE    OF 


Enghsh. 
liO,  Make  a  bad,  &c.  use  of,  &c. 
61.  He  deserves  to  be  loved. 


62.  To  inflict  punishment  on  a  man. 

63.  To  gain  a  triumph  for  a  victory 

ever  the  Gauls. 

64.  A  blessing  on  ?  your 
Good  luck,  or  success  to  )  valour. 
Go  on  in  your  valour ! 

65.  You  are  envied,  spared,  favoured, 

answered,  &c. 

66.  I  don't  know  when  the  letter  will 

be  written. 

67.  It  seems,  is  said,  &c.  that  Caius  has 

retired. 

68.  We  liave  walked,  come,  &c. 


59.  To  have  reigned  above  six  years. 

70.  Before  the  Consulship  of  Caius. 

71.  He  went  to  a  school  at  Naples. 

72.  We  should  all  praise  virtue. 

A  time  to  play. 

Fit  to  carry  burdens. 

He  is  born  (or  inclined)  to  act. 

Prepared  to  take  up  arms. 

73.  Whilst  they  are  drinking,  playing, 

&c. 
To  be  able  to  pay. 
To  be  equal  to  bearing  the  burden. 

To  tend  to  the  preservation  of  lib- 
erty. 

74.  I  have  to  do  another  page. 
I  will  have  it  done. 

75.  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell 

in. 

76.  I  go  to  consult  Apollo. 


77.  Balbus  having  left  Lavinium,  &c. 


78.  From  the  foundation  of  Rome. 
From  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 
The   honour  of  having  saved  the 
king  (of  the  king's  preservation). 
70.  He  does  it  without  robbing  others. 
He  goes  away  without  your  per- 
ceiving 't. 


Latin 

Use  badly  (273). 

He  is  a  deserving  person,  who  should 

be  loved   (dignus  est  qui  ametur). 

276. 
To  affect  a  man  with  punishment  (276) 

(aliquem  poena  afBcere). 
To  triumph  concerning  (de)  the  Gauls. 

Be  thou  ihcreased  in  valour  (macte 

virtute  esto :  voc.  for  nom.  280). 

(Plur.  macti  este !) 
It  is  envied  (spared,  favoured, an swered, 

&c.)  to  jcu  (290). 
I  don't  know  when  it  will  be  (quando 

futurum  sit)  that  (ut)  the  letter  be 

written  (290). 
Caius  seems,  is  said,  &c.  to  have  retired 

( nearly  always). 
It  nas  been  walked,  come,  &c.  (that  is, 

by  us:  ambulatum,  ventum  est). 
[This  is  only  an  occasional  and  possible 

construction.] 
To  be  reigning  his  seventh  year. 
Before  Caius  Consul  (ante  Caium  con- 

sulem). 
He  went  to  Naples  to  (prep.)  a  school. 
Virtue  is  to-be-praised  by  all  (laudan- 

da). 
A  time  of  playing. 
Fit  for  burdens  to  be  carried  (oneribut 

gestandis  idoneus). 
He  is  born  (or  inclined)  for  acting  (ad 

agendum). 
Prepared  for  (ad)  arms-to-be-taken-up. 
During  drinking,  playing,   &c.  (inter 

bibendum,  ludendum,  &c.) 
To  be  for  paying  (solvendo  esse). 
To  be  for  bearing  the  burden  (oneri 

ferendo  esse). 
To  be  of  liberty  to-be-preserved  (con- 

servanda  liber tatis  esse). 
Another  page  is  to-be-done. 
I  will  cause  it-to-be-done  (curabo  faci- 
endum). 
He  gave  them  the  country  to  be  dwelt 

in  (habitandam).  354. 
I  go  intending-to-consult  (consulturual 

Apollo  (354). 
C  Balbus,  Lavinium  being  left,  &c. 
<  Balbus,  when  he  had  left  Lavinium, 
(     &c. 

(Relicto  Lavinio ;  or  quum  reliquis- 
set  Lavinium  :  363,  a.) 
From  Romefounded  (a  Roma  condita). 
From  Jerusalem  destroyed  (363). 
The  honour  of  the  saved  king  (servati 

regis  decus). 
He  does  it,  not  robbing  others. 
He  goes  away,  you  not  perceiving  it  (tt 

non  aentientc). 


DIFFERENCES    OF    IDIOM. 


201 


English. 
They  condemn  him  without  hearing 
bun, 
90.  I  have  completed  the  work. 

I  see  plainly  through  his  design. 

81.  I  heard  him  sins. 

I  saw  him  walk. 
32.   That  only. 

And  that  too. 

By  a  good  man  it  is  true,  but  an 
unlearned  one. 

Literature,  and  that  too  of  no  com- 
mon kind. 
63.  A  slave  of  mine. 

81.  1 1<:  took  away  all  my  care. 

85.  That  famous  Medea. 

36.  Those  whom  we  love  we  also  wish 

happy. 
67.  Something  or  other  obscure. 

Some  chance  or  other. 

Somewhat  disturbed. 

88.  Henry,  Charles,  and  John. 

89.  Every  opinion  that,  &c. 
Every  man  who. 


90.  One  Balbus. 

91.  One  runs  one  way,  another  anoth- 

er. 
Different  men  run  different  ways. 
Some  run  cne  way,  others  another 


92.  The  best  men  always,  &c. 

Hidden  snares  are  alwayi,  &c. 


All  the  wisest  men. 
13.  These  are  liar d  to  avoid. 

Thrre   is  difficulty  in  avoiding  C 
these.  J 

He  has  the  greatest  difficulty  in  sus- 
pecting. 
w  t    He  is  too  proud  to  steal. 

16    I  armed  the  gi  eat  est  forces  1  could. 


Lai  in. 

They  condemn  him  unheard  (inaudi 
turn). 

I  have  the  work  completed  {opus  aoso 
lutum  habeo).  364. 

I  have  his  design  seen  through  (per- 
spectum  habeo).  364. 

I  heard  him  singing. 

I  saw  him  walking  (361). 

That  at  length  (is  demum). 

FA  is,  toque,  idemque. 

By  a  good  man  that  indeed,  but  an  un- 
learned one  (a  bono  Wo  auidem  viro, 
sed — ,  or  sed  tamen,  383). 

Literature,  nor  that  of-a-common-kind 
(nee  ea?  vulgares). 

' My  slave :'  or  'a  certain  one  out  of 
(quidam  ex)  my  slaves.' 

He  took  away  from  me  (mihi)  ad  care. 

That  Medea  (Medea  Ma). 

Those  whom  we  love,  the  same  (eos- 
dem)  we  wish  happy. 

I  know  not  what  of  obscure  (nescia 
quidob8curi). 

I  hiow  not  what  chance  (nescio  quis  ca- 
sus). 

Disturbed  I  know  not  what  (nescio  quid 
cuniurbatus). 

<  Henry,  Charles,  John. 

(  Henry,  and  Charles,  and  John. 

Whatever  opinion  (quacunque  opinio). 

Whoever  (quisquis). 
(More  commonly  than  in  English,  as 
we  seldom  use  whoever,  when  the 
notion  of  every  is  emphatic). 

A  certain  (quidam)  Balbus. 

Another  man  runs  another  way. 

Other  men  run  anotlur  way  (or  ottier 
ways). 

[alius — alius  (or  some  adv.  derived 
from  alius).] 

Each  best  man,  &c.  (optimus  quisque). 

Each  hidden  snare,  &c.  (but  quisqud 
ufay  be  used  in  the  plur.  when  a  subs. 
is  expressed  in  this  construction  :  oc- 
cultissima  qucequt  insidiee). 

Each  wisest  man  (doctissimus  juisque.) 

These  are  avoided  with  difficulty  (diffi- 
cile). 
'  (Difficilius,  difficillime,  when  requlr- 

He  suspects  with  the  greatest  difficulty 

(difficillime) 
He  is  prouder  than  t/uxt  he  (quam  ut  or 

quam  qui  with  subj.)  should  steal. 
I  armed  forces  (as  great)  as  the  greaicM 

I   could  (quam  maximaa  potui  co 

pin.-.). 


208 


TABLE    OP 


English. 

96.  Ab  great  a  difference  as  tliere  can  } 

possibly  be.  > 

The  greatest  possible  difference.    J 

97.  I  have  been  long  desiring. 

They  had  long  been  preparing. 

96.  When  I  take  my  journey,  I  will 
come. 

When  I  have  performed  this,  I  will 
come. 

When  he  is  come,  he  will  tell  us. 

When  you  wish  to  play,  remem- 
ber to  play  fair. 

As  you  sow,  so  will  you  reap. 

I  will  do  it,  if  I  can. 
99.  They  do  nothing  but  laugh. 


• 


LOO.  What  shall  I  do  ? 
What  am  I  to  do  % 
What  can  I  do  1 
Why  should  I  relate  ? 
What  was  I  to  do  1  ) 

What  should  1  have  done  1      V 
What  ought  I  to  have  done  ?  ) 

101.  You  would  have  thought. 
You  would  have  believed. 
You  would  have  said. 

102.  I  remember  to  have  read. 

103.  It  would  have  been  better. 

104.  No  painter. 

This  does  not  at  all  terrify  me. 

105.  Even  this  is  not  just,  unless  it  be 

voluntary. 

106.  He  was  more  prudent  than  brave. 

107.  To  make  a  bridge  over  a  river. 
The  thing  in  question. 

103.  I  have  nothing  to  accuse  old  age 
of. 

I  have  found  scarcely  any  thing  to 

censure. 
Men  who  abound  in  silver,  in 

gold,  in  estates. 
Men  who  abound  neither  in  sil 
ver,  nor  in  gold,  nor  in  estates. 
A  pen  to  write  with. 
109.  [Constructions  with  the  relative.] 

(1)  Some  persons  think:  or  there 
are  some  who  think,  &c. 

(2)  You  have  no  reason  (cause,  occa- 
sion, need,  &c.)  to  hurry. 


Latin. 

A  difference  as-great-as  the  greatest  can 
be  (quanta  maxima  potest  esse). 

I  am  a  long  time  already  desiring  (jam- 
pridem  cupio). 

They  were  a  long  time  already  prepar 
ing  (413). 

When  I  sliall  take  my  journey,  I  will 
come. 

When  I  sliall  have  performed  this,  I 
will  come. 

When  he  shall  have  come,  he  will  tell  us. 

When  you  shall  wish  to  play,  remem- 
ber to  play  fair. 

As  you  shall  sow,  so  will  you  reap. 

I  will  do  it,  if  I  sliall  be  ab*e. 

They  nothing  else  than  laugh  (nihil 
aliud  quam  rident). 

Quid  faciam  1 

Cur  haec  narrem  ? 

Quid  facerem  ?  (425.) 

Putares. 

Crederes. 

Diceres. 

Memini  me  legere. 

It  teas  better  (utilius  or  satius  fuit e). 

(Often)  nemo  pictor. 

This  terrifies  me  nothing  (nihil  me  ter 

ret). 
Even  this  is  so  just,  if  it  is  voluntary 

(ita  justum  .  ...  si  est,  &c). 
He  was  more  prudent  than  braver  (pru- 

dentior  quam  fortior).  452,  w. 
To  make  a  bridge  in  a  river. 
The  thing  de  quo  agitur. 
I  have  nothing  which  I  may  accuse  old 

ttge  (nihil  habeo  quod  incusem  sen- 

ectutem).  478. 
I  have  found  scarcely  any  thing,  which 

I  may  censure. 
Men  who    abound  in  silver,  who  in 

gold,  who  in  estates. 
Men  who  do  not  abound  in  silver,  not 

in  gold,  not  in  estates  (478). 
A  pen,  with  which  one  may  write  (473). 

There    are  some    who  think  (subj. 

Sunt  qui  putent,  &c). 
There    is   nothing    (on    account  of) 

which  you  should  hurry  (nihil  est 

quod  festines). 
(or)  There  is  not  (any  thing,  for)  which 

you  should  hurry  (nan  est  quod,  &c.) 


e  S%  satis,  par,  rectum,  justum,  idoneum,  optimum,  consentaneum,    mclivM 
cquius,  rectius,  satius  erat — fuit—  fuerat. 


DIFFERENCES    OF    IDIOM. 


20fl 


English. 

(3)  He  was  despised  by  them,  for 
they  saw  through  him. 

(4)  He  deserves  to  be  loved. 


(5)  He  is  not  a  proper  person  to  be 
received. 

(6)  None  are  so  good  as  never  to 
sin. 

(7)  Of  such  a  kind  that  we  can  neg- 
lect duties  for  their  sake. 

(8)  Too  short  to  be  tbe  whole  life 
of  man. 

(9)  I  am  not  a  man  (or,  am  not  so 
foolish,  simple,  credulous,  &c.)  as 

to  believe  this. 

(10)  Who  am   I  that    my  writings 
should  be  honoured  thus? 

(11)  They  sent  ambassadors  to  sue 
for  peace. 

(12)  He  deserves  praise  (blame,  &c.) 
for  having  done  this. 

(13)  Wretched  man  that  I  am,  who 
thought,  &c. 

(14)  How  few  there  are  who,  &c. 
110.  In  censuring  them  you  censure 

me. 
HI.  It  is  many  years  since  he  was  first 
in  my  debt. 

I  congratulate  you  on  your  influ- 
ence with  Caius. 

1  don't  like  to  be  abused. 

112.  A  mortal  body  must  necessarily 
perish. 


There  is  no  living  pleasantly. 

113.  In  addition  to  this,  he  is  blind. 

1 14.  He  accused  him  of  having  betrayed 

the  king. 
His  having  spared  the  conquered, 
is  a  great  thing. 

He  praised  (or  blamed  him)  for 
having  done  this. 

115.  Many  persons  admire  poems  with- 

out understanding  them. 
You  cannot    be   ruined  without 
ruining  others. 

1 16.  Instead  of  reading,  he  is  at  play. 


Latin. 
He  was  despised  by  them,   who  saw 

through  him  (qui  with  subj.). 
He  is  a  worthy  person  who  should  be 

loved.     (Dignus  est,  qui  amelur ;  or 

qucm  ames.     So,  mdignus  est,  qui 

amctur:  or,  quern  ames.) 
He  is  not  a  proper  person  who  should 

be  received  (or,  whom  you  should  re- 
ceive). 
No  one  is  so  good  who    never  sins 

(subj.). 
Of  such  a  kind  for  the  sake  of  which  wo 

can  neglect  duties. 
Shorter  than  which  can  be  (quam  qua 

sit  or  possit  esse)  the  whole  life  oi 

man. 
I  am  not  that  (person)  wlw  can  believe 

(is  qui  credam). 

Who  am  I  whose  writings  should  be 

honoured  thus? 
They  sent  ambassadors  who  should  sue 

for  peace  (qui  pacem  peterent). 
He  deserves  praise,  &c.  wlio  did  this 

(subj.). 

0  me  miserable,  who  thought,  &c.  (qui 
with  subj.) 

Quotusquisque  est  qui .  .  ?  (without;.) 
When  you  censure  them,  you  censure 

me  (quum  with  indie). 
There  are  many  years  when  he  is  in 

my  debt  (quum  in  meo  aere  est). 

1  congratulate  you,  when  you  avail  so 
much  with  Caius  (quum,  generally 
quod,  tantum  vales  a  pud  Cain  in). 

I  am   not  abused  willingly  (libenter, 

491). 
It  is  necessary  that    a  mortal  body 

should  perish. 

[Mortale  corpus  interire  (or  intcreat) 
necesse  f  est.] 
It  cannot  be  lived  pleasantly  (504). 
Hither  is  added,  that  he  is  blind  (hue 

acced-it,  ebat,  &c.  ute).  513. 
He  accused  him  that  (quod)  he  liad  be- 
trayed the  king  (subj.). 
It  for  'this,'  *  that')  is  a  great  thing, 

mat  (q.uod)  he  spared  the  conquered 

(indie.). 
He  praised  (or  blamed)  him  that  (quod) 

he  had  done  this  (subj.).  520. 
Many  persons  admire  poems,  nor  un 

derstand  them  (520). 
You  cannot  be  ruined  so  as  not  to  ruin 

others  (ut  non  with  subj.).  621. 
He  is  at  play,  whereas  he  ought  to  bo 

reading  (quum  debeat). 


<  This  necesse  is  an  old  adj.  used  in  the  neut.  gender  only. 
o  More  commonly  quad. 


210 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


English. 
Instead  of  growing  rich  (as  he 

might)  he  is  growing  poor. 
Far  from  thinking  this,  I  hold, 

&c. 

117.  And  (but,  &c.)  if  this  is  granted. 
Who,  they  say,  was  killed. 
Who,  as  B.  says,  was  killed. 
By  which,  when  we  read  tliem,  we 
are  affected. 

Do  not  think. 

Take  care  to  do  it. 

Be  eure  to  be;  or  miTtd  you  are. 


Latin. 

He  is  growing  poor,  whereas  he  mij/u 

grow  rich  {auum  posset). 
It  is  so  far  off,  that  1  should  think  this* 

that,  &c. 

(Tantum  abest  ut ut).  533. 

If  which  is  granted. 
Whom  they  report  to  have  been  killed 
Whom  B.  reports  to  have  been  killed. 
Wiich  when  we  read,  we  are  affected. 

(  Beware  of  thinking,  cave  ptUea. 

(  Be  unwilling  to  think,  noli  jmiart. 
Cura  ut  facias. 
Fac  utais;  or,  fac  sis 


PERFECT  ANL    SUPINE.  211 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CAUTIONS. 

1  When  must  him,  her,  them  (he,  she,  they),  be  translated  by  sui  ?  and  his,  her% 

its,  their*,  by  suus7  (When  the  pronoun  and  the  nom.  of  the  verb  eland 
for  the  same  person.    C.  i.  12.) 

2  When  is  the  per/,  in  a  sentence  with  '  that '  to  be  translated  by  the  present 

infinitive  ?    (When  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  perf.  is  not  to 

be  described  as  over  before  the  time  referred  to  Dy  the  principal  verb 

C.  ii.  13 ) 
3.  When  must  •  should '  be  translated  by  the  present  infinitive  ?    (When  it  doea 

not  express  duty  or  a  future  event.*    C.  in.  13.) 
i.  When  are  would,   should,  signs  of  the  future  7    (After  past  tenses.    C. 

iv.  1G.) 
5.  When  should  ( thing1  be  expressed  ?    (When  the  mas.  and  the  neut.  of  the 

adjec.  are  of  the  same  form.    C.  v.  21.) 
5.  Where  is  cum  placed  with  the  ablatives  of  the  personal  pronouns'?    (After, 

and  as  one  word  with,  them.    C.  vi.  25.) 

7.  When  a  preposition  follows  a  verb,  how  may  you  help  your  judgment  in 

determining  whether  the  preposition  gives  a  transitive  sense  to  the  verb,  and 
is  probably  to  be  translated  by  the  inseparable  preposition  of  a  compound 
verb  7  (By  trying  whether  the  preposition  clings  to  the  verb  in  the  passive 
voice.    C.  vii.  32.) 

8.  Is  lfor '  before  a  noun  and  the  injin.  to  be  translated  ?    (No.)    What  is  the 

construction'?    (Accus.  with  infin.    C.  vm.  38.) 

9.  What  are  'as'  and  'but'  often  equivalent  to?     (Relatives.    C.  ix.  45,  and 

43  (a).) 

10.  How  is  'suck   often  used  in  English?    (To  express  size.)    How  is  it  then 

to  be  translated  ?     (By  tantus.    C.  x.  45.) 

11.  When  'that'  stands  for  a  substantive  that  has  been  expressed  in  a  former 

clause,  is  it  to  be  translated  into  Latin ?    (No.    C.  xi.  47,  ncte.) 

12.  W'hat  tense  is  '  /  am  come '  7    (Perf.  definite  of  the  active  voice.)— what,  '  1 

teas  come '  7  (Pluperf.  of  act.)  What  verb  forms  the  perf.  active  with  am  7 
(Intrans.  verbs  of  motion.    C.  xn.  57,  note.) 

13.  When  a  verb  seems  to  govern  two  accusatives,  by  what  preposition  is  one  of 

them  often  governed ?    (By 'to.'    C.  xm.  60.) 

*4.  When  must  Hhat—Tiot1  be  translated  by  ut  non  instead  of  nl7  and  that  no- 
body, that  nothing,  &c,  by  ut  nemo,  ut  nUiil,  respectively  ?  (When  tfiat 
introduces  a  consequence,  not  a  purpose:  whenever,  therefore,  a  'so'  or 
'such1  goes  before  it.    C.  xiv.  77.) 

:  5.  How  must  the  Eng.fut.  be  translated  after  verbs  of  fearing?  (By  the  pre*. 
subj.    C.  xv.  96.) 


»  To  judge  of  this,  try  whether  you  can  turn  the  verb  with  should  into  the 
participial  substantive.  "It  is  strange  that  you  slvould  say  so."  What  ia 
strange  ?    Your  saying  so. 


212  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CAUTIONS. 

16.  When  are  'who'  and  'which'  dependent  interrogatives  7    (After  words  01 

asking,  knowing,  doubting,  telling,  &c.     C.  xvi.  112.) 

17.  Does  'may'  ever  stand  for  can?  'might'  for  could?    (Yes.    C.  xvn.  131.) 

18.  When  is  the  perf.  infin.  to  be  translated  by  the  pres.  in/in.?    (After  might, 

could,  ought,  &c,  when  the  action  is  not  to  be  described  as  over  before  the 
time  referred  to.    C.  xvm.  131.) 

19.  When  are  •  of  you,'  '  of  us,'  &c,  not  to  be  translated  after  numerals,  super- 

latives, &c?     (When  all  are  spoken  of.    C.  xix.  175.) 

20.  Is  an  English  substantive  ever  used  adjectively?    (Yes.)    Where  does  it  then 

stand  7    (Before  a  substantive.)    How  must  it  be  translated  7    (Gene- 
rally by  an  adj.:  sometimes  by  ex,  de  with  a  subst.    C.  xx.  234.) 
£1.  For  what  does  'what'  sometimes  stand  7    (For  how,  or  how-great.)    When 
must '  what '  be  translated  by '  quam '  ?  (When  it  stands  for  '  how ') — when 
*  by  '  quantus '?    (When  it  stands  for  how-great.    C.  xxi.  242.) 

22.  When  are  'for  •  and  '  as '  to  be  untranslated  7    (When  the  noun  that  follows 

can  be  placed  in  apposition  to  another  noun  in  the  sentence.  C.  xxn. 
255.) 

23.  When  must '  one,' '  two,'  &c,  be  translated  by  distributive  numerals  7  (When 

they  stand  for  '  one  a-piece,'  &c.    C.  xxm.  267.) 

24.  What  is  the  substitute  for  a  future  subjunctive  in  the  passive  verb  ?  (futurum 

sit,  esset,  &c,  ut .  .  .  with  the  proper  tense  of  the  verb.)  What  must  we 
take  care  not  to  use  for  it  7  (The  part,  in  dus,  with  sim,  essem,  &c.  C. 
xxiv.  287.) 

25.  What  is  'that'  often  used  for  after  an  expression  of  time?    (For  on  which; 

the  abl.  of  relat.    C.  xxv.  308.) 

26.  Is  that  which  is  inform  the  present  participle  act.  in  ing,  always  a  participle  ? 

(No.)  What  else  may  it  be  7  (The  participial  substantive.)  When  is  it 
always  the  participial  substantive  ?  (WThen  it  governs,  or  is  governed,  in- 
stead of  merely  agreeing.)  To  what  parts  of  the  Latin  verb  does  the 
participial  substantive  correspond  7  (The  Infin.  and  Gerund.)  Can  the 
participial  substantive  ever  be  translated  into  Latin  by  a  participle  7  and 
if  so,  by  what  participle? — (Yes,  by  the  participle  in  dus:  but  the  part. 
in  dus  must  not  govern  the  substantive,  but  agree  with  it,  both  being  put 
into  the  case  that  corresponds  to  the  preposition  governing  the  participial 
substantive.    C.  xxvi.  330.) 

27.  Into  what  construction  must '  have '  before  an  infinitive  be  turned  for  trans- 

lation into  Latin  7    (Into  the  form  ' is,  or  are,  to  be — .') 

(I  have  to  do  three  more  pages  =  Three  more  pages  are  to  be  done  by  me 

C.  xxvn.  336.) 

28.  What  does  'is  to  be  done'  generally  mean  7   (Necessity,  fitness,  or  intention 

Does  'is  to  be  done '  always  mean  necessity,  fitness,  or  intention ?  b    (No 
C.  xxviii.  336.) 
29.  What  does  '  is  to  be,'  &c,  mean,  when  it  does  not  signify  necessity,  fitness,  or 
intention?    (Ans.  Possibility.) 


b  This  is  what  is  to  be  done  by  all  who  wish  to  please  the  king.     (Necessity.} 
This  is  to  be  done  to-morrow.     (Intention.) 
This  is  to  be  done,  if  you  set  about  it  in  the  right  way.     (Possibilify.) 


QUESTIONS    ON    THE    CAUTIONS. 


2  3 


JO.  When  must  a  present  partic.  active  be  translated  by  a  perfect  participle,  01 
its  substitute  quum  with  the  perf.  or  pluperf.  subjunctive?  (When  the 
action  expressed  by  it  must  be  over,  before  that  expressed  by  the  verb  be- 
gins.   C.  xxx.  353.) 

31.  Bv  what  participle  of  a  deponent  verb  is  the  pres.  participle  often  translated? 

(By  the  perf.  partic.  C.  xxxi.  365.) 

32.  How  is  'but'  (  =  except,  unless)  to  be  translated  after  a  negative?    (By  nisi 

ox  prater.     C.  xxxi.  451.) 
S3.  When  is  'at  a  town'  not  to  be  translated  by  the  gen.  or ablat.?    (When 

the  action  was  not  done  in  but  near  the  town  or  place  :   e.  g.   'a 

battle  at  Mantinea.)    How  is  'at'  to  be  then  translated?     (By  apud 

or  ad.) 
34.  What  does  one  often  stand  for?    (Some  one,  ahquis;  or  a  certain  one. 

quidam.) 
SB    When  an  English  word  is  followed  by  a  preposition,  what  should  you  always 

remember?    (To  consider  whether  the  Latin  word  to  be  used  is  followed 

by  a  preposition  or  by  a  case :  and  then  by  what  preposition,  or  whit 

case.) 


QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX 


In  what  respect  does  a  verb  agree  with  its  nominative  case?  an  adjective 
with  its  substantive  ?  What  verbs  take  a  substantive  or  adjective  after  them  in 
the  nominative? 

[Verbs  of  becoming,  being,  seeming, 
With  passive  verbs  oFmaking,  calling,  deeming.] 
In  what  case  does  tne  thing  by  which  stand  ?    In  what  case  does  the  agent,  or 
person  by  whom,   stand  ?    When  should  the  pronoun  that  is  the  nom.  to  the 
verb  be  expressed  ? 

%  \,  When  two  or  more  nom.  cases  sing,  come  together,  in  which  number  should 
the  verb  be  put  1  in  what  person  ? 

With  et — et,  quum — turn,  in  which  number  is  the  verb  generally  put  ?  (a). 
Which  of  the  Latin  words  for  and  is  confined  to  the  office  of  connecting 
similar  notions  ?  (d). 
§2.  What  case  does  the  infin.  take  before  it?  What  Eng.  conjunct,  is  some- 
times to  be  untranslated?  When  HhaV  is  to  be  untranslated,  in  what 
case  do  you  put  the  nom.  and  in  what  mood  the  verb  ? 
Mention  some  verbs,  &c.  that  are  followed  by  ace.  with  infin. 

(1)  Verbs  sentiendiet  declarandi: 

Of  feeling,  wishing,  knowing,  ^  with  which  ace.  with  Infin.  stands  as 
Believing,  saying,  trowing,      )     the  object. 

(2)  Nearly  all  impersonal  forms3-  (with  which  ace.  with  infin.  stands  as 
the  subject),  except 

Contingit,  evenit,  and  accidit,  )  wMch  are  folIowed  b    ^ 

With  restat,  reliquum  est  and  fit,b      ) 

Do  any  verbs  of  the  class  sentiendi  admit  of  any  other  construction! 
[Yes,  those  that  express  emotion  are  often  followed  by  quod :  those 
that  express  wishing,  especially  opto,  by  ut.] 
§  4    When  an  adjective  belongs  to  more  than  one  substantive  or  pronoun,  witn 
which  should  it  agree  in  gender  ?  and  in  which  number  should  it  stand, 
even  when  the  substantives,  &c.  are  all  sing.  ?    When  the  substantives 
are  things  that  have  not  life,  in  what  gender  is  the  adj.  generally  put  ? 
What  substantives  are  seldom  to  be  translated  ?c 
§  5.  What  are  respectively  the  demonstratives  or  antecedent  pronouns  to  qui^ 
qualis,  quantus,  quot  ? 


*  That  is,  where  in  English  we  use  '  it  •  as  the  representative  of  the  true 
nominative. 

b  And  sometimes  sequitur. 

0  But  when  •  man '  is  coupled  with  an  epithet  of  praise9  it  should  generally 
be  translated  (by  vir) ;  especially  if  it  is  an  apposition. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX.  215 

Is  the  relative  ever  governed  in  case  by  a  word  that  Is  not  in  its  own 

clause  ? 
In  what  respects  docs  the  relative  agree  with  its  antecedent  ?    [In  gen- 
der, number,  and  person.]    When  the  antecedent  is  expressed  in  the 
relative,  and  omitted  in  the  principal  clause,  where  is  the  relative 
clause  often  placed  ?  what  pronoun  often  represents  it  in  the  princi- 
pal clause  ? 
What  is  the  relative  'what'  equivalent  to  ?    [(  That  which.'] 
When  the  relat.  agrees  with  some  case  of  a  subst.  expressed  in  its  own, 
but  not  in  the  principal  clause,  what  must  be  done  ?    [Some  case  oi 
that  subst.  must  be  supplied  in  the  principal  clause.] 
I  b\  For  what  does  an  infin.  sometimes  stand  ?  When  an  adj.  or  rel.  is  to  agree 
with  an  infin.  mood  or  sentence,  in  what  gender  must  it  be  put?    When 
the  rel.  has  a  sentence  for  its  antecedent,  what  do  we  often  find  instead 
of  the  rel.  only  ?    [Id  quod,  or  qua  res :  id  or  res  being  in  apposition  to 
the  sentence.] 
§  7.  What  is  the  great  rule  for  the  sequence  of  tenses?  (40.)    Is  the  perf.  with 
have  considered  a  past  tense?    [No.]    Is  the  fut.  perf.  &subj.  tense? 
[No.]    How  should  '  but,'  or  a  relative  with  '  not,'  generally  be  translated 
after  nobody,  nothing,  &c.  ?d 
9  8.  In  such  a  sentence  as  •  Thebes,  which  is  a  tovm,'  &c,  should  uhich  agree 
with  Thebes  or  with  toum?    When  does  tr/iic/i,  in  such  a  sentence,  agree 
with  its  proper  antecedent  ? 
§  9.  When  the  antecedent  has  a  superlative  with  it,  in  which  clause  does  the 

superlative  generally  stand  ?  He  was  the  first  person  who  did  it. 
§  10.  How  is  « that'  to  be  translated  when  it  is  followed  by  may  or  might  ?  what 
does  it  then  express  ?  [A  purpose.]  How  is  '  that,'  expressing  a  purpose, 
to  be  translated,  when  it  is  followed  by  not  or  any  negative  word  ? 
5  11.  How  is  'that'  to  be  translated  after  so,  such?  what  does  it  then  express? 
[A  consequence.]  How  is  'that'  to  be  translated  when  the  sentence  has  a 
comparative  in  it  ?  What  is  quo  equivalent  to,  and  what  is  its  force  with 
the  comparative?  [Quo  is  equivalent  to  uteo;  with  the  comparative 
•  that  by  this?'  '  that  the.']  Does  quo  ever  stand  for  '  that '  when  there  is 
no  comparative  in  the  sentence  ?  [Yes  ;•  it  is  then  equivalent  to  '  that  by 
this  means.']  How  is  'not'  to  be  translated  before  the  imperative  or  subj. 
used  imperatively?  How  is  'as'  before  the  infin.  and  after  so,  such,f  to 
be  translated. 


*  Quito  cannot  stand  for  cujus  non,  cui  non ;  but  either  these  forms  must  be 
used  or  the  demonstrative  expressed  (cujus  ille  vitia  non  videat ;  or,  quin  ille 
ejus  vitia  videat).  In  the  nom.  or  ace.  qui  non  may  be  used,  and  should  b« 
when  the  non  belongs  especially  to  the  verb.  It  is  compounded  of  the  old  abl 
f  ni,  and  ne,  not.  It  does  not  therefore  itself  contain  the  pronoun ;  but  the  nom. 
or  ace.  of  the  demonstrative  is  understood. 

•  "  In  funeribus  Atheniensium  sublata  erat  celebritas  virorum  ac  mullerum 
71M  lamentatio  minueretur."  (Cic.) 

1  Qpin  must  be  used,  if  it  is,  'as  not  to  .  .  .  Ac.,'  after  a  negative  sentence. 


216  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 

§  12.  What  does  the  Latin  inf.  never  express??  When  the  English  inf.  ex- 
presses a  purpose,  how  must  it  be  translated  ?u  After  what  verbs  is  the 
iuf.  to  be  translated  by  ut  i  with  the  subjunctive  1 

§13.  Give  the  forms  for  that  nobody  ;  that  nothing,  that  no;  that  never.  When 
must  that  nobody ;  that  nothing,  &c,  be  translated  by  ut  nemo;  ut  nihil, 
&c.l 

%  14.  How  must  '  as  not  to  .  .  .  &c.'  after  a  negative  be  translated  ?  After  what 
verbs  when  used  negatively,  must  quin  be  used  1  Is  non  dubito  ever  fol- 
lowed by  ace.  with  infin.  ?  [Nearly  always,  when  dubitare  means  to  hesi- 
tate ;  when  it  means  to  doubt,  the  ace.  with  infin.  never  follows  it  in  Cicero 
but  does  in  Corn.  NeposJ] 

C  15.  By  what  conjunction  are  verbs  of  hindering  followed  1  [By  quominust 
which  is  equivalent  to  ut  to  minus.]  Are  verbs  of  hindering  followed  by 
any  other  conjunctions  1  [Yes ;  they  may  be  followed  by  ne,  when  the 
thing  is  so  entirely  prevented  as  not  to  have  been  begun ;  by  quin  after  a 
negative  sentence :  and  sometimes  by  ace.  with  infin.k]  How  must  that 
not  be  translated  after  verbs  of  fearing  ?  how  must  that  be  translated  after 
verbs  of  fearing? 

$  16.  Which  interrogative  particle  asks  simply  for  information?!  [NS.]  Which 
expects  the  answer  'yes?'  [Nonne.]    Which  the  answer  'no?'  [Num.] 

$  17.  When  are  questions  dependent  ?  [When  they  follow  and  depend  on  such 
verbs  as  ask,  doubt,  know,  examine,  try :  it  is  doubtful,  uncertain,m  &c] 
In  what  mood  does  the  verb  stand  in  a  dependent  question  1    In  whal 


f  Except  in  poetry. 

h  The  various  ways  of  expressing  a  purpose  are  given  in  the  following  table 

Eo  ut  ludos  spectem, 

E    <  ludorum  spectandorum  ?  cai 
( ludos  spectandi  ) 

Eo  ludos  spectaturus, 

Eo  ad  ludos  spectandos, 

Eo  ludos  spectatum  (sup.) 
i  The  general  rule  for  the  use  of  ut,  is  that  it  may  be  used  : 

(1)  To  express  every  request;  command  (except  after  jubeo) ;  advice 

effect;  decree. 

(2)  To  introduce  the  conditions  of  an  agreement  or  treaty. 

(3)  It  is  used  after  all  intensive  words,  such  as  such,  so  (tantis,  talis,  tot,  Ua, 

adeo,  sic). 

(4)  All  purposes  may  be  expressed  by  ut.    (Crombie.; 

Obs.  Moneo  and  persuadeo  will  not  be  followed  "by  ut  (but  by  ace.  and  inf.), 
when  the  person  is  not  warned  or  persuaded  to  do  something,  but  merely  ilxai 
something  is  so. 

J  Thus  his  preface  begins  with  "  non  dubito  fore  plerosque,"  &c. 

k  «  Nostros  navibus  egredi  prohibebant."     (Cses.) 

i  But  nl  appears  sometimes  to  be  used  as  equivalent  to  nonne.  '  Estne  hoc  illi 
tficto  atque  facto  Fimbriano  simillimum  1 »     (Cic.  pro  Sext.  Rose.  Am.  33.) 

"»  Obs.  If  you  have  any  doubt  whether  who,  which,  what,  is  a  rel.  or  an  inter 
>vg.t  ask  a  question  with  the  clause,  and  see  whethei  the   sentence  before  von 


/  am  going  to  see  the 
games. 


QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX.  217 

mood  must  the  verb  be  put  in  sentences  that  stand  as  the  ace.  10  a  pre- 
ceding verb  ? 

I  19  How  must  'whether'  be  translated  in  double  questions'?  how  'or?'  If 
'whether'  is  untranslated,  how  may 'or'  be  translated?  Does  an  ever 
atand  before  a  single  question  ?  [Yes:  it  then  implies,  with  something  ol 
impatience,  that  the  answer  must  be  'no.']  By  what  must 'or'  not  be 
translated  in  double  questions? 

S  20.  Go  through  J  may  go,  &c.  /  might  have  gone,  &c.  J  can  do  it ;  I  could  have 
done  it ;  I  ought  to  do  it ;  I  ought  to  have  done  it.  Translate,  /  ought  to  do 
it,  omitting  ut.  I  may  be  deceived.  How  is  the  per/,  in/in.  generally 
to  be  translated  after  might,  could,  ought  ? 

I  21.  How  is  the  case  of  a  substantive  in  apposition  determined?  When  urbt 
or  oppidum  stands  in  apposition  to  the  name  of  a  town,  does  the  verb 
agree  with  urbs,  oppidum,  or  with  the  name  of  the  town  ? 

5  22.  He  wishes  to  be  the  fibst.    He  says  that  he  is  beady. 

3  23.  They  may  be  happy.    We  may  be  neutbal. 

i  24.  When  may  a  substantive  and  preposition  generally  be  translated  by  the 
gen.  ?  [Ans.  When  the  prepos.  joins  it  to  another  substantive.]  How 
much  pleasube;  much  good  ;  sometime. 

S  25.  What  do  you  mean  by  a  partitive  adj.  ?  What  case  follows  partitive  adjec- 
tives? With  what  does  the  partitive  adj.  generally  agree  in  gender? 
In  what  gender  does  a  superlative  (or  solus)  stand  when  it  governs  agenit. 
and  also  refers  to  another  subst.  ?  In  what  case  does  a  substantive  ol 
description  stand  when  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it?  By  what  case 
is  opus  est  followed  ?  What  other  construction  is  there  with  opus  est? 
Thebe  is  no  need.  What  need  is  thebe?  The  top  of  the  mountain. 
The  middle  of  the  way.  The  best  of  the  wosk.  The  whole  of 
Gbeece. 

5  26.  What  case  do  adjectives  that  signify  desire,  &c,  govern?  What  case  do 
participles  used  adjectively  and  verbals  in  ax  govern  ? 

5  28.  What  substantives  are  omitted  after  to  be  ?  It  is  Cicebo's  pabt.  It  is 
youb  pabt.  What  case  do  verbs  of  accusing,  &c,  take  of  the  charge? 
What  case  do  satago,  &:.,  govern?  Wrhat  case  do  verbs  of  remembering 
and  forgetting  govern  ?  In  what  case  may  a  neut.  pron.  stand  with  accu- 
sare,  admonere,  &c.  ? 

I  29.  With  interest  and  refert  in  what  case  is  the  person  to  whom  it  is  of  import 
ance  put  ?  [In  the  genitive  when  the  person  is  expressed  by  a  suoscun 
tire :  in  the  abl.fem.  when  a  possessive  pronoun  is  used.]  How  is  the  degree 
of  importance  expressed  ?  how  is  the  thing  that  is  of  importance  express- 
ed ?  what  case  of  the  person  feeling  do  pudct,  &c,  take  ?  what  case  of  what 
causes  the  feeling  ? 

3  30.  What  adjectives  govern  the  dot.  ?  Mention  some  adjectives  that  are  fol- 
lowed by  ad.  What  cases  may  follow  propior,  proximus?  When  should 
eimilis  take  the  gen.  ?  (w.) 

>  31.  In  whatcase  do  you  put  the  person  to,  for,  or  against  whom  the  action  it 

readily  and  obviously  answers  it.     '  I  don't  know  who  did  it.      '  Who  did   it  ? 
1  don't  know  who  did  it.'     Therefore  who  is  here  an  interrogative 

in 


218  QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX. 

done,  or  the  feeling  entertained  ?  Mention  the  classes  of  verbs  thai  takt 
the  dot.  [Verba  comparandi ;  dandi  et  reddendi ;  promittendi  ac  solvendi ; 
imperandi  et  nuntiandi ;  fidendi ;  minandi  et  irascendi ;  obspquendi  et 
repugnandi,  regunt  dativum :  quibus  addas, 

Invideo,  nubo,faveoque,  indulgeo,  parco, 
Gratulor,  auxilior,  studeo,  medeorque,  vacoque.] 
Do  any  of  these  take  the  ace.  also  ?    By  what  prepositions  may  verbs  of 
comparing  be  followed  ?    [By  cum  or  ad.\    How  is  together  to  be  trans- 
lated after  compare  ? 

['  Together'  may  translated  be, 
After  compare,  by  '  inter  seJ] 
What  verbs  of  advantage  and  disadvantage  govern  the  ace.  ?    He  th  aa  a  r- 

ENS  ME  WITH    DEATH. 

[He  threatens  me  with  death  should  be, 
In  Latin,  threatens  death  to  me.] 
Of  verbs  of  commending,  which  govern  the  ace.  only  ?  which  the  dot.  or 
ace.? 
I  22.  What  case  do  sum  and  its  compounds  govern  ?    What  exception  is  there  ? 
Mention  the  compound  verbs  that  generally  govern  the  dat. 
[Most  of  these  compounded  with 
Pra3,  con,  sub, 
Ad,  in,  inter,  ob : 
Many  of  those  compounded  with 
Ab,  post,  ante,  de, 
Re,  pro,  super,  e.] 
%  33.  He  surrounds  the  city  with  a  wall.    He  presents   me  with  a 

GARLAND." 

§  34.  What  verbs  govern  two  datives?  What  case  often  follows  sum  where  tct 
should  put  the  nom.  ?    How  is  have  often  translated?    Mv  name  is 

CAIUS  (239).      I  HAVE  A  COW.      I  HAVE  SIX  COWS. 

§  35.  Do  neuter  verbs  ever  take  the  ace.  ?    Explain,  sitire  honores. 

S  36.  What  verbs  take  two  accusatives  ?  Do  all  the  verbs  that  have  any  of  these 
meanings  take  two  accusatives  ?  What  transitive  verbs  take  two  accusa- 
tives, one  in  a  sort  of  apposition  to  the  other? 

§  37u  What  does  the  abl.  express?  In  what  case  is  the  price  put?  What  ad- 
jectives stand  in  the  abl.  to  express  the  price,  pretio  being  understood  1 
What  adjectives  always  express  price  in  the  gen.  ?  What  substantives 
stand  in  the  gen.  after  verbs  of  valuing  ?  What  should  be  used  instead  of 
multi  and  majoris  ? 

5  38.  What  case  do  verbs  of  abounding,  &c.  govern  ?  What  case  may  egeo  and 
vmdigeo  govern  ?  What  case  do  verbs  of freeing from,  Ac,  take  ?  What 
is  their  more  general  construction  in  prose?  What  case  do  fungor,  &c. 
govern?0    In  what  case  is  the  manner,  cause,  &c,  put  ? 

1  39.  How  is  a  toe.  sometimes  used  in  poetry  ?  What  case  sometimes  standa 
in  apposition  to  the  voc.  ? 


*»  Mihi  coronam.  or  me  corona  donat. 

0  In  the  phrase  '  potiri  rerum '  (to  become  a  ruling  power)  the  gen.  only  is 
found. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX.  219 

i  40.  In  what  case  is  the  agent  expressed  after  the  pass,  verb,  when  a,  ao,  is  noi 
used  ?  After  what  part  of  the  verb  is  this  the  regular  construction  1 
What  verbs  cannot  be  used  personally  in  the  pass,  voice'?  Go  through 
I  am  believed.?  Mention  some  verbs  that  have  a  pans,  construction  (286). 
What  is  the  substitute  for  a  Jut.  inf.  pass.,  when  the  verb  has  no  supine 
to  form  it  with  iri?     I  hope  he  will  recover  (use  fore  ut). 

S  41.  What  verbs  can  govern  an  ace.  in  the  pass.  ?  Can  a  pass,  verb  or  partici- 
ple take  an  ace.  of  the  part  affected!  Y\  e  have  walked  enough  (trans, 
by  the  pass.).  Which  is  the  more  common  in  Lat.  '  Caius  videtur, 
dicitur,  &c,  esse,'  or  'videtur,  dicitur,  &c.  Caium,  esseV 

I  42.  How  is  a  noun  of  tune  put  in  answer  to  when  ?  in  answer  to  for  how  long  7 
How  do  you  express  the  time  in  or  within  which  ?  How  do  you  express 
time  in  answer  to  how  long  before  or  after?  How  are  ante,  post,  used  in 
this  construction  1  How  do  you  express  a  point  or  space  of  future  time 
for  which  any  arrangement  is  now  made  1  How  do  you  express  the  exact 
time  by  or  against  which  a  thing  is  to  be  done?  Three  years  ago. 
Three  years  old.  Above  twenty  yeabs  old*  (307,  /)  Thbek 
years  after  he  had  betubned  (310  (a)  ). 

I  43.  In  what  case  is  the  town  at  which  a  thing  is  done,  to  be  put?  In  what 
case  is  the  name  of  a  town  to  be  put  in  answer  to  whither?  in  answer  to 
whence  ?  To  what  proper  names  do  these  rules  apply  1  In  what  case  do 
urbs  and  oppidum  stand  in  apposition  to  the  name  of  a  town  in  the  gen. 
(315)  ?    How  is  local  space  expressed  ? 

i  44.  Decline  ' grieving'*  throughout.  Of  writing  a  letteb.  I  am  to  bb 
loved.  Go  through,  I  must  wbite.  Go  through  epistola  scribenda. 
When  must  the  part,  in  dus  not  be  used  in  agreement  with  its  substan- 
tive (332)1    We  must  spabe  our  enemies.    At  home.     From  home. 


p  Mihi  creditur,         I  am  believed. 
Tibi  creditur,         thou  art  believed. 
Illi  creditur,  he  i»  believed. 

Nobis  creditur,      we  are  believed. 
Vobis  creditur,      you  are  believed. 
Illis  creditur,         they  are  believed. 
*  These  constructions  admit  of  many  variations  by  the  introduction  of  natus 
inc"  quam — "  Above  thirty-three  years  old." 

major  annos  tres  et  triginta  natus; 
major  quam  annos  tres  et  triginta  natus ; 
major  quam  annorum  trium  et  triginta ; 
major  quam  tribus  et  triginta  annis.     (Z.) 
i  N.      Dolere,        grieving. 
G.      dolendi,       of  grieving. 
D.      dolendo,      to  grieving. 
Ace.   dolere,         grieving. 
AbL    dolendo,      by  grieving. 
The  ace.  is  dolendum  only  when  governed  by  a  preposition.     '  Se  peccati  insi- 
iiulHntuuod  dulere  intermiserint '  (have  intermitted  grieving). 


220  QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX. 

Home  (after  a  vert  of  motion).    Into  the  country.     From  the  cdun 
thy.     In  the  country.     On  the  ground. 

3  45.  What  kind  of  sentences  may  be  translated  by  participles  (344)  ?  In  what 
case  do  a  noun  (or  pronoun)  and  participle  stand  when  the  noun  or  pro* 
noun  is  not  governed  by  any  other  word  ?    What  is  this  called  ? 

§  46.  He  gave  them  the  country  to  dwell  in.  What  does  the  part,  in  rua 
often  express  ?  What  does  the  part,  in  dus  often  express  ?  Express  '  to 
have  a  thing  made,  in  the  sense  of  causing  it  to  be  made.  [Faciendum 
curare.] 

>j  -*7.  What  participle  is  wanting  in  all  but  deponents  and  neuter-passives? 
Having  left  his  brother.  [Relicto  fratre,  \r  quum  reliquisset  fra 
trem.] 

%  49.  My  own  fault.  Their  own  fault  (373,  a).  When — self, — selves  are  to 
be  translated  by  ipse  and  a  personal  pronoun,  in  what  case  may  ipse 
stand  ?  [In  the  nom.  or  in  the  case  of  sui,  according  to  the  meaning.*] 
When  may  him,  his,  her,  its,  theirs  in  a  dependent  sentence,  be  translated 
by  sui  or  suus,  even  when  they  denote  the  nom.  not  of  their  own,  but  of 
the  principal  sentence  ?  By  what  pronoun  must  him,  her,  &c,  be 
translated,  when  sui  or  suus  would  be  understood  to  mean  the  nom.  of 
its  own  verb  ?  Does  suus  ever  relate  to  the  accusative  ?  With  what  pron. 
is  this  very  common?  Which  gen.  pi.  (um  or  i)  is  used  after  partitives 
(372)  ? 

$  49.  WThat  is  the  difference  between  c is  qui  pugnat,'  and  'hie  or  ille  qui  pugnat' 
(376,  g)  ?  Which  of  these  three  pronouns  is  to  be  used  when  he,  him,  &c, 
is  without  emphasis,  simply  describing  a  person  or  thing  before  mentioned 
or  about  to  be  described  by  a  rel.  clause  ?  By  what  case  only  of  •  is '  can 
his,  her,  their,  be  translated  7  [Ans.  By  the  gen.]  Of  two  things  already 
mentioned,  what  pron.  means  the  latter?  what  the  former?  Which  pron. 
means  that  of  yours  ?  Medea  illa.  Distinguish  between  hie,  iste,  ille, 
referring  to  different  objects. 

§  50.  When  is  'any'  to  be  translated  by  quisquam  or  ullus?  when  by  quis? 
when  by  quivis,  quilibet?  when  by  aliquis  quispiam?  Does  quisquam 
ever  follow  si  (note  w)  ?  By  what  pronoun  may  '  a '  sometimes  be 
translated  ? 

§  51.  What  -prefix  do  interrogatives  often  take?  what  affix?  How  should  'al- 
ways '  with  two  superlatives  be  translated  ? 

8  52.  When  are  the  pronouns  that,  those,  not  to  be  translated  ?  When  they 
stand  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparative  sentence  for  a  sub- 
stantive expressed  in  the  first.]  When  quam  is  omitted,  in  what  case  is 
the  following  subst.  put  ?  What  case  goes  with  comparatives  and  super- 
latives to  express  the  measure  of  excess  or  defect  ?  How  are  the  Eng.  tfu 
— the  (  =  by  how  much — by  so  much)  to  be  translated  ? 

5  53.  Is  the  present  ever  followed  by  the  imperf  subj.?    When  ?    When  is  the 


*  c  He  wounded  himself,'  se  ipse  vulneravit  (  =  ipse,  non  alius,  se  vulneravit) '. 
se  tpsum  vulneravit  (  =se,  non  alium, vulneravit).  Hence  ipse  is  to  be  in  ;he 
nom.  or  in  the  oblique  case,  according  as  the  notion  to  which  it  is  opposed,  or 
with  which  it  is  contrasted,  is  in  the  nom.  or  in  an  oblique  case. 


QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX.  2'21 

Eng.  prea.  generally  translated  by  the  Lat.  future  ?  By  what  tense  is  tin 
per/,  definite  often  translated  ?  [Arts,  by  the  future  perfect.]  How  arr 
assertions  softened  in  Latin  ?  What  subjunctives  are  very  frequently  used 
in  this  way?  What  conjunction  is  often  omitted  after  velim,  &c.    I  havh 

LONG  DESIRED  (410,  a). 

\  54.  Is  the  perf.  subj.  ever  used  as  an  imperat.  ?  What  other  tense  is  some* 
times  used  as  an  imperat.  ?  By  what  tense  are  questions  of  appeal,  or 
questions  for  assent,  to  be  translated?  If  he  has  any  thing,  he  gives 
iT.  [Si  quid  habet,  dat.r]  If  I  have  any  thing,  I  will  give  it.  [Si 
quid  habeam,  dabo.]  If  he  should  have  any  thing  he  would  give  it. 
[Si  quid  haberet,  daret:  but  much  more  commonly,  si  quid  habeat,  det.] 
If  he  had  any  thing  he  would  give  it.    [Si  quid  haberet,  daret.]    lv 

HI  HAD  HAD  ANY  THING,  HE  WOULD  HAVE    GIVEN  IT.      [Si  quid  habuisset, 

dedisset)  How  is  'possibility  without  any  expression  of  uncertainty* 
translated?  How  is  'uncertainty  with  the  prospect  of  decision'  trans- 
lated? How  is  'uncertainty  without  any  such  accessory  notion'  trans- 
lated 7  How  is  '  impossibility  or  belief  that  the  thing  is  not  so,'  translated  1 
May  the  consequence  and  the  condition  refer,  the  one  to  past,  the  othei 
to  present  time  ?  When  the  consequence  has  'uould  have,'  how  must 
you  translate  the  pluperf  indie,  in  the  conditional  clause?  With  what 
tenses  may  si  take  the  indie?  With  what  tenses  does  si  always  govern 
the  subjunctive? 

I  BG.  In  conditionaJ  sentences  are  the  verbs  of  both  clauses  ever  in  the  subj. 
pres.  ?  [Yes ;  'Si  quid  habeat,  det,'  should  be  always  preferred  to  'Si  quid 
haberet  daret,'  unless  it  is  to  be  intimated  that  the  supposition  will  not  be 
realized.]  What  are  the  conditional  forms  of  the  subj.  ?  When  should 
scripturus  essem  be  used  for  ' should  have  written'  ?  What  tenses  of  the 
indie,  are  used  for  the  subj.  in  conditional  sentences  ?  Is  si  ever  omitted  7 
where  should  the  verb  of  the  sentence  then  stand  ?  What  are  the  con- 
junctions for  although?  [Etsi,  tametsi,  quamquam •  with  indie.  ;  licet 
with  subj.  What  is  quamvis,  and  what  mood  does  it  govern  in  Cicero? 
[However  much,  however ;  with  subj]  What  is  etiamsi,  and  what  mood 
does  it  govern  7  [Even  if;  even  though;  with  indie,  or  subj.]  Do  any 
other  conjunctt.  express  though?  [Yes;  sometimes,  quum,  ut,  with 
subj.] 

6  57.  In  a  dependent  conditional  sentence,  the  verb  of  the  consequent  clauso 
will  be  in  the  infin. :  what  infinitives  will  take  the  place  (respectively  of 
dot.  ?  of  dabit  ?  daret  ?  dedisset  ?  daturus  esset  ? 

j  58.  Explain  the  meaning  of  oblique  narration  ?  In  oblique  narration,  in  what 
mood  will  the  principal  verbs  stand  7  [In  the  infin.]  In  what  mood  will 
the  verbs  of  the  subordinate  clauses  stand,  provided  they  express  the 
words  and  opinions,  not  of  the  narrator,  but  of  the  speaker  7    [In  the 


*  Either  the  condition  or  the  consequence,  or  both,  may  refer  to  a  past,  or  future 
time. 

•  When  these  conjunctions  take  the  subj.  the  sentence  ia  generally  in  tho 
obliqua  orotic,  taken  in  its  widest  sense.  (See  9  58 )  This,  however,  docs  not 
hold  good  of  the  later  writers.    (Billroth.) 


4'<W  QUESTIONS    ON    THE    SYNTAX. 

subj.]  In  oblique  narration  what  is  often  omitted7]  [The  verb  or  panic 
on  which  the  infinitives  depend.]  In  what  mood  are  questions  for  answei 
asked?  [The  subj.]  In  what  mood  are  questions  of  appeal  asked?  [In 
the  infin.]  When  questions  are  thus  asked  in  the  infin.,  may  interroga- 
tives  be  used  with  the  injin.1  [Yes.]  In  what  mood  is  the  charge  ex 
pressed  with  quod  ? 

!  59.  When  may  the  pres.  and  ptrf.  subjunct.  oe  used  in  oblique  narration, 
even  when  dependent  on  a  past  tense  ?  In  what  mood  will  remarks 
stand  that  are  the  reporter's  not  the  speaker's  ?  In  what  mood  do  tho 
verbs  of  subordinate  clauses  stand,  when  the  principal  verb  of  the  propo- 
sition is  in  infin.  or  subj.  ?  With  what  limitation  is  this  rule  to  be  ap- 
plied ?  When  may  the  pres.  and  perf.  subj.  be  used,  although  the  gen- 
eral rule  would  require  the  imp.  or  pluperf.  May  the  imp.  or  pluperf  be 
ever  used,  when  the  general  rule  would  require  the  pres.  or  perf.?  How 
are  the  ace.  and  infin.  used  with  nS  in  direct  narration  (473)  ? 

5  60.  Mention  some  words,  phrases,  &c,  with  which  qui  takes  the  subj. 
[Ans.  After  sum,  in  '  sunt  qui,'  '  erant  qui,'  &c,  and  after  negative  and 
interrogative  sentences,  nemo,  nihil,  &c,  est:  quis  est?  an  quisquam  est? 
quotusquisque  est?  &c.  Also  after  adsunt  qui,  non  desunt  qui,  &c,  and 
similar  phrases  with  reperio,  invenio  (to  find).] 

5  61.  What  mood  does  qui  govern,  when  it  introduces  the  ground  of  an  asser- 
tion ?  What  mood  does  qui  take  after  quippe,  utpote?  always  or  gene- 
rally! What  mood  does  qui  take  when  it  is  equivalent  to  ut  with  a 
personal  or  possessive  pronoun?  Mention  some  phrases  with  which 
qui  has  this  force.  In  what  other  cases  does  qui  govern  the  subj.  (484, 
485)? 

*  62.  When  does  quum  take  the  indie.  ?    What  mood  does  quum  generally 

govern,  when  the  verb  of  the  sentence  is  in  the  imperf.  or  pluperf.  ? 
[The  subj.t]  How  is  the  subject  of  congratulation  expressed  (492)? 
Mention  some  conjunctions  that  always  govern  the  subjunctive.  (Vocab. 
68.)  When  are  the  pres.  and  perf.  subj.  used  with  utinam?  when  the 
imperf.  and  pluperf.  ?  How  is  '  not '  generally  expressed  after  utinam, 
dummodo,  &c. 
5  63.  When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  present  tense,  in  what  mood  is  the  verb 
after  antequam  or  priusquam  expressed  ?  When  the  principal  verb  is  in 
the fut.,  in  what  mood  or  moods  may  the  dependent  verb  be  ?  When 
the  principal  verb  is  in  a  past  tense,  in  what  mood  or  moods  may  the  de- 
pendent verb  be?  When  should  the  subj.  always  be  used  after  antequam, 
priusquam  ? 

*  64.  When  do  dum,  donee,  quoad  (  =  until)  take  the  indicative?  when  the  sub- 

junctive? What  mood  do  they  and  quamdiu  always  take,  in  the  sense  ol 
as  long  as?  With  the  adverbs  meaning  as  soon  as,  how  should  the  Eng- 
lish pluperf  generally  be  translated  (514)? 

§  65.  When  is  that  expressed  by  quod?  What  class  of  verbs  are  followed  bj 
quod  ?    What  mood  does  quod  take  ?  with  what  exception  ? 

S  &i    What  was  the  first  of  the  month  called  by  the  Romans  ?  on  what  day  dio 


But  the  indie,  of  repeated  actions. 


QUESTIONS  ON  THE  SYNTAX.  2U3 

the  Nones  fall  ?  on  what  day  the  Ides  ?  In  what  months  were  the  Nona 
on  the  seventh?  How  were  the  days  between  the  Kalends  and  Nonu 
reckoned  ?  days  between  the  Nones  and  the  Ides?  days  after  the  Ides? 
Give  the  rules  for  each  case. 

I  G7.  What  may  be  used  instead  of  a  conjunction  and  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun?    Mention  some  circumlocutions  for  the  imperative. 

§  69.  Was  a  sestertium  a  coin  1  How  many  sesterces  made  a  sestertium  ?  What 
is  the  meaning  of  sestertium  with  numeral  adverbs?  Is  sestertium  de- 
clinable in  this  construction  ?  How  may  the  value  of  sestertium  decies^ 
centies,  &c,  be  got  approximately  (547,  note  *)  7 

S  69  Give  the  division  of  the  as.  Explain  asses  nmrce.  By  what  other  nun* 
was  thi*  rate  of  Interest  expressed  1 


1'IUCTICAL   INTRODUCTION 


TO 


LATIN    PROSE    COMPOSITION 


PAHT  II. 


PRACTICAL    INTRODUCTION 


TO 


<VTIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION 
part  n. 

CONTAINING  A  FULL  VIEW  OF 

THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  LATIN, 

AND 

LONGER  LATIN  EXERCISES. 


BY 

THOMAS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,  M.  A, 

BECTOH   OF  LYNDON, 
AND   LATH    FKLLOW   OF   TRINITY    COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE. 

CAREFULLY    REVISED    AND    RE-ARRANGED 

BY   REV.   J.    A.   SPENCER,   A.M. 


NEW  YORK: 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY, 

549    &    55  1    BROADWAY. 


1875. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  ytrtU'  1846,  by 
D.  APPLETON  &  CO., 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern 
District  of  New  York. 


ADVERTISEMENT." 


The  object  of  the  following  Work  is  to  supply  boys  with  an  easy 
collection  of  short  passages,  as  an  Exercise-book  for  those  who 
have  gone  once,  at  least,  through  the  First  Part  of  the  Author's 
*  Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition. 

T.  K.  A. 

Lyndow, 
April  6,  1844. 

[Consult  the  Preface  to  Part  I.,  at  (he  beginning  of  the  vol- 
ume.] 

J.  A.  S. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

PART  II. 


TkQM. 

On  the  Order  of  Words  in  Latin  233 

1 1.    Position  of  Attributives 236 

2.  Dependent  Genitive 239 

3.  Participial  Clauses 248 

4.  Proper  Names ° 241 

5.  Antithetical  Words 242 

6.  Secondary  Emphasis;  position  of  words  occurring  in  two  i 

clauses $  " 

7.  On  the  position  of  Sum 245 

8.  Pronouns 246 

9.  Pronouns  (continued)  247 

10.  The  Relative 249 

11.  The  Relative  (continued) 250 

18.    Interrogate  ves 251 

18.    Prepositions 253 

14.  Conjunctions 254 

15.  Conjunctions;  autem,  enim,  igitur  with  esse 255 

16.  Non.    Haud 257 

17.  Comparatives,  &c 258 

Long  eh  Latin  Exercises , 968 

Cautions 303 

Differences  of  Idiom 308 

Memorial  Lines 312 

Versus  Memoriales 31.1 

Vocabulary 315 

Extracts  from  the  "  Antibarbarus" 329 

Index  I.— English 333 

Index  II  —Latin  and  Critical  Remarks 350 


EXPLANATION  OF  MARKS,  ETC 


Words  in  Italics  are  to  be  locked  for  in  the  Vocabulary.* 

to  which  the  mark  |]  is  prefixed,  are  to  be  looktxi  for  hi  the 

Antibarbarus. 

Df.  and  C.  stand  respectively  for  the  DifFerences  and  Cautions  at  the  end  of 
the  book. 

Df.  (1)  and  C.  (1)  stand  respectively  for  the  DifFerences  and  Cautions  of 
Parti. 

a,  b,  after  a  word,  mean  that  that  word  is  to  be  the  first  or  second  word  re* 
spectively  in  the  clause. 

',  y,  mean  that  the  word  is  to  be  the  last,  or  last  but  one  (respectively)  in  the 
clause. 

r.  /.  mean  that  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  placed  first. 

a.  v.  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  translated  by  the  active  voice. 

i  means  that  the  word  is  to  be  inserted  in  the  relative  clause. 

b  means  that  the  word  is  to  stand  near  the  (head  =)  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence. 

«»  means  that  the  word  is  to  be  placed  in  as  emphatical  a  position  as  possible, 
near  the  middle  of  a  sentence. 

p  means  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  turned  into  a  participial  clause. 

ab  —  a  b  indicates  that  the  order  is  to  be  retained. 

a  b  X  b  a  indicates  that  the  order  is  to  be  reversed. 
•  mean  that  the  words  over  which  they  are  placed,  are  to  be  separated. 

An  accent  over  a  word  means  that  it  is  emphatic. 

Words  in  spaced  printing  (printing)  are  those  to  which  tho  direction  in- 
timated by  a  mark  or  reference  applies. 

»  prefixed  to  a  word,  or  to  several  words,  in  spaced  printing,  means  that  %i  or 
they  are  to  be  omitted. 


*  The  pupil  will  there  find,  not  the  word  only,  but  the  phrase  of  which  it  forms  a 
part.     For  other  words  a  dictionary  must  be  used. 


PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 


TO 


LATIN    PROSE    COMPOSITION. 


i. 

ON    THE    ORDER    OF    WORDS    IN    LATIN. 

1.  In  the  usual  arrangement  of  a  Latin  sentence,  the  subject, 
as  the  most  important  word,  stands  first ;  and  words  which  modify 
the  meaning  of  another,  precede  the  word  whose  meaning  they 
modify. 

1.  Ratio  praeest ;  appetitus  obtemperat. — 2.  Consuetudo  est  altera  natura.— 
3.  Habent  opinionem,  Apollinem  morbos  depellere. 

2.  Hence  (a)  oblique  cases  mostly  precede  the  verb  (or  othei 
word)  on  which  they  depend  ;  (b)  adjectives  and  dependent  geni- 
tives  precede  the  substantives  tu  which  they  belong  ;  and  (c)  ad- 
verbs  precede  their  verbs  or  adjectives. 

(a)  Corporis  gravitatem  et  dolorem  animo  judicamus. 

(b)  1.   Mamertina   civitas. — 2.  Sr/raaisius  Philistua. — 3.  Reliqua   vitaj  in 

stituta 

(c)  1.  Sui  negotii  bene  gerens.— 2.  Sapientia  prope  singularis. 

3.  With  respect  to  the  usual  order  of  oblique  cases  ; — 

The  nearer  object  precedes  the  more  remote :  e.  g.,  the  accus. 

after  the  transitive  verb  precedes  aa  abl.  of  manner  or  instru. 

ment,  &c. 

Helvetii  legato*  ad  C<jesarem  mittunt.  Cce*.    [See  also  exx.  under  2  (a).] 
Descriptions  of  a  place  precede  the  mention  of  things  existing. 

or  actions  done  in  it. 

Ca.'sar  a  Lacu  Lemano  ad  montem  Juram  inillia  pasauum  decern  tnurum  fm 
uamque  peiducit.    Ceea. 


234  ON    THE    ORDER    OF    WORDS.  [§  1.  4-U 

The  cause  precedes  the  effect. 

Veniebant  ad  Eumenem,  qui  propter  odium  fructum  oculis  ex  ejus  casu 
capere  vellent.     C.  Nep. 

Exercise  1. 

4.  [Does  mens  or  animus  denote  the  mind  with  all  its  passions,  emotion^ 
&c.  1       (92,  note  c.)] 

We  do  not  feel  a  disease  of  the  mind  by  °  any  bodily  sensa- 
tion.1  Caius  is  going  to  send  a  copy2  of  the  letter  to  his  father. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  the  plea  of  necessity  is  a  valid  excuse  for 
Dionysius.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  he  employed  an  advocate  at 
Carthage.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  they  lived  in  affluence  at 
Rome.  We  have  been  impatient  for  your  arrival.  There  were 
some  who3  looked  forward  with  impatience  to  your  arrival.  The 
Gauls  attack  the  Romans,  before  they  have  disencumbered  them, 
selves  of  their  baggage.  The  Athenians  are  going  to  recall  Bal- 
bus  from  banishment.  It  would  have  been  better4  never  to  have 
returned  from  banishment.  It  is  one6  thing  to  sin,  another  to 
throw  the  blame  upon  another.  There  is  no  doubt  that  Philistus 
the  Syracusan  (b)  lived  many  years  at  Rome.  It  cannot  be  de- 
nied, that  you  are  connected  with  Scipio  by  the  ties  of  blood. 

i  '  By  the  body.'  2  See  Example.  8  Df.  1109.  «  satius  fuit,  426,  (5). 
*  38. 

5.  0^7"  Unusualness  of  position  calls  attention  to  a  word  so 
olaced,  and  thus  renders  it  emphatic. 

6.  Hence  in  a  language  which,  like  the  Latin,  admits  of  considerable  vari- 
ety in  the  collocation  of  words,  what  tee  effect  by  printing  a  word  in 
Italics,  is  accomplished  by  placing  it  in  an  unusual  position. 

7.  This  unusualness  of  position  is  the  great  principle  on  which  the  emnhasia 
or  prominence  of  a  word  depends. 

8.  The  beginning  and  the  end  of  a  clause  are  positions  favorable  to  empha- 
sis because  "  by  the  former  our  attention  is  excited,  and  on  the  latter  it 
rests."  But  of  course  the  beginning  of  the  clause  is  not  an  emphatic 
position  for  the  subject,  nor  the  end  for  the  predicate;  but  vice  versa. 

9.  (a)  The  subject  receives  emphasis  by  being  placed  at  or 
near  the  end  of  the  clause :  (b)  the  predicate  by  being  placed  at 
or  near  the  beginning  of  the  clause. 

(a)  1.  Sensit  in  se  iri  Brutus. — 2.  Semper  oratorum  eloquentiae  moderatris 

fuit  audiwrur.x  prudentia.     C. 
(6)  Dwces  tu  quidem  quamdiu  voles :  tamdiu  autem  velle  debebis,  quoad  tq 
quantum  proficias,  non  pCEnitebit.     C. 


(  1.  10-15.]  ON    THE    ORDEB    OF    WORDS.  235 

10.  An  emphatic  subject  often  stands  just  before  a  verb  which 
closes  the  sentence. 

Eorum,  qui  exacta  aeta'e  moriuntur,  fortuna  laudatur.     C. 

11.  A  verb  stands  at  the  head  of  its  clause  without  emr.  hasis, 
ivhen  it  is  used  with  autem  to  explain  a  previous  assertion. 

In  English  we  should  insert  such  an  explanation  parenthetically. 
1.  Amicum  ffigrotantem  visere  volebam :  habitat  autem  ille  in  parte  urbia 
remotissima.— 2.  [Cato]  objecit  ut  probrum  M.  Nobiliori,  quod  is  in  pro- 
vinciam  poetas  duxisset :  duxerat  autem  consul  ille  in  jEtoliam,  ut  aci- 
mus,  Ennium.    C. 

12.  The  verb  or  adjective  precedes  its  oblique  cases  when  its 

comparative  importance  to  the  whole  meaning  of  the  sentence  is 

greater  than  theirs. 

1.  Quaeritur  an  is,  qui  prqfuit  nobis,  si  postea  nocuit,  nos  debito  solverit.  C. 
2.  Qua?  perspicuam  omnibus  veritatem  continet  propositio,  nihil  indigel 
approbationis.  C. — 3.  Iris  nunquam  non  adversa  soli  est.  Sen. — 4.  Sim- 
iles parenlibu8  ac  majoribus  suis  filii  plerumque  creduntur.  C. 

13.  Oblique  cases  and  adverbs   receive  emphasis  by  being 

placed  at  or  near  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  clause. 

1.  Semper  oratorum  eloquentiae  moderatrix  fuit  auditorum  prudentia.  C. — 
2.  Arbores  serit  diligens  agricola,  quarum  adspiciet  baccam  ipse  nun- 
quam.  C— 3.  Erudito  homini  esse  ego  iratus,  ne  si  cupiam  quidem,  non 
possum.  C. — 4.  Ne  vitationem  quidem  doloris  ipsam  per  se  quisquam 
in  rebus  expetendis  putavit.  C. 

14.  Of  words  standing  close  together,  the  reversing  their  usual  order  gives 
promidence  (I  think)  to  the  first  rather  than  to  the  second.  Thus  when 
a  b  becomes  b  a,  it  is  6  rather  than  a  that  receives  prominence. 

Mirabile  videtur,  quod  non  rideat  haruspex,  quum  haruspicem  viderit.  C. 

Exercise  2. 

15.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  Hortensius*  is  going  to  follow  the 
example  of  Cato.  Let  Hortensius  defend  himself  from  this  chargo 
by  the  plea  of  °bad  health.  Brutus  felt  athat  he  was  invited  to  a 
share.  He  exclaims  :  "  What1  advantage  will  the  Carthaginians 
derive  from  so  great  a  wrong  ?  "  Let  good  examples*  for  imita- 
tion be  proposed"  to  boys.a  There  is  no  doubt  that  the  plea  of 
necessity  is  a  valid  excuse  for  you.  I'  will  follow*  the  advice  of 
Cato.  The  examples  of  those  who  die2  for  their  country  are 
quoted- with-approbation.s  We  are  looking  impatiently  'for  the 
irrival  of  Cicero.     I   fear  that  he  will  not4  undergo  the  danger 


236  POSITION    OF    ATTRIBUTIVES.  [§  1.    lt>— 1*3 

willingly.*     I  could  not  follow'  such  an  example,  even  if  I  wished 

it  (13,  3).     He  is  always*  bringing  me  into  danger.     I  fear  that1 

Uortensius"  will  not  ward  off  the  danger  from  me.     I   fear  that 

Hortensius  will  die  by  his  own  hands.     How  few  there  are  who5 

have  altogether6  satisfied  the  expectations'1  of  men  !b 

1  How  are  questions  of  appeal  asked  in  oblique   narration  1     [460,  (c)  (2).] 
8  Pro  patr  id  mortem  or  morte  occumbere.    ,  3  Laudare.  4Df.  15'ci 

6  DL  1 109,  (14).         «  Ex  omni  parte. 


§  1 .     Position  of  Attributives. 

16.  (a)  An  attributive  receives,  perhaps,  a  slight  emphasis  from 
being  placed  after  its  substantive ;  but  (b)  it  receives  more  by 
separation  from  it,  especially  if  it  be  placed  near  the  beginning 
or  end  of  the  sentence.1 

(a)  1.  Sedebat  in  rostris  collega  tuus,  amictus  toga  purpurea,  in  sella  aurcd> 

coronatus.  C. — 2.  Jacet  inter  saltus  satis  clausus  in  medio  campus 
herbidus  aquosusque.  L. 

(b)  1.  In  miseriam  nascimur  sempiternam.  C. — 2.  Mdui  equites  ad  Cajsarem 

omnes  revertuntur.   C&s. 

17.  If  the  attention  is  to  rest  on  a  substantive  having  an  attri- 
butive with  it,  it  is  placed  after  the  attributive,  and  separated 
from  it,  so  as  to  be  thrown  as  near  the  end  of  the  sentence  as 
possible. 

1.  Cimon  barbarorum  uno  concursu  vim  maximam  prostravit.  C.  Nep.— 
2.  In  lis  perniciosus  est  error,  qui  existimant  libidinum  peccatorumque  om~ 
nium  patere  in  amicitia  licentiam.  C. — 3.  Miles  quidam  parum  abfuit, 
quin  Varum  interficeret ;  quod  ille  periculum,  sublato  ad  ejus  conatum 
scuto,  vitavit.  Cces 

16.  If  an  attributive  belongs  to  two  substantives,  it  either  pre- 
cedes both,  or  follows  both,  or  follows  the  first. 


*  Grysar  makes  the  position  after  its  substantive  the  usual  position  of  an  attri- 
butive ;  that  before  its  substantive  the  more  emphatic  one.  This  opinion  seeina 
to  me  utterly  untenable ;  e.  g.  in  the  example,  "  sedebat  in  rostris  collega  tuus, 
Rmictus  toga  purpurea,  in  sella  aured,  coronatus,"  (Cic.  Phil.  ii.  34.)  who  can 
doubt  that  the  adjectives  purple  and  golden  are  here  more  important  notions  than 
the  substantives  toga  and  chair? — In  this  sentence,  however,  purpurea  and  au 
rod  gain  a  little  emphasis  frc«n  their  being  followed  by  a  slight  pause. 


§  1.   19-22.]  POSITION    OF    ATTRIBUTIVES.  231 

(From  her  divine  birth  and  origin.) 

(1)  A  divino  ortu  et  progenie.  "J 

(2)  Ab  ortu  et  progenie  divind,.  >  Not,  ab  ortu  et  dicind  progenie.* 

(3)  Ab  ortu  divino  et  progenie.  J 

19.  Zumpt  confines  the  position  after  the  first  to  the  'familiar  style;'  but  U 
occurs  even  in  the  Orations  of  Cicero,  and  is,  I  think,  the  best  position, 
when  the  second  substantive  is  an  emphatic  addition :  e.  g.  Cic.  Phil.  ii. 
33.  "  Sed  arrogantiam  ho  mini  a  insolentiamque  cognoscitc." 

20.  Of  two  adjectives  or  other  words  joined  by  'and'  (or  some 
other  co-ordinate  conjunction)  that  which  is  to  arrest  the  attention 
most  is  often  placed  towards  the  end  of  the  sentence,  and  sepa- 
rated from  the  other  by  one  or  more  of  the  words  that  belong 
equally  to  both. 

Obs.  The  pronouns,  and  other  small  unaccented  words,  are 
very  frequently  used  for  the  separation  of  connected  words. 

1.  Insula  est  Melita,  satis  lato  ab  Sicilia  mari  pericuhsoque  disjuncta.  C. — 
2.  Omnibus  officiis  diligentcr  a  me  sancteque  servatis,  <fcc. — 3.  Et  dolori 
fortiter  ac  fortunes  resistere. — 4.  Dominos  esse  omnium  rerum  et  mode- 
ratorea  deos. 

21.  Obs.  This  separation  of  co-ordinate  notions  is  conveniently 
employed  in  dividing  a  long  sentence  into  portions,  and  thus  giving 
symmetry  and  strength  to  the  styk  by  preventing  the  accumula- 
tion of  unaccented  words.  For  instance,  Wolf  writes :  '  nunc 
tandem  jucundum  fructum  mihi  capere  licet  variarum  curarum  : 9 
jucundum  and  fructum  are  here  emphatic,  mihi  capere  licet  wholly 
unemphatic.     By  arranging  the  sentence  thus,  'nwwc  tandem  licet 

|  jucundum  mihi  |  variarum  curarum  \  fructum  capere?  we  have 
a  nearly  regular  alternation  of  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice ; 
or  what  Cicero  calls  intcrvalla  cequalia.     (Reisig.) 

Exercise  3. 

[An  accented  pronoun  is  emphatic,  and  to  be  expressed.] 

22.  Is  it  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  yield  basely  to  pain8  and 
fortune^  (20,3)  ?  Thick8  clouds9  are  covering  the  whole  sky.  ( Turn 
iiitc  pass,  voice.)     It  is  a  great  thing  to  be  able  to  endure  cold*  and 


2  This  sentence  (sic)  is  in  Cic.  Tusc.  i.  12  (26),  and  Wulf  improperly  refers 
iirind  to  both  substantives:  a  supposition  which  Orelli  appears  to  counto 
aance  by  not  condemning  it. 


238  POSITION    OF    ATTRIBUTIVES.  [§  1.   23-25 

hunger."  They  believe  that  they  shall  derive  great*  advantage- 
from  this  injury.  He'  gave  me  advice  boldly*  and  rashly.'  Fired 
with  anger*  and  ambition,*  he'  heaped  every  kind  of  abuse  upon 
me.  It  cannot  be  doubted,  that  he  is  easily  accessible  to  flattery.1 
Which8  advice*  they'  received  with  axclamations.  He'  did  many* 
and  rash*  °  actions  by  the  advice  of  Caius.  There  is  no  doubt 
that  he  is  living  by  alms.  Caius  has  made  this  question  very 
dark.  He  has  followed  a  bold'  and  rash'  advice.  Deliver  mf 
from  the  yoke*  of  slavery.*  You  see  (pi.)  the  anger  and  amb; 
tion  of  the  man  (19)  I 

1  '  that  flatterers1  have  easy8  access8  to  his  ears.' 


23.  When  a  substantive,  with  a  notion  joined  to  it  attributively, 
is  more  nearly  defined  by  some  other  words,  those  words  are  usu 
ally  placed  between  the  substantive  and  its  attributive. 

Tua  erga  Imcceium  benignitas.  C.  Tanta  fuit  in  castris  capiendia  celeritas, 
&e.  Com.  Halesini  pro  multis  et  magnis  suis  majorumque  suorum  in 
rempublicam  meritis  atque  beneficiis,  &c.  C.  Pro  hac,  quam  conspicitis, 
ad  conservandam  rempublicam  diligentia,  &c.  C.  [Obs.  the  insertion  of 
the  relative  clause.] 
(a)  A  deviation  from  this  rule  occurs,  C.  Nep.  Miltiad.  3,  3,  'hortatus  est 

pontis  custodes  ne  afortuna  datam  occasionem  liberandi  Graeciae  dimit 

terent.'     Herefortuna  is  emphatic. 
(/?)  A  notion  joined  attributively  to  a  substantive  may  be  expressed  eithei 

by  an  adjective,  or  a. participle,  or  a  genitive  case. 

24.  (a)  A  participle  generally  follows  its  substantive,  as  con. 

taining  a  predicate  assumed  attributively ;    but  (b)   where  the 

predicate  would  precede  the  subject,  if  the  clause  were  resolved, 

there  the  participle  should  precede  the  substantive. 

(a)  Ratibus  junctis  trajectus.    L.    Consules — regibus  exactia  creati  sunt. 
(6)  Ingratus  est,  qui,  remotis  testibus,  agit  gratiam.  Sen.    Caesar  pulsus,  nor. 
instante  Pompejo,  negavit  eum  vincere  scire.  Suet. 

25.  In  other  words,  the  participle  should  precede,  when  atten- 
tion  is  to  be  called  to  it  rather  than  to  the  substantive  ;  and  also 
when  the  participle  and  substantive  together  form  one  complex 
notion. 

Temeritas  cut  videlicet  Jlorentis  ititis.  C.    Itaque  bene  adhibUa  ratio  cernit 
quid  optimum  sit.   C. 


$  2.  26-29.]  DEPENDENT    GENITIVE.  23P 

Exercise  4. 

2(5.  It  was  decreed,  that  for  his  so-great  merit  towards1  the 
state,'  he  should  be  called8  king  by  the  senate.  Caius  behaved 
with  such  courtesy3  towards  all,'  that  no  mar  was  so  humble 
as  not*  to  have  access  to  him.  I  will  strive  to  satisfy-  men's  great 
expectations  of  me.i  I  fear  that  I  shall  not'  satisfy  your  great' 
expectations  of  me.'  If  (Ego,  si,  &c.)  such  an  opportunity  of 
success'7  were  offered  me,  I'  would  eagerly  seize  it  [I.  445,  a, 
(1).]  The  Gauls,  having  lost  their  baggage,  all'  Jled.  The 
troops  of  Lentulus  p  restore  the  fortune  of  the  day,"  and  rout  the 
enemy.  Are  you/  the  man9  to  lose  such10  an  opportunity  of  suc- 
cess7 by  your-own  laziness  ?»  I  fear  that  I  shall  not12  be  able 
to  recompense'*  you  for  your  so-great  benefits  towards14  me.' 
There  were  some,  who  looked  forward  to  your  arrival  with  impa- 
tience. 

1  in  with  ace.  2  appellarc.  3  Say;  (was  of  such  courtesy*  (abl.).  See 

P.  humanitas.     Choose  the  word   that  is  nearly  =:  affability.  *  Use  qui 

lion.     See  Pt.  I.  p.  215,  note  d.        5  I.  75.  6  Df.  153.      7  rci  gerenda. 

*  See  battle.  9Df.  1109,  (9).  10  tarn  praxlarus.  ll  SeeD.  igua- 

na. 12  Df.  153  13  gratiam*  rcferre.'  li  in. 


§  2.     Dependent  Genitive. 

27.  When  a  gen.  depends  on  two  substantives  it  generally  pre- 
cedes both. 

Hujus  autcm  orationis  difficilius  est  exitum  quam  principium  invenire.  C. 

28.  When  a  gen.  depends  on  a  substantive  that  has  another 
genitive  dependent  upon  it,  with  which  it  forms  one  complex 
notion,  it  is  generally  placed  before  it. 

The  gen.  that  forms,  as  it  were,  one  notion  with  the  substantive,  gen- 
erally follows  i  it :  it  is  very  often  an  objective  genitive. 
1.  Fortissimi  viri  magnitudinem  animi  desideras.  C. — 2.  Themiatoclit 
vitia  ineuntis  cetatis  magnis  sunt  emendata  virtutibus.  C.  Nep. — 3. 
Cupio  ab  hac  hominum  satictate  nostri  discedere.  C. — 4.  Hujus  voa 
cnimi  monumenta  retinebitis  corporis  in  Italia  nullum  vestigium  esse 
patiemini?  C. 


Not  always :  e.  g.  hujus  rex  animi  magnitvdincm  admirans.    C.  Nq>.  II.  10 


240  PARTICIPIAL   CLAUSES.  [§  3.  30-32 

Exercise  5. 

29.  It  is  more  difficult  to  avoid  the  snares  of  these  men, 
than  to  endure1  °their  arms.  Nearly  all  men's*  youthful* 
opinions  are  gradually  weakened.3  Who  would  not  praise  °thia 
great  philosopher's  contempt4  for5  external  things  ?  I  am  not  the 
man6  to  laugh  at  the  Christian's  contempt4  for5  the  things  of  this 
life.7  I  have  very  often  admired  both8  the  courtesy  and  the 
benevolence  of  Cimon.  Extreme9  cheapness^  followed10  that 
year's*  dearness  of  provisions.  I  don't  doubt  that  extreme 
dearness  will  follow11  this  year's  cheapness  of  provisions.  My 
Tullia's  weak  state12  kills13  me  with  ° anxiety. 

1  eustinire.  2  Say;  'opinions  of  commencing  life.'     Should  it  be  iniens 

aetas,  or  eetas  iniens  1    (See  25.  last  clause.)     3  Dod.  paulatim.    *  despicientia. 
5  Pt.  I.  156.  6Df.  1109  (9).         i  Say;  'of  human  things.'  *  quum- 

tum.  9  Summus.  10  consequi.  ll  Pt.  I.  290  {d).         «  imbeciUi- 

tas  corporis.  13  exanimare. 


§  3.     Participial  Clauses, 

30.  When  a  participial  clause  is  equivalent  to  an  apposition  or 

relative  sentence,  it  stands   as  near  as  possible  to  the  word  it 

modifies. 

1.  Pisistratus  primus  Homeri  libros,  coiifusos  antea,  sic  disposuisse  dicitur, 
ut  nunc  habemus.  C. — 2.  Saepe  homines  rationem,  bono  consilio  a  diis 
immortalibus  datam,  in  fraudem  malitiamque  convertunt.  C. 

31.  But  when  a  participial  clause  is  equivalent  to  a  sentence 
beginning  with  a  conjunction,  it  is  sometimes  inserted  in  the  prin- 
cipal sentence,  sometimes  placed  before  it,  sometimes  after  it,  as 
its  relation  to  the  principal  sentence  requires. 

1.  Egyptii  et  Babylonii,  in  camporum  patentium  aequoribus  habUantes, 
(=  quum  hab.)  omnem  curam  in  siderum  cognitione  posuerunt.  C— 

2.  Perditis  (=  licet  perd.)  rebus  omnibus,  tamen  ipsa  virtus  se  sustentare 
potest.  C. — 3.  Brutus  Consul  ita  prcelio  uno  accldit  Vestinorum  rea 
ut  diiaberentur  in  oppida,  se  defensuri  (  —  ut  defend.).  L. 

Exercise  6. 

[P  means  that  the  sentence  is  to  be  turned  into  a  participial  clause.] 

32.  °  My  reputation  being  lost,  nothing1  remains2  but  that  I 


[§4.33-35.  proper  NAMES.  24  1 

should  die  by  my  own  hands.  I  gladly  receive  the  honours* 
offered  to  me  for3  having  saved  the  state.  They  all7  fly  to  the 
town  to  defend  themselvesP  °there.  Be  sure*  not  to 
neglect  your  health,  which  is  now  re-established. p  Can 
any  one  cure  a  body,  that  is  worn-outP  by  such''  labours  $ 
Who  doubts,  that  such5  opinions,  so  deeply8  implanted,  so  long 
ffrtertained,7  are  very  hard  to  root  up  ?8  The  example  of  a  man 
*  who  makes  glory  his  first  object,  is  not  to  be  followed. 

1  nihil'  alind  ■ — nisi.  *  See  i.  83.  3o6.  Say;  '  on  account  of  the 

republic  saved.'        *cave.    See  Df.  (1),  118.        5  C  (1),  10.  «  tampenitus. 

1  retustus :  the  word  for  old  which  refers  to  the  superiority  of  a^e.    D?d. 
^tus.  8  Df.  (1),  93. 


§  4.     Proper  Names. 

33.  A  proper  name  generally  precedes  its  apposition. 

1.  Ex  praepositio :  tis  syllaba :  e  litera.— 2.  Cato,  vir  clarissimus.— 3.  Lemnos 
insula. 

34.  But  if  the  attention  is  to  rest  upon  the  apposition,  or  if  it 
has  a  nearer  relation  to  some  preceding  notion,  it  stands  first. 

1.  Ejus  doctor  Plato  triplicem  finxit  animum.  C.  (because  the  ejus  refers 
to  Xenocrates  in  the  former  sentence.) — 2.  Homo  mirificus,  Dionysius 
(tliat  vxmdtrful  person,  Dionysius). 

Exercise  7. 

35.  I  will  make  no  objection1  to  your  hissing  off  the  stage 
°that  very  bad  actor2  Balbus.  I  remember  that  Pamphilus,  my 
host,  said3  that  he  would  not  come.  You  (sing.)  have  heard  Q. 
Minucius  Rufus  say,  that  king  Antiochus lodged4  at  his  house' 
0  w  h  e  n  at  Syracuse.1  Verres  invited  Antiochus,  king  of  Syria, 
to  supper.  1  hear  that  the  excellent  Lucilius,5  a  friend  of  mine, 
is  sutfering  from  a  disease  that  must  end  fatally.  I  am  vexed  that 
Rutilius,  a  man  p  who  has  deserved  well  of  me,  should  be  living 
on  such  confined  means.  I  fear  that  Satureius,  an  excellent  man, 
*nd  °one  who  has  deserved  extremely-well  of  the  state,  will 
be  brought  into  danger  of  his  life.  It  is  your  °  business  to  be* 
*eech  the  conqueror  to  spare  the  life  of  Pamphilus,  your  host 


242  ANTITHETICAL    WORDS.  [§  5.  36-40, 

Your  connection6  Rutilius  swore  that  he  owed  his  life  to  rne  :  his 

father'  Numantius7  would  not  beg  Caesar  to  spare  mine. 

1  Df.  (1),  19.      2  histrio  ( =s  '  stage-player ')  implies  something  of  depreciatioL 

3  Df.  (1),  2.  4  deversari.        (Luc.  vir.  opt.)         6  qffinis. 

7  The  accent  over  father  shows  that  it  is  to  precede  the  proper  name. 


§  5.     Antithetical  Words. 

36.  From  7,  it  follows  that  antithetical  words  or  notions  will 

naturally  often  stand,  the  one  at  the  beginning,  the  other  at  the 

end  of  the  clause. 

1.  Necessitatis  inventa  antiquiora   sunt,  quam  voluptatis.  C. — 2.  Errare 
mehercule  malo  cum  Platone,  quam  cum  istis  vera  sentire.  C. 

37.  If  the  antithetical  notions  consist  of  more  than  one  word 
(each  answering  to  one  of  the  other  set),  the  order  of  the  first  set 
is  very  often  reversed  in  the  second. 

38.  If  the  antithetical  notions  are  in  different  sentences,  they 
stand, 

(a)  Either  both  at  the  beginning  )    fl,    .  t.        , 
,,;_.,.         ,          ,     &         °  >  of  their  respective  clauses  : 

(b)  Or  both  at  the  end  )  r 

(c)  Or  the  one  at  the  end  of  its  clause,  the  other  at  the  begin 
ning  ;  the  order  of  the  first  being  generally  reversed  in  the  second, 
if  they  consist  of  several  words. 

(a)  Stulti  malorum  memoria  torquentur ;  sapientes  bona  prceterita,  grata  re- 

cordatione  renovata,  delectant.  C.  (a  b  —  ab.) 
(a,  6)Multi  in  amicis  parandis  adhibent  curam :  in  amicis  cligendis  negligentei 

sunt.  C.  (a  6  —  a  6.) 
(c)  1.  Ut  cupiditatibus  principum  etvitiis  infici  solet  tota  civitas :  sic  emendari 

et  corrigi  continentid.  C. — 2.  Metuo  ne  scelerate  dicam  in  te,  quod  pro 

Milone  dicam  pie.  C.  (ab  X  &  <*•) 

39.  When  a  substantive  is  repeated  in  a  sentence,  the  two 
cases  generally  stand  close  together. 

Obs.  Not  always  :  e.  g  nihil  semper  Jloret :  at  as  succedit  cetati.  C.  In 
sentences  of  the  kind  to  which  this  rule  applies,  the  pron.  '  another ' 
might  generally  be  substituted  for  the  second  substantive,  '  one '  being 
added  to  the  first.     '  Man  kills  man '  =  '  one  man  kills  another.' 

1.  Vir  virum  legit.— 2.  Ex  domo  in  domum  migrare. — 3.  Diem  ex  die  ex- 
spectare. — i.  Arma  armis  propulsare. 

40.  These  forms  will  be  indicated  thus : 

a  b  —  a  b  will  indicate  that  the  order  is  to  be  retainc*  j  a  b  X  &  a,  tnat  it  is  to  be 

reversed. 


}  6.    41,42.]  SECONDARY    EMPHASIS.  243 

Ota.  The  inverted  order  is  called  Chiasmus,  and  iw  the  favourite  form  fcr  an- 
tithetical sentences. 

Obs.  These  rules  are  not  invariably  observed  :  e.  g.  Rerum 

copia  verb orum  copiam  gignit.     C.     Pausanias  magn am  belli 

gloriam  turpi  morte  maculavit.    Nep.    Iniquissimam  paccm 

justissi m o  bello  antefero.     C. 

Exercise  8. 

[Obs.  When  'one  is  to  be  omitted  (°  o  n  e),  'another'  must  be  translated 
by  a  case  of  the  substantive  that  follows  c  ne.— °Then  indicates  that 
the  question  is  to  be  asked  by  an.] 

41.  I  don't  see,  how  past  pleasures1  can  assuage1  present  evils 
l.abxba).  I  confess  that  the  judgment  of  the  generality2  differs3 
from  my  judgment.  Laws*  punish4  the  wicked,  defend  and  pro- 
tect5 the  good.  The  opinion'  which*  you'  are  implanting  in  my 
mind,  Rutilius  is  rooting  up.6  The  opportunity  which8  you  are 
seizing,  Caius  has  let  slip.6  The  more  difficult  it  is  to  acquire  a 
knowledge  of  heavenly  things,7  the  more  do  they  kindle  °in  us 
the  desire  of  knowing9  °  them.  It  is  one9  thing  to  be  unanimously 
acquitted,  another  to  escape  by  a  sentence*0  purchased  by  bribery 
(a  b  —  a  b).  Do  you  °  t  h  e  n  believe,  that  the  mind  is  strengthened 
by  pleasure,  ° a n d  weakened  by  continence  ?■  (abxb a).  Arms 
must  be  resisted  by  arms  (39, 4).  Is  it  ° t  h  e  n  true  that  'one  poet 
al  ways  envies  ©another?  I  by  Hercules  had  rather  be  condemn* 
2d*  than  acquitted1  by  a  sentence10  purchased  by  bribery  (36,  2). 

1  Stdart.  2  vulgus.        3  dissentire  (a  qua  re).  *  supplicio*  afficerc*. 

*  Dod.  tueri:  or  I.  374.  6  Invert.  I.  30  (d).  *  'heavenly  things,  the 

more  difficult  knowledge  they  admit  of  {habent,  &c.  8  cognoscere. 

■1.39.  10  See  J  jdgment. 


0.     Secondary  Emphasis  :  position  of  words  occurring  in  two 
clauses. 

42.  In  a  sentence  of  some  considerable  length  a  word  receives 
u  slight  emphasis  or  prominence  by  being  placed  just  before  or 
nfter  a  pause. 

For  instance,  just  after  an  apposition  clause  that  belongs  to  the  subject.  In 
fact,  the  beginning  or  end  of  any  group  of  words  is  a  slightly  emphatic 
position. 


844  SECONDARY   EMPHASIS.  [§  6.  43-45. 

I.  Oratoris  nomen  apud  antiquos  in  Graecia  |  majori  quadam  vel  copia,  vei 
gloria  floruit.  C— 2.  Ccelius  talis  tribunus  plebis  fuit,  ut  nemo  contra 
civium  perditorum  popularem  turbulentamque  dementiam  |  a  senatu  et  a 
bonorum  causa  steterit  libentius.     C. 

43.  A  word  that  is  the  subject  or  object  of  two  sentences  should 
generally  precede  both. 

1.  Ilostes,  ubi  primum  nostros  equites  conspexeruntj  impetu  facto,  celeritei 
nostras  perturbaverunt.  Cccs.—2.  Quern,  ut  barbari  incendium  effugisso 
viderunt,  telis  eminus  missis,  interfecerunt.    Nep. 

The  position  of  a  subject  at  the  head  of  a  sentence  before  the  conjunction 
of  an  accessory  sentence  is  so  common,  that  it  is  often  found  there,  even 
when  it  is  not  the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence  also. 

1.  Hie  etsi  crimine  Pario  est  accusatus,  tamen  alia  fuit  causa  damnatioms. 

Nep. — 2.  Romani  postquam  Carthaginem  venerunt turn  ex  Cartha- 

giniensibus  unus,  &c. 

44.  A  word  that  is  the  subject  of  one  sentence  and  the  object 
of  another,  should  generally  stand  before  both  (as  belonging  to 
the  principal  sentence)  and  be  represented  in  the  accessory  sen- 
tence by  the  proper  case  of  is,  ea,  id. 

1.  Rex  Prusias,  quum  Hannibali  apud  eum  exsulanti  depugnari  placeret, 
negabat  se  audere.     ( When  Hannibal,  who  was  residing  as  an  exile  with 

King  Prusias,  wished,  &c. he  said &c.)  C— 2.  Boios,  petentibus 

iEduis,  quod  egregia  virtute'  erant  cogniti,  ut  in  finibus  suis  collocarent 
concessit.     Cats. 

Exercise  9. 

45.  If  the  Boiia  had  sued  for  peace,  they  would  have  obtained 
it.  If  Caius  does1  this,  he  will  endanger  his  reputation.  Dio 
nysiusa  having  seen  me  at  Rome,  left  nothing  undone8  to 
bring  me  into  odium.  Couldm  my  favourite,  your  connection,8 
Rutilius,  upon  hearing  this4  (pi.)  almost  die  with  laughter  ? 
When  your  favour  it  e/  Saufeius  was  staying  with5  my  friend 
Lucilius,*  cthe  latter  used  to  get  an  appetite  by  walking. 
(44).  When  Metellusa  was  at  Athens,  he  °used  to  devour  litera 
ture  with°that  wonderful6  person'  Dionysius. 

1 «  Shall  have  done.'  2  Df.  Pt.  I.  18.  3  affinis.         4  Abl.  Absol. 

apud  quern  deversari,  tc  stay  with  any  body  for  a  time  as  a  guest.         6  limno 
nirificus. 


}7.  46-51.]  ON  THE  POSITION  OF  SUM.  215 

§  7.     On  the  position  of  Sum 

46.  Sum,  as  the  mere  logical  copula,  stands  either  between  the 
subject  and  predicate,  or  after  them  both. 

Homo  est  mortalis :  or  homo  mortaJis  est. 

47.  Sum,  when  it  precedes  both  subject  and  predicate,  is  moro 
than  the  mere  copula,  and  expresses  existence  emphatically  [= 
'  exists  :'  '  there  is.*] 

Est  homo  mortalis  (man  is  undoubtedly  mortal). 

In  est  neccsse  the  '  est '  is  emphatic  (  =  '  is  absolutely  necessary :')  or  '  must  in- 
fallibly.' 

1.  JXon  vident  id  se  cupere,  quod  fugitivo  alicui  aut  gladiatori  concedi  sit 
ntctsst.  C.—2.  Se  esse  tertium  ilium  Cornelium,  ad  quern  regnum  hujua 
urbis  pervenire  esset  necesse.     C. 

48.  Sum,  when  unemphatic,  should  generally  be  placed  after 
mi  emphatic  word. 

Hence  is  it  not  placed  after  enim,  autem,  &c,  except  when  it  is  em- 
phatic. 
1.  Postquam  divitiae  honori  esse  ccepere,  &c.  C.—2.  Haec  conficta  arbitror  a 
poetis  esse.  C—  3.  Ut  a  te  paulo  est  ante  dictum.  C. — 4.  Natura  est  ipsa 
fabricata.  C. — 5.  In  eoque  colendo  sita  vitae  est  honestas  omnis.  C. 

49.  On  this  principle  esse  is  often  placed  after  its  governing 

verb  ;  especially   after  such  verbs  as  affirm  or  deny  existence, 

such  as  credo,  nego,  ajo,  volo,  veto.1 

1.  Is  igitur  versum  in  oratione  vetat  esse.  C. — 2.  Defensum  neget  esse.  C. — 
3.  Quos  equidem  credo  esse,  &c.  C. — 4.  Ut  socios  honore  auctiores  vclii 
esse.  C. 

50.  Esse  in  compound  infinitives  very  frequently  precedes  a 

hyperdissyllable  participle  ;  the  participle  often  standing  at  the 

*nd  of  its  clause. 

Abs  te  esse  liberates:  per  te  esse  recreaias;  latrocinia  esse  depulscu  es3i 
adeptoa:  operam  esse  ponendam  (but,  prorogatus  e  s  *  e  videaiur)—al\  in  a 
small  portion  of  one  letter  (Epp.  ad  Quint.  Fratr.  lib.  i.  1). 

51.  The  est  of  a  compound  tense  often  stands  after  its  parti- 

iiple,  at  the  end  of  a  clause. 

1.  Nihil  amplius  desiderarem  hoc  statu,  qui  mihi  jam  partus  est.  C.—1 
Quae  tamen  (ut  in  malis)  acerbitati  anteponenda  est.  C. 


1  By  no  means  always :  omni  ratione  tuearc,  ut  esse  quam  beatiHgimos  vclTS 
h'pp.  ad  <4ui7i£.  Fratr.  lib.  i.  1. 


24ti  pronouns.  §  8.  52-55. 

Exercise  10. 

52.  Dionysius,  who  says  that  virtue  is  not  productive  of  plea, 
sure,  is  blamed1  by  many.  Caius  denies  that  gain  should  be 
pursued  as  a  first  object.  He  says  that  this  should  be  the  first 
object  with  those  who  are  placed  over  others,2  that  those  who  are 
under  their  command3  should  be  as  happy  °as  possible.4  I 
believe  that  the  boy  is  a  liar.6  He  says  that  pleasure  is  not  to 
be  our  first  object.  All  cry-out,  that  this  very  false6  man 
R  is  not  to  be  believed  upon  his  oath.  He  promised  that  he  would 
place  no  obstacle  °in  the  way  of  accomplishing  so 
great  an  object.7  Are  you/Qthen  going  to  feel  affronted  at 
this  ?     They  teach  °  us,  that  that  opinion  should  be  given  up. 

1  Dod.  reprehendere.  2  To  be  placed  over  others,  prcecsse  aliis.    Indie. 

*  To  be  under  any  body's  command,  in  cujus  imperio  ease.  4  I.  410.  p.  144. 

"  mendax^  adj.  6  mendacissimus.  7  res. 


a 

1.  Tuae  suavissimae  litter* 

2.  Tuae  litterae  suavissimae 

3.  Litterae  tuae  suavissimae 


§  8.     Pronouns. 

53.  When  a  substantive  has  both  an  adjective  and  adjective 
pronoun  with  it,  there  are  six  possible  positions,  without  sepa- 
ration. 

b 

4.  Suavissimae  tuae  litterae 

5.  Suavissimae  litterae  tuae 

6.  Litterae  suavissimae  tuae. 

(a)  If  both  the  predicates  are  emphatic,  the  forms  2.  5.  should  probably  be 

preferred. 
(#)  There  maybe  two  adjective  pronouns  and  an  adjective :  e.  g.tuum  hoe 

suburbanum  Gymnasium.  C.  De.  OratA.  1,  21  (end), 
(a)  Examples  of  form  l(which  is  the  English  order)  are :  in  hac  nostra  actione 

(C.  De  Orat.  iii.  59) :  suis  lenissimis  postulatis  (Cces.  B.  C.  i.  5) :  in 

meo  gravissimo  casu  (C.  ad  Earn.  iv.  6, 1) :  in  hac  praeolara  epistola  (C 

de  Fin.  ii.  31). 

54.  If  the  substantive  has  a  demonstrative  pronoun  and  two 
adjectives  joined  by  et,  <£*c,  the  most  usual  place  of  the  pronoun 
is  after  the  first  adjective. 

Crassus  hie  et  concretus  aer.  C. 

Exercise  11. 
65.  Do  not  pester  °that  excellent  rnj.n  with  your  threatening 


J  9.  56-59.]  pronouns.  24) 

letters.  He  never  answered  a  single  word1  to  my  very  kindly 
expressed3  letters.*  I  cannot  but3  return  some  answer  to 
your  very  acceptable  letters.  Those  wrong  opinions  °of  youra 
must  be  rooted-up  out  of  your  mind.  Is  it  °the  part  of  a 
Christian  to  spend  all  his  life  in  making  gain  ?  You  must  strive 
to  retain4  that  great  reputation  °of  yours.  You  must  take 
care5  lest  your  so-great  reputution  should  be  endangered.  No 
obstacle  shall  be  placed  by  me  (°in  the  way  ofaccom- 
plishing)  this  so  great  and  difficult  an  object." 
Is  it  then  the  part  of  a  Christian  to  increase  this  unpopu- 
larity6 of  mine  ? 

1  Nullum  unquam  verbum.  2  humani83imu8.  8  Df.  (1),  18. 

1  Pt.  I.  75.  5  cavvre.  *  See  Odium. 

§  9.     Pronouns  continued. 

56.  Quisque  with  a  superlative  or  ordinal  numeral  follows  the 
adjective. 

Optimus  quisque :  altissima  quccquc  flumina :  quinto  quoque  verbo. 
Quisque  is  generally  placed  immediately  after  a  case  of  sui  or 
suus  referring  to  it. 

Placet  Stoicis  sua  quamquc  rem  nomine  appellare.  C. 

57.  (a)  Quidam  generally  follows  its  noun,  whether  substantivo 
or  adjective  :  but 

58.  (b)  Quidam  precedes  its  noun,  when  there  is  an  opposition 

between  the  quidam  and  some  others :  and  in  other  cases  where 

the  quidam  is  very  emphatic. 

(c)  For  instance,  where  the  quidam  means  '  some  that  I  could  name :'  '  some 
ice  know  of? 

(a)  1.  Interim  Agyllius  quidam  vincula  laxavit.  Ncp.—2.  Sed  audio  majorom 

quendam  in  urbe  timorem  esse.  C 

(b)  Clamor  iste  indicat  esse  quosdam  cives  imperitos,  sed  non  multos.  C. 

(c)  Otium  praestaturi  videntur,  si  quidam  homines  patientius  eorum  poten* 

tiam  ferre  potuerint.  C. 

59.  The  ille  of  celebrity  follows  its  substantive,  if  there  is  no 
adjective  with  it :  if  there  is,  it  generally  stands  between  the  two. 

Obs.  Not  always :  e.  g.  illcm  acerbissimam  ministram  Pra^torum  avari- 
tiffi  calumniam.  C.  Ep.  ad  Q.  Fratr.  i.  1,  8.  Herculem  Xenophontium 
ilium.  C.  Xenophon  Socraticus  ille.  C. 
1.  Habetur  vir  egregius  L.  Paullus  ille,  qui,  &c.  C.—2.  Omnis  iUa  vis  ef 
quasi  fliimma  oratoris,  &c.  C— 3.  Antipater  ille  Sidonius.  C — 4.  Mm> 
sarchus.  auditor  Panaetii  illius  tuL  C. 


248  pronouns.  [J  9.  00-64. 

60.  Aliquis  in  connection  with  another  adjective  generally 
takes  the  second  place.1 

Bene  dicere  non  habet  definitam  aliquam  2  regionem. 

61.  (a)  When  its  substantive  has  no  other  adjective  or  pronoun 
with  it,  aliquis  generally  follows  the  substantive,  when  both  are 
unemphatic  ;  but  (b)  precedes  it,  when  either  is  to  receive  promi- 
nence or  emphasis. 

Obs.  Aliquis  is  emphatic  and  precedes  the  substantive,  when  it  means 
'  some  at  all  events,'  'some  if  not  much:'  e.  g.  qui  sedulitatem  mali  poeta* 
duxerit  aliquo  tamen  praemio  dignam,  &c.   C. 

(a)  1.  Aut  de  pingendo  pictor  aliquis  diserte  dixerit  aut  scripserit.  C. — 2  Si 
hujusce  rei  ratio  aliqua,  &c.  C. 

(6)  1.  Ejus  facti,  si  non  bonam,  at  aliquam  rationem  afferre.  C— 2.  Quid 
mihi — tamquam  alicui  Grceculo'  otioso  etloquaci — qusestiunculam — poni- 
es'? C—  3.  Timide  tamquam  ad  aliquem  scopulum'  libidinis,  sic  tuam 
mentem  ad  philosophiam  appulisti.  C. 

62.  Two  pronouns,  or  an  adverb  with  the  pron.  from  which  it 
is  derived,  are  generally  brought  close  together. 

Obs.  Not  always :  even  when  the  pronouns  relate  to  the  same  person : 
e.g.  "  cum  quibus  te  non  tuum  judicium  sed  temporum  vincla  conjunxc' 
runt.'''  C.  Fam.  x.  6. 
Equites,  sine  duce  relicti,  alii  alia  in  civitates  suas  dilapsi  sunt.  L. 

63.  (a)  When  ipse  with  a  case  of  sui  stands  for  himself,  &c,  it 
generally  follows  the  case  of  sui :  but  (b)  when  there  is  to  be 
particular  emphasis  on  the  subject,  ipse  precedes,  and  is  used  in 
the  nominative,  even  though  the  opposition  intended  is  between 
oneself  and  somebody  else. 

(a)  1.  Deforme  est,  de  se  ipsum  praedicare,  falsa  praesertim.  C — 2.  Non  egeu 
medicina  ;  me  ipse  consolor.  C. — 3.  Lentulum  mihi  ipsi  antepono.  C. 

(b)  1.  Si  quis  ipse  sibi  inimicus  est,  &c. — 2.  Jpsi  se  curare  non  possunt. 
[Sometimes,  however,  the  ipse  follows :  si  te  ipse  contineas.  C] 

64.  In  other  words  :  whenever  what  is  asserted  of  the  agent 
with  respect  to  himself  is  a  strange  thing,  ipse  is  to  be  in  the  nom. 
end  precede  sui,  even  when  the  meaning  is  himself,  opposed  to 
others  (of  whom  the  assertion  might  be  expected  to  be  made). 


1  For  'any  other'  alius  ullus  is  more  common  (I  think)  than  ullus 
zlius:  but  this  depends,  of  course,  on  the  relative  emphasis  of  '  any '  or  '  other. 
To  express  it  strongly,  separate  the  adjectives,  as:  non  ullam  rem  aliam 
.^iiinescens  nisi,  &c.   C 

2  In  unus  aliquis  this  Order  should  be  observed,  unless  there  is  another  adj. 
'e.  g.  aliquis  unus  pluresve),  or  the  aliquis  is  emphatic 


$  10.  0T>,  GO. J  THE    RELATIVE.  240 

Exercise  12. 

['  The  "famous,1  '  the  °  g  r  e  a  t,'  &c,  to  be  translated  by  Me.] 
G5.  I  far  prefer'  this  suburban  gymnasium  °of  yours  (53, /J) 
lo  the  Ofamous  Academy  and  Lycseum.  Every  body  lovea 
himself.2  Every  one  is  dear  to  himself.  The  longest  letters  are 
°  always3  the  most  agreeable.  To  each  virtue  its  own*  pecu- 
liur?  praise  is  due.4  Does  it  °then  become  an  orator  almost  to 
die  with  laughing  every  third  word  ?  They  cry-out,  that  each 
man  must  abide  by  his  own  judgment.  Would  you7  dare  to 
refuse  to  abide  by  the  judgment  of  the  °  g  r  e  at  Plato  ?  I  must 
explain,  what*  was  the  opinion  of  that  god  ° of  mine,  Plato. 
That  F^picurus  °of  yours  boasts  that  he  had  no  master.  Epicu- 
rus says  that  he  attended6  °the  lectures  of  a  certain 
Pamphilus  at  Samos.  It  cannot  be  denied,  that  some7  corpuscles 
are  smooth,  others  rough,  others  round  (a b  X  ba).  Do 
you  °  t  h  e  n  believe,  that  this  immense  and  most  beautiful  world 
was  made8  of9  certain  corpuscles,  by  no  natural  compul- 
sion,10 but  by  a  certain  fortuitous  concourse  ?  Let  us  honour 
this  °man's*  diligence  with  some  reward,  if  not  a  great 
°one."  Do  you  °  t  h  e  n  compare  me  to  some  Scythian  (6 1 ,  b)  1 
Is  it  °  t  h  e  n  like  a  philosopher12  to  defend  pugnaciously  somo 
doubtful  opinion  °or  other? 

1  Longe  anteponcre.  '         *  I.  363.     Begin  with  ipse.  3  I.  399,  6. 

•  peculiar,  proprius.    To  be  due,  deberi.  5  quisnam.        6  to  attend  a  person's 

lectures,  aurtire  aliquem.     Turn  the  verb  into  the  passive,  'was  heard  by  him.' 
1  quidam.  8  efficcre.  9  ex.  10  '  no  nature  compelling.'  n  if 

rith  no  {non)  great,  yet  (at)  with  some  reward.'     (See  Ex.  61,  6.)  w  Say : 

'of  a  philosopher.' 


§  10.     The  Relative. 

00.  (a)  The  relative  (except  when  it  refers  to  is,  ea,  id)  should 
stand  as  near  as  possible  to  its  antecedent :  (b)  the  place  of  the 
antecedent  being  often  determined  with  this  view. 

(a)  Xerxem  per  literas  certiorem  fecit  id  agi,  ut  pons,  quern  'die  in  Hellesponto 
fecerat,  dissolveretur.  Nep. 

(b)  Bellum  grave  et  periculosum  vestris  vectigalibus  atque  sochs  a  duobus 
potent: <*si mis  regibus  infertur,  MUhridaie  et  Tigrane;  quorum  alter,  &a 
C. 

II* 


250  THE    RELATI/E.  [§11.67-71, 

67.  This  applies  only  to  strictly  relative  clauses  :  not  to  qui  = 
the  demonstr.  is,  with  et,  nam,  igitur,  autcm,  &c. 

68.  Appositions,  and  even  single  adjectives  (especially  super- 
latives), that  in  English  precede  the  relative  clause,  are  in  Latin 
generally  placed  in  that  clause. 

Hence  c  the  very  celebrated  general  Epaminondas,  in  whose  house '  would 
be :  Epaminondas,  cujus  celeberrimi  imperatoris  in  domo,  &c.  '  The  im- 
mortal glory  which  the  Greeks  acquired,'  gloria,  quam  immortalem  Graeci 
retulerunt.  &o  :  '  a  city  which,'  quae  urbs,  &c. — '  the  city  he  first  visited' 
quam  urbem  primam  adiit. — 'an  opinion  which,'  quae  sententia,  &c,  {city 
and  opinion  being  in  apposition  to  something  preceding.) 

Exercise  13. 

69.  In  the  same  year  Cumse,  a  city8  which8  the  Greeks  were 
then  in  possession  of,1  is  taken  by  the  Campanians.  The  Amanus 
divides  Syria  from  Cilicia,  a  mountain  which  was  full  of  °  o  u  r 
constant8  enemies.8  I  hope  that  you  will3  recover  from  the  very 
severe  disease,  with  which  you  are  now  afflicted.  I  hope  that 
you  will3  keep  the  many8  and  very  beautiful8  promises,  which  you 
made  me.  The  very  great8  and  beautiful8  reward,  with  which  I 
have  been  presented,  wonderfully4  delights  me.  That  Athena- 
goras  of  Cyme,6  who  had  dared  to  export  corn  in  a  famine,8 
was  scourged'  with  rods.6 

1  To  be  in  possession  of,  tenire.  2  Constant,  sempiternus :  to  end  the 

sentence.  sJbre  ut .  .  .         4  mirifice.  5  Cymceus.         6  virgis  ccsdi. 


§  11.     The  Relative  continued. 

70.  (a)  When  the  subject  is  defined  by  lUe  and  a  relative 
clause,  it  is  often  placed  in,  and  at  the  end  of,  the  relative  clause : 
bo,  (b)  when  a  relative  clause  stands  before  the  principal  clause 
(the  relative  being  in  the  nominative),  the  antecedent  often  ter- 
minates the  relative  clause. 

(a)  Ille,  qui  in  Timaeo  mundum  sedificavit  Platoms  deus. 

(b)  Quae  perapicuam  omnibus  veritatem  continet  propositio,  nihil  indiget  ap- 

probations.    C. 

71.  When  the  relative  clause  precedes  the  principal  one,  the 
rel.  may  give  up  its  usual  place  (as  the  first  word)  in  favour  of  e 
notion  that  is  to  be  made  prominent. 


\  11     72-73.  THE    KELATIVE.  251 

Tributa  vix,  in/asnus  Pompeii  quod  satis  sit,  cfliciunt.  C. 

11.  Of  two  cases  of  qui,  an  oblique  case  precedes  a  nomi 

native. 

Scnatus  ille,  quemquiex  regibus  constare  dixit,  unu/,vcram  speciem  Romani 
sonatas  cepit.    L. 

73.  When  qui  refers  to  something  preceding,  no  conjunctions 
tan  go  with  it  but  sed,  et  (before),  tamen,  quidem,  que  (after). 

1.  Perturbat  me,  C.  Caesar,  illud  interdum :  cuod  tamen,  quum  te  penitua 
recognovi,  timere  desino.  C. — 2.  Morosit^.8  senum  habet  aliquid  excusa- 
tionis,  non  iliius  quidem  justce,  scd  quae  probari  posse  videatur.     C. 

74.  Other  conjunctions,  sucli  as  autem,  vero,  enim,  igitur, 
cannot  stand  with  qui,  unless  its  reference  is  to  something  that 
follows. 

1.  Quce  autem  secundum  naturam  essent,  ea  sumenda  et  quadam  oestima- 
tinne  dignanda  doccbat.  C. — 2.  Qui  igilur  adolcscens,  nondum  tanta 
gloria  prceditus,  nihil  unquam  nisi  severissime  et  gravissime  feccrit,  is  ea 
existimatione,  eaque  aetatesaltavit'?  C— 3.  Quorum  vero  patres  aut  ma- 
jores  aliqua  gloria  praestiterunt,  ii  student  plerumque  eodem  in  genere 
laudis  excellere.  C. — 4.  Quce  ergo  ad  vitam  tuendam  pertinent,  partiir 
sunt  in  animo,  &c.  C. 

Exercise  14. 

[r.f.  means  that  the  rel.  clause  is  to  stand  first  (see  Part  I.  30) :  a.  v.  that  the 
sentence  is  to  be  translated  by  the  active  voice.] 

75.  That  opinion^  °of  yours,  which  is  injurious1  to  us,  must 
be  rootcd-up  out  of  your  mind.  That  Rupilius,i  who  for  so  many 
years  had  sat  at  the  helm  of  the  state,  had  Jled  away  secretly. 
(r.  /.)  Let.  those  therefore,  to  whom  we  all  owe  our  lives,  be 
buried  with  military  honours,  (r.f.)  Will  therefore'  that  Lu- 
cilius,t  who  is  prepared  for  his  fate,  whatever  it  may  be,  jly 
away  secretly  ?  (r.f.)  You  are-  therefore'  driving  from  the 
helm  of  the  state  those,  to  whom  both  you  and  I  owe  our  lives, 
(r.f.)  The  General  who  had  so  often  saved  the  state,  was  suf- 
fered by  his  fellow-citizens  to  be  deprived  of  burial,  (a.  v.) 
We  havo  scarcely  corn*  enough2  for  a  month.  Let  °those 
therefore i  who  have  kept  back  their  corn,  be  fined  a  sum-of- 
rnoney.3  Peace  must  be  sued  for  j  which  those  who  sue  for  it 
(fit.),  will  obtain. 

1  Lacdt-e.  2  Say :  '  which  may  be  enough  f  o  r  ('  in ')  a  m  o  n  r  Ii.' e     fcfc* 

txainple(7l).  3  pecunia.  abL 


£52  INTERROGATIVES.       PREPOSITIONS.       [$  12,  13.  76~7ii 

§  12.     Interrogatives. 

76.  (a)  Interrogatives,  except  ne,  take  the  first  place  in  an  indl 
rect  question  that  follows  the  principal  sentence  :  but, 

77.  (b)  In  direct  questions,  or  indirect  questions  that  precede 
the  principal  sentence,  the  interrogative  sometimes  yields  the  first 
place  to  an  emphatic  notion. 

(a)  Quaeritur,  cur  doctissimi  homines  de  maximls  rebus  dissentiant.  C. 

(b)  1.    Dii  utrum  sint,  necne  sint,  quaeritur.  C. — 2.  Quid?   Alexandrum 

PhercBum  quo  animo  vixisse  arbitramur  7  C. 

Exercise  15. 

78.  What  ?  is  not  nearly*  the  whole  heaven"  filled1  with 
the  human  race  ?  But  whether  these  numbers*  are  poetical, 
or  of8  some  other  kind,  must  be  seen  next.8  When  Socrates8 
was  asked,4  whether  he  did  not  think  Archelaus,a  the  son  of 
Perdiccas,  happy  ;  I  don't  know,  said  he,  for  I  have  never  con- 
versed with  him.5  What  ?  did  not  the  °  f  a  m  o  u  s  Cato  of  Utica* 
die  by  his  own  hands  ?  What  1  with  what  feelings  do  we  think 
that  Lucilius  of  Ariminum  saw  his  mistake  (b)  ?  I  wish  to 
remark7  °  he  r  e  ,  what8  a  calamity  over-confidence9  usually10  is. 

1  Ramshorn  says :  complere,  to  fill  completely ;  implere,  to  fill  what  is  hollow 
empty ;  opplere,  to  fill  to  the  brim,  to  fill  to  overflowing,  to  cover  a  surface  by 
filling.  Nearly  so  Jentzen  :  plenum  quod  est  ad  satietatem  dicitur  completwn\ 
expletum:  r  epletum  est,  quod  exhaustum  erat,  ut  fossa :  oppletus  ad  m,- 
l>erfieiem,  r  efe rtus}d iffe rtus,  c  o nfe rtus  ad spatium interius pertinent. 
2  ex.  3  deinceps.  4  'Socrates,  when  it  had  been  inquired  of  ^im'  (eubj.) 
&C,  queer  ere  ex  aliquo.  5  colloqui  cum,  allquo.  6  Uticensis,  adj. — so 

AriminerMs  below.  7  Libet  interponere.  8  C.  (1),  21.    Df.  (1),  50. 

f  nimia  fidacia.  10  '  is  wont  to  be.' 


§13.     Prepositions. 


79.  Prepositions  (except  versus  and  tenus)  generally  stand  be- 
fore their  nouns,  (a)  When  the  substantive  has  an  attributive 
with  it,  the  preposition  stands  between  the  attributive  and  its  sub- 
stantive, when  either  of  them  is  emphatic,  (b)  When  the  attrib- 
utive is  a  rel.  pron.,  the  preposition  generally  stands  between  the 
aron.  and  its  substantive 


?  13.  80-84.]  prepositions.  25,3 

(a)  1.  Magna  cum  cura  atquc  diligentia,  scripsit.  C. — 2.  Roman!  Horatium 
accipiunt  eo  majore  cum gaudio,  quo  prope  liietuni  res  fuerat. 

<b)  In  some  expressions  the  preposition  nearly  always  takes  the  middle  place ; 
e.  g.  quH  in  re  ;  quam  ob  rem ;  ed  de  causa. 

80.  Even  when  the  relative  has  no  substantive  with  it,  the  pre- 

oosition  often  follows  it. 

1.  Senatus,  quos  ad  soleret,  referendum  censuit.  C. — 2.  Homo  disertus  non 
intclligit  eum,  quern  contra  dicit,  laudari  a  se,  &c.  C. — 3.  Socii  putandi 
sunt,  quos  inter  res  communicata  est.  C. — 4.  Res,  qua  de  agitur.  C 

81.  Cum  is  always  appended  to  me,  te,  se,  nobis,  vobis,  qui 
(=  quo)  :  and  also  to  quo,  qua,  quibus,  when  the  cum  is  entirely 
unemphatic. 

1.  Maxime  cavendum  est,  ut  cos,  quibuscum  sermonem  conferimus,  et 
vereri  et  diligere  videamur.  C— 2.  Ira  procul  absit,  cum  (emphatic)  qua 
nihil  recte  fieri,  nihil  considerate  potest.  C. — 3.  Noli  adversum  eos  me 
velle  ducere,  cum  quibus  (opp.  to  adversum  eos1*  ne  contra  te  arms 
ferrem,  Italiam  reliqui.    Ncp.  25,  4. 

82.  When  a  substantive  governed  by  a  preposition  has  other 

words  attached  to  it,  these  words  are  often  placed  between  the 

preposition  and  its  noun. 

1.  Erat  olim  mos  ut  faciles  essent  in  suum  cuique  tribuendo.  C. — 2.  Honore 
digni  cum  ignominia  dignis  non  sunt  comparandi.  C. 

A  preposition  is  sometimes  separated  from  its  noun  by  que,  ve, 
vero,  autem,  tamen,  quidem,  enim. 

1.  Sensim  banc  consuetudinem  et  disciplinam  jam  antea  minuebamus ;  post 
vero  Sullae  victoriam  penitus  amisimus.  C. — 2.  So:  post  autem  Ale^an- 
dri  mortem.  Nep. — 3.  Post  enim  Chrysippum.  C. 

83.  Even  in  prose,  per  in  adjurations  is  separated  from  its  case 

oy  the  ace.  pronoun  of  the   person  addressed,  the  verb  adjure, 

beseech,  implore  being  omitted. 

Nolite,  judices,  per  vos fortunas,  per  liberos  vestros,  inimicis  meis,  iis  prai 
sertim  quos  ego  pro  vestra  salute  suseepi,  dare  laititiam.  C. 

Exercise  16. 

84.  On  these  matters  I  would  wish1  you  (pi.)  to  deliberate* 
V/'ith  Pomponius,  with  Camillus,  with  whomsoever2  it  shall  seem 
0  g  o  o  d  to  you.  As  to3  him,  in  whose  °  h  a  n  d  s  *  all"  power' 
is  °lodged,  I  see  nothing  to  fear.«  Epicurus  showed  himself 
a  sufficiently  apt°scholar  in  °receiving*  this  nerveless1 
*nd  effeminate*  opinion;  after  him  Philonyrnus  the  Rhodian  l| 


354  conjunctions.  [§  14.  85-89 

asserted  that  to  be  without  pain  is  the  summuin  bonum.     They  fix 

a  certain  limit,9  beyond  which,  °they  say,  we  ought  not  to 

advance.     Neither  in  those  who  frame  constitutions,10   nor  in 

those  who  wage  wars,  is  the  desire  of  oratorical  power11  wont  to 

arise.     I  believe  that  a  limit  in  sepulchres  is  properly12  required : 

for  to  what  expenses  that  matter'3  has  already  advanced,  you  see 

in  the  tomb  of  C.  Figulus.    Pomponius  is  going  to  set  out  for  Sicily : 

a  matter*  concerning  which  I  have  ||  fished  out  agreat  d  e  a  1  M 

from  Hortensius. 

1   Vclim  with  subj.  (ut  omitted).  2  The  simple  relative.  3 

4  To  be  in  any  body's  hands,  penes  aliquem  esse.  Df.  (1),  108.  6  ad 

aliquid  satis  docUem  se  praeblre.  7  enervatus.  8  muliebris.  9  trw 

dum  adhibere.  10  constituere  rempublicam.  n  dicendi.  12  recte. 

io  reSm  u  rnulta. 


§  14.     Conjunctions. 

85.  A  conjunction  stands  at  the  head  of  the  clause  to  which  it 
belongs. 

86.  But  the  relative  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  and  any  em- 
phatic notion,  may  precede  any  but  the  co-ordinate  conjunctions, 
tt,  ac,  at  que  ;  veJ,  aut  ;  sed  ;  at,  verum  ;  nam,  namque,  etenim  ; 
quamobrem,  quapropter  ;  ita,  itaque,  sic,  &c. 

1.  Id  ille  ut  audivit,  domu.n  reverti  noluit.  Nep. — 2.  Huic  si  paucos  puta- 
tis  affines  esse,  vehementer  erratis. — 3.  Commentarios  quosdam  Aristotelis 
veni  ut  auferrem.  C. — {So  in  subordinate  sentences.)  4.  Atilius  Regulua 

scntentiam  ne  diceret,   recusavit.  C. — 5.  Gorgiae  Leontino   tantui 

honos  habitus  est  a  Graecis,  soli  ut  ex  omnibus  Delphis  non  inaurata 
statua,  sed  aurea  statueretur.  C. 

87.  When  two  conjunctions  come  together,  the  conjunction  of 

the  principal  precedes  that  of  the  subordinate  sentence. 

Itaque,  si  aut  requietem  natura  non  quaereret,  aut  earn  posset  alia  quadam 
ratione  consequi,  facile  pateremur.  C. 

88.  Quam  (how)  with  an  adjective  is  often  separated  from  the 
adjective,  for  the  purpose  of  adding  emphasis  to  it. 

Ut  credam  ita  esse,  quam  est  id  exiguum  ?   C. 

Exercise  17. 

89.  W  hen  he'  heard  this,B  he  suffered  nobody  to  rest.  I  am 
jome  to  recompense  you  with  some  reward,  if  not  a  great  °ono 


J  15.  30  V2.]  conjunctions.  235 

(80,.  S).  When  he  heard  this,*  he  uttered  tne  name  of  Quinc 
tilius  in  a  very  vathetic  manner.  I  will  call  upon  Caius,  whom, 
though  I  think  Se  will  keep  his  promises,  I  will  nevertheless  bind 
by  an  oath.  Do  you  °then  think  those  evils  are  to  be  feared, 
which  are  over  in  &  moment  of  time  ?  Listen  to  what  that 
Caius  (of)  yours*  has  done.  If  Demetrius  has  an  audience, 
it  will  be  all  over1  with  the  army.  Though  Caiusa  owes  his  life 
p  me,  yet  he  endeavours  to  bring  me  into  odium.  If  therefore 
(87,  b)  they  think  that  they  owe  their  lives  to  me,  I  should  be 
honoured  °  by  them  with  «sonie»  reward.1  If  therefore  (87,  b) 
they  have  derived  any  advaniage  from  my  care,  let  them  confer 
.sonle,  reward1  upon  me. 

4  Act'M\  w»c  de. 


§  15.     Conjunctions. — Autem,  enim,  igilur,  with  esse. 

90.  Obs.  Igitur,  tamen,  ergo,  deinde,  praterea,  itaque,  take  the  first  place, 
when  they  modify  the  whole  clause,  and  not  merely  any  particular  notion 
of  it.  When  they  modify  a  particular  notion,  only  or  especially,  they 
follow  that  notion,  or  the  first  and  most  important  of  the  words  by  which 
it  is  expressed.  In  Cicero,  however,  itaque  always  takes  the  first  place, 
igitur  never. . 

91.  If  esse  or  the  subject  begins  the  sentence,  auiemt  enim, 
igitur,  take  the  second  place. 

1.  Est  enim  eflectrix  multarum  et  magnarum  voluptatum.  C. — 2.  Sunt  au- 
tem clariora indicia  naturae.  C. — 3.  Id  aviem  est  perfectum  offi 

cium.  C. 

92.  If  the  sentence  begins  with  the  predicate  or  non,  num,  nemo, 
nihil  quis;1  or  if  esse  is  emphatic;  esse  (generally)  takes  the 
iecond,  and  the  particle  the  third  place. 


1  Quis  enim  est,  <tc,  occurs  Tusc.  iv.  2,  and  elsewhere.  The  thing  to  be  con- 
sidered is ;  whether  the  question  or  assertion  relates  to  the  existence  of  the 
thing  or  to  its  nature  "Q.uo  minus  recte  dicatur  quid  enim  est,  nihil  enin 
est,  nulla  obstat  ratio. — Discrimen  proficiscitur  ex  natura  verbi  esse,  quod,  quu.n 
non  plenam  significationem  ;,?aestet,  cum  nomine  conjungitur  in  unam  notion- 
cm,  et  cncliticorum  roore^comprehenditur  uno  accentu :  sed  ubi  significat  ven 
esse,  exstare,  attrahit  intcrrogandi  particulam. — Qui  quacrit,  quid  est  eniml  aut 
exspectat  responsi^-nem  nihil  esse,  vcl  nViil aliud esse ;  aut  anresvere  sit,  dubitaL 
Qui  interrogat,  quid  eiim  est?  de  certo  genere  rei  quuerit,  vel,  interrogationis 


250  conjunctions.  [§  15.  93-99 

1.  Dicendum  est  enimquod  sentio.  C.—2.  Nihil  est  envm  aliud,  quamobrem 
&c.  C.—Z.  Quis  est  enim  qui,  &c.  1 — 4.  Nemo  est  igitur,  qui. 

93.  (a)  A  preposition  throws  these  particles  into  the  third 
place,  unless  it  is  emphatic ;  (b)  when  they  may  stand  between 
the  preposition  and  its  noun. 

(a)  Ex  hoc  igitur  illud  efficitur.  C. 

(b)  1.  Post  vero  Sullae  victoriam  (hanc  consuetudinern)  penitus  amisimus. 
C. — 2.  Herillus  jam  pridem  est  rejectus :  post  enim  Chrysippum  non  esi 
disputatum.  C. 

94.  Sometimes  est  follows  a  preposition  and  its  case,  and  thus 
ihe  particle  is  thrown  forward  to  the  fourth  place. 

Ab  ea  est enim  interfectus.  C. 

95.  Quoque,  quidem  (which  always  follow  the  word  they  belong 
to)  also  throw  aulem,  enim,  igitur  to  the  third  place. 

Ei  quoque  enim  proconsuli  imperium  in  annum  prorogabatur.  L. 

96.  A  partial  exception  to  what  is  here  said  of  quidem,  arises 
from  the  affection  of  the  pronominal  particle  quidem  for  a  pronoun. 
Thus  in  tibique  persuade  esse  te  quidem  mihi  carissimum,  sed 
multo  fore  cariorem,  si,  &c,  the  quidem,  which  properly  belongs 
to  carissimum,  has  deserted  to  the  pronoun. 

97.  So  with  other  verbs  the  particle  takes  the  third  place,  when 
the  verb  has  a  word  with  it,  from  which  it  cannot  well  be  sepa- 
rated. 

Noci  video  autem,  &c. Num  vis  igitur  audire,  &c.  1 

98.  The  post-positive  conjunctions  may  separate  a  prsenomen 

from  a  cognomen,  and  even  such  a  compound  word  as  jusjuran. 

dum,  plebiscitum. 

J.  L.  quidem  Philippus  gloriari  solebat.  C. — 2.  Rem  vero  publicam. — 3 
Jurisque  jurandi. — 1.  Rogationibus,  plebisve  scitis. 

Exercise  IS. 

99.  For  I  must  say  how  salutary1  religion  is  to  men.  For 
some  reason  must  be  given  of  this,  as  it  appears  to  you  at  lea'st,2 
strange  counsel.     For  who  is  there,  whose  ears  that  report  has 


vl  intentS,  non  hoc  esse,  vel  prorsus  nihil  esse.  Nam  tota  vis  continetur  uno 
verbo  quid. — Hoc  ad  alias  quoque  formas  pertinet,  quae  verbum  est  encliticum 
uomin!  "onjunctum  habent."     {Hand.  Tuts.  ii.  400.) 


}  16.   100-103.J  NON.       HAUD.  251 

not  reached  ?  1  approve  of  that  :3  for  there  is  nothing  from  which 
you  can  derive  greater  advantage.  Be  of  good*  courage  :*  for 
there  is  nobody  to  eject  you  from  possession.  Do  you  wish  there- 
fore to  listen  to  what  that  Pomponius*  has  done  ?  You  see  what 
prudence,  and  how  firm»  a  mind1  there  is  need  of;  for  °  w  e  must 
take  the  helm  of  the  state.  For  who  is  there  who  denies,  that  yoa 
both  sit  at  the  helm,  as  the  saying  is,  and  above  all  others* 
watch  over*  the  state  ?  °  W  e  waver7  and  change  °  o  u  r  opinion 
even  in  clearer  things :  for  in  these  there  is  some  obscurity.  I 
approve  of  that  :3  for  there  is  no  rapidity8  which  can  come-into- 
competition9  with  that10  of  the  mind. 

1  To  be  salutary,  saluti  esse  2  quidem.  3  laudo  id  quidem. 

«  animus.  s  unum  ex  omnibus  maxime.  6  prospicere  with  dat. 

7  laltare.        *  cclcrUas.        9  contendere.        10  The  subst.  must  be  repeated. 


§  16.     Non.     Hand. 

100.  (a)  Non  (or  haud)  generally  stands  before  the  word  whose 
notion  it  denies :  thus  when  there  is  an  opposition,  it  is  always 
prefixed  to  one  of  the  antithetical  words  :  but, 

101.  (b)  Non  (haud)  takes  the  first  place  in  negative  senten- 
ces that  express  a  consequence,  (hence  so  frequently  with  ergo, 
tgitur,)  and  (c)  in  hypothetical  conclusions,  when  nisi  is  the  con- 
ditional  particle. 

(a)  1.  Non  paranda  nobis  solum  sapientia  sed  fruenda  etiarn.  C. — 2.  Otli 
fructus  est  non  comentio  animi,  sed  rclaxatio.  C. 

(b)  Non  igitur  de  improbo,  sed  de  callide  improbo  quaerimua.  C. 

(c)  Non  jam  Troicis  temporibus  tantunr  laudis  in  dicendo  Ulyssi  tribuissci 
Homerus,  nwijam  turn  ho'nos  esset  eloquentiae.  C. 

102.  Non  (haud)  may  also  take  the  first  place,  when  the  denial 
is  to  be  very  emphatic  ;  especially  in  negative  questions. 

1.  Non  ego  jam  Epaminondse,  non  Leonids;  mortem  hujus  morti  antepono. 
C.—2.  Quid  bestiaj  1  non  pro  suo  partu  ita  propugnant,  ut  vulnerareci- 
piantl    C. 

103.  The  place  of  non  in  the  case  of  est,  &c,  with  a  participle, 
of  of  an  auxiliary  verb  (with  infin.)  is  next  before  est  or  the 
auxiliary  verb  (when  there  is  no  antithesis). 


25*1  COMPARATIVES,  ETC.  [§17.104-100, 

1.  Hi  vos,  quoniam  libere  non  licet%  tacite  rogant,  «fcc.  C. — 2.  Regulo  non 
fuit  Jupiter  metuendus,  ne,  &c.  C. — [  When  there  is  antithesis,  the  non 
precedes  the  antithetical  word.\  3.  Non  modo — non  deterritus,  sed— 
concitatus  est. — 4.  Hanc  epistolam  cur  non  scindi  velira,  causa  nulla 
est.  C.  % 

104.  The  place  of  non  is  optional,  when  it  belongs  to  a  pre- 
dicate  (esse  being  the  copula),  or  when  it  belongs  to  a  universal 
negative  proposition  with  quis  or  qui. 

1.  Jove  tonante  cum  populo  agi  non  est  fas.  C. — 2.  Nihil  est,  quod  Deus 
efficere  non  possit.  C. — 3.  Nihil  est  enim,  quod  non  alicubi  esse  cogatur. 
C. 

Exercise  19. 

105.  V  should  not  have  risked  all*  my  fortunes,1  unless  I  had 
made  you  take  an  oath  in  words  prescribed  by  me.  I'  should  not 
have  been  banished,  unless  you  had  brought  me  into  odium.  You 
shall  not  therefore  receive  any  reward  of  your  improbity  from  me. 
I  do  not  therefore  consider  myself  to  be  °  too  richly  rewarded 
for  my  great1  labour.  What  therefore  ° d i d  Caius  °do?  did 
not9  he'  receive  from  you  the  reward  of  his  crimes  ?3  I  shall  not 
therefore  place  much  reliance  on  your  promises.  I  know  that 
you  favour  me  :  I  will  not  therefore  bind  you  by  an  oath.  Caius 
would  not  have  fallen  into  so  great8  a  calamity*  unless  he  had 
ceased  to  be  in  favor  with  you.  There  is  hardly  any  thing  which 
does  not  admit  of  the  excuse  of  ignorance. 

1  Say:  'for  my  so-great  labour.'  2  Ask  the  question  with  non,  which  ia 

often  used  for  nonne  in  vehement  interrogations.  3  See  Dod.  delictum. 


§  17.     Comparatives,  fyc. 

106.  In  comparisons  with  quam,  both  the  substantives  connected 
by  quam  often  precede  the  comparative. 

I.  A  dventus  hostium  fuit  agris,  quam  urbi,  terribilior.  L. — 2.  Maris  subita 
tempestas,  quam  ante  provisa,  terret  navigantes  vehementius.  C. — 3.  Ex 
multis  judicari  potest  virtutis  esse,  quam  &tatis,  cursum  celeriorem.  C. — 
4.  Themistoclis  nomen,  quam  Solonis,  est  illustrius.  C. — 5.  Pompejusfuit 
reetituendi  mei,  quam  retinendi,  studiosior.  C. — 6.  Facere,  quam  eanarCt 
vulnera  faciliua  est.  Q 


§17.107-112.  COMPARATIVES,  ETC.  360 

107.  A  vocative  is  inserted  after  some  words  of  the  sentence. 

Q,uum  in  omnibus  causis  gravibus,  C.  Caeear,  initio  dicendi  commoveri  so 
leam  vehementius.  C 

108.  Inquam  also  is  inserted  after  some  words ;  as  ait  is,  when 
not  followed  bv  an  infui.  or  sic,  ita,  &c. 

1.  Te,  inquit,  Appi,  tuumque  caput,  &c.  L. — 2.  Hoc  te  uno  quo  possun\  ait 
modo,  fillia,  in  libertatem  vindico.  L. 

109.  If  inquam  has  a  nom.,  the  verb  generally  stands  first. 

110.  So  with  ut  ait;  ut  narrat ;  &c,  the  verb  precedes  its 
nominative. 

1.  Sed  dum  palato  quid  sit  optimum  judicat,  coeli,  palatum  (ut  ait  Ennius) 
non  suspexit.  C. — 2.  Pacideianus  aliquis  hoc  animo,  ut  narrat  Luciliux, 
Ac. 

111.  So  mild  crede  (usually  in  this  order),  credo,  opinor,  puto, 
cxistimo,  (all  four  with  or  without  ut,)  quaso,  obsecro,  are  often 
thrown  parenthetically  into  the  middle  of  a  sentence. 

1.  Rubeo,  mihi  crede,  sed  jam  scripseram.  C— 2.  Tranquillatis  autcm  rebua 
Romanis,  remigravit  Romam,  ut  opinor,  L.  Cotta  et  L.  Torquato  Coss. — 
3.  Nolite,  obsecro  vos,  pati,  mihi  acerbiorem  reditum  esse,  quam  fuerit, 
ille  ipse  discessus.  C. 

Obs.  Crede  mihi  is  by  no  means  uncommon  in  Cicero :  the  ' believe1  is 
then  emphatic.  Thus,  Jam  enim  dico  meum  ;  antea,  crede  mVii,  subdubi- 
tabam. — Cic.  ad  Alt.  xiv.  5,  2.  Crede  may  then  stand  at  the  head  of  ita 
clause;  as,  Crede,  igiturmihi,  Plance,  omnes,  &c. — Cic.  Fam.  x.  6. 

Exercise  20. 

112.  It  is  easier  to  tie  a  knot,  than  to  untie  °it.  °My  return 
was  more  bitter  to  me,  than  that  departure  itself. b  Lucilius  was 
honoured  with  a  more  splendid  funeral  than  Demetrius.  The 
Boii  fled  to  °their  camp  in  more  complete  disorder  than  the 
iEdui.  It  is  easier  to  make  a  promise  than  to  perform  it.  Is  it 
not  sometimes1  a  harder  °thi  n  g  to  perform  a  promise  than  to 
make  it  ?  You  ought  to  blush  (111)  believe  me  ;  for  you  have 
wrested  these  things  from  my  hands.  Do  not,  I  beseech  you,  allow 
this  lucky  opportunity  to  slip  through  your  flngers.2  These 
things,  as  I  imagine,  would  not  be  in  our  power,2  if  you  had  not 
let  this  lucky  opportunity  slip  through  your  fingers.2     Terroui, 


260  COMPARATIVES,    ETC.  [§17 .    Il2. 

as  Ennius  says,  banishes3  all*  wisdom8  from  my  mind.  Separate1 
yourself  at  length,5  I  beseech  °you,  from  those,  with  whom  not 
your  °o  wn  judgment,  but  the  circumstances  of  the  times  havu 
united*6  you. 

1  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonnunquam  esse  memento.  *  See  Hand. 

9  quid  miki  ex  anxnvo  expectorare.  For  ex  animo  otners  read  szanimaio 
Tsrror,    pavor.        4  ecjvngerc         5  aliouando.        c  ccTijtmgere. 


EXPLANATION  OF  MARKS,  &c. 


Words  In  [    ]  are  to  be  omitted  in  translation.1 

il  Words  in  italics,  to  which  this  mark  is  prefixed,  are  to  stand  at  the  head  of 
their  clause.  If  the  word  that  follows  II  is  not  in  italics,  the  mark  applies 
to  that  word  only. 

•  This  mark  denotes,  that  the  word  to  which  it  is  prefixed  is  to  be  looked  for  in 
the  Extracts  from  the  •  Antibarbarus,'  appended  to  the  volume. 

I  This  mark  means,  that  the  clause  to  which  it  is  prefixed  is  to  precede  the 
whole  or  part  of  that  which  stands  before  it  in  English. 

t  This  mark  means,  that  the  active  voice  is  to  be  turned  into  the  passive,  or  vict 
versa. 

Numerals  followed  by  a  curve  refer  to  the  Cautions  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

Numerals  without  a  curve  refer  to  the  Differences  of  Idiom  at  the  end  of  thj 
volume. 

U.  and  Df.  refer,  respectively,  to  the  Cautions  and  Differences  of  Idiom  in  Prac- 
tical Introduction,  Part  I. 

V.  M  refer  to  the  Versus  Memoriales  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

M.  L.  refer  to  the  Memorial  Lines  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

|5*  Numerical  references  in  the  notes  refer  to  the  First  Part  of  the  '  Practical 
Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition.' 

fj-  Words  in  the  notes  marked  by  single  inverted  commas,  are  the  literal  trans- 
lation of  the  Latin  to  be  used. 


1  in  the  first  five  Exercises,  words  to  be  omitted  are  marked  by  °  prefixed  io 
rorde  in  spaced  printing. 


.  PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN    PROSE    COMPOSITION, 


ii. 
longer  latin  exercises. 

(On  connecting  propositions  by  the  relative  pronoun,  where   in 
English  we  should  use  a  demonstrative.) 

1.  Propositions  are  in  Latin  often  connected  by  the  relative 
qui,  quae,  quod,  where  in  English  we  should  use  and,  for,  but, 
now,  &c,  with  the  demonstrative. 

2.  (a)  Nam  et  praetor  pedestribus  exercitibus  pracfuit,  et  praefectus  classis  res 

magnas  mari  gessit.     Quas  ob  causas  (  =  atque  ob  eas  causua,  '  and 
for  these  reasons ')  praecipuus  ei  honos  est  habitus. 
(6)  Namque  omnibus  unus  insulis  praefuit.    In  qua  ( =  nam  In  ea)  po- 
testate  Pheras  cepit,  coloniamque  Lacedaemoniorum.  (Sep.  ix.  1.) 

3.  The  relative  in  these  propositions  is  equivalent  to  the  unem- 
phatic  is,  ea,  id,  with  et,  autem,  igitur  ;  or  even  nam,  tamen,  sed, 
vero.  If  the  demonstrative  pronoun  required  is  the  more  strongly- 
demonstrative  hie,  ille,  or  even  if  there  would  be  any  emphasis 
on  '  is,}  the  relative  must  not  be  used  :  nor  if  the  conjunction 
would  be  emphatic,  e.  g.  itaque,  ergo,  at,  verum,  nempe,  nimU 
rum,  &c. 

4  Whether  is  should  be  retained,  or  this  construction  with  the  relative  used, 
depends  on  various  considerations.  Thus  in  Cic.  Cluent.  7:  Pottrcmo 
unus,  qui  erat  rcliquus  Dine&  JUius  Cn.  Magius  est  mortuus.  Is  feci! 
heredem  ilium  adolescentem  Oppianicum.  Here  the  'w'  is  retained 
because  a  qui  had  so  lately  preceded. 

5.  The  connection  by  the  relative  is  very  often  used,  when 
there  is  a  dependent  or  subordinate  sentence,  which  is  then  placed 
immediately  after  the  relative  :  hence  this  qui  very  often  precedes 
a  quum,  postquam,  ut,  ubi. 


2U4  EXERCISE    I. 

6.  Reddita  inolusarum  ex  spelunca  boum  vox  Herculem  convcrtit.     Quern 

quum  vadentem  ad  speluncam  Cacus  vi  prohibere  conatus  essct,  ictus 
clava  fidem  pastorum  nequidquam  invocans  morte  occubuit.    (Liv.) 

7.  When  an  English  relative  clause  is  followed  by  a  subordi- 
nate clause  containing  a  demonstrative,  or  has  such  a  clause 
inserted  in  it,  the  relative  is,  in  Latin,  placed  in  this  subordinate 
clause  (which  then  stands  first),  and  either  *is'  is  used  in  the 
other  clause  or  (if  the  pronoun  is  in  the  same  case  in  both 
clauses)  the  pronoun  is  omitted. 

8.  An  example  or  two  will  make  this  clear. 

(a)  l  A  man  (whom  I  should  have  spoken  to),  (if  I  had  seen  him).' 

In  Latin  this  would  be : 
'A  man  (whom  if  I  had  seen),  (I  should  have  spoken  to).' 

(b)  '  A  man  by  whose  treachery  I  should  have  been  ruined,  if  I  had  not  dis- 

covered it  in  time.' 
In  Latin  : 
'  A  man  (whose  treachery  if  I  had  not  discovered  in  time),  (I  should  have 
been  ruined  by  it).' 

(c)  Thus  instead  of 

'Non  vident  id  se  c  up  ere,  quod  (si  adepti  sunt  id)  fugitivo  alicui  aut 
gladiatori  concedi  sit  necesse,' 
A  Roman  would  have  written : 

cNon  vident  id  se  cupere,  (quod  si  adepti  sunt)  fugitivo  alicui  aut  gladia- 
tori concedi  sit  necesse.'  (Cic.) 

9.  Hence  never  write  qui,  quum  is,  &c,  qui,  quum  ejus,  &c, 
qui,  quum  ei,  &c. ;  but  qui,  quum  —  ;  cujus  quum  —  ;  cui  quum, 
&c.     So  b»  A  qui,  si  ejus,  &c,  but  cujus  si,  &c. 

Exercise  1. 

[See  Pract.  Intr.  Part  I.  441.] 
Alexander  died  at  Babylon,  °  a  m  a  n  who,  if  his  life  had  been 
a  longer  °  one,  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.*  Alexan- 
der died  at  Babylon,  °  a  m  a  n  who,  if  a  longer  life  had  fallen-to- 
his-lot,b  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.  Alexander  died 
at  Babylon,  °  a  m  a  n  who,  if  fate  had  kept0  him  alive  °  for  a 
longer  °  time,  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world.  Alexander 
died  at  Babylon,  a  man  who,  unless  fate  had  taken  from  him  his 
life  prematurely,*1  would  have  subdued  the  whole  world. — His 
death  was  the  ruin  of e  all  his  fellow-citizens/  by  whom  he 
was  slain*  because  he  wished  to  save  them.  I  have  very  often 
read  that  there  is  no  evilh  in  death,  °  for  that  if  any  sense  remains 


ON    RHETORICAL    FIGURES.  2t)0 

ttrter  it,i  it  ought  to  be  considered  immortality  rather  than  death. 
The  povverj  of  conscience  is  great,  arid  those  who  neglect  it,  be. 
trayk  themselves.  Philosophy  contains  the  doctrine"  both  of  duty 
and  of  morality  :ra  those  °  t  h  e  r  e  f  o  r  e  who  profess  it  seem  to  me 
to  support  a  very  important  character."  King  Eucratides  reduced 
India  under  his  dominion,*  but  when  he  was  returning  thence, p 
was  slain  on  his  march  by  his  son. 

»  Wohld  should  not  be  translated  by  mundus  except  when  the  meaning  is 
•universe.  When  the  earth  or  its  countries  are  meant,  orbis  terrce  or  terrarum 
should  be  used ;  the  latter  especially  when  there  is  reference  to  different  coun- 
tries, b  Should  you  use  contingit,  or  accidit  ?  c  reservare.  d  immature. 
' perdere.  t  civis.  e  Do'd.  interficere.  h  Part  I.  161,  O&s,  and 
end  of  162.  i  '  in  it.'  The  verb  in  the  next  clause  should  be  subj.,  it  being 
the  speech  or  sentiment  of  the  person  or  persons  from  whom  the  narrator  had 
heard  the  opinion.  Pt.  I.  460  (6).  J  vis.  k  indicare.  Express 
both  ipse  and  suits.  Pt.  I.  368.  '  disciplina.  m  Say,  'of  living  well.' 
*  personam  sust'uu  re.  °  in  poteslatem  redigere.  P  Use  rel.  adverb. — « 
re. 


(On  Rhetorical  Figures.) 

1.  Geminatio,  or  the  doubling  of  an  emphatic  word, 
(a)  Cruz,  crux  inquam  misero  et  rerumnoso  parabatur.  (C.) 

2.  Rcpetitio  (£jiava(foya),  when  several  clauses  or  members  of 

&  sentence  begin  with  the  same  word. 

(a)  Xihilnc  te  nocturnum  presidium  Palatii,  nihil  urbis  vigilise,  nihil  timor 
populi.  nihil  consensus  bonorum  omnium,  nihil  hie  munitissimus  habendi 
senatus  locus,  nildl  horum  ora  vultusque  moverunt?  (C.) 

3.  Conversio  (urTiargoyi]),  when  several  clauses  or  members  of 

a  sentence  end  with  the  same  word.  , 

(a)  Urbis  vigiliae  nihil  te  moverunt,  timor  populi  nihil,  consensus  bonorum 
omnium  nihil,  &c. 

4.  Complexio  is  when  several  clauses  or  members  of  a  sentence 

both  begin  with  the  same  word  and  end  with  the  same  word. 

(a)  Quia  legem  tulit  ?  Rullus.  Quis  majorem  partem  populi  suflragils  pro- 
hibuit'?  Rullus.  Quie  comitiis  prsefuit  ?  Rullus.  Quis  decemviroe 
quos  voluit  renuntiavit  ?    Rullus.  (C.) 

5.  Traductio,  when  a  word  occurring  in  a  clause,  occurs  again 
'^intentionally  and  as  an  ornament)  in  one  or   more  subsequen! 


200  ON  RHETORICAL    FIGURES. 

(a)  Eum  tu  hominem  appellas,  qui  si  fuissel  lumw)  nunquara  tarn  crudedtei 
vitam  hominis  petisset. 

(b)  Q,ui  nihil  habet  in  vita  jucundius  vita,  is  cum  virtute  vitam  non  potest 
tollere.  (C.) 

6.  Polysyndeton  (TioXvavvSeTov),  the  using  many  conjunctions, 
i.  e.  one  between  each  pair  of  words  or  notions. 

(a)  Et  inimico  proderas,  eJamicum  lacdebas,  et  tibi  ipsi  non  consulebaH.  (C.) 

7.  Annominatio  {naQovo^aala)   is    the    antithesis  of  words  of 

nearly  the  same  sound. 

a)  — ut  eum  non  facile  non  modo  extra  tectum,  sed  ne  extra  tectum  quidsni 
quisquam  videret.  (C.) 

(b)  Hanc  reipublicae  pestem  non  paulisper  reprimi,  sed  in  perpetuum  com- 
primivolo.  (C.) 

(c)  Expetenda  magis  est  decernendi  ratio,  quam  decertandi  fortuna.     (C.) 

8.  "  OfiowjtTOQTov,  when  the  members  of  a  sentence  are  of  par- 
allel construction,  having  the  same  cases,  or  the  same  persons  of 
the  same  tense.  When  they  end  with  the  corresponding  case  or 
tense,  it  makes  o(ioioteXsvtov. — Both  occur  in  me  following  ex. 
ample : 

(a)  Vicit  pudorem  libido,  timorem  audacia,  rationem  amentia.  (C.) 

9.  'laoxaXov,  when  the  clauses  are  very  nearly  of  equal  length, 
(j)  Alii  fortuna  felicitatem  dedit:  huic  industria  virtutem  comparavit. 

10.  'AvtI&stov  (antithesis)  requires  this  equality  of  length  in  the 
antithetical  portions. 

(a,  Est  igitur  haec,  judices,  non  scripta  sed  nata  lex ;  quam  non  didicimus, 
accepimus,  legimus,  verum  ex  natura  ipsa  arripuimus,  hausimus,  expres- 
simus  ;  ad  quam  non  docti,  sed  facti,  non  imbuti,  sed  instituti  sumus  ut, 
&c.  (C.) 

11.  Commutatio  (avuftsta^oX^)  is  when  the  antithesis  consists  in 

the  conversion  of  a  proposition. 

(a)  Q,uia  stultus  es,  ea  re  taces ;  non  tamen  quia  taces,  ea  re  stultus  ea :  si 
poema  loquens  pictura  est,  pictura  taciturn  poema  debet  esse. 

12.  Regressio  (sTravodog)  is  when  this  kind  of  conversion  is  a 

conversion  of  a  part  only  of  a  proposition. 

(a)  Ut  eloquentium  juris  peritissimus  Crassus,  juris  peritorum  eloquentissi- 
mus  Scaevola  haberetur.  (C.) 

13.  Gradatio  (xXlfia*)  is  the  mounting  up  as  it  were  from  one 
word  to  another,  the  preceding  word  being  repeated. 

(a)  Imperium  Grseciae  fuit  penes  Athenienses ;  Atheniensium  potiti  sunt 


EXERUSE  2.  2G7 

Spai  tiatai ;  Spartiatas  superavere  Thebani ;  Thebanos  Macctlbnes  vice 
runt,  qui  imperium  Graeciae  brevi  tempore  adjunxerunt  Asium  bello  sib- 
actam.     (Ad  Heroin.) 

14.  3ATio(nwnrtciq  is  the  purposely  breaking  off  the  discourse 
and  suppressing  a  statement  one  was  alxmt  to  make. 

(a)  De  nostro  enim  omnium— non  audeo  totum  dicere.     (C.) 

15.  Dissolutio  (aavvdaoy),  the  omission  of  the  copulative  con 
',  unction. 

(c)  Qui  indicabantur,  cos  vocari,  custodiri,  ad  senatum  adduci  juseit.  (C.) 

16.  Correclio  (InavoQ&owig)  is  the  correcting  an  expression  pre- 
viously used. 

(a)  Hie  tamen  vivit.    Vivit?  immo  vero  etiam  in  Senatum  venit.  (C.) 

17.  Dubitatio  is  the  purposely  expressing  a  doubt ;  under  which 
intentional  forgetting  and  remembering  may  be  reckoned. 

(a)  Tu  istud  ausus  es  dicere,  homo  omnium  mortalium — nam  quo  te  diguo 
moribus  tuis  appellem  nomine?  (C.)  (Here  is  also  aposiape&Ut.) 

Exercise  2.     (On  Rhetorical  Figures.) 

(Littcris  delector.) 

[vjeminatio.]  Literature,  literature  alone,  I  say,  delights*  me, 
(Rr.PETiTio.]  Literature  nourished  me  when  a  boy ;  literature 
preserved  me  when  a  young  manb  from  the  infamy  of  lust :  litera- 
ture assisted  me  when  I  was  a  man,  in  the  administration6  of  the 
republic  :  literature  will  comfort  the  weakness  of  my  old  age.d 
[Conversio.]  Literature  delights  us  with  the  most  dignified6 
pleasure ;  it  delights  us  with  the  discovery  of  what  is  new;' 
it  delights  us  with  the  most  certain  hope  of  immortality.  [Com- 
plexio.]  Do  you  think  him'  a  bad  citizen,  who  is  delighted  with 
literature  ?  who  is  delighted  with  the  discovery  of  truth  ?  who  is 
delighted  with  the  diffusion  of  learning  ?  [Traductio.]  What 
do  you  mean  ?  Are  you'  delighted  with  literature,  who  hate 
°what  is  the  foundation  (pi-)  of  °all  literature?  [Polysvn- 
detcn.]  Literature  both  instructs,  and  delights,  and  adorns,  and 
consoles.  ['OfioiOTiTwrov,  o^ioiotiUvtov .~\  Do  you  think  it  possible, 
that  one  who  is  devoted  to  the  pursuit  of  literature,  should  be 
bound  by  the  chains  of  lust  ?  [ 'Avtl&nov.]  Do  you,  who  say 
that  yon  are  delighted  with  literature,  allow  yourself  to  be  en 


268  EXERCISE    3. 

tangled  by  pleasure  ?  ['AvTipfrai3oXrj.']  I  do  not  cultivate 
literature  because  I  am  delighted  with  it,  but  am  delighted  with 
it  because  I  cultivate  it.  [Gradatio.]  The  pursuit  of  literature 
has  acquired  for  me  learning  :  learning  °has  acquired  lor 
me  glory :  glory  °has  drawn  upon  me  envy  and  malevolent 
depreciation.  [Aposiopesis.]  What  ?  do  you :  do  you  charge 
me'  with  this,  °  a  m  a  n  who  have  never  in  my  life  pursued*?  any 

thing  but  virtue  and  learning  ? — What  you  have  pursued ; 

but  I  am  silent,  lest  I  should  seem  to  have  brought  against 
you  a  railing-accusation. h  [IJcrvrdeiw.]  What  shall  I  say 
about  the  use  of  literature  ?  it  instructs,  adorns,  delights,  °  and 
comforts  °  a  man.  [Correctio.]  Literature  delights  me  :  why 
do  I  say  delights  ?  nay,'  it  comforts  me,  and  affords  me  my  only 
refuge  fromj  these  annoyances  of  my  laborious  life  !  [Dubitatio.] 
Literature  instructs,  or  delights,  or  comforts  me  ;  for  which  of 
these  words  I  should  use  rather  than  the  others,  I  do  not  know. 

a  oblectare.  Comp.  Dod.  oblectatio.  b  Dod.  puer.  c  359.  d  Dod. 

vetus  (2).  e  honestissimus.  f  '  of  new  things.'     Should  '  things •  be  ex- 

pressed ?  C.  5.  8  expetere.  483,  (2).  h  convicium  facere.  »  imma 

nero.  J  '  amongst.' 

Exercise  3. 

Pausanias  tells  °  us  in  his  b  o  o  k  o  n  A 1 1  i  c  a a,  that  the  Athenians, 
having  been  praisedb  by  Pindar  in  one  of  his  Odese,  set 
bo  high  a  valued  upon  the  testimony  of  thate  great  and  sublime 
poet,  that  they  not  onlyf  sent  him  many  presents  in  returns  foi 
it,  but  also  raisedh  a  statue'  to  his  honourk  at  Athens.  No 
wonder1,  that  in  those  times  there  were  many  great  poets,  when111 
those  who  were  endowed  with  the  poetic  faculty"  both  re- 
ceived °  the  most  magnificent  presents,  and  were  rewarded1*  with 
the  most  splendid  honours. 

ft  Attica,  orum.  b  'because  (I.  516)  they  had  been  praised.'     Since  this 

clause  is  here  quoted  from  Pausanias,  in  what  mood  should  the  verb  stand  'i 
Why  1  (I.  460,  a.)  c  '  in  a  certain  ode  '  (carmen).     When  '  a  certain '  means 

a  particular  one  that  we  do  not,  however,  think  it  necessary  to  name,  it  should 
be  translated  by  quidam.  WThen  certus  is  so  used,  it  implies  that  one  has  good 
reasons  for  not  being  more  explicit :  Quoties  ego  eum  et  quanto  cum  dolore  vidi 
ihsolentiam  certorum  hominum — extimescentcm  (Cic.  Marc.  6.)  A  practical 
rule  may  be,  not  to  use  certus,  unless  the  meaning  is,  c  a  certain  one, — you  knott 
pretty  well  which  (or  whom)  I  mean  '  d  '  To  set  a  h'grh  value  on.'  magni  Jo 


•<>6<J 

ten.     Adapt    this   phrase  to   mean,   'so  high  a  value.''  •  Which  pronouu 

should  be  used  for  (lie  '  that '  of  celebrity  1  (I.  381,  b.)  f  Not  only— but  also  • 

here  simply,  tt — et  (both — and).  8  ob.  h  To  place  or  erect  (a  statue), 

simulacrum  or  statuam  ponere,  locare,  statuere,  or  (Ncp.)  constituere.  i  What 

words  express  whole-length  sculptured  images  ?  With  what  distinction  ?  (Dcitl. 
imago.)  k  'to  him.'  I  This  imperfect  sentence  must  be  completed; 

•it  is  not  therefore  wonderful:'  for  'that'  use  'if,'  si.  ■  'When.'     Does 

the  '  when, '  do  more  than  simply  dale  the  time  7  (See  1. 489.)  n  edfacultaU. 

•  received — and  were  rewarded.  Of  two  connected  verbs  having  the  same  nom- 
inative case,  it  is  better,  as  a  general  rule,  that  they  should  both  be  in  the  same 
voice.  Alter  this  accordingly,  by  turning  received  into  the  passive  voice :  this 
must  be  done  by  choosing  such  a  phrase  as  '  to  be  loaded,  presented,  <fcc,  with 
gifts.'  ifwnoribus  mactari.  (Cic.)  On  the  derivation  of  this  word  sew 
Part  I.  p.  103.  (273,  a)  and  note  «. 

Exercise  4. 

To  destroy0  the  credit8  of  Socrates's  speech,  and  cause  the 
judges  to  listen  to  it  with  suspicion, b  his  ||  accusers'  had 
warned  them  beforehand*  to  be  on  their  guard,8  °tellingf  them 
that  he  was  very  powerful*  in  speaking,  and  possessed  suchh 
ability'  and  dexterity,  that  he  could  make  the  worse  cause  °  appeal 
the  better. 

*  To  destroy  the  credit  of  any  thing;  prevent  it  from  being  believed  ;  alicui, 
or  alicui  rei,  /idem  derogare  or  abrogare.  b  « render  it   suspected   to  the 

judges.'  c  Obs.  When  an  English  sentence  begins  with  a  secondary  clause, 

and  a  word  which  occurs  in  the  principal  clause  occurs  also  in  this,  it  is  better  to 
begin  with  such  a  portion  of  the  principal  clause  as  will  contain  this  word,  and 
then  use  a  pronoun  for  it  in  the  secondary  clause.  Thus,  instead  of  '  Socra- 
tes' s  speech' — '  his  accusers,'  let  it  be  :  '  the  accusers  of  Socrates,'  and — '  h  i  s 
speech;'  placing  '  the  accusers  of  Socrates'  first.  d  To  warn  beforehand,  prce- 
monere.     (I.  75.)  *  To  be  on  one's  guard,  sibi  cavzre.  f  (I.  460,  c,  l.j 

Express  a  \for.'  S  Tc  bt  very  powerful,  plurimum  posse.  t  Such,  is, 

ea,id:  repeat  it  before  'dexterity,'  calliditas.  i  vis. 

Exercise  5. 

[(p)  prefixed  means  that  the  verb  is  to  be  turned  into  a  pai  ticiple :  (r)  after  a 
word,  that  the  rel.  pronoun  is  to  be  used.] 

Peribcea,  or  Phylonome,*  as  others  call  her,  being  rejected 
with  disdain, b  accused'  Tennes  tod  his  father,  in  exactly  the 
same  manner  as  Phrcdra  °  accused  Hippolytus.  The  credulous 
father  (p)  shut  up  his  son  inf  a  chest,  °and  cast  him  into  the  sea. 
Neptune  ||came  to  the  assistance*  of  his  innocent  grand- 
son;  and  the  chest  floated11  to  the  island  of'  Leucophrys.     When 


2iO  EXERCISES   6,  7. 

the  inhabitants  of  the  island  openedk  it  (r),  and  learned  w  h  a  t  h  a  d 
happened,i  they  not  only  offered  Tennes  the  throne,"1  but  even 
named  the  island  Tenedos  a  f  t  e  r  h  i  m  . D  Nay,  they  even0  wor- 
shipped him  as  a  god  °  a  f  t  e  r  h  i  s  (p)  death. 

*  Since  it  is  left  doubtful  which  was  her  right  name,  what  word  shoisld  be 
used  for  'or?'  (Pt.  I.  p.  161,  note  a.) '  »>  '  being  rejected  and  refused.'  Take 
the  word  for  'refuse,'  that  means  to  refuse  a  pleasure,  whether  a  sinful  one  or 
not.    Dod.  negare  (end).  c  Which  is  the  best  word  for  to  accuse  falsely  1 

(1.201.)  d  apud.  ^  plane.  C.  2.  i  includere,  implying  to  put  into, 

and  there  shut  up,  often  takes  the  ace.  with  in :  but  also  the  abl.  Antonius  ar- 
matos  in  cell  a  Concordue  inclusit. — pane  orationem  in  epistolam  inclusi : 
inclvdere alioucm  in  custo  dias.     (Cic.)  eferre  opem.  h  deferri  (ad), 

i  I.  140.  J  I.  489.  k  Dod.  aperire.  i  res.         ™  To  offer  any  body 

the  throne,  (Lfe.re  regnum  alicui.  n  'from  (de)  his  own  name.'  °  Nay 

—even :  ipiin  tt. 

Exercise  6. 

When*  Ulysses,  according  to  fabulous  history,*  might  have  lived0 
withd  Calypsoe  in  all  [possible]  luxury,  he  yet  preferredf  even 
to  immortality  thats  rough  and  rocky  country  [of  his] :  (p)  which 
he  would  [surely]  not  have  done,h  if  he  had  approved-of »  that 
opinion*  of  Teucer's,  [that]  '  every  man's'  country  ism  wherever 
he  isn  well  off.' * 

a  Not,  quum  Ulysses,  but   Ulysses,  quum,  &c.  I.  489.  b  { as  it  is  in  the 

fables.'  c  I.  128,  130.  d  apud.  e  'Feminines  in  o  (as.ec/w, 

Calypso,  Dido,  Sappho)  have  generally  the  Greek  gen.  in  us  (echus,  Didus,  Sap- 
phus),  the  Latin  gen.  onis  being  less  common.  The  dat.  and  ace.  end  in  o,  oi 
in  oni,  onem  respectively.'  (Zumpt.)  Ramshom  adds,  that  Caesar  preferred  the 
regular  Latin  declension,  onis,  oni,  onem,  one.  f  I.  227.  s  I.  381  (b). 

«•  non  itafacturus.  i  I.  441.  k  Dod.  sententia.  l  quisque 

*  J.  460  (a).  n  I.  460  (b).  »'lara  well  off,'  bene  est  mihi. 

Exercise  7. 

Xenophon  has  given  us  a  verya  soundb  opinion6  of  Gobryas's, 
and  [one]  which  every  dayJsd  experience6  confirms/  namely,* 
1  that  it  is  more  difficult  tofoidh  men  who  [bear]  prosperity  [well], 
than  [men]  who  bear  adversity  well.'  For  in  prosperity  a  great 
manyi  men  grow  insolent,k  and  are  puffed  up  [with  pride]  :  but 
in  adversity  all  are  recalled  to  temperance  and  moderation. 

H  Admddvm  (ad-modum,  { to  a  degree' )  is  'very'  with  adjectives,  participles 
io<l  fidverbs.  »  gravis  (weighty).  c  Dod    sententia.  i  Adj.  quo 


EXERCISES  8,  9.  211 

tidianus ;  but  see  the  next  note.  •  Experientia  in  the  bes;  prose  writers  ia 

trial:  'knowledge  gained  by  experience'  is  usus,  or  usus  rerum  ;  res;  tempus, 
&c.  fin  Tac.  also  experientia.]  Hence  experientia  docel,  and  the  like,  should  not 
be  used,  but  tempus  or  rerum  usus  docct.  With  rerum  usus  the  adj.  quotidianut 
should  be  left  out.  [Virgil  has  '  apibus  quanta  experientia  parcis.'  Geor. 
I  4.]  f  '  declares  to  be  true.'  s  videlicet  as  the  second  word, 

b  Diff.  93.     Dod.  invenire.  i  Dod.  plerique.  k  Insolescerc  was  used  by 

Sallust  (after  the  old  Cato).  and  was  followed  by  Tacitus  and  Justin  :  it  is  better, 
however,  to  use  insolentem fieri ;  se  insolenter  cjjerre  or  gerere,  &c.  (Krebs.) 

Exercise  8. 

(On  the  Theogony  of  Hesiod.) 

Of  all*  the  remains**  of  Greek  literature  that  are  now  extant.0 
none  iri  my  opiniond  is  more  remarkable  than  the  Theogonye  of 
Hesiod.  For  although  ||  thisf  poem  cannot*  be  compared  to  the 
works  of  Homer  and  other  famous  poets  in  size,  or  in  the  magnifi- 
cence of  its  subject,h  and  of  its  particular  portions ,»  or  in  the  va- 
riety and  beauty  of  its  diction,  yet  it  has  another  recommendation, 
and  thatk  [one]  peculiar  [to  itself],  [so]  that  on  this  groundi  it 
appears  even  to  deserve  the  preference131  over  those  poems. n 

b  '  All — ichich1  is  expressed  strongly  by  using  quotquot  instead  of  the  simple 
relative.     (For  c  of  see  1. 165,  h.)  b  monumenta.  c  supcrcsse :  '  now,' 

hodie.  d  Dod.  sententia.  e  Theogonia.  f  Relative  pron.         e  Omit 

1  not :'  using  noque — neque  with  the  ablatives.  h  argumentum.  i  res,  pi. 

k  I.  385.  i  causa.  m  '  to  be  to-be-preferred.'  part,  in  dus.  n  Greek 

neuter  plurals  in  a  make  dat.  and  abl.  in  is,  not  ibus.  poemata,  poematum,  poe- 
matis  (not  poemalibus). 

Exercise  0. 

That*  ancient  philosopher,  whom  Hesiod  followed,  said  that  first 
of  all  Chaos  existed  :  byb  which  he  meant,  not,  as  very  many6 
subsequent11  [authors],  a  rude  and  undigested  mass*  of  matter,  but 
[according]  to  the  proper  meaning1"  of  the  word,  '  space  '  in  ichich 
no  matter  is  contained. s  For  he  says  that  '  matter  '  was  not 
created  till  afterwards.3  To  Chaos  he  added  a  connective11  power, 
because  without  such  a  poweri  matter  would  have  lain  inactive, 
and  nothing)  would  have  been  created. 

*  I.  381,  b.  b  In  this  idiom  the  ace.  is  used  in  Latin.    Thus:  'whom  do 

fou  understand  (or  mean)  by  a  wise  man  7 '  quern  tu  inteUigis  (or  intelligi  vis) 
tapitntem?  c  Dod.  plerique.  d  Simply  posiea.  *  (See  the  first 

lines  of  Ovid's  Metamorphoses.)  t  significaiio.  *  'which  is  empt> 


272  KXE&CISES    10,    11. 

{vacuus)  of  all   matter.'  b  copulatrix,  icis.  »  Where  tee   repeat  the 

Bubstaruive  in  this  way,  the  Romans  (being  richer  in  demonstrative  pronouns 
than  we  are,  and  able  to  give  them  more  prominence)  generally  used  a  pronoun 
only.  So  also  when  we  use  another  substantive  with  'such,'  or  a  demonstrative 
pronoun,  in  reference  to  a  preceding  substantive.  Thus  if  '  this  prince '  were 
used  in  reference  to  'Alexander'  which  had  been  mentioned  in  a  preceding 
sentence,  it  would  be  better  to  leave  the  word  'prince'  untranslated,  and  say 
lfirr he.'  J 'nor  any  thing.5     What  word  for  any  (thing) 7     Pt.  I.  §50 

p.  137. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  With*  the  ancient  philosophers  it  is  an  intricate*  and  per- 
plexedc  inquiry,  whether  the  soul  remainsd  (p)  when  it  is  freed 
from  the  chains  of  the  body,  or  whether  the  death  of  our  bodies  is 
also  the  death  of  our  souls. e  Epicurus  thinks  that  our  souls  perish, 
deeming  it  wrongf  that,  having  so  many  points  of  agreement  with 
swine,*  he  should  differ  from  them  in  this  single  respect.^ 

2.  The  Stoics  allowi  to  them  a  long  life,  as  [they  do  also]  to 
crows,  but  not  an  eternal  j  one.  But  Pythagoras  is  indeed  a 
pleasant  [personage],  for  he  teaches,  that  they  remain  indeed 
f alive],  but  migrate  from  [their  own]  bodies  into  others,  so  that 
he/  may  perchancek  be  a  cock  to-day,  who  in  the  time  of  the 
Trojan  war  was'  Agamemnon. 

!.  a  Apud.  b  perturbatus.  c  implicatus.  d  permanere.  e  ' whether 
that]  which  [is  the  death]  of  [our]  bodies  is  also  (I.  387)  the  death  of  [our]  souls.' 
'  nefas.  s  '  since  (quum,  I.  489)  so  many  things  agree  to  him  (I.  370)  with 

swine.'  b  ■  by  this  one  thing.' 

2.  '  tribuere.  J  Dod.  continuus.  k  Forte'u  'accidentally'  except  after 

rt,  nisi,  num,  ne,  ecquid,  where  it  is  the  regular  word  for  '  percliance.'  Here  usa 
fortasse.  i  'had  been.' 

Exercise  11. 

1.  I  am  well  again  !*  I  know  for  a  certainty,b  that  I  could 
iot  flndc  a  beginning11  for  my  letter  [that  would  be]  more  agreeable 
o  you  ||  than  this,  or  one  that  you  would  more  desire  to  receive.9 
(My  disease]  was  a  tertian  fever,  like  that  which1  you  cured  for 
me*  three  years  ago2)  at  Ferrara  :h  except  thaU  this  was  [of]  a 
wilder)  [character.] 

%  Accordingly  it  left  mek  on  the  eighth  day  after  my  seizures 
t  was  cured  not  only  by  medicine, m  but  also  by  bleeding,"  by0  the 
advice  of  my  [friend]  Angelus  Justinianus,  who  not  onlv  pre- 


EXERCISE    12.  27J 

scribed*  for  me  himself,  but  also  made  up<«  a  great  part  of  the 
medicines  with  his  own  hand. 

1.  *  Convalescere.  By  what  tense  should  '  lam  well '  be  translated  ?  b  '  cer- 
tainly.' Both  certe  scio  and  certo  scio  occur.  The  diilerenceisthus  given  by 
Hand:  certe  scio  means,  '  it  is  certain  that  I  know?  certo  scio,  '  I  hare  a 
certain  knowledge  of  Vie  thing  stated?  Which  should  be  U9ed  here?  c  Do'd. 
iin-t  nire.  d  principium.  «  more  wished  (optatius)  by  you.'  f  qualis. 
t  '  drove  away  from  me,'  febrim  abigere,  discutere.  h  Ferraria.  i  nisi 
'luod.            J  '  Mild,'  mitis  et  remissus. 

2.  k  '  A  fever  leaves  anybody,'  decedit.  (C) :  ab  aliquo  disced  it.  Krebs  warne 
spfainst  reliquit  or  deseruit  quern.  Doletus  quotes  a  febre  relinqui  from  Cic.  ad 
Att.,  but  I  cannot  find  the  passage.  1  'After  it  had  seized  me,'  corripcre.  (l't. 
I.  p.  114,  310,  note*.)  m  medicamenta,  pi.  n  missio  sanguinis.  °  de. 
*•  'To  prescribe'  (of  a  physician),  remedia, medicamenta,  &c,  pjascribere,  pros- 
ripere  ( Cels.)  ;  prazscribcre,  or  morbo proponere  {Sep.).  i  Muretus  uses  conjicert 
ac  concinnare  (of  which  the  latter  is  not  found  in  Cicero) ;  better  parare  (Cic). 
Columella  has  componere,  Curtius  in  poculo  diluere,  which  of  course  expresses 
only  a  particular  kind  of  preparation.* 

Exercise  12. 

1.  When  it  was  the  general  opinion,"  that  a  brave  man  should b 
die  by  his  own  hands'  rather  than  endured  any  great  and  hitler 
svil,  Aristotle  wisely  perceived  that  the  opinionf  was  false  ;  [and] 
asserted, s  that  they  who  acted  thus,  far  from  being  considered 
brave,  should  be  looked-uponh  as  cowards,'  and  men  of  a  mean  and 
abject  spirit. 

2.  For  such  men  prove!  that  they  are  not  able  to  endure  wliai 
they* fly  from,  and  are  too  weak  to  support  the  calamity,*  on  account 
of  which  they  give  up  their  lives.  No\v*i  this  argues  effeminacy,* 
rather  than  any  greatness  of  soul. 

1.  *  'it  was  commonly  (vulgo)  believed.'  *>  I.  191.  c  'To  die  by  one'a 

Dwn  hands,'  necem  or  mortem  sibi  conscisccre,  mortem  or  vim  sibi  inj'erre;  manus 
tibi  afferre,  &ct  <*  Dod.  ferre:  choose   the  verb  that  means   'to  endure 

heroically.'  e  I.  392.  f  '  that  that  opinion  of  men.'  s  pronurdiarc. 

h  'were  not  only  not  [to-be-considered]  brave,   but  [were]    to-be-considered 
cowards,'  &c.     fj"Aron  modo  is  sometimes  used  for  nonmodo  non,  but  only 


*  Scribon.  Larg.  has  temperare. 

t  O*  se  interficere,  se  occidere,  are  generally  rejected ;  but  they  do  occur,  though 
'.ess  commonly,  (1)  se  ipsum  inter/ icere  (Sulpicius  in  Cic.  Epp.  Fam.  4,  12, 
2):  Crassum  suaple  manu  interfectum,  Cic.  Or.  3,  3,  10;  and  Liv.  31,  18,  7,  s« 
qui  ipsi  i  n  t  e  r  f  i  c  i  u  n  t.  (2)  Quintil.  (5,  10f  G9)  quotes  from  a  lost  oration 
of  Cicero's,  cum  ipse  se&e  conaretur  occidere.     (Krebs.) 

12* 


274  EXERCISES    13,   14. 

when  the  following  clause  is  negative,  or  equivalent   to  a  Acgaave,  and  both 
clauses  have  a  common  verb  expressed  in  the  second.    Thus 
Not  only  not but  not  even ;  or,  but  scarcely. 

non  modo j  sed,  nf-quidem, 

(  sed  vix. 
Should  the  inot*  be  inserted  or  omitted  here?  •  ignavus.  (Diid.  p.  234,  4.* 

2.  J  docire.  This  passage  in  the  original  is  given  as  a  statement  by  the  writer 
and  therefore  in  the  indicative.  It  will  be  a  useful  exercise  to  translate  it  botl 
ways :  i.  e.  first  as  the  writer's  opinion,  and  then  as  Aristotle's  view  stated  by 
the  writer,  and  therefore  in  orat.  obliq.     (See  I.  460.)  k  «  and  not  (neque) 

equal  to  hearing  that  calamity,'  &c.     Should  equal  be  translated  by  cequus, 
ceqnalis,  or  par  ?     (Dod.  &quus.)        l  autem.  m  '  an  effeminate  weakness 

{mollifies)  of  soul.' 

Exercise  13. 

It  is  an  acknowledged  fact,  that  ||  Cicero  in  his  Orations  bor- 
rowed much  from  the  Greek  orators  :  and  that,  besides  being*  an 
eagerb  and  diligent  imitator  of  the  artifices,6  which  he  perceived"1 
them  to  have  employed*5  forf  moving^  and  governing  the  minds 
of  their  hearers,  he  not  seldom  transferred  whole  enthymemesb 
of  theirs  to  his  own  orations. 

a  '  and  not  (neque)  only  was — but  also  introduced.'  b  acer.  c  sing, 

d  i.  e.  not  of  any  particular  artifice  or  artifices,  but  indefinitely,  such  aa 
he  observed  in  them.     What  mood  should  be  used  1  I.  475,  476.  e  uti. 

I  in.  5  versari.  b.  enthymema,  atis. 

Exercise  14. 

1.  Oh  [this]  sad  and  bitter*  news  about  the  King  of  Navarre  !b 
We  had  indeed  heard  it  (r)  here  from  others ;  butc  nevertheless 
were  supported  by  some  hope,  till  your  letters  arrived.*1  I  (p)  re- 
ceived both  of  them  yesterday  evening,e  and  communicated  [their 
contents]  to  all  our  [friends] :  nor  was  there  one  amongst  the?n,f 
who  did  not  declare  it  as  his  firm  beliefs  that,  when  you'  wrote  in 
such  language,*  the  recovery i  of  this  excellent  and  religious  prince 
must  be  5  quite  given  up  as  hopeless.* 

2.  I  fear  that  in  a  few  days  we  shall  feel  to  our  sorrow^  what  a 
blow  [both]  France  and  the  cause  of  religion"1  have  received  by 
the  death  of  this  (r)  [prince].  Behold,  what  fruits  f  are  born"  by 
civil  wars !  Miserable  France  wanted  but  this  one0  [ajflictioji],  to 
seel)  those  old  Theban  calamities  renewed  in  her  own  blood ! 

I.  *  '  sad'  and  bitter8  to  us.'     (See  p.  237,  20.)  b  Natarra.  «  « which 


EXERCISES    15,    16.  275 

fclmough,  &c. — yet.1  d  'To  arrive'  (of  a  letter),  affcrri,  It  being  always 

brought  to  the  receiver. — '  Till '     What  mood?  I.  507,  508.  •  fieri  ves]>cri 

/yesterday  in  the  evening).  (  'any  (single  one)  of  them.'  I.  389,  390,  391 

*  '  To  declare  one's  conviction'  (or  firm  belief),  staluere  often  with  sic  or  ita 

Kgo  autcm  sine  ulla  dubitatione  sic  statuo  etjudico,  neminem habuisse, 

■Sic.  (Cic.  de  Or.  2,  28.  122  ;  nisi  hoc  ita  statuisse  s, — te—facturum.)  h  ita. 
» talus.  i  '  that  it  could  not  be  but  that  (DirF.  20.)  the  recovery,  &c.' 

k  '  To  give  a  thing  up  as  lost  or  hopeless,'  dcplorare  quid. — the  e  f  f  e  c  t  {weeping) 
for  the  c  a  u  s  e  (a  persuasion  that  the  thing  is  hopeless  &c).  But  this  use,  though 
found  in  Ovid,  Livy,  &c.,  does  not  occur  in  Cicero  or  Caesar.  Perhaps  it  is  bet- 
ter therefore  to  use  desperare,  desperatur  quid  or  (seld.  in  Cic.)  de  aliqud  re. 

2.  i  •  with  our  great  evil.'  ""» '  how  great  a  blow  France,  how  great  fa 

blow]  religion,  &c,  has  received.'  n  Active  voice.— -fructus  par'ere.  •'Thia 
•ne  thing  remained  to — France,'  &c. 

Exercise  15. 

It  is  said  by  the  ancient*  poets,  that  there  are  in  the  ocean  cer- 
tainb  islands,  to  which  the  souls  of  those  who  have  led  a  holy  and 
religious  lifec  are  borne  after  their  death  :  that  there  they  dwell 
tcgetherd  most  delightfully  and  pleasantly,  in  ae  most  beautifulf 
meadow,  which  is  enamelled*  with  perpetual  flowers  :  that  the  sun 
is  ever  bright*  in  that  happy  region,*  the  trees  green,  the  flowers 
and  herbs  in  bloom  :  that  {there  all  nature  J]  smiles,  and  the  gentlest 
zephyrs  perpetually  breathe,  by  whose  fanningk  the  leaves  of  the 
trees  (p)  are  soflly  stirred, i  and  delight™  the  ear  with  the  softest 
[possible]  murmur. 

"■  Dod.  antiquus.  The  distinction  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  (in  Dod.)  should 
be  translated  thus :  *  Antiqui  scriptores  means  the  classics,  inasmuch  as  the  age 
ir  wlirch  they  flourished  has  long  been  past;  veteres,  inasmuch  as  they  have 
lived  and  influenced  mankind  for  2000  years.'  i>  '  Certain :'  (Ex.  3,  c.) 

1  sancte  religioseqwt  vivere.  Remember  that  this  whole  passage  is  a  statement 
gathered  from  the  poets :  it  is  their  doctrine,  not  the  writer's.    I.  460. 

*  inter  se.  '  I.  393.  f  What  is  the  proper  word  for  beautiful,  as  ap- 
plied to  objects  that  please  the  sight?  [I.  212,  note  v.]  e  distinguere. 
•jropt  rly  to  relieve  a  surface  by  ornaments  placed  upon  different  parts  of  it. 
tnitet  diffuso  lumine  caelum.  (F.ucr.)  »  '  there.'  J 'all  [things |.' 
tjlabella,  pi.  1  ventilarc.  Ut  cum  purpureas  vent  Hat  aura  comas. 
<Ovid.)  Obs.  The  words  and  general  character  of  this  passage  do  not  always 
belongto  sober  prose;  but  as  it  is  a  representation  of  poetical  descriptions,  tin* 
is  perhaps  permissible  here               "»  blandiri.    What  case? 

Exercise  10. 
1.  Ancient  uuthors  are  not  agreed*  upon  Jie  reasons,  why  this 


Z~I6  EXERCISE    17. 

or  that  animal  was  sacrificed  to  this  or  that  god.  For  some  assert1 
that  the  favourite  animal  of  each  god  was  slainc  before  his  altars ; 
-%ud  thus  the  horse  was  the  victim  offered  to  Mars.  And  [on  the 
^»ther  hand]  it  was  not  lawful  to  offer  a  wild  boar  to  Venus,*  $  be- 
cause that  animal 9)  had  killed  Adonis. 

2.  Others  [however]  held6  that  a  god  was  best  pleased  with  the 
Mood  of  the  animal,  J  which  he9)  hated:  that  thus  a  cockf  wan 
sacrificed  to  Night,  because  that  bird  seemss  to  be  calling  forth 
the  day  by  its  song,  [and]  driving  away  the  night :  [and]  a  goat  to 
I'allas,  because  [that  animal]  inflicts  great  injury  uponh  the  olive- 
hee. 

i.  a  '  We  are  not  agreed,'  non  satis  convenit  inter  nos  (deaUqua  re).  See  Ex. 
15,  note  a.)  b  « To  assert  'is  not  asserere.  c  '  that  the  [animal]  which 

war*  most  acceptable  (gratus)  to  each  was  wont  to  De  slain,'  &c.  Relat.  clause 
to  precede.  I.  31.  d  'and  because  a  wild-boar  had,  &c. — •«-  it  was  not- 

lawlul  (nefas),  that  sacrifice  should  be  made  (rem  divinam  fieri)  to  Venus  with 
a  wltd-boar.' 

2.  *  '  thought,'  putare.  f  gallus  gallinaceus.  s  The  verbs  seems — 

inflict  express  the  reasons  alleged  by  the  holders  of  the  opinion.  Will  this  cir- 
cumstance have  any  effect  on  the  mood  1  If  so,  why  7  h  insigniter  Icedere 
(Cic.  nas  insigniter  diligere.) 

Exercise  17. 

II  nothing2  is  sacred  and  religious,  but  what  is  without  orns 
ment,  let  gold  be  removed'  from  our  temples;  let  jewels,  images/ 
andb  pictures  be  removed,  and,  in  a  word,  votive-offerings  of  ever) 
kind.  But  if  it  is  an  impiety  even  to  entertain  such  a  thought  a* 
this,"  let  us  confess  what  common-sensed  itself  in  a  (393)  manner 
teaches  [us],  that  wealth  is  notc  better  employed  in  any  thing1  than 
in  the  worship  of  God,  nor  eloquences  better11  than  in  refining' 
and  beautifying  philosoph)'. 

a  Dud.  imago.  Choose  the  word  that  means  'any  plastic  work:  in  opposi- 
tion to  tabulae,  pictures  (pictures).  b  Use  the  fig.  asyndeton,  'in  a  word,' 
leniyue;  '  votive-offerings,'  donaria.  (Liv.)  c  '  this  is  impious  (nefarius) 
even  to  be  thought.'  Cogitare,  wrncn  aenotea  the  usual  activity  of  the  mind, 
which  cannot  exist  without  thinking  or  employing  itself  about  something,"  ia 
here  the  best  word  for  a  thought  entering  the  head.  d  ratio.  e  neqm 
—  ncqut.  f  '  any  where.'  Usquam  follows  the  same  rule  as  ullus,  i.  e. 
stands  in  negative  and  virtually  negative  sentences  :  alioubi  and  uspiam  answei 
respectively  to  aliquis  and  quispiam  ;  ubivis  to  ruivis,  quilibct.  S  dktnd* 
V)pw.            tx  vr<3YkiTiu8.            i  excolere. 


•  EXERCISES    18j  19.  277 

Exercise  IS. 

A.  1  should  never  have  thought  it  possible11  that  I  could  derive 
pleasure,1*  I  will  not  sayc  from  your''  grief,  hut  from  anyd  [man's], 
And  yet  if  the  truth*  must  be  spoken,  I  am  obligedf  to  confess, 
that  it  was  most  gratifying*  to  me  to  learnh  from  your  letter,  that 
you  were  exceedingly'  grieved,  as  soon  as  J  the  news  of  my 
illnessk  reached'  you.m 

2.  For  that  grief  could  not  arise  from  any  other  source,"  than 
from  your  great0  affection  for  me  ;  and  from  [the  time]  that  I  first 
saw  you,  and  heard  from3)  very  many  others  how  distinguished 
you  were  for  learning  and  virtue,?  I  have  had  no  fonder  wish" 
than  to  be  loved')  by  you. 

1.  a  'that  it  would  De'  (that  I  could  derive,  &c.)  *  '  To  derive  or  receive 
pleasure,  p;iin,  &c,  from  any  thing,'  capere  voluptatem,  dolorem,  &c,  ex  aliqua 
re.  c  nonmodo.  d  I.  389-391.  e  'the  t r u t h '  must  be  trans- 
lated by  rcra  ('true  things '),  whenever  the  meaning  is,  lwliat  is  true,1  Hrutt 
things.1  If  a  single  thing  is  meant,  the  sing,  verum  may  be  a*ed.  Veritas  is 
'truth,'  as  an  abstract  notion.  f  necetse  est.  I.  504  (1)  r  take  the  second 
form.  e  graiissimus.  »>  '  that  (quod)  I  learnt.'  intelligere,  the  notion 
being,  of  ( being  made  aware.'  i  vehementer.  J  I.  512.  k  valetudo 
('  state  of  health ')  or  injirma  valetudo.  Cic.  has  two  or  three  times  invalUudo, 
but  the  reading  is  mostly  doubtful.  '  afferri:  allatum  esse.  »  'to 
where  you  are,'  isiuc.    I.  337. 

2.  a  '  from  elsewhere,'  aliunde.  °  eximius.  p  *  a  man  of  what  erudi- 
tion and  virtue  you'  were.'  q  '  nothing  has  been  more  desirable  (pptabilius) 
to  me.'           r  I.  348. 

Exercise  19. 

1.  Socrates,  in  the4)  dialogue  which  is  entitled"1  '  the  first  Alci- 
biades,' employed  ||  a  wittyb  and.  refined6  artifice  to  check-5)  tue 
presumption*1  of  Alcibiades.  For  whereas*  the  young  man  per. 
suaded  himself,  with  the  characteristic  self-confidence  of  his  age,1 
that  he  was  already  abundantly  furnished  with  all  the  knotoledgc 
that  a  statesman  required,s  Socrates  (p)  accosted  him  courteously, 
and  by  proceeding  from  one  question  to  another, h  made  it  plain 
from  his  own  answers,*  that  he  had  as  yet  obtained)  no  knowledge1' 
of  justice  and  injustice.' 

2.  And  when  Alcibiades  took  it  impatiently;  and  was  indignant 
as  considering01  himself  to  be  reproached  with  ignorance,*  Socrates 
defended  himself  [from  the  charge],  and  asserted6)  that  he'  was 


578  EXERCISE   20 

not  saying  any  thing  whatever"  of  that  sort  against  him,  [but]  that 
it  was  Alcibiades  himself,  who  was  making  the  confession0  about 
himself. 

1.  a  inscribi.  b  urbanus,  which  denotes  refined  and  polished  wit. 

e  elegans.  Cicero  speaks  of  an  el  eg  an  8  jocandi  genus:  'to  check,'  repri 
mere.  <*  Dod.  superbia.  e  quum.  I.  489.  f  '  which  is  wont  to  bo 

the  character  (ir.genium)  of  that  age.'  What  is  the  word  for  age  =  '  time  of 
l\fe  ? '  s  '  with  all  those  things  which  had  reference  (jpertinere)  to  govern- 

ing the  state.'  '  To  govern'  administrare,  of  a  statesman  managing  it  under  a 
sovereign  power.  h  '  by  questioning  step-by-step  '  (paulatim).  Quintilian 

has  paulatim  et  (ut  dlcitur)  pedetentim  interrogare.  i  ' brought 

him  to  that  point,  that  it  was  plainly  established  by  his  own  answers.'     '  To 
bring  any  body  to  that  point,'  aliquem  eo  perducere,  ut,  &c.     'To  be  plainly  es- 
tablished/ aperleeffici  (ex).  J  Dod.  invenire.  k  Dod.  cognitio. 
I  justum,  injustum :  not  the  abstract  justitia,  but  that  which  is  actually  jurt. 
or  unjust  in  practice. 

2.  m  '  because — he  thought.'     (On  the  mood  after  quod,  see  I.  518.) 

n  'not — any  thing  whatever,'  nihil  prorsus.  °  Fateri.    Translate  'de- 

fended,' '  asserted,'  by  the  historical  present.  I.  414. 


Exercise  20. 

1.  How  highly  the  Athenians  valued8  ||  the  poems  of  Horner^ 
and  how  useful  they  judged  them  to  be  for  inflaming13  [men's] 
minds  with  a  love  of  honour7)  and  worth, b  may  be  p«rceivedc  from 
their  having  passed7  a  law,  thatd  every6  fifth  year,  atf  the  Pana- 
thenaic  festival,  the  poems  of  Homer,  and  of  none  hut  Homer,  s 
should  be  publicly  recited.  • 

2.  For  their  opinion  was*  that  laws  do  indeed  enjoin'  what  is 
to  be  done  and  [what]  avoided,  but  that  from  their  [necessary] 
brevity,  they  do  not  teach  [this  knowledge] ;  but  that  the  poets, 
who,  imitating  human  life,  give  a  copious  narrative)  of  brave  and 
noble  actions,  and  almostk  place  them  before  [men's]  eyes,  are 
letter  calculated*  to  persuade  [us  to  imitation]. 

1.  a  To  value  highly,  magni  facere.    How  must  this  be  modified  to  express 
how  highly  V  b  dignitas  ( ==  worth,  virtue)  as  in  Cic.  voluptatem  conces- 

suram  dignitatis  &c.  c  existimare.  d  I.  75.  e  I.  p.  139,  note 

d,  f  Express  the  preposition  lin.'     The  Panathenaic  festival,  Panathe- 

laica  (sc.  solemnia).  Varr.  s  'of  him  alone  out  of  the  whole  number  of 

poets.' 

2.  h  '  thus  they  thought.'  »  Dud.  jubere.         '  copiose  exponere.         k  pro 
Gemodum.            l  aptior  (ad  aliquid  faciendum). 


exercises  21,  22.  279 

Exercise  21. 

i.  The  Lacedaemonians  paid  a  similar  honour*  to  Tyrtaeus, 
For  though  in  generalb  they  were  indisposed'  to  poetic  studies,  and 
lotd  fonde  of  listening  to  the  strains  of  poets,  they  nevertheless  had 
passed  a  Iaw,r  that  whenever*  an  army  [of  theirs]  was  drawn  up 
for  a  general  engagement*  the  soldiers  should  be  summoned  to  the 
royal  tent,  aid  there  *  inspired  with  a  contempt"  of  death  in  their 
country's  cause,  J  X  °y  listening  to  the  poems  of  Tyrtaeus. 

2.  To  iEschylus,  too,  nearly  the  same  honour  was  paid'  by  the 
Athenian  people  ;  for  it  was  enacted  by  a  public  decree  that  even 
after  his  (p)  death  his  jrfays  should  be  *  acted,  a  privilege  which 
was  granted  to  no  other  tragic  poet.* 

1.  a  'To  pay  an  honour  to  any  body,'  hojwrcm  alicui  hale^e,  tribuere;  honore 
aliqucm  ajjicere:  not  honorem  alicui  exhibere.  b  ceitroqui  (  ~  'in  other 

is,'  '  with  this  exception ').  e  alienus,  I.  p.  77,  note  y.  d  ncqut. 

■  Dill'.  111.    Idiom  given  for  'don't  like  to,'  &c.  f  'h'id  appointed  by 

law,'  lege  constituerc.  s  '  as  often  as,'  quolies.  h  cum  hoslibua 

ilimicaturus  in   procindu   constitisset.  i  Participlt-        Should    you 

use  8]>ernerct   contcmnere,  or  despicere  ?      (V.   M.   5  )  J  ■  lor   (j)to)  their 

country.' 

2.  k  (the  plays)  'of  [him]  alone  out  of  all  the  tragic  poets— should  be 
•  acted.' 

Exercise  22. 

(Dreams.) 
'We  sleep  through  whole  nights,*  and  there  is  hardly  any14 
[night]  in  \vhichb  we  do  not  dream :  and  do  we  [yet]  wonder,  that 
what  we  have  dreamed  sometimes*  comes  true  Vd  These  are  the 
words  \\ofa  philosopher  (p)  who  is^  discussing*  the  unreality f  of 
dreams,  and  asserting*5  that  [even]  if  some'  dreams  fare  confirmed* 
by  the  event,  it  does  not  follow*1  from  this,  that  dreams  are  not  to  be 
looked  upon'  as  [mere  dreams].  For  out  of  J  suchk  a  number  and 
variety  [of  them],  it  would  be  more  wonderful  if  nothing  i 
came  :rued  of  what  we  f  see  when  we  are  xslecp.m 

»  I.  302.  b  I.  477.  c  I.  402.  <i'to  come  true,'  eradcre,  oj 

svenire,  both  Cie.  e  exagitare,  to  discuss  a  thing  repeatedly;  to  work  a 

point.  f  vanitaa.  s  comprobare.  h  to  follow  from  any  thing,  ex  aliqud 
re  effici  followed  hy  ut :  here  by  ut  ne :  Pt.  I.  p.  38,  note).  i  liaberi.  » in: 
with  abl.  *  C.  10.  1 1.  402.  *  perquietem. 


280  ,  EXERCISES  23,  24. 

Exercise  23. 
(Semiramti.) 

1.  Semiramis  is  said  to  have  gained  a  throne*  fromb  a  very  low 
rank  [of  life]  by  an  exceedingly  ||  ingenious"1  and  clever  plan.  She 
had  by  degreese  obLiined  such  influence  over  \\king  Ninus,f  that 
nothing  was  so  gretit  that  Semiramis  would  not  dare  to  asks 
it  (r)  of  the  king,  or  that  the  king  would*  venture  to  refuse  her,  (p) 
if  she  did  ask  it. 

2.  And  so,  having  onceh  thrown  out*  (358)  in  conversation, 
that  there  was,0>  something  which  she  desired  very  much,  and 
the  king  having  told  J  her  to  namek  it  openly  and  fearlessly, 
:£  whateveri  it  might  be,  '  I  should  wish  you,'  she  said,  '  to  f  grant"1 
me  this  [favour,]  that  I  might  (128)  sit  on16)  your  throne  and  ad- 
minister  justice*  for  but10  a  single0  day:  and  that,  for  the  whole 
of  that  day,  all  should  obey  me  [just\  as  they  do  you.'? 

1.  a  '  To  gain  a  throne,'  ad  regnum  pervenire.  b  ex.  3  humilu 
tt  abjectus.  d  Dod.  astutus.  e  Dod.  paulatim.  f  '  had 
bo  bound  (astringere)  king  Ninus  to  herself.'  s  petere.  (See  I.  252, 
Remark.) 

2.  h  aliquando.  i  injicere.  J  jubere,  I.  76.  k  profit eri. 
}  quicquid  tandem.  m  tribuere.  n  jus  dicer  e.  °  unus.  P  'as 
(qmmadmodum)  they  do  to  you,  so  (ita)  they  should  obey  me.' 

Exercise  24. 

(Semiramis  continued.) 
The  king  laughed,  and  granted  [her]  what  she  f  requested, 
immediately  it  is  proclaimed,  that  on  an  (393)  appointed*  day,  all 
men  should  obey  the  commands'0  of  Semiramis  :  that  such  was  the 
king's  pleasure  :c  that  she  for  that  day  f  was  placed  overd  them  all 
with  sovereign  authority*  and  power.  When  (512)  thel3)  day  ar. 
rived,  the  queen  sat  onl6)  the  throne  in  royal  pomp.f  Vast  crowds 
assemble5  [before  her.]  She  at  first,  by  toay  of  experiment*  issue* 
some  commands  of  no  great  importance  J 

*  Certus.  e  dicto  audientem  esse,  with  dat.  of  person.  «  '  that  so 

it  pleased  the  king.'  d  prceesse.  e  imperium.  f  culttis,  im- 

plying more  than  apparel  only;  all  the  attendant  circumstances  of  a  king' i 
fitting  in  state.  S  '  A  very  great  concourse  (concursus)  takes  place.' 

txperiendi  cau*a.  I*  commands  some  things   (ace.)   of  no  13>  £re&' 


kxerctses  25,  26,  27.  281 

Exercise  25. 

( Semiramis  continued.) 

When*  she  saw  that  all  men  obeyed  her  in  earnest, b  whatever 
the  commanded, e  she  orders  the  royal  body-guardd  to  arrest6  (75) 
/he  king  himself:  they  arrest  hirn.  To  bind  him  [in  chains]  : 
he  is  bound.  To  put  him  to  death  :{  he  is  put  to  death.  In  this 
manners  her  reign  of  a  day  is  made  perpetual.*  This  is  [the 
queen]  who  surrounded  Babylon  with  walls  of  brick,'  and  whose 
famous)  hangingk  gardens  were  the  objects  of  such  admiration.* 

*  '  Hlien '  =  '  as  soon  as '  (512).  What  tense  and  mood  ?  (514.)  b  serio. 
e  'in  all  things.'  With  respect  to  the  place  of  'a//,'  see  p.  242,  39,  which  should 
lay  down  the  rule  as  general,  not  as  confined  to  substantives  only.  d  satellite* 
ac  stipatores  regit  corporis.  (Cic.  Rull.  2.  13,  32,  has  ;  si  ivato  r  es  corporis 
constituit  eosdem  ministros  et  satellites  potestatis.)  «  comprehend  ere. 
f  interficere.  8  ita.  h  'froni3^  [that]  of-a-day  (diurnus)  becomes  a 
lasting  [one].'  Lasting,  diuturnus  :  there  is  a  sort  of  play  on  the  similarity  ol 
sound  in  diurnus  and  diuturnus.  This  is  called  Paronomasia,  see  above,  p 
261.  So  non  magis  amort  quam  more,  (C.  Nep.) ;  in  ore  atque  amort 
(Cic),  &c.J             i  of  brick,  latericius.                J  I.  381.                 k  pensilis. 

l  '  had  such  admiration.'     C.  10. 

Exercise  26. 

Cicero,  an  extremely*  good  judgeb  of  eloquence,  *  thought  so 
m'ghly  ^  of  Plato,  that  he  said  Jupiter  himself,  if  he  wished  to 
speak* Greek,  would  use  noe  language  but10  that10  of  Plato. 
And  then22  Aristotle  !  did  he  notd  both  lay  downe  the  rulesf  of 
eloquence  better  than  any  other  man,e  and  possess  such  eloquence* 
himself,  that  the  same  Cicero  called  him  a  river  flowing  with 
gold? 

*  in  primi*.  b  exislimalor.  c  non  alius.  d  Nonne  is, 
of  course,  the  regular  interrogative  particle  here:  but  'kcn  is  often  uoed 
without  ne  in  vehement  questions — especially  questions  of  appeal.' 

8  tradere.  (  pra:ceptum.  S  unus  omnium  ovtime.  b  '  of  such  (£J. 

10.)  eloquence.' 

Exercise  27. 

1.  Philosophy  heals  these  and  similar  diseases,  and  produces* 
in  her  [followers]  suchb  a  firmness  of  mind,  ase  neitherd  the 
allurements  of  pleasure  (pi.),  nor  the  fires*  of  pain  (pi.),  nor  the 


232  exercises  28v  29. 

splendour  of  richets,  nor  obscure  and  despised f  poverty,  nor  the 
thirst  of  honour  (pi.),  nor  the  fear  of  disgrace,  nor  the  desire  of 
life,  nor  the  fear  of  death,  can  shakes  and  overthrow.11 

2.  For  as  the  poets  say  that  the  top  of  Olympus  is  always  calm, 
Decause'  it  is  too  high  fori  the  power  of  the  winds  and  tempests  to 
reach  it:*  so  the  mind  of  philosophers  is  too  lofty i  and  elevatedi 
to  feel  those  whirlwinds"1  of  desires  (p)  that  rage  and  battle" 
together0  on  the  ground  for  17)  things  [of  the]  most  worthless 
[nature]. 

1.  *  ejicsre.  b  is,  ea,  id.  (See  I.  483  (2)).  «C9.  c  Translate 
neither — noi — nor,  by  I.  478  (4).            efax  (torch).            f  Dod.  spern&re. 

I  convellere,  '  pull  violently  from  its  place.'  h  labefactare. 

2.  «  projderea  quod :  which  is  stronger  than  quia  or  quod  only,  and  gives  more 
prominence  to  the  reason  assigned.  J  Diff.  94.  k  <to  arrive  thither,' 
to  pervenire.            l  Dod.  alt  us  (i).            mJlatus  {jus).  n  digladiari. 

»  inter  se. 

Exercise  28. 

I  should  scarcely  have  dared  to  ask  you  to  write*  to  me  in  Latin, 
fearing  that  this  would  seem  to  you  an  exceedingly15  difficult 
[task].  Consequently,6  the  Latind  letters  which  I  have  lately 
received  from  you  were  the  more  acceptable, — [they  were]  not 
indeed6  entirely*-  faultless,^  but  yet  much  more  correctly  and 
elegantly  written^  than  I  should  have  believed  [possible].  I  en- 
couragei  you  therefore  to  hope  with  confidence,)  and14  not  to  doubt 
butu>  that,  under  my  guidance,11  you  will  one  day^  attain™  to 
some"  [considerable]  facility  in  this  accomplishment,  as  well  as  in 
others.0 

a  75.  b  oppido.  c  Quo  (the  relative  adverb,  instead  of  the  de- 

monstrative eo),  with  the  comparative  adj.  d  'written  by  you  in  Latin,' 

Latine.     See  I.  53,  note  *.  e  I.  383.  f  omni  ex  parte.  s  emen~ 

datus.  b  nitidiores  et  cultiores.  ijubeo,  '  I  bid  you.'  i  bene. 

k  I.  364.  l  aliquando.  m  Dod.  invtnire.  n  aliquis.  °  *  of  this 

kind  also.' 

Exercise  29. 

{On  a  Recovery  from  Illness.) 

Certainly,  when  all'  my  medical-attendants'*  asserted-repeat 
*»dlyb  with  onec  consent,  that  there  was  hardly  any  hope  left  cj 


exercises  30,  31.  283 

viy  recovery,11  I  had  so  prepared  myself  and  composed  my  mind, 
as'  to  be  neither  grieved  nor  frightened  by  the  fear  of,  as  it  was 
supposed,  approaching'  death:  and  asked  nothing14  else*  ofh  the 
♦Almighty,  but11)  that  He  would  deal  with  me  *  mercifully,  would 
pardon  the  errours'  of  my  past  life,  and,  in  that  separation  of  body 
and  soul,  would  not14  suffer  me  to  be  tormented  either  in  a  greater 
degree  or  for  a  longer  time)  than  my  strength  could  bear. 

•  vudici.  b  dictitare.  c  summits.  d  '  of  my  escaping,1 

evadendi  '  I.  66.  f  imminens.  e  alius.  h  I.  252,  Obs. 

i  errata.  J     more  violently,  or  linger.'     Comparatives  of  rthementcr 

and  diu. 

Exercise  30. 

(Same  subject  continued.) 

But  I  hope  that  /  have  leen  allowed  by  God  to  remain  in  this 
world,*  that  the  stains  contracted b  in  former  years  may  be  blotted 
out  by  my  tears ;  and  that  at  last  (p)  I  may  slight6  and  reject  the 
temptations1  of  vice  (pi.),  and  pursue  now  at  least  in  my  old  age' 
that  course  of  life  which  I  ought  to  have  pursued*"  from  the  begin- 
ning.  And  I  beseech  you,  *  again  and  again,  noble  Sir,*  that,  as 
you  stimulateh  me  to  the  (p)  performance  of  this  resolution'  by 
your  example,  so  you  would  be  kind  enough  J  to  assist  me  [to  do 
so],  not  onlyk  by  your  admonitions  and  advice,  but  also  by  offering 
*  prayers  to  God  in  my  behalf. * 

a  '  I  II  have  been  left  by  God  in  this  life.'  b  i  To  contract  a  stain,'  macur 

lam  toTicipere:  '  to  blot  it  out  or  efface  it,'  maculam  delere  or  eluere. 
c  amJLttrt.  d  illeccbra?.  e  saltern  jam  senex.  f  C.  *  vir 

darUsime.  h  incitare.  i  animi  mci  proposilum.  i  dignari 

i  '  no\  only — but  also,'  et — el:  or  in  the  usual  way,  non  solum — scdetiarru 
'  *foi  me.' 

Exercise  31. 

^Obs.    When  a  demonstrative  is  to  be  translated  by  a  relative,  the  conjunctiva 

at  the  head  of  the  sentence  must  be  omitted.) 

Deucalion,  in  Ovid,*  ingeniously  interprets  the  rcsponseb  given 
him  by  Themis,  (p)  when  he  &sked  by  what  means0  he  could 
restore  the  human  race,  (p)  which  had  been  destroyed  by  the 
flood.     For,  being  ordered  '  to  throw  behind  his  back  the  bones 


284  exercises  32,  33,  34. 

of  his  great  mother,'  ||  he  (r)  made  outd  [that]  ||  by  the  name  of 
mother  the  earth  [was  meant],  and  that  stones  were  callede  the 
bones  ||  in  her  (r)  body. 

■  '  The  Ovidian  Deucalion.'     Ovidianus.  b  sors.  c  ars.         d  intel 

ligere.  e  Subj.,  as  being  a  thought  of  Deucalion's. 

/ 

Exercise  32. 

[All  men]  suhnii  to  punishment  with  a  better  grace,*-  whenb  they 
think  that  they  deserve  to  be  p*unished.e  Wherefore  Aristotle,  in 
his  second  book  on  the  Art  of  Rhetoric,^  sets-down*  this  argument 
with  others*  among  those  which  tend  to  soothe  the  mind  ;  that  we 
should  point  out  to  those  who  think  that  an  injury  has  been  done 
them,  that  they'  began/  and  that  whath  they  complain  of ,5)  has 
befallen  them  deservedly. 

H  '  bear  II  with  a  more  even  mind  that  they  should  be  punished.'  t  Express 

'oilmen — when?  by  quicunque  (whosoever).  c  I.  486  (b).  d  'On  the 

rhetorical  art,'  rhetoricus.  e  ponere.  f  quoque.  £'  were  the  first 

( priores)  in  *infiicting  injury.'  b.  =  ( those  things  which.' 

Exercise  33. 

Soon  [afterwards]  he  fell  ill  of*  a  *  severe  disease,  and  suffered 
so  much  from  itb  for  twoe  months,  that  his  friends  and  medical, 
attendants  feared  for*1  his  life,  and14  (p)  though  he  fshook  off  the 
disorder,'  it  was10)  butu)  very  slowly  indeed*  that  he  recovered  the 
♦bodily  strength  (p)  he  had  lost,  and  his  former5  health. 

a  in  morbum  incidere  or  cadere.  b  « was  so  shaken  or  oppressed  by  it ;' 

morbo  urgeri,  tentari,  affiigi  (Cic),  confiictari  (Corn.  Nep.).  c  bini,  the  two 

months  being  considered  as  one  space.  Bini  *  extra  distribution  em  sig- 
nificat  duo,  non  separ atim,  sed  simul  sumpta.'     (Facciolati.)  d  I, 

231.*  e  To  shake  off  a  disorder,  morbum  or  vim  morbi  depellere.  f  ad- 

modwrh  tarde  ac  lente.  s  pristinus. 

Exercise  34 

I  send  you  back  your  review,*  in  which  I  have  scarcely  found 
j^any  thing]  to  cavil  at,b  much  less6  to  censure.  Your  judgment 
is  correct'  and  sure :  your  style  elegant  and  in  good  Latin.* 
That'  you  have  made  such  progress'  in  this  (r)  I  rejoice  the 
more,  because5  it  wasl0)  principally*1  by  my  advice*  that  you  were 


exercises  35,  36.  283 

persuidcd  to  add  this  accomplishment)  of  writing  well,  to  your 
other  graces*  of  genius  and  learning. 

*  censztra.  b  DifF.  10S  (1).     '  To  cavil  at,  calumniari.  c  '  much 

less,'  nedum  *  I.  443.  d  'and  quite  {plane)  Latin  '  e  I.  517,  note  x. 

•To  make  euch  progress,'  tantumprofwere.  8  I.  516.  h  potis&imum, 

I.  3l>4.  i  Use  the  subst.  auctor.  (See  I.  364.)  J  '  thought  that  this 

credit  (laus) — should  be  added,' — conjungere,  as  it  was  to  be,  not  appended  to 
them  but  united  with  them.  k  ornamenta. 


Exercise  35. 

As  if»  my  house  were  turned  into  an  infirmary,*  there  are  ill 
in  it  both  my  youngest  daughter,  and  my  two  maid-servants.  I 
am  therefore  obliged  to  ask0  you  to  defer1  your  coming,6  which 
for17)  many  reasons  I  was  so  anxiouslyf  expecting,  to  a  time 
more  convenit.it  to  us.  Farewell,  excellent  man.  Leyden, 
March  19.? 

**I.  494.  b  Sen.  uses  valetudinarium.    The  term  in  Justinian's  Code  oi 

Laws  is  nosocomium,  from  voaoKu^tlov.  c  I.  252.  d  I.  75.        e  adventita 

i  tantopere.  s  I.  526,  528.    These  rules  may  be  given  thus : — 

Adde  diem  semper  Nonis  atque  Idibus  unum : 

Accipiatque  dies  mensis  lux  ultima  bino». 


Exercise  3G. 

The  more*  lazyb  1  grow"  in  writing  letters,  the  more  vehe- 
mently  do  I  desire  to  converse  with  you,  especially  sinced  [we] 
have6  innumerable  subjects'  of  conversation.*  You  will  there- 
fore higMy  gratify*  both  me  and  all  mine,  if  you  will  revisit  us, 
and  [that  after  so]  long  a  time,i  during  the  Easter  holidays.)  The 
cold  is  sharp,  I  allow ;  but  you  shall  have*  a  bright'  fire'  in  yom 
bed-room. 

*  I.  407.  b  Ddd.  ignavia.  e  'age  makes  me.'  dl.  483. 

•  utBC  t  argumentum.  s  Gerund.  b  '  will  have  done  [a  thing] 

n.?*t  gratifying,'  gratissimus.  i  intervallum.  1    fcriae  Paschalcj. 

k  '  there  shall  be  prepared  for  you '  l  focus. 


*  '  Nedum  is  rare  ii»  Cicero,  who  generally  uses  nan  modo  instead  of  it  afto* 
it—quidcm.' 


186  exercises  37,  38,  29. 

Exercise  37. 

Your  letters  are  few  and  fa?  between  ;a  but  they  make  up  for. 
their  rarity  by  their  wonderful'  tenderness.6  Many  parts  of  them* 
have  delighted  me,  but  nothing  more  than  the4)  affection,  which 
you  not  only  manifest  to  me  in  my  life-time^  but  also  solemnly* 
promise  to  manifest11  to  my  [family],  when  1  am  gone.  > 

R  f  are  certainly  rare,'  varus  quidem.  b  compensare.  c  suavitas. 

&  l many  [things]  in  them.'  e  amorem  prcestare  (to  manifest  by  sub- 

stantial kindness).  f 'tome  alive.'  e  sancie.  b.  Diff.  2 

i  •  slxaU  Iiave  ceased  to  be.1 

Exercise  38. 

As  to*  my  property b  [which  is]  smallc  indeed, l  but  in  a  tolera- 
bly good  condition,9  let  us  converse  [about  it]  when  you  come  in 
the  spring. r  I  am  so  strongs  both  in  body  and  mind,  that  unless 
I  f  am  carried  off  by  apoplexy,h  I  seem  as  if  I  mighU  arrive  at 
the  same  age  that  my  mother  reached  :\  nor  do  I  feel  that  I  «am. 
*  growing  an  old  man  \\from  any  thing*  butll)  my  laziness  in  let- 
ter-writing, i 

a  De.  b  res  (pi.).  c  modicus.  d  I.  383.  e  'but  sufficiently 

uninvolved,'  satis  explicatus.     (So  Cic. provincia  quammaxime  apta  ex  plica- 
taque.)  f  sub  tempus  vernum.  S  '  To  be  strong,'  vigere.  h  apo- 

plexis  or  apoplexia.  i  '  to  be  able.'  J  attingcre.  k  '  [from]  any 

other  circumstance,'  res.  i  '  in  writing  letters.' 

Exercise  39. 

Of  our  [menja  not  more  than  twenty  were  [either  killed  or] 
missingb  [after]  all  the  engagements.  But  in  the  castle  there  was 
not  a  single6  soldier  who  was  not  wounded  :  and  of  one  cohort  four 
centurions  lostd  their  eyes.  And  desiring*  to  *  produce  evidence 
of  their  exertions1'  and  the  danger  they  had  been  in,s  they  counted 
over  beforeh  Marius  about  thirty  thousand  arrows'  [which  had 
been]  shot  j  into  the  castle,  and  brought  to  him  the  shield*  of  the 
centurion  Scseva,  in  which  there  were  found*  a  hundred  and  twenty 
noles.i 

a  In  such  enumerations  the  posaesdve  adjective  is  often  used,  of  course  In 
agreement,  instead  of  partitive  gen.,  or  ex,  &c.  Caesar,  especially,  is  fond  of 
this  construction:  thus  nostri  circiter  septuaginta  ceciderunt.  (Bell.  Civ 
1  46,  b  To  be  [kilted  or]  missing  (i.  e.  lost  in  any  way),  desider-xri. 


exercises  40,  41.  287 

«•  'Single*  after  general  negatives,  such  as  nemo,  nullus,  ncque  quisquam  oi 
ullus,  is  best  translated  by  omninozzz  'at  all,  in  all,'  which  extends  the  meaning 
Btrictly  to  all.     Here  ncmo—omnino.  d  I.  56,  n.  e  '  when  (quum) 

they  desired.'  (subj.)  t  labor  (sing.).  e  « their  danger.'  h  'To 

count  over  (again)  before  any  body,'  renumerare  cui.  »  For  military  mat- 

ters Caesar  and  Livy  are  the  best  authors  to  copy,  but  especially  Caesar.  With 
respect  to  compound  numerals  of  this  kind,  he  so  nearly  always  places  the 
thousands  first,  then  the  gen.,  and  then  the  number  of  tlwusands,  that  this  is  a 
very  good  order  to  follow.  Thus,  millia  passuum  decern ;  millia  hominum  circi- 
ter  viginti,  &c.  J  '  To  shoot'  (of  weapons  hurled,  as  those  of  the  ancients 

were),  conjicere.  k  « the  shield  being  brought  (referre),  [there]  were 

found  in  it,'  &c.  I  foramen. 

Exercise  40. 

lie  sends  thither  M.  Valerius  with  five  cohorts  of  the  eighth 
legion.  The  people  of  Veil'-  as  soon  as  they  saw  our  standards, 
opened5  their  gates;  and  all,e  both  inhabitants4  and  soldiers,  came 
forth6  to  meetf  Valerius  with  their  congratulations  :e  Sulpicius  and 
Manlius  threw  themselves  down  from3)  the  wall.  Manlius,  being 
brought11  before*  Valerius,  begs  to  be  sent!  to  Marius.  Valerius, 
with  the  cohorts  and  Manlius,  returns  on  the  same  day  thatk  he 
had  set  out  [upon  his  march  thither].  Marius  incorporated!  the 
legions  witli  his  own  army,  and  dismissed  Manlius  unpunished." 

*  Veienses  b  V.  M.  7.  c  universi.  &  ojrpidani  (inhabitants 
of  the  town).  e  exire.  f  '  To  meet '  is  generally  translated  by  obviain 
witn  a  dat.,  ire  (exire,  &c.)  obviam  alicui.  «  '  congratulating.'  h  deduci. 
l  ad.  J  I.  75.  k  C.  25.  I  conjungere  aliquem  cum  aliqud  re. 
114  incolumis. 

Exercise  41. 

I  have  heard  our  friend  Pomponius  say*  that  he  had  two 
soldiers  in  Spain,  rich  brothers  fromS)  the  Faliscah  territory  ;  their 
father  f  having  left  them  a  small  country -housed  and  a  field6  of 
certainly*  not  more  than  one  acre,theyh  formed  an  apiary*  round 
*he  whole  house,  and  had  a  garden  [there],  and  filled  upf  the  rest 
w-'.h  thyme,  cytisus,  and  balm.*  Theseh  [brothers,  h^  said]  used 
never  to  make  J  less,  on  an  average^  than  ten  thousand  sestertia 
by  J  their  honey. 

*  /  have  heard  you  say,  is,  audivi  te  (ipsum)  dicere  ;  audivi,  quum  diceres, 
audivi  te  dicentem.  t>  '  to  whom  when  a  small  country-house  had  been  left 
by  their  father.'            e  agcllus.  <i  sane.  e  alvearium,  i.  e.  a  system  of 


283  exercises  42,  43. 

bee-hives.  f  obsepire  s  apiastrum.  h  Continue  this  m  oblijiu 

narration.  i  ut  perce  ue  ducerent.  i  '  to  make  so  much  by  any  tiling, 

recipere  (with  ace.  of  the  thing)  ex. 

Exercise  42. 

If  there  is  noa  food  [for  them]  naturally-growing0  [there],  the 
owner  ought  to  sow  what  bees  like  best  :c  such  asd  roses,  wild- 
thyme,6  balm/  poppies,  beans,  lentils,  peas,  basil,*  the  [sweet- 
scented]  rush,*  lucerne,'  and  especially  cytisus,  which  is  extremely 
good)  for  them  [when]  in  health.  For  it  begins  to  flower  atk  the 
vernal  equinox,  and  continues  [in  flower]  to  the  autumnal  equinox. 
But  though™  this  is  best  for17>  [their]  health,  thyme  is  best  with 
reference  to  the"  making  of  honey.0  For  17)  this  reason  the  Sicilian 
honey  bears  the  *  palm,  becauseP  the  thyme  is  there  good  and 
abundant.** 

a  'not.'  (See  p.  257, 103.)  b  naturalis.  c.'most  follow.'  d  'these  are.' 
Obs.  All  the  names  are  to  be  in  the  singular.  e  serpyllum.  f  apiastrum. 
e  ocimum.  h  cyperum.  »  medica  (sc.  herba).  J  utilissimus. 

k  '  from,'  ab.  l  '  to  the  other  equinox  of  autumn.'    What  is  the  word  for 

'other'  of  two  things'?         m  '  as  this  is  best — so  thyme,'  &c.,  ut—sic.  a  ad. 

0  mellificium.  P  quod.  ^frequens. 

Exercise  43. 
(Oji-the  Medical  Art.) 

As  agriculture  [provides]  nourishment  for  healthy  bodies,  so 
medicine  promises  *  health  to  [them  when]  diseased.*  There  islu) 
indeed  nowhere,  [where]  this  [art]  does  not  exist :  since0  even  the 
most  uncivilized0  nations  are  acquainted  with  herbs  and  other  sim- 
ple11 [remedies]  fore  the  curef  of  wounds  and  diseases.  Among18) 
the  Greeks,  ||  however,  it  was  cultivated  considerably?  more  than 
amongsth  other  nations :  and*  [yet]  even  amongst  these,  not  from 
the  first  beginning  [of  their  national  existence],  but  [only]  a  few 
centuries  before  us,  since)  iEsculapius  was  celebrated  as  the  first 
inventor  [of  it]  ;  who,  because  he  studied  somewhatk  more  pro- 
foundly this  science,  [which  was]  still  rude  and  in  its  infancy,  i 
was  worshipped  after  his  death  as  a  god.m 

a  V.  M.  II.  b  siquidem.  c  imperitissimus.  d  promptus  (i.  o 

eady  at  hand>  e  ad.  f  auxUium.,  i.  e.  help  against  them,  whethei 


exercises  44,  45.  28ii 

tnulc  or  partial  cure.  e  aliquanto,  1. 402.  h  in,  with  abl.  I  <w. 

*  utpote  quum,  with  suZy.  *paulo.  i  vulgaris.  m  'was  received 

into  the  number  of  the  gods.'  reci/n. 

Exercise  44. 

[Same  subject  continued.) 

After*  [him]  ||  A/s  two  sons  Podalirius  and  Machaon,  following 
Agamemnon  in  the  war  against  Troy,*  afforded  no12)  inconsid- 
erable8 service  to  their  comrades. d  But  yet  Homer  has  described0 
||  them  (r)  not  as  having  rendered  them  anyf  aid  against*  pesti- 
lence,11 norl9>  the  various  kinds  of  diseases,  but  only  as  being 
accustomed  to  cure'-  wounds  with  the  knife  J  and  medicinal  appli- 
cations.11 From  which  it  [plainly]  appears,*0*  that  these  [were] 
the  only  branchesi  of  medicine  whichm  they  f  attempted ;  and 
that  [consequently]  these  are  the  oldest.  And  we  f  may  learn 
[from]  the  same  author,11  that  diseases  were  referred  to  the  anger 
of  the  gods,  and  that  it  was10)  from  them  [that]  assistance  used  to 
be  implored. 

a  Deinde.        t>  c  Trojan.'        c  mediocris.  d  commilitones.         e  proponere, 

with  inf.  t  The  regular  words  after  negatives  are  quisquam  and  ullus :  but 

aliquis  is  sometimes  found.  According  to  Matthice  this  is  :  '  when  the  thing 
either  really  exists,  or  miglit  be  supposed  to  have  existed?  (Ad.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  6,  15.) 
Use  aliquis  here  :  and  see  I.  160.         fft/i,  with  abl.  h  Dod.  lues.         i  \  . 

M.  19.  iferrum.  k  medicamentum.  1  pars.  m  DifF.  8 

a  'Author'  is  never  auctor  (but  scriptor,  &c.)  except  when,  as  here,  he  is  our 
authority  for  a  statement. 

Exercise  45. 

(Same  subject  continued.) 

And  it  is  *  probable,  that  though  there  were  no  remedies*  against 
bad  health,  yet  that  men  for  the  most  part  enjoyed  good  health,*  on 
account  of  their  good  habits'  [of  life],  which  neither  slothd  nor 
luxury  had  corrupted.  Fore  it  isl0)  these  two  [vices],  which  first' 
in  Greece,  and  then21)  amongstl8)  ourselves,  have  injured*  [men's] 
constitutions.  And  consequently, h  this  complicated'  [art  of] 
medicine,  which  was  unnecessary  in  former  days,  and  is  so  now 
amongst  other  nations,)  enablesk  but  a  very  few*  of  us  to  reach  the 
beginning  (p/)  of  old  age. 

13 


iilJO  EXERCISES    46,  47. 

*  inter  nulla  auxilia,  followed  by  gen.  b  <  yet  that  it  generally  (plerumquc,j 
leil-to-men's-lot  (contingere)  good.'  c  mores.  d  Dod.  ignavia. 

e  siquidem.  t  prius,  there  being  only  two  cases  mentioned.         s  affllgeret 

1  constitutions,'  corpora.  h  V.  M.  20.  i  multiplex.  J  '  neithei 

necessary  in  former  days — nor  amongst 1S)  other  nations.'  In  former  days  • 
olim.  V.  M.  9.  k  '  Enables  to  reach,'  perducit  ad,  &c.  i  vix  aliqui. 

Exercise  46. 

Sylla  with  an  inferior  force*  was  besieging  troops  which  had  yet 
suffered  no  loss  or  disaster  ,h  they  being0  [also]  supplied  with  an 
abundance  of  every  thing :  for  every  dayd  a  great  number  of  ships 
arrived  from  all  parts*  to  bring  them  provisions :  nor  could  the 
wind  bloio  from  any  quarter  that  was  not  favourable  to  some  of 
themJ  He,*  on  the  other  hand,h  having  consumed  all  the  com 
round  about,i  was  in  great  distress ;)  but  yet  his  men22)  bore  their 
privations*  with  extraordinary  patience.  For  they  called  to  mindp 
that,  after17  suffering  the  same  [hardships]'  in  Bithynia  the  year 
before,  they,  by  their  exertions  and  patient  endurance,13  put  an 
end"  to  a  very  formidable0  war :  they  rememberedp  that,  after17 
suffering  great  distress^  before  Nicomedia,  and  much  greater 
stillr  before  Mantinium,  they  gained  a  victory8  over  mighty 
nations. 

a  militum  numerus.  b  copies  integrce  atque  incolumee.     According  to  Dod. 

incolumis  and  integer  both  mean  '  unhurt  and  untouched?  integer,  opp.  to  ' being 
attacked,  incolumis,  to  'being wounded.'  Dod. salvus.  cquumilli.  d69, 1.  t» 
e  undique.  f  '  nor  could  any  wind  blow,  but  (quin)  they  had  a  favourable 

course  from  some  quarter  (pars).'  •  Could '  should  be  the  imperfect,  as  it  is  an 
expression  of  a  repeated  possibility.  S  ipse.        h  autem.        ifar  and  wide. 

J  angustice  (a  'strait'),  pi.  k  'these  things.'  (See  I.  24,)  l  See  I.  24. 

m  pztientia.  n  conficere.         °  maximus.  P  I.  p.  72,  note  q.  i  inopia 

(distress  for  provisions).  r  V.  M.  21.  8  'To  gain  a  victory,'  victorem 

or  victorea  decedere,  with  gen.  of  course. 

Exercise  47. 

1.  In  the  mean  time,a  L.  Sanga,  whom  Sylla  at  his  departure 
(p)  had  left  in  command  of  the  camp,b  being  informed  [of  what 
was  going  on],  came  to  the  assistance0  of  the  cohort  with  two 
legions.  On  his  (r)  arrival,  the  Africans  were  easily  repulsed ; 
they  did  ||  notd  [so  much  as]  stande  the  sightf  and  [first]  shock  of 
our  [troops],  but  [as  soon  as]  (p)  their  first  ranks  were  broken,** 
the  rest  turned  their  backs  and  fled  from  the  field. h     But  Sangw 


EXERCISE   49.  291 

recalled  our  men,  that  they  might  not  pursue  them  to  any  great 
distanced 

2.  Now  J  many  men  think,  that  if  he  had  chosen24)  to  pursue 
them  more  warmly,*  the  war  might  have  been  terminated  on  that 
day  :  it  does  not  however  *  appear!  that  his  decision  was  [justly] 
(insurable  :m  for  the  duties0  of  a  lieutenant  are  one,0  those  of  a 
general  another:0  the  formerp  ought  to  act  in  every  thing  ac- 
cording to  his  instructions  ."*  the  latterp  to  decide  without  restraint 
according  to  what  seems  best  with  reference  to  the  whole  slate  of 
affairs. 

1.  *  I.  p.  141,  note  g.  b«had  placed   over  the  camp,'  pr&ficert. 

c  I.  242  (1).  d  neque  vero.  eferre.  t  Dod.  videre.  *  '  To 

b^cuk  the  first  ranks,'  primos  dejicere.  h  loco  cedere.  « longius. 

2  i  At.  k  acrins.  1  I.  297.  m  reprehendendus.    The  ad- 

jectives in  -able,  -ible,  may  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  dus,  when  they  mean 
what  ought  to  be  done  :  not  when  they  mean  what  can  be  done.  n  partes. 

0 1.  38.  P  alter — alter.  i  ad  pr&scriptum  libere  ad  summam  rerum 

conmdere. 

Exercise  48. 

He*  disposes  his  men  [along]  the13)  works  he  had  begun0  to 
raise,  not  at  certain  intervals^  as  was  done  ond  the  preceding* 
days,  but  in  a  continued  line  of  guards  and  posts,1  so  that  [the  par- 
ties] touched*  *  each  other,  and  [all  together]  filled  up  the  whole 
line  of  works. h  He  orders'  the  military  tribunes  and  officers  of 
the  cavalry  to  patrol  [about  the  works],  and  begs]  them  not  only 
to  be  on  their  guard  againstk  sallies,  but  also  to  keep  an  eye  upon 
individuals  secretly  leaving  the  gates.*  Norra  was  there  of  the 
whole  [army]  a  single  individual"  of  so  indifferent0  and  sluggish* 
a  mind,  as  to  take  a  wink  of  sleep*  that  night. 

a  '  He '  (of  the  general),  ipse.  b  instituere.  c  '  certain  spaca 

being  intermitted.'  d  '  as  was  the  custom  of,'  &c.  e  superior. 

f  pcrpetuis  tdgiliis  stationibusque.  s  '  disposes,  being  the  historical  pres- 

ent.    What  tenses  would  both  be  correct  here?    I.  414.  h  munitionem  ex- 

plere:  explere,  to  leave  no  gaps;  complere)  to  Jill  as  full  as  a  thing  will  hold. 
i  '  to  order  to  patrol,'  circummittere.  J  hortari,  I.  75.  k  '  To  be  on 

one's  guard  against  any  thing,'  cavlre  ab  aliqud  re.  i  '  to  observe  the  secret 

exits  (exitus)  of  individuals,'  singuli  homines.  m  neque  vero:  the  vera 

adding  emphasis  to  the  assertion.  a  '  any  (one).'    What  word  for  ' any  ? ' 

1.339—391.  "remissus.  P  tanguidus.  «    as  »o  rest,'  am- 

ruiescerc.    (See  I.  66.  note  s.    Translate  according  to  1. 483  (a).) 


292  exercises  49,  50. 

Exercise  49. 
(Death  of  Poly  carp.) 

1.  Whena  they  farrived5  ||  there, 25)  he  being6  from8'  his  age 
weak  in  his  legs,  and  [consequently]  allowed  to  ride  upon  an  ass,t 
a  great  concourse  (pi-)  took  place  both  of  Jews  and  Pagans  • 
Bomee  of  whom,  remembering  his  old  reputation,  had  compassion1 
on  his  age  :  but  most  [of  them]  were  *  exasperated  [against  him] 
from3)  their  hatred  against8,  the  Christians,  and  especially  because* 
Polycarpus  had  prevented  the  offering  of  sacrifice*  to  the  gods  oi 
their  country. 

2.  Hence  when,  [upon]  being  ordered  to  curse  Christ,  he  said] 
that  he  would  never  do  that  to  his  King  and  Saviour,  he  was  im- 
mediately handed-overk  to  the  executioners  tol)  be  burnti  alive. 
When  they  f  were  leading  him  to  death,  a  certain  presbyter,  with 
whom  he  had  been  intimate,m  met"  him  :°  [and]  said  weeping, l  O 
folycarp,  what  undeserved  treatment  art  thou  receiving  /'p  he  [re- 
plied] :«  'But  not  unexpected1-  [treatment],  for  many  Christian 
bishops  will  hereafter8  meet  with  this  fate  /'* 

1.  a  ubi :  what  tense?  I.  512,  514.  b  pervenire.  I.  296.  c  quum, 
with  subj.  d  'riding  upon  an  ass,'  asino  vehi.  e  Instead  of  making 
these  principal  sentences,  connect  them  with  the  preceding  by  quum  with  subj. 
Soms — but  most;  alii — plurimivero.  f  miserari.  £1.156.  k  maxi- 
meque  quod,            i  sacra  fieri  prohibuer  at. 

2.  J  Diff.  2.  k  trader e.  l  comburi.  m  familiar iter  uti. 

n  obviam  esce  °  is  quum,  P  '  what  undeserved  [things]  thou  art 

differing ! '  *  huic  Me.  r  inopinatus.  ■  deinde.  t  hunt 

exitum  ,u.b:r  j. 

Exercise  50. 

It  is  [kind  iit  you  and]  like  a  brother*  tc  exhort18  me,  but  [you 
exhort  me  who  am]  now',  by  Hercules,b  running  [apace,  that  way 
myself,  so]  that  I  lavish0  all  my  [assiduous]  attentions11  upon" 
hime  alone.  Nay,f  I  shall  perhaps?  with  my  ardent  zeal  accom- 
plish11 what  often  happens  to  travellers,  J  when  they  make  haste  ;i 
[I  mean]  that  as  [they],  if  they  have  happened20  to  rise  later  than 
they  intended,]  [yet]  by  quickening  their  speed*  they  arrive  even 
earlieri  at  their  journey's  end}m  than  if  they  had  lain  awake  all  the 
morning  ;■  sc  I,  since  I  have  so  long  overslept  myself0  in  the  oh 


exercises  51,  52.  293 

servanccP  of  this  man,  [though],  by  Hercules,  you  have  many  a 
time  tried  to  awake  me,*  will  make  up  forr  my  laziness  by 
running. 

%fraterne  (adv.).  b  mehercule.      The  noio'  is  to  be  made  emphatic  by 

ifuidem.  c  conferre.  d  studia  (pi.).  e  him  =  him  whom  you 

mention,  <&c.     'What  pron.  should   be  used  for'/ie?1     1.377(c).  f  Ego 

vero:  the  tero  adding  emphasis  to  the  statement.  s  V.  M.  15. 

n  ejjicere.  i  V.  M.  22.  J  telle.  k  properare.  I  ci/iua. 

m  '  whither  they   wish,'  velle.  n  de  multd  nocte  vigilare.  °  in- 

donnire.  p  colere.    I.  339.  *»  •  you  by  Hercules  often  rousing  mo  ' 

r  corrigere. 

Exercise  51. 

Cato  in  Sicily  was  refitting  his  old  ships  of  war*  and  command* 
ing  the  states  to  provide  new  ones  for  him.b  These  [objects]  he 
pursued  with  great  zeal.  In  Lucania  and  Bruttium,6  he,  by 
means  of  his  lieutenants,  raised  troopsd  of  Roman  citizens :  and 
required*  from  the  states  of  Sicily  a  certain  amount/  of  infantry 
and  cavalry.  When  these  [preparations]  were  almost  completed, 
being  informed  of  Curio's  arrival,  he  complained  in  an  address  to 
his  troops,s  that  he  was  abandoned  and  betrayed  by  Pompey,  who> 
though  utterly  unprepared*  in  every  respect,*  had  begun)  an  unne- 
cessary war ;  and  [when]  questioned  in  the  senate  by  him  and 
other  [senators],  had  asserted6'  that  he  hadk  every  thing  ready  and 
in  good  order*  forl7)  a  war. 

»  naves  longce.  b  'was  commanding  new  [ones]  to  the  states.'      So 

impevarefrumentum  civilalibus,  &c.  c  In  Lucanis  Bruttiisque.     The  name 

of  the  people  (Lucani)  is  often  thus  used,  where  we  use  the  name  of  the  terri- 
tory, d  delectus  habere.  «  cxigere.  f  numenis.  e  in  conewne* 
Use  the  prccs.  historicum.  h  imparatissimus  followed  by  prep.  ab.  '  all 
»hing«.'            I  suacipere.            k  Diff.  47.            *  apta  et  paratb. 

Exercise  52 

Having  given  [him]  these  instructions,*  he  arrives  at  Canusiuin 
with  six  legions,  three  of  them  being  composed  of  veteran  soldiers,* 
the  rest  such  as  he  had  formed6  out  of  the  new  levies,  and  filled 
upd  on,$  his  march  :  for  he  had  sent  DomitiusV  cohorts  straight* 
from  Corfinium  to  Sicily.  He  found  that  the  consuls  were  gone* 
to  Dyrrachium  with  a  great  part  of  the  army,  and  that  Lucceius 
was  remaining  at  Brundusium  with  twenty  cohorts ;  nor  could  it 


204  exercises  53,  54. 

be  found  out  [for]  certainty,  whether  he  had  remained  there  for 
the  purpose  of  holding11  Brundusium,  that*  he  might  the  more 
easily  remain  master  of  the  whole  Hadriatic,  or  had  [merely! 
stopped  there  for16  want  of  ships. 

a  mandata.  b  '  three  [of   them]  veteran  [legions].'  veteranu* 

e  dilectus  (sing.).  d  complere.  e  Domhianus  (adj.).  t  protinus 

l proficiaci.  h  obtinere.  i  What  word  for  '  that?' 

Exercise  53. 

When  the  excited*  tody  of  young  menh  were  rashly  taking  arms; 
and  endeavouring  to  make  a  hostile  attack  upon*  the  unoffendingd 
Thessalians,  it  was  I  who  compelled  the  senate  to  repress  by 
its  authority  the  violence  of  [these]  striplings :  it  wasI0)  I  who 
strictly  charged6  the  quaestors  not  to  supply  moneyf  for  the  pay- 
ments [of  the  troops]  :  it  was10)  I  who,  (p)  when  the  arsenal11  was 
broken  open,  withstood  [the  multitude],  and  prevented7  [any]  arms 
from  being  carried  out.  And  thus  you  know  that  it  was10;  by  my 
exertions,  and  mine  alone ,'  that  an  unnecessary  war  was  not  brought 
about. 

a  concitare.  b  juvenius.  c  manu  lacessere.  d  quietus.  e  interminar 
(Ter.  followed  by  ne).  f  sumptus.         £  stipendium.         h  armamentarium. 

I  '  by  my  exertions  [of  me]  alone.'  Exertions,  opera,  ce,  sing.  (Comp.  Cic.  solius 
trim  meum  peccatum;  in  unius  me  a  salute.) 

Exercise  54. 

See  how  uncertain7  and  variable7  the  condition1  of  life  is ;  how 
unsettled5  and  inconstant  [a  thing]  fortune  ;  whatc  unfaithfulness' 
there  is  in  friends ;  whatc  simulations3  suited  to  times  and  circum- 
stances,* what'  desertiond  [even]  of  our  nearest  [friends]  in  [our] 
dangers,  what0  cowardice. d  There  will,  there  will,  I  say,r  be  a4 
time,  and  the  day  will  comes  sooner  or  later ^  when  you  will  miss' 
the  affection  of  a  most  friendly,  the  fidelity  of  a  most  worthy) 
person,  and  the  high  spiritk  of  the  bravest  man  that  ever  lived.* 

a  ratio.  How  to  make  uncertain  and  variable  emphatic,  see  p.  236,  16  (b). 
b  vagus.  c  Caut.  21.  d  Plural.  e  aptus  ad  tempus.  t  prqfecto 

(assuredly,  verily).  &  lucescere  (will  dawn,   i.  e.  begin  to  shine). 

*  aliquando.  »  desiderare.     In  this  construction  the  subj.  present  is  to  be 

used  :  not  the  fut.  indicative.  J  gravissimus.  k  animi  magnitude. 

On  the  position  of  the  two  genitive3  see  Introd.  27.  l '  The  bravest  man 

that  ever  lived,'  Un:is  post  homines  natosjortisrimu*  vir. 


exercues  55,  56,  57.  295 

Exercise  55. 

Are  you  trying  to  find*  a  new  method  of  governing  the  state  1 
Why,b  you  cannot  discover0  a  better  [one]  than  [that  which]  you 
have  received  from  your  forefathers.  Are  you  trying  to  find  out 
at  a  vast  outlay*  how  you  may  not  paya  taxes  ?  Why,b  you  can- 
not by  taking  counsel  (pi-)  increase  the  resourcesf  of  the  treasury, 
which  you  desire  [to  increase].  Are  you  trying  to  find  out  how 
you  may  spare  men  [who  are]  polluted  by  crime  ?26>  Why,b  you 
cannot,  by  pardoning  the  guilty/  secureh  the  safety  of  the  inno- 
cent. 

*  quecrtrt.  b  at.  «  V.  M.  2.  &  l  by  making  very  great 
Outlays.'  sumptus.  e  conferre.  (opes.  e  luxentes.  kcustodire 
(guard). 

Exercise  56. 

Even  the  bravest  men  have  not,  except  in  extreme  necessity, 
flung  their  lives  away*  for  the  sake  of  avoiding  some*  disgrace  :  as 
[for  instance]  P.  Crassus  Mucianus,  [when]  conductingb  the  war 
against  Aristonlcus  in  Asia,  being  taken  [prisoner]  between  Elaea 
and  Smyrna  by  [some]  Thracians,  of  whom  that  prince'  had  a 
large  force  in  his  fortified  towns,d  that  he  might  not  fall  into  his 
hands,'  escaped  [this]  disgrace  by  a  voluntary  death.*  For  he  is 
reported  to  have  thrusts  his  riding-stick^  into  the  eye  of  one  of  the 
barbarians  :  who  [then],  enraged'  by  the  violence  of  the  pain, 
stabbed  Crassus  with  his  dagger  in  the  side, J  and  [thus],  whilst* 
he  avenged  himself,  delivered  a  Roman  general  from  the  dis. 
graceful  violation*  of  his  dignity."1 

*  '  sought  death  voluntarily,'  mortem  ullro  opptttre.  Some,  1. 392.  b  gerert 
(bellum  cum).  c  Only  a  pronoun.  d  '  had  a  great  number  in  garrison. 

in  dilionem  ejus  pertenire.                t  arcessita  ratio  mortis.  e  dirigere. 

k  a  riding  stick,  virga,  qua  aliquis  ad  rcgendum  equum  utitur.  The  tense  of 

the  verb,  of  course,  to  be  altered  according  to  circumstances.  iaccendi. 

\  *  stabbed  (confodere)  Crassus' s  side  with  his  dagger.'        k  I.  509.  I  turpitudo. 
*  majestas:  which  Cic.  attributes  to  consuls,  judges,  &c. 

Exercise  57. 

It  was  ever  my  persuasion,*  thatb  all  friendships  should  be  main- 
tained6 with  a  religious  exactness,6  but  especially^  those  which' 


296  exercises  58,  59. 

are  renewed?  after27)  a  quarrel  :h  because*  in  friendships  [hith 
erto]  uninterrupted)  a  failurek  of  duty  is  easily  excused >  by  a 
plea™  of  inadvertency,  or,  tol)  put  a  worse  construction™  upon  it,oi 
negligence :  [whereas]  if,  after  a  reconciliation,0  any  [new]  offence 
he  given,?  it  does  not  pass  for  negligent,  but  wilful:*  and  is  not 
*knputed21  to  inadvertency,  but  to  perfidy. 

*  II '  /have  always  thought.'  b  Connect  these  two  clauses  by  quum — turn 

Jboth — end).  c  tueri.  d  'with  the  greatest  scrupulousness  (religio)  and 

fidelity.'  e  '  In  quum— him,  the  turn  is  often  strengthened  by  vero,  certe  etiam, 

prcecipue,  maxime.'  f  I.  476.  S  reconciliari  in  gratiam.  h  inimicitice,  pi. 
i  propterea  quod.  i  integer.  k  prcetermiitere.  1  defendere. 

m  excusatio.  n  gravius  interpretari.  °  reditus  in  gratiam. 

P  'any  thing  is  committed.'     I.  389 — 91.  i  •  is  not  thought  neglected,  but 

violated.' 

Exercise  58. 

Having  called  together  his  men  for  the  purpose  of  addressing 
them,*  'Know,'  he  says,  'that  in  a  very  few  days  from  this  time,b 
the  king  will  be  here"  with  ten  legions,  thirty  thousand  horse,  a 
hundred  thousand  light-armedd  [troops],  and6  three  hundred 
elephants.  Therefore  let  certain  persons  cease  to  inquire  or 
*  imagine  [any  thing]  beyond  [this],  and  let  them  believe  me 
who  have  certain  knowledge  :f  or,  assuredly,?  I  will  order  tiien. 
(p)  to  be  put  on  boardh  the  oldest  vessels  [in  the  service],  and  tc 
be  carried  to  whatever  country  the  wind  may  happen  to  take 
them.1 

a  ( to  an  assembly.'  ad  concionem  vocare,  advocare,  or  convocare. — incvueionem 
advocare.  (M.  L.  4.)  b  The  pron.  hie.  in  agreement  with  '  days.'     In  I.  311 

paucis  his  diebua  is  given  for  '  a  few  days  ago.'  It  may  also  mean  '  within  a  few 
days  ;'  the  hie  marks  nearness  to  the  speaker  (i.  e.  to  the  time  of  his  speaking), 
on  either  side.  c  adesse.  d  levis  armatures.  e  Diff.  88.  f  SeA 

above,  Ex.  3,  c.  compertum  habere.  Compare  perspectum  habere,  absolutum  haberf 
I.  364.  s  out  quidem :  the  quidem  adding  emphasis  to  the  aut.  h  V.  M.  2; 
i  '  by  any  wind  whatever  into  any  lands  whatever.'    quicunque. 

Exercise  59. 

On,6)  his  approach  being  announced,  L.  Plancus,  who  *com« 
manded  the  legions,  being  compelled  by  the  critical  state  of  affairs,* 
takes  [a  position  on]  a  rising  ground,  and  draws  up  his  army  in 
two  divisions1  facing  different  ways,e  that  he  may  not  (414)  bo 


EXERCISE   60.  297 

.surrounded  by  the  cavalry.  Thus,  though  his  forces  were  infe* 
rior,d  he  kept  his  ground6  against  furious  charges  [both]  of  the 
legions  and  of  the  cavalry.  When  (p)  the  cavalry  were  already 
engaged,  both  parties  f  behold  at  a  distancef  the  standards  of  two 
legions,  which  V.  Attius  had  sent  from  the  upper  bridge  to  the 
support*  of  our  troops,  anticipating  what  really  occurred ,h  that*  the 
generals  of  the  opposite  party  would  use  the  opportunity  unex- 
pectedly offered  them,  to  fall  upon  our  men.  By  the  approach 
of  these  (r)  legions  the  battle  was  broken  off,J  and  each  general 
marched  back  his  legions  to  his  camp. 

a  neccssaria  res.  b  pars.  c  divcrsust  in  agreement  with  acies. 

*  ■  h;iving  engaged  (congredi)  with  an  unequal  number.'  e  sudincrc  (to 

rapport :  to  bear  without  yielding).     Use  the  historical  present.  (  V.  M.  24. 

f  "ubsidium.    Use  the  construction  I.  242.  h  « suspecting  [that]  that  would 

bo  which  happened,'  accidere  or  contingere.    Why'?    M.L.I.  i  '  Ut  is 

sometimes  used  (with  subj.)  as  explanatory  of  a  demonstrative  pronoun, 

where  quod  might  rather  have  been  expected,  or  the  ace.  and  inf.  J  Pres. 

nistor.— dirimere. 

Exercise  60. 

Whilst  he  was  preparing  and  carrying  out"  these  [plans],  he 
sends  his  lieutenant,  C.  Fabius,  before  him  into  Spain,  with  three 
legions,  which  he  had  put  into  winter-quarters  at  Narbo  and  its 
neighbour Jwod  ;b  and  directs  that  the  passes*  of  the  Pyrenees 
should  be  quickly  seized,  which  L.  Valerius  f  was  then  occu- 
pying with  his  troops  :d  the  other  legions,  which  were  in  more 
remote  winter-quarters,*  he  orders  to  follow.  Fabius,  according 
to  his  instructions,*  having  made  great  despatch,  clears  the  pass,x 
and  proceeded  by  forced  marches  against  Valerius's  army. 

*  administrarc.  b  circum  ea  loca.  c  saltus.     So  saltus   Ther- 

mopylarum.  (Liv.)  d  prtesidia.  e  'which  were-in- winter-quarters 

(hiemare)  further-oil'.'  f  '  as  had  been  commanded.'  s  presidium  tx 

»aiiu  dejicere .  dejicere  in  this  sense  is  a  technical  term  of  military  science. 


ON  THE  TENSES  IN  A  LETTER. 

1.  It  is  a  peculiarity  in  Roman  letter- writing,  that  the  writer 
puis  himself  (as  it  were)  in  the  time  when  the  letter  will  be  re- 
caved,  and  thus  speaks  of  what  he  is  doing,  as  what  he  was  doing  : 

13* 


898  EXERCISE    61. 

and  so  uses  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  instead  of  the  present  and 
perfect. 

2.  Thus  :  *  I  h  a  v  e  nothing  to  write,'  nihil  hah  eh  am  quod 
scriherem  :  'I  have  heard  no  news,'  nihil  novi  audieram. 
And  this  extends  to  the  adverhs  :  instead  of  i  yesterday,'  we  find 
4  the  day  hefore.3 

3.  To  see  that  these  are  the  tenses  the  receiver  would  use,  sup 
pose  him  relating  the  substance  of  such  a  letter  :  turn  quum  Cicero 
hanc  epistolam  scripsit,  nihil  hah  eh  at  quod  scriheret,  neque 
enim  novi  quidquam  audier at,  et  ad  omnes  mcas  epistolas  r e - 
scripserat  pridie,  fyc. 

4.  But  general  truths  and  statements  that  are  not  made  rela- 
tively to  the  t^me  of  writing  stand  in  the  usual  tenses  (e.  g.  ego  te 
maximi  et  feci  semper  etfacio):  nor  does  the  use  of  the 
imperf.  and  pluperf.  always  occur  where  it  might  stand. 

Exercise  61. 

Although  I  have  nothing  to  write,*  and  moreover  f  am  possessed 
}y  a27  strange  unwillingnessb  to  write*'  [at  all],  yet  I  am  unwil- 
ling that  this  good-for-nothingc  [lad  of]  mine  should  go  to  your 
neighbourhoodd  without  [any]  letters  of  mine  to  you.  I  love  you 
nore  every  day,e  because  I  am  *  persuaded  that  you'  flovef  your 
studies^  in  the  same  way.  But  I  would  wish  you  to  write  to  me 
an  accurate  statement*  with  what  *  author  you  are  now  engaged, 
whether  Cicero  or  Terence,  or  as'  1  would  rather  [have  it],  with 
both  ?  You  ought  also  to  take  pains}  to  employ,  in  what  you 
writek  to  me,  the  phrasesi  which  you  have  observed  in  their 
works  :  that  this™  itself  may  be  a  proof"  to  me  of  the  *  accuracy 
with  which  you  read  them.0     Farewell.     Tibur,  Aug.  28. 

*  Use  the  favorite  form  nihil  est  quod  (477).  t>  odium.  c  verbero  (onis) 

*  What  adv.  expresses  '  to  where  you  are,'  '  to  your  neighbourhood?'     I.  387. 

•  Distinguish  between  quolidie,  indies.  Which  is  asedin  both  senses?  I.  69,  t. 
f  To  be  expressed  by  the  passive  voice,  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  the  two 
iccusatives  would  occasion,  'amuse  yourself,'  oblectare.  See  Dod.  oblectatio. 
f  litterarum  studia.  h  '  *accurately.'  i  '  which.'  )  dare  operam 
(followed  by  ut).  *  shall  write— shall  have  observed  (notare) :  the  conduct 
being  recommended  as  what  should  be  followed  in  future.  i  loquendi 
genera.  m  Express  res,  a  Jidem facer e  cuj us  rei.  °  'of  your  *accu- 
racy  in  reading  them.' 


exercises  62,  63.  209 

Exercise  62. 

If  1  had  as  often*  encountoredb  toils  and  dangers  against'  you 
and  my  country,  and  our  household-gods,  as  I  have  from  the  be- 
ginning6  of  my  manhood  f  scattered  by  my  arms  your  most  wicked 
enemies,  and  fwond  safety  for  you,  you  could  not  have  decided- 
any  thing  more  against  me  in  my  absence,  O  Conscript  Fathers, 
than  you  have  hitherto  been  doing.  You  first'  hurried  me  off, 
though  not  yet  of  the  legal  age,s  to  a  most  cruel  war,  and  thenf 
destroyed  me,  with  my  most  deserving  army,  by  hunger,  the  most 
wretched  of  all  deaths.37  Was  this  the  hope  with  which  the  Ro- 
man people  sent  out  her  children  to  war  ?  are  these  the  rewards 
for  our  wounds,  and  for1*  our  so  often  shedding  our  blood  for  our 
country  ?  Being  tired  of  writing  and  sending  messengers,  I  have 
exhausted  all  my  private  resources  and  expectations,  whilsth  you 
all  the  time  have  in  three  years  sent  the  pay  of  scarcely  one  year.' 

a  '  so  many '  [toils,  &c.].  A  sentence  is  occasionally  arranged  in  this  not 
atrictly  accurate  way,  where  tot  refers  to  quoties.  (Thus  Cic.  pro  Balbo,  20 ;  si 
tot  consulibus  mcruisset,  quo  ties  ipse  consul  fuisset.)  '  under  my  command,' 
ductu  meo.  b  suscipere.  c  I.  179.  d  qucerere  (which  is  often  used 

of  a  successful  search :  nearly  ==  invenire).  •  To  '  do,'  when  used  in  this 

way  as  the  representative  of  a  preceding  verb  (here  to  be  doing  =  to  be  deciding), 
is  mostly/acere,  but  sometimes  agere :  e.  g.  Sail.  Cat.  52, 19.  t  First— then 

may  often  be  translated  by  turning  the  verb  with  'Jzrs/'  into  a  past  participle , 
tnus  'me,  being  hastened  away — you  destroyed,'  &c.     'To  hurry  a  man  oil", 
projicere  (if  he  be  sent  away  recklessly,  to  be  never  cared  for  afterwards). 
*  '  against  [my]  age,'  contra  attatem.  h  quum — interim,  words  often  used 

indignantly  of  conduct  that  is  a  strong  contrast  to  what  it  should  have  been, 
i  '  scarcely  one-year's  pay  has  been  given  by  you.'    One-year's,  annuus.    Pay, 
Hipcndium;  but  sumptns  when  considered  as  given  to  the  commander-in-chief 
co  *iefray  with  it  all  the  expenses  of  the  war. 

Exercise  63. 

(The  same  subject  continued.) 

By  the  immortal  gods,  is  it10  that  you  think  I  serve*  lor  a  trea- 
sury ?  or  that  I  can  have  an  army  without  provisions  and  pay  1 
I  confess  that  I  set  out  for  this  war  with  more  zeal  than  prudence  ; 
Beeing  thatb  (/>)  though  I  had  received  from  you  only  the  name 
of  general,'  I  raised  an  army  in  forty  days,  and  drove  baekd  the 
enemy,  (p)  who  were  already  hanging  over  Italy,6  from  the  Alp* 


300  EXERCISE    64. 

into  Spain.  Overf  these  [mountains]  I  opened*  a  ditierenth  road 
from  [that  which]  Hannihal  [opened],  and  [one]  more  convenient 
for  us.  I  recovered  Gaul,  the  Pyrenees,  Laletania,  the  Indigetes ; 
and  with  newly-raised'  troops,  and  much  inferior  [in  number], 
stood]  the  first  attack  of  the  victorious11  Sertorius  :  and  [then]  spent 
the  winter  in  camp,  amongst  the  most  savage  enemies  ;  not  in  the 
towns,  or  with  any  such  indulgence  to  my  troops  as  a  regard  to  my 
own  popularity  with  them  would  have  suggested.^ 

a  prcestare  vicem  (alicujus  rci).  b  quippe  qui:  here  with  indie.     1.  482. 

c  ' of  a  command,'  imperium.  d  summovere.  e  in  cervicibus  jam 

Italia  agere.      Nearly   so:  nunc  in   cervicibus   rumus,    ' are  immediately 
upon  them  :'  bellum  ingens  in  c  ervicibus  eral,  ' impended :'  both  Liv. 
f  per.  S  V.  M.  7.  h  '  different  from,'  alius  atque.  i  novus. 

i  sustinere.  k  ex  ambitione  med.  The  kind  of  ambitio  meant,  is  the  courting 
popularity  with  an  army  by  allowing  it  such  indulgences  as  comfortable  wintei 
quarters,  &c. 


Exercise  64. 

{The  same  subject  continued.) 

Why  should  I  go  on  to  enumerate*  the  battles  [I  have  fought], 
my  winter  expeditions,  or  the  towns  (p)  that  I  have  retaken  oi 
destroyed  ?  since  facts  are  stronger1*  than  words.  The  takinge  of 
the  enemy's  camp  at  the  Sucro,c  the  battle  at  the  Durius,d  the  (p) 
utter  destruction6  of  C.  Herennius,  the  general  of  our  enemies, 
with  Valentia,  and  his  whole  army,  are  apparent  enough  to  you  • 
and  for  these  (r)  [benefits]  you  give  us  in  return, s  ye  grateful 
Fathers,  want  and  famine.  And  thus  the  condition  of  my  army 
and  that  of  my  enemies  is  the  same  :  for  pay  is  given  to  neither* 
[of  them] :  and  each,  [if]  ||  victorious,  may  come  into  Italy. 
[Wherefore]  I  advise  and  beseech  you  to'  attend  to  this  (r),  and 
not  compel  me,  by  my  necessities,  to  consult  my  own  interests 
ipart  from  those  of  the  state.) 

a  'Why  should  I  after  this  (dein,  for  delude)  enumerate?  b  'the  thing 

{ring.)  has  more  weight.'  plus  valere.             c  The  Xucar.  d  The  Douro. 

•  Use  participles.  I.  359.               f  clarus.           s  redderc.  u  '  is  given  tn 
ueither.'               »  I.  75.                f  privaiim. 


exercises  G5,  66.  30] 

Exercise  05. 

(The  same  subject  continued.) 

Either  I  (pi.)  or  Scrtorius  have  laid  waste  the  whole  of  hither 
Spain,  and  cut  ojf  all  its  inhabitants  y*  except  the  maritime  cities, 
which  [are  however  only]  an  additional  burden  and  expense  to 
us.  Last  year  [indeed]  Gaul  maintained0  the  army  of  Metellua 
with  money  and  corn,  but  now,  in  consequence  of  a  lad  harvest,* 
that  [country]  hardly  supports  itself'  [For  myself]  I  have  ex- 
haustedf  not  only  my  private  fortune,  but  also  my  credit.  You 
[alone]  remain :  and,  unless  you  (r)  succour  us,  the  army,  and 
with  it  the  whole  Spanish  war,  will  removes  itselfyVom  this 
country*  into  Italy,  J  against  my  pill,  indeed,  but  according  to  my 
predictions.' 

*  'have  wasted  hither  Spain  to  extermination,'  ad  interns-^ionem  vastart. 
b  Express  by  the  adv.  ultro  (properly  meaning,  'further  on').  See  I.  237. 
6  atere.  d  malisfructibus.  e  •  itself  hardly  gets  on.'    agitare. 

f  conmimere.  s  transgredi.  i»  '  hence.'  i  '  I  being  unwilling 

and  [yet]  foretelling.' 


Exercise  66. 

Herennius,  since  his  rear*  was  pressed  by  the  cavalry,  and  he 
saw  the  enemy  before  him,  (p)  when  he  had  rcnchedb  a  certain 
hill,  halted  there.  From  this  he  despatched0  four  cohorts  of  tar 
geteersd  to  the  highest  of  all  the  hills  in  sight;9  aud  orders  them  tc 
make  all  possible  haste  to  take  possession  of  this, r  with  the  intention 
of  following9  them  with  all  his  troops,  and,  changing  his  route, 
reach  Octogesa  by  the  hills.  As  the  targeteers  were  making  for 
this  hill  in  an  oblique  line,  the  cavalry  of  Marius  (p)  saw  [themj 
and  charged  the  cohorts;  \v!i0h  did  not  stand  for  a  single  moment 
against  the  impetuosity  of  the  cavalry,  but  (p)  were  surrounded 
oy  them,  and  all  cut  to  pieces  in  the  sight  of  both  armies. 

*  rwrisaimum  agmen.  b  nanoisci.  c  m  titer e.    Use  t)v>  histori- 

an present.  d  cetraii.  •  '  to  a  hill  which  was  the  highest  of  nil 

In  bight.'  Dod.  rndere  (4).  f  magno  curau  amcUatoa  occuparc. 

r  *  with  that  intention,  that  he would  follow.'  &  'nor  did  tho 

targeteers  stand,'  &c. 


SU2  exercises  67,  69. 

Exercise  67. 

I  have  received  your  three3,0  letters :  but  in  the  last  there  were 
some  [parts]  so  carelessly  written,  that  it  was  plain*  you  were 
thinking  of  something  else  when  you  wrote  it.  I  will  show  you 
these  [faults],  when  I  come  to  your  part  of  the  world;*  and  shall 
pull  your  ear,c  that  you  may  be  for  the  future  more  attentive 
when  you  write, A  and  avoid  at  least  such  blunders,6  as  even  little 
hoys*  would  avoid,  who  are  learning  their  accidence.*  Do  not, 
however,  be  distressed  by  this  admonition  of  mine :  for  I  do  not 
wish  to  ftake  away  anyh  [thing]  by  it  from  your  cheerfulness, 
but  f  to  add  [somewhat]  to  your  attention.  Adieu.  Tibur,  23 
Sept. 

a  '  it  is  plain,'  facile  constat :  i  to  be  thinking  of  something  else,'  aliud  agere, 
b  '  to  where  you  are :'  to  be  expressed  by  an  adv.  derived  from  iste,  the  demon- 
Btrative  of  the  second  person.  I.  387.  c  auriculam  pervellere. 

A  '  in  writing.'  e  error  or  soloecismus  (a  solecism).  t  puerulus 

g  '  to  be  learning  one's  accidence,'  prirnis  Uteris  imbui.  h  I.  389-r391 

Exercise  68. 

Your  letter  gave  me  much  pleasure,*-  as  every  thing  [does]  that 
proceedsb  from  you,  although  you  had  committed  manyc  [faults] 
in  it.  But  as  lisping  childrend  are  listened  to  with  delight'  by 
fathers,  and  even  their  very  mistakes  are  a  pleasure  to  them,  so 
this  your  infancy  of  letter -writing*  is  delightful  to  me.  I  send  you 
it*  back  corrected  by  my  own  hand.  For  so,  you  know,  we 
agreed. h  Do  you,  dear,  dear^  Alexander,  pursue  with  spirit]  the 
path,  to  which  your  natural  disposition  leads  you,  and  which  1 
have  always  exhorted  and  urged  you  to  follow.*  I  have,  by  my 
reportJ  [of  you],  raised  great  expectations  in  the  minds  of  your 
parents  :m  and  you  must  now  take  all  possible  pains11  that  neither 
I  nor  they  fmay  be  disappointed0  in  them  (r).  Adieu.  Tibur, 
July  7,  1570. 

a  '[was]  H  sweet  to  me.'  b  prqficisci  (ab  aliquo).  c  By  multapeccart 

i  fWcli.  e  libcnter.  f  in  Uteris.  e  '  it  itself.'  h  '  We  agree  [to 

ilo  any  thing],'  convenit  intei  nos.  i  dulcissime  ac  suavissime.  )  magno 

■mimo.  k  'and  I  have  always  been  your exhorter and  impeller.'  1  tcsti- 

9ionium.  m  magnam  spem  (alicujus)  apud  (aliquem)  concilare.  n  amn\ 

turd,  gc  studio prwidere.  °  spesfallit  aliquem. 


CAPTIONS 


i.  (a)  Take  care  not  to  translate  the  English  inf.,  when  it  expresses  a  purpose, 
by  the  Latin  infinitive.— To  make  out  whether  the  infin.  expresses  u 
purpose,  try  whether  you  can  substitute  for  it  'in  order  that*  or  'that. 

(b)  The  infin.  after  'hare,'1  'is,'  is  to  be  translated  by  the  part,  in  due.  with 

the  proper  tense  of  esse. 

(En*  )  \  * llate  sometmng  to  d°- 

(  There  is  something  for  me  to  do. 
(Lat.)      Something  is  to  be  done  by  me. 

(c)  '  There  is  something  for  me  to  do?  may  also  mean,  there  is  eomethipg, 
which  I  may  do,'  est  aliquid,  quod   a  gam. 

2.  In  translating  'ago'  by  abhinc,  remember,  (1)  that  it  must  precede  the 
numeral ;  (2)  that  the  numeral  must  be  a  cardinal,  not  an  ordinal,  nu- 
meral ;  and  (3)  that  the  accusative  is  more  common  than  the  abl. 
(a)  Hence  abhinc  annos  guatuordecim  is  right ;  tertio  abhinc  anno,  quarto 
decimo  abhinc  die,  doubly  wrong ;  tribus  abhinc  annis,  or  tres  abhinc 
annos,  wrong. 

2  Take  care  not  ro  translate  'from'  by  'a'  or  'ab'  in  the  following  con- 
structions : — 

(1)  To  derive  or  receive  pleasure,  pain,  profit,  &c.,from,  capcre  voluptatem, 

dolorem,  fructum,  desiderium  ex  (not  ab)  aliqua  re. 

(2)  To  hear  from  any  body,  audire  ex  aliquo. 

(3)  •  From  [being]  such — becomes  so  and  so.' — ex. 

(4)  From  such  a  district,  town,  &c.  (it  being  a  man's  birth-place  or  resi- 
dence)— ex. 

(5)  To  recover/rom.  a  disease,  convalescere  exmorbo. 

(6)  To  return  from  a  journey,  redire,  reverti  ex  itinere. 

(7)  From,  =  '  on  account  of,'  propter.     '  From  their  hatred  against  any 

body.' 

(8)  To  fling  or  throw  oneself  from  a  wall,  se  de  muro  dejicere  (Cees.) :  se&r 
muro  praecipitare  (Cic.). 

(9)  From,  =  out  of ,  ex. 

1.  When  a  substantive  is  followed  by  a  relative  clause  which  defines  it,  be 
careful  not  to  omit  the  demonstrative  is,  ea,  id,  or  ille  (if  there  is  empha- 
sis), with  the  substantive,  if  a  particular  thing  is  meant.  To  determine 
this,  try  whether  you  cannot  substitute  'that '  for  '  a'  or  'the.' 

(a)  Thus  :  '  the  oration  which  he  delivered,'  Ac.  (  =  that  particular  oratioo 
which  he  delivered),  ea  oratio,  quam  habuit,  Ac. 

(6)  So,  when  a  substantive  is  defined  by  a  relative  adverb,  the  'a  or  'the' 
is  to  be  translated  by  a  pron.    Thus  : 


304  CAUTIONS. 

• 
(Eng.)  There  will  be  a  day,  when,  &c. 

(Lat.)   There  will  be  that  day,  when,  &c.  (quum). 
(Eng.)  The  day  will  come,  when,  &c. 

(Lat.)  Tluxt  day  will  come,  when,  &c.  (quum).  [Comp.  Caution  13. 
G.  Be  very  careful  not  to  translate  the  English  infinitive  after  a  substantia  01 
adjective,  by  the  Lat.  infinitive,  unless  you  have  authority  for  it.  Al- 
ways consider  what  the  relation  is,  in  which  the  infinitive  stands.  Can 
it  be  translated  by  a  gerund  in  dil  by  ad  with  the  gerundive  (a  partici- 
ple in  dus)  1  by  a  relative  clause,  &c.  1 
Thus :  A  desire  to  pray,  ~  a  desire  of  praying. 

A  knife  to  cut  my  bread  with,  "=  (1)   a  knife  for  cutting  my 
bread  ;  (2)  a  knife,  with  which  I  may  cut  my  bread. 
Obs.  The  for  cutting  my  bread''  will  not  in  Latin  depend  on  knifc 
but  on  the  verb :  e.  g.  I  borrowed  a  knife  for  cutting  my  bread  with,  = 
'fo  r  the  purpos  e  of  cutting  my  bread,  I  borrowed  a  knife.' 

6.  Take  care  not  to  translate  •  assert '  =  '  affirm,'  by  asserere,  but  by  qffirmare, 

confirmare,  dicere,  docere,  pronuntiare,  &c. ;  or,  if  followed  by  a  not  or 
other  negative,  negare. 

7.  Take  care  not  to  translate  'honour'  by  honor  or  honos,  when  it  means  not 

1  an  honour '  (i.  e.  external  mark  of  respect),  but  '  the  inward  principle 
of  honour'  (honestas) ;  or  'integrity,'  '  trustworthiness'  (fides). 

8.  From  nemo,  let  me  never  see     t  but  nullius  and  nullo :  or  (after  nega- 
Neminis  or  nemine  ;  (      tives)  cujusquam,  quoquam. 

9.  When  a  clause  that  follows  another  in  English,  is  to  precede  it  in  Latin,  it  is 

often  necessary  to  place  in  it  a  word  from  the  preceding  sentence. 
Thus:  *  Alexander  was  blamed  |  because  he  indulged  in  drinking.' 
'  Because  Alexander  indulged  in  drinking,  he  was  blamed.' 
(a)    This  is  especially  the  case,  when  a  pronoun  in  the  second  clause  refera 
to  a  substantive  in  the  first. 
0.  From  our  having  hardly  any  power  of  altering  the  order  of  words  in  a  sen- 
tence, it  is  very  difficult  to  give  emphasis  to  an  oblique  case  without 
placing  it  in  a  separate  sentence  with  the  verb  to  be.    Thus :  'I  desire 
something'   very  much,    (the  ( something '  being  emphatic)  would 
become :  '  there  is  something,  that  I  desire  very  much.'     Hence 

f^T  In  a  sentence  beginning  with  '  it  is '  or  '  it  was '  before  '  that'  the 
Ht  is'  or  'it  w<is'  is  omitted,  and  the  sentence  with  'that'  made  a  prin- 
cipal sentence. 

(Eng.)  It  is  the  manufacturers,  that  I  complain  of. 
(Lat.)    1  complain  of  the  manufacturers.* 
(a)  So  in  a  sentence  beginning  with  '  it  is  but '  or  '  it  was  but,'  and  followed 
by  'that,'  &c< 

(Eng.)  It  was  but  very  slowly  that  he  recovered. 
(Lat.)    He  did  not  recover  but  ( =  except,  nki)  very  slowly, 
i  1  •  The  boy  has  but  a  stupid  head, 

Who  always  for  a    but '  puts  sed 

*  Instead  of  'that,'  which  is  here  a  relative,  who  or  which  may  occur.     lIt  is 

the  farmers  of  whom  I  complain.' 


CAUTIONS.  305 

Or  at :  for  other  meanings  '  but '  has  got : 

1  Only'  '  except,'  'at  least;'  or  'who'  with  'not' 

(1)  '  Stay  but  one  day  '  =  stay  only  one  day  (solum  or  modo). 

(2)  '  Do  6uZ  stay  '  =  a*  Zcas*  (or  a/  o^Z  events)  stay  (saltern). 

(3)  '  Nobody  6uZ  Caesar'  =  nobody  except  Cassar  (nisi  or  prater). 

'4)  '  There  is  nobody  but  thinks '  =  there  is  nobody  wlw  does  no/  think 
(quin  or  cm  non). 

(5)  '  Not  to  doubt  but  or  but  that'  .  .  .  -~  non  dubitare  quin,  &c. 

'2.  '  ZVo'  before  another  adjective,  as  in  'a  man  of  no  great  learning,'  must  be 

translated  by  non,  not  nullus. 
11.  *  The,'  when  it  relates  to  something  that  preceded,  is  often  to  be  translated 
by  a  demonstrative  pronoun.    For  instance,  if  it  had  been  mentioned 
that  a  day  had  been  fixed,  if  it  were  afterwards  stated  that  •  the  day '  ar- 
rived, it  must  be  'that  day'  in  Latin. 

55*  Hence,  when  '  the '  means  a  particular  thing  before-mentioned, 
it  must  be  translated  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun.  Or,  in  other  words, 
when  for  'the'  we  might  substitute  'that,'  it  must  be  translated  by  the 
demonstrative  pronoun.  [Compare  Caution  4.]* 
.4  '  Tliat,'  in  a  clause  following  a  comparative  with  quam,  or  alius,  malle,  &c.t 
is  not  translated. 
(Eng.)  I  had  rather  support  my  country's  cause  than  that  of  a  privato 

man. 
(Lat.)    Patriae  causam  malo,  quam  privati  sustinere. 
.6.  Take  care  not  to  translate  'of  by  a  gen.,  in  the  following  constructions.— 
(a)  To  deserve  well  of  any  body,  bene  mereri  de  aliquo. 

(6)  To  complain  of  any  thing,  queri  de  aliqua  re. 

(c)  To  be  made  of  any  thing,  factum  esse  ex  aliqua  re. 

(d)  A  book  of  mine,  liber  mens. 

(e)  How  many  of  us,  three  hundred  of  us,  &c.    See  Pr.  Intr.  Pt.  I.  174, 
175. 

.6.  Take  care  not  to  translate  'on'  or  'upon'  by  super,  in  the  following  con- 
structions : — 

(1)  To  lavish,  &c.  —  upon  any  body,  conferre  —  in  aliquem. 

(2)  To  do  any  thing  on  his  march,  in  itinere. 

(3)  To  sit  on  a  throne,  in  solio  sedere. 

(4)  On  this  being  known,   ) ,  ^  bd      ^         ,  ^  ^ 
Upon ,    > 

(5)  To  write  on  a  subject,  scribere  de  (sometimes  super)  aliqud,  re. 

(6)  On  descrying  the  troops,  '  the  troops  being  descried,'  abl.  aba. 

7.  Take  care  not  to  translate  'for'  by  pro,  in  the  following  constructions  i — 
(1)  For  many  reasons,  multis  de  causis. 
For  which  reason,  qua  de  causa.     Cic. 
For  a  weighty  reason,  gravi  de  causa.     Cic. 
The  reasons  for  which,  .  .  .  causae,  propter  quas,  Ac 


♦  I  havs  inadvertently  referred  sometimes  to  this  Caation  Instead  of  to  Cau- 
ion4 


306  CAUTIONS. 

For  that  reason,  oo  earn  causam.     Cic. 
For  this  reason,  propter  hoc. 

(2)  Good  or  useful  for  any  purpose,  utilis  ad  aliquid. 
Vit  for,  aptus  or  idoneus  ad  aliquid  :  also  dative. 

(3)  For,  —  a  cause,  abl. 

(4)  For  =  concerning,  e.  g.  to  battle  for  any  thing,  dt  aliqua1  re. 

(5)  My  reason/or  not  doing  this,  causa  nonfaciendce  hujus  rei. 
.8,  Amongst,  before  the  name  of  a  nation,  amongst  whom  a  habit  prevailed,  i 

usually mpud  (not  inter) :  sometimes  'in'  witn  abl. 

19.  When  two  substantives  are  governed  by  the  same  preposition,  the  preposition 

is  repeated,  unless  the  two  substantives  are  to  form,  as  it  were,  one  com' 
plex  notion.  Hence  they  are  repeated  whenever  the  two  substantives 
are  opposed  to  each  other.     Hence  in 

(a)  et — et;  nee— nee ;  .  .  .  always  repeat  the  preposition. 

(b)  aut—aut;  vel — vel  ) 

after  nisi,  V  generally :  it  is  better,  therefore, 

after  quam  following  a  comparative,    5  to  repeat  it.* 

Thus :  et  in  bello  et  in  pace :  nee  in  bello  nee  in  pace :  in  nulla,  alia  re 
nisi  in  virtute :  in  nulla  alia  re  quam  in  virtute. 

20.  Take  care  not  to  use  apparere  when  '  appears '  =  '  seems  '  (videtur) :  nor  to 

use  videri  (but  apparere)  when  appears  =  '  is  manifest;'  or  '  makes  %ts 
appearance' 

21.  A  boy  who  is  thoughtful  is  never  perplext. 

By  •  then' a'  meaning  lat  that  time,'  and  'therefore,'  and  'next.* 
(a)  Then,  = ' at  that  time,'  turn  tunc;  =  'next,'  deinde;  =  'there- 
fore,' igitur,  &c. 

22.  'Men '  is  often  used  for  ' soldiers,'  milites.      '  His  men '  should  be  'sui,}  if 

there  is  any  reference  to  their  commander :  if  not,  milites,  '  the  soldiers.' 

23.  '  Before '  a  town  should  be  ad,  not  ante.     See  I.  457. 

24.  Choose  often  means,  to  'wish,'  to  'be  pleased,'  &c,  telle,  not  eligere,  &c. . 

e.  g.  'if  you  had  clwsen  to  do  this'  (si  voluisses). 

25.  In  modern  English  there  is  often  used  for  thither,  and  must  be  translated  by 

the  adverbs  meaning  'to  that  place'  (hue,  illuc,  &c.) 

26.  '  Crime '  is  not  crimen  (which  is  '  a  cliarge,'  '  an  accusation ')  but  scclus,  J 'aci- 

nus, &c. 

27.  Take  care  not  to  translate  after  by  post,  in  the  following  constructions : 

(1)  To  be  reconciled  after  a  quarrel,  reconciliari  in  gratiam  e  x  inimicitiis,  &c. 

(2)  Immediately  after  the  battle,  confestim  a  proelio. 

28.  Take  care  not  to  translate  in  by  'in,'  in  the  following  construction : 
(I)  It  is  written  in  Greek  authors,  scriptum  est  apud  Grcecos. 

29.  In  '  this  is  life,'  let  •  this '  with  •  life '  agree : 
Hoc  id,  or  illud,  barbarous  would  be. 

30.  '  Ought '  is  a  word  that  requires  care :  for  it  is  often  translated  by  an  im- 


*  Sometimes  a  common  preposition  preceding  the  conjunction  is  not  repeated 
A'ith  et — et:  aut — aut}  e.  g.  cum  ei  nocturno et diurno metu. 


CAUTIONS.  307 

perfect  or  fut.  indicative,  where  our  idiom  would  lead  us  to  use  the 

present. 
{a)  When  a  present  duty,  &c,  exists,  but  is  not  acted  upon,  the  imperfect  is 

often  used,  especially  when  it  is  a  general  duty.     (Madvig.  308.) 
53*  Hence,  when  'you  ought'  =  'you  ought  (but  do  not),'  use  aeoe- 

bam  or  oportebat. 
{b)  When  ouglit  refers  to  what  trill  be  right  or  proper,  when  or  after  some- 
thing has  taken  place,  use  oportebif  debebo. 
(1)  The  'after'  is  often  implied  by  an  abl.  absol.,  the  participle  being  of  the 

passive  voice. 
SI.  Remember  the  care  with  which  the  Romans  mark  boih  the  completion  ot 

every  precedent  action,  and  the  futurity  of  every  future  action, 
(a)  Remember  that  the  fut.  perf.  of  direct  becomes  the  pluperf.  subj.  in 

oblique  narration. 

32.  When  one  verb  has  'indeed?  and  the  next  'but,1  take  care  not  to  omit  the 

pronoun  in  Latin,  if  the  nom.  to  the  verb  is  a  pronoun, 
(a)  This  pronoun  should  be  followed  by  the  quidem:  if  it  is  ego,  write  equi- 
dem  for  ego  quidem* 

(Eng.)  He  did  not  indeed  laugh,  but  he  smiled. 

(Lat.)    Non  risit  ille  quidem,  sed  subrisit. 

33.  When  for  'so  that'  (introducing  a  consequence)  you  could  put  'in  such  a 

manner,  tliat,'  take  care  not  to  use  ut  only,  but  ita — ut,  placing  the  ita 
in  the  preceding  sentence. 

34.  Take  care  to  use  a  distributive  numeral  instead  of  a  cardinal  one,  with  a 

plural  noun  used  in  a  singular  sense,  as  literal,  castra,  &c'. 
fjf"  But  observe,  uni  and  terni  are  used,  not  singuli  or  trini. 


»  For  equidem,  though  probably  not  compounded  of  ego  ouidem,  is  yet  used 
where  quidem  with  the  perianal  pronoun  would  be  uaed  for  the  second  or  third 

person. 


TABLE 

or 

DIFFERENCES    OF    IDIOM, 

Sec 


English.  Latin. 

1.  AH— who  or  which,  &c.  )  Often  : —  all  —  as-many-as    (omnes  — 
All  men — who.              )  quotquot) :  which  is  strouger;  =  all 

without  exception. 

2.  This  was  not  done  till  afterwards.     This  was  done  afterwards  at  length 

(postca  demum). 
C  Nothing  is  beautiful,  but  what. 

7  Those  things  only  are  beautiful,    Those   things  at  length  (ea  demum) 
f      which.  which. 

3.  What  do  you  mean  by  a  wooden    Q,uem  tu  intelligis  murum  ligneum  1 

wall? 

4.  I  am  reproached  with  ignorance.       Ignorance  is  objected   (objicitur  or  ex- 

probratur,  which  is  stronger)  to  me. 
Participial  Substantive. 

5.  [Norn.]    Grieving.  Dolere. 

Your  sparing  the  conquered  is  a   It  is  a  great  thing,  that  you  have  spareJ 
great  thing.  the  conquered. 

Klagnum  est,  quod  yictis  pepercisti.] 
olere. 
[Se  peccati  insimulant,   quod   dcler* 
intermiserint.] 

7.  From,  with  part,  subst. : — 

(1)  To  prevent  any  thing  from  being   Prohibere — aliquid  fieri*  (rare), 
done.  n  ejiat. 

quominus  fiat. 

(2)  Either  from  thinking,  that,  &c.       Sive  eo  quod— existimar ent,&c 

(3)  He  did  it  from  remembering.  Ex  eo  quod  meminis  s  et,  &c. 

(4)  Far  from  doing  this,  &c.  Tan  turn   abest,  ut   hoc  facial 

ut,  &c. 

(5)  Not  from  despising  —  but   be-    Non  quod  aspernaretur — sed  quod,  &c 
cause,  &c. 

8.  By:— 

[The  most  usual  way  is  the  gerund 
in  do;  or  partic.  in  dus  (in 
agreement).] 


*  Principally  with  the  inf.  pass  :  ignes  fieri  incastrU  prohibit  (Caes.), 
prohibuit  migrari  Veios  (Liv.). 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


309 


English. 
By  doing  this. 
9.  In  .— 

To  be  wrong  in  thinking,  &c. 
10.  Without: — 

(1)  He  did  any  thing  without  being 
asked. 

(2)  He  went   away  without  reading 
tne  letter. 

(3)  Many  praise  poets  without  under- 
ttanding  them. 

(4)  He   never  praised  him  without 
adding,  «ic. 

(5^  Nor  ever  saw  him  without  calling 
Kim  a  fratricide. 

(6)  I  enjoy  any  thing  indeed,  but  not 
without  perceiving,  &c. 

(7)  I  enjoy  any  thing  witJwut  per- 
ceiving, &c. 

1.  To: — Generally  ad,  with  part,  in 

du8.     See  Obs.  on  For. 
12.  Through  : — By  part,   in  diis,  abl. 
of   gerund ;    or    by  ex  eo  quod 
with    subj.      See  Df.  7,  From 

(2). 

»12.  Of:— The  gerund  in  di,  or  the 
part,  in  due,  in  the  gen.,  is  the 
most  usual  form  ;  but  these  forma 
do  not  always  serve. 

(1)  '  Let  nobody  repent  o  f  h  a  v  i  n  g 
preferred  following,'  &c. 

(2)  'I  do    not  despair   of    there 
being  some  one,'  &c. 

(3)  'I    think   he  should   repent    of 
having  given  u  p  his  opinion.' 

(4)  '  They  accused  Socrates  of  cor- 
rupting,' Ac. 

(5)  'Instead  of.'     See  32. 
3.  For:— 

( 1 )  '  Pardon  me  for  writing.' 

(2)  'To   revile,    abuse  a  man    for 
having  done  any   thing.' 

(3)  'Many  reasons  occurred  to  me 
for  thinking,'  &c. 

(4)  ' I  thank  you  for  compelling 
me  to  do  this.' 

(5)  'You  are  greatly  to  blame  for 
having  done  this.' 

4    And  not. 

And  nobody,  nothing,   no  where, 
never,  no 


A  ad  hardly  any.* 


Latin. 
(Often)  l  this  being  done,'  (abl.  aba.). 

In  hoc  errare,  quod  putem,  &c 

Non  rogalus. 

He  went  away,  the  letter  not  being  rend 

(ep  is  to  Id  non  led  a). 
Many    praise    poets,    nor  understand 

them  (neque  int  elligunt). 
He  never   praised   him  so  that  he  did 

not  add  (u  t  non  adjiceret). 
Nor  ever  saw  him  but  she  called  him  a 

fratricide  (quin — c ompellaret). 
I  so  enjoy  any  thing,  t/iat  I   perceivo 

[aliqua  re  Ua.  potior,  ut  animadver- 

tam,  &c] 
I  so  enjoy  any  thing,  that  I  Jo  not  per- 
ceive (aliqua  re  Ua  potior,  ut  non 

animadvertam,  &c] 


Ne  quern  paeniteat  sequi   malui  ess, 
Non  despero  fore  aliquem,  <$*c. 

Ego  illi,  quod  de sua sententid  decea- 
sis  set,  poznitendum  censco. 

Socratem accusarunt,  quod  corrunv- 
p  er et,  fyc. 


I'snosce  mihi,  quod  s  crib  am. 
Maledicere  homini,  cur  fecerit,  <f«e. 

Multa  mihi  veniebant  in  mentem, 
quamobrem putarem,  fyc. 

Gratias  ago,  quod  me  (hoc  facere) 
coegisti. 

Magna  tua  est  culpa,  qui  hoc  feceris. 

Nor. 

Nor  any  thing,  nor  any  body,  nor  any 
where,  nor  ever,  nor  any  (nee  qui/l- 
quam,  quisquam,  usquam,  unquam, 
ullus  (or  nuisquam). 

Nor  scarcely  any  (neque  ullus  fere). 


•  The  exceptions  are,  (1)  When  the  negative  is  to  be  emphatic,  et  semper  mi 
x<luit  et.  a  studiis  nostris  non  abhorr et:  (2)  When  et  non  or  ac  non  =  not 
-other  or  much  more  =  ac  r.on  potius  (the  potius  being  often  expressed),  si  res 
.-rib  i  postularet,  ac  non  pro  se  ips?  loqucrctur. 


310 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OP  IDIOM. 


English. 

15.  Hardly  any. 
Hardly  any  body. 

16.  Your   ) 

His      >  accomplishments,      < 
Their  ) 
17    After  with  the  participial  subst. 

is  mostly  translated  by  the  perf. 

participle. 


18.  It  is  kind  in  you  to  ask  me,  &c. 


19.   I  shall  accomplish  what,  &c. 


20 
21. 

22. 


23. 

24. 
25. 

26. 


If  they  happen  to  do,  &c. 

It  is  ascribed,  &c.   (of  a  general 

truth). 
And  then  Aristotle !  (i.  e.  is  not  he 

a  case  in  point  1  &c.  in  appeals 

introduced  in  an  argument.) 
A.  is  right  in  saying. 
From  which. 
It  seems  likely  [enough]  that  he 

will  call,  &c. 
For — not  &c. 


27.   A  strange  fury 


28.  Must  (of  a  necessary  inference). 
See  to  what  a  condition  the  state 

must  come. 
He  must  have  made  great  progress. 
What  progress  he  must  have  made ! 

29.  To  be  on  the  point  of  being  killed. 

To  be  on  the  point  to  run. 

30.  Ita,  sic  are  often  used  where  they 

seem  superfluous,  e.  g. 
(1)  With  verbs  of  hearing,  learning, 
affirming,  doubting,  tyc. — They  are 
then  generally  followed  by  the  in- 
fin.  (if  the  verb  would  otherwise 
be  so  constructed),  or  with  ut  and 
the  subj. 


(2)  Also  in  adverbial  sentences  of 
equality :  He  thinks  as  he  speaks. 
To  do  any  thing  as  if,  &c. 
It  is  as  is  said. 
31 .    In  the  case  of  the  Nervii. 
12.    Participial  substantive  with   'in- 
stead of 


Latijt. 

Prope  nullus. 
Nemo  fere. 

Sometimes  :  ( the  accomplishments 
which  are  in  you,  him,  them,'  &c. 

f  (Eng.)  After  having  suffered  (or  suf 
J     fering)  this,  I  went,  &c. 
)  (Lat.)  Having  suffered  this,  I  went, 
-  I     &c. 
f  (Eng.)  After  consuming  the  corn,  he 
I      went,  &c. 

'j  (Lat.)  The  corn  being  consumed,  he 
[     went,  &c. 
You  act  kindly  indeed,  (in)  that  you 

ask  me. 
(facis  amice  t\i  quidem,  quod  me  rogas, 

&c.) 
(Often)  I  shall  accomplish  that  (hoc  of 
illud),  quod,  &c. :  i.  e.  the  dem.  pron. 
is  often  inserted. 
If  perchance  they  do,  &c.  (si forte). 
It    is  wont    (solet)    to  be     ascribed 

(Often:  not  always.) 
What  Aristotle'? 
Quid  Aristotelcs  ? 

A.  rightly  says  (recte). 

Often  '  whence  :'  undc. 

He  seems  about-to-call  (videlur  voca 
turns). 

Neque  enim :  but  non  enim  is  not  un- 
common even  in  Cic. ;  and  is  to  be 
preferred,  when  there  is  any  anti- 
thesis :  i.  e.  when  followed  by  a  '  but.' 

A  certain  strange  fury  (quidam  after  the 
adj. — this  addition  of"  quidam  to  an 
adj.  is  very  common). 

Cic.  often  translates  this  by  putare. 

Vide  quern  in  locum  rempublicam  ven- 
turam  putetis. 

Putandus  est  multum  profecisse. 

Q,uos  progressus  eum  putamus  fecisse ! 

In  eo  esse  ut  interficeretur ;  or  with 
part,  in  rus  with  jam. 

Jam  cursurum  esse. 

Examples. — 1.  Sic  a  majoribus  suisac- 
ceperant,  tanta  esse  beneficia,  &c. 
C. — 2.  Q,uum  sibi  ita  persuasisset 
ipse,  meas  —  litems,  &c.(with  injin.) 
C. — 3.  Se  ita  a  patribus  didicisse,  xJ 
magis  virtute  quam  dolo  contend- 

erent.    Cces.— 4.  Ita  Helvetios 

instituto8  esse,  ut consuerint,  &c. 

Cces. — 5.  Ita  enim  definit,  ut  pertur 
batio  sit. 

Ita  sentit  ut  loquitur. 
Ita  facere  aliquid — lanquam. 
Est  ita  ut  dicitur. 
In  Nerviis. 


TABLE  OF  DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM. 


31] 


English. 
(1)  Instead  of  reading,  &c. 


^2)  Why  do  you    laugh   instead  of 
crying? 
33.  Participial  subst.  with  'far from.* 

(1)  Far  from  doing  this,  he  does  that, 

Ac. 

(2)  To  be  far  from  doing  any  thing. 

(3)  To  be  not  far  from  doing,  &c. 


34.   (1)  A,  B,  C,  arid  such,  &c.       ) 

similar,  <fcc.    $ 

(2)  A,  B,  C,  and  the  rest.  ) 
others.    S 


35.   Despairing. 


36.   Not  very  ancient. 


37.   The  moat  wretched  of  all  states. 
2i   The  very  celebrated  Cinztfc 


Latin. 

Quumpossit,  or  quum  deb  cat  U- 

Jere,  &c,  according  as  the  thing  not 
one  was  a  duty  omitted,  or  merely 
a  thing  that  might  have  been  done. 
Cur  rides  ac  non  potius  lacrima- 
ris? 

(1)  Tantum  ab'-st  ut — ut  (with  subj.)— 
or,  if  the  verb  has  a  'not'  with  it, 
tantum  abest  ut — ut  ne — quidem,  Ac. 

(2)  Longe  abesse  ut,  <fcc.  (e.  g.  ille  lon- 
gissime  aberit,  ut  credat,  &c.) 

(3)  Paulum,  haud  or  non  multum,  ox 
haud  procul  abesse,  ut,  &c. 

Obs.  The  abesse  is  to  be  used  im 
personally. 

A,  B,  C,  such. 

similar. 

A,  B,  C,  the  rest. 

A,  I  J,  C,  others. 

Since  he  despairs.     3  Consider  which 

Since  he  despaired.  >  form  should  be 

(Quum  with  subj.)  )  used. 

Not  so  ancient,  non  ita  antiquus:  but 
non  valde,  non  admodum,  are  not  bar- 
barous, as  some  teach. 

The  most  wretched  state  of  all. 

C  Cicero,  a  very  celebrated  mkiu 

$  (Cicero,  cir  olarLximiu* 


MEMORIAL   LINES. 


1.  Joniingit  use  of  things  we  like, 
But  accidit  when  evils  strike. 

2.  From  nemo  let  me  never  see  ?  TT         m  >; 
Neminis  or  nemine.                  \  Use  nulhus>  nuih' 

3.  For  crime  let  crimen  never  come, 
But  scelus,f acinus,  flagitium. 

4.  When  the  word  'men'  means  ' soldiers,'  these 
Should  rendered  be  bymilites. 

5.  The  boy  has  but  a  stupid  head, 
Who  always  for  a  '  but '  puts  sed 

Or  at  i  for  other  meanings  '  but '  has  got  t 

'  Only'  'except,'  'at  least,'  and  '  who'  with  'not. 

(See  Caution  11.) 

5    A  boy  who  is  thoughtful  is  never  perplext 

By  then's  meaning  '  at  t/iat  time '  and  '  therefore '  and  '  next.' 

(See  Caution  21.) 

7.  In  '  this  is  life '  let  '  this '  with  '  life '  agree ; 
Hoc,  id  or  illud  barbarous  would  be. 

8.  In  '  so  many  apiece '  leave  apiece  quite  alone ; 
But  of  numerals  use  a  distributive  one. 

!).  After  these  impersonals  ut 
Or  ne  will  be  correctly  put : 
Contingit,  evenit,  or  accidit, 
With  restat,  reliquum  est  nndfit.& 

10.  Let ( that '  translated  be  by  quo, 
When  with  comparatives  it  does  go. 

11.  Vereor  ne,  I  fear  he  will; 
Vereor  ut,  I  fear  he  won't : 
Turn  fut.  by  subjunctive  present 
After fear:  foiget  it  don't. 

12.  By  ut  translate  infinitive 

With  ask,  command,  advise,  and  striveX 
But  never  be  this  rule  forgot : 
Put  ne  for  ut  when  there's  a  not. 


a  So  after  sequitur  sometimes. 

b  Under  ask  are  included  beg,  pray,  beseech,  Ac. ;  under  command,  charge 
iirect,  &c. ;  under  Arvise,  e.rlwrt,  admonish,  persuade,  impel,  induce,  &c 


VERSUS    MEMORIALES 


1.  Scmimus  usuri,  capimusque  ut  possideamus ;  * 
Prendunturque  manu  volumus  qusecunque  tenere. 

2.  Q,ui  quccrit  reperit,  non  quccsita  inveniuntur.i> 

3.  Navis,  equus,  currusque  vehunt  ;  portabit  asellus 
Pondera,  PORTABUNTque  humeri :  leviora  feruntuh. 
Laeva  gerit  clipeum,  vestesque  geruntur  et  anna. 

4.  Tu  scccende  rogum ;  taedas  accende  facesque. 

5.  Villa  despicimus  :  contemne  pericula,  miles; 
Sperne  voluptatts,fozdasque  libidinis  escas.c 

6.  Pars  or.e  est  litus  :  retinentur  flumiiia  ripis. 

7.  Clausa  aut  tecta  aperi  :  patefit  quod  restat  apcrtum.  1 

8.  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonncnquam  esse  memento. 

9.  Olim  prceteritum  spectatque  futurum* 

10.  Bis  terque  augebit,  minuet  bis  terve  notatum. 

11.  Mens  jegra  est,  corpusque  jegkvm  :  de  corpore  solo 
jEgrotum  dicas  :  nunt  anlmalla  tantum. 
Morbida,  non  homines:  ha3c  tu  discrimina  serves. 

12.  De  spatio  nvsquam  dicas,  de  tempore  nunquam. 

13.  Plkbs  sciscit,  jubet  at  populos,  censetque  senatud. 

14.  Nemo  ablalivum  ntc  habet,  nee  habet  genitivum  \  U^^m*' 

15.  Particulas  si,  ecquid,  nisi,  ne  num  fobte  sequatur.f 


a  Rut  capere  arma  occurs  as  well  as  sumere  arma. 

b  This  is  true  of  reperire,  but  invenire  is  the  general  term  for  l finding,  even 
after  search  or  examination. 

c  Despicere  relates  to  what  we  might  value  or  respect:  contemnere  to  what 
H'e  might  fear  or  think  important :  spernere  to  what  we  might  accept,  or  to  ob 
jects  that  we  might  pursue. 

<i  Hence  aperir  e  os  (never  patefacere)  :  oculos  aperire  or  patefacere: 
portas  (fores,  ostium)  aperire  or  patefacere ;  viam  aperire,  (fororu  occasion), 
patefacere  (to  throw  it  open).  Aperire  is  also  '  to  make  a  thing  visible.'  Patefa- 
cere often  implies  the  permanent  removal  of  obstacles. 

e  Hence  olim •  —  formerly,  informer  days  once  upon  a  time,  and  hereafter. 

f  That  is,  perhaps  or  perclumce  must  never  be  forte  (but  for tasse  with  indie.) 
;  after  the  particles  si,  &c.  The  real  meaning  of  forte  is  '  by  accident'  lby 
stance,1  and  it  does  not  lose  this  meaning  after  si,  &c. :  this  is  also  the  original 
Tiouninc;  of  perchance,  perluips. 

14 


814  VERSUS    MEMORIALES. 

16.  Dat  -ficio,  -ficior,  -facio  sed  dat  tibi  -/i'o.J 

17.  Quicquid  habet  pennas  'volucris'  complectitur:  aleo 
Magna  avis  est :  oscen  praedicit  voce  futura. 

18.  Ne  potius  quara  non  post  dum,  modo,  dummodo  dicas. 

19.  Et  morbutn  et  morbi  spectat  medicamina  sano  : 
jEgrotum  medeor  spectat  medicumque  peritum. 

20.  '  Aiqueigiziir1  pravum  est  '  igiturque :' — 'ideo^ce'  Latinim;  &? . 

21.  ' Major  adhuc'  Romas  dicebat  serior  aetas : 

Cum  Cicerone  'etiam'  sed  tu,  et  cum  Caesare  dicaa.i 

22.  Festinare  potes  minium:  properare  virorum  est 
Optatam  quicunque  volunt  contingere  metam. 

23.  Rectius  in  navem  quamwarc  imponere  dicas: 
Dicere  sed  navi,  scribas  si  carmina,  fas  est  J 

24.  Quod  cernis  procul  esse  potest :  quae  longius  absunt 
Humanum  effugient  rerum  discrimina  visum. k 

25.  '  Non — pariter '  vites :  '  non — ceque '  dicere  fas  est. 

26.  Nee  (neque)  'vero'  habeat  post  se  :  non  accipit  autem. 

27.  Particulas  ut,  ne  recte  neu,  neve  sequuntur.i 

23.  Eximo  quae  mala  sunt ;  adimo  bona;  demere  possum 
Quidlibel: — haec  teneas  justo  discrimine  verba. 


s  That  is,  the  compounds  of  facto  that  retain  the  a,  have  Jio  in  the  passive. 
Conficio  has  conficior,  according  to  the  rule  here  given :  but  also  sometime* 
wnjieri. 

h  That  is,  never  use  igitur  when  'consequently'  or  'therefore'*  followr  'and:' 
.but  ideo : — et  ideo,  atque  ideo,  or  ideoque. 

i  That  is,  etiam  is  the  classical  word  for  'still'  or  '  yet,'  with  comparatives 
not  adhuc. 

i  Milites  in  navem  imponere,  Caes.  Liv. :  nave,  Suet. — carinas,  Ov. 

k  Procul.  far  off  but  within  sight;  longe,  so  far  off  as  to  be  3t*f  of  eight* 

1  But  nee,  nequeare  sometimes  found :  e.  g.  Liv.  24,  3. 


VOCABULARY 


aby 

athg 

=  anybody 

=  anyt  nag 

ci 

=  alicui 

q& 

=  aliquil 

cs 

=  alicujus 

qd 

=  aliquid 

qo 

=  aliquo 

qm     =  aliquem 
qrm  =  aliquorum 
qs      =  aliquos 

*  means  that  the  phrase  is  not  found 
in  the  classics,  though  probably 
correct. 


Abuse,  v.  (qa  re  perverse  uti  or  abuti ; 
or  immodice,  intern peranter,  inso- 
lenter  abuti,  when  the  a.  lies  in  ex- 
cess :  e.  g.  to  a.  =  trespass  on  a 
man's  indulgence  or  patience,  in- 
dulgentia,  patientia  cs  immodice 
abuti).  To  a.  a  person  =  rail  at 
(conviciis  qm  cousectari  or  inces- 
sere).  To  load  or  cover  a  man 
with  a.,  to  heap  every  kind  of  a.  on 
a  man  (omnibus  maledictis  qm 
vexare ;  omnia  maledicta  in  qm 
conferre).  To  fling  a.  at  a  man 
(maledicta  in  qm  conjicere).  To 
overwhelm  aby  with  a.  ^qm  contu- 
meliis  operire  atque  opprimere). 

Abvse  (usus  or  abusus  perversus). 
An  a.  *=  a  bad  custom  (mos  pra- 
vus).  To  remove  abuses  (mor,es 
pravos  abolere). 

Access.  To  have  a.  to  athg  (habere 
aditum  ad  qd) :  to  aby  (ci  ad  qm 
aditus  patet).  lie  is  easy  of  a. 
(aditus  ad  eum  est  facilis).  He  is 
easy  of  a.  to  private  individuals 
(faciles  aditus  sunt  ad  eum  privato- 
rum).  He  is  difficult  of  a.  (aditus 
ad  eum  sunt  difficiliores).  An  a. 
of  fever  (accessio  febris).  I  grant 
a.  to  me  to  everybody  (omnibus 
conveniendi  mei  potestatem  facio). 

Accessible  (facili.s  accessu  :  of  places). 
He    is   a.    •<  .   or   flattery 


(qm  or   facilem   aditum  ad    aures 
ejus  adulatores  habent.) 

Acclamations.  To  receive  athg  with 
a.'s  (plausu  et  clamore  prosequi 
qd). 

Account  (ratio).  To  look  through  an 
a.  (rationem  cognoscere,  inspicere). 
To  go  through  a  man's  accounts ; 
to  examine  them  carefully  (cs  ra- 
tiones  excutere,  dispungere).  The 
debtor  and  creditor  a.'s  balance 
(par  est  ratio  e.  g.  acceptorum  et 
datorum,  accepti  et  expensi).  To 
state  and  balance  a.'s  (rationes  con. 
ficere  et  consolidare).  To  compar* 
a.'s  (rationes  conferre).  To  bring 
a  sum  of  money  to  a.  (pecuniam  in 
rationem  inducere).  To  demand 
an  a.  from  aby  (rationem  ab  qo  re- 
petere).  To  render  an  a.  (rationem 
reddere  with  gen.  of  thing).  To 
call  upon  a  man  to  givo  an  a.  of 
his  life  (ab  qo  vita  rationem  re- 
poscere). 

Acquit.  To  be  unanimously  acquit- 
ted (omnibus  sentontiis  absolvi). 

Advantage;  Benefit  To  gain,  db 
rive  a.  or  b.  from  athg  (utilitatem  or 
fructum  ex  qa  re  capere  or  perci- 
pere).  It  is  to  my  a.  (est  e  re  mea, 
or  est  in  rem  meam). 

Advice.  To  give  a.  (ci  consilium 
dare).  To  ask  a.  of  aby  (petere 
consilium  ab  qo).  To  follow  aby'a 
a.   (sequi  cs  consilium :    cs  consilio 


816 


VOCABULARY. 


Jti  t).  To  do  athg  by  aby's  a.  (qd 
facere  de  or  ex  cs  consilio). 

Advocate  (advocatus,  one  who  assist- 
ed with  his  advice;  patronus,  one 
who  pleaded  the  cause).  To  em- 
ploy or  engage  an  a.  (adoptare  sibi 
patronum  or  defensorem,  if  the  per- 
son is  accused :  deferre  causam  ad 
patronum). 

Affluence.  To  live  in  a.  (in  omnium 
rerum  abundantia  vivere.  Circum- 
fluere  omnibus  copiis  atque  in  om- 
nium rerum  abundantia  vivere.  C. 
Am.  15). 

Affront.  To  put  an  a.  on  aby  (con- 
tumeliam  ci  imponere).  To  look 
upon  athg  as  an  a.  (qd  in  or  ad 
contumeliam  accipere). 

Alms.  To  beg  for  a.  from  aby  (sti- 
pem  emendicare  ab  qo).  To  live  by 
a.  (aliena  misericordia  vivere).  To 
give  a.  (stipem  spargere,  largiri). 

Ambition.  To  be  ambitious ;  to  be 
led  by  a.  (gloria  duci,  ambitione 
teneri).  From  a.  or  ambitious  mo- 
tives (gloria  ductus).  To  be  fired 
with  a.  (ambitione  accensum  esse). 

Answer.  To  receive  an  a.  (respon- 
sum  ferre,  auferre).  I  received  for 
a.  (responsum  est).  To  a.  (if  by 
letter,  rescribere).  To  return  no 
a.  (nullum  responsum  dare).  To  a. 
not  a  word  (nullum  verbum  re- 
spondere). 

Appetite.  To  have  a  good  a.  (liben- 
ter  cibum  sumere,  of  an  invalid: 
libenter  ccenare).  To  have  no  a. 
(*  cibum  fastidire).  To  give  a  man 
an  a. ;  produce  an  a.  (appetentiam 
cibi  facere,  praestare,  invitare).    To 

fet  an  a.  by  walking  (opsonare  am- 
ulando  famem). 
Arrival.  To  be  impatient  for — or  look 
forward  with  impatience  to  aby's  a. 
(cs  adventum  non  mediocriter  cap- 
tare).  , 
Audience.  To  grant  aby  an  a. 
(admittere  qm).  To  have  an  a. 
(admitti ;  aditum  ad  qm  habere). 
Before  a  numerous  a.  (frequentibus 
auditoribus ;  magna  audieutium  ce- 
lebritate). 


t  Also  t&  consilio  opremoerare. 


B 


Baggage  (sarclnse,  baggage  of  indi- 
vidual  soldiers;  impedimenta,  of 
the  army  generally).  To  take  th« 
b.  (impedimenta  capere :  impedi- 
ments potiri).  To  strip  the  enemy 
of  all  their  b.  (omnibus  impedimen- 
ts hostes  exuere).  To  lose  one's 
b.  (impedimenta  amittere :  impedi- 
menfis  exui).  To  fight  whilst  en- 
cumbered with  one's  b.  (sub  onere 
confligere).  To  attack  the  enemy 
whilst  they  are  encumbered  with 
thair  baggage,  before  they  have 
disencumbered  themselves  of  their 
b.  (hostes  sub  sarcinis  adoriri).  To 
hide  their  b.  in  the  wood  (impedi 
menta  in  silvas  abdere).  To  plun- 
der the  b.  (impedimenta  diripere.) 

Banish,  Banishment.  To  banish  ;  to 
drive  into  banishment  fexsilio  affi- 
cere,  in  exsilium  ejicere,  pellere, 
expellere,  agere,  ex  urbe  or  civitate 
pellere,  expellere,  ejicere.  ex  urbe 
exturbare.  de  civitate  ejicere.  Ir. 
Roman  law  ci  aqua  et  igni  inter- 
dicere,  to  compel  a  man  to  go  into 
b.  by  forbidding  aby  to  give  him 
fire  or  water :  he  kept  the  rank 
of  a  Roman  citizen,  but  lost  all 
its  privileges  and  honors ;  rele- 
gare,  to  send  him  to  a  fixed  place, 
but  without  loss  of  rank  or  goods ; 
deportare,  to  banish  him  for  life  to 
some  desert  spot,  with  loss  of  rank 
and  property  :  this  kind  of  b.  be- 
longed to  the  times  of  the  Cmsars). 
To  banish  aby  for  ten  years  (rele- 
gare  in  decern  annos).  To  b.  aby 
to  an  island  for  life  (deportare  in 
insulam).  To  b.  from  the  society 
of  men  (relegare  ab  hominibus) 
To  recall  from  b.  (revocare  de  or 
ab  exsilio,  reducere  de  exsilio,  iu 
patriam  revocare  or  restituere). — 
To  return  from  b.  (exsilio  redire). 

Battle.  A  b.  by  land  (prcelium  ter 
restre) ;  by  sea  (praelium  navale ; 
pugna  navalis).  A  long  and  severe 
"b.  was  fought  (pugnatum  est  diu 
atque  acriter).  To  draw  an  armj 
out  in  b.  array,  to  offer  b.  (exer- 
citum  ji  aciem  educwre).     To  bo 


VOCAHLI.AKV, 


317 


gin  the  b. ;  to  join  b.  (proelium  com- 
mitteret).  To  tight  a  b.  (prcelium 
or  pugnam  facere  or  edere).  To 
renew  the  b.  (i.  e.  after  an  inter- 
val :  pugnam  rcpetere).  To  re- 
store the  b. ;  to  restore  the  fortune 
of  the  day  (pugnam  novam  inte- 
,  pnBliom  redmtegrare  or  reno- 
vare :  generally  of  fresh  troops 
striving).  To  renew  the  b.  the 
next  day  (postero  die  pugnam  ite- 
rare).  To  win  the  b.  (prudio  or 
pagna  roperiorem  discedere  •  victo- 
rrin  proelio  excedere).  To  win  a  b. 
(secuudo  Martc  pugnare :  rem  pros- 
pere  gererc).  To  lose  the  b.  (pug- 
Ma  inferiorem  discedere :  proelio 
vinci  or  superari).  To  lose  a  b. 
(adverso  Marte  pognare  :  rem  male 
gerere).  To  ofler  aby  b.  (ci  pog- 
nandi  potestatem  facere).  To  fight 
a  pitched  b.  (dimieare). 

Benefit     See  Advantage. 

Maine.  Tain  to  b.  (nica  culpa  est). 
Nobody  is  to  b.  but  myself  (culpa 
mea  propria  est).  To  lay  or  throw 
the  b.  on  aby  (cnlpam  or  causam 
in  qm  conferre,  transferre :  the  lat- 
ter a f  removing  it  from  one's  self, 
vertere).  One  throws  the  b.  on  an- 
other (causam  alter  in  alterum  con- 
fert).  To  be  to  b.  (in  noxa  ease  or 
teneri ;  in  culpa  esse). 

Ulood.  To  stanch  b.  (sanguinem 
sistere,  supprimere,  cohibcre).  To 
thirst  for  b.  (sanguinem  sitire).  To 
cost  aby  much  b.  (multo  sanguine 
ci  stare).  To  shed  one's  b.  for  one's 
country  (sanguinem  pro  patria  pro- 
fundere ;  ■anguinem  roam  patnaj 
largiri).  To  be  connected  willi  ahy 
by  the  ties  of  b. :  to  be  related  to 
aby  (sanguine  cum  qo  conjunctum 
.  sanguine  attingere  qm).  To 
do  athg  in  cold  b.  (consulto  et  cogi- 
tatum  facere  qd).  To  shed  b.  (cae- 
dem  or  sanguinem  facere :  commit 
viarder).  My  own  flesh  and  b. 
(i.  e.  children :  viscera  mea  or 
nostra).  To  take  some  b.  from  aby, 
to  bleed  aby  (ci  sanguinem  mit- 
tere). 


Body.     The  kiody  ii  worn  out,  e  g 

with  labors,  dieeaMl  '.conficitur). 
Bury,  Buried,  Burial.    See  Funeral 

C. 

Calamity,  Affliction,  Misfortune 
Misery.  C.  visits  aby  (affligit  qra 
calamitas).  To  contrive  aby's  mis- 
ery or  c.  (calamitatern  ci  maehi- 
nari).  To  fall  into  a.  (in  calamita. 
tern  incidere).  Misfortune  happens 
(accidit  calamitas).  To  be  in  afflic- 
tion or  misery  (in  malis  esse  or  ja- 
cere ;  malis  urgeri:  in  miseria  esse 
or  versari).  To  be  the  cause  of  a 
man's  misery  or  misfortune  (cala- 
mitatern ci  aflerre,  inferre,  impor- 
tare).  To  alleviate  aby's  a.  (cc 
calamitatern  levare).  To  ward  olT 
a.  from  aby  (qm  prohibero  calami- 
tate,  or  a  calamitate  defendere). 
To  pine  away  in  a.  or  misery  (in 
calamitate  tabescere).  To  be  born 
to  misery  (miseriis  ferendis  Datum 
esse).  To  suffer  a  misfortune,  un- 
dergo a.  (calamitatern  capere,  ac- 
cipere,  subire).  To  bear  a  misfor- 
tune (calamitatern  ferre,  tolerare). 
To  be  cast  down  by  misfortune 
(calamitati  or  ad  calamitatern  ani- 
mum  submitteret). 

Circumstances.  According  to  c.'s 
(pro  re.  pro  re  nata — ex  or  pro 
tempore).  Trifling  c.  (paryse  res, 
parva  momenta :  the  latter  of  points 
on  which  athg  turns).  C.'s  of  the 
time  (tempora  (pi.) :  temporum  ra- 
tio :  temporum  vincula.  C.  Fain 
x.6). 

Chad.  The  heavens  are  covered  with 
c.'s  (coelum  nubibus  obducitur). 

Cold.  To  be  able  to  endure  c.  (algo- 
ris,  frigoris  patientem  esse).  To  be 
benumbed  with  c.  (gelu  torpere). 

Copy,  see  Example. 

Com ;  Provisions.  Corn  is  rising  or 
getting  up  (anuona  carior  tit;  in- 
gravescit,  inceuditur) :  is  falling 
(laxat  or  levaturt)-     To  keep  back 


t  Or  mar.um  couserere. 


t  Brut,  in  Cic.  Ep.  11,  3,  3.  Liv  23,  25 

i  Hence,  to  lower  the  jrtce  of  c,  anntv 

ram  levare  or  laxare ;   to  raise  it,  keep 

or  force  it  up,  incendere— also  excanuo 

facere,  flagelJare. 


ai8 


VOCABULARY 


their  c.  (annonam  or  frumenturn 
comprimere).  To  be  straitened  for 
provisions :  to  be  in  want  of  c.  (re 
frumentara  laborare).  Provisions 
are  scarce  (annona  laboratur).  To 
get  in  a  better  supply  of  c,  to 
remedy  their  deficient  supply  of  c. 
(rei  frumentariffi  mederi :  rem  fru- 
mentariam  expedire).  To  order 
the  states  to  bring  in  so  much  c. 
(frumenturn  imperare  civitatibus). 
Dearness,  cheapness  of  p.  (annonae 
caritas,  vilitas). 

D. 

Danger,  Endanger,  Peril.  To  un- 
dergo d.  (periculum  obire,  adire, 
Bubire,  suscipere).     To  expose  one's 

'  self  to  d..(in  periculum  se  offerre,*se 
inferre,  in  discrirnen  se  conferre, 
inferre,  or  objiceret).  To  peril  one's 
life  for  aby  (inferre  se  in  periculum 
capitis  atque  vitae  discrirnen  pro  cs 
ealute).  To  bring  aby  into  d. :  to 
endanger  (qm  in  periculum  or  dis- 
crirnen adducere,deducere,  vocare) : 
into  great  or  extreme  d.  (multum 
periculi  ci  inferre :  magnum,  sum- 
mum,  maximum  in  periculum  qm 
adducere}.  To  bring  the  state  into 
extreme  d.  (rempublicam  in  pra?- 
ceps  dare).  To  seek  or  endeavor 
to  bring  aby  into  d.  (periculum  ci 
intendere  or  moliri).  To  be  in  d. 
(in  periculo  esse  or  versari.  in  dubio 
esse  —of  life).  To  be  in  extreme 
d.  of  things  (in  maximum  pericu- 
lum et  extremum  paene  discrirnen 
udductum  esse — of  thing3 :  in  prae- 
cipiti  esse  ;  in  extremo  situm  esse). 
To  share  d.'s  (pericula  communi- 
care).  D.'s  threaten  aby:  or  aby 
is  threatened  with  d.  (instant  ci 
psiicula.  from  aby,  ab  qo).  At 
my  own  risk  (meo  periculo).  To 
ward  oft'd.  from  aby  (periculum  ab 
qo  prohibere  ;  propuleare).  There 
is  d.  that  (periculum  est  ne).  At 
his  own  risk  and  expense  (sumptu 
periculoque  suo).  To  fall  into  d. 
'in    periculum     vonire,    incidere). 


t  iYo»  se  periculo  exponere. 


Athg  is  endaugeiid  ^qd  in  discri 
men  venit). 

Darkness;  Dark:  Obscurity,  Ob- 
scure. To  make  athg  dark  (ci  rei 
tenebras  obduccre  ;  or  obscuritalero 
et  tenebras  offundere).  To  be  or 
remain  in  darkness ;  to  be  vested 
in  obscurity  (in  tenebris  latere  ;  ob- 
scuritate  involutum  latere).  To  be 
buried  in  impenetrable  s  darkness 
(crassis  occultatum  et  circumfusum 
tenebris  latere).  Born  Df  an  ob- 
scure family ;  of  obscure  origin 
(obscuro  loco  nalus,  obscuris  ortus 
majoribus).  To  explain  what  is 
obscure  (res  obscuras  explanare: 
res  involutas  explicare). 

Death,  Die.  To  die  a  violent  d 
(violenta  morte  perire).  To  die  by 
his  own  hands :  commit  suicide 
(su^L  se  mu  u  interficere :  mortem 
sibi  consciscere,  or  inferre).  To 
meet  d.  with  resignation  (aequo 
animo  mortem  oppetere :  fidenti 
animo  ad  mortem  gradi).  To  seek 
or  court  d.  (mortem  expetere).  Tc 
meet  an  honorable  d.  (honeste 
occumbere).  To  punish  with  d 
(morte  multare  ;  supplicio  afficere) 
The  punishment  is  d.  (ci  rei  sup- 
plicium  constitutum  est).  To  con- 
demn to  d.  (capitis  or  capite  dam- 
nare,  condemnare).  To  die  of 
athg  (ex  qa  re  mori).  To  starve 
himself  to  d.  (per  inediarn  a  vita 
discedere).  To  die  of  laughter,  or 
burst  with  1.  (risu  paene  emori,  Ter. 
risu  paene  corruere.  C.)  To  read 
one's  self  to  d.  (in  studiis  mori). 

Desire  :  Longing  :  Regret.  To  les- 
sen tbe  regret  that  athg  causes 
(lenire  desiderium  quod  qs  ex  qa  re 
capit).  To  renew  regret,  or  long- 
ing (desiderium  refricare).  To  pine 
away  with  a  longing  d.  (desideric 
confici  or  tabescere).  To  excite  oi 
kindle  the  d.  (cupiditatem  incea- 
dere). 

Disease,  III,  Bad  Health,  Relapse, 
Poorly,  Disorder,  Sickness,  Sick 
To  fall  ill  (morbo  affici,  tentari. 
corripi).  To  catch  a  d.,  to  fall  ill 
of  a  disorder  (morbum  nancisci ;  in 
morbum  cadere,  incidere).  Tc  fall 
into  bad  health  (in  adversam  vaJ*- 


VOCAH 


319 


ludinem  incidore)  To  be  danger-  | 
ously  ill  (iu  periculosum  morhum 
implicari).  To  be  severely  ill 
(gravi  or  graviore  morbo  implicari). 
To  have  had  health  (infirma  atque 
«egra  valetudine  esse).  To  be  poor- 
ly (leviter  aegrotare,  minus  belle 
valere).  To  have  a  disease  in  his 
feet,  reins,  &.c.  (ex  pedihus,  reni- 
bus  laborare  ;  pedibus  regrum  esse). 
To  have  or  sulFer  from  a  disease 
that  must  end  fatally  (aegrotare 
mortifere ;  mortifero  morbo  affec- 
tum esse,  urjxeri ;  novissimft.  vale- 
tudine conflictari).  To  be  sick  or 
diseased  in  mind  (ab  animo  BBgrntn 
3sse).  To  recover  from  a  sickness 
'ex  morbo  convalescere).  To  die 
of  disease  (morbo  mori,  a  morbo 
perire  ;  in  morbum  implicitum  mori 
or  discedere).  To  recover  one's 
strength  after  a  disease  (ex  morbo 
recreari ;  vires  recolligere).  To 
have  a  relapse  (in  morbum  recidere : 
de  integro  in  morbum  incidere). 
To  be  afflicted  with  a  d.  (morbo 
affici ;  affligi,  afflictari,  tentari). 
To  treat  a  disease ;  or  use  a  treat- 
ment, employ  a  method  of  cure  to 
ad.  (morbo  curationem  adhibere: 
to  a  person,  curationem  adhibere 
ad  qm).  To  apply,  use,  or  employ 
remedies  ogxt  d.'s  (morbis  remedia 
adhibure  :  fig.  morbis  animi). 


E. 


Error,  Mistake  To  cause  a  m. 
(errorem  gignere,  creare).  To  be 
in  e. :  labor  under  a  m.  (in  errore 
esse  or  versan).  To  see  one's  m. 
(erratum  suiur.  agnoscere).  To  lead 
;il>y  into  e.  (qm  in  errorem  inducere 
or  conjicere).  To  remove  aby's  m. 
(errorem  ci  eripere,  extorquere). 
From  a  mistaken  notion  (errore 
caption). 

Example,  Instance,  Warning,  Copy. 
To  produce  an  e.  (exeirq  lum  sup- 
ponere,  proponere).  To  have  an  e. 
;or  imitation  in  one's  own  family 
(domesticum  habere  exemplum  ad 
imitandum).  To  propo**}  aby  an  e. 
for  imitation  (proponere  ci  exem- 


plum ad  imitandum";  To  sot  a 
badt  e.  to  others  (mali  esse  exem- 
pli). To  follow  aby's  e  (sequi  a 
exemplum  or  auctoritatem).  To 
take  w.  by  aby ;  to  take  e.  by  ab} 
(capere  sibi  exemplum  de  cp ;  ea 
quo  sumere  sibi  exemplum).  Tc 
set  up  in  any  person  a  pernicious  e 
(prodere  in  qo  peruiciosum  exem- 
plum). To  form  or  fashion  one's 
self  after  aby's  e.  (se  formare  in 
mores  cs).  To  set  an  e.  of  severity 
(exemplum  soveritatis  edere).  For 
example,  as  an  instance  (exempli 
causa).  To  send  a  copy  of  my 
letter  to  aby  (literarum  exemplum 
ci  or  ad  qm  mittere).  To  set  an  e. 
(exemplum  pnebere,  prodere). 

Excuse,  Plea.  To  admit  of  an  o 
(excusationem  habere  or  qd  excu- 
sationis).  To  admit  of  some  e.  (ha- 
bere qd  excusationis).  My  igno- 
rance may  be  pleaded  in  e. :  I  may 
be  excused  on  the  ground  of  igno- 
rance (estmihi  excusatio  inscientiaj). 
To  plead  bad  health  in  e.  (excusaro 
morbum  or  valetudinem).  To  de- 
fend one's  self  from  any  charge  by 
pleading  or  urging  athg ;  or,  on 
the  plea  of  athg  (qd  cs  rei  excusa- 
tione  defendere).  To  accept  an  e. 
(excusationem  or  satisfactionem  ac- 
cipere).  To  reject  or  not  accept 
an  e.  (excusationem  non  accipere 
or  probare).  To  e.  one's  self  to 
aby's  satisfaction  (salisfacere  ci) 
The  plea  of  necessity  is  a  valid  or 
complete  excuse  for  aby  (necessita- 
tis excusatio  qm  facile  defendit). 

Expectation  ;  Expect.  To  lead  men 
to  e.  athg  (facere  exspectationem 
cs  rei).  To  cause  or  raise  in  aby 
an  eager  e.  of  athg,  to  make  uby 
eagerly  expect  athg  (magnam  ex- 
spectationem cs  rei  ci  movore,J 
commovcre,  dare,  afferre :  qm  in  ex- 
spectationem adducere).  To  raise 
an  e.  (exspectationem  concitare). 
A  person  satisfies  or  ccmes  up  to 
men's   e.'s    (opinioni  hoi.iinum  re« 


t  Pessimi  for  very  bad. 
X  Also  uC:  quantum  tn  miai  moves  ex 
spcctationem  de  serine  ue  BibuU. 


320 


VOCABULARY. 


spomlet ;  omnium  existimationi  sa-  | 
tisfacit:    surpasses  them,  superat 
disappoints  them,  fallit).     To  sur 
pass  e.  (exspectationem  vincere). 


F. 


Fate.  All  will  suffer  the  same  f. 
(omnes  eundem  fortunae  exitum 
laturi  sunt).  To  submit  calmly  to 
my  f.,  whatever  it  may  be  (quem- 
cumque  casum  fortuna  invexerit, 
quiete  ferre).  To  be  prepared  for 
my  f.,  whatever  it  may  be  (ad 
omnem  eventum  paratum  esse). 
If  you  are  fated  to — (si  tibi  fatum 
est,  with  injin.)  The  blows  or 
storms  of  f.  (fulmina  fortunae). 
Miserable,  unhappy  f.  (fortuna  ma- 
la, afHicta,  misera).  Happy,  pros- 
perous f.  (fortuna  prospera,  secun- 
da,  florens). 

Favorite.  My  f.  Diccearchus  (deli- 
cias  mesa,  Diccearchus).  That  f. 
PaiuEtius  of  yours  (Panaatius  ille 
tuus). 

Fxvor.  To  be  in  aby's  f.  (in  gratia 
cs  or  cum  qot  esse,  gratiosum  esse 
ci  or  apud  qm).  To  be  in  high  f. 
with  aby  (cs  gratia  florere).  To 
obtain  aby's  f  (se  in  gratiam  ponere 
apud  qm  ;  gratiam  cs  sibi  colligere 
or  conciliare).  To  court  aby's  f. 
(gratiam  cs  aucupari).  To  forfeit 
aby's  f.  by  abusing  it  (gratiam  cs 
effundere).  To  restore  aby  to  an- 
other's f.,  to  reconcile  aby  to  an- 
other (qm  cum  qo  in  gratiam  redu- 
cere,  reconciliare,  restituere).  To 
receive  or  take  again  into  f.  (in 
gratiam  recipere).  To  lose  aby's  f. 
/gratiam  cs  amittere.  gratia  cs  ex- 
cidere).  To  recover  aby's  f.  (cs 
gratiam  recuperare).  To  give  a 
verdict  in  aby's  f.  (secundum  qm 
Hidicare  or  litem  dare).  To  bring 
a  man  into  great  f.  with  aby  (qm 
apud  qm  magna  in  gratia  ponere). 
To  ask  as  a  f.  (beneficii  giitiaeque 
lt>co  petere,  ut.  &c.) :  to  ^r  rat  as  a 
f.  (benericii  gratiaeque  caus  i  conce- 
dere). 

tigers.     See  Hand. 

t  With  everybody  /apud  omnes). 


Flight,  fly,  flee,  Escape,  Rout.  T« 
betake  one's  self  to  f.  (in  fugam  8€ 
conferre,  dare,  or  conjicere).  To 
put  to  f.  (in  fugam  dare,  vertero, 
convertere,  conjicere).  To  rout 
(profligare).  To  cut  off  aby's  f 
(fugam  ci  claudere  or  intercludere) 
To  seek  for  safety  by  f.  (fuga  salu- 
tern  petere).  To  save  on«'s  self  oi 
escape  by  f.  (ex  fuga  evadere,  fuga 
se  eripere).  There  is  no  other 
escape  fm  this  thing  (alia  fuga 
nujus  rei  non  est).  To  fly  in  com- 
plete disorder  to  their  camp  (fuga 
effusa  castra  petere).  To  fly  any- 
where (fuga  locum  petere:  confu- 
gere  or  fugam  capessere  qo).  To 
fly  away  secretly,  to  abscond  (fuga, 
se  subtrahere  :  clam  se  subducere). 

Funeral,  Burial,  Bury.  To  honor 
aby  with  a  splendid  f.  (amplo,  ap- 
paratissimo,  &c.  funere  efferre). 
To  bury  aby  with  military  honors 
(militari  honesto  funere  humare) 
To  bury  aby  alive  (qm  vivum  ae- 
fodere).  To  be  buried  alive  (vivum 
terrS.  obrui).  To  be  deprived  of 
burial  (sepulchro  carere).  To  be 
buried  in  oblivion  (oblivione  obrui, 
obrutum  esse) :  hi  tiie  waves  (undia 
obrui  or  hauriri). 


G. 


Gain,  Profits.  To  make  g.  of  aby 
(quaestum  facere  in  qo) :  of  athg 
(lucrum  facere  ex  qa  re).  To  ob- 
tain immense  profits  (magnos  qusea- 
tus  praedasque  facere).  To  turn 
athg  to  profit  (quaestui  habere  qd) 
To  count  athg  g.  (in  lucro  qd  po- 
nere :  putare  esse  do  lucro.  depu- 
tare  esse  in  lucro). 

Glory,  Renown.  To  gain  g.,  renown4 
credit,  &c.  (laudem  sibi  parere  or 
colligere,  gloriam  quaerere,  conse- 
qui,  adipisci).  To  have  an  eye  to 
g.  in  every  thing,  or  make  glory 
his  first  object  (omnia  ad  gleriam 
revocare).  To  cover  a  man  with 
immortal  glo-y  (immortali  gloria 
qm  afficere,  bvunpiternaB  gloriaB  qro 
commendare). 

Graft.  To  g.  a  treo  (arborem  in«e« 
rere.  surculum  arbori  inserere).  T<t 


V0CA1 


321 


g    u   good    pear    on    a    wild    stock 
(piruni  bonam  in  pirum  silvuticain 
inserero). 
Grafting,  insitio. 

II. 

//and,  Traditional,  Finders,  Art. 
To  have  a  work,  =  book,  in  h. 
(opus  in  manibus  habere).  To 
take  in  one's  h.'s  (in  manus  sumcro 
qd).  To  hold  athg  in  one's  h. 
(maim  tenere  qd).  To  bave  aby 
at  b.  j.  e.  to  help  one  (habere  sibi 
qtn  ad  manuni).  The  question 
which  is  now  under  discussion 
-Mo  qua  nunc  in  manibus  est). 
To  be  placed  in  our  own  h.'s,  to  be 
mi  our  power  'esse  iii  nostra  nianu). 
To  give  in :  to  drop  my  bauds,  i.  e. 
in  confession  oi'  defeat  (dare  ma- 
nus). Traditional  (per  manus  tra- 
ditturt).  To  wrest  athg  out  of  aby's 
h.'s  (extorqiiere  (|d  ci  de  manibus). 
To  let  the  lucky  opportunity  slip 
through  one's  fingers  (fortunam  ex 
manibus  dimittere).  Athg  slips 
through  one's  fingers  (digit,  elabi- 
tur.  or  excidit  qd  e  manibus:  also 
elabitur  de  manibus).  Not  to  stir 
or  move  a  finger  for  athg  (cs  rei 
causa  maiiuiu  DOO  vertere).  A  city 
strongly  fortified  by  art  (urbs  maim 
muniti.-sima).  To  lay  h.'s  on  aby 
(manuin,  manus  afferre,  inferre,  in- 
Hcere  ci).  Not  to  lay  fi.'s  on  aby,  to 
keep  your  h.'s  off  aby  (manus  ab- 
stiuere  a  qo).  The  matter  is  en- 
tirely in  your  h.'sf  (hujus  rei  potea- 
tas  omnia  in  vobis  sita  c.-t).  To  die 
by  one's  own  h.'s  (see  Death). 

Health  (valetudo:  if  \m  itself,  it  ?'.<? 

mostly  equivalent  to  good  h.,  which 
is  bona,  prospera,  firnia  valetudo). 
To  take  care,  or  some  care,  of 
one's  h.  (valetudini  parcere  ;  vale- 
tudiuem  otirure :  valetudini  tribu- 
ere  qd).  To  take  great  care  of 
'our  h.  (valetudini  tu»  servire). 
For  your  h.'s  sake  (corporis  tuendi 
causa).     To   neglect,   or  take   no 


t  E.  g.  religiones  (religious  observances) 
per  menus  Cm 

t  So,  to  be  placid  in  your  hands,  in  vtstra 
aaanu  situm  esse 

14* 


care  of,  one's  It.  (valetudinem  ueg- 
ligere  :  valetudini  parum  parcere). 
To  drink  aby's  good  h.  (sal utem  ci 
propinare,  Plant.  *amicum  nomi- 
natim  vocare  iu  bibendo).  Bad  h 
(adversa,  ffig-a,  infirma  valetudo) 
Your  weak  h.  oi  weak  state  of  h 
(ista  imbccillitas  valetudinis  tua?)- 
[Obs.  after  curatio,  excusatio,  ex- 
cusare,  &c.  valetudo  =  bad  health, 
just  as  in,  "  to  excuse  himself  ou 
the  ground  of  his  health,"  "  liia 
health  will  not  suffer  him,  &c." 
it  is  implied  that  had  health  i* 
meant.]  To  enjoy  good  h.  (bona 
valetudino  uti :  excellent,  optima). 
To  be  in  an  indifferent  state  of  h 
(valetudine  minus  commoda  uti 
To  injure  one's  h.  by  the  neglect 
of  one's  usual  exerefce  (valetudinem 
iutermissis  exercltationibus  amit- 
tere).  I  am  recovering  my  h 
(melior  fio  valetudine).  H.  is  re- 
established (confirmatur).  To  be 
in  good  h.  (rccte  valere) :  in  better 
health  (melius  valere).  To  enjoy 
good  h.  (prosperitate  valetudinis  uti). 

Helm,  Steer.  To  take  the  h.  (ad 
gubernaculum  accedere).  To  sit 
at  the  h.  (sedere  in  puppi  clavum- 
que  tenere.  Cfig.  of  a  statesman). 
To  sit  at  the  h.  of  the  state  (ad  gu- 
bernacula  reipublicae  sedere).  To 
steer  the  vessel,  the  state  (gu- 
bernacula  reipublicaj  tenere).  To 
seize  the  h.  of  the  state  (guberna- 
cula  reipublicaa  prendere).  To 
drive  or  cast  aby  from  the  h.  of  the 
state  (qm  a  gubernaeulis  reipubli- 
cbb  repellere  or  dejicere).  To  with- 
draw from  or  quit  the  helm  (a  gu- 
bernaeulis recedere). 

Honor.  To  be  held  in  h.  (esse  in 
honore:  of  persons  and  things) 
To  hold  in  h.  (in  honore  habere) 
To  bestow  h.'s  on  eby  for  athg 
(honores  ci  habere  pro  qa  re :  ho- 
nores  dare  or  deferro  propter  qm 
rem).  To  load  aby  with  h.'s  (qm 
honore  augere,  ornare,  decorarej. 
To  lavish  h.'s  upon  al  y  (efFundere, 
si  ita  vis,t  honores  in  qm).     To  be- 

t  These  words   show  that  this  v»  as  an 
uncommon  expression. 


?22 


VOCABULARY, 


stow  divine  h.'s  on  aby  (doorum 
honores  ci  tribuere).  To  raise  a 
man  to,  or  place  him  in,  posts  of  h. 
(honorem  ci  dare,  mandare,  cre- 
dere, committere).  To  arrive  at 
h.'s  (ad  honores  venire  ?ervenire) . 
To  climb  to  h.'s  (ad  honores  as- 
cendere).  To  pay  or  show  h.  to 
aby  (honorem  '  ci  habere,  Nep.,  to 
a  superior). 


In.  .  Not  difficult  in  itself  (per  se  non 
difficilis).  To  be  in  our  favor  (a 
nobis  facere  ;  of  things).  In  front 
(a  fronte).  In  the  eyes  of  men 
(apud  homines).  In  breadth  (in 
latitudinem:  so  in  longitudinem, 
&c.)  To  be  in  the  prosecutor's 
house  (penes  accusatorem  esse :  of 
witnesses  in  his  power).  To  say 
athg  in  joke  (qd  per  jocum  dicere). 
To  do  athg  in  anger  (qd  per  iram 
facere). 

Injury;  Wrong.  To  commit  an  i. 
against  aby  (injuriam  ci  facere, 
inferre,  imponere,  &c. ;  injuria  qm 
afficere).  To  suffer  an  i.  (injuriam 
accipere).  To  bear  i.  or  w.  (inju- 
riam pati,  ferre).  To  abstain  from 
committing  any  i.  (abstinere  inju- 
ria). To  pardon  an  i.  at  aby's  re- 
quest (injuriam  cs  precibus  con- 
douare).  To  forget  i.'s  or  vv.'s 
(injurias  oblivione  conterere). 

Invite.  To  invite  one's  self  to  dine 
with  aby  (ccenam  ci  condicere). 
To  invite  aby  to  dinner  (qm  ad 
caenam  invitare,  vocare). 


J. 


Lidge,  Judgment,  Sentence,  Opinion. 
To  acquiesce  in  a  s.  (judicium  ac- 
cipere, ferre).  To  refuse  to  ac- 
quiesce in  a  s.  (judicium  recusare). 
A  s.  procured  by  bribery  (emtum  ju- 
dicium). To  form  a  j.  or  pronounce 
s.  about  athg  (facere  judicium  de  qa 
re  or  cs  rei.  The  thing  by  which, 
ax  re).  To  change  my  o.  (animi 
judicium  iuutare' .  To  ask  aby's  o. 
(cs  judicium  exquirere).  To  stand  or 
abide  by  aby's  j.  (cs  judic;o  stare). 


Let  others  judge  (ahorum  sit  ju 
dicium).  I  have  always  been  of  o 
(meum  semper  judicium  fuit).  To 
agree  to  abide  by  aby's  j.  in  any 
matter  (cs  judicio  qd  permittere) 
To  submit  one's  self  to  aby's  j 
(subjicere  se  cs  judicio).  In  my 
opinion  (meo  judicio).  One  who 
has  an  opinion  of  his  own  (homosui 
judicii). 

K. 

Knot.  To  tie  a  k.  (nodum  facere, 
nectere).  To  tie  a  fast  k.  (nodum 
astringere).  To  untie  a  k.  (nodum 
solvere  or  expedire). 

Knowledge.  It  is  easy  or  difficult  to 
acquire  a  k.  of  these  things  (haeo 
facilem  or  difficilem  habent  cogni- 
tionem). 


Law.  To  bring  in  a  bill ;  to  prop^e 
a  1.  (legem  rogare).  The  people 
passes  the  1.  (accipit  legem)  . 
throws  the  bill  out ;  refuses  to  pass 
the  1.  (antiquat  legem).  To  be 
passed  or  carried  through  (perferri). 
To  draw  up  l.'s  (leges  condere, 
scribere,  conscribere).  To  pass  a 
1.  (ferre  legem,  ut  or  ne;  lege  san- 
cire,  ut  or  ne  ;  of  the  people)  To 
give  l.'s  to  a  state — of  a  ru'.er  (leges 
dare  or  constituere  ci  civitati/. 
To  impose  l.'s  on  a  state— M)f  a  ty- 
rant (leges  ci  populo  o«  civitati 
imponere).  To  overthrow  L's  (leges 
evertere  or  pervertere).  To  break 
a  1.  (legem  negligere,  violate).  To 
evade  a  1.  (legi  fraudem  facere). 
To  swear  obedience  to  a  1.  (in 
legem  jurare).  To  advise  the  peo- 
ple to  pass  a  1.  (legem  suadere) : 
not  to  pass  one  (legem  di&yuadere). 
To  oppose  the  passing  of  a  1.  by  Ha 
veto  (legi  intercederet).  To  abro- 
gate a  1.  (legem  abrogare).  Ta 
abrogate  it  partially  (derogaro  kgi 
or  qd  de  lege).  To  abrog'.Je  a  L 
virtually  by  a  subsequent  eject- 
ment (legi  obrogare).     To  t  a;jpl» 


t  i.  e.  of  a  Tribune  of  r'iv  ptcpiw. 


'OCaIJL'I.AkV. 


323 


a  1.  underfoot  (legem  conculcare).  I 
To  see  that  a  I.  is  put  in  force  or  | 
strictly  executed  (efficere  ut  lex 
valeat  or  valeret).  To  relax  a  1. 
(laxamentum  dare  legi).  To  pro- 
cure the  passing  of  a  1.  (legem 
ferre) :  on  one's  self  (legem  mihi 
ipse  dico:  iff /A  gen.  of  lair).  To 
observe  a  law  (legem  servare,  ob- 
wrvare,  conservare). 
I.<tt.'r.  (1)  Sylluble;  of  the  alpha- 
bet. Not  to  write  a  I.  (. lullam 
Ifteram  scribere).  To  know  a  singlo 
1.  of  Greek  (uuam  literam  GitBcam 
scire).  Not  to  be  able  to  utter  a 
s.  (literam  non  posse  dicere). 

(2)  Epistle ;  correspondence  To 
write  a  1.  (opistolam  scribere ,  exa- 
rare).  To  write  or  send  a  I.  lo  aby 
(dare  literas  ad  qm,  literas  mittero 
ci  or  ad  qm).  To  answert  a  I. 
(rescribere  literis.  or  ad  literas  or 
epistolam).  To  fold  up  a  1.  (episto- 
latn  complicare) :  to  seal  (signare 
or  obsignare) :  to  open  (epistolam 
aperire  or  solvere).  To  break  open 
the  seal  (literas  resignare).  To 
converse  with  aby  by  1.  (cum  qo 
per  literas  colloqui  or  agere).  To 
finish  a  I.  (literas  conficere).  To 
pester  aby  with  l.'s  (literis  ci  ob- 
strepere).  To  draw  aby  into  a  c. 
(cs  literas  elicere).  To  long  for 
a  I.  (literas  expatere,  requirere,  de- 
siderare).  By  I.  (per  literas).  To 
tear  up  a  1.  (epistolam  concerpere. 
C.) 

(3)  Literature;  Learning;  Study; 
Books.  To  bury  one's  self  in  one's 
b.'s  or  b.'s  (literis  se  involvere,  ab- 
dere.  in  literas  se  abdere).  To  give 
up  or  devote  one's  self  to  1.  or  s. 
(literis  se  dare).  Devoted  to  1. 
(literis  deditus).  To  return  to  his 
s.'s ;  betake  onr 's  self  to  one's  s.'s 
or  b.'s  again  (ii:  literas  so  referre). 
To  devour  b.'s  (literas  vorare).  To 
ipend  one's  life  in  s.  (agere  setatem 
iu  literis).  To  have  paid  even  the 
slightest  attention  to  1.  (literas  vel 


t  To  return  some  answer  (rescri!:*re 


primis    lahrjs   degustasse.     Q) 

Adj.,  profound,  rare,  ahstruse,  ac- 
curate (litene  interiores  [qiuedam] 
et  reconditm) : — ordinary,  super- 
ficial (vulgares,  communes). 

Life,  Live.  As  sure  as  I  live  I  will, 
&.c.  (ita  vivarn.  ut,  &C,  ne  vivam, 
ne,  salvus  sun,  ut).  To  live  as  one 
pleases  (ad  libidinem,  ex  Iibidiu6> 
ad  arbitrium  suuui,  arhitrio  suo — 
vivere).  Not  to  be  able  to  live 
without  athg  (qa  re  carere  non 
posse).  If  a  longer  1.  had  been 
granted  him  (si  vita  long'.or  suppe- 
tiisse't).  To  live  on  very  confined 
means,  on  a  very  narrow  income 
(in  tenui  pecunia.  vivere).  To  livo 
in  penury  (in  egestato  vitam  de- 
gere).  To  aim  at  aby's  /.  (cs  capiti 
insidiari).  To  spare  tby'st  1.  (ci 
vitam  concedere,  or  mortem  re- 
mittere).  To  owe  one's  1.  to  aby 
(ci  salutem  debere  ;  also  ab  aliquc 
habere  vitam  ;  cs  beneficio  vivere). 
To  beseech  aby  to  spare  a  person's  1. 
(cs  vitam  deprecari  a  qo).  To 
atone  for,  or  expiate  athg  with 
one's  1.  (capite  luere  qd).  My  1.  is 
at  stake  ;  I  am  in,  or  brought  into, 
danger  of  my  1.  (in  vita?  periculura 
adductus  sum  :  caput  agitur).  Tho 
language  of  common  1.  (genus  ser- 
monis  usitatum).  To  use  the  lan- 
guage of  daily  or  common  1.  (ver- 
bis quotidianis  uti).  To  spend  one's 
1.  (omnem  suam  vitam  conuumere, 
or  setatem  agere  in  qa  re).  The 
rest  of  one's  I.  (qd  reliquum  est 
vitoe).  L.  and  spirit,  i.  e.  in  speak- 
ing (calor  et  vehementia).  To 
depart  this  1.  (abiro  e  vita :  hinc 
demigrare).  Adverbs  used  with 
vivere  are;  molliter,  delicate. (deii- 
cate  ac  molliter)  ;  parce,  contiueu- 
ter,  severe,  sobrie. 

Listen.  Listen  to  what  he  has  aone 
(videte,  quid  fecerit).  I  cannot 
listen  to  this  (aures  meae  a  com. 
memoratione  hujus  rei  abhorrent* 
qd  ferre  non  possum). 


t  t.  t.  a  condemned  person's  :  CS  vita-  [<;•'•- 
cere,  is  •  gentral  expression. 


S24 


VOCABULARV- 


M. 

Manny;  Recollection.  As  lar  as 
my  m.  or  r.  goes  (ut  mea  est  me- 
moria).  To  recall  or  bring  athg  to 
aby's  r.  (ci  qd  m  memoriam  redi- 
gere,  reducere.  qm  in  memoriam  cs 
rei  reducere).  Athg  has  slipped 
my  re  (memoria.  qd  excessit,  de- 
lapsum  est).  To  retain  a  lively  r. 
of  aby  (cs  memoriam  vivam  tene- 
re).  To  renew,  to  exercise  the 
m.  (memoriam  renovare  or  redinte- 
grare ;  exercere).  To  refresh  the 
m.,  or  rub  up  the  r.  (memoriam  re- 
fricare).  In  my  r.  (mea  memoria). 
In  the  r.  of  man  (post  homiuum 
memoriam  :  after  negatives).  To 
have  a  {rood  m.  (memoria  vigere). 

Mind.  Emotions  of  the  m.  (mentis 
perturbationes).  To  apply  one's 
self  to  athg  with  one's  whole  m. 
(tota  mente  in  qd  incumbere). 
Athg  comes  into  my  m.,  or  oc- 
curs to  me  (qdt  in  mentem  mihi 
venit).  Recall  to  mind  what,  &c. 
(redite  in  memoriam,  qui,  &c.) 
Athg  brings  the  recollection  of  aby 
to  m.  (qd  cs  memoriam  affert).  To 
dazzle  aby's  m.  (ci  animi  aciem 
pioestringere).  To  be  of  another  m. 
(in  alia  voluntate  esse).  Not  to 
mind  [=  be  anxious]  about  aby 
(de  qo  nihil  laborare :  ne  quid,  of 
course,  when  necessary).  To  blunt 
or  dull  the  powers  of  the  m.  (aciem 
ingeniL,  aivmi,  m  ^'ltis  prjostringere. 

a.) 

Mistake.     See  Error. 

Must.    He  m.  have  done  so  and  so, — 

when  the  m.  is  an  inferenc.   (pa- 

tandus  est  fecisse). 


N. 


flame;  To  enlist.  ;  Anonymous.  To 
give  a  n.  to  athg,  or  impose  a  n.  on 
athg  (nomen  ci  rei  ponere  or  impo- 
nere).     To  receive  a  n.  fm  athg 


t  The  thing  may  be  subst.,  infin.,  or 
sentence  with  ut.  The  thing  may  also 
be  in  the  gen. :  in  mentem  mini  venit  88 


(ex  qa  re  nomen  reperiret).  Yen 
that  I  think  is  his  name  (nam,  «l 
opinor,  hoc  nomen  est).  To  cal. 
athg  by  its  own  n.,  a  n.  of  its  owu 
(qd  proprio  nomine  eignare).  To  e 
(nomen  or  nomina  dare,  profiteri, 
edere).  To  answer  to  one's  n.  (ad 
nomen  respondere).  To  call  them 
over  by  n.  (nominatim  citare).  His 
n.  stands  high  amongst  advocates* 
(cs  nomen  in  patronis  magnum  est; 
A  certain  foreigner  Camelus  by  n 
(qnidam  hospes,  nomine  Camelo  o? 
Ca:neli):  whose  n.  was  Camelus 
(cui  erat  nomen  Camelo  or  Came- 
lus: seld.  Cameli).  An  a.  letter 
(litene  sine  nomine  script®).  An 
a.  paper  (libel  1  us  sine  auctore  pro- 
positus). A.  poen-,<5  (carmina  in- 
certis  auctoribus  vulgata).  In  aby's 
n.  (cs  verbis,  or  cs  nomine?).  To 
be  free  in  n.  (verbo  esse  liberum). 
Good-Name ;  Reputation ;  Good- 
Opinion  ;  Credit.  A  g.-n.  is  bet- 
ter than  money  (bona  existimatio 
praestat  pecuniis).  My  g-n.  is  at 
stake  (mea  existimatio  agitur).  No- 
thing could  have  happened  that 
would  be  more  injurious,  or  preju- 
dicial, to  my  g.-n.  (nihil  mihi  at' 
existimationem  turpius  potuit  acci- 
dere).  To  endanger  or  risk  one's 
g.-n.  or  r.  (venire  in  disc  rime  n  ex- 
istimationis).  To  court  the  g.-o.  oj 
men,  i.  e.  by  some  bad  meavs  (ex- 
istimationi  se  homiuum  venditare). 
A  man  of  no  r. ;  of  such  r.  (home 
sine  existimatione ;  ea  existima- 
tione).  To  leave  my  r.  or  g.-n.  in 
aby's  hands  (committere  ci  existi- 
mationem meam).  To  get  some  c 
(qm  accipere  existimationem).  To 
get  the  c  of  athg  without  deserving 
it  (falso  in  earn  venire  existimatio- 
nem). To  recover  one's  r.  (existi- 
mationem amissam  reconciliarej 
To  suffer  in  one's  r. ;  one's  r.  sutlers 
(de  existimatione  sua'qd  perdere  or 
deperdere.  detrimeutum    eLis'ima- 


t  Or  ab  qa  re  nomen  trahere. 

i  Cs  verbis,  if  a  message  is  put  in  aby'* 
mouth:  cs  nomine,  when  an  inferior  acta 
in  the  name,  and  by  the  authoritj  of  * 
superior 


VOCAIHI.AKY. 


325 


tiouis    facere). Other    phrase* 

are:  cs  existimatioui  conanlere, 
servire:  cs  existimatiouem  violare, 
offender*,  oppognare :  defenders, 
tueri;  existimatiouem  conservare,re- 
tincre. Existimatio  int«gra  (un- 
blemished), praeclara,  sanctissima. 
existimatio  iu  discrimen  venit  (is 
endangered). 

rily.  This  does  not  n.  prove 
that  (hoc  nihil  necessitatis  adfert, 
cur,  &,c.  with  subj.) 

O. 

Oath,  To  ohserve  my  o.  (jusjiirandum 
■enram,  coneervare).  To  break  an 
o.  (jusjiirandum  nejjligere,  violare, 
relinquere).  To  bind  aby  by  o. 
(jurejurando  qui  astringere,  ob- 
atringere,  obligare).  Tlie  sanctity 
of  an  o.  (jurisjurandi  religio).  Not 
to  believe  aby  on  his  o.  (jurisjurandi 
iideni  ci  abrogara).  To  draw  up 
an  oath  (jusjurandum  concipere)* 
To  give  aby  one's  o.  (jusjiirandum 
ci  dare).  To  make  aby  repeat  an 
o.  after  me  ;  or  to  make  a  man 
take  an  o.  in  words  prescribed  by 
me  (in  mea  verba  am  jusjurandum 
adig< 

Olijcrt.  O.'s  of  sense,  or  of  our  senses 
(qua?  sub  sensus  cadunt ;  or  qua? 
s'li.-Jms  subjecta  sunt).  To  make 
it  one's  first  o.  to  do  something  (id 
.  ut.  &C.)  This  ought  to  be 
their  Irst  o.,  that  (hue  omnia  OS  re- 
ferenda sunt,  ut — )•  To  make 
athg  one's  first  o.,  or  pursue  athg 
u  one's  tirst  o.  (omnia  ad  qd  revo- 
.  refena,  or  omnict  qa  re  metiri ; 
hue  omnia  referre,  ut).  Their  o. 
in  doing  this  was  very  ditferent 
from  what,  &.c.  (hoc  longe  alio 
tpeetabat  atone,  &c.) 

Obs'ucle.  Athg  is  an  o.  in  the  way 
of  accomplishing  athg  (est  qd  im- 
pediment ad  rem).  To  place  an 
o.  in  the  way  of  performing  or  ac- 
complishing athg  (ci  rei  moram  at- 
one impedimentum  inferre).  To 
conquer  o.'s  (impedimenta  superare). 
To  place  an  o.  or  impediment  in 
aby's  way  (moram  ci  afferre  or  in- 
terponere). 

Odium;   Unpcpularity.    T)  bring,  or 


endeavor  to  bring,  aby  into  »  (iu 
vidium  ci  conflare  or  faeere  .  T< 
incur  the  o.  (invidiam  subire}  Tc 
increase  aby's  unpopularity  ^cs  ir*- 
vidiam  au^ere,  innammare). 

Opinion.  !See  Judgment.  In  my  o 
(ut  opinio  nostra  est,  ut  mea  feii 
opinio).  Opinions  are  hnplantec 
(inseruntur) :  aro  rooted  up  (evel- 
lunturt) :  are  imbibed  (imbibuntur) 
prevail  amongst  men  (animos  homi- 
num  pervaduut):  are  shaken  o! 
weakened  (labefactantur,  minuun- 
tur) :  are  given  up  (remittuntur  or 
deponnntnr):  are  confirmed  (con- 
finnautur) :  are  maintained  or  sup 
ported  (defenduntur) :  wear  away 
gradually  or  in  time  (diuturnitute 
extabescunt).  His  prese  at  political 
o.'s  (ea  quffi  de  republica  nunc 
sentit  or  seutiat).  To  be  driven  I'm 
an  o.  (de  opinione  dejici,  depelli). 

Opportunity.  [()rrasiu,facultus,  &lc. 
See  Dod.  occasio.]  As  soon  as  he 
saw  an  o.  (simul  ac  primum  ei  oc- 
casio visa  esti).  An  o.  is  offered 
(obfertur) :  is  given  (datur) :  is  had 
(habetur,  tenetur) :  is  let  go  or  slip 
(omittitur) :  is  wanting  (deest;  :  is 
seized  (arripitur).  To  get  an  o 
(occasionem  nancisci).  U  I  have, 
or  shall  have,  an  o.  (si  fuerit  occa- 
sio. si  occasio  tulerit).  To  give  abv 
an  o.  (facere  ci  potestatem).  To 
make  the  most  of  an  o.  (occasionem 
urgSre). 

Owe.  To  consider  one's  self  to  owe 
one's  life  to  fortune,  children,  &c 
to  aby  (ab  qo  se  habere,  vitam,  foi- 
tunas,  liberos,  arbitrary). 


Part  (i.  e.  in  a  play).  To  act  this  p 
of  compassion  (lias  partes  miseri- 
cordice  agere).  To  uiidertako  the 
p.  of  athg  (cs  rei  partes  raaeipere^ 
To  play  the  first  p.  or  fiddl#  (primal 
agere).  T:  surrender  or  otf'cr  the 
first  p.  in  athg  to  aby  (ci||  cs  roj 
primas  deferre) 


t  Qd  ci  ex  ammo  evellere. 

t  Simnlac  polestas  prunum  data  i 

i)  In  Pison.  ii.  $  25.    See  Life. 

il  Or  ad  qui. 


826 


VOCABULARY. 


Part ;  Share.  To  call  or  invite  aby 
to  a  share  (in  partem  vocare). 

Pathetic.  To  utter  in  a  very  p. 
manner  (magna  cum  misericordik 
pronuntiare). 

Peace.  To  sue  for  p.  (pacem  petere, 
precibus  exposcere,  orare).  To  ob- 
tain p.  (p'acem  impetrare).  To 
make  p.  (pacem  facere,  conficere, 
tonstituere,  componere — with  aby, 
cum  qo)  To  offer  aby  terms  of  p. 
(ci  ultro  ^acis  conditiones  ferre). 
To  break  the  p.  (pacem  frangere). 
To  live  in  p.  with  aby  (concorditer 
v.vere  cum  qo).  Without  conclu- 
ding a  p.  (pace  infecta).  To  treat 
for  p.  ^agere  de  pace).  Negotia- 
tions for  p.  are  on  foot  (de  pace 
agitur). 

Plea.     See  Excuse. 

Pleasure.  To  be  productive  of  p. 
(voluptatis  efficientem  esse).  To 
produce  or  cause  p.  (voluptatem 
conciliare,  parere).  To  derive  p. 
fm  athg  (voluptatem  ex  re  capere, 
percipere).  To  be  moderate  in  the 
pursuit  of  p.  (voluptatis  fruendae 
modum  tenere).  With  p.  (lubens, 
lubenter).  With  great  p.  (luben- 
tissime).  P.  tickles  the  senses 
(voluntas  sensus  titillat).  To  give 
one  »  ,'f  up  to  p.  (voluptatibus  se 
dederA,  or  totum  se  tradere).  To 
have  a  pleasurable  recollection  of 
athg  (cs  rei  recordatione  frui).  To 
ncrease  p.  (voluptatem  augere, 
arnplificare).  To  be  soothed — cor- 
rupted (voluptate  deleniri — cor- 
rumpi).  Inclined  to  p.  (ad  volup- 
tatem propensus). 
Possession.  To  put  aby  in  p.  of  an- 
other's property  (immittere  qm  in 
c?  bona ;  or  mittere  qm  in  posses- 
sionem bouorum  cs).  To  eject  a 
person  fin — (de  possessione  'dimo- 
vere  et  dejicere :  possessione  de- 
pellere,  deturDare).  To  remain  in 
p.  of  athg  (in  cs  rei  possessione 
manere  or  permanere)  To  make 
athg  ore's  own  by  long  and  unin- 
terrupted p.  (usucapere  qd).  To 
give  up  p.  (possessione  cedere,  de- 
cedere).  To  be  in  p.  of  (esse  in 
possessione  cs  rei.) 
\rvwer.  To  ha\  e  aby  cr  athg  in  one's 


p.  (qm  or  qd  in  polestate  sua  ha 
bere).  To  have  p.  oi  life  ana  death 
(vita?  necisque  potestatem  nabere 
C.)  Athg  is  in  my  p.  (siturn  esj 
qd  in  potestate  me<1 ;  est  qd  facul 
tatis  meae).  To  fall  into  aby's  p 
(in  cs  potestatem  eadere).  To  re 
duce  under  oue's  p.  (redigere  in 
suam  ditionem  ac  potestatem).  To 
submit  to  the  p.  of  aby  (se  sub  ci 
pot'eKatem  subjicere). 

Promise.  To  make  a  p.  (promissum 
facere).  To  abide  by  a  p.  (pro- 
misso  stare) :  to  fulfil  or  perform 
(promissum  efficere,  solvere) :  to 
make  good  (promisso  satisfacere) : 
to  keep  (promissum  servare)  :  not 
to  depend  much  or  pteee  reliance 
on  p.'s  (promissis  non  -/aide  pen- 
dere).  To  claim  fm  aby  the  fulfil- 
ment of  a  p.  (promissum  a  qo  exi- 
gere). 

Provisions.     See  Corn. 

Q. 

Question.  The  q.  is  put ;  is  put  to 
the  vote  ;  is  determined  (discessio 
fit — of  questions  in  the  senate, 
when  the  ayes  and  noes  arranged 
themselves  on  different  sides). 

R. 

Reason.  I  can  give  a  r.  for  my  be 
lief  (cur  credam  afferre  possum) 
I  have  good  r.'s  for  being  silent,  oi 
for  my  silence  (constat  nobis  silen- 
tii  nostri  ratio).  To  give  the  r.  of 
or  for  athg  (rationem  cs  rei  afferre, 
dicere).  To  explain  the  r. ;  a  plan 
(explicare,  exponere  rationem). 
With  reason  (optimo  jure ;  jure 
meritoque  ;  jure  ac  merito)      And 

•  not  without  r.  (nee  injuria). 

Religion  (pietas  erga  Deum,  of  per- 
sonal religion;  res  divined,  of  re- 
ligion considered  objectively).  To 
apostatize  from  the  r.  of  one'a 
country  (sacra  patria  deserere) 
To  embrace  or  be  converted  to  the 
Christian  r.  (sacra  Cnristiana  sus 
cipere,  especially  of  a  body). 

Report.  A  r.  reaches  aby  (fama  ad 
qm  perfertur) :  aby's  ears  (ad  ci 
aures  pervenit).  To  spread  a  r.  of 
athg  (famam  cs  rei  dissipare).     A 


VOCABULARY. 


327 


r.  begins  to  bo  whispered  about  or 
circulated  from  any  place  (lama 
ab  qo  loco  mauat).  A  r.  is  becom- 
ing current;  there  is  a  r.  in  men's 
mouth  (farna  surgit  or  nascitur). 
R.  says  (fama  nuutiat)  To  hear  j 
athg  by  common  r.  (communi  fama 
atque  sermone  audire  qd  de  qa  re). 

Reputation.     See  Name. 

Rest.  Not  to  let  aby  r.  (qm  quies- 
cero  or  requiescere  non  pati).  To 
r.  after  long  labors  (ex  diuturno 
labore  quiescere).  Not  to  have  or 
take  a  moment's  r.  (nullam  partem 
quietis  capere).  To  be  composing 
or  preparing  one's  self  for  r.  (quioti 
se  dare  or  tradere). 

Ueward.  To  give  a  r.  to  aby  (pree- 
mium  ci  dare,  tribuere).  To  honor 
aby  with  a  r. ;  to  confer  a  r.  on  aby 
(praemio  qm  donare,  decorare,  afli- 
cere :  prcemium  ci  deferret).  To 
be  rewarded,  to  receive  a  r.  (praemio 
donari).  To  recompense  with  a  r. 
(remunerari  qm  praemio).  To  be 
rewarded  or  receive  a  r.  for  athg 
(proemium  or  fructum  cs  rei  capere, 
percipere,  ferre) :  for  athg  by  aby 
(fructus  cs  rei  ferre  ex  qo).  I  con- 
sider myself  richly  rewarded  (mag- 
num rei  fructum  percepisse  videor). 
To  earn  a  r.  (premium  cousequi). 

Risk.  To  r.  athg,  or  expose  athg  to 
a  r.  (qd  in  aleam  dare  :  ire  in  aleam 
cs  rei).  To  r.  one's  life  (commit- 
tere  se  periculo  mortis).  To  take 
the  r.  of  athg  on  one's  self  (rem 
periculi  sui  facere). 

Kout  (pellere,  profligaro'    S^e  Flight. 

S. 

Say.  Nothing  is  said  about  aby  (do 
qosilentium  est).  After  much  had 
been  said  on  both  side.?  (multis  ver- 
bis ultro  citroquo  habitis).  To  s. 
athg  merely  to  please  ahy  (qd  auri- 
bus  cs  dare  :  cs  auribus  servire.  C.) 
As  the  saying  is  (ut  aiunt). 

School.  To  open  a  s.  (ludurn  aperire). 
To  put  a  boy  to  s.  with  ahy  (qm  ci 
in  disciplinam  tradere)      To  send  a 


t  Premium  ci  deferre,  of  a  state  reward- 
ng  met  \  by  a  public  aet,  by  public  hon- 
ors, fee 


boy  to  a  pub  ic  s.  r  (scholar  im  fre« 
quentiffi  et  velut  publicis  prajcep- 
toribus  tradere). 

Sentence.     See  Judgment. 

Share.     See  Part. 

Side.  To  be  on  a  person's  s.  (ab  qo 
stare  :  cum  qo  sentire :  to  be  of  the 
same  way  of  thinking  on  political 
questions).  Athgt  is  on  aby's  h 
(qd  cum  aliquo  facit). 

Stage.  To  hiss  off  the  s.  (exsibilare, 
or  exsibilare  et  oxplodere).  To  ap- 
pear on  the  s.  (in  scenam  prodire). 

Study.  To  intermit  one's  learned 
s.'8  (intermittere  studia  doctrinu?) 
To  pursue  these  s.'s  (hoec  studia 
colere).  To  have  made  the  arts 
one's  s.  (artibus  suum  studium  de- 
disse).  To  return  to  these  s.'s  (hose 
studia  repetere,  renovare,  recolere) 
See  Letter  (3). 


Timc.§  Before  the  t.  (ante  tempos) 
To  leave  one's  self  no  t.  for,  dee. 
(nullum  sibi  spatium  relinquere  ad 
&.c.)  To  try  to  gain  t.  (spatium  oi 
morain  interponere).  All  the  t.  1 
can  spare  fm  athg  (quod  mihi  do  re 
qo.  temporis  datur).  To  have  t.  to 
do  athg  (cs  rei  faciendae  tempus 
habere).  Nor  was  there  t  to,  &c. 
(nee  fuit  spatium  ad,  &c.)  ft  is  t. 
to,  &c.  (tempus  est  with  ger.  in  di, 
infin.  or  ut).  He  thought  there 
was  no  more  t.  to  lose  (nihil  ultra 
differeudum  ratus  est).  He  says 
there  is  no  t.  to  lose  (differeudum 
esse  negat).  To  find  t.  (tempus 
lucrari,  nancisci).  To  spend  t 
(tempus  in  qa  re  ponere  or  const i 
mere ;  ad  qm  rem  conferre).  Tc 
watch  one's  t.  fur  athg  (tempus  ci 
rei  observare).  To  choose  my  or  a 
convenient  t.  (tempus  cs  rei  scite 
et  commode  capere).  To  get  a 
convenient  or  proper  t.  (tempus 
idoneum  uancisci).  To  let  the  i. 
for  action  slip  (tempus  rei  gerendaa 


t  To  send  a  boy  to  a  srtool.  opp.  to 
keeping  him  at  home,  studia  extra  liner 
prqferre.     I'lin. 

t  Truth,  Veritas. 

it  Immediately  or  some  time  ifteiwaida 
confestim  aut  ex  intervallo 


VOCABULARY. 


dimittere)  To  sleep  the  t.  away 
'tempori  indormire,  Phil.  3,  14). 
To  happen  at  a  most  inconvenient 
t.  (in  alienissimum  tempus  cadere). 
To  be  over  in  a  moment  of  t.  (fieri 
ad  punctum  temporis,  C.  Tusc.  1, 
34,  82). 

U. 

Under.  To  be  u  aby's  command 
(esse  sub  cs  imperio).  To  reduce 
u.  aby's  power  (sub  cs  potestatem 
redigere). 

Understanding.  Our  u.  comprehends 
(intelligentia  nostra  capit  qd).  A 
man  of  u  (in  qo  inest  or  est  intelli- 
gentia). To  adapt  atlig  to  the  u. 
of  ordinary  men  (ad  popularem  in- 
telligentiam  qd  accommodare.) 

Unhealthiness.  To  escape  from  the 
bad  effects  of  the  unhealthy  season 
(alwss^  ab  injuria  temporis). 

Unpopularity.     See  Odium. 


Vex.  To  be  vexed  at  athg  (moles- 
tiam  capere  or  trahere :  molestia 
affici ;  all  with  ex  qa  re).  To  be 
vexed  that  (segre,  graviter,  moleste 
fero  ;  with  ace.  and  inf.) 

Victory.  To  gain  a  v.  over  aby  (vic- 
toriatn  ferre  or  referre  ex  qo :  vic- 
toriam  reportare  ab  or  de  qo). 

View.  To  dissent  fm  this  v.  (ab  hac 
ratione  dissentire).  To  do  athg 
with  the  v.  of  (facere  qd  eo  consi- 
lio,  ut,  &c.) 

W. 

Way.  To  make  w.  for  aby  (dece- 
dere  ci  de  via.  dare  ci  viam). 
These  things  may  be  taught  in  two 
w.'s:  or  there  are  two  w.'s  of 
teaching  these  things  (haec  dupli- 
cem  habent  docendi  viam).  To 
search  out  for  new  w.'s  (inusitatas 
vias  indagare).  To  desert  old  ways 
(vbs  tritas  relinquere). 

\Vord.  Not  to  get  a  w.  fm  aby  (ver- 
bum ex  qo  nullum  elicere).  Not  to 
be  able  to  utter  a  w.  (verbum  om- 
lino  nullum  facere  posse).  To 
defino  one'a  w.'s  v verba  definire  et 
deac-ribere).     I  wish  to  say  a  couple 


of  w.'s  Ur  you  (tribus  verbis  te  volo) 
By  w.  of  mouth  (verbo,  opp.  scrip 
tura).  To  have  w.'s  with  aby  (al« 
tercari  cum  qo).  To  have  nevei 
had  any  w.'s  with  aby  (nullo  verbo 
concertasse  cum  qo).  To  was 
w.'s  (verba  frustra  consumere).  To 
listen  to  aby's  w.'s  (loquenti  auren 
pieebere).  The  w.  plough  (verbum 
aratri :  not  verbum  aratrumt).  Not 
has  this  w.  any  other  meaning  (ne- 
que  ulla  alia  huic  verbo  subjecta 
notio  est,  nisi).  To  use  a  w.  (ver- 
bo uti :  but  verbum  ponere  in  qo  if 
to  use  against  a  person).  To 
weigh  the  force  of  w.'s  (diligentef 
examinar6  verborum  pondera).  The 
most  appropriate  w.'s  (verba  maxi- 
me  cujusque  rei  propria).  To  give 
up  an  opinion  for  a  w.  (verbo  de 
sententia  desistere.  C.)  This  word 
is  usually  applied  to  athg  (hoc  no- 
men  de  qa  re  poni  solet).  To  in- 
clude two  notions  in  this  w. :  or  to 
include  two  things  in  the  notion  of 
this  w.  (huic  verbo  duas  res  subji- 
cere.  Fin,  2,  4,  3).  To  attach  a 
meaning  to  a  w.  (vocabulo,  verbo, 
&c,  notionem  or  senteutiam  subji- 
cere).  To  which  the  w.  virtue  i? 
usually  applied  (in  quo  noraen  poni 
solet  virtutis). 


Yoke.  To  place  a  y.  on  aby  (jugum 
ci  imponere,  prop,  and  fig.)  To 
unyoke  (juguin  ci  solvere  or  de- 
mere).  To  deliver  aby  fm  a  y. 
(jugum  a  cervicibus  cs  depellere) 
To  free  one's  self  fm,  or  shake  off, 
a  y.  (jugum  excutere.  jugo  se  ex- 
uere.  jugum  exuere,  propr.  and 
fig. :  exuere,  to  do  it  gradually ; 
to  slip  it  off).  To  bring  aby  undei 
the  y.  of  slavery  (ci  jugum  servi- 
tutis  injungere).  To  submit  to  the 
y.  (jugum  accipere). 


t  If  the  word  in  apposition  is  an  adj.. 
the  following  passage  of  Cicero  is  a  good 
example:  "To  the  word  happy,"  4c-— 
huic  verbo,  quum  btatum  dicitnus,  4"C-  Tusi 
5,29. 


EXTRACTS   FROM   THE   "  ANTIKARBARUS."* 


Accuracy,  ditigentia,    cunt,   [accuratio 

once  Cic.  Brut.  67,  238. ) 
Act  a  play,  doeera  fanulam   {of  those 

who  get  it  up,  ()'♦(•.,  and  of  the  author)  : 
Ogere  {of  the  player  acting  his 
part.) 
again  and  again,  etiara  atque  ctiam 
(  =  cery  earnestly  with  verb* 
of  entreating).  =■  sev  eral  times, 
./ .-  iterum  et  or  ac  tcrtio  :  itc- 
ruin  et  seepius;t  iterum  ac  tertium. 
C. 

,ist  the  stream,  amne  or  flumine 
rso  [not  fluvio  adv.]. 
(1)  /=  77wA-e  an  agreement; 
ncnt  with  any  body,  mini  cum 
mvenit.      \l  c  agreed,  inter  nos 
oHivf'iiit.     Even  the  consuls  were  not 
■jhly  agreed,  ne  inter  consules 
quidem  Ipeoa  satis  conveniebat.    L. 
[not  convenio  cum  quo.]    (2)  =  cor- 
respond with,,  answer  to,  consentire 
cum  qua  re.     (3)   Of  a  thing  it  is 
used   personally:    pax  convenerat: 
quae  convenerant :  si  posset  inter  eos 
quid  convenire.  C. 
Almighty,  summits,  maximal  [not  om- 
nipdtena,  except  as  a  theological  term] 
or  by  Driis  o  nly  for  '  the  Almighty. 
The  Ramans  used  Optimus    M;i.\i- 
mus  with  the  name  of  Jupiter. — 
Jupiter  ().  M. 
Appear    =    '  make     his    appearance 
amongst  us'  {of one  who  is  dead,  q°«c): 
( sail 

=  'seem,'  videri  {not  apparere). 

rr  '  to  be    manifest,'    apparere 
{not  videri). 
Appear  [in.  a  dream\  ostenckre  se  cui 


in  somnio ;  videri  cui  in  somnis ;  per 
somnum,  quiete,  perquietutn  ;  whidi 
likeness  appears  in  their  bodies,  quae 
similitude)  in  corporibus  appfiret.  C 
Appear  in  any  body' s  eyes,  judicto  CUJUI 
esse ;  ab  quo  existimari ;  videri  cui  • 
esse  apud  quern. 

Day    appears,     dies      venit 


{comes) :  illueeseit  {begins  to  shine). 
Assert,  dicere,  allirmare  [not  a-ssererej. 
Author,  scriptor. 
Authority.     An  authority  {used  of  a 

person),  auctor.  A  weighty  authority, 

locuples  auctor. 

Bodily  {pleasures'),  corporis  (volup- 
tatfs).  <Joi'i>oreus  is  '  consisting  of  a 
body.' 

Break.  To  break  down  a  bridge,  j>on- 
tem  rescindere,  dissolvcre,  interrum- 
l>ere  [not  pontem Ttunpeie  or  irangere]. 

Classical  author,  scriptor  optimus, 
praestantissimus ;  or  scriptor  primae 
classis.  Cic.  [Gellius  introduced 
scriptor  classicus,  as  opposed  tc 
scriptor  proletarius.] 

Command  {an  army),  pranosFe. 

Compassion.  From  compassion,  mite* 
ricordia  captus,  ductus,  or  permotus. 

Demagogues,  concionatores :  popu- 
lares,  or  populares  homines,  [if 
demagGgi  be  used  quos  Graeci  oncunt, 
or  ut  Greece*  verbo  utar  should  be 
added.] 

Each  other,  inier  se ;  of  what  is  done 
mutually  or  reciprocally: 
not  invicem. 


*  These  Extracts  are  taken  from  a  larger  work  oi  Mr.  Arnold's,  principally 
yn  the  Latin  Particles,  which  is  in  course  of  preparation  for  the  American 
I  ublic. 

t  To  ask  again  and  asrain,  etiam  atque  etiam;  or  iterum  et  seepius  rogare 
Hut  etiam  atque  etiam  is  never  really  numerical. 


330 


.EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  "  AN^IBARBARUS.' 


Exasperate  :  exacuere  (Nep.) ;  in- 
fensum  reddere  :  iram  cujus  incen- 
dere.  [Exasperare,  exacerbare.  Liv.] 

Experience,  usus  rerum,  usus  [not  ex- 
perientia].  Prom  experience,  re,  usu, 
exitu  doctus,  expertus  -.from  my  own 
experience,  expertus  in  me,  expertus. 

\  Fish  out  at  kg  from  aoy,  &u  qo  qu  expi»- 

cari,  C. 
Flesh :  in  '  to  lose  flesh?  '  gain  flesh,1 4rc. 

corpus  amittere  [not  carnem]. 
Fleshly  {of  pleasures,  $c),   by  gen., 

corporis. 

Greek.    To  speak  Greek  or  good  Greek, 

Greece  loqui. 
Grow  (an  old  man,  fyc.  ='  become1),  fieri. 

IIealth,va]etudo.~ Good  health,  sanitas: 
bona  or  prospera  valetudo  (not  vale- 
tudo  only). — salus  (the  continued  state 
or  preservation  of  good  health.) 

Imagine  (1)  —  to  form  a  representation 
in  the  mind,  aniino  cogitare,  conci- 
pere,  compiecti  : — animo  fingere,  ef- 
fingere ;  cogitatione  fingere  or  depin- 
gere  : — proponere  sibi  ante  oculos 
anirnumque  :  (2)  :=  conjecture,  con- 
jecturam  capere,  facere:  conjicere 
[f£jTimaginari  belongs  to  the  silver 
age).  (3)  =s  to  entertain  an  unfounded 
notion,  opinari,  in  opinione  esse :  in- 
duisse  sibi  falsara  cujus  rei  per- 
Buasionem.  Q.  quid  somniare 
(  =  dream  it).  (4)  /  imagine  (insert- 
ed in  a  sentence),  opinor:  ut  opinor. 

Impure.  A)i  impure  style,  inquinatua 
senno,  inquinata  oratio. 

Impute  a  thing  to  anybody,  tribuere, 
attribuere,  adscribere,  adsignare, 
acceptum  referre  (quid  cui).  [1m- 
putare,  Quint.  Plin.jun.]. 

Inspire  anybody  with  hope,  fear,  tyc, 
spem,  admirationem,  fofmidinem, 
cui  injicere. 

anybody  with  a  desire,  quern 

cupiditate  cujus  rei  faciendae  inci- 
tare,  or  incitare  ad  aliquid  faciendum. 

Inspired,  afflatus  numine  divino;  in- 
stinctu  divino  perculsus  ;  instinctus 
divino  spiritu. 

Invite  (to  supper,  &c),  invitare  (by 
word  of  mouth)  :  vocare  (by  a  slave). 

Key  of  a  country,  janua.  ['  quum  earn 
urbem  sibi  Mithridates  Asiae  januam 
fore  putasset,  qua  effractfi  et  revulsa 
tota  pateret  provincial  C] 

Latin.  To  sneak  Latin  or  good  Latin, 
Latine  dicere.  loqui. 


Mercifilly  [not  misericorditer,  but]  cvai 
misericordia  or  miseratione,  miseri- 
cordia captus,  &c.  To  deal  merci- 
fully with  anybody,  miseri  cord  em 
esse  in  aliquem  ;  misericordia  uti  in 
aliquem ;  misericordem  se  preeber<« 
in  ahquem. 

Offer  vwlence,  vim  afferre  alicui. 

One  or  two,  unus  et  alter,  unus  itemque 
alter.  Unus  alterve  (  =  one  or  at 
most   two). 

Open  a  way  or  road  (e.  g.  by  the  sword), 
viam  aperire,  patefacere.     L. 

Opportunity,  occasio,  locus  or  facultas ; 
tempus  (alicujus  rei  faciendae).  An 
opportunity  of  doing  any  thing  is  of- 
fered, locus  faciendae  alicujus-  rei 
datur. 

■j Palm:  to  bear  the  palm,  palmam 
ferre. 

Pay  honours  to  anybody,  cui  honoreg 
habere,  tribuere :  honore  aliquem 
afficere  (not  honorem  cui  exhibere). 

Prayers.  To  offer  prayers,  precation- 
em  or  preces  facere,  preces  Deo  adhi- 
bere  (C).  preces  mittere  (Lit.). 
Obs.  preces  fundere  is  poet. 

Preserve  (states,  tf*c.),  conservare. 

Probable,  verisimilis  [not  probabilis^ 
whichmeans, '  respectable,'  '  tolerably 
good  '].  It  seems  probable  that  Milo 
killed  Clodius,  Milo  Clodium  inter- 
fecisse  v  i  d  e  t  u  r  (but  verisimilis  is 
quite  correct). 

Produce  a  passage,  to,  locum  (versum, 
&c.)  afferre. 

witnesses,   producere  or  pro- 

ferre  testes  :  to  produce  evidence,  tes- 
timonium proferre. 

a  reason,  to,  causas  afferre. 


Pure  (of  style),  purus  et  emendatus. 
Purity  of  style,  integritas,  castitas  or 
sinceritas  orationis. 

Quote  an  author,  to,  producere,  proferre 
scriptorem  (producere,  proferre  tes- 
tes being  used,  but  not  locum). 

a  passage,  locum  afferre,  proferru 

[not  producere]. 

Reason,  causa,  when  =  *  ground,1  '  ma 
tive?  To  bring  another  reason,  al- 
teram afferre  rationem  or  causam. 

Severe  (of  a  disease),  gravis. 

Shed  tears,    lachrymas   effundero    o» 

profundere. 
Shed  blood  =  kill,  occidere. 
Slay  oneself  (lay  violent  hands  on  one 


EXTRACTS  FROM   TUB   "  ANTIBARBARUS. 


331 


self,  die  by  one's  own  hands,  commit 
mucide\  su  lnterimere,  mortem  sibi 
consciscere;  mortem  or  vim  sibi  in- 
ferrej  s<-  raultare  morte.* 

Speak.      The  thing  speaks  for  itself,  si 

res  verba  deetderaret,  ac  non  pro  s  e 

ipso  loqueretur.  C. 
Style,  oratio,  dictio,  genus  scribend. or 

dicendi. 
-  To  express  oneself  in,  or  to  pos- 

gats  a  good  style  (of  a  Latin  author\ 


is,  oratione  emendatl  ct  r.atina  mi; 
emendate  et  Latine  dioere. 

Suicide  (to  commit),  mortem  sibi  con- 
sciscere ;  mortem  or  vim  sibi  inline  ; 
se  lnterimere,  &c.  ;  mortem  ultro 
oppetere  (when  the  death  is  not  catn- 
miltefl  hy  one's  own  hands  ;  i.  e.  U 
X  i  rt  j  it   not  actual^  suicide). 

IVunk  nighty  of,  <frc.,  do  aliquo  magni 
fice  sentire. 


♦  Aleo:  manua  sibi  afferre :  manu  albl  vitam  exhaurire.    (C.) 


ilNDEX   I, 

ENGLISH. 


[Q  stands  for  Questions.  —  The  numerals  refer  to  the  First  Part  of 
Latin  Prose  Composition.] 


A. 


A,  sometimes  translated  by  aliquis, 
quispiam,  or  quidam,  393. 

abandoned,  pcrditus. 

able  (to  be),  posse,  quire  (queo),  125,  e. 

Abdera  (of),  Abdentes,  G.  ae. 

abilities,  ingenium  (sing.). 

abound,  abundare  (abl.). 

about  (=  concerning),  de  (abi.,. 

about  (  =  nearly),  fere,  adv.  ;  circiter, 

*       prep. 

above  (such  an  age),  306,  and  Q,. 

absence  (in  his)j  abscns. 

absent  (to  be),  abesse,  227. 

abstain  from,  temperare  ab,  220. 

abundance  of,  abunde,  adv.  (gen.). 

acceptable,  gratus,  212. 

accident  (by),  casu. 

accompany,  comitari. 

accomplish,  conjidcre,  fee,  feet. 

account :  on  —  of,  ergo  ( gen.) :  207. 

accuse,  accusare ;  (if  not  in  a  court  of 
justice)  incusare(gen.  of  charge). 

accused-person,  reus. 

accustomed  (to  be),  solere,  solitus. 

acquainted,  to  become,  nos:ere,  385. 

acquit,  absolvere,  soiv,  solui  (gen.  of 
charge). 

acquit  of  a  capital  charge,  capitis  absol- 
vere. 

adapted,  accommodatus,  212. 

addition  :  in  —  to  this,  hue  accedit,  acce- 
debat,&c.,5l3. 

adherents  (his  own),  sui. 

adjure,  obtestari  (ace.). 

admire,  admirari. 

adopt  a  resolution,  consilium  inire  or 


capere. 
advantage,  emolument um. 


advantageous  :  to  be,  prodesse  (flat.). 
advantageous:    to  be  very — ,  magna 

utilitati  esse,  242  (3). 
adversity,  res  adversce. 
advice,  consilium. 
advise,   suadere  (dat.)    See  222;    mo- 

nere  (with   ace.  of  person) :   both 

with  iit,  ne,  by  75. 
affair,  res. 

afraid  :  to  be — ,  timere,  vereri,  S.  09,  e. 
afterwards,    postea:    with    nouns    of 

time:  post,  used  adverbially, 
after  (before  a  sentence),  postquam.  See 

514. 
after,  prep,  post  (with  ace). 
after  the  battle,  (confestim)  a  proslio. 
again  and  again,  etiam  alque  etiam. 
again  from  the  beginning,   ab  integro. 
against,  adversus  (ace.) ;  in  (with  ace. , 

of  feelings,  actions,  &c,  against  a 

person), 
against  his  will,  invitus  (adj.). 
against  the  will  of  Caius,  Caio  invito 

364. 
age  ( =-  time  of  life),  cetas,  atis. 
age  (of  that  or  such),  id&tatis  )  ipn    a 
age  (of  what  ?)  quid  cctatis  ?     )  1UU>  P- 
agitate,  perturbare. 
agitated   (having  his  mind),  incensus 

animum,  298. 
ago,  abhinc  (to  precede  the  sunst.  ot 

numeral),  305. 
agreeable,  gratus,  212. 
agreed  :  it  is  — ,  constat  (ace.  with  infin.). 
agricultural  operations,  res  rusticce. 
all,  omnis,  cunctus ;  ( =  whole),  uniw* 

sua,  totus. 
all  together,  cuncti  universi,  443. 
all  over  again,  ab  integro. 
all  taken  one  by  one,  singulU 


INDEX 


-ENGLISII. 


allowed  :  it  is  — ,  constat  {ace.  with 
in  fin). 

allowed  :  I  am — ,  licet  mihi. 

allow  it  to  happen,  committer*  ut. 

almost,  prope,  pane. 

almost:  J  —  think,  haud  scio  an,  161. 
(See  note  on  Dili'.  25) 

alone,  solus ;  or  (if  one  person)  units. 

Alps,  Alpcs,  G.  ium. 

already,  jam. 

also,  sometimes  translated  by  the  pro- 
noun idem,  387.   % 

ultar,  ara. 

although,  451,  and  Q.  on  §56. 

although  indeed,  quamquam  (indie.). 

always,  alter  supcrlat.  by  quisque.  See 

a  man  (  =  any :  indef.),  quis. 

amanuensis,  a  manu  serous. 

among,  inter. 

amongst  (a  people),  apud  with  ace. 

amuse,  delectare. 

and,  p.  18,  d ;  '  to  me  and  you,'  in  Lat. 
1  to  me  with  you,'  p.  78. 

and  that  too,  not—,  nee  is,  385. 

anger,  ira. 

angrv  :  to  be  — ,  irasci  (dat.):  succcr.r,zre 
(dot.)  222. 

Animal,  animal,  a! is. 

another,  alter,  era,  &c.  G.  altcrius :  an- 
swering to  { it  is  one  thin?,'  aliud, 
38. 

another  man's,  alienus. 

answer,  resjwndrre  (dat.). 

antiquity,  antiquitas. 

any  *  falter  expert),  omnis. 

any.     See  389. 

any  where  (=  any  whither),  usquam, 
402. 

any  man  may,  cujusvis  est.  (See 
389—92.) 

appeal  to,  appellare  (ace.). 

appear,  (=  aeerh\  videri  (risus). 

appear  (show  myself),  apparere. 

apply  vigorously  to,  incumbere  in  (with 
ace.  );  cubu,  cubit. 

approved  (valour,  &c.,)  spectatus. 

arms,  to  take,  arma  capcre. 

army,  exercitus,  Us. 

arrived  at:  men  have— ,  ventum  est, 
296. 

arrow,  tagitta. 

as,  after  tarn,  tali*,  tantus,  tot,  is,  quam, 
quant  us.  quulis,  quut,  respectively. 

a?,  aitir  ultra,  qui,  43  (or  ac,  atquc). 

aa  far  as  I  kn<»w,  quod  eciam,  5o. 

w  far  as  I  can,  quoa  dejus  jacere  pos- 
sum, 512. 


as  far  as  possible,         )  .junod  ejus  rer 

as  far  as  can  be  done,  ■>      potest,  512. 

as  it  were,  quasi. 

as  soon  as,  simulac;  ut  primum  ;  quum 
primum  ;  ubi;  ut,  512;  514. 

as  many  as  200,  ad  ducentos. 

as  not  to,  after  '  such '  or  '  so '  in  a  nega- 
tive sentence,  quin  (85) :  if  ' such- 
ox  '*o'  were  in  a  positive  sentence, 
ut  would  be  used  b>  66. 

ashamed  :  am  —  of,  pudet,  207. 

ask,  rogare. 

ask  pardon  for  a  fault,  delicti  zeniam 
petere. 

assault  (a  town),  oppugnare. 

assault :  to  accuse  of  an  — ,  reum  facert 
de  vi. 

assist,  auxiliari,  adjuvare,  opitulari; 
sublevare,  succurrere,  subvenire, 
(See  p.  81,  k.) 

at  anybody's  feet.     See  75,  1. 

at  once,  —  and ;  idem  —  idem.  396. 

at,  of  place  near  which  a  battle  is 
fought,  &c,  apud  (or  ad),  457. 

at  two  miles'  distance,  a  millibus  pas- 
suum  duobus}  348. 

at  two  miles  oil,  a  millibus  passuum 
duobus.         • 

Athens,  Athena. 

Athenian,  Atheniensis. 

attached  to,  amans;  diligens  (with 
gen.),  183. 

attack,  adgredi,  gressus ;  adoriri.  o^tvt 
(ace). 

attend  to,  attendere,  229. 

averse  to,  alienus,  212. 

avoid,  ritare. 

authority,  auctoritat. 

aware,  to  be,  intelligere. 


Baggage,    impedimenta,    pi.  (properly 

hindrances). 
banish,  pellcre  ex  civitate  (  pepul,pul*\ 
banished  from,  extorris  (abl.),  27o. 
banquet,  conririum. 
barbarian,   barbarus. 
base,  turpis. 
battle,  bellum. 

battle  of  Cannx,  pugna  Canncnsis. 
be  it  far  from  us.     See  note  t,  p.  40. 
bear,  ferre  (tul,  lat,  33). 
beasts,  fera. 

beaten  (to  be),  rajmlare  (ab). 
become,  fieri,  /actus  sum. 
become  acquainted  with,  noscere,  385. 


•  The  pronouns  and  adverbs  for  'any'  may  be  exhibited  in  a  convenient  and 


534 


INDEX  i. ENGLISH. 


becoming  (to  be)  decire  (ace.). 

befal,  acadere  (dat.). 

before,  adv.  antca. 

before,  prep,  ante  (ace). 

before  (stancing  before  a  sentencej, 

antequam,  498,  &c. 
before  one's  eyes,  ob  oculos. 
behold,  adspicere,  io,  spex,  spect. 
beg,  petere,  petiv,  petit,  ab. 
begin,  ccepisse  (began,  before  pass.  inf. 

cceptus  est). 
beginning,  initium. 
believe,  credere,  (dat.)  credid,  credit. 
believe,  I  can  scarcely  — ,  vix  credide- 

_  rim,  428,  and  note. 
believed,  I  am,  mihi  creditur,  283. 
belongs.     See  191. 
benefit,  benejicium. 
benefit,  v.  benefacere  (dat.). 
bereave,  orbare  (abl.). 
beseech,  obsecrare. 

bespatter  S  adsPer^ere  (aliquid  alicui, 
besprinkle,^  s'efsTm  ^^  ™ 
best,  opt'vmus. 

best  to  be  done,  )      ,.  ,.    ,    ,        x 

best  to  do,  \  opttmumfacta  (sup.). 

betrayer,  proditor. 

better,  melior. 

better :    it  is  —  (=  more  satisfactory, 

preferable),  satius  est,  1 16.  Ex.  34, 

p.  84. 


better :  it  would  have  been  — ,  satius  or 

utiliusfuit,  426(5). 
between,  inter. 

beware  of,  cavere,  cav,  eaut,  233. 
bird,  avis:  (great  bird)  ales.     Volucris 

=  any  winged  creature, 
black,  niger. 
blame,  culpare. 
bleed  afresh  (of  a  wound),  recrudesccrc, 

crudu. 
blessing:  a  —  on  your  valour!    macte 

virtute  esto!  280,  a. 
blind,  caucus. 
blood,  sanguis,   tnis,  m.  (when  shed, 

cruor). 
blot  out,  delere,  deler,  delet. 
boast,  gloriari,  (abi.)  also  de,  in,  273. 
noast,  to  make  the  same,  idem  gloriari. 
body,  corp-us,  oris. 
border  on,  adjacere,  229. 
born,  natus :  born  to,  natus  ad. 
born,  to  be,  nasci  (natus). 
both  —  and  :  et  —  et. 
bounds.     See  Exceed. 
boy,  puer,  G.  pueri. 
branch-of-learning,  doctrina. 
breach  of  duty :  it  is  a  — ,  contra  qffi, 

cium  est. 
breadth,  a  finger's.     See  Depart. 
break   one's  word,  >    piem   fallere; 
break  a  promise,    )        fefett. 
bribery,  ambitus,  us. 


concise  form,  as  in  the  following  table  : — 


Exclusion 
of  all* 

Inclusion  of 
all  alike. 

Inclusion  of  some. 

Less  em- 
phatical  after 
si,ne,num,&c. 

Pbonouns. 

quisquam 
ullus 

quivis 
quilibet 

aliquis 
quispiam 

quis 

any  (body) 

Adverbs. 

(a)  Place. 

(b)  Time. 

(to) 
usquam  < 

(.(at) 

quovis  (to) 

ubivis  '  }  ,.. 
ubilibet  \  W 

aliquo  (to) 

alicubi  i  ,    . 
uspiam  \  W 

quo  (to) 

any  place 

or 
any  where. 

aliquando 

quando 

any  time 

or 

ever. 

*  f^All  are  generally  excluded  when  'any'  follows  negatxtea;  or  ' without, 
*carccly,}  'than:  and  in  questions  that  expect  fhe  answer  :no,'  (' nobody, 
vwihinfi,  )  Ac. 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


335 


bridge,  pons,  ntis,  m. 

wring  an  action  or  charge  agains.,  rcum 
facere  ;  fee,  fact :  (with gen.  or  de,) 
187. 

Durden,  onus,  oncris. 

buret:  to  be — ,  deflagrate. 

bun:  out  afresh,  recrudeeeer^  c-udu. 

business,  negotlum. 

but  if,  sin;  sin  aulem,  451. 

but  if  not,  sin  minus,  451. 

but  a  little  more,  and  he  would  have 
perished,  minimum  abfuit  (i^.pers.) 
quin  periret,  91. 

but,  alter  universal  negatives,  (=who 
-  not),  quin,  [or,  qui  —  non,\  44. 

but,  after  universal  negatives  ^ex- 
cept), nisi,  or  prep,  prater. 

but,  after  cannot.     See  Cannot. 

butcher,  trucidare. 

buy,  emere,  em,  empt. 

by  letter,  per  literas. 

by  =  near,  prope. 


C. 


Caesar,  Ccesar,  oris. 

call,  rocare,  appellare,  nominart,  dicere, 
See  51. 

call  =  summon,  rocare. 

call  upon,  convenire,  ven,verJ  (ace). 

call  to  mind,  reminisci. 

camp,  castra,  pi. 

campaign,  end  of,  303. 

can,  posse,  quire  (queo),  125,  e. 

Cannae,  of,  Cannensis,  adj. 

cannot:  I  cannc  bu  — ,  facere  non 
possum  quin,  i&t. 

cannot :  it  cannot  be  but  that,  Jicri  non 
potest  quin. 

capable  of  containing,  capax  (gen.). 

capital,  cap-ut,  itis. 

care  a  straw  for,  Jlocci  facere. 

care  that  for,  hujus  facere. 

care,  cur  a. 

care :  for  any  thing  I  care,  470- 

careless  of,  negligent  (gen.). 

carry,  porlare. 

Carthage,  Carthag-o,  inis. 

cast  forth,  projicere  jec,  ject. 

cause  to  be  done,  faciendum,  virare, 
351,  35(3. 

tease,  desinere  desi,  desit :  ceased,  be- 
fore inf.  pass,  desitus  est. 

cease  speaking  tace.re,  299. 

censure,  reprehensio,-  onis. 

chameleon,  chama:lcon. 

chance,  casus,  Us. 

character,  mores  pi.  G.  um. 

charge  (falsely,)  insimulare  (gen.  of 
diargt). 


charge  :     bring,   or  piefer  a  — ,  =t» 

make  him  an  accused  })erson,  reu: 

facere  de  — ,  187. 
charge  (  =  enjoin),  mandare  dat.). 
chargeable  (with  a  fault),  aj/inis,  212 
chaste,  castus. 
children,  liberi,  pi. 
cheese,  caseus. 

choose  (=  elect),  eligere,  leg,  lect. 
christian,  christianus. 
circumstance.    A  circumstance  which 

(referring  to  a  preceding  sentciu-t 

qu<e  res.  36,  37  (b) 
citizen,  ciris. 
city,  urbs,  urbis. 
civil-gown,  toga. 
claim,  postulare. 
clear  (  =  excuse),  purgare. 
clothe  oneself,  induere,  283. 
coast,  ora,  40. 
co\d,  frig-us,  Sris. 
come,  venire,  vin,  vent. 
come  to  the  assistance  of,  alicui  aux- 

illio  venire,  242. 
come  to  a  determination,    consilium 

inire. 
command,  imperare  (dat.). 
command  an  army,  prceesse  (dat.). 
commission,  mandare  (dat.). 
commit  many  sins,  multa  peccare. 
common,  communis. 
common  :  of  a  —  kind,  vulgaris. 
compassion,  misericordia. 
compel,  cogere,  cotg,  coact. 
completed  :  1  have  —  the  work,   opu* 

absolutum  habeo,  364. 
concerns  (it),  interest,  207. 
condemn,   damnare,   :ondemnare :    to 

death,  capitis. 
condemn  a  man  to  pay  his  vow,   voti 

damnare. 
conduct,  honorable,  honcsta*. 
confer  (benefits)  on,  conferre  (benejicia) 

in  ;  ace ;  tul,  lat. 
confer  an  obligation  on,  gratiam  ini~e 

ah  aliquo  (Cic.)  apudaliquem  (Liv.) 

339. 
congratulate,  congratulari,  492. 
connection  with,  eonjunctio.     See  15V 
conquer,  vincere,  vie,  vict. 
consequence  :  it  is  of — ,  interest. 
consequence  :  it  is  of  no — ,    nUiil   in 

teresl,  or  rcfert,  207. 
consider  =  think,  existimare,  arbitrari 
consider  =  attend  to,  attendere,  229. 
considerable  quantity,  aliouantum. 
considerably,  aliquanto,  403. 
constancy,  constaniia. 
constantly,  perpetuo. 
constellation,  astrum;  aid- us,  trig. 
consul,  consul.  ulin. 


336 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


t-^nsult,  consmlere,  sulu,  suit.,  ace. 
consult,  for,  )  consulere 

consult  a  man's  interests,  S  alicui,  233. 
contemporary,  cequalis. 
contented,  conlentus  (abl.). 
contention,  contentio. 
continue,  pergere,  perrex,  perrect. 
contract  to  build,  conducere  faciendum ; 

dux,  duct. 
contrary  to  each  other,  inter  se  con- 

trarii,  ce,  a. 
convenient,  commodus. 
conversant,  to  be,  callere  (ace). 
converse,  loqui,  locutus. 
corrupt,  corrumpere,  rup,  rupt. 
cost,  stare,  constare,  266.  abl. :  (dat.  of 

person). 
count,  numerare. 
country,  pair ia;  as  opposed   to  town, 

rus,  ruris. 
country,  in  the,  ruri. 
country,  into  the,  rus. 
country,  from  the,  rure. 
courage,  virtus,  utis. 
courageously,  fortiter. 
courtesy,  humanitas. 
cross  over,  transjicere  or  trajicere,  jec, 

ject,  (ace). 
crown,  corona. 
cruelly,  crudeliter. 
cruelty,  crudelitas. 
cry  out,  clamare. 
cultivate,  colere,   colu,  cult:  if  it  be  a 

study,    e.   g.     eloquence — studere 

(dot.). 
cure,  mederi  (dat.). 
custom,  consuetud-o,  inis. 
cut  oflj  intercluderc,  clus,  233. 


D. 


Daily,  quotidie,  indies  or  in  dies  singu- 

los.    (See  69,  t). 
danger,  periculum. 
dare,  audire,  ausus  sum. 
day,  by,  interdiu,  311. 
deaf,  surdus. 
dearer,  pluris,  G.  266. 
death,  mors. 

death,  to  (after  condemn),  capitis. 
debt,  ces  alienum,  273. 
debt,  heavy,  magnum  ces  alienum. 
deceive,  decipere,  io,  cep,  cept. 
decree,  decernere,  crev,  cret. 
deem,  putare. 

defend   what   is  actually  attacked,  de- 
fendere  (fend,  fens) :  —  what  may 

be  attacked,  tueri. 
Degree,  to  what  a — !  quo.  (with  gen.) 

512. 


deliberation   (after  c-pz*  est),  coraadt*. 

271. 
delight,  deleclare. 
delightful,  jucundus. 
delightful  to  the  sense  of  sight,  amcenus 
demand,  postulare ;  poscere,  pojiosc ;  tP 

demand  importunately,  efflagitare. 

(See  257). 
deny,  negarc. 
depart  a  finger's  breadth,  transvernun. 

digitum  discedere. 
depend  on,  niti,  nisus  or  nixus :  (in  with 

abl.). 
deprive  of,  spoliare,  orbare  ;  (abl.). 
desert,  deserere,  seru,  sert. 
deserve,  mereri  (merit) ;  well  of,  benede 
deserving  of,  dignus  (abl.). 
deserving  to   be,  &c,  dignus  esse  qui, 

with  subj. 
design,  consilium. 

desire,  velle  ;  cupere,  cupiv,  cupit :  =  ex- 
press a  wish,  optare  (See  420,  x). 
desirous,  cupidus  (gen.). 
despair  of,  desperare. 
destroy  utterly,  delere,  delev,  delet. 
destroy  (=  burn),  concremare,  141,  c. 
destroy  :  go  about  to  destroy,  perditum 

ire,  362,*  a. 
deter,  deterrire.     [See  From.] 
determine,  constituere. 
detrimental,  to  be,  detrimento  esse,  242. 
devote  oneself  to,  incumbere  in,  with 

ace.  (cubu,  cubit). 
devote  oneself  to,  studere  (dat). 
die,  mori,  ior,  mortuus;  mortem  or  sw 

premum  diem  obire,  249. 
difficult,  difficills. 
difficulty:  there  is  — in  doing,  &c.  =it 

is  done,  difficile. 
difficulty  :  he  has  —  in  doing,  &c.  =  ha 

does  it,  difficile. 
difference,  distantly. 
difference,  it  makes  a  very  great,  per- 

multum  interest,  122. 
difference,  what  is  there  ?  qw'd  interest  1 
difference,  there  is  no,  )  nihil  interest, 
difference,  it  makes  no,  )  or  refert,  207. 
diligence,  diligent  ia. 
dinner,  coena. 

direct  =  instruct,  prcccipere,  cep,  cept- 
discharge,  fungi,  fundus,    (abl.)  per- 

fungi. 
discipline,  disciplina. 
discontented,   am — with,  poenitet  m& 

207.  ^ 

discourse,  sermo,  onis. 
discover,  invenire,  repirere.  See  177,  o. 
disease,  morbus. 
disgraceful,  turpis. 
disgusted :  am  —  at,  tcedet  (per£  per 

tcBium  est\  me.  207. 


INDEX  I. EXtiLlSH. 


80? 


dishonorably,  turpitcr. 
displease,  disjdicere,  (dat.). 
dissatisfied  :  am  —  with,  poentlct    me, 

207. 
distance:  to  beat  a  distance  of,  &c. 

abcsse,  distare,  319. 
distance:  at  two  mites'  distance,  348. 
distant:  to  be  —  from,   abcsse;  dlstare 

(a),  319. 
ditch,  fossa. 

divest,  exuere,  exit,  exut,  233. 
do  nothing  but  — ,  nihil  aliud    quam 

(.faciunt  omitted),  420. 
do  well,  praclare  facer e. 
dog,  canis. 
doubt :  dubitare. 
doubt:  I  don't  at  all — ,   nullus  dubito 

{quin).     See  note  492. 
doubt :  there  is  no  — ,  non  est  dubium 

(quia),  89. 
dream,  somniare. 
dream,  s.  somnium. 
draw,  (  —  call)  away,  avocare. 
draw    up   an   army,    acietn  instruere ; 

strux,  struct. 
draw  up  an  army  in  three  lines,  tripli- 

cem  aciem  instruere. 
dress,  rest  it  us. 
drink,  bibere,  bib,  bibit. 
drink,  s.  pot  us,  Us,  )  ,~- 
drinking,  potio,       ) 
drive,    pellere,    pepul,   puis  :  —  drive 

away,  abigcre,  eg,  act. 
dutiful  affection,  pietas. 
duty,  qfficium. 


Each  (of  two),  ulerque,  ulraque,  ulrum- 
que,  G.  utriusque. 

each  one,  untuqtiisqu*. 

each  other  (after  '  to  love,'  &c),  inter 

se,  470. 
each  of  them,  singly,  singvUi,  pi. 
eagerly     desirous,    studiosus,    {gen.); 

arid  us,  (gen.). 
easy,  /  i\iy,faeUe. 

eat,  edere  (ed,  7s) ;  vesci  (See  273). 
eclipse,  defeclio. 
eclipsed,  to  be,  deflcere,  fee,  feet. 
efface,  del  ere,  delec,  delet. 
either  —  or:  aid  —  aut;vel  —  rcl;  site 

—  sir 
ele'jt,  eligert 
ob.ction,  rami  tit,  11    pi. 
eloquence,  eloquent  \    (natu- 

tquence). 
emulate,  amulari,  229. 
encamp,  ronstdere,  s«/.  set*. 

15 


encounter  death,  mortem  oppetrre. 
encounter  a  danger,  periculum  OOfra. 
end   of,    extremus,   agreeing   with    it* 

subst.,  179. 
endued  with,  prccditus  (abl.). 
endure,  sustinere,  tinu,  tent. 
enemy  (private),  iniinicus. 
enemy  (public),  hostis. 
engage  =  fight  with,  conjligere,  JUx, 

Jlict. 
engage  =  undertake,  reciperc,  cep,  cept. 
engaged  in  :   to  be  — ,   operant   dare, 

337:  (in  a  battle,   aj'air,  &c.)  in 

teresse,  224. 
enjoy,  frui,  (abl.). 
enough,  satis,  qffatim.  (See  512.) 
enquire  of,  qucerere  ex ;  quGsir,  qucesit. 
enter  into  partnership,  coire  socictatem. 
entrust,   credere,  credid,  credit  (dot.  ot 

person), 
envy,  invidere,  vid,  vis  (dat.). 
Ephesian,  Ephesius. 
equal,  par,  dat.   Equal  to  (in  magni- 
tude,   real    or  figurative),    instar 

(gen.),  207. 
error,  error. 

escape  from,  s.fuga,  157. 
escape:  it  escapes  me,  me  fugit, fallit, 

prccterit,  259. 
eternal,  ceternus  (=  everlasting) ;  ocm- 

pilemus,  123,  c. 
even,  etiam. 

even  mind,  aquus  animus. 
even  —  not,  ne  —  quidem. 
evening,  in  the,  vesperi. 
every,  omnis. 
every  body,  quisque,  396. 
every  tenth  man,  decimus  quisque. 
every  body  who  or  that,  quisquis,  qui 

cunque,  396. 
every  thing,  omnia,  pi. 
ever,  unquam,  aliquando,  quando,  402. 
evil,  malum,  neut.  adj. 
exactly,  with  a  numeral ;  ipse,  in  agree- 
ment, 308. 
exceed  the  bounds  of  moderation,  mo- 

dum  excedere,  cess. 
exceedingly,  vehementer. 
excel,  antecellere,  prazstare,  229. 
exhort,  hortari,  adhortari. 
expedient,  ut His  (dat.). 
expedient:  it  is  — ,  expedit. 
expediency,  utilitas. 
experience  (familiarity  with  a   thing) 

usus,  Us. 

to,  obnoxius,  212. 
extortion,  pecunia:  repetundec  ;  or  ouij 

repetundoe. 
extremely  flourishing,  longe  op 

simus. 
eye,  ocutus. 


S38 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


P. 


Face,  to  know  a  man  by,  de  facie  nosse. 
fail   (a  friend),  deesse  (dat.),  fail  (one), 

deflcere,  229. 
faith,  fdes,  5. 
faithful,  jidelis. 

fall  on  (=  seize  on),  incessere,  229. 
false,  falsus. 
falsehoods,  utter  many,  multa  mentiri, 

38. 
family,  familia. 
far  from  (thinking)  this,  tanium  abest 

ut  —  (ut).    y 
far :    not  to   be  —  from,  haud  multum 

or  procul  abesse  (quin),  91. 
far  be  it  from  me  not,  83.    See  note  t, 

p.  40. 
far,  multo  (with  compar.  and  superl.), 

410. 
farewell,  ave,  salve,  vale,  281. 
fate,  fatum. 
fault,  culpa. 
favour,  a,  benejicium. 
favour,  favire  (dat.),fav,faut. 
fawn  upon,  adulari  (dat.' ox  ace). 
fear,  of  body,  timor  ;  of  mind,  metus,  us. 
fear,  timere,  metuere,  vereri.    See  99. 
feeble,  imbecillus. 
feed  on,  vesci.   See  273. 
feel  thankful,  gratiam  habere, 
fewer,  febris,  abl.  i. 
few,  pauci,  ce,  a. 

few :  a  few  days  ago,  paucis  his  diebus. 
few:   a  few  days   before,  paucis  Mis 

diebus. 
fidelity,  Jides. 
field,  in  the,  militioe. 
fight,  pugnare ;  fight  on  horseback,  ex 

equo. 
find,  invenire,  reperire,  177. 
find :    hard  to  find,  difficilis  inventu, 

364. 
finger's  breadth.     See  Depart 
finish,  conficere. 
fire,  ignis,    ( =  conflagration)    incen- 

dium. 
first,  primum :  at  first,  primo.  See  83. 
fit,  aptus,  212. 
fitted,  accemmodatus,  219. 
fix  by  edict,  edlcire  (ut). 
Rank,  on  the,  a  latere. 
flatter,  adulari  (dat.  or  ace). 
flaw,  nitium. 
flight,  fuga. 

flogged,  to  be,  virgis  crcdi  ;  ccesus. 
folly,  stultitia. 
fond,  xupldus  (gen.). 
food,  cibus,  i. 
foot,  pes,  pedis. 
for,  when  untranslated,  255. 


for  how  much  ?  quanti? 

for  as  much— as,  tanti — qvantl,  2C6. 

for  less,  minoris,  266. 

for  just  as  much — as,  )  tantidem  — 

for  no  more,  than        )     quanti  226. 

for  (  =  in  behalf  of),  pro. 

for  ( =  owing  to,  of  obstacles),  pree,(abl. 

for  instance,  verbi  causa. 

for  some  time,  dudum,  jamd^dum,  420 

for  (after  to  fear),  sign  of  dat. 

for  any  thing  I  care,  per  me  licet. 

for  us  (alter  make),  a  nobis. 

foreign  to,  alienus,  212. 

foretell,  prcedicere. 

forget,  oblivisci,  oblltus,  199. 

former,  the,  Me,  378. 

forsooth :  as  if—,  Quasi  vera,  494. 

fortune.     See  Good. 

fortune  :  let  —  see   to   it,  id  Fortuna 
vldSrit. 

found,  condere,  condid,  condTi. 

founder  (of  a  family),  princcj>s  families. 

free  from,  liberare  (abl.). 

freedman,  libertinus  :  (but  with  refer- 
ence to  his  master,  liberlus.) 

friendly,  amicus. 

friends,  his  own,  sui. 

from  a  boy,  puero. 

from  the  heart,  ex  animo. 

from  a  wall,  ex  muro. 

from  your  neighbourhood,  istinc. 

from  a  different  direction,  aliunde. 

from,  after  conceal,  omitted,  251. 

from,  after  prevents,  deters,  &c.t  quomi 
nus,  94. 

from,  after  recover,  ex. 

front,  in,  afronte. 

frugality,  frugalilas. 

fruits  (of  the  earth),  fruges :  (of  a  tree) 
fructus. 

full,  plenus,  182. 

fury,  furor. 


G. 


Gain  an  advantage,  emolumentum  ca- 

pere  (cep,  capt), — ex. 
gain  possession  of,  potiri  (abl.  gen.). 
Gaul,  Gallus. 

get  possession  of,  yotiri,  potitus  (abl). 
gift,  donum,  munus,  eris.  (See  242.) 
give  information,    docere,   253 :    give 

much  information,   m:dta    docere 

(de),  252. 
give    battle    to,  fyroslium     committere 

cum ;  mis,  miss. 
given  over,  despaatus. 
given  it  is,  datur. 
glad,  to  be,  Icetari,  521. 
glory,  gloria. 


INDEX   I. ENGLISH. 


830 


glorious,  gloriosus. 

go  wrong,  errare. 

go  away,  abire,  deccdere,  cess.  See  309. 

go   about    to    destroy,  perdition    ire, 

362*,  a. 
go  on,  pergere,  perrex,  perr, 
go  on   in  your  valour!    macte  xirtute 

esto!   280. 
god,  Dens,  56. 
gold,  aurum. 
gulden,  aureus. 
good,  bonus;  (=  beneficial,  expedient) 

ufitis. 
good  :  to  do—,  prodesse  (dat.). 
good   fortune :  it   was   my  —  (contigit 

mihi,—ut,  374). 

govern,    imperare,    dat.;    (« regulate, 

direct)  moderari  (ace.  or  c/ai.    Sec 

220). 
grateful,  grains. 
gratitude,  srratia. 

(when  degree  is  meant  rather 

than  size),  summits. 
greedy,  axidtu  (gen.). 
Greece,  Grteeia. 
Greek,  Grcccus. 
grief,  dolor. 

grieve,  dolere,  mccrere.  See  521. 
ground,  humus  ;  on  the  ground,  humi. 
grudge,  inridere  (dot.),  rid,  ris. 
guard  against,      )  cavere  (ace.  233),  car, 
guard,  be  on  my,  $      caut. 
guidance,   under  your,  te  dure;  under 

the  guidance  of  Ilerdoniu.s,  Hcr- 

tionii  duclu. 


If. 


ITabit  of  silence,  tanturnitas. 
had  rather,  made,  150  (conjug.  142,  1). 
hail,  arc,  salve,  281. 
hand,  manus,  Us,  4.  f. 
ng.  suspendium. 
happen  (of  evils),  acciderc :  of  fortunate 

events,  contingcre  (tig) :  =  turn  out, 

evenire.  (See  374). 
happen  :  how  docs  it  happen  that  .  .  .  ? 

qui  At  ut,  Ac. 
happy,  beatus,fcli.v.  (See  413.) 
hard :  are   hard  to  avoid,   difficile  vi- 

tantur. 
hard  to  find,  difficilis  inventu  (sup  ). 
hardly  (=  scarcely),  vix. 
hardly  any  body,  nemo  fere. 
harvest,  messis,f. 
fcute,  odisse  (with  tenses  derived   from 

perf.) 


hateful,  to  be,  odio  esse,  242. 

have,  habere. 

have  a  thing  done,  faciendum  curarci 

356. 
have  .an    interview    with,  amvenirt, 

(ace). 
have,    in    such    sentences    as,    'with 

whom  ire  have  to  do.'     (See  336.) 
head,  caput,  aijiitis,  n. 
heal,  nicderi  (dot.). 
healed,  to  be  (of  a  wound),  consane* 

cere. 
health,  to  be  in  good,  valcrc. 
hear,  audire. 
bearing:  without  hearing  him  (  =  him 

unheard),  inauditum  (ace.  masc.) 
heart  (as  the  seat  of  the  aff'cctio:is),  ani- 
mus, 92. 
heart,  cor,  cordis,  n. 
heavy,  gravis. 

height :  to  such  a  — ,  co,  adv.  (gen.). 
help  (a  person  in  perplexity),  subrenire 

(dat.);    jurare     (ace),      auxiliari 

(dat.\  succurrere  (dat.  See  222,  k.). 
her  (ace.  sing.),  se,  if  relating  to  nom. 

of  sentence  ;  if  not,  earn. 
her,  adj.  suus,  a,  um,  if  relating  to  nom. 

of  sentence;  if  not,  ejus. 
hesitate,  dubitare. 
hidden,  occultus. 
him,  se,  if  relating  to  nom.  of  sentence 

if  not,  cum. 
himself,  369;  373,  c.  (Q.  on  §  48.) 
hinder,  imped  ire.     See  Q,.  on  §  15. 
hindrance,  impedimentum. 
his  own   friends,    adherents,  Ac.  sui. 
hit  (  =  strike),   ferire,  icere,  cadere,  ct- 

eld,  cccs.     See  299,  i. 
hold,  tenere. 

bold  a  levy  of  troops,  delectum  habere 
hold  one's  tongue,   silere,    tacere,  Sec 

299,  g. 
hold  cheap,  parvi  pemb-rc,  266. 
home,  to,  domum  :  ut^omi :  from,  doma 
honey,  tnel,  mellis. 
honour  (  =  the  honorable),  honestas, 

(  =  probity) Jides,  ei. 

honour,  to  be  an,  )  i,^,     •  MmmM  r,AO 
Li     .     w     i  notion  esse,  l\Z. 
honorable,  to  be,  $  ' 

honorable  conduct,  honestas.  Honor 
able,  honestus.  Honorably,  honeste. 

hope,  spcrare.     (See  15.) 

horseback,  on,  ex  equo  :  (of  more  than 
one  person)  ex  cquis. 

house,  at  my,  domi  meaz. 

how  (with  adj.),  quam. 

how  disgraceful  it  is,  quanto  opprvbru 
est. 

how  many,  quot. 

how  much,  quantum. 

how  does  it  happen?  quifj,  ut .  .  .1 


340 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


how  few  there  are,    who  —  ?  quoius- 
quiaque  eat,   qui  .  .  ?   (with   subj.) 

hunger,  fames,  is. 

hurry,  to  be  in  a,  featin are. 

hurt,  nocere,  dat. ;  Icedere  (ace.  la?s.) 

hurtful,  to  be,  nocere. 

husband,  vir,  291. 


I. 


I  for  my  part,  equidem. 

if —  not,  nisi,  451. 

if  however,  sin  autem,  451. 

ignorant,  to  be,  ignorare  (ace). 

ignorant :  not  to  be  ignorant  that,  &c, 

non  ignorare,  quin. 
ignorant :  who  is  ignorant  that,  &c.  1 

quis  ignorat,  quin  .  .  .? 
ignorant  of,  rudis  (gen.). 
immediately  after  the  battle,  confeslim 

apraelio,  348. 
immense,  ingens. 
immortal,  immortalis. 
impiety,  impietas. 
impiety :  if  it  may  be  said  without  — , 

si  fas  est  diclu,  364. 
impiety  :  it  cannot  be  said  without — , 

nefas  est  dictu,  364. 
importance,  it  is  of,  interest  (gen.),  203. 
Importance,  it   is  of  great,  magni  (or 

multum)  interest,  206,  a. 
important,  gravior. 
impovt\ine,"jlagitare. 
Impose  on,  imponere,  posu,  posit,  233. 
impute  as  a  fault,  vitio  or  culpa  dare 

or  vertere,  242. 
in  the  presence  of  the  people,   apud 

populum. 
in   (an  author),  apud   (Xenoplwntem, 

&c). 
in  front,  afronte.    ■ 
in  flank,  a  latere. 
in  the  rear,  a  tergo. 
in  triumph  (to  lead),  per  triumphum. 
inattentive  to,  negligens  (gen.),  183. 
increase,   augere,   aux,   auct,   (trans.) 

aescere,  crev  (neut.). 
incredible,  incredibilis. 
inconsistent  with,  alienus,  212. 
inconvenient,  incommodua. 
induce,  adducere  ut,  &c. 
indulge,  indulgere,  duls,  dult  (dat.). 
industry,  diligentia. 
Inflict  punishment  on,  aliquem  poena 

officer e,  276. 
Influence :  to  have  great  —  with,  mul- 

tum  valere  apud  aliquem. 


inform,  certioremfacere,  187. 

information.     See  Give. 

inhabit,  incolere,  colu,  cult. 

injure,  violare,  (  =  do  harm  to)  laedcrx 

(ace). 
injurious,  it  is,  nocet  (dat.). 
injury,  injuria. 
innocent,  innocens. 
insignificant-  how  — !  quam  n'jUhut! 
insolence  to  such  a  height  oi,  eo  (adv.) 

insolentics,  512. 
instance,  for,  verbi  causa. 
interest  (  =  true  interest),  utilitas. 
interest :  it  is  the —  of,  interest  (gen.), 

203. 
interests  (to  consult  the).     See  233. 
interests  (to  provide  for).     See  233. 
interview.     See  Have. 
intimate :  to  be  —  with,  familiartter  uti, 

abl. 
inventor,  inventor,  fern,  inventrix. 
invest  (  =  blockade),  obsidere,  sea,  sess. 
invoke,  appellare. 
iron-hearted,  ferreus. 
is  (  =  is  distant),  distat. 
island,  insula. 
it  cannot  be  but  that,  fieri  non  potest 

quin. 
it  is  not  every  man  who  can,  &c,  non 

cujusvis  est,  &c.  190. 
Italy,  Italia. 


Javelin,  jaculum. 

jest,  jocus. 

jewel,  gemma. 

join  battle  with,  committer e  prcelium 

(cum). 
journey,  on  the,  inter  viam. 
joyful,  laitus. 
just  (equitable),  arquus. 
justice,  justitia. 


R. 


Keep,  servare. 

keep  one's  word,  fidemprcestare.  ■■ 

keep  up  a  certain   state,   splendide    se 

gerere. 
kill,  interficere,  occiderc,  necare,  308. 
king,  rex,  regis. 
know,  scire,  novisse,  callere,  385. 


L. 


Labour,  IoIkw 

lame  of  one  feg:  daudus  edtei  o  pede 

lamp,  lucerna. 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH 


341 


lure*-,  magnus. 

lasting,  sempiiernus. 

latter,  the.  hie. 

laugh,  ridere,  rts,  rls. 

law,  lex,  legis. 

lay  on,  imponere. 

lav  down,  )  .. 

lay  aside, '  \roncre,  P°™>  V°*lt' 

lay  a  person  under  an  obligaticn,  gra- 

tiam  ab  aliquo  inire. 
lay  down  a   magistracy,   magUtrahu* 

abdicare;  (or  se  with  abl.,  308.) 
lead  a  life,  agerc  ritam  ;  eg,  act. 
1  f'crdus,  eris. 

learning,  branch  of,  doelrina. 
lean  on,  nili,  nisus,  nixus  (abl.  273). 
learn,  discere,  didic. 
learn  by  heart,  cdiscere. 
leave,  relinquere,  liq,  lict:  (by  will),  re- 
linquere. 
leave  (  =  go  out  of),  txcedere  (with  abl.) 

cess,  83. 
leave  nothing  undone,  nihil prcclermit- 

tere  quin. 
leave  off,  desinere,  desi}  desit. 

See  Lame. 
leisure:  I  have — ,  vacatmVd,  154. 
Lemnos,  Lemnos,  G.  i. 
iet    me    know,    fac   sciam    {with   ut 

omitted). 
»et  out  to  be  built  by  contract,  locate 

faciendum. 
letter,  litera,  pi. :  epistola. 
levy  troops,  aelectum  habere. 
liable  to,  obnoxius,  212. 
liar,  mend  ax  (adj.). 
lie,  mentiri. 
Me  near,  adjacfre,  229. 
lite,  vita;  (  =  life-time)  crtas.     In  the 

life-time    of  Augustus,    Augusto 

riro,  364 
lift  up,  tollere,  sustul,  sublat. 
light,  letis. 
light  (  =  kindle),  accendere :  succendere 

rosrum,  &c.    (See  299,  h.) 
lightning,  /u/men,  inis. 
like,  similis,  dat.:  (  =  equal  to  in  size) 

instart  (gen.). 
like  (verb).     See  491,  d. 
lines:  to  draw  up  an  army  in  three — , 

triplicem  aciem  instruere. 
literature,  literce. 
little,  or  a  little  (=few  things,)  pauca, 

23. 
little :  but  oi  too  — ,  parum. 
little,  a  (  =  some,  but  not  much),  pau- 

lum;  pauluJum,  402. 
«ong,  diu :  pridem,  jamdiu,  jampridem. 

See  420. 
nng  for,  avere,  of  an  impatient,  gestire 

of  a  joyous  longing. 


look  to  that  yourself,  id  ipse  vidSris. 

loquacious,  loquax. 

lose,  pcrdcre,  perdid,  perdit :  lose  (pas- 
sively), amittere.     (See  56.) 

lose  an  opportunity,  occasionem  arnit- 
tcre. 

lose  flesh,  corpus  amittere. 

love,  amare,  diligere.     (See  185,  a.) 

lover  of,  amans,  diligens  (gen.,  183.). 

lover,  such  a  lover  of,  adeo  amans  oi 
di/igens  (gen.,  183). 

lowest,  injimus,  imus. 

lust,  libido,  inis. 

luxurious,,  lu.ruriosus. 

lyre,  to  play  on  the.     See  Teach. 


M. 


Mad,  to  be,  furei  e. 

madness,  amentia,  512. 

magistracy,  to  hold,  magisti  jium  ge- 

rere. 
make,  facer e   (fee,  fact )  ;  efficio :    am 

madeJ%/?o.     Obs.  'makes  all  thingi 

(ace.)  flourish;'    in  Lat.  'makef 

that  (ut)  all  things  (nom.)  should 

flourish,'  254. 
make  the  same  promise,  idem  polliceri, 

pollicitus. 
make  treaty,  &c,  fcedus  icere,  299. 
make  this  request  of  you,  Mud  ie  rogi* 

(ut  nc). 
make  ( =  appoint  to  an  office),  crcarc 
make    mention  of,   meminissc,  recor- 

dari,  201. 

S&SViftm  ■}••****> 

make  the  same  boast,  idem  gloriari. 
make  it  my  first  object,  id  "agere  (ut) 
make  for  us,  a  nobis  facere. 
make  a  decree  in  a  man's  favour,  se 

cundum  aliquem  decernere  ;  decreo, 

decret. 
making  haste  (after  opus  est),  prope- 

rate,  (abl.  part.  171). 
maker,  effector:  fern,  effectrix. 
man,  homo,  rir.  (See  38,  y.) 
man:  lam  not  the  —  to;  non  is  sicm, 

qui  (subj.). 
manners  (  =  morals,  character,)  moresf 

um,  pi. 
many,  multi. 
march  against  the  enemy,  obviam  in 

hostibus. 
marry  (of  a  female),  nubere  (dat.  222) 
Marseilles,  Massilia. 
master,  magister,  dominus,  htrus.  (See 

180.) 
matter,  res. 
mean,  sibi  tzlle. 


342 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


mean  time  ;  in  the  — ,  interim,  inter ca. 

(See  402.) 
means,  by  no,  minime. 
meat,  cibus. 
medicine,  medicina. 
meditate,  meditari  (ace), 
meet,  to  go  to,  obviam  ire  (dat.). 
melt,  liquescere,  lieu. 
merchant,  mercator. 
middle  of,  medius  (in  agreement  with 

its  subsi.  179). 
mile  (  =  1000  paces),  mille  passus  :  pi, 

Millia  passuum. 
Miletus,  of,  Milesvus. 
milk,  lac,  lactis. 
mind,  mens,  mentis;  animus. 
mindful,  memor  {gen.). 
miserable,  miser,  era,  &c. 
mistaken,  to  be,  J alii. 
mistaken,  I  am,  mefallit. 
mock,  Uludere  {dat.  229). 
moderate,  moderari  (ace.  or  dat.  220). 
money,  pecunia. 
month,  mensia,  m. 
moon,  luna. 
moral,  sanctus. 
morals,  mores,  um. 
more,  plus  (with  gen.).     For   more, 

pluris. 
mortal,  mortalis. 
most  men,  plerique. 
motion,  motus,  Us. 
mound,  agger. 
move,  movere,  mov,  mot.    Move,   neut. 

moveri. 
much,  multa,  n.  pi.  (but  if  opposed  to 

many  things,  or  followed  by  gen. 

multum.) 
much  less,  nedum,  443. 
multitude,  multitudo,  inis. 


N. 


Naked,  nudus. 

Dame,  nominare  (also  =  to  appoint). 

Bature,  natura;  rerum  natura. 

near,  prove  (ace.). 

near,  to  be  very,  minimum  abesse  (im- 

pers.)  quin,  92. 
nearer,  propior  ;  (adv.)  propius,  211. 
Dearer  am,  propius  abeum  (quam),  319. 
nearest,  proximus. 
nearly,  prove,  pame. 
need,  egere,  indigere  (abl.  or  gen.). 
need,  have  — of,  opus  est,  176,  e. 
need,  you  have  no  — ,  nihil  opus  est. 
negligent,  negligent  (gen.),  183. 


neighbourhood,  in  your,  istk,        ) 
neighbourhood,  from  your,  istine.  x;s7 
neighbourhood,  to  your,  istuc.      \ 

neither -nor,  \n^- tuque. 

'   (  nee  —  nee 
neutral,  medius. 
never,  nunquam. 
nevertheless,  tamen. 
news  of  the  town,  res  urbancc. 
next :  the  next  thing  is,  sequHar  ul,  85 
night,  by,  noctu  or  node. 
no,  nullus ;  after  ne,  quia. 
no  one,  nemo. 
no  painter,  nem*  piclor. 

no  time,  nihil  temporis. 

nobody,  nemo,  inis* 

none  of  you,  nemo  vestrum. 

none  of  those  things,  nihil  eorum. 

nor,  neque,  nee :  but  after  ut  or  ne  it 

is  neve  or  neu. 
not,  non.    After  rel.,  see  p.  215,  d. 
not  yet,  nondum. 
not  one's  own,  dlienus. 
not  even,  ne  —  quidem. 
not  only  —  but  also,  non  solum—  *erf, 

or  verum  etiam. 
not  so  far  off,  to  be,  propius  abesse. 
not  to  say,  ne  dicam. 
not  that  —  but,  non  quod  —  scd;  non 

quo  —  sed ;  non  eo  or  ideo  quotl  — 

sed,  492. 
not  at  all,  nihil. 

not  as  if  not,  non  quin,  with  subj. 
not  to  be  far  from,  haud  multum  lor 

haudprocul)  abesse  (quirt). 
nothing,  nihil. 

nothing  but,  nihil  aliud  nisi,  185. 
nourish,  alere,  alu,  alit  or  alt. 
now  (  =  already),  jam. 
number,  numerare. 


Obey,  parere,  obedire  (dat.  See  222) 
object,  not  to,  non  recusare  quin,  92. 
obligation,  lay  a  man  under  a  great, 

confer  an  —  on,  magnam  ab  aliquo 

(Cic.),   apud  aliquem  (Liv.),  gra- 

Ham  inire,  339. 
obliging,  commodus. 
obstruct,  intercludere,  clus. 
obtain,  potiri  (abl.  gen). 
occasion :   you  have    no  —  to  hurry, 

nihil  est  quodfestincs,  477. 


*  Neminik  ind  nemine  are  not  found,  but  nullius,  nullo : — except  now  and  then 
Hemine  vviih  pass,  participle  — Nemo  ablativum  nee  habet,  nee  habet  genitivum 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


343 


'?i  :  have-— for  opus  est,  170. 
ocean,  oceanus. 

OOCapy  myself  in,  opcram  dare,  337. 
odious,  to  be,  odio  esse.  242. 
ol,  after  '  atrip,'  &c.  (ubl.) 
of,    after  'become,'  ' deserve   well,'1  <fec. 
lam  persuaded,'   and  when  qf  = 

concerning,  de. 
of,  after  'enquire,'  ex. 
of  others,  alienus,  a,  um. 
of  such  a  kind,  ejusmodi. 
offend,  qfendere,  fend,  fens  (ace). 
offend  against,  violare. 
alienee :  if  I  may  say  so  without  — , 

pace  tud  dixcrim. 
old,  veius,  veteris  (n.  pi.  Vetera). 
old  man,  senex,G.  senis,  G.pl.um. 
old  a«re,  senectus,  Hiis. 
one  (of  two),  alter,  Q.  ius. 
one  thing  —  another,  aliud  —  aliud,  38. 
one  ( =  a  certain),  quidam. 
one  ( =  some    one,  rio  matter  who), 

aliquis. 
one's,  suus. 

only,  adj.  solus,  G.  ius. 
only:  the  —  one  who,  nnw*  qui  (with 

,  subj.). 
only  son,  unicus  fdius. 
opinion,  to  be  of,  censire. 
opportunity,  occasio. 
oppose,  repugnare  (dot.),  obstare  (dat.). 
or,  aid,  vel,  re,  456  (in  questions  an). 
or  not,  necne.     See  122. 
oratof,  orator. 

order,  jubere,juss  (arc.  with  inf.). 
ought,  oj>ortct.     See  126. 
out  of,  e,  ex. 
out  of  doors,  foras. 
out:  to  dine  out,  camare  foris,  339. 
over :  it  is  all  over  with,  actum  est  de. 
over  against,  adversvs. 
overpower  (with  emotion),  frangere, 

fract. 
overthrow,  evertcre,  vert,  vers. 
•j we,  debere. 
owing :  it  is  owing  to,  per  aliqucm  stat, 

quominvs,  &c.  99. 
own  (emjihatlc),  ipsius  or  ipsor~j.m,  after 

meuss  tuus,  <fcc. 


Pace,  pfissus,  us. 

pained,  to  be,  dolere  (ace.  or  abl.  with 
de.). 

pardon,  venia. 

pardon,  ignoscere,  nov  (dot.);  (of  a  su- 
perior) veniam  dare. 

parent,  parens;  genWr",  fern,  genitrix. 

part,  pars,  partis. 


pnrtner,  consors,  185. 

party,  to  be  on  our,  a  rjobi*  sentirs. 

past,  the,  prcetcrila. 

peck,  modius. 

peculiar,  proprius,  212. 

perceive,  seniire. 

perchance  (in  questions),  quid  in  ec- 

quid,  numquid,  400 
perform^/*u7igi,  perfungi, functus  (abl), 
perhaps,  fortasse. 
permitted,  it  is,  licet. 
permitted,  I  am,  licet  mihi. 
perpetual,  sempilernus. 
perseverance,  per  sever  antia. 
persist,  perseverare. 
persuade  (=  advise),  suadere  dot.);  = 

advise  effectually,  persuadere,  suaa 
(dot.). 
persuaded,  I  am,  persuasum  est  mUii 

de,  &c,  ox  persuasum  kabco,  291. 
perverse,  perversus. 
•  perversely,  perverse. 
philosopher,  philosophus. 
philosophy,  pkilosophia. 
piety,  pietas. 
pity  (I),  miseret  me,  or  misereor,  gen. 

(See  201,  r.)     ■ 
pity,  misericordia. 
plainly:    see  —  through,   persjjeclum 

habeo,  364. 
planet,  planeta  or  es. 
plan,  consilium. 
plant,  serere,  scv,  sal. 
play,  ludere.  Ius. 
play  on  the  lyre.    See  Teach, 
pieav,  a  cause,  agere  causam. 
pleu^ant,  jucundus. 
please,  placer e  (dat.). 
pleasure,  voluptas. 
poet,  poeta. 
point :  to  be  on  the  —  of,  in  eo  esse  ui. 

479. 
poison,  venerium. 
Pompcy,  Pomp  ejus. 
possession,  to  be  in,  tenire. 
possession,  to  gain,  potior  (abl.  or  gen.). 
possible  as  (alter  superl.),  quam,  rc{ 

410. 
possibly.    As  great  as  can  possibly  be, 

quantus  maximus  potest  esse,  412. 
post  nimself,  considlre,  sedt  sess. 
poor,  pauper. 
power,  potentia  of  actual,  potestas  ai 

legtd,  conceded,  &c,  power, 
power:  to  put  himself  in  their — ,  po 

testatem  sui  facere. 
power:  to  be  in  our — ,  in  noslrd  po 

testate  esse. 
powerful,  potens. 

practice  (justice,  Ac),  colere>colu,  cult 
praise,  laus%  laudis. 


»44 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


praise,  to,  laudare. 

pray  (=  beg  earnestly),  orare. 

predict,  pradieere. 

orefer,  anteponere,  posu,  posit. 

prefer  a  charge,  reum  facere  de,  187. 

prefer  a  capital  charge    against,   ret 

capitalis  reum  facere,  187. 
prefer  a  charge  of  immorality  against, 

de  moribus  reum  facere,  187. 
prejudicial,  to  be,  obe'sse  (dat.). 
prepare,  parare. 
present  with,  donare,  207. 
present,  give  us  a,  dono  or  muneri  dare. 

242,  (3.) 
present,  to  be,  adesse  (dat.). 
preservation:  tend  to  the — ,  335,  c. 
pretend,  simulare. 
pretty  often,  nonnunquam. 
prevent,  obstare,  obstit  (dat.). 

priestess,    {  *"*"*»»  °tis- 

proceed  against  a  person,  consulere  in 

aliquem. 
produce  (=  fruits),  fruges,  pi. 
productive  of,  efficiens  (gen.),  183. 
profitable,  to  be,  prodesse  (dat.). 
promise,  polliceri,'  licitus;  promittere. 

See  17,  1.     See  15. 
prompt  execution  (after  opus  est),  ma- 
ture facto,  177. 
prone,  proctitis  (ad.). 
property,  all  my,  omnia  mea. 
property,  all  their,  omnia  sua. 
prosecute,  postulare,  201. 
protection,  take  under  one's,  tueri,  374. 
proud,  superbus. 
prove  an  honour,  honori  esse;  (prove 

done  by  sum  with  the  dat.,  242.) 
prove  myself  mindful;  prazstare  me 

memorem. 
prove  my  gratitude,       ?  gratiam   re- 
prove myself  grateful,    )        ferre. 
provide  for  the  interests  of,  providere 

vid,   vis;    prospicere)    spex,  sped 

(both  with  dat.). 
provided  that,  dum,  modo,   or  dum- 

mddo   (after   which   lnoti   is   ne), 

494. 
pull  down,  diruere,  ru,  rut. 
punishment,  poena. 
purpose,  for  the,  causa. 
purpose,  to  no,  nequicquam,  frustra. 
put ;  put  down,  ponere,  posu,  posit. 
DUt  off,  exuere,  txu,  exut. 
put  in  mind  of,  admonere,  194. 
pyre,  rogus. 


a. 

ftuite  (to  be  without),  plane  (carere). 


it. 


Ratify  a  treaty,  icere  fadus. 

rather,  I  had,  malo. 

rational  faculty,  mens. 

rear,  in  the,  a  tcrgo. 

reason,  you,   &c,  have  no,  nihil  esi 

quod  (subj.). 
receive,  ac-,  ex-,  re-  cipere,  ccp,  cept. 

(See  308.) 
receive  favourably,  boni  consulers  (in 

Quintil.,  Seneca,  fyc.)  ;  in  bonam 

partem  accipere,  185. 
reckon,  numerare. 
reckon  one  thing  after  another,  postha- 

bere. 
reckon  as  a  fault,  vitio  vertere,  242. 
recollect,  reminisci. 
reconciled,   to  be,  in  gratiam  redire 

(cum). 
recover,  convalescere,  valu. 
recruit  myself,  me  reficcre. 
refrain  :    I   cannot  —  from,  temperart 

mihi  non  possum,  quin,  &c. 
regard  the  interests  of ,  prospicere,  spex, 

spect  (dai.). 
reign,  regnare. 
reign  :  in  your — ,  te  rege:  te  regnantc 

or  imperante,  364. 
reject,  repudiare. 
rejoice,  gaudere,  gavisus  sum. 
relate,  narrare. 

relieve  from,  liberare  (abl.) ;  (of  a  par- 
tial relief)  levare  (abl.). 
religion,  religio. 
relying  on,  fretus  (abl). 
remainder  =  rest  of,  179. 
remains,  it,  reliquum  est,  restat  (ut). 
remedy,  remedium. 
remember,   meminisse    (Jmperat.    me- 
mento) ;  recordari.  reminisci.  (See 

201,  q.) 
remind,  admonere  (gen.). 
render,  reddere,  did,  dit. 
renew,  renovare. 
repair,  rejicere,  fee,  feet. 
repay  a  kindness,  gratiam  referre. 
repent :  I  —  me,  me  pomitel  (gen.). 
report,  fama. 

require,  eg  ere,  indigere  (gen.  abl.). 
required,  are,  opus  sunt,  172. 
resignation,  ccquus  animus. 
resignation,  the  most  or  gre&test,a>quis 

simus  animus. 
resist,    resistere,     restit  ■     repugnare 

(dat.). 
resolve,  constituere,  stitu,  stitut. 
rest,  requies. 
rest  on,  niti}  273. 
rest  of,  adj.  reliquus.    (See  179.) 
rest,  all  the,  cetera  omnia. 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


rce>ore  liberty  to  his  country,  patriam 

in  libtrtatem  rindicare. 
restrain,  iempcrare  (dat.),  2*20. 
restrained,  u>  be,  inliibcri. 
.etain  ■  grateful  sense,  gratiam  habere. 
return,  redire,  reverti,  rcvenire.    (See 

339,  p  ) 
return  thanks,  gratias  agere;  eg,  act. 
revile,  makdicere  (dat.). 
revilrr,  riluperator. 
revolt  from,  dejicere  ab  ;  fee,  feet. 
rich,  dives. 
riches,  diritUs. 

right,  rectus:  (of  situation,)  dexter. 
rise,  oriri,  ior,  ortus.     (See  443.) 
rival,  amulari  (dat.  or  ace), 
river,  Jlumen,  amnit,  Jiuvius,  472,  0. 
rob,  spoliare  (abl.). 
rod,  rirga,])l. 

rope  (=  hanging),  suspendium. 
Rome,  Roma. 
Roman,  Romanus. 
rule,  regvla. 
ruling  power,  to  be  rerum  poliri. 


8 


Safety,  sahis,  uiis. 

^Sg^tertcln,  rectus  {ace ^. 

sake  :  for  the  —  of,  causa. 

sake,  for  its  own,  propter  seat. 

salute,  salutare. 

same,  idem. 

satisfaction,  to  your,  &c,  ex  (tud)  sen- 

tenlid. 
satisfactorily,  ex  sententid. 
satisfy,  satufacere  (dat.). 
say,  dicere :  (=.  asserts)  ait. 
say  that  —  not,  negare. 
say :  not  to  say,  ne  dicam. 
say:  they  (=  people)  say, fcrunt. 
say :  as  they  say,        )    ,     •     , 
saying :  as  the  —  is,  $ 
Bays  he,  >.nauit. 
sauce,  conaimentum. 
scarcely,  vix. 
sea,   mare.     By  sea   and  land,   terra 

marique. 
season,  tempestas. 
seasoning,  condimentum 
second,  alter. 
aedition,  seditio. 
eec,   videre ;  (=  distinguish  ;  have  the 

sense  of  sight)  ccrncre. 
see  that  you  don't,  vide  ne. 
see  (plainly)  through  (any  thing),  ali- 

quid  perspectum  hablre,  36 1. 
see ;  do  you  see  to  that,  id  tu  tideris. 
fcjem,  zideri,  vtius. 

15* 


seize  on,  incessere  (at  fear,  «4c),  229. 
self,    selves.      (See    368.)     I    mysti/, 

ipse,  33. 
sell,  vendere  (tendid,  rendit). 
sell,  neut.  venire  (veneo),  267. 
senate,  senatus. 
send,  mittere,  mis,  miss. 
send  forward,  pramittere. 
send  (news  by  letter),  pcrscribere. 
send  to  the  assistance  of,  auxdio  mU> 

tere  (two  datives). 
sentence,  senientia. 
serpent,  serpens. 
serve  a  campaign,  stipendium  merert^ 

or  mcreri,  309. 
serves,  est  (with  dat.  2S7). 
service,  to  be  of,  prodesse  (dat.). 
serviceable,  idoneus. 
sesterce,  sestertius. 
set  on  fire,  incendere,  succendere.    See 

299. 
set  out,  prqficisci,fectu8. 
set  out   to   the  assistance  of,   ciLxilit 

profcisci  (two  datives). 

5M£:J  *— «** 

several,  plures. 

several  times,  420. 

severe,  gravis:  gravior,  409,  g. 

severity,  gratitas. 

shadow,  umbra. 

shed,  prof  under  e,f ud,  f us. 

should,  =  ought,   debere,   oportet,  126 

or  (after  Exerc.  49,  Pt.  I.)  part 

in  dm,  326,  327. 
show  (myself  brave),  prabere. 
Sicily,  Sicilia. 
sick,    aiger,  gra,  grum:  (of   body  or 

mind)  agrotus. 
side,  to  be  on  our,  a  nobis  stare. 
siege,  obsidio. 
edlence,    silcnlium:  (habit  of)  tacitur- 

7iitas. 
silent,  tacitus:  (habitually)  tacit *urr.n% 
silent,  to  be,  silcre,  tacere.     See  299. 
silver,  argaitum. 
sin,  peccare. 

since,  quum,  quoniam,  492 
sister,  soror. 
size,  magnitudo. 
Bkilled  in,  peritus  (gen.). 
slaughter,  trucidare. 
slave,  serrus. 

slave,  to  be  the,  servire  (dat.). 
slay,  occidere,  cm/,  cis. 
sleep,  aomnus. 

smack  of,  redoiere  (ace.),  )  9AK 
smell  of,  ollre,  $  ***• 

snatch  away,  cripere,  ripu,  rept  (dat  oi 

pers.). 
snares,  insidia:. 


346 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


enow,  nix,  mvis. 

bo  near  home,  tampropea  domo. 

m.     The  thing  is,  so,  res  ita  se  habet. 

Socrates,  Socrates,  Gen.  is. 

sold,  to  be,  venire  (veneo),  267. 

some,   aliquis,    quispiam,    392.      See 

nc  te  x.  and  390,  v. 
some  one  or  other,  nescio  quis,  394. 
some  body  of  consequence,  aliquis,  396. 
some  other  place,  to,  alio.  394. 
some  other  place,  from,  aliunde. 
some  other  direction,  in,  alio. 
some  other  direction,  from,  aliunde. 
some  considerable,  aliquantum. 
some  —  others,  alii  —  alii. 
sometimes    nonnunquam,    aliquando, 

interdum.     See  402.* 
comewhat.      Omit,    and    put  adj.   in 

compar.  408 :  or  translate  by  paulo 

with  compar. 
sorry :  I  am  —  for,  piget  me  (gen.). 
soul,  animus. 
sow,  serere,  sev,  sat. 
Spain,  Hispania. 
spare,  parcere,  peperc  (dat.). 
speak,  loqui,  locutus. 
speak  the  truth,  verum  dicere. 
spear,  hasta. 
speech,  oratio,  249. 
spend  his  life,  vitam  agere. 
spend  his  time  (in),  tempus  impendgre, 

337. 
spoken  ill  of,  to  be,  mahaudire. 
sport :    to    make  —  of,    Uludere,    lus 

(dat.). 
stand  in  need  of,  egere  (gen.  abl.). 
stand  by,  adesse  (dat.). 
6tar,  stella,  See  51. 
stay  (in  a  place),  commorari. 
Btarvation,3faraes. 
state,  respublica. 
stick,  bacillum. 

stir  out  of  the  city,  urbe  excedere,  249. 
stone,  lapis,  adj.  lapideus. 
storm,  oppugnare  (ace). 
storm,  to  take  by,  per  vim  expugnare. 
strange,  mirus. 
strength,  vires,  turn. 
strip  off,  exuere. 

strive,  niti,  eniti,  nisus,  nixus,  ut. 
struck  (by  stones,  lightning,  &c),  ictus. 
Study,  studere  (dat.). 
subject  to,  obnoxius  (dat.). 
succeed  (  =  follow),  excipcre  (ace.). 
roccessfully,  ex  sententia. 
succour,  succurere  (dat.). 


such,  talis. 

such  is  your  temperance,  qua3  tua  m 

temperantia,  56. 
such  a  manner,  in,  ita  (ut). 
suffer,  sinere,  siv ;  pati,  passu*.     See 

532. 
suggestion,  at  your,  te  auctore. 
suitable,  idoneus,  212. 
sun,  sol. 

superior,  to  be,  >  antecellere,  preestare, 
surpass,  $     229. 

superstition,  superstitio. 
supper,  cosna. 
support  (  =  nourish),  alere,  alu,  alit,  cr 

alt. 
surround,  circumdHre  (urbem  muro,  or 

murum  urbi). 
survive,  superesse. 
survivor,  super stes,  it  is. 
suspense,   to  be  in  anxious,  pendere 

animi,    animo    (or    if  necessary, 

animis. 
suspicion,  suspicio. 
swallow,  hirundo,  dinis 
swear,  jurare. 
Syracuse,  Syracuse. 


Take,t    capere    (cep,    capt)  :     swnere 

(sums,  sumpt).     See  492. 
take  by  storm,  expugnare. 
take  in  good  part,  boni  consulere,  185. 
take  away,  adimere,  eximere.  See  385, 

0  (em,  empt) :  eripere  (dat.  of  pers.). 
take   measures  against,    consulere  in 

(ace.). 
take  cruel  measures  against,  crudelitei 

in  (aliquem)  consulere. 
take  a  camp,  exuere  hostes  caslris,  233 
Pake  care,  cavere,  cav,  caut. 
take  care  that,  vide  (ne). 
take  under  one's  protection,  tueri,  374. 
take  hold  of ,  prehendere. 
teach,  docere,  two  ace.  257. 
teach  to  play  on  the  lyre,  Jidibus  docen 

(i.  e.  teach  with  or  on  the  string**). 
teacher,  magister  ;  fern,  magistra. 
temple,  templum. 
tenacious,  tenax  (gen.). 
tend,  to,  335,  c. 
terrify,  terrere.  ■ 
territory,  ager. 
thank,  gratias  agere. 
that  (after  doubt,  deny,  &c.  with  neg.) 

quin. 


*  Rarius  interdum  quam  nonnunquam  esse  memento, 
t  Take  arms,  arma  capere,  or  sumere.     (Cicero.} 


i.\DEX  I.   —ENGLISH. 


347 


(feat  (after  fear),  ne ;  tliat — not,  ut  (or 

ne  non). 
that,  as  nom.  to  'is,'  &c,  agrees  with 

nom.  after  it,  386,  in. 
that  famous,  Ule,  381. 
that  (after  '  it  remains,'  i  it  follows '),  ut. 
laat  too,  tt  is ;  idemque,  )  ^ft- 
that  too  not,  nee  is,  $  6°°' 

thai  only,  is  demum,  385. 
Thebes,  Thebes,  arum. 
then  (  =  at  that  time),  turn. 
then  (  =  after),  dcinde,  inde. 
then  (  =  therefore),  igitur,  itaque. 
there,  ibi. 

there  is  no  doubt,  non  est  dubium  fjuin. 
there  are  some  who  (think),  sunt  qui 

(pident). 
there  are  not  wanting,  non  desunt  qui 

(subj.). 
there  are  found  some  who,  reperiuntur 

qui  (subj.). 
think,  censere,  putare,   cxLstimare,  ar- 

bitrari,  See  257. 
think  nothing  of,  nUiili  facere,  266. 
thigh,  femur,  oris,  n. 

A  thing  which  (referring  to  a 

preceding    sentence),     id    quod  : 

sometimes,  quce  res,  36. 
thirst  for,  sitir.e,  ace,  240. 
this  being;  the  case,  qum  quum  ita  sint. 
thousand,  mUle,  adj. ;  pi.  millia,  subst. 
threaten,  minari.     See  end  of  222. 
three  hundred,  trecenti. 
three  days,  space  of,  triduum. 
three  years,  space  of,  triennium. 
through,  expressing  the  cause,  sign  of 

abl. 
throw  before,  projice're,  jec,  ject   (see 

75,  !.). 
throw  off;  exuere. 
till,  colere,  colu,  cult. 
till,  donee,  dum,  quoad,  507,  Ac. 
time,  at  that,  id  temvoris. 
time- :  at  the  time  of  the  Latin  Games, 

Ludis  Latinis. 
time,  for  a  lontr,  dudum,  diu,  jamdu- 

dum,  4c.  See  420. 
times,  tw  >  or  three  ( =  several  times),* 

bis  tcrque. 
times,  two  or  three  ( =  not  more  than),* 

bit  terre. 
times,  many  times  as   great,  multis 

partibus  major. 
limid,  timidus. 

tired  :  am  —  of,  ttcdet  me  (gen.). 
ro  death  (after  condemn),  capitis. 
to  no  purpose,  nequicquam,  frustra. 

See  33. 


to  each  other  vafter  contrary,  compare^ 

inter  se. 
toija,  toga. 

together  (after  to  compare),  inter  se. 
to-morrow,  eras. 
tongues  :  to  hold  their  — ,  299. 
too  much,   nimius  (nimius  somnus,  oi 

nimium  somni). 
too  dear,  nimio. 

top  of,  summits,  (adj.     See  179). 
torch,  taida. 
tortured  :  to  be  —  in  mind,  discrucian 

animi. 
towards,  adversus,erga,  470:  in,  281. 
treachery,  proditio. 
treason,  proditio. 
treaty,  faedus,  eris. 
tribune,  tribunus. 
triumph,  triumphus. 
triumph  in,  per  triumphum  (ducere). 
triumph:  gain  a  —  for  a  victory  over 

the  Gauls,  de  Gallis  triumphare. 
troublesome,  molestus. 
Troy,  Troja. 

true :  it  is  — but,  Ule  quidein — sed,  383. 
truly,  vere. 
trustworthy,  fdelis. 
truth,  Veritas. 

turn  back,  reverter e,  reverti,  339. 
turn  out,  evadere,  vas. 
turn  it  into  a  fault,  vitio  vertex,  242. 

<2>-    „ 
Tuscan,  Tuscus. 

two  days,  space  of,  biduum. 


U. 


Unacquainted  with,  rudis  (gen.). 
unbecoming,  it  is,  dedeceL(acc.). 
unburied,  inhumatus. 
under  favour,  bond  tud  venid. 
under  such  an  age,  306. 
understand,  intelligere,  lex,  lect. 
undertake,  susci])ere :  ( =  engage  to  doj 

recipere. 
undertake  to  corrupt,  corrumpenduM 

suscipere. 
unexpectedly,  de  improviso. 
unfriendly,  inimicus. 
unless,  nisi,  451. 
unless  indeed,  nisi  vero,  or  forte 
unless  I  am  mistaken,  nisimefallit. 
unlike,  dissimilis  (dot.). 
unmindful,  immemor  (gen.). 
unskilled  in,  imperltus  (gen.). 
unteach,  dedocere;  (tico  uccu*.) 
unwilling,  to  be,  nolle. 


*  Bis  teiique  augebit,  minuet  Bin  tkbve  notaiuvi. 


B46 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


unwilling      ]imfiilUm 

unwillingly,  $  """*<**• 

unworthy,  indignus  (abl.). 

use,  uti  (usus),  abl. 

use,  make  a  bad —  of,  male  uti  (abl). 

use,  make  a  perverse  —  of,  perverse  uti 

(abl.). 
useful,  utilis,  212. 
useless,  inutilis,  212. 
utter  many  falsehoods,  multa  mentiri 

(de),  38. 


V. 


Vain,  in.  necquicquam ;  frustra  (See 
33). 

value,  cestimare,  264. 

valuable,  pretiosus. 

very  (with  superl.),  vel,  410. 

very  many,  permulti. 

very  much,  permulta. 

very  little,  perpauca. 

very,  to  be  translated  by  magnus  or 
summus,  when  the  adj.  after  '  very ' 
is  translated  by  a  subst.  •  Is  very 
honorable,'  '  magno  honori  est,'  242. 

vice,  vitium. 

violence,  vis. 

virtue,  virtus,  virtutis. 

virtuous,  honestus. 

virtuously,  honeste. 

visit  (on  business),  adire ;  (as  a. friend) 
visere;  (on  business,  or  not)  con- 
venire.    See  249. 

voyage,  to  have  a  prosperous,  ex  sen- 
tentid  navigare. 


W. 


Wage,  gerere,  gess,  gest. 

wait,  manere. 

wait  for,  expectare,  opperiri,  prccslolari, 

See  229. 
wait  upon,  convenire  (ace). 
walk,  ambulare. 
wall,  murus ;  (of  a  walled  city)  mcenia, 

pi. ;  (of  a  house)  paries,  etis :  (of  a 

garden,  Ac.)  maceria. 
wanting  to  be,  deesse  (dat.). 
war,  in,  bello. 

warn,  monere  (ut,  ne).  See  p.  222,  note, 
washed,  to  be  (of  an  island),  circum- 

fundi,  fusus. 
watch  over,  cavere,  can,  caut  (dat.). 
water,  aqua. 
*rave,Jluctu8,  its. . 
way,  in  such  a,  ita  (u£\. 
*eorv,  am,  tesdet  me  (gen.). 


weight,  onua,  eris. 

well,  bene :  (  =  rightly),  rede. 

whatever,    quicquid,   neut.    as  subat. 

quicunque  (adj.). 
wheat,  triticum. 
when,  quum,  quando,  105.  (  =  as  soon 

as)  ubi,  ut,  512. 
whence,  unde. 
where,  ubi. 
where  you  are,  istic;from  where  you 

are,  istinc ;  to  where,  &  c.  istuc. 
where  in  the  world,  ubi  or  ubinam 

gentium. 
whether— or  (of  two  statements  left 

doubtful),  sive — sive  :  seu—seu. 
whether  (in  double  dependent  ques- 
tions), see  118, 119;  num  (in  singh 

dependent  questions), 
which  (of  two),  uter. 
whip  with  rods,  virgis  ca.dere ;  cectd, 

UBS. 

white,  albus. 

whither,  quo. 

why,  cur,  quare,  105. 

whole,  totus,  universus.     (See  179  ) 

will,  against  my,  invitus.    Against  the 

will  of  Gaius,  invito  Caio. 
willing  to  be,  vclle. 
wind,  ventus. 
wine,  vinum. 
winter  (as  adj.),  hibernus. 
wisdom,  sapientia. 
wise,  sapiens. 
wish,  velle,  142. 
wish  well  to,  cupere  alicui. 
with,  cum. 

with,  after,  Ho  do?  de. 

with,  after  '  to  make  a  beginning?  a,  ab. 

f in  the  house  of,     1         , ,       N 

in  the  mind  of/        ?S*f® 

with=JinthefeStimationS(-^- 

linthepresenceofj      valere^ 

without,  sine  ;  or  adj.  expers  (gen.). 

without,  to  be,  care're  (abl.). 

without  being  heard,  inauditus,  a,  um. 

without :  before  partic.  subst.,  non,  or 
some  other  negative,  with  parti- 
ciple, 363,  c.  neque.  ut  non.  quin. 
520. 

without,  after  nunquam  and  before 
particip.    subst.   quin  with  subj^ 

'wolf,  lupus. 

wonder  at,  admirari. 

wonderful,  mirus. 

wont,  to  be,  solere,  solitu*  sum. 

wool,  lana. 

word,  verbunn. 

word  for  word,  ad  verbum. 

worship,  to,  cdere,  colu,  culL 


INDEX  I. ENGLISH. 


349 


world,  murulus:  orbis  terrec  or  terra- 
rum.  « 
world,  in  the  (after  supcrl.),  vcl,  410. 
worthy,  dignus  (abl.). 
would  have  been  (better),   >  fuit,  not 
would  be  (tedious,  &c),      $  futsset. 
wound,  ruin  us,  cria. 
Wound,  ferire,  iccre,  299. 
wretched,  miter,  a,  um. 


write  (news),  jyeracribci-t. 


Y. 

Yesterday,  heri. 
young,  juvenis. 
youth  (=  time  of),  juventvs,  mis;  jn 

vent*. 
youth  fss  body  of),  jiivcntfo.    Sou  339 


INDEX    II. 

LATIN,  AND  CRITICAL  REMARKS. 


Words  followed  by  (s)  are  distinguished  from  their  synonymes. 


A,  ab,  abs,  348. 

ab  hinc :  not  with  ordinals.  Place  of, 
abhinc,  305. 

a  nobis  stare ;  facere ;  sentire,  348. 

a  manu  servus,  348. 

abdicare  magistratum,  or  se  magis- 
tral, 308. 

abesse  (s),  227,  r.  (propius). 

ac,  atque  (s),  4,  d. 

accedit  (hue  —  quod  or  ut),  513. 

accendere  (s),  299,  h. 

accidere  (s),  374,  d. 

accipere  (s),  299,  h. 

accusative  of  the  personal  pronoun 
seldom  omitted  before  the  infin,  ex- 
cept after  fateri,  dicere,  opinari,  &c. 
p.  55,  s. 

acies  (s),  348,  t. 

actum  est  de,  59. 

adesse  (s),  227,  q. 

adimere  (s),  385. 

adire  (s),  294,  k. 

adjuvare  (s),  222,  k. 

adspergere  aliquid  alicui,  or  aliqucm 
aliqua  re,  233. 

redes  (s),  356,  y. 

a;qualis,  212,  x. 

requi  boni  facere,  185*. 

reternus  (s),  p.  49,  c. 

ait  esse  paratus,  149,  c. 

ales  (s),  480,  u. 

aliquando  (s),    *\aqo 

ahquantum  (s),   \ 

aiiud  —  aliud,  38. 

aliud  alio  (fertur),  <tOC,  d. 

am  are  (s),  p.  68,  a. 

ambulatum  est,  296. 

amittere  (s),  56,  n. 

munis  (s),  472,  o. 

wncsnus  (s),  212,  v. 


an,  in  single  questions,  120,  f. 

an  non  (s),  122,  b. 

an  quisquam  ,1  p.  139,  c 

anima,  -us  (s),  92,  c. 

apparere  (s),  150,  vv. 

appellare  (s),  51,  i 

aptus  (s),  212. 

astrum  (s),  51. 

audis  seu  Jane,  272,  p. 

aut  (s),  456. 

auxiliari  (s),  222,  k. 

ave  (s),  281,  s. 

avere  (s),  420. 

avis  (s),  480,  u. 


B. 

Beatus  (s),  443. 

bibere  (s),  273,  k. 

bisterque,  ?42ft  + 

bisterve,    \qZU'r 

bona  tua  venia,  428. 

boni  consulere,  185. 

but  after  nemo,  nullus,  &c.  41. 


C. 


cad  ere  (s),  299,  i. 

callere  (s),  335. 

capere  (s),  492. 

caput  feritur  alicui,  294  (b). 

carere  (s),  273,  h. 

caritas  (s),  281,  r. 

cave  pures,  539. 

cavere  alicui ;  aliqueni ;  sibi ;  ab  aii 

quo,  233. 
censere  (s),  257,  x. 
certiorem  facere,  187. 


t  Bis  theque  augebit,  minuet  bis  tkrve  notaturn. 


INDEX   II. LATIN. 


351 


charge  in  the  ace.  if  expressed  by  a 

neut.  pron.,  15)4. 
dreomdara  orbem  muro,  >  939 
circuinda.ru  inuruin  urbi,    $ 
civiTAS  in  appos.  to  the  plural  name  of 

a  people :    Carmonenses,   qua  est 

cicilas,  133,  k. 
claudus  altera  pede,  276. 
coopi  (s),  150,  x. 
coeptus  est,  150,  x. 
comes  (s),  185,  z. 
eomissatio  (s),  428,  b. 
committere  ut,  479. 

COMPARATIVE  of  an  ADVERB,  p.  37,  V. 

compilare,  257,  g. 
CMiiponcre  (s),  222,  r. 
concessum  est  (s),  124,  d. 
conditional  forms  of  Vie  infin.,  p. 

160,  x. 
conferre  (s),  222,  r. 
consequence  in  perf.  sub),  for  im- 

perf.,  418.t 
consors  (s),  185,  z. 
consulere  alicui :  in  aliquem,  233. 
contendere  (s),  222,  r. 
contingere  (s),  374,  d. 
convenire  (s),  249,  f. 
convivium  (s),  423,  b. 
creber  (s),  410,  n. 
crederes,  426. 
eredor  (when  right),  474,  r. 
cruor,  229,  f. 

cujus  es  temperantioe,  56. 
culpa  (s),  242,  g. 
cuncti  (s),  443. 
cupere  (s),  420. 
cur  (s),  105,  f. 
curare  aliquid  facieaium,  351. 


damnare  voti,  votis,  201,  8. 

damnare  capitis,  201. 

damnor  a  noUnte  esse  bono,  not  Ltatiw 
152,  y. 

dapes  (s),  428,  b. 

de  facie  nosse,  i 

de  improviso,  >  521. 

de  industria,     } 

debere  (s),  126,  f. 

deesse  (s),  227,  r. 

defendere,  374. 

delictum  (s),  428,  c 

demonstrative  pron.  sometimes  ex- 
pressed after  quin,  p.  30,  note  e. 
See  88,  (a). 


desitus  est,  150,  y. 
desperately  229. 

deterior  (s),  410. 

dicere  (s),  177,  q. 

diligere  (s),  p.  68,  a. 

diu  (s),  420. 

dolere  (s),  521,  a. 

dominue  (s),  180. 

dono  dare,  242,  (3). 

donum  (sV,  242,  n. 

dubito.     See  Questions,  3  11 

duduin  (s),  420. 

dulcis,  211,  v. 

dum,  494. 

dunimodo  (ne),  494. 


E  re  mea  est,  542. 

ec'    .      I  400  e 
ecquis,    $  4W'  e> 

edera  (s),  257. 

egere  (si  273,  h. 

ego  eredor,  token  comet,  474,  r. 

eo  insolentia?,  512. 

epulae  (s),  428,  b. 

ergo,  with  gen.,  207. 

esse  honori  alicui,  242. 

est  infinitum,  426. 

et  is  (idem,  &c),  385. 

evenire,  374,  d. 

ever,  how  translated,  p.  141,  k. 

ex  pedibus  laborare,  542. 

excedere  urbe,  orbem,  244,  q. 

excipere  (s),  299,  a. 

eximere  (s),  385. 

expilare  (s),  257,  g. 

exspectare  (s),  227,  z. 


fac  ut,  539. 

facere  de,   291 ;     facere  nou  \ 

quin,  89. 
facturos  pollicentur,  149,  c. 
fallere  (s),  38,  z. 
fallit  me,  209. 
familiariter  uti,  456. 
fanum  (s),  356,  V. 
fari  (s),  177,  q. 
fas  est,  124,  d. 
faustus  (s),  443. 
felix  (s),  443. 


t  Potius  dixerim,  ubi  de  re  prseterita  agatur,  perfectum  subjunctivi  niig'u 
tventumfacti  spectare ;  imperfectum  mentem  et  consilium  agentis.     GBntber. 


;if)2 


INDEX  II. —  LATIN. 


lestinare  (s),  177,  m 

fieri  potest  ut,  129. 

flagitare  (s),  257. 

fluvius  (s),  472,  v. 

forsitan,  494. 

fortior  quam  prudentior,  452,  w. 

frequens  (s),  410,  n. 

frustra  (s),  33,  v. 
fugit  me,  200. 
fuit  utilius,  Ac,  426. 
fundamental  rule  for  the  sequence  of 
tenses,  40. 

FUTURE  SUBJUNCT.,  41. 


G. 


gaudere  (s),  521,  a. 
gestire  (s),  420. 
srratus  (s),  212,  v. 


H. 

haeres  ex  drodante,  &c,  556. 

baud  (s),  p.  70,  h. 

baud  scio  an,  116. 

haud  scio  an  nemo,  stronger  than  haud 

scio  an   quisquam.     Is  the  latter 

form  correct?    See  note  on  Diff. 

of  Idiom,  25. 
herus  (s),  180. 
liic,  377,  Ac,  relating  to  the  more  remote 

word,  378,  h :  to  id  de  quo  ])otissi- 

mum  agimus,  378,  h  (3). 
homo  (s),  38,  y. 
hostis  (s),  221,  z. 


[cere  (s),  299,  i. 

id,  not  to  be  used  as  nom.  to  'to  be1 
when  a  subst.  fellows,  but  to  agree 
with  that  subst.,  p.  135,  m. 

Id  setatis  163,  0. 

id  quod /br  quod  only,  adds  emphasis, 
p.  27,  note  *. 

idem  ( =  also),  387. 

idem  est  qui  (or  ac,  atque),  45,  b. 

idoneus  (s),  212* ;  qui,  486. 

'gnoscere  (s),  428,  c. 

llle,  49,  377,  Ac. :  with  quidem  in  par- 
tial concessions,  followed  by  a '  but,' 
383. 

Imperare  (s),  78,  w. 

impertire  aliquid  alicui;  or  aliquem 
aliqua  re,  p.  86,  c. 

In  ante  diem,  530. 

In  dieSj  69,  t. 


incendere  (s),  299,  h. 

incipere  (s),  150,  x. 

incolumis  (s),  542. 

incumbere  rei  or  in  rem,  p.  80. 

incusare  (s),  p.  72,  m. 

indigere  (s),  257. 

induere,  233. 

inimicus  (s),  212,  z. 

infinitive,  with  participle  or  subs!,  in 

the  nom.  by  attraction,  54. 
inquit,  177,  q. 
inspergere  aliquid  alicui  or  aliquem  ali- 

iqua  re,  p.  86,  d. 
in  star :  when  to  be  used,  207. 
inter  se  conixaria.  25. 
interdum  (s),  402. 
interea  (s),  402 ;  in  neg.  sentences,  set 

note  g. 
interesse  (s),  227,  q. 
interest     Ciceronis     esse     eloquentis, 

wrong,  152,  z. 
interficere  (s),  308. 
interim  (s),  402. 
invenire  (s),  177,  o. 
ipse  (  =  exactly),  308. 
ipse,  withpers.  pron.,  when  in  the  nom., 

when  in  oblique  case,  368. 
ipse,  hardly  ever  in  the  nom.  (in  Cic.) 

after  appended  met,  p.  131,  c. 
irasci  (s),  222. 
is  sum  qui,  483. 
is  (ea,  id),  the  usual  pron.  for  the  third 

person  where  there  is  no  emphasis, 

no  distinction  to  be  marked,  37,  u. 
iste,  that  of  yours,  377  (c). 
iste,  in  letters,   refers  to  the  placi 

where  one's  correspondent  resides, 

382. 
istinc,  387. 
ita  justum,  si  est.  Ac.  451. 


J. 


jampridem  cupio,  413. 

jubere  (ace.  with  inf.;  ut  when  usea 

absolutely),  p.  80,  h. 
jucunde  vivi  non  ^otest,  504. 
jucundus  (s).  211,  v. 
juvare  (s),  222,  k. 


laetari,  521. 

latet  me,  or  mihi  (had),  259,  a 

libenter  ( =  like  to),  492. 

libertinus  )  /0v   Kfti 

libertus      JO3)'561* 

licet  (s),  124,  d. 

licet  esse  beatum,  or  beato,  153,  fc,  u 


INDEX  II. LATII*. 


35* 


fleet  {although),  451. 
lot-are  ■liquid  faciendum. 
tocare  (s),  4S0,  v. 
loqui  (s),  177,  q. 
India  I.atinis,  311. 
lugere  (s),  521,  a. 


maccria  (s),  233. 

mart.-  esto,  &c,  280,  q. 

major  annis  viiiinti,  &c  ,  Q.  on  §  42. 

male  audire,  492. 

mamlare  (s),  78,  w. 

me  (miscruni)  qui,  486, 1. 

mederi  (s),  222,  1. 

medlcina  )(  .  „--  , 

medicamentum  ]  "*  *■•*  fc 

memini  (s),  62,  q.  61,  1. 

memini  Icjrere,  426. 

mens  (s),  92,  c. 

metuere  (ne,  ut),  95 ;  s.  99,  e. 

minari  mortem  alicui,  222. 

miserari      ) 

misereri       V  (s),  201,  r. 

miseret  me  ) 

modo,  494. 

moenia  (s),  233. 

mcerere  (s),  521, 

monere  t,  ut;  ne;  ace.  with  inf.,  189,  k. 

monere  (s),  222,  i. 

miinus  (s),  212,  h. 

murus  (s),  233. 


N. 


nam  appended  tointerrogatives,  p.  140, 

398. 
ne  quia  (not,    ut ' 


when  a  purpose  is 
v    expressed  withoiU 
emphasis    on   the 
negative,  80. 


nemo), 
ne  quid   (not,   ut 

nihil), 
ne  unquam   (not, 

utnunquam), . 
ne  =  that  after  verbs  of  fear,  95. 
ne  —  quidem,  185. 
ne  dicam,  443. 
necare  (s),  308. 
necesse  est,  504. 
necne  (s),  122,  b. 
nedum  (ut),  145. 
nemo  pictor,  443 :  nemlnis,  nemine 

see  note  p.  129. 


neque,  with  verb  ■  without,  520. 

miquicquam  (s),  33,  v. 

nescio  quis,  394. 

nescio  an,  116. 

nihil  me  terret,  443. 

nihil  habeo  quod,  477 

nihi  aliud  nisi,  185. 

nihil  aliud  quam  rident,  450. 

nisi,  451. 

nisi  forte,  or  vero,  451. 

noli  putare,  539. 

nolle  =  would  not,  541. 

nomen  est  mihi  Caio,  239. 

non  (s),  p.  70,  h. 

non  possum  quin  (for  facere  non  pos- 
sum quin ;  or,  non  possum  noil 
with  irtfin.)  should  not  be  imitated, 
[Cicero  quotes  non  possum 
quin  exclamem,  from  Plautus.] 

non  quod,  or  quo  —  sed,  492. 

non  desunt  qui  putent,  477. 

non  solum  —  verum  (or  sed)  etiam,  257. 

non  est  quod,  477. 

nonne,  102. 

nonnunquam  (s),  402. 

noscere  (s),  365. 

nostrum,  vestkum,  after  partitive*^ 
and  with  omnium,  372 

null  us  dubito,  492. 

num,  102 

nuptam  esse,  222,  m. 


O. 


ob,  in  oberro,  Ac.  =  amb,  lu<ph  248,  r. 

obedire  (s),  222. 

obire  mortem,  &c.  (s),  249,  u. 

85ST}»»U 

obviam  ire,  512. 
occidere  (b),  308. 
opera?  pretium  est,  532. 
opitulari  (s),  222,  k. 
oportet  (s),  126,  f. 
oportet  me  facere, 
oportet  (ego)  faciam, 
opperiri  (s),  229,  z. 
oppetere  mortem  (s),  249,  u. 
oppidum  (s),  63,  z. 
opprobrium  (s),   242,1. 
optare  (s),  420,  opto  ut,  p.  214. 
opus  est  (s),  126,  f.  170,  i. 
opus  est  properato,  177. 
opus  absolutum  habeo,  364 


126. 


t  Moneo,  =  to  tram  a  person  to  do  something,  sometimes  takes  Infin.  instead 
of  ut  with  subj. — Cic.  hardly  ever  uses  the  infin.  if  any  particular  subject  ia 
named  : — ratio  ivaa  monbt,  amicitias  compas ake. 


354 


TNDEX  I. LATIN. 


orare  (a),  257.* 

ORIGIN  OF  THE    PERFECT  WITH  e  HAVE  ' 
IN  MODERN    LANGUAGES,   p.  130,  a. 

as*  I  WW- 


P. 


pace  tua  dixerim,  428. 
par  (s),  212,  x. 
parere  (s),  222. 
parum  (s),  402. 
paries  (s),  233. 

PARTICIPIAL      SUBSTANTIVE,      Caution 

26.  See  also  p.  151,  e. 

PARTICIPLES  IN  RUS  AND    DUS,  §  46,  p. 

126. 

participles  of  deponent  verbs,  365. 

pasci  (s),  257,  k. 

pati  (s),  532.* 

paululum  )  f.    Ano 

puulum      \(^m- 

pejor  (s),  410. 

peef.  subj.  (for  imperf.)  in  a  conse- 
quence with  ut,  413:  in  obi.  narr. 
p.  161,  z. 

personal  pron.  expressed,  when  there 
is  a  distinction  between  two  actions 
of  the  same  person,  p.  17,  note. 

persuadere  (s),  222,  i. 

persuasum  est  mihi,  291. 

persuasissimum  habeo  (bad),  291,  z. 

petere  (s),  257.* 

pietas  (s),  281,  r. 

plerique :  plerorumque  plerarumque, 
not  found,  291. 

polliceri  (s),  17,  1. 

polliceri,  with  infin.  fat.  15,  a. 

ponere  (s),  480,  v. 

poscere  (s),  257.* 

possum  (s),  125,  e. 

post  —  annos  quam  excesserat;  or  ex- 
cessit,  310,  a.  514. 

posthabere  aliquid  alicui,  227. 

postquam,  512. 

postulare  (s),  257.* 

potare,  257,  k. 

potential  v   451      _ 

potestas  $  W»  *°1# 

potestatem  sui  facere,  451. 

S^  }-»***• 

praemium  (s),  242. 
praesens,  )  997 

praesen tern  esse,  )       '  "' 
Draestolari  (s),  227,  z. 
praeterit  (non  me),  259. 
prehendere  (s),  492. 
present  after  si  in  connection  withful., 
p.  146\  t. 


present  and  imperp.  passive  of  Eng- 
lish verb,  135,  e. 

present  or  perf.  subj.  in  connection 
with  infin.  where  the  general  rut 
would  require  imperf.  or  pluperf., 

pridem  (s),  420. 

prim-um,  o  (s),  83,  a. 

probrum  (s),  242,  i. 

C  pro  re  nata,  ) 

<  pro  virili,  C  542. 

(  pro  eo  ac  mereor,  3 

pro  tua  temperantia,  56. 

prcelium  (s),  348,  t. 

profugLS  (s),  276,  n. 

projicere  se  alicui  ad   pedes;    or  a\ 

alicujus  pedes,  p.  89,  note  I. 
promitto  (s),  17,  J 
properare  (s),  177,  m. 
propior,  211. 

propius  (dat.  or  ace).  512 
propius  abesse,  319. 
prosper  (s),  443. 
prospicere,  ^  900 
providere,    \ 
proxime,  512. 
proximus,  211. 
pugna  (s),  348,  t. 
purgandi  sui  causa,  334. 
putares  (you  would  have  thought),  42C. 


quae  res,  36. 

quas  quum  ita  sint,  492. 

quae  tua  est  temperantia,  56. 

quam  pro  (after  compar.),  409,  f. 

quam  nullus,  492. 

quam  ut  sit,  &c.  (after  compar.),  486. 

quam  brevissime,  &c,  410. 

quam  omitted  after  amplius,  &c,  552,  k 

SISKIN1-     See  note  u. 
quamvis,       ) 

quanta  maxima  potest  esse,  &c,  410 

quare,  105,  f. 

quasi,  494. 

queo  (s),  125,  e. 

quid  actatis,  164,  0. 

quid  facerem  ?  427,  c 

quilibet  (s),  390,  u. 

quin,  44,  3.     See  note  G,  p.  30v  and 

note  d,  p.  215. 
quin  after  verbs  of  doubting,  &c,   in 

negative  sentences,  85,  86. 
quippe  (qui),  432,  a. 
quis  est  qui  ?  477. 
quis  sum  qui  ?  483. 
quisquam,  389,  390,  (y). 
si  quisquam,  391,  w. 
quisquam :  an  est—  qui  ?  177- 


INDEX  I. LATIN. 


355 


quisque  :  doetissimus  quisque,  399. 
qui  vis  (s),  390,  u. 
quo,  U3,  without  rompar.y  p.  215,  e 
quo  amentias,  512. 

quoad  ejus,  Ac,  512. 
quod  sciam.  56. 
quominus. 
quoniam,  192. 
quot  tsiis,  dkc,  J74. 
quotidJe,  09,  t. 

■jui'iusquisque  est.  qui  (subj.),  477. 
juuin  Intorrogaretur,  not  interrogans 
esnet,  41*8. 


\l 


re  .forth,  219,  v.  (=  iPti) 
redpcre  (s),  30S,  a. 
recordari,  p  72 :  (s),  201,  q. 
red  ire  (a),  330,  p. 

relative  pronoun,  when  it  docs  not 
t  with  its  proper  antecedent,  48. 
remedium  (s),  257,  J. 
reminlsci  (s),  201,  q. 
reperire  (s),  177,  o. 
reperiuntur,  <fcc,  qui,  477. 
red  ita  se  habet,  451. 

ream  facere,  187. 
reus,  ita  meaning,  188,  f. 
revenire  ) ,  »  .3™  „ 
rcverti     \  ^  339>  P- 
rivus  (s),  472,  v. 
rogare  (s),  257.* 


S. 

salutare  (s),  249,  f. 

salve  (s),  281,  s. 

salvus  (s),  542. 

eana re  (s),  22 

tanguli  (s),  299,  f. 

Bapiendor  Caio,  )  4n- 

sapientior  quam  Caius,  $       ' In* 

fiatis,  512. 

satius,  ex.  34. 

seel  us  (s),  243,  g. 

scire  (s),  385. 

se  often  inserted  by  Cic.  after  velle,  p. 

55,  r. 
secundum  aliqucm  decerncre,  504. 
securus  (s),  542. 
stinpiternus  (s),  123,  c. 
sensit  delapsus,  149,  u. 
sententia  (ex),  17. 
ij  =  whether,  p.  158,  t. 
si  hoc  dicas,  p.  153,  h 
si  (mood),  451,  t, 
Bialiqms        >()   m  402  h 

«i  quiaquam  J  v  "        '  ' 


\  391,  w. 


81  quis, 

si  quisquam 

sive,  seu,  456,  a. 

sidus  (s),  51. 

silere  (s),  299,  g. 

similis  tui,  tibi,  212,  w.  (212,  a  ) 

siniulac,  &c,  512. 

simulare,  15  (a) ;  (s),  17,  m. 

sin  minus,  1 

sin  autem,    I  4t.. 

sin  sec  us,     f451, 

sin  aliter,     J 

sine  aliquo  or  aliqua,  when  rights  '■'■'.  '  ►,  i 

sine  omni  cura,  wiong)  391,  w. 

smere  (s),  532.* 

sodalis  >  /  x    1QK  . 

socius  \  (s>»  18a>  * 

spoliare  (s),  273. 

Stella  (s),  57. 

stipendium  mercri,  308. 

suadere  (s),  222,  i. 

suavis  (s),  212,  v. 

sublevare  >,  .   229  . 

subvenire  \  <s'»  ZZ~>  k' 

succendere  (s),  299,  h. 

succurrere  (s),  222,  k. 

sumere  (s),  492. 

succensere  (s),  222. 

summus  mons,  179. 

sunt  qui  putent,  45  and  477. 

superlative  and  other  adjj.  placed  \n 

the  relat.  instead  of  in  the  principal 

tlause,  53. 


tacere  (s),  299,  g. 

tanquam,  494. 

tantum  abest  ut  —  ut,  534. 

templum  (s),  356,  y. 

timere  (s),  99,  e. 

triplicem  aciem  instruere,  456. 

trucidare  (s),  308. 

-to,  -tote  {imperative  forms  fa), 

tueri,  374. 

tutus  (s),  542. 


U. 


ubi  terrarum, 


512. 


ubinam  gentium, 

universi  (s).  443. 

unquam,  402. 

ut  =  as  soon  as;  when,  512. 

ut  =  that  not,  95. 

ut  omitted,  417,  b. 

ut  ne,  when  used  for  ne,  77,  note. 

ut  quisque  —  ita,  407. 

at  ajunt,  319. 


256 


INDEX  I. Li! TIN, 


uteri j  bet  (s)  390,  u. 
utervis  (s),  390,  u. 
ufinam,  494. 
utpote  qui,  482. 


V. 

vacat  niihi,  154  :  337. 
valerc  apud  aliquem,  4G3. 
vapulare  ab  291. 

veiim  (ut)  judices,  417  I. 
veils  =  would,  541. 


velle  sibi,  242. 
veniam  dare,  428,  c 
verbi  causl,  443. 
vereri  (s),  99,  e. 
videri,  150,  w. 
vir  (b),  38,  y. 
vis,  ded.  p   69,  note  g. 
visere  (s),  249,  s. 
vitium  (s),  242,  g. 
vitio  vertere,  &c,  242. 
vix  crediderim,  428.* 
vocare  (s),  51,  i. 
voiucres  (s),  480,  u. 
vult  \  ^  e99e  Priu«H>ein,  >  ,mx 
I  esse  princcpB.         >  IWl 


THE    KKB. 


I).  APFLET0N4  00:8  PUBLICATION 

Arnold's  Greek  Course. 

lie-vised,  Corrected,  and  Improved,  by  the  Rev.  J.  A.  SPENCER, 
D.  D.,  iute  Professor  of  Latin  and  Oriental  Languages  hi  Burling- 
ton College,  X.  J. 

Fl  BST  < ;  SEEK  BOOK,  on  the  Plan  of  the  First  Latin  Book.    12mo,  254  pages. 
PRACTICAL  IlfTEODUOTIOM  TO  GREEK  PiiOSE  COMPOSITION.    12mo,  237 

pqgeo. 

\  I  >  PART  TO  TnE  ABOVE.    12mo,  243  pages. 
QREEK  KKAIUNG  BOOK.    Containing  the  substance  ofthe  Practical  Introduction  to 
ruing,  and  a  Treatise  on  the  Greek  Particles;  also,  copious  selections 

from  Greek  Authors,  with  Critical  and  Explanatory  English  Notes,  and  a  Lexicon. 

12mo,  618  pages, 

A  complete,  thorough,  practical,  and  easy  Greek  course  is  here  presented.  The  be- 
ginner commences  with  the  "  First  Book,"  in  which  the  elementary  principles  ofthe  lan- 
guage are  unfolded,  not  in  abstract  language,  difficult  both  to  comprehend  and  to  re- 
memUr,  but  as  practically  applied  in  sentences.  Throughout  the  whole,  the  pupil  Beea 
just  where  he  stands,  and  is  taught  to  use  and  apply  what  he  learns.  His  progress  is, 
therefore,  as  rapid  as  it  is  intelligent  and  pleasant  There  is  no  unnecessary  verbiage, 
nor  is  the  pupil's  attention  diverted  from  what  is  really  important  by  a  mass  of  minor 
details.  It  is  the  experience  ot  teachers  who  use  this  book,  that  with  it  a  given  amount 
k  Grammar  can  be  imparted  to  a  pupil  in  a  shorter  time  and  with  far  lesa  trouble 
than  with  any  other  text-book. 

The  "First  Book"  may  with  advantage  bo  followed  by  the  "Introduction  to  Greek 
Prose  Composition."  The  object  of  this  work  Is  to  enable  the  student,  as  6oon  as  he  can 
decline  and  conjugate  with  tolerable  facility,  to  translate  simple  sentences  after  given  <  x 
;tnd  with  given  words ;  the  principles  employed  being  those  of  imitation  and  very 
•  repetition.  It  is  at  once  a  Syntax,  a  Vocabulary,  and  an  Exercise-book.  The 
"Second  Part"  carries  the  subject  further,  unfolding  the  most  complicated  constructions, 
and  the  nicest  points  of  Latin  Syntax.    A  Key  is  provided  for  the  teacher's  use. 

The  "  Reader,"  besides  extracts  judiciously  selected  from  the  Greek  classics,  contains 
valuable  instructions  to  guide  the  learner  in  translating  and  construing,  and  a  complete 
exposition  of  the  particles,  their  signification  and  government  It  is  a  fitting  sequel  to 
the  earlier  parts  of  the  course,  everywhere  showing  (he  hand  of  an  acute  critic,  an  ac- 
complished scholar,  and  an  experienced  teacher. 

From  //,<■  Pf.v.  Pi:.  Coi.i.mav,  Professor  of  Greek  and  Latin,  Princeton,  K.J. 

-  I  can,  from  the  most  satisfactory  experience,  bear  testimony  to  the  excellence  of 
your  series  of  Text-Books  for  Schools.  I  am  in  the  daily  use  of  Arnold's  Latin  and 
Creek   I  I  consider  them  decidedly  iuperior  to  any  other  Elementary  Wockl 

la  those  languages.  • 


D.  APPLETON  <b  COSS  PUBLICATIONS. 

Csesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War. 

With  English  Notes,  Critical  and  Explanatory ;  a  Lexicon,  Geographi- 
cal and  Historical  Indexes,  a  Map  of  Gaul,  etc.     By  Rev.  J.  A. 
SPONGER,  D.  D.     12mo,  408  pages. 
In  the  preparation  of  this  volume,  great  care  has  been  taken  to  adapt  it  in  every  re- 
spect to  the  wants  of  the  young  student,  to  make  it  a  means  at  the  same  time  of  advan- 
cing him  in  a  thorough  knowledge  of  Latin,  and  inspiring  him  with  a  desire  for  further 
acquaintance  with  the  classics  of  the  language.'    Dr.  Spencer  has  not,  like  some  commen- 
tators, given  an  abundance  of  help  on  the  easy  passages,  and  allowed  the  difficult  onei 
to  speak  for  themselves.    His  Notes  are  on  those  parts  on  which  the  pupil  wants  them, 
and  explain,  not  only  grammatical  difficulties,  but  allusions  of  every  kind  in  the  text.    A 
well-drawn  sketch  of  Caesar's  life,  a  Map  of  the  region  in  which  his  campaigns  were  car- 
ried on,  and  a  Vocabulary,  which  removes  the  necessity  of  using  a  large  dictionary  and 
the  waste  of  time  consequent  thereon,  enhance  the  value  of  the  volume  in  no  small  de- 
gree. 

Quintus  Curtius : 

•  Life  and  Exploits  of  Alexander  the  Great.  Edited  and  illustrated 
with  English  Notes.  By  WILLIAM  HENRY  CROSBY.  12mo, 
385  pages. 

Curtius's  History  of  Alexander  the  Great,  though  little  used  in  the  schools  of  this 
country,  in  England  and  on  the  Continent  holds  a  high  place  in  the  estimation  of  classi- 
cal instructors.  The  interesting  character  of  its  subject,  the  elegance  of  its  style,  and  the 
purity  of  its  moral  sentiments,  ought  to  place  it  at  least  on  a  par  with  Cesar's  Commen- 
taries or  Sallust's  Histories.  The  present  edition,  by  the  late  Professor  of  Latin  in  Lat- 
hers College,  is  unexceptionable  in  typography,  convenient  in  form,  scholarly  and  prac- 
tical in  its  notes,  and  altogether  an  admirable  text-book  for  classes  preparing  for  col- 
lege. 

From  Peof.  Owen,  of  the  New  York  Free  Academy. 

"It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  add  my  testimonial  to  the  many  you  are  receiving  in 
favor  of  the  beautiful  and  well-edited  edition  of  Quintus  Curtius,  by  Prof.  "Wm.  Henry 
Crosby.  It  is  seldom  that  a  classical  book  is  submitted  to  me  for  examination,  to  which 
I  can  give  so  hearty  a  recommendation  as  to  this.  The  external  appearance  is  attractive ; 
the  paper,  type,  and  binding,  being  just  what  a  text-book  should  be,  neat,  clear,  and  du- 
rable. The  notes  are  brief,  pertinent,  scholar-like,  neither  too  exuberant  nor  too  meagre, 
but  happily  exemplifying  the  golden  mean  so  desirable  and  yet  so  very  difficult  of  at- 
tainment." 


D.  APPLET  ON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATION'S. 


Arnold's  Latin  Course 


I.  ITBST  AND  SECOND  LATIN'  BOOK  AND  PRACTICAL  GRAMMAR.     Re- 
vised and  Carefully  Corrected,  by  .J.  A.  Bmnsctajt,  D,  l).    limo,  860  peg 

O.  PRACTICAL    INTkonrClloN    TO    LATIN    PROSE    COMPOSITION 

and  carefully  corrected  by  »L  A.  Spmrosx,  I).  D.    lfeno,  866  pages. 
III.  CORNELIUS  NEPOS.     With  QoestfcHM  and  Answers,  and  an  Imitative  Exercise 
on  each  Chapter.     WithNotes  by  K.  A.  Johnson.  Professor  of  Latin,  in  I'ni- 
:y  Of  Hew  York.     Bow  edition,  enlarged,  with  a  Lexieon,  Historical  and 
Geographical  Index,  etc.    12mo,  350  pages. 


Arnold's  Classical  Series  has  attained  a  circulation  almost  unparalleled,  having  been 
introduced  into  nearly  all  the  leading  educational  institutions  in  the  United  States. 
Tho  secret  of  this  success  is,  that  the  author  has  hit  upon  the  true  system  of  teaching 
the  ancient  languages.  lie  exhibits  them  not  as  dead,  but  U  living  tongues:  and  by 
imitation  and  repetition,  the  means  which  Nature  herself  points  out  to  the  child  learn- 
ing his  mother-tongue,  he  familiarizes  the  student  with  the  idioms  employed  by  tho 
elegant  writers  and  speakers  of  antiquity. 

The  First  and  Second  Latin  Book  should  be  put  into  the  hands  of  the  beginners,  who 
will  soon  acquire^ front  its  pages  a  better  idea  of  the  language  than  could  be  gained  by 
months  of  study  according  to  the  old  system.  The  reason  of  this  is,  that  every  thing 
has  a  practical  bearing,  and  a  [principle  is  no  sooner  learned  than  it  is  applied.  The  pupil 
is  at  once  set  to  work  on  ex. 

The  Prose  Composition  lorms  an  excellent  sequel  to  the  above  work,  or  may  be 

rith  any  other  course.     It  teaches  the  art  of  writing  Latin  more  correctly  and 

thoroughly,  more  easily  and  pleasantly,  than  any  other  work.     In  its  pages  Latin  syuo. 

:   fully  illustrated,  differences  of  idioms  noted,  cautions  as  to  common  errors 

impressed  on  the  mind,  and  every  help  afforded  toward  attaining  a  pure  and  flowing 

Latin  style. 

■i  y.  Whdub,  Principal  of  Worcester  County  High  School. 

"In  the  skill  with  which  he  sets  forth  the  idiomatic  /»  rnlltirUlrx.  as  well  as  in  the 
directness  and  simplicity  with  which  he  states  the  facts  of  the  ancient  iBDgUag 
Arnold  has  no  superior. "  I  know  of  no  books  so  admirably  adapted  to  awaken  an  inter- 
e*t  in  the  study  of  the  language,  or  so  well  fitted  to  lay  the  foundation  of  a  correct  schol- 
arship and  refined  ta 

From  A.  B.  Russell,  Oakland  High  School. 

"  The  style  in  which  the  books  are  got  tip  are  not  their  only  recommendation.     With 

thorough  instruction  on  the  part  of  the  teacher  using  these  books  as  text-books,  I  am 

confident  a  much  more  amok  return  for  the  time  and  labor  bestowed  by  our  youth  upon 

Latin  must  be  secured.    The  time  certainly  has  come  when  an  advance  must  be  made 

•  •  old  methods  of  instruction.    I  am  glad  to  have  a  work  that  promises  so  many 

LrnokTs  First  and  Second  Latin  Book  to  beginners." 

C.  If.  Blake,  Classical  TeacJier,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  am  much  pleased  with  Arnold's  Latin  Books.  A  class  of  my  older  boys  have  Just 
finished  the  First  and  Second  Book.  They  had  studied  Latin  lor  a  long  time  before, 
but  never  understood  it,  they  say,  as  they  do  now." 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.* S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Harkness's  Elements  of  Latin  Grammar. 

This  work  is  intended  especially  for  those  who  do  not  contemplate' 
a  collegiate  course,  but  it  may  be  successfully  used  in  any  school  where, 
for  special  reasons,  a  small  grammar  is  deemed  desirable.  The  beginner 
needs  to  store  his  mind  at  the  outset  with  the  laws  of  the  language  in 
such  forms  of  statement  as  he  can  carry  with  him  throughout  his  whole 
course  of  study.  The  convenience  and  interest  of  the  student  in  this 
regard  have  been  carefully  consulted  in  the  preparation  of  this  manual. 
All  the  paradigms,  rules,  and  discussions,  have  been  introduced  in  the 
exact  language  of  the  author's  Grammar,  by  which  it  may  at  any  time 
be  supplemented.  While,  therefore,  in  many  schools  this  work  will  be 
found  a  sufficient  Latin  Grammar,  it  may  be  used  in  others,  either  as 
preparatory  to  the  larger  Grammar,  or  in  connection  with  it. 

No  separate  references  to  this  volume  will  ever  be  needed  in  editions 
of  Latin  authors,  as  the  numbering  of  the  articles  is  the  same  as  in  the 
larger  Grammar. 


From  Pres.  Cobleigit,  Tennessee  Wesley- 
an  University. 

"  This  work  is  very  timely.  I  regard 
it  as  indispensabie  in  inany  schools  in  the 
South." 

From  Prof.  W.  II.  Toting,   Ohio   Uni- 
versity. 

"  I  most  heartily  commend  this  work. 
I  have  for  some  time  felt  its  need.  It 
seems  to  make  your  Latin  course  com- 
plete." 

From  Prof.  C.  G.  IItxdson,  Genesee  Wes- 
leyan  Seminary,  Lima,  N.  Y. 

"  T  can  heartily  recommend  it.  I  think 
that  it  is  superior  to  all  rivals." 

From  Prof.  II.  D.  Walker,  Orangeville 
Academy,  Pa.     t 

';  In  my  opinion,  no  work  of  Professor 
flarkness  will  be  more  widely  used,  or 
more  valuable,  than  this.  It  supplies  a 
want  long  felt  by  teachers.  It  is  clear, 
thorough,  and  sufficiently  extended  for 
ordinary  students." 

From  Prof.  8.  IT.  Manley,  Cornell  Col- 
lege, Iowa. 

"  I  think  it  one  of  the  finest  compendi- 
ums  of  Grammar  I  have  ever  seen.  It 
must  prove  of  great  service  as  a  prepara- 
tory drill-book." 


From  Prof.  L.  F.  Parker,  Iowa  College. 
"I  feel  under  personal  obligation  for 
this   new  incentive   and  aid  to  classical 
study." 

From  n.  F.  Lane,  High  School,  TempU- 
ton,  Mass. 

"  It  is  exactly  adapted  to  our  wants.  - 
We  use  all  of  Harkness^  books— Gram- 
mar, Header,  and  Composition.    We  con- 
sider them  emphatically  '  the  best.' " 

From  Prof.  J.  A.  Keller,   Heidelberg 
College,  Ohio. 

"  I  was  surprised  to  find  so  full  an  out- 
line of  Latin  Grammar  comprised  within 
such  narrow  limits." 

From  Prof.  M.  B.  Brown,  Notre  -  Dame 
University. 

"In  my  opinion,  it  is  just  the  book 
which  has  long  been  needed.  It  is  a  book 
to  be  learned  entire,  and  is  complete  as  far 
as  it  goes.  Prof.  Harknoss  deserves  the 
thanks  both  of  students  and  teachers." 

From  Eev.  B.  G.  Northrop,  Secretary 
of  Board  of  Education,  Conn. 
"lam  highly  pleased  with  ITarkness's 
Elements  of  Latin  Grammar.  Its  brevity 
commends  it  for  beginners  and  for  all 
contemplating  a  partial  Latin  course  of 
study." 


'D  JoMb 


__ 


STANDARD  CLASSICAL  WORKS. 


Thncydides's  History  of  the  Peloponnesian  War,  according 
to  liie  Text  of  L.  Dindorf,  with  Notes  by  John  J.  Owen.  With 
Map.    12mo. 

Xenophon's  Memorabilia  of  Socrates.  With  Notes  and  Intro- 
duction by  R.  D.  C.  ItOBBiNS,  Professor  of  Language  in  Middle- 
bury  College.     12mo.    421  pages. 

' Anabasis.    With  Explanatory  Notes  for  the  use  of 

Schools  and  Colleges.    By  Jamb*  R..  Boise,  Professor  of  Greek 
in  the  University  of  Michigan.    12uio.    393  pages. 

Anabasis.    Chiefly  according  to  the  Text  of  L.  Din- 


dobj-,  with  Notes  by  John  J.  Owen.    Revised  Edition.    With 

Map.    l~mo. 
Cyropaedia,  according  to  the  Text  of  L.  Dindorf, 

with  Notes  by  John  J.  Owen.    12mo. 
Sophoclez's    (Edipns    Tyrannus.     With  Notes  for  the  use  of 

Scuoola   and   Colleges.     By   Uowabd  Crosby,  Professor  of 

Greek  in  the  University  of  New  York.    12mo.    138  pages. 


HEBREW   AND    SYRIAC. 

Gesenins's  Hebrew  Grammar.  Seventeenth  Edition,  with  Cor- 
rections  and  Additions,  by  Dr.  E.  Rodiger.  Translated  by  T. 
J.  Conant,  Professor  of  Hebrew  in  Rochester  Theological  Semi- 
nnry,  New  York.     8vo.    3G1  pages. 

TJlilemanii's  Syriac  Grammar.  Translated  from  the  German. 
P>y  ENOcn  IIuTcniNsoN.  With  a  Course  of  Exercises  in  Syriac 
Grammar,  and  a  Crcstomnthy  and  brief  Lexicon  prepared  by 
tho  Translator.    8vo.    867  pages. 


D.  APPLLTON  &  00.,    549  A,  551   BROADWAY,  M.    T., 

1TBIISH    UPWAED   OF 

300    SCHOOL    TEXT-BOOKS, 

Inc'nrlH"  tVr«  "Departments  of  Ki>jrlish,  Lntin,  Greek,  French,  Span- 
ish, ltali.ui,  Hebrew,  and  Syriac;  of  which  a  complete 

DESCRIPTIVE    CATALOGUE 

VW  be  sent,  free  of  -postage,  to  those  applying  for  it. 

A  finale  ropy  for  examination,  of  any  of  the  works  marked 
thus  *.  will  he  transmitted  by  mail,  poptape  prepaid,  to  any  Teach- 
er remittitur  one-half  of  its  price.  Any  of  the  oilier*  will  be  sent 
by  mail,  postage  prepaid,  upon  receipt  of  full  retail  price. 


